JP7727209B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

Regarding gaming machines.

In a slot machine, a game begins when a predetermined number of medals are inserted and the start lever (start signal) is operated. Multiple rows of reels with multiple symbols arranged around the periphery begin to spin. When the spinning is stopped by a stop button (stop button), if a predetermined symbol combination (e.g., a winning combination such as "777") is lined up on a winning line, the slot machine typically transitions to a special game state (a game state in which the probability of winning a small prize or other prize is increased compared to normal gameplay) that is more profitable for the player than the normal game state. In slot machines, special images or other elements to enhance the game's enjoyment may be displayed on a display such as an LCD screen in sync with the reel's rotation and stopping motion. Many slot machines are designed so that when the stop button is operated, the player can predict the outcome by comparing the symbols displayed on the reels with the special images or other elements displayed on the display. Additionally, many gaming machines are configured so that if any abnormality occurs, an error can occur that will stop the game from progressing.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2022-067312 Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2021-029882 JP 2018-153340 A Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2021-171423

There is a demand for gaming machines that allow players to play smoothly.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (F4) is
A housing body (such as housing body KM),
a front door (such as a front door DU) provided on the housing body in an openable and closable manner;
a predetermined board (such as a main control board M) provided on the housing main body side;
A specific board (such as a sub-control board S) that is a board provided on the front door side;
A predetermined harness (such as harness HN) connected to the predetermined board and the specific board
and,
A protective member (such as a hook tube HT) wrapped around a portion of the specified harness
and,
The predetermined holding member that holds the predetermined harness and the specific holding member (first clamp C
P10, second clamp CP12, etc.),
the predetermined holding member is attached to the housing main body side,
the specific holding member is attached to the front door side,
the predetermined holding member is capable of rotational displacement by a predetermined angle based on the attached position,
This is a gaming machine characterized in that the specific holding member is configured so that it cannot be rotated or displaced by the specified angle based on the attached position.

The gaming machine according to this aspect has the effect of providing a gaming machine that allows players to play smoothly.

FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine according to a first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine according to the first embodiment with the door open. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the inside of the medal insertion slot in the slot machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 4 is a front view and a top view of the medal payout device in the slot machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 5 is a list of basic specifications of the slot machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 6 is a list of reel arrangements in the slot machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 7 is a symbol combination list 1 in the slot machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 8 is a symbol combination list 2 in the slot machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 9 is a symbol combination list 3 in the slot machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a list of condition devices in the slot machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 11 is a list of small winning combinations, replay winning combinations, and bonus appearance rates in the slot machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the overall electrical configuration of the slot machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 13 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the slot machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the setting change device control process on the main control board side in the slot machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the processing of an unrecoverable error on the main control board side in the slot machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (first page) on the main control board side in the slot machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (second page) on the main control board side in the slot machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third page) on the main control board side in the slot machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the internal lottery execution process on the main control board side in the slot machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the process of adding the number of games on the main control board side in the slot machine according to the first embodiment. Figure 21 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control processing (first page) on the main control board side in the slot machine of the first embodiment. Figure 22 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control processing (second page) on the main control board side in the slot machine of the first embodiment. Figure 23 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control processing (third page) on the main control board side in the slot machine of the first embodiment. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the condition device number management process on the main control board side in the slot machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the reel rotation start preparation process on the main control board side in the slot machine according to the first embodiment. Figure 26 is a flowchart of the remaining game number management process on the main control board side in the slot machine of the first embodiment. FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the RT state transition control process on the main control board side in the slot machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 28 is a RT state transition diagram in the slot machine according to the first embodiment. Figure 29 is a flowchart of the AT state start control processing on the main control board side in the slot machine type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 30 is an AT state transition diagram in the slot machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the game zone transition control process on the main control board side in the slot machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing on the main control board side in the slot machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the reel drive control processing on the main control board side in the reel gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the reel drive control processing on the main control board side in the reel gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 35 is an image diagram showing the rotational movement of the reels in the slot machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the processing performed on the main control board when the power is turned off in the slot machine according to the first embodiment. Figure 37 is an image diagram of the push order display in the slot machine of this example. Figure 38 is a flowchart of the sub-side program start processing on the sub-control board side in the slot machine of the first embodiment. Figure 39 is a flowchart of the sub-main loop processing on the sub-control board side in the slot machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 40 is a flowchart of the processing performed on the sub-control board side when the sub-side power supply is turned off in the slot machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 41 is a flowchart of one command processing on the sub-control board side in the slot machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 42 is a flowchart of the process of determining the effects related to operation of the start lever on the sub-control board side in the slot machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 43 is a flowchart of the process for determining whether or not to execute a battle effect on the sub-control board side in the slot machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 44 is an example of a stay stage determination table on the sub-control board side in the slot machine according to the first embodiment. Figure 45 is a flowchart of the AT performance determination process on the sub-control board side in the slot machine of the first embodiment. FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the process for determining whether or not a revival effect will be performed on the sub-control board side in the slot machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 47 is a flowchart of the processing performed on the sub-control board when the start lever is operated in the slot machine according to the first embodiment. Figure 48 is a flowchart of the processing during AT when the start lever is operated on the sub-control board side in the slot machine of the first embodiment. Figure 49 is a flowchart of the specialized precursor processing when the start lever is operated on the sub-control board side in the slot machine of the first embodiment. Figure 50 is a flowchart of the additional specialization processing when the start lever is operated on the sub-control board side in the slot machine of the first embodiment. Figure 51 is a flowchart of the processing inside the advantageous BB when the start lever is operated on the sub-control board side in the slot machine of the first embodiment. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of the processing performed on the sub-control board when the first drum stop is accepted in the slot machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 53 is a flowchart of the processing performed on the sub-control board when a second reel stop is accepted in the reel-type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the process for determining the effects related to the third drum stop on the sub-control board side in the slot machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 55 is a flowchart of the processing performed on the sub-control board when a third drum stop is accepted in the slot machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the game progress control process on the main control board side in the slot machine according to the second embodiment. Figure 57 is a flowchart of the game end monitoring process on the main control board side in the slot machine of the second embodiment. Figure 58 is a flowchart of the MY counter monitoring process on the main control board side in the slot machine of the second embodiment. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing the MY counter and the difference counter in the slot machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 60 is a diagram showing the pre-notification state of the end of play in the slot machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 61 is FIG. 1 relating to the case where the upper limit of the difference number is exceeded during a bonus in the slot machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 62 is FIG. 2 relating to the case where the upper limit of the difference number is exceeded during a bonus in the slot machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 63 is FIG. 3 relating to the case where the upper limit of the difference number is exceeded during a bonus in the slot machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 64 is an action diagram 1 relating to a game in which a small prize is won in the slot machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 65 is an action diagram 2 relating to a game in which a small prize is won in the slot machine according to the second embodiment. Figure 66 is an illustration of what happens when a power outage occurs during play in the AT state in the slot machine of the second embodiment. FIG. 67 is an image diagram 1 regarding an empty medal error in the slot machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 68 is an image diagram 2 regarding an empty medal error in the slot machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing Example 1 of the presentation in the slot machine according to the first and second embodiments, and is an image diagram showing a command presentation that is completed in one game under normal conditions. Figure 70 is a diagram showing example 2 of the presentation in the slot machine of the first and second embodiments, and is an image diagram showing a command presentation that executes a premium display that is completed in one game under normal conditions. FIG. 71 is a diagram showing Example 3 of the presentation in the slot machine according to the first and second embodiments, and is an image diagram showing a command presentation that is completed over multiple games in the normal state. Figure 72 is a diagram showing example 3 of the presentation in the slot machine of the first and second embodiments, and is an image diagram showing a command presentation with a chance-up pattern that is completed over multiple games in the normal state. Figure 73 is a diagram showing example 4 of the presentation in the slot machine of the first and second embodiments, and is an image diagram showing the start presentation display and end presentation display of a specified presentation when in AT mode. FIG. 74 is a diagram showing Example 5 of the presentation in the slot machine according to the first and second embodiments, and is an image diagram showing the result presentation display in the continuous presentation. FIG. 75 is a front view showing the medal selector, the type 1 coin shooter, the chute body, and the hopper in the slot machine according to the first and second embodiments. FIG. 76 is a front view showing the medal selector, the type 1 coin shooter, and the shoot main body in the slot machine according to the first and second embodiments. FIG. 77 is a plan view showing the medal selector, the type 1 coin shooter, and the shoot main body in the slot machine according to the first and second embodiments. FIG. 78 is a diagram showing a chute body of Modification 1 in the slot machine according to the first and second embodiments. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a chute body of Modification 2 in the slot machine according to the first and second embodiments. FIG. 80 is a front view showing the medal selector, the type 2 coin shooter, the chute body, and the hopper in the slot machine according to the first and second embodiments. FIG. 81 is a front view showing the medal selector, the type 2 coin shooter, and the shoot main body in the slot machine according to the first and second embodiments. FIG. 82 is a plan view showing the medal selector, the type 2 coin shooter, and the shoot main body in the slot machine according to the first and second embodiments. Figure 83 is a flowchart of the game progress control processing (second page) on the main control board side in the slot machine type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. Figure 84 is a flowchart (third page) of the game progress control processing on the main control board side in the slot machine type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 85 is a diagram showing the display of the payout number display device in the slot machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 86 is an image diagram of the payout number display device when replay is stopped and displayed in the slot machine type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 87 is an image diagram of the payout number display device when the game has stopped in the slot machine according to the third embodiment. Figure 88 is an image diagram of the payout number display device when an inserted medal backflow error occurs in the slot machine of the third embodiment. FIG. 89 is an image diagram of the payout number display device in the event of a power outage in the slot machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 90 is an image diagram of the payout number display device in the case where a power outage occurs during a bonus in the slot machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 91 is a diagram showing the display on the lower panel of the slot machine according to the third embodiment. Figure 92 is a diagram showing the notification mode of the notification regarding the end of the game that can be applied to the slot machine of the third embodiment. Figure 93 is a flowchart of the game progress control process on the main control board side in a slot machine type gaming machine applicable to this example. Figure 94 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process on the main control board side in a slot machine that can be applied to this example. Figure 95 is a flowchart of the game zone transition control process on the main control board side in a slot machine that can be applied to this example. Figure 96 is an image diagram 1 showing the AT state in a slot machine that can be applied to this example. Figure 97 is an image diagram showing the display of the number of coins won in a slot machine that can be used in this example. Figure 98 is an image diagram 2 showing the AT state in a slot machine applicable to this example. Figure 99 is an image diagram 3 showing the AT state in a slot machine that can be applied to this example. Figure 100 is a flowchart of the game zone transition control process on the main control board side in a slot machine type gaming machine applicable to this example. Figure 101 is a flowchart of the process of adding the number of games on the main control board side in a slot machine that can be applied to this example. Figure 102 is an image diagram 4 showing the AT state in a slot machine that can be applied to this example. Figure 103 is an image diagram of the added-on specialized state in a slot machine that can be applied to this example. Figure 104 is an image diagram of the AT end screen in a slot machine that can be applied to this example. FIG. 105 is an image diagram 1 showing the maximum expected value of profit awarded to a player at a single opportunity in a slot machine applicable to this example. FIG. 106 is an image diagram 2 showing the maximum expected value of the profit that can be awarded to a player at a single opportunity in a slot machine that can be applied to this example. FIG. 107 is an image diagram 3 showing the maximum expected value of profit awarded to a player at a single opportunity in a slot machine applicable to this example. FIG. 108 is an image diagram 4 showing the maximum expected value of the profit that can be awarded to a player at a single opportunity in a slot machine that can be applied to this example. Figure 109 is an image diagram 5 showing the maximum expected value of profit awarded to a player at a single opportunity in a slot machine applicable to this example. Figure 110 is an image diagram 6 showing the maximum expected value of profit awarded to a player at a single opportunity in a slot machine applicable to this example. Figure 111 is a list of basic specifications of the slot machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 112 is a list of reel arrangements for the slot machine according to the fourth embodiment. Figure 113 is a list of bonuses for the slot machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 114 is a list of symbol combinations in the slot machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 115 is a list of symbol combinations in the slot machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 116 is a list of symbol combinations in the slot machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 117 is a list of symbol combinations in the slot machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 118 is a list of symbol combinations in the slot machine according to the fourth embodiment. Figure 119 is a list of condition devices in the slot machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 120 is a list of condition devices in the slot machine according to the fourth embodiment. Figure 121 is an RT state transition diagram for the slot machine according to the fourth embodiment. Figure 122 is an RT state transition diagram for the slot machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 123 is a list showing the lottery probabilities for losses, small wins, replay wins, and bonuses in the slot machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 124 is a list showing the lottery probabilities for losses, small wins, replay wins, and bonuses in the slot machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 125 is a list showing the lottery probabilities for losses, small wins, replay wins, and bonuses in the slot machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 126 is a list showing the lottery probabilities for losses, small wins, replay wins, and bonuses in the slot machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 127 is a list showing the lottery probabilities for losses, small wins, replay wins, and bonuses in the slot machine according to the fourth embodiment. Figure 128 is a list showing the lottery probabilities for losses, small wins, replay wins, and bonuses in the slot machine of the fourth embodiment. Figure 129 is a list showing the lottery probabilities for losses, small wins, replay wins, and bonuses in the slot machine of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 130 is a list showing the lottery probabilities for losses, small wins, replay wins, and bonuses in the slot machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 131 is a list showing the lottery probabilities for losses, small wins, replay wins, and bonuses in the slot machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 132 is a list showing the lottery probabilities for losses, small wins, replay wins, and bonuses in the slot machine according to the fourth embodiment. Figure 133 is a list showing the lottery probabilities for losses, small wins, replay wins, and bonuses in the slot machine of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 134 is a list showing the lottery probabilities for losses, small wins, replay wins, and bonuses in the slot machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 135 is a list showing the lottery probabilities for losses, small wins, replay wins, and bonuses in the slot machine according to the fourth embodiment. Figure 136 is a diagram showing the stop control of push order minor winnings in the slot machine of the fourth embodiment. Figure 137 is a diagram that schematically shows a game flow that explains the flow of play in the slot machine type gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. Figure 138 is an image showing the behavior of the reels when the push order minor wins during the AT state and bonus period. Figure 139 is an image showing the behavior of the reels when the push order minor wins during the AT state and bonus period. Figure 140 is an image showing the behavior of the reels when the push order minor wins during the AT state and bonus period. Figure 141 is an image showing the behavior of the reels when the push order minor wins during the AT state and bonus period. FIG. 142 is a diagram 1 relating to the lighting of the bet lamp, which is applicable to the gaming machine according to this specification. FIG. 143 is a diagram 2 relating to the lighting of the bet lamp, which is applicable to the gaming machine according to this specification. FIG. 144 is a diagram 3 relating to the lighting of the bet lamp, which is applicable to the gaming machine according to this specification. FIG. 145 is a diagram showing an increase in the number of credits that can be applied to the gaming machine according to this specification. Figure 146 is a diagram 1 of a lamp provided on a front door that can be applied to the gaming machine of this specification. Figure 147 is Figure 2 of a lamp provided on a front door that can be applied to the gaming machine of this specification. FIG. 148 is a diagram 1 relating to reel stopping operations applicable to the gaming machine of this specification. FIG. 149 is a diagram 2 relating to a reel stopping operation that can be applied to the gaming machine according to this specification. Figure 150 is a perspective view of a gaming machine applicable to the gaming machine according to this specification, with the door open. Figure 151 is a diagram showing a motor drive board that can be applied to the gaming machine according to this specification. FIG. 152 is a diagram of a harness applicable to the gaming machine according to this specification. FIG. 153 is a diagram showing a medal selector and a chute body that can be applied to the gaming machine according to this specification. Figure 154 is a diagram showing an insertion acceptance sensor that can be applied to the gaming machine of this specification. FIG. 155 is a partial perspective view of a gaming machine applicable to the gaming machine according to this specification, with the door open. Figure 156 is a plan view of a gaming machine applicable to the gaming machine of this specification, with the door open. Figure 157 is an image diagram showing various cross-sectional shapes of the cord portion of the power cord DK that can be applied to the gaming machine described in this specification. Figure 158 is a plan view of a gaming machine applicable to the gaming machine of this specification with the door closed. Figure 159 is a plan view of a gaming machine applicable to the gaming machine of this specification, with the door open. Figure 160 is an image diagram showing an inclined portion of the cabinet body that can be applied to the gaming machine according to this specification. FIG. 161 is an image diagram showing the relationship between the length L _HN of the portion between the clamps in the harness and the length L _HT of the hook tube. Figure 162 is an image diagram showing the types of clamps that can be applied to the gaming machines described in this specification. Figure 163 is an image diagram showing a power outage information screen and a demo screen that can be applied to the gaming machine described in this specification. Figure 164 is a perspective view showing a reel unit that can be applied to the gaming machine according to this specification. Figure 165 is a side view showing a reel and a reel back lamp that can be applied to the gaming machine according to this specification. Figure 166 is a front view showing the inside of a reel that can be applied to the gaming machine according to this specification.

First, we will explain the meaning of each term in this specification. A "random number" is a random number used in a lottery (a computer-generated lottery, sometimes called a "draw") to determine the content of a game in a slot machine. This term includes not only random numbers in the strict sense but also pseudo-random numbers (for example, hard random numbers and built-in random numbers generated by a main control chip including a CPU, and software random numbers). Examples include so-called "basic random numbers" that affect the outcome of a game, specifically "winning random numbers" associated with special roles that transition to special games and winning roles (small roles, replay roles). A "CPU" is synonymous with a term commonly used in the industry, and is not limited in any way to the architecture (CISC, RISC, bit count, etc.) or processing performance used. "Power interruption (power outage)" refers to the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine dropping below a certain level, regardless of whether the power switch on the gaming machine is operated. It also includes power interruptions due to unforeseen circumstances, such as damage to the power supply unit or a power outage. "ROM" is synonymous with what is well known in the industry and physically stores information (e.g., when a current for reading data is applied, a conductive element configuration becomes "1" and a non-conductive element configuration becomes "0"). "RAM" is synonymous with what is well known in the industry and electrically stores information (e.g., when a current for reading data is applied, a stored charge becomes "1" and a non-stored charge becomes "0". It is common for RAM to be configured so that a backup power source is provided for some or all of the data stored in the RAM in the event of a power outage). Examples of "game state" include a special game state in which game medals are easy to obtain and which is advantageous to the player (a so-called jackpot game, which may be referred to as bonus operation, type 1 BB operation, type 1 BB operation, type 2 BB operation, type 2 BB operation, etc.), an internal state in which a bonus win is carried over (which may be referred to as type 1 BB internal, type 2 BB internal, etc.), a replay probability variable game state (RT state) in which the winning rate of a replay role is higher (or lower) than in a normal game state in which the winning rate of a replay role is a predetermined value, an AT (assist time) state in which the stopping order and stopping position (sometimes referred to as the stop operation mode) of the reels for winning a winning role can be notified, an ART (assist replay time) state in which the RT state and the AT state are combined, an advantageous zone in which AT-related processing can be executed and a normal zone in which AT-related processing is not executed, etc. Furthermore, even in the normal gaming state, there are RT and AT states (sometimes referred to as "AT gaming state," "AT state," "notification state," or simply "AT." A state that is not in the AT state is sometimes referred to as a "non-AT gaming state," "non-AT state," "non-notification state," or simply "non-AT." Notification of the stop operation mode in the AT state is sometimes referred to as "executing AT," "executing navigation," "executing instructions," "executing push order navigation," "executing notification gaming," etc. Examples include a high-probability normal gaming state and a low-probability normal gaming state (referred to as "lottery states" in this example), which have different lottery probabilities for transitioning to the ART state. Furthermore, there is no problem with combining gaming states (furthermore, there is no problem with all of these gaming states and functions (e.g., lottery for transitioning to the AT state and output of notification instructions regarding the reel stop order) being implemented on the main control board that controls the game progress). In this example, the AT state and the RT state are described separately, with the RT state being referred to as "RT1" and the AT state being referred to as the "normal gaming state," but the RT state and the AT state may be collectively referred to as the ART state, with the ART state being referred to as the "normal gaming state." A "winning combination" refers to the type of conditional device (or conditional device number) that has been selected by internal lottery (sometimes referred to as internal lottery). A "notification state" refers to the AT state in which push order navigation, as described below, can be executed. Even in a game in which a conditional device in which push order navigation is not executed because the winning combination does not differ depending on the reel stop order is selected, the AT state is configured to be the "notification state" if push order navigation can be executed. A "counter value" is also referred to as the "number of notification games that can be executed," and is the number of remaining AT games or the counter value of the AT counter M60, as described below. For example, if the "number of possible notification games" is 1 or greater (including the game that has become "0"), the push order navigation described below can be executed. The "number of possible notification games" may also be the difference in the number of gaming media (the number of payouts minus the number of inserted coins) obtained based on winning a minor role (mainly the push order bell role), or the number of times the push order bell role has been won. The "special notification state" is the state related to the AT that is most advantageous to the player, and in this example, is referred to as the "addition-specialized state." The "predetermined game state" may be any one or a combination of all the game states and notification states described in this example. The "specific condition" is a condition that can subtract the AT counter value. For example, the specific condition may be the completion of one game, the winning of a predetermined role (e.g., the push order bell role), etc. A "Type 1 special device" is a device that increases the number of symbol combinations related to winning per a specified number or increases the probability of activating a conditional device related to winning per a specified number. It activates in a predetermined event and can continue to operate until a result is obtained not more than 12 times, and is sometimes called an RB (regular bonus). A "Type 1 special device continuous operation device" is a device that can continuously activate Type 1 special devices. It activates when a specific symbol combination is displayed and stops operating in a predetermined event. It is sometimes called a BB (big bonus) or Type 1 BB. A "Type 2 special device" is a device that activates a conditional device related to winning regardless of the result of the role lottery. It activates in a predetermined event and stops operating when a result is obtained in one game, and is sometimes called a CB (challenge bonus). A "type 2 special consecutive activation device" is a device that can activate type 2 special features continuously. It activates when a specific symbol combination is displayed and terminates activation when a predetermined event occurs. It is sometimes referred to as an MB (middle bonus) or type 2 BB. A "normal feature" is a feature that increases the number of symbol combinations related to winning per set number or increases the probability of activation of a conditional device related to winning per set number. It activates when a specific symbol combination is displayed and terminates activation when a single game result is obtained. It is sometimes referred to as an SB (single bonus). An "all JACIN type" is a configuration in which a type 1 BB feature is considered to have been JACINed when it is won, and a RB is always in effect during the execution of type 1 BB. A "JACIN lottery type" is a configuration in which a type 1 BB feature is executed by repeatedly switching between non-RB and RB states. Additionally, an "uncontrolled reel" is a reel in a state where reel pull-in control, which may be performed after a stop operation, is not executed, and the reel stops at the closest possible reel position from the reel position where the stop operation was received. An "all CB type" is a configuration in which the reel is always in CB when a second type BB is executed. A "CB transition lottery type" is a configuration in which the reel alternates between non-CB and CB when a second type BB is executed.

The following embodiment is merely an example, and is not limited to the following aspects in terms of the location and function of each means, the order of each step in various processes, the timing of flag on/off, the names of means responsible for the processing of each step, etc. Furthermore, the above-described embodiments and modified examples should not be interpreted as being limited to specific applications, and any combination is acceptable. For example, a modified example of one embodiment should be understood as a modified example of another embodiment, and even if one modified example and another modified example are described independently, it should be understood that a combination of the one modified example and the other modified example is also described.

<<<First Embodiment>>>
Before describing each component, the characteristics (outline) of the slot machine P according to the first embodiment will be described. Each component will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings.

First, the basic structure of the front side of the slot machine P according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to Figure 1 (and Figure 2 for some of the configuration). The slot machine P is mainly composed of a front door (also called a front door), a rear box (also called a cabinet or base), and a reel unit, hopper device, power supply unit E, main control board M (a board on which a main control chip C including a CPUMC is mounted), and sub-control board S (a board on which a sub-control chip SC including a CPUSC is mounted). These will be described in order below.

<Front door DU>
The front door DU includes mechanisms for visually confirming the game status, mechanisms for inputting game media, mechanisms for operating the reel unit, and other mechanisms. Specifically, mechanisms for visually confirming the game status include a reel window D160, a slot count indicator D210, a start lamp D180, a replay lamp D290, a slot availability lamp D300, a special game status indicator D250, a credit count indicator D200, a payout number indicator (push sequence indicator) D270 (sometimes referred to as the push sequence indicator D270), an AT counter value indicator D280, and a favorable zone indicator YH. Additionally, a medal slot D170 and a bet button D220 are provided as mechanisms for inserting game media and inputting the number of bets (number of bets), and a settlement button D60 is provided as a mechanism for paying out inserted game media. Finally, a start lever D50 and a stop button D40 are provided as mechanisms for operating the reels. The slot machine of the first embodiment is provided with an operation console that protrudes toward the player and on which are mounted a start lever D50, a stop button D40, a medal slot D170, a bet button D220, a settlement button D60, a sub-input button SB, a cross key SB2, etc. Each element will be described in detail below.

<Mechanism for making game status visible>
Next, the main parts of the mechanism for making the game status visible will be described. The reel window D160 is a transparent member made of synthetic resin or the like that constitutes part of the front door DU, and is configured so that the reel units installed in the gaming machine frame can be seen through the reel window D160. The number-of-coins indicator light D210 is composed of three LEDs, and is configured so that the number of LEDs that light up corresponds to the number of medals currently bet (the number of medals inserted to start one game). Specifically, the insertion number indicator lamp D210 is composed of three LEDs (lamp): a 1-bet lamp D211, a 2-bet lamp D212, and a 3-bet lamp D213. When one game medal has been bet, the 1-bet lamp D211 is lit, the 2-bet lamp D212 is off, and the 3-bet lamp D213 is off. When two game medals have been bet, the 1-bet lamp D211 is lit, the 2-bet lamp D212 is lit, and the 3-bet lamp D213 is off. When three game medals have been bet, the 1-bet lamp D211 is lit, the 2-bet lamp D212 is lit, and the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit (this does not apply to the next game after the replay stop display; details will be described later). The start lamp D180 is also composed of an LED, and is configured to light up when the operation of the start lever D50 is valid (operation is being accepted), and to light off when the operation of the start lever D50 is invalid (operation is not being accepted). The replay lamp D290 is composed of an LED and is configured to light up when the replay is stopped and to turn off when the next game after the replay is stopped is completed. The insertion possible lamp D300 is configured to light up (or flash) when insertion of a game medal into the medal insertion slot D170 is valid or operation of the bet button D220 is valid, and to turn off when insertion of a game medal is invalid or operation of the bet button D220 is invalid. The special game status display device D250 is composed of a 7-segment display and is configured to display the total number of payouts during special games. The special game status display device D250 may be omitted. In such a configuration, the total number of payouts can be displayed on the effect display device S40 (sometimes referred to as the second information display unit) described below, allowing the player to recognize the total number of payouts during special games, resulting in a user-friendly gaming machine. The credit number display device D200 is a seven-segment display, and is configured to display the total number of medals (credits) stored in the gaming machine as the player's medals. The payout number display device (push order display device) D270 is a seven-segment display, and is configured to notify the player of the most advantageous reel stop order in a game in which a condition device (a so-called push order role (sometimes called a push order role) in which the winning combination can differ depending on the number of game medals currently paid out and the reel stop order (the stop order of the left stop button D41, the center stop button D42, and the right stop button D43) is achieved, and which is generally configured so that the profit rate (number of medals paid out, subsequent RT state, etc.) awarded to the player can differ when the winning combination or the symbol combination displayed is different) is achieved (this notification is sometimes called push order navigation). In this way, the payout number display device (push sequence display device) D270 is configured to be able to display two things: the number of game medals currently being paid out and the reel stop order that will be most profitable for the player. The display mode is designed to prevent the player from mistaking which of the two displays is being displayed. Details of this display mode will be described later. Furthermore, the AT counter value display device D280 is configured to be able to display the number of games that the player can stay in when playing in an AT-related state (in this example, sometimes referred to as a push sequence navigation state or a notification game, and details will be described later) that is advantageous to the player and that is guaranteed when the game progresses in accordance with the push sequence navigation display (in this way, informing the player of an advantageous operation mode (stop operation mode) of the stop button on the push sequence display device D270 may be referred to as "executing push sequence navigation,""executingAT,""executingnavigation,""executinginstructions," or "executing a notification game") displayed on the push sequence display device D270 (sometimes referred to as a first information display unit). Furthermore, the AT counter value display device D280 may not be provided, and in such a configuration, by configuring the number of games that can be played in the AT state to be displayed on the performance display device S40, the player can recognize the number of games for which the advantageous AT state is guaranteed, making it a user-friendly gaming machine. Furthermore, the payout number display device (push sequence display device) D270 may be configured to be divided into two devices: a payout number display device and a push sequence display device.

The advantageous zone indicator YH is composed of an LED and is configured to light up when the zone is advantageous and to turn off when the zone is not advantageous (the timing of lighting and turning off will be described later). Here, like conventional slot machines, the slot machine of this example can have a special game state (a so-called jackpot game, such as a bonus game or Type 1 BB or Type 2 BB) in which it is easy to win game medals and is advantageous to the player; a variable replay probability game state (RT state) in which the winning rate of the replay role is higher (or lower) than in the normal game state, in which the winning rate of the replay role is a predetermined value; an assist time (AT) state in which the reel stopping order and stopping position for winning a winning role are notified; and an assist replay time (ART) state in which the RT state and the AT state are combined. In addition to these "game states," one of three "game zones" can be set: a normal zone, a standby zone, and an advantageous zone. In this example, a "standby section" is not set, and either a "normal section" or an "advantageous section" is set as a game section. Of these, the "advantageous section" is positioned as being relatively more advantageous to the player than other "game sections." For example, the "game state" being in an AT state or an ART state is associated with the "advantageous section." In other words, when the "game state" is in an AT state or an ART state, the advantageous section indicator YH lights up. However, as will be described later, the setting control of the "game section" is also performed on the main control board side that controls the game progress, just like the setting control of the "game state." Therefore, whether the game progress is relatively advantageous to the player can be honestly communicated to the player by the on/off status of the advantageous section indicator YH. As will be described later, if the "advantageous zone" continues until it reaches a predetermined upper limit of the number of games (for example, 1500 games), the "normal zone" is forcibly set, and at that time, the remaining AT-related states are also forcibly terminated (information for maintaining the AT state is cleared and initialized), so changes to the set "game zone" can also affect the transition of the "game state," and this makes it possible to automatically prevent a significant increase in gambling tendency due to "game states" such as the AT state and ART state, which have a relatively high degree of design freedom.As mentioned above, if the "advantageous zone" continues until it reaches a predetermined upper limit of the number of games (for example, 1500 games), the "normal zone" is forcibly set, that is, the "advantageous zone" ends, but the conditions for ending the "advantageous zone" are not limited to this. The end conditions for the "advantageous zone" in the slot machine of this example are "one execution of push order navigation that can obtain the small role that pays out the most coins among the small roles that make up the push order role (role with push order) (for example, if the small roles that make up the push order role are 7, 3, and 1, the push order navigation that can obtain the most coins, 7, is the push order navigation that can obtain the most coins, and if there is a push order role that can obtain 7 or 1 coin depending on the push order, and a push order role that can obtain 3 coins depending on the push order, the push order navigation that can obtain 3 coins does not fall under the push order navigation referred to here)," or "winning either BB, RB, or MB" and "any end condition (failure to win in a 40G 1 set loop lottery (AT), fixed 32G has passed (false sign), etc.)," or "1500G of the advantageous zone" is met. Furthermore, in the case of specifications where there is no push order bell role (for example, specifications where there is a replay push order to transition to RT state, but no minor role with different payout numbers depending on the push order), the condition for ending the advantageous zone, "one push order navigation that can obtain the minor role with the largest payout number," is excluded. Also, in the first embodiment, the minor roles that make up the push order role are composed of minor roles including a minor role corresponding to an 11-coin role and a minor role corresponding to a 1-coin role, so "one push order navigation that can obtain the minor role with the largest payout number" refers to announcing a push order that can obtain 11 medals (a winning 11-coin role).

<Mechanism for enabling input of gaming media>
Next, the main components of the mechanism for enabling the input of gaming media will be described. The medal slot D170 is a slot for inserting gaming medals. When the slot is in a medal-accepting state, gaming medals inserted into the slot are guided into the gaming machine. The gaming machine is also provided with a medal insertion acceptance sensor D10s, a first insertion sensor D20s, and a second insertion sensor D30s to detect the insertion of medals. When it is determined that a gaming medal guided into the gaming machine has been inserted correctly, the inserted medal can be detected as a bet medal. The bet button D220 is operable by the player, allowing the player to bet accumulated medals (credit medals). The settlement button D60 is also operable by the player, allowing the player to refund accumulated medals (credit medals) and/or bet medals. The game medals paid out by operating the settlement button D60 are configured to be paid out to the discharge port D240.

<Mechanism for operating the reel unit>
Next, the start lever D50 is configured to be operable by the player, and is configured to be able to start the operation of the reels by operating it. Also, the stop buttons D40 are provided with a left stop button D41, a center stop button D42, and a right stop button D43 that can be operated by the player, and are configured to be able to stop the operation of the reels sequentially by operating each stop button.

<Other mechanisms provided in the front door DU>
Next, the main components of the other mechanisms provided in the front door DU will be described with reference to the perspective view of Figure 2 showing the internal configuration of the slot machine P with the front door DU open. The front door DU is equipped with a mechanism for enhancing the entertainment value of the game, including a performance display device S40 for displaying performances such as previews and background performances, a game effect lamp D26 (not shown) that can be illuminated in various lighting modes, a door board D for signal relay, a medal selector DS for detecting inserted medals, a speaker S20 for outputting sound, and components formed of synthetic resin or the like, such as a middle panel (middle decorative panel), upper panel D130, and lower panel D140. The performance display device S40 is attached to the upper back side of the front door DU so that the display unit displaying performances and the like can be seen through the see-through area formed in the upper panel. The decorative lamp unit D150 and the LED lamp unit S10 have light sources that emit light in accordance with the progress of play on the reel-type gaming machine P, with the decorative lamp unit D150 provided on each of the right and left sides of the lower panel D140, and the LED lamp unit S10 provided on each of the right and left sides of the upper panel D130 (the decorative lamp unit D150 and the LED lamp unit S10 may be collectively referred to as the lamp unit). Also, a door board D is attached below the reel window D160 on the back of the front door DU, and this door board D functions as a relay board that receives input signals from the stop button D40, start lever D50, settlement button D60, etc., and outputs the input signals directly or after processing them to the main control board M, which will be described later. A medal selector DS, described in detail below, is provided near the door board D on the back of the front door DU, corresponding to the medal insertion slot D170. The selector detects medals inserted through the medal insertion slot D170 and performs simple authentication. The selector guides valid medals to the hopper H40, described below, and returns invalid medals to the medal tray D230, described below. Speakers S20 are provided on the left and right sides below the door board D. The middle panel is located above the operation table and below the upper panel D130, and includes the reel window. The sub-input button SB and cross key SB2 attached to the operation table D190 are used for operating the menu screen, described below, and for button press effects on the sub-control board S (by repeatedly pressing the sub-input button SB, effects indicating whether or not a bonus has been won are executed), mini-games (e.g., effects indicating whether or not the game has entered the "AT state"), and other operations. The front door DU of the slot machine P is provided with a medal tray D230 that receives game medals (or may simply be called medals) dispensed from the dispenser D240, and a door switch D80 that can detect the open/closed state of the front door DU. The front door DU is also provided with a keyhole D260, and is configured to be able to open by inserting a key (door key) that matches the shape of the keyhole D260 into the keyhole D260 (and twisting the key in a predetermined direction (e.g., clockwise)). Furthermore, in the first embodiment, an error state (such as a door open error) can be cleared by inserting the door key into the keyhole D260 (and twisting the key in a predetermined direction (e.g., counterclockwise)). Furthermore, a bet button lamp S50 is provided inside the bet button D220, and the bet button lamp S50 is composed of an LED controlled by the sub-control board S, and the lighting (or blinking) of the bet button lamp S50 allows the player to perceive that the operation of the bet button D220 is valid. Furthermore, a stop button lamp S60 is provided inside the stop button D40 (provided for each of the three stop buttons: the left stop button D41, the center stop button D42, and the right stop button D43), and the stop button lamp S60 is composed of an LED controlled by the sub-control board S, and the presence or absence of lighting (or blinking) and/or the color of the light of the stop button lamp S60 allows the player to perceive that the operation of the stop button D40 is valid. Furthermore, since only the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the valid stop button D40 lights up in the color corresponding to the valid stop button D40, for example, when the left stop button D41 is invalid, the middle stop button D42 is valid, and the right stop button D43 is valid, the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the left stop button D41 is off, the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the middle stop button D42 is on, and the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the right stop button D43 is on, the lighting patterns of the three stop button lamps S60 can be different for each other. In addition, by varying the lighting color or lighting pattern of the stop button lamp S60 (such as lighting up/flashing, or slow flashing/fast flashing), it may be possible to make it easier for the player to determine which stop button should currently be operated to stop the game in which push order navigation is executed. For example, when all reels are spinning and a push order bell is hit that indicates that the push order of "left → middle → right" is the correct order (maximum number of coins paid out), the stop button lamp corresponding to the left stop button may be made to flash in white, and the stop button lamps corresponding to the middle stop button and the right stop button may be made to light up in blue; and if the player then operates the left stop button to stop the left reel, the stop button lamp corresponding to the left stop button may be made to turn off, the stop button lamp corresponding to the middle stop button may be made to flash in white, and the stop button lamp corresponding to the right stop button may be made to light up in blue.

Next, we will explain the back box (also referred to as the cabinet or base) and the various devices installed within the back box. A reel unit is attached approximately in the center of the back box so that a portion of it is visible through the reel window D160. The reel unit includes a reel M50 and a drive source (e.g., a stepping motor) for the reel M50. The reel M50 also includes a left reel M51, a center reel M52, and a right reel M53. Each reel section is made of synthetic resin or the like, and multiple symbols are printed on the outer periphery of the reel section (on the reel band MO). The reel sections are configured to rotate and stop based on the operation of the start lever D50 and the stop buttons D40. Additionally, although not shown, LEDs (hereinafter sometimes referred to as reel backlights) are provided inside the left reel M51, center reel M52, and right reel M53, and when the LEDs are lit, the light that passes through the outer periphery of the reel unit makes it appear as if the outer periphery of the reel unit is lit. Also, above the reel M50, a reel board K (described below) is stored to drive each reel (left reel M51, center reel M52, right reel M53).

Furthermore, above the reels M50 is stored the main control board M, which controls the overall game, as described below, and to the left of the reels M50 is stored the sub-control board S, which controls the various effects performed using the effect display device S40, LED lamp unit S10, speaker S20, etc., as shown in Figure 1. Connected to the main control board M are a setting key switch M20, which is used to execute the setting change device control process (to change settings), as described below, and a setting/reset button M30, which can change setting values and clear errors, etc. While the setting key switch M20 and setting/reset button M30 are not shown in Figure 2, they may be located in an appropriate position on the main control board M, for example (i.e., they may be located in a position that makes manual access difficult without opening the front door DU).

Below the reels M50 are a hopper H40 that collects inserted gaming medals, a medal payout device H that pays out gaming medals, and a power supply board E that supplies power to the entire slot machine P. Game medals paid out from the medal payout device H pass through a coin shooter D90 and are paid out from a discharge port D240. In addition, a power switch E10 for turning on the power to the slot machine P is also provided on the front of the power supply board E (sometimes referred to as a power supply unit E). Details of the medal payout device H will be described later.

<Medal Selector DS>
Next, the medal selector DS will be described in detail with reference to Figure 3. Figure 3 is a perspective view showing the path (selector) of game medals inserted into the medal insertion slot D170 inside the slot-type gaming machine P. The medal selector DS has an insertion acceptance sensor D10s provided near the door board D as a passage for game medals inserted through the medal insertion slot D170, and a coin shooter D90 and the like provided below the insertion acceptance sensor D10s for guiding the game medals to the discharge slot D240. The insertion acceptance sensor D10s has the function of sorting game medals inserted through the medal insertion slot D170 mainly based on size and accepting only game medals that meet the standard dimensions. Medals (or other foreign objects) determined by this function to not meet the standard are paid out to the discharge slot D240 by a blocker D100. When a player inserts a medal before operating the start lever D50 (when medal insertion is enabled), the medal is sorted by the insertion acceptance sensor D10s, and only medals that meet the specifications are inserted into the hopper H40. Those that do not meet the specifications are returned to the outlet D240 through the coin shooter D90. In contrast, if a medal is inserted after the start lever D50 is operated (when medal insertion is not enabled), the inserted medal passes through the coin shooter D90 and is returned to the outlet D240 regardless of whether it meets the specifications. A medal insertion sensor, described in detail below, is provided inside the insertion acceptance sensor D10s (at the back of the flow path). When a medal that meets the dimensional specifications passes through, it is detected by the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s, and the resulting signal is supplied to the main control board M, described below.

Next, the sensors related to medal insertion will be described in detail. A gaming medal inserted into the medal insertion slot D170 first passes through the insertion acceptance sensor D10s. The insertion acceptance sensor D10s is a mechanical double sensor. When a gaming medal passes through, two protruding mechanisms are pressed, turning the sensor on and allowing the gaming medal to pass through the passage normally. Furthermore, with this configuration, if a foreign object that is not a gaming medal (a foreign object that does not meet the specifications, for example, an object smaller in diameter than a gaming medal) is inserted, the two protruding mechanisms are not pressed. Such a medal cannot maintain its upright position and therefore cannot pass through the passage (the medal falls over). As described above, it passes through the coin shooter D90 and is paid out to the dispensing slot D240. In addition, the insertion acceptance sensor D10s is configured to be able to determine an error if it remains on for a predetermined period of time or more (which may result in the blocker D100 turning off).

When a gaming medal passes through the blocker D100 normally, it will immediately pass the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s. These insertion sensors (first insertion sensor D20s and second insertion sensor D30s) consist of two sensors (placed adjacent to each other at a distance smaller than the standard diameter of the gaming medal), and are configured to detect various errors by monitoring the on/off status of each sensor (such as the order in which the on/off combinations of the first insertion sensor D20s and second insertion sensor D30s change) and the time they are on/off.

<Medal payout device H>
Next, the medal payout device H will be described in detail using the front and top views of the medal payout device H in Figure 4. The medal payout device H is activated when the settlement button is operated or when medals are paid out due to a win while credits (game medals electronically stored inside the gaming machine) or bet medals (medals inserted to start a game) are present. To activate the medal payout device H, the hopper motor H80 is first driven, causing the disk H50 to rotate about the disk rotation axis H50a. As a result of this rotation, the game medals in the medal payout device H are displaced by the discharge biasing means H70, and flow down from the game medal outlet H60 toward the discharge port D240. Furthermore, the dispensing sensor (first dispensing sensor H10s and second dispensing sensor H20s) consists of two sensors, and is configured to be able to detect various errors by monitoring the on/off status of each sensor (such as the order in which the on/off combinations of the first dispensing sensor H10s and second dispensing sensor H20s change) and the time they are on/off. More specifically, for example, when a medal passes through the game medal outlet H60 normally, the displacement of the release biasing means H70 causes a sensor state transition from a state where the first payout sensor H10s = off and the second payout sensor H20s = off to a state where the first payout sensor H10s = off and the second payout sensor H20s = off → a state where the first payout sensor H10s = on and the second payout sensor H20s = off → a state where the first payout sensor H10s = on and the second payout sensor H20s = on → a state where the first payout sensor H10s = off and the second payout sensor H20s = on → a state where the first payout sensor H10s = off and the second payout sensor H20s = on → a state where the first payout sensor H10s = off and the second payout sensor H20s = off

Next, Figure 5 shows a list of basic specifications for the slot machine in the first embodiment. The slot machine in the first embodiment has a specified number (maximum number of gaming medals that can be bet in one game) of three, 20 frames on each of the left reel M51, center reel M52, and right reel M53, and a single pay line for determining whether a win will occur: the top row of the left reel M51, the middle row of the center reel M52, and the bottom row of the right reel M53. The maximum payout number is 11, and the minimum payout number is 1 (the correspondence between winning combinations and payout numbers will be described later). The priority order of winning (priority order of draw) is "replay combination → minor combination (bell, watermelon, etc.) → bonus." For example, if a replay combination and a bonus are simultaneously achieved, the symbol combination resulting in a replay combination will be displayed, and the bonus cannot be won. Also, when a bell or a watermelon is formed, if the stop button is pressed in a position where both can be drawn in (a position within four frames of the winning stop position), the small winning combination with the largest number of coins will be drawn in first. Note that the configuration shown in the figure is merely an example, and there is no problem even if the number of frames on each reel is changed (for example, to 21 frames) or the configuration of the effective lines is changed (for example, to five lines with three horizontal lines and two diagonal lines, or one line with the bottom row of the left reel M51, the middle row of the center reel M52, and the top row of the right reel M53). In addition, when a push order minor feature that gives different benefits to the player depending on the push order is won, the pull-in control is such that if the predetermined correct push order is used, priority is given to pulling in minor features with a large payout number (number priority control), and if the push order is used incorrectly that differs from the correct push order, control is used to pull in symbols that have the highest chance of winning (symbols with the highest chance of winning among multiple symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed) (positioned within four frames of the stop operation) (number priority control).

Next, Figure 6 shows the reel arrangement of the slot machine in the first embodiment. As shown in the figure, the left reel M51, center reel M52, and right reel M53 each have 20 frames (numbered 0 to 19), and there are 10 types of symbols: "Black Seven," "White Seven," "Sheep," "Blank," "Bell," "Replay A," "Replay B," "Watermelon A," "Watermelon B," and "Cherry." Here, "Blank" refers to a symbol included in a symbol combination that constitutes a winning combination, just like other symbols, and does not mean a symbol that does not constitute a winning combination. For example, a symbol combination that constitutes a winning combination that includes a "blank" is "Watermelon B, Replay A, Blank," which results in Replay 02. Note that the configuration shown in the figure is merely an example, and there is no problem if the types of symbols are increased, decreased, or changed.

Next, Figures 7 to 9 show symbol combination lists 1 to 3 in the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, multiple symbol combinations exist for each condition device, and as described below, one of the symbol combinations is displayed stopped on an active line (the line mentioned above) depending on the stopping order and stopping positions of the left reel M51, center reel M52, and right reel M53. Note that even if the same type of symbol is not lined up on an active line, it is configured so that the player can easily see the same symbol lined up in a line on a line other than the active line (in the case of watermelons, three watermelon symbols are lined up in a line somewhere on the reel, such as lined up in a horizontal line in the middle row). In addition, in the first embodiment, there are three pattern combinations that result in a Type 1 BB role (a role continuous operation device related to a so-called Type 1 special role, but hereinafter may be simply referred to as a BB role): "Sheep, Sheep, Sheep", which is Type 1 BB-A (RB-A is continuously operated and ends with the payout of more than 264 coins); "Black Seven, Black Seven, Black Seven", which is Type 1 BB-B (RB-B is continuously operated and ends with the payout of more than 132 coins); and "White Seven, White Seven, White Seven", which is Type 1 BB-C (RB-B is continuously operated and ends with the payout of more than 132 coins). In the first embodiment, when a Type 1 BB combination is won and a BB is executed (a combination is activated), a single lottery table is referenced for all games during the BB to draw winning combinations (minor combinations, replay combinations) other than combinations (a combination of replay combinations and replay combinations). (This is a system in which the table referenced during the combination selection process is not switched during the execution of a single BB, and is hereinafter referred to as the "all-JACIN" type.) The format of the Type 1 BB combination is not limited to this, and the table referenced during the combination selection process may be switched during the execution of a single BB. Also, when the RT state is "RT1," if a symbol combination corresponding to numbers 14 to 16 that results in replay 04 is displayed, the system transitions to RT0 (details of the RT state will be described later). Because "RT0" is a more disadvantageous RT state to the player than "RT1," the transition from "RT1" to "RT0" is sometimes referred to as "falling." Furthermore, when a symbol combination corresponding to the number 17, which results in a replay 05, is displayed in a stopped state, a "black seven" may be displayed in the lower rows of the left reel M51, middle reel M52 and right reel M53, and when a symbol combination corresponding to the number 18, which results in a replay 05, is displayed in a stopped state, a "white seven" may be displayed in the lower rows of the left reel M51, middle reel M52 and right reel M53 (details will be given later). Furthermore, if the push order bell, which is the condition device for "WINNING-A1" to "WINNING-A6" described below, is won, stopping the reels in the most advantageous push order for the player will display the symbol combinations "WINNING-01" to "WINNING-03" corresponding to numbers 21 to 27, and 11 game medals will be paid out. On the other hand, stopping the reels in a push order different from the most advantageous push order for the player will display the symbol combinations "WINNING-08" to "WINNING-11" corresponding to numbers 39 to 56, and one game medal will be paid out. Note that the "-" in the figure indicates that any symbol may be displayed. For example, for "Bell - Bell" corresponding to number 23, if bells are displayed on the pay lines of the left reel M51 and right reel M53, 11 game medals can be won regardless of the symbol displayed on the pay line of the center reel M52.

Next, Figure 10 is a list of conditional devices in the first embodiment. Note that in this figure, the conditional device numbers are referred to as winning numbers, and hereafter, the conditional device numbers will also be referred to as winning numbers. In the first embodiment, replay roles are provided from Replay-A to Replay-D3 (winning numbers 1 to 6), and the replay roles displayed can vary depending on the stopping order and stopping positions of the left reel M51, center reel M52, and right reel M53. Here, in the first embodiment, as shown in the "Conditional Device" section in the far right column, multiple types of conditional devices can be displayed depending on the stopping order and stopping positions of the left reel M51, center reel M52, and right reel M53. Among these multiple types of conditional devices, conditional devices with the same winning number are grouped together and illustrated in the "Conditional Device (Name)" section in the third column from the right. Specifically, for example, in the "replay-A" condition device corresponding to the winning number 1, three types of condition devices, "replay 01," "replay 02," and "replay 03," can be displayed in a stopped state depending on the stopping order and stopping positions of the left reel M51, the center reel M52, and the right reel M53. Note that the "condition device (name)" may also be simply referred to as the condition device. Furthermore, a condition device related to a replay, such as "replay 01," may also be referred to as a "replay role," a condition device that pays out game medals upon winning, such as "prize 01," may also be referred to as a "minor role," and a condition device that starts a BB by being displayed in a stopped state, such as "Type 1 BB-A," may also be referred to as a "BB role." In addition, when the winning numbers 21 to 23 and 25 to 27 are won, the BB role and the small role will be won in overlapping, and in such a case, when the left stop button D41, the center stop button D42, and the right stop button D43 are operated at a position where the symbol corresponding to the winning small role can be stopped and displayed, the symbol corresponding to the BB role will not be stopped and displayed, but the symbol corresponding to the small role will be stopped and displayed, while when the left stop button D41, the center stop button D42, and the right stop button D43 are operated at a position where the symbol corresponding to the small role will not be stopped and displayed (cannot be pulled in), the symbol corresponding to the BB role will not be stopped and displayed. Specifically, for example, when the condition device "1st type BB-B + winning -C" of the winning number 21 is won, either the cherry which is "winning 12" or "winning 13" or the black seven which is "1st type BB-B" can be stopped and displayed. More specifically, when the reels are stopped in the order of left reel M51 → center reel M52 → right reel M53, (1) if the left stop button D41 is operated at a timing when symbol numbers 0 to 4 (see the reel arrangement in FIG. 6) are located on the top row of the left reel M51 at the first stop, symbol number 4 corresponding to "prize winning 12" will stop on the top row of the left reel M51, and "prize winning 12" will be displayed regardless of the stop positions of the center reel M52 and the right reel M53. (2) If the left stop button D41 is operated at a timing when symbol numbers 5 to 12 are located on the top row of the left reel M51 at the first stop, symbol number 6, 11, or 16 corresponding to "prize winning 13" will stop on the top row of the left reel M51, and "prize winning 13" will be displayed regardless of the stop positions of the center reel M52 and the right reel M53. (3-1) If the left stop button D41 is operated at the operation timing when the symbol numbers 13 to 19 are located in the upper row of the left reel M51 at the first stop, symbol number 17 or 19 corresponding to "Type 1 BB-B" will stop in the upper row of the left reel M51. (3-2) If the center stop button D42 is operated at the operation timing when the symbol numbers 14 to 18 are located in the middle row of the center reel M52 at the second stop, symbol number 18 corresponding to "Type 1 BB-B" will stop in the middle row of the center reel M52, and thereafter, if the right stop button D43 is operated at the operation timing when the symbol numbers 13 to 17 are located in the lower row of the right reel M53 at the third stop, symbol number 17 corresponding to "Type 1 BB-B" will stop in the lower row of the right reel M53, and the BB combination will be displayed as a stopped symbol. (3-3) If the center stop button D42 is operated at the timing when symbol numbers 19 to 13 are located in the middle row of the center reel M52 during the second stop, symbol number 18, which corresponds to "Type 1 BB-B," will not stop in the middle row of the center reel M52, and none of the condition devices will be displayed as stopped.

Next, the "Role" section illustrates the role of the "Conditional Device (Name)." The "Normal Replay" corresponding to winning number 1 is a conditional device related to replay in which a replay symbol is stopped and displayed without transitioning to the RT state, regardless of the order in which the stop buttons are pressed. The "Reverse Push White 7 Replay" corresponding to winning number 2 is a conditional device related to replay in which a replay symbol is stopped and displayed without transitioning to the RT state, regardless of the order in which the stop buttons are pressed. By operating the stop button at a timing when the symbol numbers in the range of 18 to 2 on the right reel M53, the range of 9 to 13 on the center reel M52, and the range of 5 to 10 on the left reel M51 are located at the bottom of each reel, "white sevens" are displayed stopped on the bottom of the right reel M53, center reel M52, and left reel M51, and from the player's perspective, the white sevens appear to be lined up in the bottom rows. Note that in a game in which a player wins Replay-B and wins the AT addition lottery, a presentation instructing the player to aim for "white sevens" by pressing the reels in reverse (details of which will be described later) is executed, thereby informing the player that he or she has won the AT addition lottery. The "Sequential Push Black Sevens Replay" corresponding to winning number 3 is a condition device for replay in which a replay symbol that does not transition to RT state is displayed stopped regardless of the order in which the stop button is pressed, but by pressing the reels in order (stopping the reels in the order of left reel M51 → middle reel M52 → right reel M53) and operating the stop button at a timing when the symbol numbers in the range of 13 to 19 on the left reel M51, the range of 14 to 18 on the middle reel M52, and the range of 13 to 17 on the right reel M53 are located at the bottom of each reel, "black sevens" are displayed stopped at the bottom of the left reel M51, middle reel M52, and right reel M53, and it is configured so that from the player's perspective, it appears as if the black sevens are lined up in the bottom rows. Furthermore, in games where a player wins Replay-C and wins the AT addition lottery, the game is configured to notify the player that they have won the AT addition lottery by executing an effect instructing them to aim for "black seven" by pressing the buttons in order (details will be described later).

In addition, the "RT Maintenance RP1** (3 choices)" corresponding to winning number 4 is a condition device in which the replay role that is displayed will differ depending on whether the first stopped reel is the left reel M51, middle reel M52 or right reel M53 (which stop button is operated).If the first stopped reel is the left reel M51, replay 01, replay 02 or replay 03, which do not result in a transition to the RT state, will be displayed, and if the first stopped reel is the middle reel M52 or right reel M53, replay 04, which may result in a transition from the RT state "RT1" to "RT0", will be displayed. Furthermore, the "RT Maintenance RP*1* (3 choices)" corresponding to winning number 5 is a condition device in which the replay role that is stopped and displayed can differ depending on whether the first stopped reel is the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, or the right reel M53 (which stop button is operated); if the first stopped reel is the middle reel M52, replay 03, which does not result in a transition to the RT state, is stopped and displayed, and if the first stopped reel is the left reel M51 or the right reel M53, replay 04, which may result in a transition from the RT state "RT1" to "RT0", is stopped and displayed. Additionally, the "RT Maintenance RP**1 (3 options)" corresponding to winning number 6 is a condition device in which the replay symbol displayed will differ depending on whether the first stopped reel is the left reel M51, middle reel M52, or right reel M53 (which stop button is operated); if the first stopped reel is the right reel M53, replay 01 or replay 03, which do not result in a transition to RT state, will be displayed; and if the first stopped reel is the left reel M51 or middle reel M52, replay 04, which may result in a transition from RT state "RT1" to "RT0", will be displayed.

Furthermore, "Push Order Bell 123" through "Push Order Bell 321," corresponding to winning numbers 7 through 12, are condition devices that determine which of six reel stopping orders determines the winning minor prize. For example, "left reel M51:1, middle reel M52:2, right reel M53:3." For example, "123" means the reels must be pressed in the order "left reel M51 → middle reel M52 → right reel M53." For example, in the case of "Prize-A1" (winning number 7), if the reels are pressed in the order "123" = "left → middle → right" (the correct push order), the symbol combination displayed will be "Prize 01," which allows for the maximum number of coins awarded, 11. The "123" in "Push Order Bell 123" indicates the push order (reel stopping order) that will allow for the maximum number of coins awarded for that winning number. Furthermore, if the reels are stopped in a push order other than the one that will allow the maximum number of coins to be won, i.e., if the push order is not correct, one coin will be paid out. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to create multiple game states with different profit margins for the player, such as navigating the push order for a replay role or the push order for a bell in AT-related states such as the "AT in progress" state (displaying the push order that will result in the highest profit on the push order display device D270), and not navigating the push order in AT-related states such as the "normal game state." AT-related states will be discussed later.

The "Common Bell," corresponding to winning number 13, allows players to win the maximum number of 11 game medals regardless of which of winning numbers 04 through 07 stops on the reel. In other words, it is a conditional device that allows players to win the maximum profit regardless of the order in which the buttons are pressed, and is sometimes called the "Order-independent Bell." Furthermore, the "Watermelon A," corresponding to winning number 15, is designed to make it easier for three watermelons (either Watermelon A or Watermelon B) to line up in parallel lines. For example, winning number 60, 14, in Figure 9, is achieved by three Watermelon A's lined up in the middle of each reel. Furthermore, "Watermelon B," corresponding to winning number 16, is configured to facilitate the formation of three watermelons (either Watermelon A or Watermelon B) in a diagonal line. For example, winning number 66 in FIG. 9 results in three watermelons lined up diagonally downward to the right, such as Watermelon B on the top row of the left reel M51, Watermelon B on the middle row of the middle reel M52, and Watermelon A on the bottom row of the right reel M53. Furthermore, "BB Medium Weak Rare Minor Symbol (Diagonal Bell Line)," corresponding to winning number 17, is a conditional device that allows three bells to line up on an active line. As will be described in detail later, this conditional device executes an AT addition lottery when the winning number is BB. Furthermore, "BB Medium Strong Rare Minor Symbol (V-shaped Bell Line)," corresponding to winning number 18, is a conditional device that allows bells to stop and be displayed on the top row of the left reel M51, the middle row of the middle reel M52, and the top row of the right reel M53. As will be described in detail later, this conditional device executes an AT addition lottery when the winning number is BB.

Next, in the "bonus winning information" field, a numerical value between 0 and 3 is assigned to each winning number. In the first embodiment, winning numbers that do not include a bonus (BB role) have a bonus winning information of 0, and for winning numbers that include a bonus (BB role), the bonus winning information for winning numbers (19) that include a type 1 BB-A is 1, the bonus winning information for winning numbers (20-23) that include a type 1 BB-B is 2, and the bonus winning information for winning numbers (24-27) that include a type 1 BB-C is 3. By storing the bonus winning information in the main control board M, it is possible to store information regarding whether or not a BB has been formed and which BB role has been won. Details of the bonus winning information will be provided later.

Next, in the "Prize/Replay Winning Information" field, a numerical value between 0 and 18 is assigned to each winning number. In the first embodiment, winning numbers that do not include a replay role or a small role (winning number 0 corresponding to a loss and winning numbers 19, 20, and 24 corresponding to a bonus) have a prize/replay winning information of 0, and winning numbers that include a replay role or a small role have prize/replay winning information of 1 to 18 assigned to each condition device. By storing prize/replay winning information in the main control board M, it is possible to store information regarding which replay role or small role has been won. Details of the prize/replay winning information will be provided later.

Next, in the "Effect Group Number" field, a number between 0 and 11 is assigned to each winning number. By transmitting the effect group number from the main control board M to the sub-control board S, the sub-control board S can determine the effect to be executed. Details of the effect group number will be provided later.

Next, in the "Ball Output Group Number" field, a number between 0 and 13 is assigned to each winning number. The main control board M stores the ball output group number, and by using this stored ball output group number when executing a lottery related to the AT (for example, an AT lottery or an AT add-on lottery), the program and data capacity required to execute the lottery process related to the AT can be reduced. Note that even if a conditional device with a ball output group number of 0 wins, the AT lottery and AT add-on lottery will not be executed. On the other hand, if a conditional device with a ball output group number other than 0 wins, an AT lottery or AT add-on lottery can be executed. Details of the ball output group number will be described later. Also, it is possible to configure the AT lottery or AT add-on lottery to be executed even if a conditional device with a ball output group number of 0 wins. In such a configuration, it is preferable to configure the lottery so that if a conditional device with a ball output group number of 0 wins and an AT lottery or AT add-on lottery is executed, the result of the lottery will always be a loss (non-winning).

Next, Figure 11 is a list showing the lottery probabilities (also called winning rates or winning probabilities) for the winning numbers (also called condition device numbers or winning roles) and bonuses (also called BB or BB roles) for small roles and replay roles in the first embodiment, which are determined by the role lottery means. This figure illustrates the winning rates for winning numbers.

First, we will explain the lottery probability in "RT0," "RT1," and "RT2" when the bonus bar is not activated. In the first embodiment, the appearance rate (lottery probability) of winning combinations (particularly replay combinations) can vary depending on the RT state. The "replay combination" (the combined appearance rate of all replay combinations) is higher in "RT1" than in other RT states. Furthermore, "Replay 04," which can be displayed as a stop symbol for winning numbers 4 through 6 (a so-called "falling replay combination"; when a symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is displayed as a stop symbol in "RT1" and no bonus is won, the game subsequently transitions to "RT0"), is primarily won in "RT1" and almost never appears in "RT0." Furthermore, in "RT2," "Replay 04," which can be displayed as a stop symbol for winning numbers 4 through 6, can appear, but the RT state does not transition even if "Replay 04" is displayed as a stop symbol. Furthermore, when "REPLAY 04" is displayed as a stopped symbol in "RT1," a fall effect (e.g., "Sorry" displayed on the effect display device S40) is executed, which is an effect informing the player that the game has transitioned to "RT0," i.e., that the RT state has fallen. However, when "REPLAY 04" is displayed as a stopped symbol in "RT0," the fall effect may not be executed. By configuring the game in this way, the player can recognize that they have won the BB because the fall effect was not executed even though "REPLAY 04" was displayed as a stopped symbol, thereby increasing the excitement of the game. Furthermore, in such a configuration, the sound effect output when "REPLAY 04" is displayed as a stopped symbol may be different from the sound effect output when a replay role other than "REPLAY 04" (e.g., "REPLAY 01," which does not result in a transition to the RT state) is displayed as a stopped symbol. This configuration makes it easier for the player to recognize that "REPLAY 04" has been displayed as a stopped symbol. In addition, the player may stay in "RT1" in both an AT-related state in which push order navigation does not occur (for example, a "normal gaming state," sometimes referred to as a non-AT gaming state) and an AT-related state in which push order navigation can occur (for example, an "AT state," sometimes referred to as an AT gaming state). In this case, when a winning number that may transition (fall) from "RT1" to "RT0" is selected, a special sound effect indicating the possibility of the RT state falling may not be output based on the operation of the start lever D50 in the non-AT gaming state. This makes it possible to transition the gaming state without informing the player that there is a possibility of falling to "RT0" in the non-AT gaming state. On the other hand, in the AT gaming state, a special sound effect indicating the possibility of the RT state falling may be output based on the operation of the start lever (and a push order navigation in which a replay role that does not fall to the RT state is displayed as a stop). This allows the player to operate the stop button D40 carefully after the special sound effect is announced to avoid losing the RT state. Furthermore, "Replay 05," which can be displayed as a winning number 2 or 3 (a replay role that can notify a player of a win in the AT bonus lottery when displayed as a winning number in the AT state), primarily appears in "RT1" and rarely appears in other RT states. The transitions in the RT state associated with the display of these replay role symbol combinations will be described later. As described below, in the first embodiment, a push order navigation system that notifies the player of the most advantageous reel stop order is implemented by the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40. The lottery probability can be adjusted as needed. In the first embodiment, the bonus is configured to overlap with minor roles, overlapping with parts of watermelon A, watermelon B, and cherry. Specifically, winning numbers 21-23 and winning numbers 25-27 are condition devices that overlap bonus and small win combinations.

Also, in "RT2" mode, if a player has won BB and BB has not yet been activated, if the player wins the BB role (a single BB role that does not overlap with the small role, and is sometimes referred to as a single BB role or a single BB) with winning numbers 20 and 24, the new BB role win will be invalid, and only the small role win will be valid. Specifically, for example, if the player is in "RT2" mode and has won (carried over) a Type 1 BB-A, and wins "Type 1 BB-C" with winning number 24, the Type 1 BB-C associated with said winning number 24 will be invalid. In other words, the situation is the same as if the player had won the "loser" winning number 0. However, the carried-over Type 1 BB-A will continue to be a winning role. Furthermore, in the "RT2" situation, since the BB has been won and the BB has not yet been activated, if a win occurs on a condition device where the BB role overlaps with the minor role of winning numbers 21-23 and winning numbers 25-27, the new win of the BB role will be invalid, and only the minor role win will be valid. Specifically, for example, in the "RT2" situation, and a Type 1 BB-A has been won (carried over), if the "Type 1 BB-B + Prize-C" of winning number 21 is won, the Type 1 BB-B associated with the winning number 21 will be invalid, and only the Prize-C will be valid. In other words, the situation will be the same as if the "Prize-C" of winning number 14 had been won. Note that the carried-over Type 1 BB-A will continue to be won. Note that overlap with the bonus is not limited to minor roles, and overlap with part of the replay role may also occur. For example, part of the replay role of winning numbers 4-6 may overlap with the bonus role. In this way, by overlapping the bonus with a condition device including an RT transition replay (a replay role that can transition to the RT state), there is a possibility that a bonus will be won even when the condition device including the RT transition replay is won, and the bonus is not denied even if the RT transition replay is stopped and displayed, which can raise the player's expectations. Note that with this configuration, the RT state is controlled not to transition even if the RT transition replay is stopped and displayed. This makes it possible for the player to increase their interest in the game by thinking that there is a high possibility that they may have won a bonus, because the replay probability has not become low (replays are frequently won) even though the RT state should have transitioned (transitioned to an RT state with a relatively low replay probability), etc.

Next, we will explain in detail the lottery probability for "Type 1 BB-A, B, C" when BB is activated. In the first embodiment, when BB is activated, three minor winning combinations are possible: "Common Bell" for winning number 13, "BB Medium Weak Rare Minor Combination (Diagonal Bell Alignment)" for winning number 17, and "BB Medium Strong Rare Minor Combination (V-shaped Bell Alignment)" for winning number 18. If "BB Medium Weak Rare Minor Combination (Diagonal Bell Alignment)" or "BB Medium Strong Rare Minor Combination (V-shaped Bell Alignment)" is won during the operation of a BB that has been won in the "AT state," an AT addition lottery is executed (details will be provided later).

The upper part of the figure illustrates the appearance rate of minor prizes when the setting value is 1. The appearance rate of the common bell (winning number 13) is uniform regardless of the RT state. However, as shown in the lower part of the figure, the appearance rate of the common bell varies depending on the setting value (six levels in this example). Specifically, the number of balls placed in setting 1 is 3204, the number of balls placed in setting 2 is 3404, the number of balls placed in setting 3 is 3604, the number of balls placed in setting 4 is 3904, the number of balls placed in setting 5 is 4204, and the number of balls placed in setting 6 is 4504. The appearance rate is configured to increase as the setting value increases. For example, if a player plays while counting the number of common bell appearances (number of wins), frequent wins on the common bell allow the player to play with the expectation that the setting value for the gaming machine they are playing is relatively high. Furthermore, the higher the setting value, the higher the expected value per game, and the higher the setting value, the higher the payout rate. The appearance rate of the common bell is configured to differ depending on the setting value, but if the common bell is won, the AT lottery, AT additional lottery, and high probability state transition lottery described below will not be executed, so it is configured not to affect the AT state transition lottery (also called the AT lottery).

The middle section of the figure is a list of expected values when push order navigation is enabled. The figure shows the average payout per game (the average number of medals paid out for winning minor roles, also referred to as the expected number of gaming media obtained in one game) and the expected medal increase/decrease per game (the ratio of the number of medals paid out to the number of medals inserted when playing with a three-coin bet; if the expected value is greater than 1, the expected value is positive and medals will increase, while if the expected value is less than 1, the expected value is negative and medals will decrease). The average payout per game can be calculated as follows: "Total number of replay combinations (total number of combinations for winning numbers 1-6) × number of payouts for replay combinations (3) + total number of small combinations (11 combinations) (small combination appearance rate) (total number of combinations for winning numbers 7-16) × number of payouts for small combinations (11 combinations) (11) / total number of combinations (65,536)." The expected medal increase/decrease per game can be calculated as follows: "Average number of payouts per game / number of medals inserted per game (3)." The number of medals inserted per game (number of gaming media inserted per game) is three, and when the average payout per game is greater than three, the expected medal increase/decrease per game is greater than one. As shown in the figure, in the first embodiment, "RT1" has the largest expected medal increase/decrease per game. Note that the numerical values in the figure do not take into account the increase or decrease in medals due to bonuses. In other words, when a game is played in a situation where push order navigation occurs (also referred to as when the game is played in the optimal operation mode or the advantageous operation mode), medals will increase in "RT1." In "RT0" and "RT2," although not shown, when push order navigation does not occur, the expected medal increase or decrease per game is less than 1, resulting in a decrease in medals. In the first embodiment, when push order navigation is present in "RT0" or "RT2," the expected medal increase or decrease per game is greater than 1. However, this is not limited to this, and the expected medal increase or decrease per game in "RT0" or "RT2" when push order navigation is present may be configured to be less than 1. Furthermore, when a symbol combination resulting in a replay win is stopped and displayed, the number of coins bet in the previous game (3 coins) is actually automatically bet, but when calculating the expected medal increase/decrease value in the first embodiment, it is calculated assuming that 3 coins will be paid out. Furthermore, one game may be referred to as one game.

In addition, the average payout per game in each RT state is 3.511291504 when the RT state is "RT0," 4.737915039 when the RT state is "RT1," and 3.67137146 when the RT state is "RT2." In addition, the expected medal increase/decrease per game in each RT state is 1.170430501 when the RT state is "RT0," 1.579305013 when the RT state is "RT1," and 1.223790487 when the RT state is "RT2." When push order navigation is enabled, the RT state "RT1" is the most advantageous RT state for players. Note that these values are for setting 1. It should be noted that the winning numbers and bonus lottery probabilities for the above-mentioned small roles and replay roles are merely examples, and for example, the expected medal increase/decrease value per game in "RT2" when BB is internally established (expected medal increase/decrease value when push order navigation is present) may be configured to be less than 1. By configuring it in this way, in a situation where push order navigation occurs and it is "RT2" (when BB is internally established), even if a bonus is not lined up in a game in which a bonus can be lined up, the number of medals held will gradually decrease, and in a situation where push order navigation occurs and it is "RT2" (when BB is internally established), it is possible to prevent strategies such as increasing the number of medals held by intentionally not lined up in a game in which a bonus can be lined up. Specifically, it is preferable to design the probability of a loss in "RT2" to be higher than the probability of winning all of the small roles (WINNING-A1 to WINNING-I) that can be won in "RT2", and it is preferable to set the probability of winning the replay role so that it is designed in this way (if the winning probability of the replay role is designed to be high, the probability of a loss will be lowered accordingly, so it is preferable to design the winning probability of the replay role so that it is not too high). In "RT2" in this example, the winning probability of all small roles combined is 18784/65536, the winning probability of all replays combined is 12501/65536, and the losing probability is 34251/65536 (see Figure 11), and the game is designed so that the losing probability is higher than the winning probability of all small roles combined.

Also, as shown in Figure 11, in the first embodiment, the appearance rate of Type 1 BB-A is assigned the same number, 40, for all settings 1 to 6. Also, the appearance rate of Type 1 BB-C is assigned the same number, 160, for all settings 1 to 6. In contrast, the appearance rate of Type 1 BB-B is assigned 160 for setting 1, 180 for setting 2, 200 for setting 3, 220 for setting 4, 240 for setting 5, and 270 for setting 6. In other words, the number assigned to the appearance rate of Type 1 BB-B varies depending on the setting value. In this way, Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C function as BBs with no setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C may be referred to as BBs with no setting difference or bonuses without setting difference), and Type 1 BB-B functions as BBs with setting difference (Type 1 BB-B may be referred to as BBs with setting difference or bonuses with setting difference). Also, Type 1 BB-A, Type 1 BB-B, and Type 1 BB-C all have a uniform appearance rate regardless of the RT state (between "RT0" and "RT1"). Note that the appearance rate of Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C (combined) is the same regardless of the setting value, but the appearance rate of Type 1 BB-B (combined) differs depending on the setting value. Furthermore, the combined appearance rate of Type 1 BB-B is the same even if the setting value is different, but the appearance rate for each winning number may be configured to differ depending on the setting value, and even in such a case, Type 1 BB-B may be referred to as BB with setting difference.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine P according to the first embodiment will be explained with reference to the block diagram in Figure 12. First, the slot machine according to the first embodiment is configured around a main control board M that controls the progress of the game, with a sub-control board S, door board D, slot board K, power supply board E, relay board IN, setting key switch M20, set/reset button M30, and other components connected to enable data exchange. Note that the solid lines in the figure indicate movements related to data exchange, and the dashed lines in the figure indicate the power supply route. Note that the power supply route is not limited to this; for example, power may be supplied from power supply board E to relay board IN or door board D without passing through the main control board.

The main control board M (sometimes referred to as the main control means, main board, main control means, main board, or main gaming unit) is the board that controls the overall progress of the game played on the reel-type gaming machine P. The main control board M is equipped with a main control chip C, which is equipped with a CPU C100 (sometimes referred to as CPU MC), an internal ROM C110, an internal RAM C120, and other components that are connected via a bus to enable data exchange. The main control board M receives signals indicating that the start lever D50 or other components have been operated from the door board D mounted on the front door DU, and outputs control commands (or control signals) to the sub-control board S, door board D, reel board K, and other components, thereby controlling the operation of these various boards. (For example, by outputting an instruction number (also referred to as a push order number, instruction information, or operation information) to the sub-control board S, the sub-control board S can execute push order navigation on the performance display device S40.)

The sub-control board S (sometimes referred to as the sub-control means, sub-board, sub-control means, sub-board, or sub-game section) is also equipped with a sub-control chip SC, similar to the main control board M described above. The sub-control chip SC is equipped with a CPU SC100, ROM, RAM, etc., which are connected via a bus to enable data exchange. The sub-control board S is also connected to various LED lamps S10 (including a bet button lamp S50 and a stop button lamp S60), a speaker S20, a performance display device S40, a reel backlight (also referred to as a back lamp) S30, etc. The reel backlight S30 is a light located inside each of the left reel M51, center reel M52, and right reel M53, which illuminates the patterns drawn on the reel surfaces from behind. The sub-control board S analyzes control commands received from the main control board M and outputs drive signals to various LED lamps S10, speakers S20, effect display devices S40, and reel backlights S30, thereby producing various effects. The reel backlights S30 in this example are equipped with multiple LEDs to allow players to individually identify nine areas: the top, middle, and bottom of the left reel; the top, middle, and bottom of the middle reel; and the top, middle, and bottom of the right reel. For example, the LED corresponding to the top of the left reel is illuminated while all other LEDs are off, allowing the player to identify that the top of the left reel is illuminated. The reel backlights S30 are also configured to execute a backlight effect (sometimes referred to as a "backlight effect") that indicates to the player that a specific symbol combination has been displayed by changing the illumination state of the reel backlights S30 when the specific symbol combination is displayed.

The door board D is equipped with the aforementioned insertion acceptance sensor D10s, the first insertion sensor D20s, the second insertion sensor D30s, the stop button D40 for stopping the spinning reel M50, the start lever D50 for starting the spinning of the reel M50, the settlement button D60 for paying out the accumulated game medals (credits) and inserted game medals and ending the game, and various display panels D70 for displaying the game status (not shown, but the aforementioned insertion number indicator light D210, start lever D50, The front door D1 is connected to the main control board M, which is also connected to the main control board M. The main control board M is connected to the front door D180, the replay lamp D290, the insertable lamp D300, the special game status indicator D250, the payout number indicator (push order indicator) D270, the credit number indicator D200, the advantageous zone indicator YH, and other display devices. The front door D10s is also connected to the main control board M via the main control board D to exchange data. When the start lever D50, stop button D40, or settlement button D60 on the front door DU is operated, a signal related to the operation is sent to the main control board M via the main control board D. A signal indicating the insertion of a medal by the insertion acceptance sensor D10s is also sent to the main control board M via the main control board D.

The reel board K is also connected to a reel motor K10 for rotating the reel M50 and a reel sensor K20 for detecting the rotational position of the reel M50. The reel board K drives the reel motor K10 while detecting the rotational position of the reel M50 using the reel sensor K20, thereby stopping the reel M50 at a predetermined stop position. In the first embodiment of the reel-type gaming machine, a so-called step motor (sometimes referred to as a stepping motor) is used for the reel motor K10. The step motor is set to 480 steps, which corresponds to one rotation of the reel M50. Each reel (left reel M51, center reel M52, right reel M53) is set with a predetermined number (e.g., 20) of approximately uniformly sized symbols, and the number of steps corresponding to one symbol is set to 24 steps (= 480/20). Furthermore, there is no problem with changing the number of steps or the number of symbols per reel rotation.

The medal payout device H is also connected to the main control board M via the relay board IN, and pays out a predetermined number of game medals (for example, 10) based on control signals from the main control board M. The medal payout device H is also connected to a first payout sensor H10s and a second payout sensor H20s, which determine whether the medals have been paid out correctly and measure the number of game medals paid out, as well as a hopper motor H80, which rotates the disc H50.

The power consumed by these various control boards and boards is supplied from power supply board E (a board that controls whether or not power is supplied using power switch E10). In Figure 12, the dashed arrows indicate how power is supplied from power supply board E. As shown, power is supplied directly to main control board M and sub-control board S from power supply board E, and power is supplied to the various boards (door board D, reel board K, relay board IN) via main control board M. A predetermined amount of AC voltage (e.g., 100V) is supplied to power supply board E, which converts this power to a specified DC voltage before supplying it to each control board and board.

The main control board M is also connected to a setting key switch M20 used to execute the setting change device control process (to change settings), which will be described later, and a set/reset button M30 that can change setting values and reset errors. The main control board M also has reel control means that controls the rotation and stopping of the reels M50 (left reel M51, center reel M52, right reel M53), AT lottery means that executes an AT transition lottery to transition to an "AT in progress" state, which is an AT-related state that is advantageous to the player, and AT addition lottery means that executes an AT addition lottery to increase the number of remaining AT games (or the counter value of the AT counter M60), which is the number of games that can be played in the "AT in progress" state.

Next, Figures 13 to 36 are flowcharts showing the general processing flow performed by the main control board M in the first embodiment.

The flowchart is primarily composed of processing steps (shown as rectangles), decisions (shown as diamonds), flow lines (arrows), and terminals (shown as rounded rectangles) indicating start, end, return, etc. Furthermore, when a processing step is shown in detail in another flowchart, the part that references that other flowchart is shown as a subroutine (shown as a rectangle with double lines on both sides). During the development stage of gaming machines, gaming machines with different specifications are often developed at the same time. In this example, the main processing is configured so that subroutines executed on gaming machines with different specifications (subroutines that are not normally used) do not remain, preventing processing related to unused subroutines that are not normally executed from being executed due to noise or fraudulent activity.

First, Figure 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of processing executed for the first time by the CPU C100 of the main control board M after the power to the slot machine P is turned on (or upon system reset or user reset). First, in step 1000, after the power to the slot machine P is turned on, in step 1002, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes timer interrupt initialization (here, the timer interrupt is not started, but only the type of timer interrupt is set; in subsequent processing, once the timer interrupt is started, the flowchart related to the timer interrupt processing described below is executed periodically). Next, in step 1004, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes serial communication settings (settings of speed, data length, data transmission method, etc.) as function settings for the main control chip C. Next, in step 1006, the CPU C100 of the main control board M calculates a checksum from the starting address of the RAM area to the address immediately preceding the checksum area. Next, in step 1008, the CPU C100 of the main control board M checks the RAM area (for example, checking whether the data stored in the internal RAM C120 has been correctly retained after power-off and power-off recovery based on the calculated checksum and the checksum data stored in the checksum area), and generates power-off recovery data. Next, in step 1010, the CPU C100 of the main control board M checks the switch state of the setting key switch M20. Next, in step 1014, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the setting key switch M20 is off.

If the answer is Yes in step 1014, then in step 1016, the CPU C100 of the main control board M references the on/off status of the power-off processing completed flag in RAM (which is set to On in step 1904) and the checksum status of all RAM (the check result in step 1006) to determine whether the power-off recovery data in RAM is normal. If the answer is Yes in step 1016, then in step 1020, the CPU C100 of the main control board M initializes the RAM area within the determined initialization range. Next, in step 1022, the CPU C100 of the main control board M restores the stack pointer based on the data related to the stack pointer saved during the power-off processing (step 1902). Next, in step 1036, the CPU C100 of the main control board M references the RAM area to determine whether the data related to the setting value in the RAM area is within the normal range (0 to 5 in this example). If the answer is Yes in step 1036, in step 1038, the CPU C100 of the main control board M reads the input port. Next, in step 1040, the CPU C100 of the main control board M starts the timer interrupt set in step 1002. Next, in step 1042, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns off the power-off processing completion flag and returns to processing at the time of power-off according to the restored stack pointer.

Also, if the answer is No in step 1016, in step 1024, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a backup error display (for example, sets an error number in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes the unrecoverable error processing described below.

Also, if the answer is No in step 1036, in step 1046, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets (for example, in the register area) a setting value error display (for example, to be displayed on the payout number display device D270). Next, in step 1300, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes the unrecoverable error processing described below.

Also, if the answer is No in step 1014, then in step 1028, the CPU C100 of the main control board M refers to the on/off status of the power-off processing completed flag in RAM (which is set to On in step 1904) and the checksum status of all RAM (the check result in step 1006) to determine whether the power-off recovery data in RAM is normal. If the answer is Yes in step 1028, then in step 1030, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines and sets (e.g., sets in the register area) the initialization range of RAM to a predetermined range excluding the memory area in RAM that stores setting values (setting value data), and proceeds to step 1034. The range not included in the initialization range of RAM is not limited to the memory area that stores setting values (setting value data), but also includes the total cumulative number of games in the "advantageous zone," the total cumulative number of games in the play zone (advantageous zone + normal zone), the calculated stay percentage in the "advantageous zone," etc. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to calculate and display the ratio of time spent in the "advantageous zone" in a game (advantageous zone ratio). The calculation process of the advantageous zone ratio is configured to calculate the ratio when a unit game ends. The advantageous zone ratio is displayed when the gaming machine is turned on (for example, displayed on a 4-digit 7-segment display). A specific display format is to repeatedly display the following order at 5-second intervals: advantageous zone ratio → consecutive feature ratio per 6000 games → feature ratio per 6000 games → cumulative consecutive feature ratio → cumulative feature ratio. The consecutive feature ratio is the "number of payouts when RB is activated / total payout number," and the feature ratio is the "number of payouts when RB, CB, or SB is activated / total payout number." On the other hand, if the answer is No at step 1028, at step 1032, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines and sets (for example, in the register area) the RAM initialization range to a specific range that includes the memory area in the RAM that stores the setting values (setting value data), and proceeds to step 1034. Next, at step 1034, the CPU C100 of the main control board M initializes the RAM area using the initialization range determined at step 1030 or step 1032. Next, at step 1100, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes the setting change device control process, which will be described later.

Although not shown, it is preferable to configure the temporary memory area (RAM area, etc.) installed on the main control board M so that its initial value (value at the start of processing) is not a value that will result in the execution of a special game (to prevent a special game from being executed by mistake if a process for determining whether to execute a special game is executed due to noise or fraudulent activity immediately after the program starts processing). Although not shown, when storing random numbers such as winning random numbers in the RAM area of the main control board M, it is preferable to secure a dedicated memory area and configure the byte storing information related to the random number to store only information related to that random number (not to store other information such as various timer values) (to prevent information related to the random number from being overwritten by noise, etc. when manipulating other data stored in the same byte).

Next, Figure 14 is a flowchart of the setting change device control process, also referred to as the setting change mode, which is a subroutine of step 1100 in Figure 13. First, in step 1102, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets the stack pointer (initializing it with the starting address of the process). Next, in step 1104, the CPU C100 of the main control board M activates a timer interrupt. Next, in step 1106, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the setting value (setting value data) in the RAM area is within the normal range (0 to 5 in this example). Note that if the setting value (setting value data) is managed as 1 to 6, it is necessary to initialize the RAM and return the setting value to "1" when it becomes "0." Therefore, in this example, by managing the normal range of the setting value (setting value data) as 0 to 5, the correction process of the setting value (setting value data) after initializing the RAM (the processes of steps 1106 and 1108) can be eliminated, making it possible to shorten the processing time and reduce the processing capacity. If the answer is Yes in step 1106, then in step 1108, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets the setting value (setting value data) to a predetermined value (for example, 0 = the value most disadvantageous to the player) and proceeds to step 1110. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1106, then the process also proceeds to step 1110. Next, in step 1110, the CPU C100 of the main control board M displays on the error display LED (e.g., the payout number display device D270) that the setting change device is operating (e.g., "88" which lights up all segments), displays the setting value on the setting display LED (not shown) (the display related to the setting value is a value obtained by adding 1 to the setting value (setting value data) stored in RAM), and proceeds to step 1112. As mentioned above, the payout number display device D270 is also used to notify the push order. Because of this configuration, for example, if some of the 7-segment LEDs are malfunctioning (some segments cannot be lit), incorrect information may be displayed when notifying the push order. To prevent such a situation, by lighting all 7 segments of the payout number display device D270 to "88" while the setting change device is operating, it is possible to confirm whether the 7-segment LEDs are malfunctioning and prevent any disadvantage to the player. Additionally, the configuration for displaying the setting value (setting value data) may include a RAM storage area for displaying the setting value, which stores data obtained by adding 1 to the setting value (setting value data) in the storage area for storing the setting value, and the setting value may be displayed by referencing this storage area. Note that, although not shown, after the processing of step 1110 is executed, processing is executed to send a command to the sub-control board S indicating that the mode has been changed to setting change mode.

Next, in step 1112, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the set/reset button M30 has switched from off to on. If the answer is yes in step 1112, then in step 1114 the CPU C100 of the main control board M adds 1 to the current setting value (setting value data) (if the setting value (setting value data) exceeds 5 as a result of the addition, the setting value (setting value data) becomes 0), and proceeds to step 1116. Note that if the answer is no in step 1112, then proceeds to step 1116. Next, in step 1116, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the start lever D50 has switched from off to on. If the answer is no in step 1116, then proceeds to step 1112, and the processing of steps 1112 to 1116 is looped. If the answer is Yes in step 1116, then in step 1118 the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the setting key switch M20 has switched from ON to OFF. If the answer is No in step 1118, then the processing of step 1118 is looped. On the other hand, if the answer is Yes in step 1118, then in step 1120 the CPU C100 of the main control board M displays on the error display LED (not shown) that operation of the setting change device has ended, erases the display of the setting value (setting value data) on the setting display LED (not shown), and proceeds to the game progress control processing of step 1200. Although not shown, after executing the processing of step 1120, the CPU C100 executes processing to send a command to the sub-control board S indicating that the setting change mode has ended.

Next, Figure 15 is a flowchart of the unrecoverable error processing related to the subroutine of step 1300 (and called in other flowcharts) in Figure 13. First, in step 1302, the CPU C100 of the main control board M disables interrupts (the flowchart related to the timer interrupt processing described below is not executed from this point on). Next, in step 1304, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets the output port address and the number of output ports. Next, in step 1306, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns off the output ports (in this example, 0 to 6, which are display outputs to various LEDs and drive outputs to various motors). Next, in step 1308, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets the next port output address (repeating this process sequentially stops display outputs to various LEDs and drive outputs to various motors). Next, in step 1310, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether output to each output port has ended. If the answer is Yes in step 1310, then in step 1312 the CPU C100 of the main control board M will display the set error (some kind of error occurred when this process was executed), and will repeat the process until the power supply voltage drops and a reset signal is input, ending the process. (In other words, the process will enter an infinite loop, and will not accept any operations to prompt a return.) If the answer is No in step 1310, then the process will proceed to step 1306. The processes in steps 1306 to 1310 clear the output to the LED and motor (however, since external output signals are not cleared, it is possible to output information about the error and the game progress at the time the error occurred to the hall computer).

Next, Figure 16 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (first page) related to the subroutine of step 1200 in Figure 14. First, in step 1202, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets the stack pointer (initializing it with the starting address of the process). Next, in step 1203, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets the data in the RAM area necessary for the game (e.g., the maximum bet number, the pay line for winning, etc.). Note that step 1203 also includes processing to set data ("0" data to clear the RAM address) to clear the data used in the previous game (e.g., the condition device number (winning number), effect group number, instruction information) used in the previous game. Note that the condition device number, effect group number, instruction information, etc. may be configured not to be cleared, but to overwrite the number selected when the next game is executed. Next, in step 1204, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets the RT state (for example, "RT0") for the game (the RT state determined in step 1704 of FIG. 27 is set). Next, in step 1205, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a command (a command to the sub-side) related to the RT state set in step 1204. The process of setting the RT state may be executed in step 1704 of FIG. 27. A command related to the RT state (a command to the sub-side) may also be set in step 1704. Furthermore, when transmitting the RT state to the sub-side, it is not necessary to transmit it all the time, and it may be configured so that the RT state is transmitted to the sub-side only when the gaming zone is a "favorable zone". Next, in step 1206, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets the state of the AT in the game (for example, "AT in progress" etc.) (step 1420, step 1429 of FIG. 21, step 1435, step 1439, step 1443 of FIG. 22, step 1444-3, step 1444-4 of FIG. 23). Next, in step 1207, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) regarding the state of the AT set in step 1206. Also, the process of setting the state of the AT may be executed in step 1416, step 1428 of FIG. 21, step 1438 of FIG. 22, and step 1444-1 of FIG. 23. Also, when transmitting the state of the AT to the sub side, it is not necessary to transmit it all the time, and it may be configured to transmit the state of the AT to the sub side only when the game zone is a "favorable zone". Next, in step 1208, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets the game zone (e.g., "advantage zone") for the game (the game zone determined in steps 3510, 3516, and 3520 of FIG. 31 is set). Next, in step 1208-1, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a command (a command to the sub-side) related to the game zone set in step 1208. Next, in step 1209, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the medal payout device H is full of game medals. Specifically, the medal payout device H is equipped with a medal auxiliary tank HS (details to be described later) that stores medals that have overflowed from the medal payout device H, and determines whether or not current is conducted by two fullness detection electrodes DE (details to be described later) that can be inserted into the medal auxiliary tank HS (if current is conducted through the medals, it is determined to be full). If the answer is Yes in step 1209, the process proceeds to step 1218.

On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1209, then in step 1210, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns on the medal-full error flag (e.g., updates the medal-full error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to ON). Next, in step 1212, the CPU C100 of the main control board M displays an error number corresponding to the medal-full error on a 7-segment LED (e.g., the storage indicator LED or the number of medals acquired LED). Next, in step 1214, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the medal-full error has been resolved (e.g., whether the current is not conducted by the two full detection electrodes provided on the medal auxiliary tank HS and the set/reset button M30 has been pressed). If the answer is Yes in step 1214, then in step 1216, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns off the medal-full error flag (e.g., updates the medal-full error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to OFF) and proceeds to step 1218. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1214, the process proceeds to step 1212. Next, in step 1218, the CPU C100 of the main control board M permits the insertion of a medal (the insertion operation will be automatically executed in the next game after the replay role), and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1220). Here, in step 1218, the blocker D100 is turned on (the process formed by the medal flow path). Specifically, if a replay role was achieved in the previous game, the blocker D100 is turned on provided that the current number of accumulated credits is less than a predetermined value (50 in this example). In other words, if the current number of accumulated credits is equal to the predetermined value, the blocker D100 is not turned on. On the other hand, if a replay role was not achieved in the previous game, the blocker D100 is turned on uniformly. By configuring it in this way, even if a replay role is achieved, if the number of accumulated credits (credits) has not reached a predetermined value, game medals can be inserted, and the player can play rhythmically (without feeling uncomfortable) even when the player is in an RT state (for example, "RT1") where the probability of winning a replay role is higher than in RT states such as "RT1", or when a replay role that is not easily recognizable as a replay role (a replay disguised as a minor role: a symbol combination such as bell-bell-bell on an invalid line or a cherry on the left reel) stops.

Next, Figure 17 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (second page) related to the subroutine of step 1200 in Figure 16. First, in step 1220, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not game medals have been bet or saved (i.e., no credits exist). If the answer is Yes in step 1220, in step 1221, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting value display condition is met (for example, the condition is met when the door switch D80 and the setting key switch M20 are all on). If the answer is Yes in step 1221, in step 1222, the CPU C100 of the main control board M displays the setting value on the setting display LED (not shown, but this may also be the payout number display device D270, credit number display device D200, or insertion number display light D210) (transitioning to setting confirmation mode), and transitioning to step 1221 on the condition that the setting key switch M20 is turned off. When the conditions for transitioning to the setting change mode are met, the CPU 100 executes a process for sending a command to the sub-control board S to start the setting change mode, and when the conditions for terminating the setting change mode are met, the CPU 100 executes a process for sending a command to terminate the setting change mode. If the answer is No in step 1220 or step 1221, in step 1224, the CPU C 100 of the main control board M executes management related to the insertion and settlement of game medals. Next, in step 1225, the CPU C 100 of the main control board M checks the number of game medals that can be accepted. Next, in step 1226, the CPU C 100 of the main control board M determines whether the blocker D100 is on. If the answer is Yes in step 1226, then in step 1227 the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the first insertion sensor D20s or the second insertion sensor D30s is on (in the first embodiment, two insertion sensors are provided for detecting the insertion of medals, and when the first insertion sensor D20s or the second insertion sensor D30s is on, it is determined that one game medal has been received). If the answer is Yes in step 1227, then in step 1230 the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s are off (when the first insertion sensor D20s or the second insertion sensor D30s is on and then the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s are off, it is determined that one received game medal has passed through the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s). If the answer is Yes at step 1230, then in step 1231 the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines that one normal gaming medal has been inserted. Although not shown, after step 1231, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the credit limit (50 in this example) and the number of bets are at the maximum (3 in this example), and if the answer is Yes, it controls the blocker D100 to be OFF (a state in which a medal flow path is not formed). If the answer is No at step 1230, the processing of step 1230 is repeated; if the answer is No at step 1226 or step 1227, the processing proceeds to step 1232.

Next, in step 1232, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the settlement button D60 has been operated. If the answer is Yes in step 1232, in step 1233, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether there are any remaining credits or betted game medals. If the answer is Yes in step 1233, in step 1234, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns on the hopper drive flag (a flag in the RAM area that is turned on when the hopper motor H80 is being driven) and executes the payout of one game medal. Next, in step 1236, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is ON (in the first embodiment, there are two payout sensors for detecting the payout of medals, and when the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is ON, it is determined that a payout operation of one game medal is being performed). If the answer is Yes in step 1236, the process proceeds to step 1247. Here, although not explicitly stated in the flowchart, if the previous game was a replay role, only the remaining number of credits will be subject to settlement.

On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1236, then in step 1241, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed since the hopper was driven (after the timing of processing step 1234). Specifically, it determines whether the situation in which it has been determined that no medals have been dispensed has continued for a predetermined time despite the hopper drive signal being sent to the hopper motor H80 (the hopper motor H80 is rotating). If the answer is Yes in step 1241, then in step 1242, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns on the medal empty error flag (e.g., updates the medal empty error flag area with a value equivalent to on). Next, in step 1244, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a medal empty error display. Next, in step 1245, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the medal empty error has been cleared (e.g., whether the set/reset button M30 has been pressed). If the answer is Yes in step 1245, then in step 1246 the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns off the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the medal empty error flag area in the RAM area with a value equivalent to OFF) and proceeds to step 1247. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1245, then proceeds to step 1244.

Next, in step 1247, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are off (if the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s turns on and then the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s turn off, it is determined that the payout operation for the one game medal that was being paid out has been completed). If the answer is Yes in step 1247, in step 1248, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns off the hopper drive flag and proceeds to step 1233. If the answer is No in step 1241 or step 1247, the CPU C100 proceeds to step 1236.

On the other hand, if the answer is No at step 1232 or step 1233, then in step 1251, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the start lever D50 is valid (for example, the specified number of game medals to start the game have been inserted) and whether the start lever D50 has been operated. If the answer is Yes at step 1251, then in step 1253, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the setting value in the RAM area is within the normal range (0 to 5 in this example). If the answer is Yes at step 1253, then in step 1254, the CPU C100 of the main control board M obtains a random number and turns off the blocker D100, before proceeding to the next process (processing at step 3600). On the other hand, if the answer is No at step 1253, then in step 1256, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a setting value error indication (for example, sets an error number in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes unrecoverable error processing. If the answer is No in step 1251, the process proceeds to step 1220.

Next, Figure 18 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third page) related to the subroutine of step 1200 in Figure 16. First, in step 3600, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes the internal lottery execution process described below. Next, in step 1259, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the current AT state is a state in which an AT add-on lottery can be executed. Here, in this example, the AT states in which an AT add-on lottery can be executed are the "AT state," the "add-on specialization state," the "specialization precursor state," and the "advantageous BB state." During "advantageous BB internal play," the AT counter value can be greater than 0, but the AT add-on lottery is not executed. This is to prevent a situation in which, during "advantageous BB internal play," it would be advantageous for the player to intentionally not match the BB symbol combination. Furthermore, the system may be configured so that an AT addition lottery can be executed during "play within an advantageous BB." In such a configuration, even if the AT addition lottery is won during "play within an advantageous BB," it may not be notified immediately, but rather, when the BB ends, it may be notified that the AT addition lottery has been won, or the number of remaining AT games after the number of AT games has been added.

If the answer is Yes in step 1259, then in step 1500 the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes the game count addition execution process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1400. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1259, then proceeds to step 1400 as well. This game count addition execution process can execute the lottery using different lottery tables depending on the AT status, but it is preferable that the lottery probability does not differ depending on the setting value (the lottery is executed using the same lottery table). Next, in step 1400, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes the AT state transition control process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1450, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes the condition device number management process, which will be described later.

Here, the states related to the AT in this example will be listed and described in detail (also shown in the AT state transition diagram in Figure 30). (1) The "low probability state" is a state in which the AT has not been won (the right to transition to the "AT state" has not been acquired) and the bonus role has not been won. Note that the "low probability state" is the so-called "normal state," and is therefore sometimes referred to as the "normal state." (2) "Normal BB internal play" is a state in which the BB role has been won in the "low probability state," the BB role has not been awarded, and the AT lottery has not been won. (3) "Normal BB state" is a state that is executed when a symbol combination corresponding to the BB role is displayed in a static state in a situation in which the BB role has been won in the "low probability state" and the AT lottery has not been won, or when a symbol combination corresponding to the BB role is displayed in a static state in the "normal BB internal play." (4) The "high probability state" refers to a state in which the player has not won the AT lottery (has not acquired the right to transition to the "AT state") and has not won a bonus role. This state is more likely to win the AT than the "low probability state" described above. As described below, when a new "high probability state" is entered, the player is not transitioned to the "low probability state" until the number of high probability games has elapsed. (5) The "AT state" refers to a state in which the AT (push order navigation) is performed and the number of remaining AT games (AT counter value) is subtracted. Even if the AT counter value becomes 0, if the player wins the continuation lottery described below, a predetermined value is set in the AT counter, and the "AT state" continues. (6) The "specialized precursor state" refers to a state in which the player has acquired the right to transition to the "addition-specialized state," in which the number of AT games is relatively more likely to be added than in the "AT state." (7) The "addition-specialized state" refers to a state in which the number of AT games is relatively more likely to be added than in the "AT state." (8) "Game during advantageous BB" is a state in which the BB role is won in the "high probability state", "AT state", "specialized precursor state" or "addition special state", and the BB role is not awarded. (9) "Game during waiting BB" is a state in which the BB role is won in the "low probability state", and the AT lottery is won by the BB role, and the BB role is not awarded. (10) The "advantageous BB state" refers to a state that is executed when a BB role is won and a symbol combination corresponding to the BB role is displayed in a static display in the "high probability state," "AT state," "specialized precursor state," or "addition specialization state," or when a symbol combination corresponding to the BB role is displayed in a static display in the "advantageous BB internal play." Alternatively, the "low probability state" refers to a state that is executed when a BB role is won, the BB role is won in the AT lottery, and a symbol combination corresponding to the BB role is displayed in a static display, or when a symbol combination corresponding to the BB role is displayed in a static display in the "standby BB internal play." (12) The "revival possibility effect state" refers to a state related to the AT that is entered when the AT counter value becomes 0 and the continuation lottery described below is not won. In the "revival possibility effect state," the revival lottery described below is executed, and if the revival lottery is won, the state transitions to the "AT in progress state" (a predetermined value is set in the AT counter), and if the revival lottery is not won, the state transitions to the "low probability state."

Next, in step 1550, the CPU C100 of the main control board M starts the rotation of all reels, as described below, and proceeds to step 1261-1. Next, in step 1261-1, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether there has been a request to create a pull-in point (requested to determine the stop positions of the spinning left reel M51, center reel M52, and right reel M53, and is requested as appropriate depending on the stop order and the stop positions of other reels). If the answer is Yes in step 1261-1, then in step 1262 the CPU C100 of the main control board M creates a pull-in point and proceeds to step 1263. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1261-1, then the CPU C100 also proceeds to step 1263. Thus, in the "BB internal game," even if the stop buttons are not pressed in the correct order to pay out 11 coins in a game in which the push-order bell is won (for example, in the case of prize-winning A1, the stop buttons are not pressed in the order "left → center → right") (if the reels are stopped in an incorrect order), the reel stop control (hereinafter referred to as "reel stop control" or simply "stop control") is configured to win a symbol combination that will pay out 11 coins. Next, in step 1263, the CPU C100 of the main control board M checks whether reel stop is acceptable. Next, in step 1264, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether any of the stop buttons (left stop button D41, center stop button D42, right stop button D43) have been operated. If the answer is Yes in step 1264, then in step 1265 the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the stop position of the reel corresponding to the operated stop button (for example, the left reel M51 corresponds to the left stop button D41). On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1264, then the process also proceeds to step 1266. Next, in step 1266, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes an all-reel stop check process. Next, in step 1267, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether all reels (left reel M51, center reel M52, right reel M53) have stopped. If the answer is Yes in step 1267, then in step 1268 the CPU C100 of the main control board M compares the symbol stop position data in RAM with the internal winning combination stop possible position data. Next, in step 1269, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the displayed symbol combination is normal (if it does not match the winning combination determined by the internal lottery, it is determined to be abnormal). The determination of whether the displayed symbol combination is normal in step 1269 is based on whether the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button was completed normally. Even if the stop button is operated in a manner that allows the winning combination to be won in a game in which a winning combination has been won, and the actual reel position that stopped is abnormal (the winning combination determined by the internal lottery does not appear to the player to have stopped), if the reel stop control is completed normally by the processing within the gaming machine, the payout of game medals based on the winning combination is executed. If the answer is Yes in step 1269, the process proceeds to step 1274. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1269, then in step 1270 the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a display determination error display (for example, by setting it in a register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes unrecoverable error processing. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1267, then the process proceeds to step 1261-1.

Next, in step 1274, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes the payout process for game medals due to a win. Next, in step 1275, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a win has occurred that will result in the payout of game medals {if the game medals acquired through the win exceed the maximum number of credits (50 in this example), the payout of game medals is executed}. If the answer is Yes in step 1275, in step 1276, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns on the hopper drive flag (a flag that is turned on when the hopper motor H80 is being driven) and executes the payout of one game medal. Next, in step 1277, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on (if the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on, it determines that the payout operation of one game medal is being performed). If the answer is Yes in step 1277, the process proceeds to step 1286.

On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1277, then in step 1279 the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed since the hopper was driven (after the timing of processing step 1276). If the answer is Yes in step 1279, then in step 1280 the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns on the medal empty error flag (e.g., updates the medal empty error flag area in the RAM area with a value equivalent to on). Next, in step 1281, the CPU C100 of the main control board M displays the medal empty error on the 7-segment LED. Next, in step 1282, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the medal empty error has been cleared (e.g., whether the set/reset button M30 has been pressed). If the answer is Yes in step 1282, then in step 1283 the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns off the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the medal empty error flag area in the RAM area with a value equivalent to OFF) and proceeds to step 1286. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1282, then proceeds to step 1281.

Next, in step 1286, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are off (if the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s turns on and then the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s turn off, it determines that the payout operation of the one game medal that was being paid out has been completed). If the answer is Yes in step 1286, then in step 1288, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns off the hopper drive flag and proceeds to step 1290. If the answer is No in step 1279 or step 1286, it proceeds to step 1277. Next, in step 1290, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the payout corresponding to the winning combination (the winning combination for which the answer was Yes in step 1275) has been completed. If the answer is Yes at step 1290, proceed to step 3400. If the answer is No at step 1286, proceed to step 1277; if the answer is No at step 1275, proceed to step 3400; and if the answer is No at step 1290, proceed to step 1276.

Next, in step 3400, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes the remaining game count management process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1700, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes the RT state transition control process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1750, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes the AT state start control process, which will be described later. Next, in step 3500, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes the game interval transition control process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1293, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes game end processing (e.g., clearing the number of bets, transitioning the game state, etc.) and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 1202).

Next, Figure 19 is a flowchart of the internal lottery execution process related to the subroutine of step 3600 in Figure 18 in the first embodiment. First, in step 3602, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets the internal lottery table (a table used when executing the internal lottery, which stores winning numbers and numbers to be compared with the acquired random number) and proceeds to step 3604. Next, in step 3604, the CPU C100 of the main control board M acquires the winning number associated with the set internal lottery table address. Furthermore, prize/replay winning information can be generated from the winning number. Furthermore, in the case where a bonus and a small combination are won simultaneously, or a bonus and a replay combination are won simultaneously, both prize/replay winning information and bonus winning information can be generated from the winning number. Specific generation processing will be described later. Next, in step 3606, the CPU C100 of the main control board M acquires the number of repetitions associated with the set internal lottery table address. Here, the number of repetitions refers to the number of consecutive winning numbers with the same payout group number and the same number of positions for comparison with the acquired random number, and is pre-stored in the ROM of the main control board M. For example, payout group number 2 includes nine winning numbers 4 through 12. The three consecutive winning numbers 4 through 6 that are push order replay roles have the same number of positions, and the six consecutive winning numbers 7 through 12 that are push order bell roles have the same number of positions. Therefore, the number of repetitions for the push order replay role is three, and the number of repetitions for the push order bell role is six. Note that the lottery table used when winning numbers 4 through 6 that are push order replay roles are acquired and the lottery table used when winning numbers 7 through 12 that are push order bell roles are acquired are configured as a single lottery table. Next, in step 3608, the CPU C100 of the main control board M acquires the payout group number associated with the set internal lottery table address and proceeds to step 3610.

Next, in step 3610, the CPUC100 of the main control board M acquires the setting value data. Next, in step 3612, the CPUC100 of the main control board M acquires the designated address data. Next, in step 3614, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the internal lottery was won (whether or not the acquired random number was present in the internal lottery table searched this time). If the answer is Yes in step 3614, it has been determined that the internal lottery was won, so the CPUC100 does not perform a judgment (lottery) for the subsequent internal lottery table address and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 1259). On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 3614, in step 3616, the CPUC100 of the main control board M updates the number of repetitions. Next, in step 3618, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there are any remaining repetitions. If the answer is Yes in step 3618, proceed to step 3610, and repeat the processing of steps 3610 to 3618 until the remaining number of repetitions is exhausted or the internal lottery is won. If the answer is No in step 3618, in step 3620, the CPU C100 of the main control board M updates the internal lottery table address (updates it to the address related to the next payout group number), proceeds to step 3604, and executes the processing from step 3604 onwards. The specific processing of the internal lottery will be described later.

Next, Figure 20 is a flowchart of the game number addition execution process related to the subroutine of step 1500 in Figure 18 in the first embodiment. First, in step 1502, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the state related to the AT is "AT state," "specialized precursor state," or "addition specialized state." If the answer is Yes in step 1502, in step 1504, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the payout group number related to the game in question is the payout group number (in this example, 1 or 3) related to the AT add-on role (a winning number that can add to the remaining AT game number in the "AT state," which in this example is Replay-B, Replay-C, and Win-D). If the answer is Yes in step 1504, proceed to step 1514. Also, if the answer is No in step 1502, in other words, if the state regarding the AT is a favorable BB state, in step 1512, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the payout group number for the game in question is a payout group number (in this example, 5, 6) for a BB add-on role (a winning number that can add to the number of remaining AT games in a "favorable BB state", in this example, winning -H, winning -I). If the answer is Yes in step 1512, proceed to step 1514, and if the answer is No in step 1512, proceed to step 1518. Also, if the answer is No in step 1504, in step 1506, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the state regarding the AT is a "add-on specialized state". If the answer is Yes in step 1506, then in step 1508 the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the payout group number for the game in question is the payout group number (in this example, 2, 13) for the special bonus role (a winning number that can add to the number of remaining AT games in the "specialized bonus state" but does not add to the number of remaining AT games in the "AT state"; in this example, it is Replay-A, Replay-D1 to D3, and Winning-A1 to A6). If the answer is Yes in step 1508, then proceed to step 1514. If the answer is No in step 1506 or step 1508, then proceed to step 1518.

Next, in step 1514, the CPU C100 of the main control board M references the winning-time additional game number lottery table and determines the number of AT additional games based on the payout group number for that game (for example, by determining whether the latched random number value falls within a range in the lottery table shown in the margin). Note that determining the number of AT additional games is also referred to as executing an AT additional lottery. Next, in step 1516, the CPU C100 of the main control board M adds the determined number of AT additional games to the counter value of the AT counter M60 and sets the AT counter value after the addition in the AT counter M60. Next, in step 1517, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a command related to the determined number of AT additional games (this is a command to the sub-control board S; by receiving this command, the sub-control board S can determine whether the AT game number has been added and how many games have been added), and proceeds to step 1518. Furthermore, in the case of payout group numbers 7 to 11, which are payout group numbers associated with winning numbers that include a bonus (winning numbers 19 to 27), a lottery for AT (AT lottery, AT additional lottery) can also be held.

Here, the lottery table shown outside the figure is an example of a lottery table for the number of additional games when a win occurs. In the first embodiment, if an additional role when a win occurs is won in some of the states related to the AT in which the push order navigation is executed (in this example, "AT state," "specialized precursor state," "addition specialized state," or "advantageous BB state"), the number of additional AT games will be determined by lottery from "0" to "300" based on the payout group number related to that game, and this determined value will be added to the counter value of the AT counter M60. Note that if "0" is determined, the number of remaining AT games will not increase (if "0" is determined, this is sometimes referred to as a non-win in the AT add-on lottery).

In addition, the average number of AT added games (expected value) when an additional winning role is won is the value shown in the figure. A specific calculation method is as follows: if the winning role is Watermelon A, it can be calculated as follows: {Number of places (600) x Number of AT added games (0) + Number of places (100) x Number of AT added games (10) + Number of places (300) x Number of AT added games (30) + Number of places (24) x Number of AT added games (100)} / Total number of places (1024) = 12.1 (games).

Next, if the winning role is Replay-B or Replay-C, it can be calculated as follows: {Number of places (500) x Number of AT added games (0) + Number of places (200) x Number of AT added games (50) + Number of places (300) x Number of AT added games (100) + Number of places (24) x Number of AT added games (300)} / Total number of places (1024) = 46.1 (games).

Next, if the winning combination is Replay-A or Replay-D1 to D3, or Winning-A1 to A6, the calculation can be made as follows: {Number of Places (300) x Number of AT Added Games (10) + Number of Places (600) x Number of AT Added Games (30) + Number of Places (124) x Number of AT Added Games (50)} / Total Number of Places (1024) = 26.61 (games). Note that if the winning combination is Replay-A or Replay-D1 to D3, or Winning-A1 to A6, the number of AT games will only be added if the AT status is in the "specialized add-on status."

Next, if the winning combination is a BB medium weak rare combination, it can be calculated as follows: {Number of places (800) x Number of AT added games (0) + Number of places (100) x Number of AT added games (10) + Number of places (100) x Number of AT added games (30) + Number of places (24) x Number of AT added games (100)} / Total number of places (1024) = 6.3 (games).

Next, if the winning combination is a strong rare combination in the BB, it can be calculated as follows: {Number of places (300) x Number of AT added games (0) + Number of places (300) x Number of AT added games (30) + Number of places (400) x Number of AT added games (50) + Number of places (24) x Number of AT added games (300)} / Total number of places (1024) = 35.4 (games).

In the first embodiment, when an AT addition lottery is executed, the average number of AT addition games can differ depending on the type of winning role, but the average number of AT addition games is configured not to differ depending on the setting value. Here, if the AT addition lottery is configured to be executed based on the winning number, for example, when the same process is executed as an AT addition lottery for winning numbers 7 and 8, a process must be executed to determine whether the winning number is 7 or 8. However, by configuring the AT addition lottery to be executed based on the payout group number, as in the first embodiment, when the same process is executed as an AT addition lottery for winning numbers 7 and 8, it is possible to execute the process for the AT addition lottery for either winning number 7 or winning number 8 simply by determining whether the payout group number is 2.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, next, in step 1518, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the winning number for the game in question (or this can be determined from the prize/replay winning information, or the ball payout group number, etc.) is the winning number for Replay-B (a reverse push white 7 replay, which is a replay in which the white seven can be aligned with the invalid line by stopping it with a reverse push). If the answer is Yes in step 1518, then in step 1520, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the number of AT games was added by Replay-B, in other words, whether the number of AT games added by winning Replay-B was not 0. If the answer is Yes in step 1520, then in step 1522, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a reverse push instruction command (a command to the sub-control board S, which executes an effect instructing the white seven to align with the invalid line by a reverse push ("right → center → left")), and proceeds to step 1526. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1520, then in step 1524 the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a reverse push avoidance command (a command to the sub-control board S that instructs a push order other than reverse push ("right → center → left") and executes an effect that prevents the white sevens from lining up on the invalid line), and proceeds to step 1526. Incidentally, if the answer is No in step 1518, then proceeds to step 1526. Next, in step 1526, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the winning number for the game (or the winning/replay winning information, or the payout group number, etc.) is a replay-C (a push-in-order black 7 replay, which is a replay in which the black sevens can be aligned in a straight line on the invalid line by stopping the pushes in order). If the answer is Yes in step 1526, then in step 1528 the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of AT games has been added by Replay-C, in other words, whether or not the number of AT games added by winning Replay-C was not 0. If the answer is Yes in step 1528, then in step 1530 the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a sequential push instruction command (a command to the sub-control board S, which will execute an effect instructing the player to align black sevens on an invalid line by pressing in order ("left → center → right")), and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1400). On the other hand, if the answer is No at step 1528, then at step 1532 the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a sequential push avoidance command (a command to the sub-control board S, which instructs a push order other than the sequential push order ("left → middle → right") and executes an effect that prevents black sevens from lining up on an invalid line), and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1400). Note that even if the answer is No at step 1526, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1400). In the first embodiment, a reverse push instruction command, a reverse push avoidance command, a forward push instruction command, and a forward push avoidance command are sent to the sub-control board S, and the sub-control board S receives these commands, so that the sub-control board S can execute effects related to push order navigation. However, this is not limited to this, and when the AT addition lottery is won, a command indicating that the AT addition lottery has been won and related to the number of AT addition games (for example, a command related to the number of AT addition games related to the processing of step 1517) can be sent to the sub-control board S, and when the sub-control board S receives this command, the sub-control board S can determine the timing of execution of effects related to push order navigation and the presentation style. As an example, in a game in which Replay-B is won, the sub-control board S may be configured to select and execute a presentation mode instructing reverse pressing in the game in which the command is received (a game in which the AT game number is added), or the sub-control board S may be configured not to execute a presentation instructing reverse pressing in the game in which the command is received, but to execute a presentation instructing a press order that will result in a 7-line on an invalid line in a game in which a specified condition is subsequently met (for example, winning a specific replay role (for example, Replay-B or C)). Alternatively, in a game in which Replay-B is won and the sub-control board S receives the command (a game in which the number of AT games is added), the effect of instructing reverse pressing is not executed, and an AT game number addition effect (an effect in which the display relating to the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 increases, for example, displaying "+30G") may be executed in a game in which a predetermined condition (for example, after a predetermined number of games (a consecutive effect may be executed at the same time, in which case it is the final game of the consecutive effect) is satisfied) is executed. In this example, the effect display device S40 is also configured to be able to display a display relating to the number of remaining AT games, and this display and the number of remaining AT games stored on the main control board side may be the same or different. In addition, in a game in which Replay-B is won and the sub-control board S receives the command (a game in which the number of remaining AT games is added), the effect of instructing reverse pressing is not executed, and an AT game number addition effect (an effect in which the display relating to the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 increases, for example, displaying "+30G") may be executed. An example of a case where a presentation instructing reverse pressing is not executed in a game where the number of games is added, and an AT game number addition presentation is executed in a subsequent game that satisfies a predetermined condition, is when the sub-control board S is executing a special presentation (for example, a predetermined consecutive presentation) that encourages winning a bonus (since the probability of winning Replay-B within the bonus is low (including 0%), if a press sequence that allows for a 7-line is announced, the player will realize that they have not won the bonus).In addition, the information that the sub-control board S uses to determine that the main control board M has won the AT addition lottery and that the number of remaining AT games has been added is (1) information regarding the number of remaining AT games is sent from the main control board M to the sub-control board S after the AT addition lottery.After that, the sub-control board S sends the information regarding the number of remaining AT games sent last time to the sub-control board S. (2) A command relating to the number of AT add-on games obtained as a result of the AT add-on lottery on the main control board M side is sent to the sub-control board S side. Also, if the AT add-on lottery is not won, a command indicating that the AT add-on lottery was not won is sent to the sub-control board S side, and when the sub-control board S side receives this command, the sub-control board S side may be configured to determine the presentation mode of the presentation related to the push order navigation. As an example, in a game in which Replay-B is won, and the sub-control board S side receives the command (a game in which the AT game number was not added), a presentation mode instructing a middle push (operating the middle stop button as the first stop, a push order that avoids lining up 7s) is selected. It may also be configured to execute the AT addition lottery as follows. Note that the AT addition lottery was executed on the main control board M side, but the information that the sub-control board S uses to determine that the number of remaining AT games was not added is as follows: (1) information regarding the number of remaining AT games is sent from the main control board M side to the sub-control board S side after the AT addition lottery. The sub-control board S then calculates the difference between the information regarding the number of remaining AT games sent last time and the information regarding the number of remaining AT games sent this time, and determines the number of additional AT games that was won in the AT addition lottery (if the value obtained by subtracting the information regarding the number of remaining AT games sent this time from the information regarding the number of remaining AT games sent last time is 1, it is determined that the AT addition lottery was not won), and (2) a command is sent to the sub-control board S side indicating that the number of additional AT games is 0 as a result of the AT addition lottery on the main control board M side.

Next, Figure 21 is a flowchart (first page) of the AT state transition control process related to the subroutine of step 1400 in Figure 18 in the first embodiment. First, in step 1402, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the current AT state is a state in which an AT lottery can be executed. Note that in the first embodiment, the only AT state in which an AT lottery can be executed is the "high probability state." Winning a BB in the "high probability state" transitions to "advantageous BB internal play." Then, by winning a BB role, the state transitions to the "advantageous BB state." When the executed BB ends, the state transitions to the "AT in progress state," and the AT counter is set to the initial value of 50 AT games. Note that even if a BB is won in the "low probability state," the state transitions to "normal BB internal play" and does not then transition to the "AT in progress state." However, this is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that when a BB is won in the "normal gaming state," the BB role can trigger a win in the AT lottery. In such a configuration, if a BB is won in the "normal gaming state" and the BB role triggers a win in the AT lottery, the game will transition to an "advantageous BB internal game," and then, by lining up BBs, the game will transition to an "advantageous BB state." Note that, in an internal state where a BB is won in the "normal gaming state" but BBs are not lined up, the game zone may be a "advantageous zone" or a "standby zone." If the answer is Yes in step 1402, in step 1404, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the condition device related to the game is an AT lottery role (in this example, a first-type BB-A or first-type BB-C, which is a BB role without setting difference). In the first embodiment, both winning numbers with only BB (winning numbers 19 and 24) without setting differences and winning numbers with both BB and minor winning combinations (winning numbers 25, 26, and 27) are AT lottery winning combinations. If step 1404 returns Yes, in step 1406, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the AT status for the next game onward as "game in advantageous BB" and proceeds to step 1410. Also, if step 1402 or step 1404 returns No, the process proceeds to step 1410. In the first embodiment, the AT winning rate (whether or not a win occurs) for the AT lottery is configured to differ when the AT status differs. However, when the AT status is the same, the AT winning rate for the AT lottery is the same even if the setting value differs (if BB is won in the "high probability state," the AT is always won regardless of the setting value = the process then transitions to the "AT in progress state").

Next, in step 1410, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the state of the AT for the next game and beyond has not been determined. If the answer is Yes in step 1410, then in step 1412, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the current state of the AT is a "low probability state." If the answer is Yes in step 1412, then in step 1414, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the condition device for that game is a state promotion role (a small role that can transition from a "low probability state" to a "high probability state" if won; in this example, a cherry). If the answer is Yes in step 1414, then in step 1416, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a high-probability state transition lottery with a predetermined probability (1/2 in this example, which can be changed as long as it is not different from the set value). Next, in step 1418, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the executed high-probability state transition lottery was won. If the answer is Yes in step 1418, in step 1420, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the AT state for the next game and beyond to be a "high probability state" and proceeds to step 1430.

Also, if the answer is No in step 1412, then in step 1424 the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the current AT state is a "high probability state." If the answer is Yes in step 1424, then in step 1426 the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the counter value of the high probability obstacle counter KHc is 1 (the final game of the high probability obstacle state, and the 10th game since the "high probability state" was entered). If the answer is Yes in step 1426, then in step 1428 the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the low probability transition condition is met. In the first embodiment, when the AT state is a "high probability state," the game zone becomes a "favorable zone." When the game zone is a "favorable zone," the "favorable zone" is configured to not end unless the push order navigation is executed at least once or the "favorable zone" continues for a predetermined number of games (1,500 games in this example). (In other words, even if the low-probability state transition lottery is won, the "high-probability state" is not terminated if the low-probability transition condition is not met, for example, because the push order navigation has not been executed at least once.) Furthermore, if a BB role is won during the "favorable zone" and the BB is executed, the "favorable zone" may be configured to end at any time, even if the push order navigation has not been executed even once during the "favorable zone." If the answer is Yes in step 1428, in step 1429, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the AT state for the next game and thereafter to be a "low-probability state" and proceeds to step 1430. Here, the low-probability transition condition is satisfied when the push order navigation is executed once. If push order roles (winning numbers in which the winning combination differs depending on the reel stop order and the player's profit rate differs) include roles with a maximum payout of 8 coins and roles with a maximum payout of 11 coins, the low-probability transition condition may be satisfied when the push order navigation for the role with the larger maximum payout of 11 coins is executed once. Furthermore, if the answer is No in step 1410, step 1414, step 1418, step 1424, step 1426, or step 1428, the process proceeds to step 1430. Thus, in the first embodiment, when a new transition to the "high probability state" occurs, the high probability state counter KHc is set to 10 games, which are high probability state games, and the transition to the "low probability state" is not made until the counter value reaches 0. Note that this type of lottery method is merely one example, and for example, the low probability state transition lottery may not be executed for 10 games after transitioning to the "high probability state" (staying in the "high probability state" is guaranteed), and after those 10 games have elapsed, a lottery to transition from the "high probability state" to the "low probability state" may be executed every game with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/20). Note that the AT lottery roles (low probability AT lottery role, high probability AT lottery role) and state promotion roles have the same winning probability for all setting values.

Next, Figure 22 is a flowchart (second page) of the AT state transition control process related to the subroutine of step 1400 in Figure 18 in the first embodiment. First, in step 1430, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the current AT state is "AT in progress." If the answer is Yes in step 1430, in step 1431, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the counter value of the AT counter M60 is greater than or equal to a predetermined value (4 in this example). Here, in the first embodiment, when the state related to the AT is the "AT in progress state," and the AT counter value is 4 or more, in other words, when the number of games remaining in the AT is 4 or more, there is a 1/2 probability when winning watermelon B that the player will acquire the right to transition to the "add-on specialized state," and will be able to transition to the "specialized precursor state." On the other hand, when the state related to the AT is the "AT in progress state," and the AT counter value is 3 or less, in other words, when the number of games remaining in the AT is 3 or less, even if the player wins watermelon B, no lottery (sometimes called a specialized state transition lottery) is executed to acquire the right to transition to the "add-on specialized state," and the player will not transition to the "specialized precursor state" or the "add-on specialized state." However, without being limited to this, the system may be configured so that even if the AT counter value is 3 or less, a lottery (sometimes called a specialized state transition lottery) can be held in which a player wins watermelon B and gains the right to transition to the ``add-on specialized state'', and if the system is configured in this way and the player wins the lottery in which the player wins watermelon B and gains the right to transition to the ``add-on specialized state'' when the AT counter value is 3 or less, the system may be configured so that the player can enter (transition to) the ``specialized precursor state'' or ``add-on specialized state'' from the next game after winning the lottery, or so that the player can enter (transition to) the ``specialized precursor state'' or ``add-on specialized state'' when the AT counter value reaches a predetermined value (for example, 1 or 0), or so that the player can enter (transition to) the ``specialized precursor state'' or ``add-on specialized state'' after a predetermined number of games have been played since the game in which the lottery was won. Furthermore, when transitioning to the "additional specialization state," it is not necessary to go through the "specialization precursor state." For example, it may be configured to transition directly from the "AT state" to the "additional specialization state." If the answer is Yes in step 1431, in step 1432, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the condition device related to the game is a specialization transition role (a small role that can execute a lottery to acquire the right to transition to the "additional specialization state," in this example, watermelon B). If the answer is Yes in step 1432, in step 1433, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a specialization state transition lottery with a predetermined probability (in this example, 1/2). Next, in step 1434, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the executed specialization state transition lottery was won. If the answer is Yes in step 1434, then in step 1435, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the state of the AT for the next game onwards to be a "specialized precursor state" and proceeds to step 1444-1. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1431, then in step 1436, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the counter value of the AT counter M60 is 1 (if the AT counter value is 1, it is the final game of the AT). If the answer is Yes in step 1436, then in step 1437, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a continuation lottery with a predetermined probability (in this example, 2/3) of winning. Next, in step 1438, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the executed continuation lottery was won. If the answer is Yes in step 1438, then in step 1439, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the state of the AT from the next game onwards to be the "AT in progress state" and proceeds to step 1444-1 (the AT initial game number (50 in this example) is set in the AT counter to satisfy the AT state transition condition). On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1438, then in step 1443, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the state of the AT from the next game onwards to be the "revival possibility presentation state" and proceeds to step 1444-1. Note that if the answer is No in step 1430, step 1432, step 1434 or step 1436, then the process also proceeds to step 1444-1. In this way, in the first embodiment, a continuation lottery is executed in the final AT game, and if the continuation lottery is won, the AT counter M60 is again set to the initial value of 50 games. In other words, if the number of AT games added is not taken into consideration, the gameplay is such that the AT of 50 games per set continues to loop at 2/3. The timing of the continuation lottery is not limited to the final game of the AT; for example, the continuation lottery may be configured to be executed in the first game of the AT (the first game that newly enters the "AT in progress" state or the first game after the initial value is set in the AT counter M60). By configuring it in this way, whether or not the next set (the AT related to the winning of the continuation lottery) will be executed (whether or not the AT will continue) is already determined in the "AT in progress" state. Therefore, the effects during the AT can be different depending on whether or not the continuation lottery is won. For example, if the continuation lottery is won, the background music can be changed (such as by playing a song) when the counter value of the AT counter M60 is 1 or greater (during the execution of the AT), or an effect can be executed that confirms that the continuation lottery has been won.

Next, Figure 23 is a flowchart (third page) of the AT state transition control process related to the subroutine of step 1400 in Figure 18 in the first embodiment. First, in step 1444-1, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the current AT state is a revival possibility presentation state. If the answer is Yes in step 1444-1, in step 1444-2, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the condition device for the game in question is a revival role (a role that, when won in the "revival possibility presentation state," enables transition to the "AT in progress state" in the next game; in other words, a role that can bring back the AT). Here, in the first embodiment, a revival role is a role that includes any of watermelon A, watermelon B, cherry, and bonus roles (only BB roles without setting differences, excluding BB roles with setting differences). When the condition device for the game in question is a revival role, it is said to have won the revival lottery. If the answer is Yes in step 1444-2, then in step 1444-3, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the state of the AT from the next game onwards to be the "AT in progress" and proceeds to step 1445. Here, the AT counter is set to the initial AT game number (50 in this example) to satisfy the AT state transition condition. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1444-2, then in step 1444-4, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the state of the AT from the next game onwards to be the "low probability state" and proceeds to step 1445. Note that if the answer is No in step 1441-1, then proceeds to step 1445. Thus, in the first embodiment, even if the AT is the final game and the continuation lottery is not won, the "revival possibility effect state" is entered, and if the revival lottery is won in the "revival possibility effect state," the "AT in progress state" is entered from the next game. Furthermore, although the "revival possibility presentation state" is an "advantageous zone," lotteries related to the AT in the "AT in progress state" (AT addition lotteries, continuation lotteries, etc.) are not executed, and the system is configured so that revival lotteries can be executed, and the manner in which lotteries related to the AT are executed differs between the "AT in progress state" and the "revival possibility presentation state."

Next, in step 1445, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the state related to the AT for the next game onwards has not been determined. If the answer is Yes in step 1445, then in step 1446, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the state transition condition for the AT has been met (for example, as shown in Figure 30, this is met when 10 premonition games have been played in the "specialized premonition state"). If the answer is Yes in step 1446, then in step 1447, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the state related to the AT for the next game onwards and proceeds to step 1448 (for example, as shown in Figure 30, if the premonition games have been played in the "specialized premonition state", then the "additional specialization state" is determined). Note that even if the answer is No in step 1445 or step 1446, the CPU C100 also proceeds to step 1448. Next, in step 1448, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a high probability obstacle counter value command (in this example, a command to the sub-side, a command related to the current high probability obstacle counter value, in other words, the number of remaining games for which a high probability state is guaranteed), and proceeds to step 1449-1. Next, in step 1449-1, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the AT state for the next game and beyond will be determined to be "game within advantageous BB." If the answer is Yes in step 1449-1, then in step 1449-2, the CPU C100 of the main control board M clears the counter value of the high probability obstacle counter KHc to zero and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 1450). Note that if the answer is No in step 1449-1, the CPU C100 also proceeds to the next process (processing of step 1450).

In the first embodiment, the AT winning rate is configured to differ depending on the lottery state, so that if a BB role (BB role with no setting difference) is won in the "low probability state", the player will not win the AT transition lottery (and will not subsequently transition to the "AT in progress state"), whereas if a BB role (BB role with no setting difference) is won in the "high probability state", the player will win the AT transition lottery (and will subsequently transition to the "AT in progress state"). However, this is not limited to this, and if condition device A, which is a specified condition device, is used as the AT lottery role and the states related to the AT, which is the "advantageous zone", are configured to have "high probability state A" and "high probability state B", then if condition device A is won in "high probability state A", there is a 1/10 chance of winning the AT transition lottery, and if condition device A is won in "high probability state B", there is a 1/2 chance of winning the AT transition lottery. Furthermore, if the AT transition lottery is won, the AT state will transition to the "AT preparation state", which is a preparation state until transitioning to the "AT in progress state", and it may be configured so that it will transition to the "AT in progress state" when a predetermined termination condition is met (for example, 10 games have passed since transitioning to the "AT preparation state").

Next, Figure 24 is a flowchart of the condition device number management process related to the subroutine of step 1450 in Figure 18 in the first embodiment. First, in step 1451, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the current play zone is a "favorable zone." If the answer is Yes in step 1451, in step 1452, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a command related to the winning/replay winning information (a command on the sub-control board S side, for example, a command related to the winning/replay winning information related to the game). Next, in step 1454, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the condition device related to the game is a push order role (a condition device in which the winning role differs depending on the push order, for example, Win-A1, etc.). If step 1454 is Yes, in step 1458, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the instruction number (also called the push order number) for the game based on the winning and replay winning information for the game, and stores it in a RAM address for storing the instruction number (an address different from the RAM address for displaying the push order navigation). The instruction number is information related to the push order, and in this example, it is determined by the main control board M and transmitted to the sub-control board S (details will be described later). Furthermore, by receiving the instruction number, the sub-control board S can display the push order navigation on the performance display device S40. The instruction number is determined even when the push order navigation is not executed (not shown, but the instruction number is reset to its initial value by clearing the instruction number). When a push order guessing game is executed, a predetermined instruction number (e.g., AX) dedicated to the push order guessing game may be determined. Next, in step 1460, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a push order navigation display on the push order display device D270 based on the instruction number related to the game (see Figure 34 for a display image of the push order navigation display on the main control board side). Next, in step 1466, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets (for example, sets in the register area) a command (a command to the sub-side) related to the instruction number determined in step 1458, and proceeds to step 1472 (see Figure 34 for a display image of the push order navigation display on the sub-control board side). In this example, displaying the reel stop order that will bring the player the most profit on the push order display device D270 and the performance display device S40 is referred to as push order navigation, displaying a push order navigation display, etc. In the first embodiment, the push order navigation is displayed based on the instruction number; for example, the push order of "left → center → right" is displayed as "=1" on the push order display device D270, and is displayed as "=1" in both the push order bell and push order replay. However, this is not limited to this, and different display modes may be used when the push order navigation of "left → center → right" is displayed on the push order display device D270 in a game related to the push order bell, and when the push order navigation of "left → center → right" is displayed on the push order display device D270 in a game related to push order replay. In other words, the number of types of display modes for the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 may be configured to be the same as the number of types of winning information for prizes and replays.

Also, if the answer is No in step 1451 or step 1454, in step 1468, the CPU C100 of the main control board M performs a masking process on the winning/replay winning information for the game and stores the masked information at a specified address in RAM. Here, if the winning/replay winning information for the game is transmitted to the sub-control board S, and the winning/replay winning information is recognized through fraudulent activity, the highly profitable push order (reel stop order) for the game will be recognized. Therefore, in this example, the winning/replay winning information for the game is masked (a process that keeps the winning/replay winning information (especially information related to the push order) secret) before being transmitted to the sub-control board S, thereby preventing the highly profitable push order from being recognized. In the first embodiment, the method of masking is configured such that multiple pieces of winning prize/replay winning information (prize/replay winning information having similar roles is suitable, for example, multiple pieces of winning prize/replay winning information that can stop and display a symbol combination that becomes a replay role in which the RT state transitions depending on the pressing order) are treated as one effect group number (for example, winning prize/replay winning information 4 to 6 are treated as effect group 4), and the effect group number is sent to the sub-control board S. In addition, the method of masking is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured such that new winning prize/replay winning information after masking is provided after the provided winning prize/replay winning information (0 to 18 in this example). Even in such cases, it is desirable to configure existing winning/replay winning information such as an effect group number so that multiple pieces of winning/replay winning information are combined into one piece of winning/replay winning information after masking (for example, winning/replay winning information 4-6 is converted into winning/replay winning information 19 (newly created winning/replay winning information) which is the winning/replay winning information after masking). Furthermore, if it is determined that a game requires notification of operation information (push order navigation) based on the AT status on the main control board M, winning/replay winning information is sent to the sub-control board S, and in games where operation information is not required, the effect group number may be sent to the sub-control board S. In this configuration, a command related to the instruction number may or may not be sent to the sub-control board S.

Next, in step 1470, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets (e.g., sets in a register area) a command (a command to the sub-side) related to the performance group number after executing the mask processing, and proceeds to step 1472. Next, in step 1472, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets (e.g., sets in a register area) a command (a command to the sub-side) related to bonus winning information (which allows the sub-side to recognize whether or not a bonus has been won), and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 1550). Note that in the first embodiment, the system is configured to derive prize/replay winning information and bonus winning information from the winning number, and the method of derivation will be described later. Also, as shown in the lower part of the figure, examples of the push order navigation display are configured as follows: in the "AT state," (1) if a fall replay role is included, the push order is navigated so that the fall replay role will not be stopped and displayed; (2) in the case of a bell (1-piece role or 11-piece role), the push order that will result in the largest number of payouts is navigated; etc. In this way, in the first embodiment, when the gaming zone is a "favorable zone," it is configured to be able to send to the sub-control board S winning information (a number that can identify the type of winning role and the most favorable push order for the player) and instruction numbers (a number that can identify the most favorable push order for the player), while when the gaming zone is a "normal zone," it is configured to be able to send to the sub-control board S a performance group number (a number that can only identify the outline of the winning role). That is, in the "advantageous zone", the winning information for the game, including winning information for replays where the game outcome and player profits differ depending on the button press order, can be sent directly to the sub-control board S, whereas in a game zone that is not the "advantageous zone", the winning information for the game, including winning information for replays where the game outcome and player profits differ depending on the button press order, is not sent, and in the case of winning information for replays where the game outcome and player profits differ depending on the button press order, a presentation group number that conceals the information about the button press order is sent to the sub-control board S.

In addition, when the play zone is not a "favorable zone," etc., a mask process is performed when the winning/replay winning information determined by the main control board M is sent to the sub-control board S to determine an effect group number, and that effect group number is then sent to the sub-control board S. The effect group number is a number assigned to the winning/replay winning information grouped together with winning roles that have similar roles (for example, replay roles that include a fall replay role, push order bells, etc.). By performing a mask process (a process that keeps the winning/replay winning information (especially information related to the push order) confidential) on the winning/replay winning information related to the game before sending it to the sub-control board S, it is possible to prevent information related to the winning/replay winning information from being recognized through fraudulent activity, thereby preventing a highly profitable push order (reel stop order) related to the game from being recognized.

Next, Figure 25 is a flowchart of the reel spin start preparation process, which is a subroutine of step 1550 in Figure 18 in the first embodiment. First, in step 1552, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the timer value of the minimum game interval timer M70 (decrement timer) is 0. Here, the minimum game interval timer M70 is a timer that measures the time (4.1 seconds in this example) that must be guaranteed from one game start timing (reel spin start timing) to the next game start timing (reel spin start timing). If the answer is Yes in step 1552, in step 1554, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets the timer value of the minimum game interval timer M70 to a new minimum time (sometimes referred to as the minimum game time, in this example, 4.1 seconds) and starts it. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1552, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes an infinite loop process. Next, in step 1556, the CPU C100 of the main control board M clears the information regarding the reel stop order and the button press order for the completed game. Next, in step 1558, the CPU C100 of the main control board M clears the information regarding the stopped reels and the pull-in point creation request for the completed game. Next, in step 1560, the CPU C100 of the main control board M initializes the symbol stop position data for the completed game. Next, in step 1562, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets the output request for the reel spin start standby for that game. Next, in step 1564, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets the reel control command for that game and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 1260). In other words, the processing of steps 1562 and 1564 makes it possible to send a command to the sub-control board S indicating that the reels will start spinning.

Next, Figure 26 is a flowchart of the remaining game count management process related to the subroutine of step 3400 in Figure 18 in the first embodiment. First, in step 3402, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the current play zone is a "favorable zone." While details will be explained later, a "favorable zone" is one of the play zones, and is a play zone that is likely to be set in a play situation that is advantageous to the player, such as when the AT status is "AT in progress." If the answer is Yes in step 3402, in step 3404, the CPU C100 of the main control board M subtracts 1 from the counter value of the favorable zone remaining game count counter YKc-1 (a decrement counter that is initially set to 1,500, the maximum number of games that can be played in the "favorable zone," and is decremented every time the game is in the "favorable zone").

Next, in step 3408, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the current AT state is "AT in progress." If the answer is Yes in step 3408, then in step 3410, the CPU C100 of the main control board M decrements the AT counter value by 1. Next, in step 3412, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the AT state is a high probability state. If the answer is Yes in step 3412, then in step 3414, the CPU C100 of the main control board M decrements the counter value of the high probability failure counter KHc by 1 and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 1700). Note that even if the answer is No in step 3402, step 3408, or step 3412, the process proceeds to the next process (processing of step 1700). Thus, in the first embodiment, when the push order navigation system displays the "AT in progress" state, the AT counter value is decremented every game. However, when the "advantageous BB state," "game in advantageous BB," "specialized premonition state," or "addition specialization state" is displayed, the AT counter value is not decremented even when the game is being played. That is, when the "AT in progress" state transitions to the "specialized premonition state" while the AT counter value remains (i.e., 1 or more), the AT counter value can be maintained while transitioning from the "AT in progress" state to the "specialized premonition state" to the "addition specialization state." Furthermore, even when the AT state is the "AT in progress" state, if a winning number including a bonus combination is determined during the game, the AT counter value can be prevented from being decremented by 1. In this case, for example, the AT counter value stored in the RAM of the main control board M is not decremented, but the remaining AT game count displayed on the performance display device S40 controlled by the sub-control board S may be controlled to be decremented. For example, if a game is executed and a bonus is won when the AT counter value is "30" and the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is "30," the AT counter value will remain at "30," or will store "30 + α," which is the value obtained by adding the value "α" obtained by the AT addition lottery for that game.However, when the start lever D50 is operated, the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 may be displayed as "29," or "29 + α," which is the value obtained by adding the value "α" obtained by the AT addition lottery (note that the "α" obtained by the addition lottery may not be announced during the game itself, but may be announced in a specific game after that game (at the start of bonus play, during bonus play, at the end of bonus play, or in a game that meets specified conditions after the end of bonus play)). The number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 can be configured to be decremented by one for each play, even during "play within advantageous BB," and the number of remaining AT games can be decremented for each play until an effect suggesting a bonus has been confirmed (e.g., a bonus confirmation screen) is output. This configuration prevents the player from immediately realizing that a bonus has been won when a bonus is won in a state where push order navigation, such as an "AT state," can be executed. In other words, after the winning number, including the bonus combination, is determined, a series of consecutive effects spanning multiple plays that incite the player to decide whether or not the bonus has been won can be executed using the effect display device S40, etc., to enhance the player's interest in the game. Furthermore, the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 after the bonus play ends can be controlled to display "30," or a value greater than "30" if the result of an AT addition lottery is announced and the bonus addition is won. Furthermore, if a game is played when the AT counter value is "1" and the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is "1" and a bonus is won, the display related to the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 will become "0." However, this state will be maintained and a continuous effect spanning multiple games will be executed to tease whether or not a bonus has been won. If a game is played when the AT counter value is "1" and the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is "1," a winning number (or winning number/replay winning information, or payout group number) that may result in an AT addition lottery being executed is selected, and the AT addition lottery is not won, the number of AT games will become "0" and the number of AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 will also become "0." Furthermore, when the number of remaining AT games is low, the probability of executing a continuous effect may be set lower (including 0%) than when the number of remaining AT games is high.

Next, Figure 27 is a flowchart of the RT state transition control process related to the subroutine of step 1700 in Figure 18 in the first embodiment. First, in step 1702, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the RT state transition conditions are met in the game. Here, in the first embodiment, the RT state transition conditions are configured to be met by executing a RAM clear (initializing the RAM), displaying a stop of replay (in this example, displaying a stop of replay 04), and winning, starting, or ending a BB. If the answer is Yes in step 1702, in step 1704, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether to transition to the RT state and the RT state for the next game and beyond based on the met RT state transition conditions (see the RT state transition diagram in Figure 28), and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 1750). Note that if the answer is No in step 1702, the CPU C100 of the main control board M also proceeds to the next process (processing of step 1750). In the first embodiment, the RT state transition control process is executed after all reels have stopped, but when transitioning to "RT1", the transition timing may be when the lever is turned on. The timing for transitioning to the RT state (storing the RT number in RAM) can be determined as appropriate.

Next, Figure 28 is an RT state transition diagram for the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, there are four RT states: "RT0" to "RT2" and "Type 1 BB-A, B, C." The RT state transition occurs when the conditions indicated by the arrows in the diagram are met. Specific examples of RT state transitions include transitioning to "RT0" when RAM initialization is performed or when replay 04 is displayed as stopped when the RT state is "RT1." When replay 04 is displayed as stopped, specifically, if "replay-D1" is won when the RT state is "RT1," and the left stop button is operated as the first stop, replays 01 to 03 are displayed as stopped, and "RT1" is maintained as the RT state. On the other hand, if "Replay-D1" is won when the RT state is "RT1", and the center stop button or right stop button is operated as the first stop, Replay 04 will be displayed as stopped, and the RT state will transition from "RT1" to "RT0".

Also, if the RT state is "RT0" or "RT1" and you win the BB role but do not win the BB role in the game in which you won (the condition device related to Type 1 BB-A, B, C is activated), the RT state will transition to "RT2". Also, if you win the BB role in "RT2" (Type 1 BB-A, B, C is activated), the state will transition to "Type 1 BB-A, B, C". Also, if BB ends in "Type 1 BB-A, B, C" (the activation of Type 1 BB-A, B, C is completed), the state will transition to "RT1". Furthermore, if the BB is won when the AT state is in a "low probability state" and the BB ends, the RT state will transition to "RT1", which is highly profitable for the player; however, since the AT state is a state in which push order navigation does not occur, when "Replay-D1 to D3" is won, if the reels are stopped in an incorrect push order (the first stop is one of three options: left button, middle button, and right button, and one of the three options is the correct push order, so replays other than Replay 04 are displayed as stopped, and two of the three options are incorrect push orders, so Replay 04 is displayed as stopped), then "RT1" will transition to "RT0". Furthermore, if the AT state is "high probability state," "AT state," "specialized precursor state," or "addition specialized state," and BB is won, and when BB ends, the RT state will transition to "RT1," which is highly profitable for the player, and since the AT state is a state in which push order navigation occurs, even if "Replay-D1 to D3" is won, Replay 04 will guide you to the correct push order that does not display a stop, allowing you to maintain "RT1."

Next, Figure 29 is a flowchart of the AT state start control process, which is a subroutine of step 1750 in Figure 18 in the first embodiment. First, in step 1752, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the AT state transition conditions are met in the game. The AT state transition conditions are met, for example, when (1) a BB with no setting difference that was won in the "high probability state" ends, (2) the continuation lottery is won, or (3) the revival lottery is won. If the answer is Yes in step 1752, then in step 1754, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets the AT initial game count (50 in this example, the number of games from which subtraction begins after the transition to the "AT state") in the AT counter M60 in response to the new transition to the "AT precursor state," and proceeds to step 1756. Note that if the answer is No in step 1752, the CPU C100 also proceeds to step 1756. Next, in step 1756, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the current AT state is not a high probability state. If the answer is Yes in step 1756, in step 1758, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the AT state for the next game is a high probability state. If the answer is Yes in step 1758, in step 1760, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets the number of high probability obstacle games (10 in this example) in the high probability obstacle counter and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 3500). Note that even if the answer is No in step 1756 or step 1758, the process proceeds to the next process (processing of step 3500). Furthermore, after winning the BB in the "high probability state" and transitioning to "game inside advantageous BB", if the BB is won and the state transitions to the "advantageous BB state", and the number of AT games is added in the "advantageous BB state", when the BB ends and the state transitions from the "advantageous BB state" to the "AT in progress state", the initial value set in the AT counter will exceed 50. Specifically, if the number of AT games is added by 30 in the "advantageous BB state" and then the state transitions to the "AT in progress state", the AT counter will be set to 80 (initial value 50 + added 30). In this case, if an effect is performed to notify the player that 30 games have been added in the "advantageous BB state," it is desirable to notify the player at the start of the "AT state" that the initial number of AT games is 80. However, as an alternative notification method, instead of performing an effect to notify the player that 30 games have been added in the "advantageous BB state," an initial value of 50 games is presented to the player at the start of the "AT state," and then an effect is performed to notify the player that 30 games have been added during the AT (for example, immediately after the start of the "AT state" or when the number of remaining AT games on the effect display device S40 is low). By doing this, the player cannot clearly grasp whether the number of AT games has been added in the "advantageous BB state," or how many games have been added, and therefore, it is possible to increase the interest in the addition effect that suddenly occurs for an unknown reason during the AT (a state in which push order navigation may occur). In this example, the AT initial game count is set in the AT counter M60 in step 1754, but the execution timing of the process for setting the AT initial game count is not limited to this example, and the AT initial game count may be set in the AT counter M60 when the AT state transition control process in step 1400 described above is executed. Furthermore, the number of games set in the AT counter M60 (AT initial game count) is configured to be decremented from the time of play after the BB has ended (the AT state becomes "AT in progress") (decrement does not begin during the BB). Furthermore, the counter value of the AT counter M60 is configured to be stored in the memory area of the RAM of the main control board M.

Next, Figure 30 is an AT state transition diagram for the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, there are ten AT states: "low probability state," "playing during normal BB," "normal BB state," "high probability state," "AT state," "specialized precursor state," "add-on specialized state," "playing during advantageous BB," "advantageous BB state," and "revival possibility presentation state." The AT state transitions by satisfying the conditions indicated by the arrows in the diagram. For example, if you win Watermelon B in the "AT state" and win the specialized state transition lottery, which has a 50/50 chance of winning, you will transition to the "specialized precursor state." Furthermore, if 10 games have passed (consumed) since transitioning to the "specialized precursor state," you will transition to the "add-on specialized state." Furthermore, the three AT states of "low probability state," "playing during normal BB," and "normal BB state" are set as "normal zones," while the seven AT states of "high probability state," "AT state," "specialized precursor state," "add-on specialized state," "playing during advantageous BB," "advantageous BB state," and "revival possibility presentation state" are set as "favorable zones." In other words, even if the seven AT states that constitute "favorable zones" have transitioned (shifted), if 1,500 games have passed without being set to the "normal zone," the "favorable zone" will be forcibly ended and set to the "normal zone." Furthermore, even if replay 04 is stopped and displayed in the "AT state," "specialized precursor state," or "add-on specialized state," which are notification game states where push order navigation is displayed, the game state will be maintained.

As mentioned above, when in the "AT state", if the counter value of the AT counter M60 is 0 and the continuation lottery is not won, the state will enter the "revival possibility effect state". If the revival lottery is won in the "revival possibility effect state", the state will return to the "AT state" again. On the other hand, if the revival lottery is not won in the "revival possibility effect state", the state will transition to the "low probability state", changing from the "advantageous zone" to the "normal zone".

When a BB with no setting difference (Type 1 BB-A or Type 1 BB-C) is won in the "high probability state", the BB with no setting difference is activated, and the "advantageous BB state" ends, the state will transition to the "AT state". Also, when a BB with no setting difference (Type 1 BB-A or Type 1 BB-C) is won in the "AT state", the BB with no setting difference is activated, and the "advantageous BB state" ends, the state will transition to the "AT state". Furthermore, when a BB with no setting difference (Type 1 BB-A or Type 1 BB-C) is won in the "revival possibility performance state", the BB with no setting difference is activated, and the "advantageous BB state" ends, the state will transition to the "AT state" (because the revival lottery is won). Furthermore, when a BB with setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) is won in the "Revival Possibility Presentation State", the BB with setting difference is activated, and the "Advantageous BB State" ends, if the BB with setting difference is the winning number for a single BB role (winning number 20), the state will enter a "Low Probability State" after the BB ends (because the BB with setting difference role will not trigger a win in the revival lottery), and if the BB with setting difference is a winning number that overlaps with a rare role (winning numbers 21-23), the state will enter an "AT In Progress State" after the BB ends (because the rare role will trigger a win in the revival lottery).

Also, if you are in a "favourable zone" and in a "high probability state", you will win a BB with setting difference (Type 1 BB-B), and when the BB with setting difference is activated and the "favourable BB state" ends, you will transition to a "high probability state".

In addition, the state related to the AT to which it transitions after the end of the "advantageous BB state" is the "AT state", "specialized precursor state", or "add-on specialized state", whichever is the state related to the AT when the BB is won, after the end of a BB won during the AT ("AT state", "specialized precursor state", "add-on specialized state") (for both BB with setting difference and BB without setting difference), and after the end of a BB without setting difference won during a non-AT ("high probability state"), it transitions to the "AT state". In addition, after the end of a BB with setting difference won during a non-AT ("high probability state"), it transitions to the "high probability state".

The AT state is not limited to that of the first embodiment. For example, the AT lottery may be executed by winning a predetermined winning number in the "low probability state" or "high probability state." Winning the AT lottery transitions to the "premonition state," and after 16 to 32 games, the state transitions to the "AT state." In such a configuration, the AT lottery may be executed by winning the predetermined condition device, and if the AT lottery is not won, the state transitions to the "false premonition state," and after 16 to 32 games, the state transitions to the "low probability state" or "high probability state." Furthermore, a "standby period" that is different from the "advantageous period" and the "normal period" may be set as a game period. For example, if the AT lottery is executed by winning a "cherry," if a player wins a "BB + cherry" combination, and then wins the AT lottery, the state inside the BB until the "BB" of the "BB + cherry" wins may be set as the "standby period." In this way, by providing a "standby section," in the case where a BB is won in the "low probability state" and the AT lottery is not won, and in the case where a BB is won in the "low probability state" and the AT lottery is won, the advantageous section indicator YH is turned off during the period until the BB symbol combination is complete (until the advantageous section indicator is lit), so it is possible to encourage the player to wonder whether or not they have won the AT lottery. Also, when a BB is won in the "add-on specialized state," the "add-on specialized state" may be configured to resume after the BB ends, and in such a configuration, during the BB, a different AT add-on lottery is executed for the BB won in the "add-on specialized state" than for the BB won in the "AT state" (for example, it may be configured so that it is easier to win the AT add-on lottery than a BB won in the "AT state," and the number of games per AT game add-on is relatively greater). Additionally, if a BB is won in the "specialized precursor state", the system may be configured to transition to the "specialized add-on state" after the BB ends, and if configured in this way, the AT add-on lottery may be executed during the BB in the same way as for a BB won in the "specialized add-on state".

Next, Figure 31 is a flowchart of the game zone transition control process related to the subroutine of step 3500 in Figure 18 in the first embodiment. First, in the first embodiment, there is a game zone as a zone related to the game state, and there are two game zones: a "normal zone" that is relatively low-profit for the player, and a "profitable zone" that is relatively high-profit for the player. To explain the flowchart, first, in step 3508, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the game zone related to the game is a "normal zone." If the answer is Yes in step 3508, in step 3510, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the game zone for the next game onwards to be a game zone corresponding to the current AT state and the current game situation, and proceeds to step 3528. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 3508, in other words, if the game zone is a "favorable zone," then in step 3514, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the counter value of the favorable zone remaining game number counter YKc-1 is 0, in other words, whether the "favorable zone" has reached the maximum number of games that can be continued. If the answer is Yes in step 3514, in step 3515, the CPU C100 of the main control board M clears all information related to the AT (thereby, the AT counter value becomes 0, and the number of games spent in the "specialized premonition state" also becomes 0). On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 3514, in step 3518, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether any favorable zone end condition has been met. Here, any favorable zone end condition is an end condition for the "favorable zone" other than when the counter value of the favorable zone remaining game number counter YKc-1 becomes 0, such as when the AT counter value becomes 0 or when the push order navigation is executed a predetermined number of times. If step 3518 returns No, i.e., if any favorable zone end condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step 3515. Thus, in the first embodiment, when the "favorable zone" ends and the "normal zone" is set from the next game onward, all information related to the AT (information related to the number of AT continuation games, the number of remaining AT games, etc.) is cleared, so that the conditions for re-entering the "favorable zone" in the subsequent "normal zone" are not relaxed. The AT-related information cleared by the processing of step 3515 (processing at the end of the favorable zone) includes the counter value of the favorable zone remaining game number counter YKc-1, a flag indicating the game status, and the like. Furthermore, this information is also cleared by clearing the RAM when changing the settings. However, while clearing the RAM when changing the settings also clears information related to the "conditional device related to the continuous operation device of the bonus item (BB)," the "RT state," the "number of reserved coins," and the like, the processing of step 3515 (processing at the end of the favorable zone) does not clear information related to the "conditional device related to the continuous operation device of the bonus item (BB)," the "RT state," the "number of reserved coins," and the like. As such, the RAM clear range when the settings are changed differs from the clear range when the "advantageous period" ends (for example, when step 3515 is executed). Clearing the RAM when the settings are changed may be configured to preserve the "condition device related to the continuous operation device (BB)" and the "RT state." Furthermore, the addresses in the range to be cleared when the "advantageous period" ends are consecutive. By making the addresses in the range to be cleared when the "advantageous period" ends consecutively, clearing can be achieved by simply specifying the first address to be cleared during the clearing process and the range of addresses to be cleared. Furthermore, when the "advantageous period" ends, a command indicating that the "advantageous period" has ended is sent from the main control board M to the sub-control board S. However, even if the sub-control board S receives this command, it is configured not to erase the game history, such as information indicating that the "advantageous period" was in effect or the number of games played in the "AT state." However, when clearing the RAM when the settings are changed, the game history on the sub-control board S, such as information indicating that the "advantageous period" was in effect or the number of games played in the "AT state," is also erased.

In addition, when the "advantageous zone" ends because the counter value of the counter YKc-1 for the number of games remaining in the advantageous zone becomes 0, (1) if the current state of the AT is a "high probability state", the state of the AT in the next game will become a "low probability state", (2) if the current state of the AT is "playing during advantageous BB", the state of the AT in the next game will become "playing during normal BB", (3) if the current state of the AT is a "advantageous BB state", the state of the AT in the next game will become a "normal BB state", (4) if the current state of the AT is an "AT state", a "specialized precursor state", a "specialized additional state" or a "state for showing whether or not revival is possible", the state of the AT in the next game will become a "low probability state".
(because the information related to the AT is cleared).

Next, in step 3516, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets the game zone for the next game onwards to the "normal zone." Next, in step 3517, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns off the advantageous zone indicator YH because the "advantageous zone" has ended, and proceeds to step 3528. Note that the advantageous zone indicator YH is configured to be turned off when the "advantageous zone" ends and is set to the "normal zone," but the exact timing of turning it off is not limited to that of the first embodiment. For example, the advantageous zone indicator YH may be configured to be turned off when a game medal is inserted for a game that ends the "advantageous zone" and enters the "normal zone." In other words, it is sufficient that the advantageous zone indicator YH is configured to be turned off before the start lever D50, which allows the next game to start, is operated. On the other hand, if the answer is Yes in step 3518, in step 3520, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the play area for the next game onwards as the "advantageous area" and proceeds to step 3528.

Next, in step 3528, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether it has been decided to set a new "favorable zone" in the next game (whether it has been decided to set the "normal zone" to the "favorable zone"). If the answer is Yes in step 3528, then in step 3530, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a predetermined value to the favorable zone remaining game number counter YKc-1. Note that the predetermined value set to the favorable zone remaining game number counter YKc-1 is a fixed number (1500 in this example) that is common to all setting values. Next, in step 3534, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns on the favorable zone indicator YH and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 1293). Note that even if the answer is No in step 3528, the CPU C100 also proceeds to the next process (processing of step 1293). In the first embodiment, the lighting process for the advantageous zone indicator YH is executed at the timing of step 3534, but the lighting timing for the advantageous zone indicator YH is not limited to this, and the lighting timing for the advantageous zone indicator YH may be set appropriately during the period from the timing of operation of the start lever in the game before the new "advantageous zone" (the game in the "normal zone") to the timing when it becomes possible to insert game medals in the game that will become the new "advantageous zone" (if the game before the new "advantageous zone" was a game related to replay, to the timing when operation of the start lever in the game that will become the new "advantageous zone" becomes valid).

Next, Figure 32 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing for the subroutine of step 1600 in the first embodiment. The processing of this subroutine begins when a timer interrupt is initiated in the processing of step 1040 or step 1104, and is configured to be executed periodically thereafter at a predetermined time interval (T in this example, but a time of approximately 2 ms, for example).

First, in step 1602, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes processing at the start of an interrupt (e.g., backing up data held in registers within the CPUC100, checking the input port for the power-off detection signal, etc.). Next, in step 1604, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a power-off has currently been detected (during this interrupt processing). If the answer is No in step 1604, then in step 1900 the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the power-off processing described below. On the other hand, if the answer is Yes in step 1604, then in step 1606 the CPUC100 of the main control board M starts timer measurement (updating various timers managed by software). Next, in step 1608, the CPUC100 of the main control board M generates input port data and stores the data (updating the storage area for each input port data in the RAM area). Here, input port data refers to information related to the detection of the checkout button D60, start lever D50, stop button D40, door switch D80, setting key switch M20, set/reset button M30, power failure detection signal, deposit acceptance sensor D10s, first deposit sensor D20s, second deposit sensor D30s, first dispensing sensor H10s, second dispensing sensor H20s, etc. (In other words, the presence or absence of operation of these operating components and the sensor detection status are sampled at interrupt intervals T).

Next, in step 1610, the CPU C100 of the main control board M references the input port data in the RAM area and switches the door switch flag and setting key switch flag on and off depending on the sampling results of each input port data (for example, if the switch state of the door switch D80 is continuously on over multiple samplings, by turning on the door switch flag, it is possible to detect that the front door DU is open without being affected by noise). Next, in step 6100, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes reel drive control processing (processing related to the control of the drive of reel M50, described in detail below) for all reels (left reel M51, center reel M52, right reel M53). Next, in step 1612, the CPU C100 of the main control board M references the AT counter M60 and determines whether the counter value is greater than 0. If the answer is Yes in step 1612, then in step 1613, the CPU C100 of the main control board M displays the number of remaining AT games (number of AT games) on the AT counter value display device D280, and proceeds to step 1614. Note that if the answer is No in step 1612, then proceeds to step 1614 as well. Note that if the AT counter value display device D280 controlled by the main control board M is not provided, then the processing of steps 1612 and 1613 is unnecessary. Next, in step 1614, the CPU C100 of the main control board M outputs output data to the output port. Here, the output data is data for driving the reels M50, blockers D100, etc. Next, in step 1616, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether all error flags are off (although not shown, all error flags, such as the inserted medal backflow error flag, inserted medal number error flag, inserted medal retention error flag, inserted medal abnormality error flag, payout abnormality error flag, payout medal retention error flag, and door switch flag, are off). If the answer is Yes in step 1616, in step 1618, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets (e.g., in a register area) an error no-detection command (a command to the sub-side indicating that no error has been detected) and proceeds to step 1622. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1616, in step 1620, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets (e.g., in a register area) an error detection command (a command to the sub-side indicating that an error has been detected) and proceeds to step 1622. In addition, step 1620 is configured so that information related to the error (currently occurring error) corresponding to the error flag that is turned on is sent to the sub-side. Furthermore, the error no-detection command may be set only when the error is cleared from a state in which an error occurred (only when it is determined that the flag has been turned off), or the setting process for the information may not be executed when an error is not detected (step 1618 may not be performed). Furthermore, the error detection command may be set only when an error occurs from a state in which no error occurred, or may be set when the type of error changes from a state in which a first error (for example, an inserted medal retention error) to a second error (for example, a paid-out medal retention error).

Next, in step 1622, the CPU C100 of the main control board M transmits a control command (a command on the sub-side) (for example, if a control command was set in the register area in step 1618 or step 1620, the set control command will be transmitted). Here, the commands transmitted to the sub-control board S include a command related to the timing of operation of the start lever (transmitted immediately after the start lever is operated), a command related to the timing of acceptance of the first reel stop (transmitted immediately after the stop button is operated as the first stop), a command related to the timing of acceptance of the second reel stop (transmitted immediately after the stop button is operated as the second stop), a command related to the timing of acceptance of the third reel stop (transmitted immediately after the stop button is operated as the third stop), a command related to the timing of acceptance of the stop of all reels (transmitted immediately after all reels have stopped), a command related to the timing of the stop display symbol (transmitted immediately after the stop button is operated as the display symbol has stopped), and a command related to winning information on winning prizes and replays (transmitted immediately after the start lever is operated). Commands include commands related to bonus winning information (sent immediately after the start lever is operated), commands related to the RT state (sent between the time when all reels stop and the time when the next game starts), commands related to the AT state (sent between the time when all reels stop and the time when the next game starts), high-level error counter value commands (sent immediately after the start lever is operated), commands related to the number of remaining AT games (sent between the time when all reels stop and the time when the next game starts, or sent immediately after the start lever is operated), and commands related to the game zone (sent between the time when all reels stop and the time when the next game starts). Next, in step 1624, the CPU C100 of the main control board M outputs an external terminal signal (a signal for transmitting information from the slot machine P to an external hall computer, etc.). Error information output by the external signal includes, but is not shown in the figure, door open errors, abnormal deposit errors, abnormal payout errors, and deposit acceptance sensor retention errors. The door open error is triggered when the front door DU is opened and the door switch flag is on, while the coin insertion sensor retention error is triggered when the coin insertion sensor detects a medal retention. Next, in step 1626, the CPU C100 of the main control board M outputs LED (e.g., 7-segment LED lamp) output data (e.g., lighting a specific 7-segment LED unit among multiple 7-segment LED units, thereby lighting a specific 7-segment segment) (so-called dynamic lighting). Next, in step 1628, the CPU C100 of the main control board M changes the LED lighting mode (e.g., changing the LED lighting color). Note that step 1628 does not necessarily have to be executed. Next, in step 1630, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes software random number management processing (e.g., updating random number values managed by software). Next, in step 1632, the CPU C100 of the main control board M acquires internal information register data (the internal information register contains an area where an abnormality flag bit is set if an abnormality occurs in the random number generation circuit). Next, in step 1634, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the frequency of the random number update clock is normal (whether an abnormality flag bit indicating the frequency abnormality is set). Specifically, the abnormality flag bit is set when the frequency of the random number update clock falls below a predetermined value. If the answer is Yes in step 1634, in step 1636, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the update status of the internal random number is normal (whether an abnormality flag bit indicating the update status abnormality is set). If the answer is Yes in step 1636, in step 1638, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes interrupt termination processing and proceeds to the next processing (processing of step 1602). On the other hand, if the answer is No at step 1634 or step 1636, then at step 1640, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets an internal random number error display (for example, sets an error number in a register area). Next, at step 1300, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes the unrecoverable error processing described above.

Next, Figure 33 is a flowchart of the reel drive control process related to the subroutine of step 6100 in Figure 32 in the first embodiment. Note that while this process illustrates processing for one reel, it should be noted that processing is executed for each of the left reel M51, center reel M52, and right reel M53. First, in step 6102, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the timing to start the reel spin start standby state (for example, the timing after execution of the processing of step 1564 in Figure 25) has been reached. If the answer is Yes in step 6102, then in step 6104 the CPU MC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel spin start standby state and proceeds to step 6106. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 6102, then proceeds to step 6106 as well.

Next, in step 6106, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the timing to start the reel acceleration state has been reached (the timing when the reel rotation start waiting state ends and the reel acceleration process begins, for example, the timing to execute the process of step 1260 in FIG. 18). If the answer is Yes in step 6106, then in step 6108 the CPU MC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel acceleration state. Next, in step 6110, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the reel acceleration process and proceeds to step 6112. Note that if the reels are stopped, this process will cause the reels to start rotating. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 6106, then the process also proceeds to step 6112.

Next, in step 6112, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the current reel drive state is the reel acceleration state. If the answer is Yes in step 6112, then in step 6114, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the end timing of the reel acceleration state has been reached (for example, the timing when all interrupt processing for the "interrupt execution count" in the reel acceleration state in Figure 35 described below has been executed). If the answer is Yes in step 6114, then in step 6116, the CPU MC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel constant speed state. Next, in step 6118, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes reel constant speed maintenance processing and proceeds to step 6120. Note that if the answer is No in step 6112 or step 6114, the process also proceeds to step 6120.

Next, in step 6120, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the current reel drive state is a constant reel speed state. If the answer is Yes in step 6120, in step 6122, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the reel sensor detected an index on the reel (the reel corresponding to the processing of this subroutine) after the reel entered the constant reel speed state (after executing the processing of step 6116). Here, although not shown, each reel is provided with one index (or two or more). The index is provided, for example, in a convex shape on the circumferential surface of the reel, and is used to detect whether the reel has passed a predetermined position or completed one rotation. Each index is detected by the reel sensor. The reel sensor signal is electrically connected to the main control board M. When the reel sensor detects (turns off) an index, the input signal is input to the main control board M, and it is configured to detect that the reel has passed a predetermined position. If the answer is Yes in step 6122, it is determined that the reel rotation speed has become constant, and the process proceeds to step 6130. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 6122, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines in step 6124 whether a predetermined time (e.g., the time value required to execute interrupt processing 400 times) has elapsed since the reel drive state became the constant reel speed state. If the answer is No in step 6124, it is determined that the reel rotation speed has become constant, and the process proceeds to step 6130. In this way, in this example, it is configured so that it can be determined whether the reel rotation speed has normally become constant by the reel sensor detecting an index within a predetermined time after the reel drive state became the constant reel speed state. In this example, the predetermined time is the time it takes to execute 400 interrupt processes (400 interrupt processes are configured to rotate the reel 400 steps), which is longer than the time it takes for the reel to rotate once (one revolution) when the reel rotation speed is constant (for example, one reel rotation is 336 steps, so the time it takes to execute 336 interrupt processes). This configuration ensures that, regardless of the distance between the index and the reel sensor when the reel drive state becomes constant speed (the distance from the reel rotation until the index is detected by the reel sensor), the reel sensor can detect the index within the predetermined time (the time it takes to execute 400 interrupt processes) after the reel drive state becomes constant speed, as long as the reel rotation speed is constant.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, if the answer is Yes in step 6124, then in step 6126 the CPU MC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel acceleration state. Next, in step 6128, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the reel re-acceleration process and proceeds to processing in step 6130. Thus, in this example, if the reel sensor does not detect an index within a predetermined time (for example, the time value required to execute the interrupt process 400 times) after the reel drive state has changed to the reel constant speed state, the reel drive state is updated again to the reel acceleration state and the reel re-acceleration process (the excitation mode of the stepping motor is the same as in the reel acceleration process) is executed. Note that even if the answer is No in step 6120, processing will proceed to step 6130. Furthermore, the reel re-acceleration process does not have to be the same process as the reel acceleration process described above; the reel re-acceleration process and the reel acceleration process may differ in the combination of phases excited by the stepping motor and the number of times the interrupt process is executed for each combination of excited phases.

Next, Figure 34 is a flowchart of the reel rotation stop processing related to the subroutine of step 6200 in Figure 32 in the first embodiment. First, in step 6106, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the timing for starting the reel deceleration standby state has arrived (the timing at which the reel constant speed state ends; for example, it is determined that the timing for starting the reel deceleration standby state has arrived due to the stop button being operated). If the answer is Yes in step 6130, then in step 6132 the CPU MC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration standby state and proceeds to step 6134. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 6130, then the CPU MC also proceeds to step 6134.

Next, in step 6134, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the current reel drive state is a reel deceleration standby state. If the answer is Yes in step 6136, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the timing to end the reel deceleration standby state (the timing to start executing the reel deceleration process) has been reached. If the answer is Yes in step 6136, in step 6138, the CPU MC of the main control board M starts decelerating the reel (reel deceleration process). Next, in step 6140, the CPU MC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to a reel deceleration state and proceeds to processing of step 6142. Note that if the answer is No in step 6134 or step 6136, the CPU MC also proceeds to processing of step 6142.

Next, in step 6142, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the current reel drive state is a reel deceleration state. If the answer is Yes in step 6142, then in step 6144, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the timing to end the reel deceleration state (the timing to end execution of the reel deceleration process) has been reached. If the answer is Yes in step 6144, then in step 6146, the CPU MC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to a reel stop state and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 1612). Note that if the answer is No in step 6142 or step 6144, then the CPU MC also proceeds to the next process (processing of step 1612).

Next, using Figure 35, the rotational operation of the reel M50 of the slot machine of this example will be described in detail. The slot machine of this example starts the rotation of the stepping motor upon operation of the start lever D50. Once the reel rotation speed reaches a constant speed, the constant speed is maintained. (When the reel drive state reaches the constant reel speed state, the reel constant speed maintenance process is executed, but the rotation speed may not actually reach the constant speed.) Then, when one of the stop buttons is operated, stop control is performed for the reel (stepping motor) corresponding to the operated stop button. Here, the stepping motor is a four-phase stepping motor with four phases, Φ0, Φ1, Φ2, and Φ3 (although a non-four-phase stepping motor is also acceptable). Rotation control is performed by switching the excited phase and exciting the stepping motor in 1-2 phase. In other words, by cyclically changing the drive pulse data (combination of excited phases), the stepping motor can be rotated in the forward direction. In the figure, the "Phase to Excited" column shows which of Φ0 to Φ3 is specified to be excited (details will be given later).

As shown in the "Reel Rotation Speed Image" at the top of the figure, the stepping motor's drive state from start to stop is divided into six states, and the stepping motor is controlled according to a drive pattern corresponding to each drive state. The drive states are "Reel Stop State," "Reel Start Waiting State," "Reel Acceleration State," "Reel Constant Speed State," "Reel Deceleration Waiting State," and "Reel Deceleration State." In the "Reel Rotation Speed Image," the vertical axis represents reel rotation speed, increasing upward, while the horizontal axis represents time, increasing to the right. The example shown in the figure illustrates a case where no reel rotation problems occur; this does not apply if reel rotation problems occur due to factors such as holding the reel by hand or loss of synchronization (reel rotation problems will be discussed later).

The "reel stopped state" indicates the state in which the reel is stopped. When in the "reel stopped state," the reel is stationary and all four phases of the stepping motor are not excited.

Next, while the reels are in the "reel stopped state," the start lever D50 is operated at timing (1) in the diagram, and the reel drive state is updated to the "reel spin start standby state." Here, the "reel spin start standby state" refers to the state in which the reels wait after the start lever D50 is operated until the stepping motor acceleration process (reel acceleration process) begins. This standby period is the period from when the reel drive state changed from the "reel stopped state" to the "reel acceleration state." For example, if the time is measured from the time the reels entered the "reel acceleration state" in the previous game, and the start lever D50 for the current game is operated before the minimum game time (approximately 4.1 seconds) has elapsed, the reel drive state will change to the "reel spin start standby state."

Next, at timing (2) in the figure, the reel drive state is updated from the "reel spin start standby state" to the "reel acceleration state." Here, the "reel acceleration state" is a state in which the reels are accelerating from a stationary state to reach a constant speed. In this example, the acceleration state ends (the reel drive state is updated to the "reel constant speed state") when the timer interrupt process is executed 220 times ("100 + 60 + 30 + 15 + 8 + 4 + 2 + 1 = 220"; see the number of interrupt executions in the reel acceleration state in the lower left corner of the figure). Next, at timing (3) in the figure, in other words, when the "reel acceleration state" ends with one more timer interrupt process, the reel rotation speed reaches a constant speed. Note that at this timing, the reel drive state remains in the "reel acceleration state." Next, at timing (4) in the figure, the reel drive state is updated from the "reel rotation start standby state" to the "reel acceleration state," and the timer interrupt process is executed 220 times, updating the reel drive state to the "reel constant speed state." In this example, after the reel rotation speed reaches constant speed, the reel drive state remains in the "reel acceleration state" for one timer interrupt process. In other words, the final excitation phase combination in the "reel acceleration state," "φ3, φ0," executes the interrupt process only once. This excitation mode is similar to the "reel constant speed state," in which the interrupt process is executed once for each excitation phase combination (assuming no abnormal reel rotation occurs). This configuration ensures stable acceleration process execution until the reel rotation speed reaches constant speed.

The bottom part of the figure shows a "step motor excitation image." The figure illustrates an example of a step motor excitation image when the reel drive state is a "reel acceleration state," and an example of a step motor excitation image when the reel drive state is a "reel constant speed state." First, the step motor excitation image when the reel drive state is a "reel acceleration state" will be described in detail with reference to the bottom left part of the figure. Note that "exciting phase" refers to the combination of phases to be excited, and "number of interrupt executions" refers to the number of times the interrupt process is executed to cause excitation with that combination of exciting phases. In this example, when the reel acceleration process is executed, the step motor (stepping motor) is energized 220 times by timer interrupt processing. The step motor (stepping motor) is energized by executing interrupt processing as follows: (KA) 100 interrupt processing at "φ0" → (KB) 60 interrupt processing at "φ0, φ1" → (KC) 30 interrupt processing at "φ1" → (KD) 15 interrupt processing at "φ1, φ2" → (KE) 8 interrupt processing at "φ2" → (KF) 4 interrupt processing at "φ2, φ3" → (KG) 2 interrupt processing at "φ3" → (KH) 1 interrupt processing at "φ3, φ0" (The number of interrupt processing executions is merely an example and may be changed.) Thus, in this example, when the reel acceleration process is executed, the number of interrupt processing executions for each excitation phase combination is gradually decreased.

Next, the step motor excitation image when the reel drive state is in the "constant reel speed state" will be explained in detail with reference to the lower right section of the same figure. In this example, when the reel is in a constant speed state (when constant reel speed maintenance processing is being executed), (TA) interrupt processing is performed once at "φ0" → (TB) interrupt processing is performed once at "φ0, φ1" → (TC) interrupt processing is performed once at "φ1" → (TD) interrupt processing is performed once at "φ1, φ2" → (TE) interrupt processing is performed once at "φ2" → (TF) interrupt processing is performed once at "φ2, φ3" → (TG) interrupt processing is performed once at "φ3" → (TH) interrupt processing is performed once at "φ3, φ0" → (TA) interrupt processing is performed once at "φ0" → (TB) interrupt processing is performed once at "φ0, φ1" → ... and so on, with (TA) to (TG) being repeatedly executed once each as an interrupt processing to excite the step motor (stepping motor). In this way, in this example, when the reel constant speed maintenance process is being executed, the interrupt process is executed only once for each combination of excited phases.

Next, when the reel drive state is in the "constant reel speed state," the stop button corresponding to one of the reels is operated at timing (5) in the diagram, and the reel drive state is updated to the "reel deceleration standby state." Here, the "constant reel speed state" refers to a state in which the reel rotation speed is constant (a state in which the combination of excited phases is switched for each interrupt process), and the "reel deceleration standby state" refers to the state from when the stop button is operated by the player until stop control begins (in the reel deceleration standby state, reel slippage occurs corresponding to the number of slip frames). The duration of this drive state is determined based on the timing of the stop button operation.

Next, at timing (6) in the diagram, the reel drive state is updated from the "reel deceleration standby state" to the "reel deceleration state," and the reel begins to decelerate. When the reel drive state is updated from the "reel deceleration standby state" to the "reel deceleration state," specific phases of the stepping motor continue to be excited for a predetermined time to stop the reel rotation; as an example, four-phase excitation is performed, in which all four phases are excited. Then, after the predetermined time of excitation, at timing (7) in the diagram, the reel drive state is updated from the "reel deceleration state" to the "reel stopped state," and the reel comes to a stop.

As described above, the slot machine of this example is configured to update the reel drive state to the reel acceleration state again and execute the reel re-acceleration process (the excitation mode of the stepping motor is the same as in the reel acceleration process) if the reel sensor does not detect an index within a predetermined time (for example, the time value required to execute the interrupt process 400 times) after the reel drive state becomes the reel constant speed state.Therefore, when the reel drive state is the reel acceleration state, in other words, while the reel acceleration process is being executed, it is not determined whether the reel acceleration has been executed normally. In addition, whether the reel acceleration has been performed normally, in other words, whether the reel is at a constant speed (whether a reel rotation malfunction has occurred), is determined in the processing of step 6124 (determined a predetermined time after the reel drive state is updated to the reel constant speed state), but if the processing of step 6124 determines that the reel is not at a constant speed (a reel rotation malfunction has occurred) because the reel sensor did not detect an index, then a reel re-acceleration process is executed, i.e., the reel acceleration process is executed again from the beginning. In this way, by configuring the reel acceleration process so that it does not determine whether reel acceleration was performed normally during execution of the reel acceleration process, even if a reel rotation malfunction occurs during execution of the reel acceleration process, if the reel rotation malfunction is subsequently resolved and the reel rotation speed is able to reach a constant speed through the remaining reel acceleration process until execution of the reel acceleration process is completed, the reel sensor will detect an index within a predetermined time after the reel drive state is updated to the constant reel speed state, and the reel constant speed maintenance process will be executed without executing the reel re-acceleration process. This makes it less likely that a situation will occur in which the player is unable to continue playing (i.e., unable to operate the stop button) due to the execution of the reel re-acceleration process. Furthermore, by configuring the reel acceleration process so that it does not determine whether reel acceleration was performed normally during execution of the reel acceleration process, the amount of data required for processing related to reel rotation can be reduced. With this configuration, if a reel rotation malfunction occurs while the slot machine of this example is executing the reel acceleration process, the following will occur.

<Effect 1>
The system is configured to function as described above: Reel rotation begins → Reel drive state is updated to reel acceleration state → Reel acceleration process is executed → Reel acceleration process execution is completed → Reel drive state is updated to reel constant speed state → Reel constant speed maintenance process is executed → Reel rotation failure occurs while reel constant speed maintenance process is being executed → Reel rotation failure is detected → Reel re-acceleration process is executed.
Note that a reel rotation failure refers to a case where the reel acceleration is not performed normally due to the reel rotation being hindered by a component provided near the reel, such as the reel window D160 (the reel rubbing against the reel window D160, etc.), loss of synchronism occurring, etc. In this way, by configuring the system to execute the reel re-acceleration process even when a reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel constant speed maintenance process, it is possible to smoothly proceed with the game.

<Effect 2>
The system is configured to operate as follows: reel rotation begins → reel drive state updated to reel acceleration state → reel acceleration process executed → reel rotation failure occurs during execution of reel acceleration process → reel acceleration process continues → execution of reel acceleration process terminates → reel drive state updated to reel constant speed state → reel constant speed maintenance process executed → reel rotation failure detected → reel re-acceleration process executed. In this way, even if a reel rotation failure occurs during execution of the reel acceleration process, by configuring the system to execute the reel re-acceleration process if a reel rotation failure is subsequently detected, game play can proceed smoothly. Furthermore, as described above, even if a reel rotation failure occurs during execution of the reel acceleration process, the system continues to execute the reel acceleration process, and ends execution of the reel acceleration process after executing the reel acceleration process the same number of interrupts as when no reel rotation failure occurs. This configuration makes it possible to easily reach a constant reel rotation speed without executing the reel re-acceleration process, for example, when a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the start of execution of the reel acceleration process.

<Effect 3>
The system is configured to function as follows: Reel rotation begins → Reel drive state updated to reel acceleration state → Reel acceleration process executed → Power off process executed during reel acceleration process → Power recovery from power off → Reel acceleration process continued (unprocessed reel acceleration process executed) → Reel rotation failure occurs during reel acceleration process → Reel acceleration process continued (unprocessed reel acceleration process executed) → Reel acceleration process completed → Reel drive state updated to constant reel speed state → Reel constant speed maintenance process executed → Reel rotation failure detected → Reel re-acceleration process executed. In this way, even if power off process is executed during reel acceleration process, the reel acceleration process continues after power is restored, and if the reel sensor does not detect an index within a predetermined time after updating the reel drive state to the constant reel speed state, the reel re-acceleration process is executed, thereby allowing game play to proceed smoothly. Furthermore, if a power-off process is executed while a reel acceleration process is being executed, the reel acceleration process will continue after the power is restored, and if the reel sensor detects an index within a predetermined time after the reel drive state is updated to a constant reel speed state, the reel re-acceleration process will not be executed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent situations in which the player is unable to continue playing (is unable to operate the stop button) due to the reel re-acceleration process. The power-off process is sometimes referred to as a power-off process.

<<Effects after pressing the final stop button>>
The slot machine of this example is configured so that the final reel (the reel that has rotated to the end, also called the third reel) stops after the final stop button (third stop button) is operated, and if a winning symbol combination is displayed, the payout of game medals can be executed, but the action related to the payout of game medals may also be configured as follows.

<Effect 1>
The game is a game in which a winning role has been won and the reels begin to spin → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → a power outage occurs → the third reel moves (spins) to the stopped display position → power outage is detected → processing at the time of power outage is executed → power is restored → the reels are displayed as stopped with the pattern combination corresponding to the winning role → processing related to the payout of game medals is executed It may be configured to function as described above. By configuring it this way, in a game where a small combination such as the aforementioned common bell is won, which can be won regardless of the timing of the operation of the stop button, if the power is interrupted due to a power outage at the gaming facility immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, the third reel can be configured to complete its movement (spin) to the expected stop position before the power interruption is detected, regardless of the expected stop position of the third reel (even if the number of sliding symbols is at its maximum). Also, if a symbol combination that constitutes a winning combination (for example, a common bell) is displayed after the power is restored, game medals can be paid out normally, making it less likely that a disadvantage will occur to the player.

<Effect 2>
The reels start spinning as a game in which a winning combination has been won → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → The constant speed state maintenance process is executed → The acceptance of the stop button is enabled → The first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → The first reel is displayed as stopped → The second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → The second reel is displayed as stopped → The third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (the operation of the third stop button is accepted) → The reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → A reel rotation malfunction occurs → The third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → A pattern corresponding to the winning combination appears on the reel as seen by the player Although the combination is not displayed as stopped, the judgment process of step 1269 judges that the symbol combination is normal (this is the case when it is judged that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally; for example, in a game in which a bell role is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the bell role, which is the winning role, is not displayed as stopped on the reels from the player's perspective, but stop control for stopping the symbol combination corresponding to the bell role is executed normally by processing within the gaming machine in response to the player's operation of the stop button) → Processing related to the payout of game medals is executed. It may be configured to function as described above. With this configuration, even if a reel spin malfunction occurs immediately after the third stop button is pressed and the reels do not display a symbol combination corresponding to the winning role from the player's perspective, the gaming machine's internal processing accepts the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, center reel, right reel) at a timing when the winning role is won and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning role can be displayed, and if the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the winning role is executed normally, the payout of game medals can be executed, thereby minimizing the player's disadvantage. Note that the timing of the reel spin malfunction is not limited to the above example, and can be applied to any case in which a reel spin malfunction occurs between the second reel's display and the execution of the process related to the payout of game medals, resulting in the reel corresponding to the third stop not stopping at the intended stop position (this can also be applied to the reel spin malfunction described below). Note that the above-mentioned action 2 illustrates an action in a game in which a winning role is won. That is, if no reel rotation failure occurs, the following action will occur (it may also be configured to have a similar action if no rotation failure or power outage occurs in other actions as well).
The reels start spinning as a game in which a winning combination has been won → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → The constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Acceptance of the stop button is enabled → The first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → The first reel is displayed as stopped → The second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → The second reel is displayed as stopped → The third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → The reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → The third reel moves to the intended stop position as seen by the player → As seen by the player The symbol combination corresponding to the winning role is displayed on the reels, and the determination process in step 1269 determines that the symbol combination is normal → executes processing related to the payout of game medals.The winning role in the above-mentioned or below-mentioned action may be a winning role that can be won regardless of the timing of operating the stop button in the winning game (for example, a common bell), or a winning role that may or may not be won depending on the timing of operating the stop button in the winning game (for example, watermelon A, watermelon B, cherry). Furthermore, in a game in which a predetermined winning combination is won in a predetermined gaming state, if a reel spinning malfunction or power outage does not occur and a symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is stopped and displayed, and if a reel backlight (sometimes referred to as a back lamp) flashes (sometimes referred to as a back lamp effect) corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is configured to be executed, the back lamp effect corresponding to the predetermined winning combination may also be configured to be executed when a reel spinning malfunction occurs and a symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is not stopped and displayed in a game in which the predetermined winning combination is won in the predetermined gaming state. Furthermore, although this action has been exemplified as a case in which the reel corresponding to the third stop cannot stop at the scheduled stop position due to a reel spinning malfunction, it may also be applied to a case in which the reel corresponding to the first stop cannot stop at the scheduled stop position due to a reel spinning malfunction, or a case in which the reel corresponding to the second stop cannot stop at the scheduled stop position due to a reel spinning malfunction (it can be similarly applied to other actions).

<Effect 3>
The game is a winning combination and the reels start spinning → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Acceptance of the stop button is enabled → The first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → The first reel is displayed as stopped → The second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → The second reel is displayed as stopped → A power outage occurs and the stable supply of power to the gaming machine is halted → The third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → The reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → Power outage is detected → Power outage process is executed → The third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → From the player's perspective, However, the determination process of step 1269 determines that the symbol combination is normal (this is the case when it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally; for example, in a game in which a bell role is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the bell role, which is the winning role, is not stopped on the reels from the player's perspective, but stop control for stopping the symbol combination corresponding to the bell role is executed normally by processing within the gaming machine in response to the player's operation of the stop button) → The process related to the payout of game medals is executed.The system may be configured to function as described above. Furthermore, the timing for detecting a power outage, the timing for the power supply to the gaming machine to stop due to a power outage, the timing for determining that the symbol combination is normal in the judgment process of step 1269, and the timing for power restoration are not limited to the above timings, and it is sufficient that the timing for detecting a power outage, the timing for the power supply to the gaming machine to stop due to a power outage, the timing for determining that the symbol combination is normal in the judgment process of step 1269, and the timing for power restoration exist during the period from when the second reel displays stopped until the processing related to the payout of gaming medals is executed, and all of these are applicable when a power outage occurs and the reel corresponding to the third stop button is unable to stop at the intended stop position (the same applies to actions including power outages as exemplified below). With this configuration, even if a power outage occurs immediately before (or immediately after) the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning role is not displayed on the reels as seen by the player, if the internal processing of the gaming machine wins the winning role and accepts operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, center reel, right reel) at a timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the winning role can be displayed, and if the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the winning role is executed normally, the payout of game medals can be executed after the power is restored (payout of game medals includes not only payout from the discharge port by driving the hopper, but also an increase in the display (number of credits) on the credit number display device), making it less likely that the player will suffer any disadvantage, and the timing when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped due to a power outage is sometimes referred to as the timing when the power outage occurs. Furthermore, in a game in which a predetermined winning combination is won in a predetermined gaming state, if a reel rotation malfunction or power outage does not occur and a symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is stopped and displayed, and if a back lamp effect corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is executed as an effect in which the reel backlights (sometimes referred to as back lamps) flash (sometimes referred to as back lamp effect), the back lamp effect corresponding to the predetermined winning combination may also be executed if a power outage occurs in a game in which the predetermined winning combination is won in the predetermined gaming state and the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is not stopped and displayed. Furthermore, although this action has been exemplified as a case in which the reel corresponding to the third stop is unable to stop at the scheduled stop position due to a power outage, it is not limited to this, and may also be applied to a case in which the reel corresponding to the first stop is unable to stop at the scheduled stop position due to a power outage, or a case in which the reel corresponding to the second stop is unable to stop at the scheduled stop position due to a power outage (it can be applied to other actions as well). In this example, "power supply to the gaming machine is stopped" and "stable power supply to the gaming machine is stopped" do not mean that the power supplied to the gaming machine is zero, but may mean that the power supplied to the gaming machine is less than the power supplied when the gaming machine is operating due to a power outage or the like, or that the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off.

<Effect 4>
The reels start spinning as a losing game → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → The constant speed state maintenance process is executed → The acceptance of the stop button is enabled → The first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → The first reel is displayed as stopped → The second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → The second reel is displayed as stopped → The third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (the operation of the third stop button is accepted) → The reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → A reel rotation malfunction occurs → The third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → The reel appears to have a winning combination as seen by the player The corresponding symbol combination is displayed as stopped, but the judgment process of step 1269 judges that the symbol combination is normal (this is the case when it is judged that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally; for example, in a game resulting in a loss, the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is not displayed as stopped on the reels as seen by the player, but stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed by processing within the gaming machine in response to the player's operation of the stop button) → The payout of game medals is not executed. It may be configured to function as described above. By configuring it in this way, even if a reel spin malfunction occurs immediately after the third stop button is pressed in a game in which the result of the role lottery is a loss, and a symbol combination corresponding to a winning role is displayed on the reels as seen by the player, the internal processing of the gaming machine determines that the game is a loss, and the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, center reel, right reel) is accepted at a timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be displayed, and if the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is executed normally, the payout of game medals can be prevented even if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning role is displayed, resulting in a fair gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the gaming parlor. Note that the above-mentioned effect 4 is not limited to losses, and can also be applied, for example, to a game in which a reel spin malfunction occurs and a symbol combination corresponding to a bell is displayed in a game in which a bell is not won (a game in which a replay role is won, a game in which a watermelon is won, etc.). In such a case, the symbol combination displayed as stopped from the player's perspective is a symbol combination that is inconsistent with the internal lottery result due to poor rotation, but the judgment process of step 1269 judges that the symbol combination is normal, so a display judgment error (an unrecoverable error) does not occur (it is not judged that a display judgment error has occurred).

<Effect 5>
The reels start to spin, marking a losing game → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → The constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Acceptance of the stop button is enabled → The first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → The first reel is displayed as stopped → The second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → The second reel is displayed as stopped → A power outage occurs and the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off → The third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → The reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → The power outage is detected → The power outage process is executed → The third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → The player When viewed from the player's perspective, the reels are displayed with a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination stopped, but the judgment process of step 1269 judges that the symbol combination is normal (when it is judged that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally; for example, in a game resulting in a loss, the reels do not display a symbol combination corresponding to a loss as viewed from the player's perspective, but the stop control for stopping the symbol combination corresponding to a loss is executed normally by the processing inside the gaming machine in response to the player's operation of the stop button) → power is restored → game medals are not paid out.It may be configured to operate as described above. By configuring it in this way, in a game in which the result of the lottery is a loss, the power-off processing is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and even if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning role is displayed on the reels as seen by the player, the internal processing of the gaming machine determines that it is a loss, and accepts the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, center reel, right reel) at a timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be displayed, and if the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is executed normally, the payout of game medals can be prevented even if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning role is displayed, resulting in a fair gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the gaming parlor. Note that the above-mentioned effect 5 is not limited to losses, and can also be applied, for example, to a game in which a reel rotation malfunction occurs and the symbol combination corresponding to the bell is displayed in a game in which the bell is not won (a game in which the replay role is won, a game in which the watermelon is won, etc.). In such a case, the symbol combination displayed as stopped from the player's perspective is a symbol combination that is inconsistent with the internal lottery result due to poor rotation, but the judgment process of step 1269 judges that the symbol combination is normal, so a display judgment error (an unrecoverable error) does not occur (it is not judged that a display judgment error has occurred).

<Effect 6>
The reels start spinning as a losing game → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → The constant speed state maintenance process is executed → The acceptance of the stop button is enabled → The first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → The first reel is displayed as stopped → The second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → The second reel is displayed as stopped → The third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (the operation of the third stop button is accepted) → The reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → A reel rotation malfunction occurs → The third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → A symbol combination corresponding to a bonus role (for example, a BB role) appears on the reel as seen by the player are displayed as stopped symbols, but the judgment process of step 1269 judges that the symbol combination is normal (when it is judged that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally; for example, in a game where a bonus role is not won and the game is a loss, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is displayed as stopped symbols on the reels from the player's perspective, but the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is executed normally by the processing inside the gaming machine in response to the player's operation of the stop button) → the bonus does not start, and freezing at the start of the bonus is not executed It may be configured to function as described above. By configuring in this way, even if a reel rotation malfunction occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted in a game in which the result of the role lottery is a loss, and a symbol combination corresponding to a bonus role is displayed on the reels from the player's perspective, the internal processing of the gaming machine determines that the role is a loss, and the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, center reel, right reel) is accepted at a timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be displayed, and if the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is executed normally, the bonus will not start even if the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is displayed, making it possible to make the gaming machine fair and to make it possible to make it a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the gaming facility. It should be noted that the above-mentioned action 6 is not limited to losses, and can also be applied, for example, to a case in which a reel rotation malfunction occurs and a symbol combination corresponding to a bonus role is displayed in a game in which a bonus role is not won (not within the bonus) and a bonus role is not won (a game in which a replay role is won, a game in which a watermelon is won, etc.), in which a bonus role is not won and a bonus role is not won. The above-mentioned action 6 illustrates an action in a game in which a bonus combination is not won. That is, if no reel spin failure occurs, the following action will occur (this is also applicable to other actions in cases in which no spin failure or power outage occurs).
The reels start spinning → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel displays stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel displays stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → the third reel moves to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is not displayed on the reel as seen by the player, and the determination processing of step 1269 determines that the symbol combination is normal → the bonus does not start to be executed, and the freeze at the start of the bonus is not executed. On the other hand, if there was no reel rotation malfunction during the game in which the bonus role was won or within the bonus, the following action occurs.
The reels start spinning → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → the third reel moves to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the reel displays a stopped pattern combination corresponding to the bonus role as seen by the player, and the judgment processing of step 1269 determines that the pattern combination is normal → the bonus begins to be executed, and the freeze is executed when the bonus starts. In the above, an example was given of a case where a freeze is executed at the start of a bonus, but depending on the type of bonus (type of bonus role), there may be bonuses for which a freeze is executed and bonuses for which a freeze is not executed, and whether or not a freeze is executed may also differ depending on the game state in which a bonus role is won.

<Effect 7>
The reels start spinning as a losing game → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → Acceptance of the stop button is enabled → The first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → The first reel is displayed as stopped → The second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → The second reel is displayed as stopped → A power outage occurs and the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off → The third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → The reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → Power outage is detected → Power outage processing is executed → The third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → A bonus role (for example, a BB role) appears on the reel as seen by the player The corresponding symbol combination is displayed as stopped, but the judgment process of step 1269 judges that the symbol combination is normal (when it is judged that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally; for example, in a game where the bonus role is not won and the game is a loss, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is displayed as stopped on the reels from the player's perspective, but the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is executed normally by the processing inside the gaming machine in response to the player's operation of the stop button) → power is restored → bonus does not start, and freezing at the start of the bonus is not executed It may be configured to function as described above. By configuring it in this way, in a game where the result of the role lottery is a loss, the power-off processing is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and even if a symbol combination corresponding to a bonus role is displayed stopped on the reels as seen by the player, the internal processing of the gaming machine will result in a loss, and the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) will be accepted at a timing when the symbol combination corresponding to a loss can be displayed stopped, and if the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to a loss is executed normally, the configuration can be such that a bonus for gaming medals will not start even if a symbol combination corresponding to a bonus role is displayed stopped, making it a fair gaming machine and a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the gaming facility. It should be noted that the above-mentioned action 6 is not limited to misses, but can also be applied, for example, when a reel spin failure occurs and a symbol combination corresponding to a bonus role is stopped and displayed in a game in which a bonus role has not been won (not within a bonus role) and the bonus role has not been won (a game in which a replay role has been won, a game in which a watermelon has been won, etc.). The above-mentioned action 6 exemplifies the action in a game in which a bonus role has not been won. That is, if a power outage does not occur, the following action will occur (this action can also be applied to other actions in which a spin failure and a power outage do not occur).
The reels start spinning → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → the third reel moves to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is not displayed on the reel as seen by the player, and the determination processing of step 1269 determines that the symbol combination is normal → the bonus does not start to be executed, and the freeze at the start of the bonus is not executed. On the other hand, if there is no reel power outage during the game in which the bonus role was won or during the bonus, the following action occurs.
The reels start spinning → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → the third reel moves to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the reel displays a stopped pattern combination corresponding to the bonus role as seen by the player, and the judgment processing of step 1269 determines that the pattern combination is normal → the bonus begins to be executed, and the freeze is executed when the bonus starts. In the above, an example was given of a case where a freeze is executed at the start of a bonus, but depending on the type of bonus (type of bonus role), there may be bonuses for which a freeze is executed and bonuses for which a freeze is not executed, and whether or not a freeze is executed may also differ depending on the game state in which a bonus role is won.

<Effect 8>
The reels start spinning as a game executed within the bonus, or as a game in which a bonus role has been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → a reel rotation malfunction occurs → the third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → although the reel does not display a symbol combination corresponding to a bonus role (for example, a BB role) as seen by the player, the determination processing of step 1269 determines that the symbol combination is normal → the bonus starts, and freezing at the start of the bonus is executed.The system may be configured to function as described above. By configuring in this way, in a game that has been executed in a situation where a bonus has been won, or in a game in which a bonus role has been won, if a reel rotation malfunction occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted and the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is not displayed on the reels as seen by the player, the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, center reel, right reel) is accepted at a timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role can be displayed, and if the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is executed normally, the bonus can be started and the freeze that is executed at the start of the bonus can be executed even if the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is not displayed. This can be configured to prevent a significant disadvantage to the player, such as a bonus not being started due to a reel rotation malfunction when the bonus should be started, and by executing the freeze at the start of the bonus, just as in the case where the reel rotation malfunction does not occur, the player can proceed with the game without any discomfort.

<Effect 9>
The reels start spinning as a game executed during the bonus or as a game in which a bonus role has been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → a power outage occurs and the supply of power to the gaming machine is cut off → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → power outage is detected → power outage processing is executed → the third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the reel does not display a symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role (for example, a BB role) as seen by the player, but the judgment processing of step 1269 determines that the symbol combination is normal → power is restored → the bonus starts, and freezing at the start of the bonus is executed. By configuring in this way, in a game that is executed when a bonus has been won or in a game in which a bonus role has been won, the power-off process is executed immediately after accepting a stop operation of the third stop button, and even if the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is not displayed stopped on the reels as seen by the player, the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, center reel, right reel) is accepted at a timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role can be displayed stopped, and if the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is executed normally, the bonus can be started and the freeze that is executed at the start of the bonus can be executed even if the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is not displayed stopped, so that the system is configured to avoid causing significant disadvantage to the player, such as the bonus not being able to start due to a power outage when it should have started, and by executing the freeze at the start of the bonus, just as in the case where there is no reel rotation malfunction, the player can proceed with the game without any discomfort.

<Effect 10>
The reels start spinning as a losing game → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → The constant speed state maintenance process is executed → The acceptance of the stop button is enabled → The first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → The first reel is displayed as stopped → The second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → The second reel is displayed as stopped → The third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → The reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → A reel rotation malfunction occurs → The third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → The reel stops with a pattern combination corresponding to a replay role as seen by the player However, the determination process of step 1269 determines that the symbol combination is normal (when it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally; for example, in a game that resulted in a loss, a symbol combination corresponding to a replay role is stopped and displayed on the reels as seen by the player, but stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to a loss is executed normally by processing within the gaming machine in response to the player's operation of the stop button) → An automatic bet corresponding to the stopped display of the replay role is not made, and the replay lamp D290 is not newly lit, so it may be configured to function as described above. By configuring it in this way, in a game in which the result of the role lottery is a loss, even if a reel rotation malfunction occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted and a symbol combination corresponding to a replay role is displayed stopped on the reels as seen by the player, the game machine will process it as a loss in its internal processing, and the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) will be accepted at a timing when a symbol combination corresponding to a loss can be displayed stopped, and if the stop control for displaying a symbol combination corresponding to a loss is executed normally, an automatic bet will not be made even if a symbol combination corresponding to a replay role is displayed stopped, and the replay lamp D290 will not light up again. Furthermore, in effect 10, even if a symbol combination corresponding to a replay role that would cause a transition to the RT state if displayed as a stop symbol in the current RT state is displayed as a stop symbol from the player's perspective, if the internal processing of the gaming machine determines that the symbol combination corresponding to the miss is a miss, and the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, center reel, right reel) is accepted at a timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the miss can be displayed as a stop symbol, and if the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the miss is successfully executed, the RT state will not be transitioned (this is also applicable to the case where a symbol combination corresponding to a role other than a replay role that would cause a transition to the RT state is displayed as a stop symbol). This configuration allows for a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the gaming facility. Note that effect 10 is not limited to misses. For example, it can be applied when a reel spin failure occurs and a symbol combination corresponding to a replay role is displayed as a stop symbol in a game in which the replay role is not won. That is, if a reel spin failure does not occur, the following effect occurs (it is also applicable to other effects if a spin failure or power outage does not occur).
The reels start spinning → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → the third reel moves to the intended stop position as seen by the player → a symbol combination corresponding to a miss is displayed on the reel as seen by the player, and the symbol combination is determined to be normal by the judgment processing of step 1269 → an automatic bet is not made, and the replay lamp D290 does not light up again.
In addition, an automatic bet means that the specified number of game medals (for example, three) that were bet in the game in which the re-play role was won will be automatically bet when the re-play role is stopped and displayed, without the need to operate the bet button (max bet button) or insert game medals into the medal insertion slot.
On the other hand, if there is no reel rotation failure in the game in which the replay role is won, the following action will occur.
The reels start spinning → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → Acceptance of stop button is enabled → The first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → The first reel displays as stopped → The second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → The second reel displays as stopped → The third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → The reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → The third reel moves to the intended stop position as seen by the player → A symbol combination corresponding to a replay role is displayed stopped on the reel as seen by the player, and the judgment processing of step 1269 determines that the symbol combination is normal → An automatic bet is executed, and the replay lamp D290 lights up again (if the replay role was won in the previous game, the replay lamp D290 remains lit).
The following effects can be exemplified.

<Effect 11>
The reels start to spin as a losing game → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → The constant speed state maintenance process is executed → The acceptance of the stop button is enabled → The first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → The first reel is displayed as stopped → The second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → The second reel is displayed as stopped → A power outage occurs and the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped → The third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → The reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → The power outage is detected → The power outage process is executed → The third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → The reel corresponds to a replay role as seen by the player A symbol combination that corresponds to a replay role is displayed as stopped, but the judgment process of step 1269 judges that the symbol combination is normal (when it is judged that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally; for example, in a game that resulted in a loss, a symbol combination that corresponds to a replay role is displayed as stopped on the reels as seen by the player, but stop control for displaying the symbol combination that corresponds to a loss is normally executed by processing within the gaming machine that corresponds to the player's operation of the stop button) → power is restored → no automatic bet is made corresponding to the stopped display of the replay role, and the replay lamp D290 is not newly lit. It may be configured to function as described above. By configuring it in this way, in a game in which the result of the role lottery is a loss, the power-off processing is executed immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, and even if a symbol combination corresponding to a replay role is displayed stopped on the reels as seen by the player, the internal processing of the gaming machine will result in a loss, and the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) will be accepted at a timing when a symbol combination corresponding to a loss can be displayed stopped, and if the stop control for displaying a symbol combination corresponding to a loss is executed normally, an automatic bet will not be made even if a symbol combination corresponding to a replay role is displayed stopped, and the replay lamp D290 will not light up again. Furthermore, in effect 10, even if a symbol combination corresponding to a replay role that would cause a transition to the RT state if displayed as a stop symbol in the current RT state is displayed as a stop symbol from the player's perspective, if the internal processing of the gaming machine determines that the symbol combination corresponding to the miss is a miss, and the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, center reel, right reel) is accepted at a timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the miss can be displayed as a stop symbol, and if the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the miss is successfully executed, the RT state will not be transitioned (this is also applicable to the case where a symbol combination corresponding to a role other than a replay role that would cause a transition to the RT state is displayed as a stop symbol). This configuration allows for a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the gaming facility. It should be noted that effect 11 is not limited to misses. For example, it can be applied when a power outage occurs and a symbol combination corresponding to a replay role is displayed as a stop symbol in a game in which the replay role has not been won. That is, if a power outage does not occur, the following effect occurs (it can also be applied to other effects if no rotation malfunction or power outage occurs).
The reels start spinning → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → the third reel moves to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the reel displays a symbol combination corresponding to a miss as seen by the player, and the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the determination processing of step 1269 → no automatic bet is made, and the replay lamp D290 does not light up again. On the other hand, if no power outage occurs in a game in which a replay role is won, the following action occurs.
The reels start spinning → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → Acceptance of stop button is enabled → The first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → The first reel displays as stopped → The second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → The second reel displays as stopped → The third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → The reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → The third reel moves to the intended stop position as seen by the player → A symbol combination corresponding to a replay role is displayed stopped on the reel as seen by the player, and the judgment processing of step 1269 determines that the symbol combination is normal → An automatic bet is executed, and the replay lamp D290 lights up again (if the replay role was won in the previous game, the replay lamp D290 remains lit).
The following effects can be exemplified.

<Effect 12>
The game is a winning replay and the reels start spinning → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → a reel rotation malfunction occurs → the third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → from the player's perspective, the reel does not display the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role stopped, but the judgment processing of step 1269 determines that the symbol combination is normal → an automatic bet corresponding to the stop display of the replay role is made, and the replay lamp D290 is newly lit.The system may be configured to function as described above. By configuring it in this way, in a game in which the result of the role lottery is a replay, even if a reel rotation malfunction occurs immediately after accepting a stop operation of the third stop button and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role is not displayed on the reels as seen by the player, the replay has been won in the internal processing of the gaming machine, and the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, center reel, right reel) is accepted at a timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role can be displayed, and if the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role is normally executed, an automatic bet will be made even if the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role is not displayed, and the replay lamp D290 will be newly lit. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to create a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the player, and even if it is not possible to determine whether or not the replay role has been won by visually checking the reels because the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role is not displayed, it is possible to make it difficult to misunderstand the status of the game by visually checking whether or not the automatic bet has been executed and the lighting of the replay lamp D290. In addition, in action 12, if a replay role that would cause the RT state to transition if stopped and displayed in the current RT state is won, the RT state will transition even if the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role is not stopped and displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to create a gaming machine that is less likely to cause problems in the progress of the game, and it is possible to create a user-friendly gaming machine.

<Effect 13>
The game is a winning replay and the reels start spinning → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → a power outage occurs and the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → power outage is detected → processing at the time of power outage is executed → the third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the reel does not display the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role as seen by the player, but the judgment processing of step 1269 determines that the symbol combination is normal → power is restored → an automatic bet corresponding to the stop display of the replay role is made, and the replay lamp D290 is newly lit. By configuring it in this way, in a game in which the result of the role lottery is a replay, the power-off processing is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and even if the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role is not displayed stopped on the reels as seen by the player, the replay has been won in the internal processing of the gaming machine, and the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, center reel, right reel) is accepted at a timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role can be displayed stopped, and if the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role is normally executed, an automatic bet will be made even if the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role is not displayed stopped, and the replay lamp D290 will be newly lit. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to create a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the player, and even if it is not possible to determine whether the replay role has been won by visually checking the reels because the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role is not displayed stopped, it is possible to make it difficult to misunderstand the status of the game by visually checking whether the automatic bet has been executed and the lighting of the replay lamp D290. In addition, in action 13, if a replay role that would cause the RT state to transition if stopped and displayed in the current RT state is won, the RT state will transition even if the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role is not stopped and displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to create a gaming machine that is less likely to cause problems in the progress of the game, and it is possible to create a user-friendly gaming machine.

<Effect 14>
The reels start spinning as a game in which a role that transitions to the RT state (sometimes called an RT transition role) has been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → a reel rotation malfunction occurs → the third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → although the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role is not displayed as stopped as seen by the player, the determination processing of step 1269 determines that the symbol combination is normal → the RT state transitions.It may be configured to operate as described above. By configuring it in this way, in a game in which an RT transition role is won, if a reel spin malfunction occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted and the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role is not displayed on the reels as seen by the player, if the RT transition role is won in the internal processing of the gaming machine, and the operation of the stop buttons corresponding to each reel (left reel, center reel, right reel) is accepted at a timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role can be displayed, and the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role is executed normally, the RT state will be transitioned even if the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role is not displayed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to create a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the player, and it is possible to progress the game in accordance with the transition of the gaming state that the gaming machine originally has, allowing the gaming facility manager to operate the gaming machine with peace of mind. Incidentally, an RT transition role is a role that transitions to a different RT state from the predetermined RT state by a symbol combination being stopped and displayed in the predetermined RT state, and whether or not it becomes an RT transition role may differ depending on the RT state you are in. That is, in RT state A, a predetermined role A is an RT transition role, but in RT state B, the predetermined role A may not be an RT transition role, and in RT state A, a predetermined role A is an RT transition role, but in RT state B, the predetermined role A may not be won.

<Effect 15>
The reels start spinning as a game in which a role that transitions to the RT state (sometimes referred to as an RT transition role) has been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → a power outage occurs and power supply to the gaming machine is cut off → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → power outage is detected → power outage processing is executed → the third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → although the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role is not displayed as stopped as seen by the player, the determination processing of step 1269 determines that the symbol combination is normal → the RT state transition occurs (the RT state transition may occur after the power is restored or before the power is restored).
The gaming machine may be configured to operate as described above. By configuring it this way, in a game in which an RT transition role has been won, power-off processing is executed immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, and even if the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role is not displayed on the reels as seen by the player, if the RT transition role has been won in the internal processing of the gaming machine, and the operation of the stop buttons corresponding to each reel (left reel, center reel, right reel) is accepted at a timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role can be displayed, and if the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role is executed normally, the RT state will be transitioned even if the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role is not displayed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to create a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to players, and it is possible to progress the game in accordance with the transition of the gaming state that the gaming machine originally has, allowing the gaming facility manager to operate the gaming machine with peace of mind.

<Effect 16>
The reels start spinning as a game in which a role that will transition to the RT state (sometimes called an RT transition role) has not been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → a reel rotation malfunction occurs → the third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → although the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role is displayed as stopped as seen by the player, the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the judgment processing of step 1269 → the RT state does not transition.It may be configured to function as described above. By configuring it in this way, in a game in which the RT transition role has not been won, even if a reel rotation malfunction occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted and a symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role is stopped and displayed on the reels as seen by the player, the RT state will not be transitioned. By configuring it in this way, for example, when push order navigation is executed to prevent a transition to an RT state that is disadvantageous to the player during an AT state, even if the player operates the stop button according to the push order navigation, and a symbol combination that would cause a transition to the RT state (a fall) due to a reel rotation malfunction is apparently displayed, the RT state will not be transitioned, making it possible to create a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the player, and also allowing the game to proceed in accordance with the transition of the gaming state that the gaming machine originally has, so that the gaming facility manager can operate the gaming machine with peace of mind.

<Effect 17>
The reels start spinning as a game in which a role that will transition to the RT state (sometimes called an RT transition role) has not been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → a power outage occurs and the supply of power to the gaming machine is cut off → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → power outage is detected → power outage processing is executed → the third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role is displayed as stopped as seen by the player, but the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the judgment processing of step 1269 → the RT state does not transition.It may be configured to operate as described above. By configuring it in this way, in a game in which an RT transition role has not been won, the power-off processing is executed immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, and even if a symbol combination corresponding to an RT transition role is stopped and displayed on the reels as seen by the player, the RT state will not be transitioned. By configuring it in this way, for example, when push order navigation is executed to prevent a transition to an RT state that is disadvantageous to the player during an AT state, even if the player operates the stop button according to the push order navigation, and a symbol combination that would cause a transition to the RT state (a fall) due to poor reel rotation is apparently displayed, the RT state will not be transitioned, making it possible to create a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the player, and also allowing the game to proceed in accordance with the transition of the gaming state that the gaming machine originally has, so that the gaming facility manager can operate the gaming machine with peace of mind.

<Effect 18>
The reels start spinning as a losing game → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → The constant speed state maintenance process is executed → The acceptance of the stop button is enabled → The first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → The first reel is displayed as stopped → The second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → A reel rotation malfunction occurs → The second reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is displayed as stopped on the active line on the first and second reels as seen by the player → The ready-to-win sound is not output from the speaker.
The reels start spinning as a losing game → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance process is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → a reel rotation malfunction occurs → the second reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is not displayed as stopped on the active line on the first and second reels as seen by the player (if the second reel has moved to the intended stop position, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is displayed as stopped on the active line on the first and second reels) → a ready-to-win sound is output from the speaker.The system may be configured to operate as described above.Furthermore, as an operation when a reel rotation malfunction does not occur,
The reels start to spin as a losing game → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → The constant speed state maintenance process is executed → The acceptance of the stop button is enabled → The first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → The first reel is displayed as stopped → The second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → The second reel moves (spins) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is displayed stopped on the active line on the first and second reels as seen by the player → A ready-to-win sound is output from the speaker.
The reels start spinning as a losing game → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance process is executed → acceptance of the stop button becomes valid → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel appears stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel moves (spins) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is not displayed stopped on the active line on the first and second reels as seen by the player → the ready sound is not output from the speaker It may be configured to operate as described above.
By configuring it in this way, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is a loss, a reel rotation malfunction occurs immediately after the stop operation of the second stop button is accepted, and the symbol combination that makes up the bonus symbol stops at the first and second stops.In other words, even if the bonus symbol is in a ready state, if it stops at the expected stop position in this example, the ready state sound will not be output if the bonus symbol was not expected to be in a ready state.Even if the apparent stop position of the reel is not normal due to a reel rotation malfunction, the player can quickly notice that a reel rotation malfunction has occurred through the output from the speaker. Similarly, in a game in which the result of the lottery is a loss, a reel rotation malfunction occurs immediately after the stop operation of the second stop button is accepted, and the symbol combination that makes up the bonus symbol does not stop at the first or second stop; in other words, even if the bonus symbol does not form a completed pattern, if it stops at the planned stop position in this example, a completed pattern sound will be output if the bonus symbol was scheduled to form a completed pattern, and even if the apparent stopping position of the reel is not normal due to a reel rotation malfunction, the output from the speaker will allow the player to quickly notice that a reel rotation malfunction has occurred.

<Effect 19>
The reels start spinning as a losing game → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button acceptance is enabled → The first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → The first reel is displayed as stopped → A power outage occurs and the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped → The second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → Power outage is detected → Power outage process is executed → The second reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → A symbol combination corresponding to a bonus role is displayed as stopped on the active line on the first and second reels as seen by the player → Power is restored → The ready sound is not output from the speaker. Also,
The reels start spinning as a losing game → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance process is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → a power outage occurs and power supply to the gaming machine is stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → power outage is detected → power outage process is executed → the second reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is not displayed as stopped on the active line on the first and second reels as seen by the player (if the second reel moves to the intended stop position, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is displayed as stopped on the active line on the first and second reels) → power is restored → a ready-to-win sound is output from the speaker.
The reels start to spin as a losing game → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → The constant speed state maintenance process is executed → The acceptance of the stop button is enabled → The first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → The first reel is displayed as stopped → The second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → The second reel moves (spins) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is displayed stopped on the active line on the first and second reels as seen by the player → A ready-to-win sound is output from the speaker.
The reels start spinning as a losing game → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel appears stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel moves (spins) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is not displayed stopped on the activated line on the first and second reels as seen by the player → the ready-to-win sound is not output from the speaker.The system may be configured to operate as described above.The ready-to-win sound may be output from the speaker before the power-off processing is completed or after the power is restored after a power outage.
By configuring it in this way, in a game where the result of the winning combination lottery is a loss, the power-off processing is executed immediately after the stop operation of the second stop button is accepted, and the symbol combination that makes up the bonus symbol stops as the first stop and the second stop.In other words, even if the bonus symbol is in a ready state, if it stops at the expected stop position in this example, and the bonus symbol was not expected to be in a ready state, the ready state sound will not be output, and even if the apparent stop position of the reel is not normal due to a reel rotation malfunction, the player can quickly notice that a reel rotation malfunction has occurred by the output from the speaker. Similarly, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is a loss, a reel spin malfunction occurs immediately after the second stop button is pressed, and the symbol combination that constitutes the bonus symbol does not stop as the first or second stop. In other words, even if the bonus symbol does not reach a ready state, if the bonus symbol stops at the expected stop position in this example, a ready state sound will be output. Even if the apparent stop position of the reel is abnormal due to the occurrence of a reel spin malfunction, the output from the speaker will allow the player to quickly notice that a reel spin malfunction has occurred. Note that, although this action illustrates an example in which the reel corresponding to the second stop does not stop at the expected stop position, it may also be the case in which the reel corresponding to the first stop does not stop at the expected stop position (a reel spin malfunction occurs immediately after the first stop operation is executed).

<Effect 20>
The reels start spinning as a game that is not within a bonus and has resulted in a loss → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → The constant speed state maintenance process is executed → The acceptance of the stop button is enabled → The first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → The first reel is displayed as stopped → The second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → A reel rotation malfunction occurs → The second reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is displayed as stopped on the active line on the first and second reels as seen by the player → The bonus confirmation ready sound is not output from the speaker.
The reels start spinning during a bonus or as a bonus winning game → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance process is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → a reel rotation malfunction occurs → the second reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is not displayed as stopped on the active line on the first and second reels as seen by the player (if the second reel has moved to the intended stop position, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is displayed as stopped on the active line on the first and second reels) → a bonus confirmation ready sound is output from the speaker.
The reels start spinning during a bonus or as a game in which a bonus has been won → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → The constant speed state maintenance process is executed → The acceptance of the stop button is enabled → The first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → The first reel is displayed as stopped → The second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → The second reel moves (spins) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is displayed as stopped on the active line on the first and second reels as seen by the player → A sound indicating that a bonus has been confirmed is output from the speaker.
The reels start spinning as a game that is not within a bonus and has resulted in a loss → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel appears stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel moves (spins) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is not displayed stopped on the pay line on the first and second reels as seen by the player → the bonus confirmation ready sound is not output from the speaker.The bonus confirmation ready sound is a ready sound that can be output from the speaker when symbols that make up a predetermined bonus symbol appear stopped (in ready state) on a pay line and the predetermined bonus symbol can be displayed stopped.
By configuring it in this way, in a game where the result of the role lottery is a miss and the bonus is not in progress, a reel rotation malfunction occurs immediately after the stop operation of the second stop button is accepted, and the symbol combination that makes up the bonus symbol stops as the first stop and the second stop.In other words, even if the bonus symbol is formed, if it stops at the expected stop position in this example, and the bonus symbol was not expected to be formed, the bonus confirmation formed sound will not be output, and even if the apparent stop position of the reel is not normal due to a reel rotation malfunction, the player can quickly notice that a reel rotation malfunction has occurred by the output from the speaker.
Similarly, in a game in which the result of the role lottery is a bonus role or a game executed during a bonus role, if a reel rotation malfunction occurs immediately after the second stop button is pressed and the symbol combination constituting the bonus symbol does not stop as the first or second stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol does not form a ready-to-play pattern, if the bonus symbol had stopped at the expected stop position in this example, a bonus confirmation ready-to-play sound will be output, and even if the apparent stop position of the reel is abnormal due to the occurrence of a reel rotation malfunction, the player can quickly detect that a reel rotation malfunction has occurred by the output from the speaker. Note that, although this action illustrates an example in which the reel corresponding to the second stop does not stop at the expected stop position, it may also be the case in which the reel corresponding to the first stop does not stop at the expected stop position (a reel rotation malfunction occurs immediately after the first stop operation is executed).

<Effect 21>
The reels start spinning as a losing game → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button acceptance is enabled → The first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → The first reel is displayed as stopped → A power outage occurs and the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped → The second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → Power outage is detected → Power outage process is executed → The second reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → A symbol combination corresponding to a bonus role is displayed as stopped on the active line on the first and second reels as seen by the player → Power is restored → The ready sound is not output from the speaker. Also,
The reels start spinning as a losing game → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance process is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → a power outage occurs and power supply to the gaming machine is stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → power outage is detected → power outage process is executed → the second reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is not displayed as stopped on the active line on the first and second reels as seen by the player (if the second reel moves to the intended stop position, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is displayed as stopped on the active line on the first and second reels) → power is restored → a ready-to-win sound is output from the speaker.
The reels start to spin as a losing game → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → The constant speed state maintenance process is executed → The acceptance of the stop button is enabled → The first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → The first reel is displayed as stopped → The second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → The second reel moves (spins) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is displayed stopped on the active line on the first and second reels as seen by the player → A ready-to-win sound is output from the speaker.
The reels start spinning as a losing game → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel appears stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel moves (spins) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is not displayed stopped on the activated line on the first and second reels as seen by the player → the ready-to-win sound is not output from the speaker.The system may be configured to operate as described above.The ready-to-win sound may be output from the speaker before the power-off processing is completed or after the power is restored after a power outage.
By configuring it in this way, in a game where the result of the winning combination lottery is a loss, the power outage processing is executed immediately after the stop operation of the second stop button is accepted, and the symbol combination that makes up the bonus symbol stops as the first stop and the second stop.In other words, even if the bonus symbol is in a ready state, if it stops at the expected stop position in this example, and the bonus symbol was not expected to be in a ready state, the ready state sound will not be output, and even if the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to a power outage, the output from the speaker will allow the player to quickly realize that an abnormality has occurred in the reel due to the power outage. Similarly, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is a loss, if a power outage occurs immediately after the stop operation of the second stop button is accepted and the symbol combination that constitutes the bonus symbol does not stop as the first stop or the second stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol does not reach a ready state, if the bonus symbol had stopped at the expected stop position in this example, a ready state sound will be output, and even if the apparent stop position of the reel is abnormal due to the power outage, the output from the speaker will allow the player to quickly realize that an abnormality has occurred in the reel due to the power outage. Note that, although this action illustrates an example in which the reel corresponding to the second stop does not stop at the expected stop position, it may also be the case in which the reel corresponding to the first stop does not stop at the expected stop position (the power outage processing is executed immediately after the first stop operation is executed).

<Effect 22>
The reels start spinning as a game that is not within a bonus and has resulted in a loss → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → Stop button acceptance is enabled → The first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → The first reel is displayed as stopped → A power outage occurs and power supply to the gaming machine is stopped → The second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → Power outage is detected → Processing at the time of power outage is executed → The second reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → A symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is displayed as stopped on the active line on the first and second reels as seen by the player → The bonus confirmation ready sound is not output from the speaker.
The reels start spinning during a bonus or as a bonus winning game → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance process is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → a power outage occurs and power supply to the gaming machine is stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → power outage is detected → power outage process is executed → the second reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is not displayed as stopped on the active line on the first and second reels as seen by the player (if the second reel has moved to the intended stop position, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is displayed as stopped on the active line on the first and second reels) → a bonus confirmation ready sound is output from the speaker.
The reels start spinning during a bonus or as a game in which a bonus has been won → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → The constant speed state maintenance process is executed → The acceptance of the stop button is enabled → The first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → The first reel is displayed as stopped → The second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → The second reel moves (spins) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is displayed as stopped on the active line on the first and second reels as seen by the player → A sound indicating that a bonus has been confirmed is output from the speaker.
The reels start spinning as a game that is not within a bonus and has resulted in a loss → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel appears stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel moves (spins) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is not displayed stopped on the pay line on the first and second reels as seen by the player → the bonus confirmation ready sound is not output from the speaker.The bonus confirmation ready sound is a ready sound that can be output from the speaker when symbols that make up a predetermined bonus symbol appear stopped (in ready state) on a pay line and the predetermined bonus symbol can be displayed stopped.
By configuring it in this way, in a game where the result of the role lottery is a miss and the game is not in the bonus state, the power-off processing is executed immediately after receiving the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbol combination that makes up the bonus symbol stops as the first stop and the second stop. In other words, even if the bonus symbol is in a ready state, if it stops at the expected stop position in this example, and the bonus symbol was not expected to be in a ready state, the bonus confirmation ready sound will not be output, and even if the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to a power outage, the output from the speaker will allow the player to quickly realize that an abnormality has occurred in the reel due to the power outage.
Similarly, in a game in which the result of the role lottery is a bonus role or a game executed during a bonus role, if the power-off process is initiated immediately after the second stop button is pressed and the symbol combination that constitutes the bonus symbol does not stop as the first or second stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol does not reach a ready state, if the symbol stops at the expected stop position in this example, a bonus confirmation ready sound will be output, and even if the apparent stop position of the reel is abnormal due to a power outage, the output from the speaker will allow the player to quickly realize that an abnormality has occurred in the reel due to the power outage. Note that, although this operation illustrates a case in which the reel corresponding to the second stop does not stop at the expected stop position, it may also be the case in which the reel corresponding to the first stop does not stop at the expected stop position (the power-off process is executed immediately after the first stop operation is executed).

<Effect 23>
If the number of credits is 1 or more and the game has been won with a predetermined replay role, the reels start spinning → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → a reel rotation malfunction occurs → the third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined replay role is not displayed as stopped → the max bet lamp does not light up.
The number of credits is 1 or more, and the reels start spinning as a game in which the replay role has not been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → a reel rotation malfunction occurs → the third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → a symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined replay role is displayed as stopped → the max bet lamp is lit.The above operation may also be configured to work as follows.In addition, as an operation in the case where a reel rotation malfunction does not occur,
If the number of credits is 1 or more, the reels start to rotate as a game in which a predetermined replay role has been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → the third reel moves (spins) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined replay role is displayed as stopped → the max bet lamp does not light up.
The number of credits is 1 or more and the reels start spinning as a game in which the replay role has not been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance process is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → the third reel moves (spins) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the pattern combination corresponding to the specified replay role is not displayed as stopped → the max bet lamp lights up It may be configured to operate as described above.
With this configuration, in a game in which a replay is won, even if a reel spin malfunction occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted and the symbol combination corresponding to a replay is not displayed, the MAX BET lamp will not light up, just as in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed, allowing the player to quickly realize that the operation of the MAX BET button was invalid. Also, in a game in which a replay is not won, even if a reel spin malfunction occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted and the symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed, the MAX BET lamp will light up, just as in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to a replay is not displayed, allowing the player to quickly realize that the operation of the MAX BET button was valid.

<Effect 24>
If the number of credits is 1 or more, the reels start to rotate as a game in which a predetermined replay role has been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → a power outage occurs and the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → power outage is detected → processing at the time of power outage is executed → the third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined replay role is not displayed as stopped → the max bet lamp does not light up.
The number of credits is 1 or more, and the reels start spinning as a game in which the replay role has not been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → a power outage occurs and the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → power outage is detected → processing at the time of power outage is executed → the third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined replay role is displayed as stopped → the max bet lamp is lit. The above operation may also be configured to work as described above.
If the number of credits is 1 or more, the reels start to rotate as a game in which a predetermined replay role has been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → the third reel moves (spins) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined replay role is displayed as stopped → the max bet lamp does not light up.
The number of credits is 1 or more and the reels start spinning as a game in which the replay role has not been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance process is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → the third reel moves (spins) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the pattern combination corresponding to the specified replay role is not displayed as stopped → the max bet lamp lights up It may be configured to operate as described above.
With this configuration, in a game in which a replay has been won, the power-off processing is executed immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, and even if the symbol combination corresponding to a replay is not displayed, the MAX BET lamp will not light up, just as in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed, allowing the player to quickly realize that the operation of the MAX BET button is invalid. Also, in a game in which a replay has not been won, the power-off processing is executed immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, and the symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed, just as in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to a replay is not displayed, allowing the player to quickly realize that the operation of the MAX BET button is valid.

<Effect 25>
In a game during bonus execution, in which a winning combination is won and a game medal corresponding to the winning combination is awarded to the player, the bonus termination condition is met, and the reels start to rotate → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → a reel rotation malfunction occurs → the third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed as stopped → the bonus ends, and a freeze is executed at the end of the bonus.
It may be configured to operate as described above in a game during which a bonus is being executed, in which a winning role has been won, and in which the game medal corresponding to the winning role is awarded to the player, thereby fulfilling the bonus end conditions, as follows: the reels start to rotate → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → the third reel moves (spins) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the winning role is displayed as stopped → the bonus ends, and a freeze is executed when the bonus ends.
By configuring it in this way, even if a winning combination is won in the final bonus game and the reels fail to spin properly immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed, the bonus ends and a freeze is executed at the end of the bonus, just as in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is displayed, so that the player can quickly realize that the bonus has ended normally, and a gaming machine can be provided which does not cause the player to feel uncomfortable about the progress of the game.

<Effect 26>
In a game during bonus execution, in which a winning combination is won and a game medal corresponding to the winning combination is awarded to the player, the bonus termination condition is met, and the reels begin to rotate → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → a power outage occurs and the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (the operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → power outage is detected → power outage processing is executed → the third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed as stopped → the bonus ends, and a bonus end freeze is executed.
It may be configured to operate as described above in a game during which a bonus is being executed, in which a winning role has been won, and in which the game medal corresponding to the winning role is awarded to the player, thereby fulfilling the bonus end conditions, as follows: the reels start to rotate → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → the third reel moves (spins) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the winning role is displayed as stopped → the bonus ends, and a freeze is executed when the bonus ends.
By configuring it in this way, when a winning combination is won in the final bonus game and the power-off processing is executed immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not stopped and displayed, the bonus ends and a freeze is executed at the end of the bonus, just as in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed, so that the player can quickly realize that the bonus has ended normally, and a gaming machine can be provided which does not cause the player to feel uncomfortable about the progress of the game.

In addition, from the configuration regarding the reel acceleration process in the slot machine according to the present embodiment described above,
The execution period of the reel acceleration process when no drum rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration process = A
When a drum rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration process, the execution period of the reel acceleration process until the drum rotation failure occurs = B
When a drum rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration process, the execution period of the reel acceleration process after the drum rotation failure occurs = C
In this case,
A = B + C
It is configured to be.
Also,
The number of times that the reel acceleration process interrupts when no drum rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration process = D
When a drum rotation failure occurs during execution of the reel acceleration process, the number of times the reel acceleration process interrupt processing is executed until the drum rotation failure occurs = E
When a drum rotation failure occurs during execution of the reel acceleration process, the number of times that the reel acceleration process interrupts after the drum rotation failure occurs is F.
In this case,
D = E + F
It is configured to be.

Next, Figure 36 is a flowchart of the power-off processing related to the subroutine of step 1900 in Figure 35. First, in step 1901, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes output port clear processing. By executing the processing of step 1901, if the power-off processing is executed while the hopper H40 is operating (while game medals are being paid out), the hopper H40 will no longer operate, and if the power-off processing is executed while the blocker D100 is on, the blocker D100 will be turned off. Next, in step 1902, the CPU C100 of the main control board M saves the stack pointer. Next, in step 1904, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns on the power-off processing completed flag (for example, updates the power-off processing completed flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to on). Next, in step 1906, the CPU C100 of the main control board M calculates a checksum from the starting address of the RAM area to the address immediately preceding the checksum area, and sets error detection information based on the calculated checksum (for example, the lowest byte of the calculated checksum, or its complement) in the checksum area. Next, in step 1912, the CPU C100 of the main control board M prohibits writing to RAM and proceeds to step 1914. Next, in step 1914, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes an infinite loop process to wait for a reset.

Next, Figure 37 shows an example of an image diagram of the push order display of the slot machine of this example. The table in the figure shows the correspondence between the reel stop order indicated by the executed push order navigation and the instruction number (information related to the push order, determined by the main control board M and transmitted to the sub-control board S in this example). For example, when the push order is announced as "center → right → left," the instruction number is "A5." Next, the left side of the figure illustrates the image displayed on the push order display device D270, advantageous zone indicator YH, and performance display device S40 when the push order is "left → center → right" (the corresponding instruction number is "A1"). Here, the push order display device D270 in this example is a 7-segment display type and also serves as a payout number display device. Furthermore, when a medal payout is executed, the number of medals paid out is displayed as a two-digit number on the push order display device D270. Here, even when executing push order navigation, if the push order display device D270 displays a two-digit number, it becomes difficult to distinguish whether the display on the push order display device D270 is the number of medals to be paid out or the push order navigation display. Therefore, to distinguish between the number of medals to be paid out and the push order navigation display, the push order display device D270 is configured to display an "=" on the left digit, such as "=1." This makes it possible to distinguish that when the push order display device D270 displays a two-digit number, it is the number of medals to be paid out, and when the push order display device D270 displays an "=" on the left and a number on the right, it is the push order navigation display, preventing player misunderstanding. Furthermore, the advantageous zone indicator YH, located in the lower right corner of the push order display device D270, lights up a lamp indicating that the current play zone is the "advantageous zone." At the same time, the display "40 games remaining," indicating the number of games remaining in the "advantageous zone" (or "AT state"), is displayed on the effect display device S40. The right side of the figure illustrates the image displayed on the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 when the push order is "center → left → right" (the corresponding instruction number is "A3"). Additionally, because the current play area is a "profitable area," the advantageous area indicator YH lights up, and the "25 games remaining" message, indicating the number of games remaining in the "profitable area," is displayed on the effect display device S40. The segment display of the instruction numbers for a push order role (a conditional device in which the role displayed varies depending on the reel stop order, and involves the payout of medals, such as a bell) and a push order replay role (a conditional device in which the role displayed varies depending on the reel stop order, and involves the replay role) may be different. The display method of the push order display device D270 is not limited to seven segments. For example, an LED display may be used to illuminate multiple LEDs according to a lighting pattern corresponding to the instruction numbers to provide instructions. The advantageous area indicator YH may also be configured to be provided in the lower right corner of the credit count display device D200. In this case, it is preferable that the advantageous zone indicator YH be lit until the operation of the settlement button D60 becomes effective. When the player wants to stop playing, they will visually check the credit number display device D200 to see if they have any medals remaining. If there are medals remaining, the settlement button D60 is operated. In other words, by illuminating the indicator YH before the settlement button D60 becomes effective, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally quitting play even though the next play will be in the "advantageous zone," making for a user-friendly gaming machine.

Furthermore, the notification mode of the game zone in the advantageous zone indicator YH is not limited to this example, and may be configured to have a zone indicator similar to the advantageous zone indicator YH at the bottom right of both of the two 7-segment displays (two zone indicators). In such a configuration, when the left zone indicator lights up, it notifies that the current game zone is a "normal zone," while when the right zone indicator lights up, it notifies that the current game zone is a "favorable zone." Furthermore, the color or lighting mode of the zone indicator when lit may be used to distinguish between a "normal zone" and an "advantageous zone" (for example, "green" for a "normal zone" and "red" for a "favorable zone," or lighting up for a "normal zone" and "flashing" for a "favorable zone"). Furthermore, the display mode of the zone indicator may be changed depending on the "play during BB during AT," "BB state during AT," "AT precursor state," "AT state," etc. in the "favorable zone." Furthermore, the system may be configured so that the current gaming zone is recognizable as a "standby zone" by distinguishing it from a "normal zone" and an "advantageous zone." However, it is preferable to distinguish between a "normal zone" and an "advantageous zone" in an easy-to-distinguish manner, such as by using different zone indicators, so that the player can easily recognize whether the current gaming zone is an "advantageous zone."

Furthermore, the display on the effect display device S40 indicating the number of games remaining in the "advantageous zone" may be configured not to display the number of games remaining in the "advantageous zone" when, for example, the "AT precursor state" or "AT preparation" is in progress (not informing the player of the disadvantage of the number of games remaining in the "advantageous zone" being deducted when the player is in a relatively unprofitable state). However, even in this configuration, it is preferable to light up the zone indicator to notify the player that they are in the "advantageous zone". At the same time, it is preferable to configure the zone indicator to be controlled by the main control board M, and to install the zone indicator in a position where the display is easily visible to the player.

Next, we will explain the control processing executed on the sub-control board S side with reference to Figures 38 to 57.

<Sub-side program start processing>
First, Fig. 38 shows a subroutine for sub-side program start processing, which is called and executed when power is turned on.

First, in step 2002, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S prohibits interrupts. Next, in step 2004, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs various initialization processes, such as initializing the CPU and RAM and calculating the checksum.

Next, in step 2008, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the checksum value calculated when the power was turned on matches the checksum value calculated and stored when the power was turned off. If the answer is Yes in step 2008, in other words, if the determination process in step 2008 determines that the two checksum values match, then in step 2010 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the board has recovered from a state in which a power outage occurred during the execution of a single command process, as described below, i.e., whether the board has fully recovered.

If the answer is Yes in step 2010, in other words, if it is determined that a full recovery has occurred, then in step 2012, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S allows an interrupt and returns processing to the single command processing that was being executed when the power outage occurred.

On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 2008, in other words, if the judgment process in step 2008 described above determines that the two checksum values do not match, then in step 2014, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S clears the RAM. After executing the process in step 2014, or if the answer is No in step 2010, the process transitions to the sub-main loop process.

<Sub-main loop processing>
Next, Fig. 39 shows a subroutine illustrating the sub-main loop process, which is called and executed after the sub-side program start process shown in Fig. 38 is executed.

First, in step 2102, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S clears the watchdog timer. Next, in step 2104, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S starts the watchdog timer. Next, in step 2106, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S allows interrupts. Next, in step 2108, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes command reception processing. This command reception processing is a process for receiving various commands sent from the main control board M.

Next, in step 2250, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes one command process, which will be described later. This one command process is executed based on a control command from the main control board M. The specific process will be described later. In step 2110, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether a predetermined time, for example 16 ms, has elapsed, and if it determines that the predetermined time has not elapsed, it returns to step 2108. On the other hand, if it determines that the predetermined time has elapsed, it returns to step 2102. Note that the predetermined time is not limited to 16 ms and can be changed as appropriate depending on the process.

<Sub-side power shutdown processing>
40 shows a subroutine illustrating the sub-side power-off process executed on the sub-control board S. The sub-side power-off process is started when the sub-control board S detects a power outage.

First, in step 2202, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the watchdog timer. In step 2204, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the sub-side program start process is currently being executed. If the answer is Yes in step 2204, the process proceeds to step 2210. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 2204, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calculates a checksum in step 2206. Next, in step 2208, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S saves various data (such as the checksum calculation results and the address of the program that was being executed) and proceeds to step 2210.

Next, in step 2210, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether 500 ms have elapsed. If it is determined that 500 ms have elapsed, the power-off process ends. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 2210, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether power has been restored in step 2212. If the answer is Yes in step 2212, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S updates the number of power outages in step 2214. Next, in step 2216, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S starts the watchdog timer and returns to the process that was being executed when the power was cut off. Note that if it is determined in the determination process of step 2212 that power has not been restored, the process returns to step 2210 described above.

<1 Command Processing>
Next, FIG. 41 shows a subroutine showing one command process that is called and executed in the process of step 2250 in FIG.

Next, in step 2252, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether it is not the timing to operate the start lever. If the answer is No in step 2252, in other words, if it is determined that it is the timing to operate the start lever, then in step 3000, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine for the start lever operation performance-related decision processing, which will be described later. Next, in step 2300, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the start lever operation processing, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 7100.

Next, if the answer is Yes in step 2252, in other words, if it is not the timing to operate the start lever, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines in step 2254 whether it is not the timing to accept the first reel stop. If the answer is No in step 2254, in other words, if it is the timing to accept the first reel stop, in step 2500 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes the subroutine for processing when the first drum stop is accepted, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 7100.

Next, if the answer is Yes in step 2254, in other words, if it is not the timing to accept the first reel stop, then in step 2258 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether it is the timing to accept the second reel stop. If the answer is No in step 2258, in other words, if it is the timing to accept the second reel stop, then in step 2550 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes the subroutine for the second reel stop acceptance processing described below, and proceeds to step 7100.

Next, if the answer is Yes in step 2258, in other words, if it is not the timing to accept the stop of the second reel, then in step 2262 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether it is the timing to accept the stop of the third reel. If the answer is No in step 2262, in other words, if it is the timing to accept the stop of the third reel, then in step 3200 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine for the process to determine the effects related to the third drum stop, which will be described later. Next, in step 2600, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the process to accept the stop of the third drum, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 7100.

Next, if the answer is Yes in step 2262, in other words, if it is not the timing to accept the stop of the third reel, then in step 2266 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether it is the timing to stop the stop display symbol. If the answer is Yes in step 2266, in other words, if it is the timing to stop the stop display symbol, then in step 2268 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the stop display symbol time process (not shown) and proceeds to step 7100. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 2266, in other words, if it is not the timing to stop the stop display symbol, then the CPUSC of the sub-control board S immediately proceeds to step 7100.

Next, in step 7100, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the menu screen display control process described below. Next, in step 7200, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the standby screen display control process described below, and then proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

Next, Figure 42 shows a subroutine that determines the effects to be produced when the start lever is operated, which is called and executed in the processing of step 3000 in Figure 41. First, in step 3002, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the AT state of the game in question is a "high probability state." If the answer is Yes in step 3002, in step 3004, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S checks the number of high probability obstacle games currently remaining (how many games are guaranteed to be in the high probability state) based on the high probability obstacle counter value command received from the main control board M. Next, in step 3050, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine for the battle effect execution determination processing, described below, and proceeds to step 3006. Next, in step 3006, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether it has been determined that a battle effect will be executed in the game in question. If the answer is Yes in step 3006, then in step 3008, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the current stage, the state of the AT for the game, the state of the AT for the next game, and the current number of high-probability games, and executes a lottery to determine whether to change the current stage, with reference to the current stage determination table (see FIG. 44), and proceeds to the next process (step 2300). Note that if the answer is No in step 3006, the CPUSC also proceeds to the next process (step 2300). On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 3002, then in step 3010, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the state of the AT for the game is a "low probability state." If the answer is Yes in step 3010, then in step 3012, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the current stage determination table (see FIG. 44), and executes a lottery to determine whether to change the current stage, with reference to the current stage determination table (see FIG. 44), and proceeds to the next process (step 2300). On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 3010, then in step 3014 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the state of the AT for the game is an "AT in progress" state. If the answer is Yes in step 3014, then in step 3100 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine for determining the effects during AT, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300). On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 3014, then in step 3016 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the state of the AT for the game is a "state for determining whether or not a revival is possible" state. If the answer is Yes in step 3016, then in step 3150 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine for determining whether or not a revival is possible, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300). On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 3016, in step 3018, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the preview effect and the current stage based on the current stage, the status of the AT for that game, and the status of the AT for the next game, and proceeds to the next process (processing in step 2300). Note that the current stage refers to the effect that is primarily the background effect displayed on the effect display device S40, and it is configured so that one of the current stages is always set. Note that if the current stage is different, the trends of various effects such as the background effect and preview effect will differ.

Next, Figure 43 is a subroutine showing the battle effect execution determination process that is called and executed in the processing of step 3050 of Figure 42. First, in step 3052, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the number of high-risk games is 4 or more. If the answer is Yes in step 3052, in step 3054, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the condition device related to the game in question is a BB role. If the answer is Yes in step 3054, in step 3056, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a battle effect execution lottery (a lottery to determine whether to execute a battle effect (victory)) that is won with a predetermined probability (1/2 in this example). Next, in step 3058, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the battle effect execution lottery executed in step 3056 was won. If the answer is Yes in step 3058, then in step 3060, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game to be a battle effect (win) and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 3006). On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 3058, then in step 3062, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game to be an effect other than a battle effect and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 3006). Here, a battle effect is a continuous effect that is executed over multiple games, and is configured so that winning the battle effect, i.e., the execution of a battle effect (win), confirms that the player has won the BB role and the AT lottery. Note that the configuration of the battle effect is not limited to this, and it may also be configured so that a battle effect (win) can be executed even if the player has not won the AT lottery but has won the BB role (after the BB ends, the state transitions to a "low probability state" or "high probability state").

Also, if the answer is No in step 3054, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the condition device for the game is a rare role. In this example, the rare roles are Win-C (Cherry), Win-D (Watermelon A), and Win-E (Watermelon B), which can be won in conjunction with the BB role. In other words, when the rare role is displayed as a stopped rare role, the player feels hopeful that they will win both the BB role and the rare role. If the answer is Yes in step 3064, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a fake battle effect execution lottery (a lottery to determine whether to execute a battle effect (loss)) with a predetermined probability (1/3 in this example, a lower probability than the predetermined probability in step 3056) in step 3066. Next, in step 3068, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the fake battle effect execution lottery executed in step 3066 was won. If the answer is Yes in step 3068, then in step 3070 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the presentation related to the game will be a battle presentation (loss), and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 3006). Also, if the answer is No in step 3052, step 3064, or step 3068, then in step 3072 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the presentation related to the game will be a presentation other than a battle presentation, and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 3006). Here, the battle presentation (loss) may be configured to be executed even in a "normal section."

In this way, when the number of high probability obstacle games is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, for example, 4 or more, continuous effects such as battle effects can be executed across multiple games, while when the number of high probability obstacle games is less than the predetermined number, for example, less than 4, continuous effects such as battle effects are not executed.This prevents the advantageous zone indicator YH from turning off due to a transition to a "low probability state" (setting a "normal zone") even when a continuous effect is in the middle of being executed, and by executing a battle effect only when it is possible to ensure that the advantageous zone indicator YH will remain lit until the battle effect ends, the player's expectations of winning BB are not diminished, making for a user-friendly gaming machine.

In addition, when a rare combination is won, consecutive effects such as battle effects (defeat) can be executed, ensuring the frequency of battle effects and allowing players to play with a constant sense of anticipation.

Next, Figure 44 is an example of a stay stage determination table. Note that the stay stage determination table shown in Figure 44 is only a partial excerpt. The stay stage determination table shown in Figure 44 consists of three types: a table used when the game is in a "low probability state," a table used when the game is in a "high probability state" and the number of high probability obstacle games is four or more, and a table used when the game is in a "high probability state" and the number of high probability obstacle games is three or less.

The current stage determination table used when the game is in a "low probability state" defines the relationship between the current current stage, the state regarding the AT for the next game, the current current stage for the game, and the corresponding number of balls placed. When in a "low probability state," the current current stage consists of two presentation stages: the desert stage and the town stage, and the stages to transition to consist of four presentation stages: the desert stage, the town stage, the conference room stage, and the cave stage. There are three states regarding the AT for the next game: "low probability state," "playing inside a normal BB," and "high probability state."

If the current stage is the desert stage and the next game transitions to a "low probability state" or "normal BB in-game play," the numbers 0 to 979 are assigned as the number to be placed if the desert stage will be maintained in that game. Also, if the current stage is the desert stage and the next game transitions to a "low probability state" or "normal BB in-game play," the numbers 980 to 999 are assigned as the number to be placed if the game transitions from the desert stage to the town stage.

Furthermore, if the current stage is the town stage and the next game transitions to a "low probability state" or "normal BB in-game play," 0 to 19 are assigned as the number to be placed when transitioning from the town stage to the desert stage in that game. If the current stage is the town stage and the next game transitions to a "low probability state" or "normal BB in-game play," 20 to 999 are assigned as the number to be placed when maintaining the town stage in that game.

In addition, if the current current stage is the desert stage and a transition to a "high probability state" occurs in the next game, 0 to 249 are assigned as the number of balls to be placed if the desert stage is maintained in that game. If the current current stage is the desert stage and a transition to a "high probability state" occurs in the next game, 250 to 499 are assigned as the number of balls to be placed if the current current stage is the desert stage and a transition to a "high probability state" occurs in the next game, 500 to 749 are assigned as the number of balls to be placed if the current current stage is the desert stage and a transition to a "high probability state" occurs in the next game, 500 to 749 are assigned as the number of balls to be placed if the current current stage is the desert stage and a transition to a "high probability state" occurs in the next game, 750 to 9 ...cave stage" occurs in the game.

If the current stage is the town stage and there is a transition to a "high probability state" in the next game, 0-249 is assigned as the number to be placed when transitioning from the town stage to the desert stage in that game. If the current stage is the town stage and there is a transition to a "high probability state" in the next game, 250-499 is assigned as the number to be placed when the town stage is maintained in that game. If the current stage is the town stage and there is a transition to a "high probability state" in the next game, 500-749 is assigned as the number to be placed when transitioning from the town stage to the conference room stage in that game. If the current stage is the town stage and there is a transition to a "high probability state" in the next game, 750-999 is assigned as the number to be placed when transitioning from the town stage to the cave stage in that game.

The current stage determination table used when the game is in a "high probability state" and the number of high probability games is four or more defines the relationship between the current current stage, the current stage of the game, and the number of places. The current current stage and the stage to transition to consist of four types of presentation stages: the desert stage, the city stage, the conference room stage, and the cave stage.

If the current current stage is the desert stage and the game remains at the desert stage, 0 to 879 is assigned as the number to place. If the current current stage is the desert stage and the game transitions from the desert stage to the town stage, 880 to 929 is assigned as the number to place. If the current current stage is the desert stage and the game transitions from the desert stage to the conference room stage, 930 to 959 is assigned as the number to place. If the current current stage is the desert stage and the game transitions from the desert stage to the cave stage, 960 to 999 is assigned as the number to place.

If the current stage is a town stage and the game will transition from the town stage to the desert stage, 0 to 879 are assigned as the number to place. If the current stage is a town stage and the game will maintain the town stage, 880 to 929 are assigned as the number to place. If the current stage is a town stage and the game will transition from the town stage to the conference room stage, 930 to 959 are assigned as the number to place. If the current stage is a town stage and the game will transition from the town stage to the cave stage, 960 to 999 are assigned as the number to place.

If the current stage is the conference room stage and the game is transitioning from the conference room stage to the desert stage, 0 to 49 is assigned as the number to place. If the current stage is the conference room stage and the game is transitioning from the conference room stage to the town stage, 50 to 99 is assigned as the number to place. If the current stage is the conference room stage and the game is maintaining the conference room stage, 100 to 949 is assigned as the number to place. If the current stage is the conference room stage and the game is transitioning from the conference room stage to the cave stage, 950 to 999 is assigned as the number to place.

If the current stage is the cave stage and the game is to transition from the cave stage to the desert stage, a value between 0 and 49 is assigned as the number to be placed. If the current stage is the cave stage and the game is to transition from the cave stage to the town stage, a value between 50 and 99 is assigned as the number to be placed. If the current stage is the cave stage and the game is to transition from the cave stage to the conference room stage, a value between 100 and 199 is assigned as the number to be placed. If the current stage is the cave stage and the game is to remain in the cave stage, a value between 200 and 999 is assigned as the number to be placed.

The current stage determination table used when the game is in a "high probability state" and the number of highly secured games is three or less defines the relationship between the current current stage, the state regarding the AT for the next game, the current current stage for the game, and the number of places placed. The current current stage and the stage to transition to consist of four types of presentation stages: the desert stage, the city stage, the conference room stage, and the cave stage. There are three states regarding the AT for the next game: "high probability state," "playing inside an advantageous BB," and "low probability state."

If the current stage is the desert stage and the next game transitions to a "high probability state" or "play within an advantageous BB", the numbers 0 to 979 are assigned as the number to be placed if the desert stage will be maintained in that game. If the current stage is the desert stage and the next game transitions to a "high probability state" or "play within an advantageous BB", the numbers 980 to 999 are assigned as the number to be placed if the game transitions from the desert stage to the town stage.

If the current stage is the town stage and the next game will transition to a "high probability state" or "play within an advantageous BB", the numbers 0-19 are assigned as the number to be placed when transitioning from the town stage to the desert stage in that game. If the current stage is the town stage and the next game will transition to a "high probability state" or "play within an advantageous BB", the numbers 20-999 are assigned as the number to be placed when maintaining the town stage in that game.

If the current stage is the conference room stage and the next game transitions to a "high probability state" or "play inside an advantageous BB", 0-29 are assigned as the number to place when transitioning from the conference room stage to the desert stage in that game. If the current stage is the conference room stage and the next game transitions to a "high probability state" or "play inside an advantageous BB", 30-59 are assigned as the number to place when transitioning from the conference room stage to the town stage in that game. If the current stage is the conference room stage and the next game transitions to a "high probability state" or "play inside an advantageous BB", 60-999 are assigned as the number to place when maintaining the conference room stage in that game.

If the current stage is the cave stage and the next game will transition to a "high probability state" or "play inside an advantageous BB", 0-29 are assigned as the number to place when transitioning from the cave stage to the desert stage in that game. If the current stage is the cave stage and the next game will transition to a "high probability state" or "play inside an advantageous BB", 30-59 are assigned as the number to place when transitioning from the cave stage to the town stage in that game. If the current stage is the cave stage and the next game will transition to a "high probability state" or "play inside an advantageous BB", 60-99 are assigned as the number to place when transitioning from the cave stage to the conference room stage in that game. If the current stage is the cave stage and the next game will transition to a "high probability state" or "play inside an advantageous BB", 100-999 are assigned as the number to place when maintaining the cave stage in that game.

If the current stage is the desert stage and will transition to a "low probability state" in the next game, a number between 0 and 499 is assigned as the number to be placed if the desert stage will be maintained in that game. If the current stage is the desert stage and will transition to a "low probability state" in the next game, a number between 500 and 999 is assigned as the number to be placed if the game will transition from the desert stage to the town stage.

If the current stage is a town stage and the next game will transition to a "low probability state," a number between 0 and 499 is assigned as the number to be placed when transitioning from the town stage to the desert stage in that game. If the current stage is a town stage and the next game will transition to a "low probability state," a number between 500 and 999 is assigned as the number to be placed when maintaining the town stage in that game.

If the current stage is the conference room stage and the next game transitions to a "low probability state," a value between 0 and 499 is assigned as the number to be placed when transitioning from the conference room stage to the desert stage in that game. If the current stage is the conference room stage and the next game transitions to a "low probability state," a value between 500 and 999 is assigned as the number to be placed when transitioning from the conference room stage to the town stage in that game.

If the current stage is a cave stage and the next game will transition to a "low probability state," a number between 0 and 499 is assigned as the number to be placed when transitioning from the cave stage to the desert stage in that game. If the current stage is a cave stage and the next game will transition to a "low probability state," a number between 500 and 999 is assigned as the number to be placed when transitioning from the cave stage to the town stage in that game.

In this way, when in the "low probability state," two stages, the desert stage or the city stage, can be selected (step 3012 in FIG. 42). On the other hand, when in the "high probability state," four stages, the desert stage, the city stage, the conference room stage, and the cave stage, can be selected (step 3008 in FIG. 42). In other words, while four stay stages can be selected in the "advantageous zone," two stay stages can be selected in the "normal zone." The two stay stages that can be selected in the "normal zone" can also be selected in the "advantageous zone." By configuring it in this way, even in the "normal zone" where there is little hope of winning the AT lottery, by selecting a stay stage that can become a stay stage in the "advantageous zone," the gaming machine can proceed without getting bored even in the "normal zone." Furthermore, when transitioning from the "high probability state" to the "low probability state," i.e., when transitioning from the "advantageous zone" to the "normal zone," selecting a performance stage that would be selected in the "normal zone" during the "advantageous zone" makes it difficult for the player to tell that they are transitioning from the "advantageous zone" to the "normal zone," allowing them to continue playing with a sense of anticipation.

In addition, some of the presentation stages selected in the "normal section" may overlap with presentation stages selected in the "advantageous section" (there may be presentation stages that can be selected in the "normal section" but not in the "advantageous section").

In addition, the stay stage determination table used when the number of high-promise obstacle games is 4 or more is different from the stay stage determination table used when the number of high-promise obstacle games is 3 or less. When the number of high-promise obstacle games decreases (below 3 games), the system is configured to not transition to a stay stage with a higher expectation that is a "favorable zone" than the current stay stage (for example, desert stage → conference room stage). This prevents players from being disappointed by transitioning to a "normal zone" after a small number of games despite having transitioned to a stay stage with a higher expectation. The stay stages are arranged in order from those with the lowest expectation of being a "favorable zone" (less likely to be selected in a "favorable zone") to "desert stage, town stage, cave stage, conference room stage."

The configuration of the current stage is not limited to that in this example, and the current stage may be configured to indicate the likelihood of being in a "favorable zone," the likelihood of winning the AT lottery, and the likelihood of winning BB. As an example, the current stage may be configured to transition in a game in which a BB or rare role is won (including when the AT lottery is won with a BB role and when a single rare role is won and the AT lottery is not executed), and the likelihood of winning the AT lottery may differ depending on the current current stage, with the order of decreasing expectation being "desert stage, city stage, cave stage, conference room stage." Alternatively, the likelihood of winning the BB role may differ depending on the current current stage, with the order of decreasing expectation being "desert stage, city stage, cave stage, conference room stage" (for example, transitioning to the conference room stage confirms that a BB internal win or an AT lottery win has occurred).

Next, Figure 45 is a subroutine showing the AT performance determination process that is called and executed in the processing of step 3100 of Figure 42. First, in step 3102, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the number of games remaining in the AT is three or less. If the answer is Yes in step 3102, in step 3104, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether it is the final game of the AT. If the answer is Yes in step 3104, in step 3106, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the continuation lottery has been won. If the answer is Yes in step 3106, in step 3108, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the presentation for the game to be an AT continuation prompting presentation (success) (the AT continues and the initial value is set in the AT counter M60, in other words, a presentation that notifies that the state related to the AT for the next game will be an "AT in progress state") or an AT continuation prompting presentation (failure) (a presentation that notifies that the AT continues and the initial value is not set in the AT counter M60, and that the state related to the AT for the next game will be an "AT in progress state" or a "state for revival possibility presentation"), and proceeds to step 3126. Here, if the continuation lottery is won, the ratio of the AT continuation prompting presentation (success) to the AT continuation prompting presentation (failure) is determined at a ratio of 4 to 1. That is, in the first embodiment, even if the continuation lottery is won, the AT continuation prompting effect (failure) may be executed. In such cases, a revival effect (success) is executed in the next game, which corresponds to the first game of the next set, making the player feel as if they had won the revival lottery (even though they actually won the continuation lottery, and the control on the main control board M is the same as if an AT continuation prompting effect (success) had been executed). By configuring it in this way, it is rare to win the revival lottery in the "revival possibility effect state" (2320/65536 (in the case of setting 1) lotteries are won in one game), but by configuring it so that a revival effect (success) can be executed even if the continuation effect is won, the rate at which a revival effect (success) is executed when it is executed can be increased, and players can feel more excited about the revival effect.

Also, if the answer is No in step 3106, then in step 3110 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the presentation related to the game in question to be an AT continuation prompting presentation (failure) and proceeds to step 3126. Also, if the answer is No in step 3104, then in step 3112 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the presentation related to the game in question to be an AT end-game presentation and proceeds to step 3126. Also, if the answer is No in step 3102, then in step 3114 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the game is the next game in which an AT continuation prompting presentation (failure) was executed. If the answer is Yes in step 3114, then in step 3116 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the presentation related to the game in question to be a revival presentation (success) (a presentation style similar to the revival presentation (success) executed in the "revival possibility presentation state", and in this processing, a presentation indicating that the "AT in progress state" has continued), and proceeds to step 3126. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 3114, proceed to step 3126.

Next, in step 3126, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the number of AT games has been added for that game. If the answer is Yes in step 3126, then in step 3028, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect for that game to be an added effect (an effect that notifies the player that the number of remaining AT games has been added, such as "+50 GET") and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 2300). On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 3126, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect for that game to be an AT effect (an effect executed during the AT, such as "AT in progress state") and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 2300).

Next, Figure 46 is a subroutine showing the revival possibility presentation determination process that is called and executed in the processing of step 3150 in Figure 42. First, in step 3152, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the revival lottery has been won. If the answer is Yes in step 3152, in step 3154, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the presentation for the game to be a revival presentation (success) (a presentation style similar to the presentation executed in step 3116 described above, which is a presentation that notifies the player that the revival lottery has been won in the "revival possibility presentation state", and in the next game the state will transition to the "AT in progress state" and the initial value will be set in the AT counter M60), and proceeds to the next processing (processing of step 2300). On the other hand, if the answer is No at step 3152, at step 3156 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the presentation for that game to be a revival presentation (failure) (a presentation that notifies the player that they did not win the revival lottery in the "revival possibility presentation state", and the next game will transition to a "low probability state") and proceeds to the next process (processing at step 2300).

As mentioned above, the "revival possibility effect state" is also an advantageous zone; in other words, even if the continuation lottery is not won in the final AT game (the final game of the "AT in progress state"), which is an "advantageous zone," the "advantageous zone" is extended in the next game, the "revival possibility effect state." Therefore, it is difficult for a player to determine whether the revival effect will be successful just by checking whether the advantageous zone indicator YH is lit, and they will have to focus on the outcome of the revival effect. Also, as mentioned above, the execution mode of the lottery for the AT differs between the "AT in progress state" and the "revival possibility effect state." In other words, the execution mode of the lottery for the AT differs between the next game in which the continuation lottery in which a revival effect (success) is won and the game in which the revival lottery in which a revival effect (success) is won.

In the first embodiment, the next game after the AT state ends will transition to a "state for displaying whether or not a revival is possible" for one game, and a revival lottery will be executed in this "state for displaying whether or not a revival is possible", so that both the game in which the revival effect (success) is performed and the game in which the revival effect (failure) is performed will be considered to be "advantageous zones", i.e., the advantageous zone indicator YH will be lit, thereby preventing the player from determining whether or not the AT will end without checking the results of the effect, but such a configuration may also be configured as follows.
(1) The state regarding the AT is set to "AT in progress" even in one game in which a revival lottery is executed, and the revival flag is turned on in one game in which a revival lottery is executed, and the revival flag is turned off in games prior to the game in which the revival lottery is executed, thereby resulting in a different lottery pattern regarding the AT.
(2) The system is configured so that a revival lottery is not executed, and the control on the main control board M side is configured so that whether the "AT state" ends or not is determined solely by whether the continuation lottery is won, and the timing of executing the continuation lottery is set to a game prior to the final AT game (one game before the final AT game, the first game of the set being executed, etc.). With this configuration, a revival effect (success) and a revival effect (failure) can be executed as effects on the sub-control board S side in the final AT game. Examples of effects may be configured to be executed such as "game before the final AT game: AT continuation prompting effect (success) → final AT game: effect indicating that the AT of the next set will start,""game before the final AT game: AT continuation prompting effect (continuation to the next game) → final AT game: AT continuation prompting effect (success),""game before the final AT game: AT continuation prompting effect (failure) → final AT game: revival effect (success),""game before the final AT game: AT continuation prompting effect (failure) → final AT game: revival effect (failure)," etc. In other words, the main control board M determines whether the "AT state" will continue (the next set will be executed) depending on whether the continuation lottery is won, and the sub-control board S may be configured to execute an AT continuation promotion effect or a revival effect.
(3) In a game in which a revival effect (success) is executed, the effect may be executed in the same manner as the revival effect (failure) until a predetermined timing, and the revival effect (success) may be notified from the predetermined timing, that is, the player may be notified that the AT will continue at the predetermined timing. In such a case, the predetermined timing may be:
(1) The timing of operating the bet button (the timing of inserting a gaming medal) for the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed, and this can be executed if the continuation lottery is won.
(2) The timing of the start lever operation for the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed, and when the timing of the start lever operation is reached, an effect similar to the revival effect (loss) is not executed.
(3) The timing at which the stop button that becomes the first stop in the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed is pressed (the timing at which the first stop is turned on);
(4) The timing when the stop button, which is the first stop related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed, is pressed and then released (the timing when the first stop is turned on → off),
(5) The timing at which the stop button for the second stop in the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed is pressed (the timing at which the second stop is turned on);
(6) The timing when the stop button for the second stop related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed is pressed and then released (the timing when the second stop is turned on → off),
(7) The timing at which the stop button for the third stop related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed is pressed (the timing at which the third stop is turned on),
(8) The timing when the stop button for the third stop related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed is pressed and then released (the timing when the third stop is turned on → off),
etc.,
(9) Bet button operation timing (game medal insertion timing) for the game following the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed;
(10) Start lever operation timing for the game following the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed;
Also, when the timing among the various timings such as (1) to (10) above is configured to be determined by lottery, even if neither the continuation lottery nor the revival lottery is won after the timing when the stop button for the first stop is pressed, the advantageous zone indicator YH continues to light up, so the player can play with a sense of expectation that the AT will continue until the timing when the stop button for the third stop is pressed and then released, or until the timing when the start lever is operated for the game following the game in which the revival effect is executed.

<Processing when starting lever is operated>
Next, FIG. 47 shows a subroutine indicating the start lever operation process which is called and executed in the process of step 2300 in FIG.

Next, in step 2302, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the AT status is in the AT state. If the answer is Yes in step 2302, in other words, if the AT status is in the AT state, then in step 2350, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads and executes the AT status processing when the start lever is operated, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 2110).

Next, if the answer is No in step 2302, in other words, if the AT state is not in the AT state, then in step 2304 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the AT state is in a specialization precursor state. If the answer is Yes in step 2304, in other words, if the AT state is in a specialization precursor state, then in step 2400 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads and executes the start lever operation specialization precursor processing described below, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 2110).

Next, if the answer is No in step 2304, in other words, if the state related to the AT is not a "specialized precursor state," then in step 2306 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the state related to the AT is a "top-up specialized state." If the answer is Yes in step 2306, in other words, if the state related to the AT is a "top-up specialized state," then in step 2450 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads and executes the start lever operation top-up specialized processing described below, and proceeds to the next processing (processing of step 2110).

Next, if the answer is No in step 2306, in other words, if the state related to the AT is not the "addition-specialized state," then in step 2307 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the state related to the AT is "playing inside an advantageous BB." If the answer is Yes in step 2307, in other words, if the state related to the AT is "playing inside an advantageous BB," then in step 2700 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes the subroutine for processing inside an advantageous BB when the start lever is operated, and proceeds to the next process (the processing of step 2110).

If the answer is No in step 2307, in other words, if the state related to the AT is not "playing inside an advantageous BB," then in step 2308 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the RT state is "RT1." If the answer is Yes in step 2308, in other words, if the RT state is "RT1," then in step 2310 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the state related to the AT is without push order navigation (a state related to the AT in which push order navigation does not occur, such as a "low probability state," "playing inside a normal BB," or "normal BB state"). If the answer is Yes in step 2310, in other words, if the state related to the AT is without push order navigation, then in step 2312 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether an avoidance command has been received. As mentioned above, instead of being configured so that the sub-control board S receives a reverse push instruction command, reverse push avoidance command, forward push instruction command, or forward push avoidance command to execute effects related to push order navigation, when the AT addition lottery is won, the main control board M may send a command to the sub-control board S to inform the sub-control board S that the AT addition lottery has been won and related to the number of AT addition games, and when the sub-control board S receives this command, the sub-control board S may determine the timing and style of execution of effects related to push order navigation.

If the answer is Yes in step 2312, in other words, if an avoidance command is received, in step 2314, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image that avoids the formation of the push order navigation display on the effect display device S40 in the first number display mode group, and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 2110). Thus, in the first embodiment, when the state transitions from "RT1" and "AT in progress" to "RT1" and "low probability state" as the number of games has passed and the AT counter value reaches 0 (before replay 04 is stopped and displayed), if a reverse push white 7 replay or a forward push black 7 replay is won, no additional AT game count will be generated, and therefore the push order is configured to navigate in such a way that the white sevens or black sevens do not form a straight line. Furthermore, if the number of games has passed from a state of "RT1" and "AT in progress" and the AT counter value reaches 0, transitioning to "RT1" and "low probability state", the state is still considered to be in an "advantageous zone", and push order navigation can occur in games where the push order bell is won, but the push order navigation may not occur in games where the push order replay is won.

If the answer is No at step 2308, No at step 2310, or No at step 2312, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays a performance image and background image based on the AT status at step 2316, and proceeds to the next process (processing at step 2110).

<Automatic Transmission Processing When Start Lever is Operated>
Next, FIG. 48 shows a subroutine indicating the processing during AT when the start lever is operated, which is called and executed in the processing of step 2350 in FIG.

Next, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads information related to the condition device for the game in step 2352, checks the winning/replay winning information for the game in step 2354, and checks the command related to the instruction number in step 2356. Thus, in an AT-related state where push order navigation can be executed, such as an "AT in progress" state, the main control board M transmits commands related to the winning/replay winning information to the sub-control board S, and when transmitting an effect group number in an AT-related state where push order navigation is not executed, such as a "low probability state" (this also applies when the play area is a "normal area"), it is not necessary to transmit a command related to the instruction number. Furthermore, the main control board M may be configured to transmit an effect group number in an AT-related state where push order navigation can be executed, just as it does in an AT-related state where push order navigation is not executed, and to determine whether the push order bell (or push order replay) has been won and the correct push order based on the effect group number and the command related to the instruction number. For example, this can be applied when the push order navigation display when the push order bell is executed and the push order navigation display when the push order replay is executed are configured to be displayed in the same display mode group (for example, the push order is announced using numbers, and the display colors for the numbers are the same). Furthermore, when configured in this way, the effect display device S40 can be configured to display an effect image (for example, a character image) that is different from the push order navigation display when the push order navigation is executed, so that different effect images are displayed when the push order navigation related to the push order bell is executed and when the push order navigation related to the push order replay is executed.

Next, in step 2358, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the condition device for the game is the push order bell. Here, the push order bell is one of the aforementioned prize-winning-A1 to prize-winning-A6.

If the answer is Yes in step 2358, in other words, if the condition device for the game is a push order bell, then in step 2360, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image suggesting the correct push order from the six possible push orders for the push order bell on the effect display device S40 in the first number display mode group as a push order navigation display. The push order is information that corresponds the first stop button, second stop button, and third stop button to the left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, and right stop button D43, respectively. For example, if the push order bell, Winning-A1, is won, the numbers suggesting the push order corresponding to "left → middle → right," which is the push order that will allow the maximum payout number to be obtained, are displayed in a circle.

Next, if the answer is No in step 2358, in other words, if the conditional device for the game is not a push order bell, then in step 2362, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the conditional device for the game is a push order replay. Here, the push order replay is one of replays D1 to D3.

If the answer is Yes in step 2362, in other words, if the condition device for the game is push order replay, then in step 2364 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image on the effect display device S40 as a push order navigation display, suggesting the correct push order from the three push order options for push order replay. Here, since there are three push order options, the information corresponds to the first stop button being either the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, or the right stop button D43. For example, if the first stop button is the left stop button D41, only the number 1 is displayed as the push order navigation display.

If the answer is No in step 2362, in other words, if the condition device for the game is a push order replay, then in step 2366 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not an avoidance command has been received. Here, forward push avoidance commands and reverse push avoidance commands are collectively referred to as avoidance commands. If the answer is Yes in step 2366, in other words, if an avoidance command has been received, then in step 2368 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image to avoid the occurrence as a push order navigation display on the effect display device S40 in the first number display mode group.

Next, if the answer is No in step 2366, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the processing of step 2360, 2364, or 2368 described above, and then in step 2370, displays the background image during AT on the performance display device S40.

Next, in step 2372, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the number of remaining AT games is three or less. If the answer is Yes in step 2372, in other words, if the number of remaining AT games is three or less, then in step S2374, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the number of remaining AT games on the effect display device S40 in display mode B (a display mode that is less noticeable than display mode A, described below).

Next, in step 2376, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it has received a push-in-order command. If the answer is Yes in step 2376, in other words, if it has received a push-in-order command, then in step 2378 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image that will prevent the button from being formed on the effect display device S40 in the first number display mode group as a push-in-order navigation display.

If step 2376 returns No, or if step 2378 has been executed, then in step 2380 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether a reverse push command has been received. If step 2380 returns Yes, in other words, if a reverse push command has been received, then in step 2382 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image that will prevent the button from being pressed in the first number display mode group on the effect display device S40 as a push order navigation display.

If the answer is No in step 2380, or if the processing of step 2382 has been executed, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S will proceed to the next processing (processing of step 2110).

If the answer is No in step 2372, in other words, if the number of games remaining in the AT is four or more, then in step S2384, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the number of games remaining in the AT on the effect display device S40 in display mode A (a display mode that is more noticeable than the display mode B described above). Here, if the number is four or more games, it is displayed in display mode A, and if the number is three or less games, it is displayed in display mode B.

Next, in step 2386, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a sequential press command has been received. If the answer is Yes in step 2386, in other words, if a sequential press command has been received, then in step 2388 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image of arrows on the effect display device S40 as a press order navigation display, suggesting the press order corresponding to "left → center → right."

If step 2386 returns No, or if step 2388 has been executed, then in step 2390 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether a reverse push command has been received. If step 2390 returns Yes, in other words, if a reverse push command has been received, then in step 2392 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image suggesting the push order corresponding to "right → middle → left" as a push order navigation display on the performance display device S40 in the form of an arrow image.

If step 2390 returns No, or if step 2392 has been executed, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S proceeds to the next process (step 2110). Thus, when the number of remaining AT games is low, in other words, when the number of remaining AT games is displayed in display mode B, which is a more prominent display mode than display mode A, even if a forward push command or reverse push command is received, the display does not execute the effect of displaying "Aim for 7!" along with an arrow image, but executes push order navigation in which the middle reel, in which white sevens and black sevens do not stop on invalid lines, becomes the first stopped reel. By configuring in this way, when the number of remaining AT games is low and the number of remaining AT games is displayed in display mode B, which is a display mode that encourages the player to know that the number of remaining AT games is low, the arrow image and "Aim for 7!" display can be configured not to interfere with the visibility of the display of the number of remaining AT games in display mode B. Similarly, even when the effect display device S40 is configured to execute a continuous effect (e.g., a battle effect) that raises the question of whether the "AT state" (an AT-related state in which push order navigation can be executed) will continue when the number of remaining AT games displayed is low, the visibility of the battle effect can be prevented by not displaying arrow images or "Aim for 7!" during the execution of the battle effect. Furthermore, with this configuration, even when the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 reaches 0 and the battle effect is lost, indicating that the "AT state" will end, if a forward push command or reverse push command was received during the battle effect, the number of additional AT games (based on winning a forward push black 7 replay or reverse push white 7 replay) will be announced based on the forward push command or reverse push command at the timing of operation of the bet button D220 after the indication that the "AT state" will end. In other words, the fact that the number of AT games has been added will not be announced in the game in which the AT addition lottery was won, but will be announced at a later timing, thereby increasing the excitement of the game.

<Specialized precursor processing when operating the start lever>
Next, FIG. 49 shows a subroutine for start lever operation special indication processing which is called and executed in the processing of step 2400 in FIG.

Next, in step 2402, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads information related to the condition device for the game, confirms the winning/replay winning information for the game in step 2404, and confirms the command related to the instruction number in step 2406. In this way, in an AT-related state where push order navigation can be executed, such as an "AT in progress" state, the main control board M sends commands related to the winning/replay winning information to the sub-control board S, and when sending an effect group number in an AT-related state where push order navigation is not executed, such as a "low probability state" (this also applies when the play area is a "normal area"), it is not necessary to send a command related to the instruction number. Furthermore, even in an AT-related state where push order navigation can be executed, the main control board M may be configured to send an effect group number in the same way as in an AT-related state where push order navigation is not executed, and to be able to determine that the push order bell (or push order replay) has been won and the correct push order based on the effect group number and the command related to the instruction number.

Next, in step 2408, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the condition device for the game is the push order bell. Here, the push order bell is one of the aforementioned prize-winning-A1 to prize-winning-A6.

If the answer is Yes in step 2408, in other words, if the condition device for the game is a push order bell, then in step 2410, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image suggesting the correct push order from the six possible push orders for the push order bell on the performance display device S40 in the second number display mode group as a push order navigation display. The push order is information that corresponds each of the first stop button, second stop button, and third stop button to the left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, and right stop button D43. For example, if the push order bell, Winning-A2, is won, the numbers suggesting the push order corresponding to "left → right → middle," which is the push order that can earn the maximum payout number, are displayed in a display mode surrounded by stars. The aforementioned first and second number display mode groups simply display the numbers suggesting the push order in different display mode groups; for example, the first number display mode group could display the numbers in blue, and the second number display mode group could display the numbers in red.

Next, if the answer is No in step 2408, in other words, if the conditional device for the game is not a push order bell, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines in step 2412 whether the conditional device for the game is a push order replay. Here, the push order replay is one of replays D1 to D3.

If the answer is Yes in step 2412, in other words, if the condition device for the game is push order replay, then in step 2414, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image suggesting the correct push order from the three push order replay options on the effect display device S40 in the second number display mode group as a push order navigation display. Here, since there are three push orders, the information corresponds to the first stop button as either the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, or the right stop button D43. For example, if the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the correct push order, the number "1" is displayed to the lower left of the center of the effect display device S40; if the first stop button is the middle stop button D42, the number "1" is displayed to the lower center of the effect display device S40; and if the first stop button is the right stop button D43, the number "1" is displayed to the lower right of the center of the effect display device S40 as a push order navigation display. In other words, information about the push order is displayed near the stop button D40 corresponding to the reel that should be stopped on the effect display device S40.

Next, if the answer is No in step 2412, in other words, if the condition device for the game is not a push order replay, then in step 2416 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a push order command has been received. If the answer is Yes in step 2416, in other words, if a push order command has been received, then in step 2418 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image of an arrow on the effect display device S40 as a push order navigation display, suggesting the push order corresponding to "left → middle → right."

Next, if the answer is No in step 2416, in other words, if a forward press command has not been received, then in step 2420 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether a reverse press command has been received. If the answer is Yes in step 2420, in other words, if a reverse press command has been received, then in step 2422 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image of arrows on the effect display device S40 as a press order navigation display, suggesting the press order corresponding to "right → middle → left."

Next, if the answer is No in step 2420, in other words, if a reverse press instruction command has not been received, then in step 2424 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether an evasion command has been received. Here, the forward press evasion command and the reverse press evasion command are collectively referred to as evasion commands. If the answer is Yes in step 2424, in other words, if an evasion command has been received, then in step 2426 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image to evade the occurrence in the second number display mode group on the effect display device S40 as a push order navigation display.

Next, if the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has executed the processing of steps 2410, 2414, 2418, 2422, and 2426, or if the answer is No at step 2424, then at step S2428 it displays the background image during the AT on the effect display device S40, and at step S2430 it displays the number of remaining games in the AT in display mode A on the effect display device S40, and proceeds to the next processing (processing of step 2110).

<Specialized processing when operating the start lever>
Next, FIG. 50 shows a subroutine illustrating the start lever operation additional specialization processing that is called and executed in the processing of step 2450 in FIG.

Next, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads information related to the condition device for the game in step 2452, checks the winning/replay winning information for the game in step 2454, and checks the command related to the instruction number in step 2456. In this way, in an AT-related state where push order navigation can be executed, such as an "AT in progress" state, the main control board M sends commands related to the winning/replay winning information to the sub-control board S, and when sending an effect group number in an AT-related state where push order navigation is not executed, such as a "low probability state" (this also applies when the play area is a "normal area"), it is not necessary to send a command related to the instruction number. Furthermore, the main control board M may be configured to send an effect group number in an AT-related state where push order navigation can be executed, just as it does in an AT-related state where push order navigation is not executed, and to determine whether the push order bell (or push order replay) has been won and the correct push order based on the effect group number and the command related to the instruction number.

Next, in step 2458, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the condition device for the game is the push order bell or the common bell. Here, the push order bell is either the aforementioned WINNER-A1 to WINNER-A6 or WINNER-B.

If the answer is Yes in step 2458, in other words, if the condition device for the game is a push order bell or a common bell, then in step 2460, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image suggesting the correct push order from the six possible push orders for the push order bell on the performance display device S40 in the first number display mode group as a push order navigation display. The push order is information that corresponds the first stop button, second stop button, and third stop button to the left stop button D41, center stop button D42, and right stop button D43, respectively. For example, if the push order bell, Winning-A4, is won, the numbers suggesting the push order corresponding to "right → left → center," which is the push order that can earn the maximum payout number, are displayed in a display mode surrounded by stars. The aforementioned first and second number display mode groups simply display the numbers suggesting the push order in different display mode groups; for example, the first number display mode group could display the numbers in blue, and the second number display mode group could display the numbers in red.

Next, if the answer to step 2458 is No, in other words, if the conditional device for the game is neither the push order bell nor the common bell, then in step 2462, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the conditional device for the game is a push order replay. Here, the push order replay is any of replays D1 to D3.

If step 2462 returns Yes, in other words, if the condition device for the game is push order replay, then in step 2464, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image suggesting the correct push order from the three push order replay options on the effect display device S40 in the first number display mode group as a push order navigation display. Here, since there are three push orders, the information corresponds to the first stop button being either the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, or the right stop button D43. For example, if the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the correct push order, the number "1" is displayed to the lower left of the center of the effect display device S40; if the first stop button is the middle stop button D42, the number "1" is displayed to the lower center of the effect display device S40; and if the first stop button is the right stop button D43, the number "1" is displayed to the lower right of the center of the effect display device S40 as a push order navigation display. In other words, the push order information is displayed near the stop switch corresponding to the reel that should be stopped.

Next, if the answer is No in step 2462 described above, in other words, if the condition device for the game is not a push order replay, then in step 2466 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether a push order command has been received. If the answer is Yes in step 2466, in other words, if a push order command has been received, then in step 2468 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image of an arrow on the effect display device S40 as a push order navigation display suggesting the push order corresponding to "left → middle → right." In other words, since the push order is to push in order, the first stop button, second stop button, and third stop button are, respectively, the left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, and right stop button D43, and the push order can be suggested by the image of an arrow pointing from left to right.

Next, if the answer is No in step 2466 described above, in other words, if a forward press command has not been received, then in step 2470 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether a reverse press command has been received. If the answer is Yes in step 2470, in other words, if a reverse press command has been received, then in step 2472 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image of arrows on the effect display device S40 as a push order navigation display suggesting the push order corresponding to "right → middle → left." In other words, since the push order is reverse push, the first stop button, second stop button, and third stop button are, in order, the right stop button D43, middle stop button D42, and left stop button D41, and the push order can be suggested by the image of an arrow pointing from right to left.

Next, if the answer is No in step 2470 described above, in other words, if a reverse press instruction command has not been received, then in step 2474 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether an avoidance command has been received. If the answer is Yes in step 2474, in other words, if an avoidance command has been received, then in step 2476 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image to avoid the event being formed in the first number display mode group on the effect display device S40 as a push sequence navigation display. Here, the avoidance command collectively refers to both a forward push avoidance command and a reverse push avoidance command. Therefore, the processing of step 2476 is executed whether a forward push avoidance command or a reverse push avoidance command has been received. For example, if a forward push avoidance command has been received, in order to avoid the sequential push of "left → middle → right", the number "1" is displayed to the lower right of the center of the effect display device S40, and information is displayed as if the first stop button were the right stop button D43, as the push sequence navigation display.

Next, if the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has executed the processing of steps 2460, 2464, 2468, 2472, and 2476 described above, or if the answer is No at 2474, then in step 2480 it displays the background image during AT on the effect display device S40, and in step 2482 it displays the number of remaining games in AT in display mode A on the effect display device S40, and proceeds to the next processing (processing of step 2110).

<Internal processing of advantageous BB when start lever is operated>
Next, FIG. 51 shows a subroutine that indicates processing inside the advantageous BB when the start lever is operated, which is called and executed in the processing of step 2700 in FIG.

Next, in step 2702, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads information related to the condition device for the game, confirms the winning/replay winning information for the game in step 2704, and confirms the command related to the instruction number in step 2706. In this way, in an AT-related state where push order navigation can be executed, such as an "AT in progress" state, the main control board M sends commands related to the winning/replay winning information to the sub-control board S, and when sending an effect group number in an AT-related state where push order navigation is not executed, such as a "low probability state" (this also applies when the play area is a "normal area"), it is not necessary to send a command related to the instruction number. Furthermore, even in an AT-related state where push order navigation can be executed, the main control board M may be configured to send an effect group number in the same way as in an AT-related state where push order navigation is not executed, and to be able to determine that the push order bell (or push order replay) has been won and the correct push order based on the effect group number and the command related to the instruction number.

Next, in step 2708, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether a predetermined number of games (5 games) have elapsed since the transition to play within the advantageous BB. If the answer is Yes in step 2708, in other words, if a predetermined number of games (5 games) have not elapsed since the transition to play within the advantageous BB, then in step 2710 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the condition device for that game is the push order bell or the common bell. Here, the push order bell is either the aforementioned Winning-A1 to Winning-A6 or Winning-B.

If the answer is Yes in step 2710, in other words, if the condition device for the game is a push order bell or a common bell, then in step 2712, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image suggesting the correct push order from the six possible push orders for the push order bell on the performance display device S40 in the first number display mode group as a push order navigation display. The push order is information that corresponds the first stop button, second stop button, and third stop button to the left stop button D41, center stop button D42, and right stop button D43, respectively. For example, if the push order bell, Winning-A4, is won, the numbers suggesting the push order corresponding to "right → left → center," which is the push order that can earn the maximum payout number, are displayed in a display mode surrounded by stars. The aforementioned first and second number display mode groups simply display the numbers suggesting the push order in different display mode groups; for example, the first number display mode group could display the numbers in blue, and the second number display mode group could display the numbers in red.

Next, if the answer to step 2710 is No, in other words, if the conditional device for the game is neither the push order bell nor the common bell, then in step 2714 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the conditional device for the game is a push order replay. Here, the push order replay is any of replays D1 to D3.

If the answer is Yes in step 2714, in other words, if the condition device for the game is push order replay, then in step 2716, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image suggesting the correct push order from the three push order replay options on the effect display device S40 in the first number display mode group as a push order navigation display. Here, since there are three push orders, the information corresponds to the first stop button as either the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, or the right stop button D43. For example, if the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the correct push order, the number "1" is displayed to the lower left of the center of the effect display device S40; if the first stop button is the middle stop button D42, the number "1" is displayed to the lower center of the effect display device S40; and if the first stop button is the right stop button D43, the number "1" is displayed to the lower right of the center of the effect display device S40 as a push order navigation display. In other words, the push order information is displayed near the stop switch corresponding to the reel that should be stopped.

Next, if the answer is No in step 2714 described above, in other words, if the condition device for the game is not a push order replay, then in step 2718 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a command related to 7 replay has been received. Here, the forward push instruction command, reverse push instruction command, forward push avoidance command, and reverse push avoidance command are collectively referred to as 7 replay commands. If the answer is Yes in step 2718, in other words, if a command related to 7 replay has been received, then in step 2720 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image to avoid the occurrence as a push order navigation display on the effect display device S40 in the first number display mode group.

Next, if the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has executed the processing of steps 2712, 2716, and 2720 described above, or if the answer is No in step 2718, then in step 2722, it displays the background image during AT on the effect display device S40, and in step S2724, it displays the number of games remaining in the AT in display mode A on the effect display device S40, and proceeds to the next processing (processing of step 2110).

If the answer is No in step 2708, in other words, if a predetermined number of games (5 games) have passed since the transition to play inside the advantageous BB, then in step 2726 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S will notify the effect display device S40 that the BB has been won (the push order navigation is not displayed in this process), and proceed to the next process (the process of step 2110).

<Processing at the time of the first body stop acceptance>
Next, FIG. 52 shows a subroutine that indicates the first drum stop acceptance process that is called and executed in the process of step 2500 in FIG.

Next, in step 2502, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the button press sequence navigation is being displayed in the game. If the answer is Yes in step 2502, in other words, if the button press sequence navigation is being displayed, then in step 2504 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the stop button has been operated based on the correct button press sequence as the first stop.

Next, if the answer is Yes in step 2504, in other words, if the stop button is pressed based on the correct press order for the first stop, then in step 2506, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases the display related to the first stop in the press order navigation display and proceeds to the next process (processing in step 2110).

Next, if the answer is No in step 2504, in other words, if no stop buttons are pressed based on the correct press order for the first stop, then in step 2508 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the press order navigation related to the forward press navigation or reverse press navigation is currently being displayed. Here, "7 replay" is a general term for the forward press black 7 align replay and the reverse press white 7 align replay. If the answer is Yes in step 2508, then in step 2510 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S will darken the press order navigation (it will remain dark during the game) and proceed to the next process (the process of step 2110).

If the answer is No in step 2508, in other words, if the push order navigation for 7 replays is not being displayed, then in step 2512, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S will erase all push order navigation displays, execute a push order failure presentation, and proceed to the next process (the process of step 2110).

<Processing when accepting the second round of body stop>
Next, FIG. 53 shows a subroutine that indicates the second drum stop acceptance process that is called and executed in the process of step 2550 of FIG.

Next, in step 2552, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the push order navigation is being displayed for the game in question. If the answer is Yes in step 2552, in other words, if the push order navigation is being displayed, then in step 2554 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the condition device for the game in question is the push order bell. If the answer is Yes in step 2554, in other words, if the condition device for the game in question is the push order bell, then in step 2556 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the stop button based on the correct push order has been operated as the second stop.

Next, if the answer is Yes in step 2556, in other words, if the stop button is pressed based on the correct press order as the second stop, then in step 2558, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases the display related to the second stop in the press order navigation display and proceeds to the next process (processing in step 2110).

Next, if the answer is No in step 2556, in other words, if the stop button is not operated based on the correct press order for the second stop, then in step 2560, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S will erase all press order navigation displays, execute a failed press order presentation, and proceed to the next process (the process of step 2110).

Next, if the answer is No in step 2552, in other words, if the push order navigation is not being displayed, or if the answer is No in step 2554, in other words, if the condition device related to the game is not the push order bell, the process immediately proceeds to the next step (the process of step 2110).

<Third drum stop effect related decision process>
Next, FIG. 54 shows a subroutine that indicates the process for determining the effects related to the third drum stop, which is called and executed in the process of step 3200 in FIG.

Next, in step 3202, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the BB role has won. If the answer is Yes in step 3202, in other words, if the BB role has won, then in step 3204 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the BB role was won during a non-AT ("low probability state" or "high probability state"). If the answer is Yes in step 3204, in other words, if the BB role was won during a non-AT, then in step 3206 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the non-AT BB start effect determination table, and determines and executes the BB start effect (the effect executed when the BB role is won) based on the AT status of the game and the BB role, and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 2600).

Next, if the answer is No in step 3204, in other words, if the BB role was won during the AT ("AT state", "addition specialization state", "specialization preparation state" or "revival possibility effect state"), in step 3208, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the AT BB start effect determination table, determines and executes the BB start effect based on the AT state of the game and the BB role, and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 2600).

Next, if the answer is No in step 3202, in other words, if the BB role is not won, in step 3210, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines and executes an effect based on the effect executed in the game, and proceeds to the next process (processing in step 2600).

The non-AT BB start effect determination table shown in the lower left of Figure 54 is a table for determining the effects at the start of BB in a non-AT state. The non-AT BB start effect determination table is a table for specifying the relationship between the type of BB role, the AT state, the type of BB start effect, and the probability (allocation). There are two types of BB roles: BB with setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) and BB without setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C). There are two types of AT states: "playing inside a normal BB" and "playing inside an advantageous BB." There are three types of BB start effects: normal effect, high expectation effect, and premium effect. Note that the type of BB start effect for a BB won in a non-AT state determines the expectation of transitioning to the "AT state" after the BB ends, with the order of lowest expectation being "normal effect → high expectation effect → premium effect."

When the BB role is BB with setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) and the state of the AT for the game is normal BB internal play, the probability that the BB start effect will be a normal effect is 179/256. When the BB role is BB with setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) and the state of the AT for the game is "normal BB internal play," the probability that the BB start effect will be a high expectation effect is 77/256. When the BB role is BB with setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) and the state of the AT for the game is "normal BB internal play," the probability that the BB start effect will be a premium effect is 0/256.

When the BB role is BB with setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) and the state of the AT for the game is "playing inside advantageous BB," the probability that the BB start effect will be a normal effect is 179/256. When the BB role is BB with setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) and the state of the AT for the game is "playing inside advantageous BB," the probability that the BB start effect will be a high expectation effect is 77/256. When the BB role is BB with setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) and the state of the AT for the game is "playing inside advantageous BB," the probability that the BB start effect will be a premium effect is 0/256.

When the BB role is BB with no setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) and the state of the AT for the game is "normal BB internal play," the probability that the BB start effect will be a normal effect is 179/256. When the BB role is BB with no setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) and the state of the AT for the game is "normal BB internal play," the probability that the BB start effect will be a high expectation effect is 77/256. When the BB role is BB with no setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) and the state of the AT for the game is "normal BB internal play," the probability that the BB start effect will be a premium effect is 0/256.

When the BB role is BB with no setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) and the state of the AT for the game is "playing inside an advantageous BB," the probability that the BB start effect will be a normal effect is 67/256. When the BB role is BB with no setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) and the state of the AT for the game is "playing inside an advantageous BB," the probability that the BB start effect will be a high-expectation effect is 157/256. When the BB role is BB with no setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) and the state of the AT for the game is "playing inside an advantageous BB," the probability that the BB start effect will be a premium effect is 32/256.

When in the "normal section," whether you win a BB with no setting difference (Type 1 BB-A or Type 1 BB-C) or a BB with setting difference (Type 1 BB-B), the premium effect will not be selected, and it is set so that the normal effect is more likely to be selected than the high expectation effect.

Even if you are in a favorable zone, if you win BB with setting difference (Type 1 BB-B), the premium effect will not be selected, and it is set so that the regular effect is more likely to be selected than the high expectation effect.

If a player is in a "favorable zone" and wins a BB with no setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C), there is a possibility that a premium effect will be selected. This configuration indicates to the player that the player has won a BB with no setting difference, and that the game will transition to an "AT in progress" state after the BB with no setting difference ends, due to the premium effect being selected. Furthermore, if a player is in a "favorable zone" and wins a BB with no setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C), the game is designed so that a high expectation effect is more likely to be selected than a normal effect (a normal effect is less likely to be selected). By doing this, a player can guess whether an AT will start after the BB ends by checking the BB start effect, building anticipation for winning the AT. Note that the allocation of BB start effects for BBs with setting differences (Type 1 BB-B) won during "normal BB in-game play" is the same as the allocation of BB start effects for BBs with no setting differences (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) won during "normal BB in-game play". However, this is not limited to this, and the allocation of BB start effects for BBs with setting differences (Type 1 BB-B) won during "normal BB in-game play" may be different from the allocation of BB start effects for BBs with no setting differences (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) won during "normal BB in-game play". By configuring in this way, it is possible to configure the allocation to differ depending on whether the BB start effect is for a BB with a setting difference or a BB start effect for a BB with no setting difference.

The AT BB start effect determination table shown in the lower right of Figure 54 is a table for determining the effect at the start of BB during the AT. The AT BB start effect determination table is also a table for specifying the relationship between the type of BB role, the state related to the AT, and the type and probability (allocation) of BB start effects. There are two types of BB roles: BB with setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) and BB without setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C). The state related to the AT is one type: "advantageous BB internal play." There are two types of BB start effects: an effect that allows addition and an effect that does not allow addition. An effect that allows addition is an effect that suggests that an AT addition lottery may be executed during the execution of BB, and an effect that does not allow addition is an effect that suggests that an AT addition lottery will not be executed during the execution of BB. For BBs won during the AT, there is no element of whether or not the AT lottery will be won, and whether or not an AT addition lottery will be executed may vary depending on the type of BB. Furthermore, during the AT, even in a BB with a setting difference where the AT addition lottery is not executed, game medals can be acquired, and after the BB ends, the player enters an AT that is advantageous to the player, so the BB that is executed is configured to clearly notify whether or not the AT addition lottery will be executed. Specific examples are described in detail below.

When the BB role is BB with setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) and the state of the AT for the game is "playing inside an advantageous BB," the probability that the BB start effect will become an effect that allows addition is 0/256, and an effect that allows addition will not be executed. When the BB role is BB with setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) and the state of the AT for the game is "playing inside an advantageous BB," the probability that the BB start effect will become an effect that does not allow addition is 256/256, and an effect that does not allow addition will always be executed. When the BB role is BB without setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) and the state of the AT for the game is "playing inside an advantageous BB," the probability that the BB start effect will become an effect that allows addition is 256/256, and an effect that allows addition will always be executed. When the BB role is a BB with no setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) and the AT status of the game is "advantageous BB internal play," the probability that the BB start effect will be an effect that does not allow additional bonuses is 0/256, and an effect that does not allow additional bonuses will not be executed.

<Processing for accepting the 3rd round of body stop>
Next, FIG. 55 shows a subroutine that indicates the processing at the time of accepting the third drum stop, which is called and executed in the processing of step 2600 of FIG.

Next, in step 2602, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the push order navigation is being displayed for the game in question. If the answer is Yes in step 2602, in other words, if the push order navigation is being displayed, then in step 2604 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the condition device for the game in question is the push order bell. If the answer is Yes in step 2604, in other words, if the condition device for the game in question is the push order bell, then in step 2606 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the stop button based on the correct push order has been operated as the third stop.

Next, if the answer is Yes in step 2606, in other words, if the stop buttons are pressed based on the correct press order as the third stop, then in step 2608 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays "GET!" on the effect display device S40 as a successful press order effect. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 2606, in other words, if the stop buttons are not pressed based on the correct press order as the third stop, then in step 2610 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S does not display "GET!" as a successful press order effect.

If the answer is No in step 2602 (in other words, the push order navigation is not being displayed), if the answer is No in step 2604 (in other words, the condition device for the game in question is not the push order bell), or if the processing of step 2608 or 2610 is executed, then in step 2612, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it has received a command related to the number of games to be added to the AT from the main side (the command set in step 1517). As mentioned above, the main control board M sends a command indicating the number of games remaining in the AT to the sub-control board S, and the sub-control board S may be configured to calculate the difference from the command indicating the number of games remaining in the AT received last time to determine whether or not the number of AT games has been added and the number of games to be added to the AT, and to display the number of games to be added to the AT.

Next, if the answer is Yes in step 2612, in other words, if a command related to the number of AT games has been received from the main side, then in step 2614 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the number of AT added games on the performance display device S40 and proceeds to the next process (the processing of step 2110). On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 2612, in other words, if a command related to the number of AT games has not been received from the main side, then in step 2616 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S does not display the number of AT added games on the performance display device S40 and proceeds to the next process (the processing of step 2110). In addition, the number of games added to the AT can be announced as a method of (1) announcing the entire number of games added in the current game, (2) announcing a portion of the number of games added in the current game, and announcing the remaining number in a game after that game, or (3) not announcing the number of games added in the current game, but in a game after that game (for example, when 7 replays are won or when a common bell is won (when a role that does not normally have an added bonus is won), after multiple games (continuous effects) are played, or when the number of remaining games on the effect display device S40 reaches "0", or when the bet button D220 is operated or the start lever D50 is operated in the game after the game when the number of remaining games reaches "0").

In addition, if you win the common bell in the "add-on special state," the number of AT add-on games will not be displayed, even if you stop the button according to the push order navigation (AT add-on lottery is not held with the common bell).

By configuring as described above, the slot machine of the first embodiment can be configured to properly notify the player of advantageous periods in a gaming machine configured so that the advantageous period indicator YH lights up in the "advantageous period." Furthermore, by providing a "revival possibility display state," if a player wins the continuation display and then a revival display (success) is executed, the advantageous period indicator YH lights up because the AT state for the game in which the revival display (success) is executed is the "AT in progress state." On the other hand, even if a player does not win the continuation display and then a revival display (failure) is executed, the advantageous period indicator YH will light up by setting the AT state for the game in which the revival display (failure) is executed to the "revival possibility display state" and the state for the AT to the "advantageous period." This configuration makes it difficult to tell whether the revival display will be successful or unsuccessful by visually checking the advantageous period indicator YH in a game that executes a revival display. This ensures that a gaming machine configured to properly notify the player of advantageous periods is highly entertaining.

In this example, the system is configured so that if a BB role is won in the "high probability state", the player can win the AT lottery, and after the BB ends, the system can transition to the "AT in progress state". However, the AT configuration is not limited to this example, and for example, the system can be configured so that a rare role such as a cherry can win the AT lottery (even roles other than a BB role can win), and if the AT lottery is won, the AT state can transition to the "AT precursor state", and the system can transition to the "AT in progress state" by playing a predetermined number of games (for example, 10 games) in the "AT precursor state".

<<<Second Embodiment>>>
Next, a second embodiment will be described, and in the description, the same symbols and wording will be used for the same parts as in the above-mentioned embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified. Note that all the configurations of this second embodiment can be applied to the other embodiments, and all the configurations of the other embodiments can be applied to the second embodiment.

Furthermore, while the second embodiment is a slot machine that uses gaming medals, it should be noted that all of the configurations detailed in the second embodiment can also be applied to medal-less gaming machines that do not use gaming medals (sometimes referred to as sealed gaming machines, managed gaming machines, smart slots, etc.).

In the second embodiment, only the differences from the first embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, Figure 56 is a flowchart of the game progress control process related to the subroutine of step 1200 in Figure 14. The differences from the first embodiment are steps 3700 and 3800. That is, in step 1293, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes game end processing, and then in step 3700, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes the stop monitoring process described below. Next, in step 3800, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes the MY counter monitoring process described below, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1202).

The configuration of the game progress control process is not limited to the configuration shown in FIG. 56, and may be configured to execute the game stop monitoring process of step 3700 after executing the MY counter monitoring process of step 3800. Also, the game zone transition control process of step 3500 may be configured to be executed after the game end process of step 1293.

When applied to a medal-less reel gaming machine, processing related to paying out gaming medals outside the gaming machine, such as steps 1275 to 1288, is not executed.

Next, Figure 57 is a flowchart of the stop monitoring process related to the subroutine of step 3700 in Figure 56. First, in step 3702, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the stop reservation flag is off. The stop reservation flag is a flag related to the stop state, which will be described in detail later.

If the answer is Yes in step 3702, then in step 3704 the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the stopped symbol combination is a replay symbol (a symbol combination corresponding to a replay role may be referred to as a replay symbol). If the answer is Yes in step 3704, then in step 3706 the CPU C100 of the main control board M reads and sets the counter value of the difference number counter. Details will be described later, but the difference number counter is a counter that measures the difference number since the gaming machine was turned on, and is configured to measure the difference number from the timing when the difference number is smallest since the gaming machine was turned on to the timing when the difference number is largest (this may be referred to as the maximum difference number based on the timing when the difference number is smallest since the power was turned on).

The difference is the number of medals paid out from the gaming machine minus the number of medals inserted into the gaming machine from a predetermined reference timing. For example, if the highest difference is 5000 and the lowest difference is -2000, based on when the gaming machine is turned on, the largest difference based on the timing with the lowest difference since the power was turned on is "5000 - (-2000) = 7000."

Next, in step 3708, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the number of bets for the game that has finished execution is smaller than the payout number. If the answer is Yes in step 3708, in other words, if the difference number has increased due to the game, then in step 3710 the CPU C100 of the main control board M calculates the difference number for the game that has finished execution. Note that the difference number for the game can be calculated, for example, by subtracting the number of bets from the payout number for the game. Note that the payout number is sometimes referred to as the payout number, and in either case, this can be applied to both medal-based and medal-less medal-based gaming machines.

Next, in step 3712, the CPU C100 of the main control board M updates the counter value of the difference number counter and proceeds to processing in step 3720. More specifically, the difference number calculated in step 3710 is subtracted from the counter value of the difference number counter.

In the second embodiment, the difference counter is a decrement counter, with an initial counter value of 19,000, an upper limit of 19,000, and a lower limit of 0. When the calculation result when the counter value is updated exceeds 19,000, it is reset to 19,000, and when the calculation result when the counter value is updated falls below 0, the stop reservation flag is turned on. Although details will be described later, the difference counter may also be an increment counter. In this configuration, the initial counter value is 0, an upper limit of 19,000, and a lower limit of 0. When the calculation result when the counter value is updated falls below 0, it is reset to 0, and when the calculation result when the counter value is updated exceeds 19,000, the stop reservation flag is turned on.

Also, if the answer is No in step 3708, then in step 3714 the CPU C100 of the main control board M calculates the difference number for the game that has just been executed. Next, in step 3716, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the calculation result for the counter value of the difference number counter exceeds the upper limit value. In other words, it determines whether the result of subtracting the difference number calculated in step 3714 from the counter value of the difference number counter is greater than 19,000. If the answer is Yes in step 3716, then in step 3718 the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets the counter value of the difference number counter to the upper limit value (19,000 in this example) and proceeds to step 3720. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 3716, then proceeds to step 3712.

The configuration of the difference counter is not limited to that shown in FIG. 57, and may be modified as follows.
(1) In step 3712, the difference number calculated in step 3710 or step 3714, which is the difference number for the current game, is subtracted (calculated) from the counter value of the difference number counter saved for the previous game.
(2) If the result of the calculation in (1) above is equal to or greater than 0, the calculation result is stored as the counter value of the difference counter.
(3) If the result of the calculation in (1) above is less than 0, the save process in (2) above is not executed, and the stop reservation flag is set to ON in step 3722.

Specific examples of the processing of steps 3708 to 3718 include the following actions:

<Case 1 for Executing the Processing of Step 3710>
(1) The number of bets on the game that has been completed is 3, and the number of payouts is 10. In step 3710, "10-3=7" is calculated as the difference in the game.
(2) If the difference number calculated in step 3710 is 7 and the counter value of the difference number counter is 10010, then in step 3712, the difference number calculated in step 3710 is subtracted from the counter value of the difference number counter, resulting in "10010-7=10003", and the counter value of the difference number counter becomes 10003.

<Case 2 when the process of step 3710 is executed>
(1) The number of bets on the game that has been completed is 3, and the number of payouts is 10. In step 3710, "10-3=7" is calculated as the difference in the game.
(2) If the difference calculated in step 3710 is 7 and the counter value of the difference counter is 5, then in step 3712 the difference calculated in step 3710 is subtracted from the counter value of the difference counter, resulting in "5-7=-2", and the lower limit of the counter value of the difference counter is 0, and since the counter value of the difference counter is below this lower limit, the counter value of the difference counter remains at 5. Note that in the above (2), if the calculation result is below the lower limit of 0, the counter value of the difference counter may be reset to the lower limit of 0, or the calculation result below 0 (-2 in the case of the above (2)) may be set as the counter value of the difference counter.

<When the upper limit value is exceeded in step 3716>
(1) The number of bets on the game that has been completed is 3, and the number of payouts is 0. In step 3714, "0-3=-3" is calculated as the difference number for the game.
(2) If the difference calculated in step 3714 is -3 and the counter value of the difference counter is 18998, the calculation result is "18998 - (-3) = 19001", which is greater than 19000, so the answer in step 3716 is Yes.
(3) In step 3718, the upper limit value of 19,000 is set in the counter value of the difference counter.

<When the upper limit value is not exceeded in step 3716>
(1) The number of bets on the game that has been completed is 3, and the number of payouts is 0. In step 3714, "0-3=-3" is calculated as the difference number for the game.
(2) If the difference calculated in step 3714 is -3 and the counter value of the difference counter is 15,100, the result is "15,100 - (-3) = 15,103", which is not greater than 19,000, so step 3716 returns No.
(3) In step 3712, the difference calculated in step 3714 is subtracted from the counter value of the difference counter, resulting in "15100-(-3)=15103", and the counter value of the difference counter becomes 15103.

Next, in step 3720, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the calculation result for the counter value of the difference counter is less than 0. In other words, in step 3712, it determines whether the result of subtracting (calculating) the difference number calculated in step 3710 or step 3714, which is the difference number for the current game, from the counter value of the difference counter saved for the previous game, is less than 0. If the answer is Yes in step 3720, in step 3722, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns on the stop reservation flag and proceeds to step 3724. Note that if the answer is No in step 3702, the CPU C100 also proceeds to step 3724. If the answer is No in step 3720, the condition for transitioning to the stop state is not met, so the CPU C100 proceeds to the next process (processing in step 3800).

Next, in step 3724, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the next game will not be a game during a bonus. Note that "during a bonus" in step 3724 corresponds to Type 1 BB, Type 2 BB, RB, etc. If the answer is Yes in step 3724, then in step 3726 the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns off the stop reservation flag. Next, in step 3728, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns on the stop flag and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 3800). Note that even if the answer is No in step 3724, the conditions for transitioning to the stop state are not met, so the CPU C100 proceeds to the next process (processing of step 3800).

In this way, the process of updating the counter value of the difference counter is configured to be executed at a timing later than the game end process of step 1293, and with regard to the number of bets, the counter value of the difference counter is not updated at the time a bet is placed, but is updated after the game ends based on the number of bets and the number of payouts.

57, the stop reservation flag is set to OFF in step 3726, but the present invention is not limited to this and may be configured as follows: Only one of the following configurations may be applied, or multiple configurations may be applied.
(1) If the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off while the stop reservation flag is on, and then power is restored with the RAM cleared (for example, the power is turned on while the setting key switch is on, and power is restored, resulting in a transition to setting change mode), the stop reservation flag will be turned off.
(2) If the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off while the stop reservation flag is on, and then power is restored without clearing the RAM (for example, a normal power restoration in which the power is turned on while the setting key switch is off), the stop reservation flag will not be turned off.
(3) If the advantageous zone ends while the limit reservation flag is on and the specified information regarding the advantageous zone (details will be described later) is initialized, the limit reservation flag will not be turned off.

In the second embodiment, the system is configured to enter a stopped state when the stop flag is turned on. The stopped state will be described later.

The difference counter according to the second embodiment, shown in Figure 57, will now be described in detail.

<Configuration of difference counter>
(1) When the calculation result relating to the counter value of the difference counter becomes less than 0, the stop reservation flag is turned on, and if the next game is not during a bonus, the stop flag is turned on and the game is stopped.
(2) Since the counter value of the difference counter is set to be no greater than the initial value of 19,000 (see step 3718), if the calculation result of the counter value of the difference counter is less than 0, this means that the maximum difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number since power-on has exceeded 19,000.
(3) If the calculation result relating to the counter value of the difference counter becomes less than 0 during a bonus, the stop reservation flag is turned on, but the stop flag is not turned on. Then, when the bonus ends (if the next game is not during a bonus), the stop flag is turned on and the game enters a stop state.
(4) When power is restored after a power outage (either when power is restored without clearing the RAM or when power is restored with clearing the RAM), the counter value of the difference counter is initialized and 19,000 is set as the initial value.

Note that a power restoration accompanied by a RAM clear corresponds to a power restoration in which, for example, the power is turned on with the setting key switch on and the device transitions to setting change mode, while a power restoration without a RAM clear corresponds to a normal power restoration in which the power is turned on with the setting key switch off. Note that a situation in which the setting key switch is off is sometimes referred to as a "predetermined situation."

Also, as mentioned above, the condition for the stop flag to be turned on in the second embodiment is not that the difference number since power-on exceeds a predetermined number (19,000 in this example), but that the largest difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number since power-on exceeds 19,000.

Next, Figure 58 is a flowchart of the MY counter monitoring process, which is a subroutine of step 3800 in Figure 56. First, in step 3802, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the game that has just finished execution was a game in a favorable zone. If the answer is Yes in step 3802, in step 3804 the CPU C100 of the main control board M reads and sets the counter value of the MY counter. Details will be provided later, but the MY counter is a counter for measuring the difference in number from the start of the favorable zone.

Next, in step 3806, the CPU C100 of the main control board M calculates the difference in the game. The difference in the game can be calculated, for example, by subtracting the number of bets from the number of payouts for the game. Next, in step 3808, the CPU C100 of the main control board M updates the counter value of the MY counter. More specifically, the difference calculated in step 3806 is subtracted from the counter value of the MY counter.

In the second embodiment, the MY counter is a decrement counter, with the initial counter value being 2400, the upper limit being 65535, and the lower limit being 0.

Next, in step 3810, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the calculation result for the counter value of the MY counter is less than 0. In other words, in step 3810, it determines whether the result of subtracting (calculating) the difference calculated in step 3806, which is the difference for the current game, from the counter value of the MY counter saved in the previous game, is less than 0. If the answer is Yes in step 3810, in step 3812, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the game zone from the next game onwards to be the normal zone. Next, in step 3814, the CPU C100 of the main control board M initializes predetermined information regarding the advantageous zone (sometimes referred to as information regarding the AT, which corresponds to the counter value of the MY counter, the counter value of the counter for the number of games remaining in the advantageous zone, a flag indicating the game status, etc.) and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 1202). Note that even if the answer is No at step 3802 or step 3810, the process will proceed to the next step (step 1202).

When step 3814 is executed, the counter value of the MY counter is initialized, but the counter value of the difference counter is not initialized.

The MY counter according to the second embodiment, shown in Figure 58, will now be described in detail.

<Configuration of MY Counter>
(1) When the calculation result relating to the counter value of the MY counter becomes less than 0, the game zone from the next game onwards becomes the normal zone, and predetermined information relating to the advantageous zone is initialized.
(2) Even if power is restored after a power outage (power is restored without clearing the RAM), the counter value of the MY counter is not initialized.
(3) When a new advantageous period begins, the MY counter is set to its initial value of 2400.
(4) Since the counter value of the MY counter can be greater than the initial value of 2,400, if the calculation result of the counter value of the MY counter is less than 0, the difference from the start of the favorable zone exceeds 2,400.

In addition, if power is restored after a power outage, the counter value of the MY counter will be initialized when the RAM is cleared.

<<Diagram of MY counter and difference counter>>
Next, Figure 59 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of the counter values of the MY counter and the difference counter from the time of power-on. In this figure, when the difference number increases, the counter value of the difference counter and the counter value of the MY counter decrease, and when the difference number decreases, the counter value of the difference counter and the counter value of the MY counter increase. Note that the counter value of the MY counter increases or decreases when it is in a favorable zone.

The upper part of the figure is a graph showing the change in the difference in number, with the vertical axis showing the difference in number and the horizontal axis showing the number of games played. Note that the difference in number since the power was turned on is sometimes simply referred to as the difference in number.

First, at timing (1) in the diagram, the gaming machine is powered on and the initial processing at power-on is executed. The game zone becomes the normal zone. After that, play progresses in the normal zone, the difference number decreases, and at timing (2) in the diagram, the normal zone changes to the advantageous zone. Since the period from timing (1) to timing (2) in the diagram is the normal zone, the counter value of the difference number counter is updated, but the counter value of the MY counter is not updated.

After that, play progresses in the advantageous zone (for example, during AT), the difference number increases, and at timing (3) in the diagram, an arbitrary condition is met (for example, the number of remaining AT games becomes 0), the advantageous zone ends, and the advantageous zone changes to the normal zone. Since the advantageous zone is in the period from timing (2) to timing (3) in the diagram, the counter value of the difference number counter and the counter value of the MY counter are both updated. Note that timing (2) in the diagram is the time when the difference number is the smallest since the power was turned on.

Here, the initial processing when power is turned on corresponds to, for example, the processing described above in Figure 13.

After that, gameplay progresses in the normal zone, the difference number decreases, and at time (4) in the figure, the zone changes from the normal zone to the favorable zone. Because the zone is in the normal zone from time (3) to time (4), the counter value of the difference number counter is updated, but the counter value of the MY counter is not updated. After that, gameplay progresses in the favorable zone (e.g., high probability state), the difference number decreases, and at time (5) in the figure, the difference number in the favorable zone is at its smallest. Also, at time (5) in the figure, the AT state transitions (e.g., from high probability state to AT state). After that, gameplay progresses in the favorable zone (e.g., AT state), the difference number increases, and at time (6) in the figure, the difference number from the start of the favorable zone (the difference number after (4) in the figure) exceeds a specific value (2400 in this example), ending the favorable zone and changing from the favorable zone to the normal zone. The calculation result for the MY counter value is configured to be less than 0 at timing (6) in the diagram. Since the period from timing (4) to timing (6) in the diagram is an advantageous period, both the difference counter value and the MY counter value are updated.

In this way, when the calculation related to the counter value of the MY counter falls below 0 (sometimes referred to as falling below 0) and the favorable zone ends, this is when the difference number from the start of the favorable zone exceeds (sometimes referred to as exceeding) a specific value (2400 in this example). In other words, even when the difference number has decreased from the start of the favorable zone, such as at timing (5) in the diagram, timing (5) is not used as the basis, and whether or not the condition for the favorable zone to end is met is determined by the difference number based on the start of the favorable zone at timing (4) in the diagram.

Furthermore, after timing (6) in the diagram, the game progresses in the normal interval, the difference number decreases, and at timing (7) in the diagram, the normal interval changes to the advantageous interval. Because the period from timing (6) to timing (7) in the diagram is the normal interval, the counter value of the difference number counter is updated, but the counter value of the MY counter is not updated.

After that, as the game progresses in the advantageous zone (for example, in the AT state) (while also staying in the normal zone along the way), the difference number increases, and at time (8) in the diagram, the largest difference number based on the time when the difference number was smallest since the power was turned on exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example), causing the stop flag to turn on and entering a stop state. Note that at time (8) in the diagram, the calculation result related to the counter value of the difference number counter is configured to be less than 0. Since the advantageous zone is from time (7) to time (8) in the diagram, both the counter value of the difference number counter and the counter value of the MY counter are updated.

In this way, when the calculation result related to the counter value of the difference counter becomes less than 0 and the machine reaches a stop state, this is when the difference from timing (2) in the diagram, which is the timing when the difference from the time the gaming machine was turned on as the base, is at its smallest, exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example). In other words, when the difference has decreased since the power was turned on, such as timing (2) in the diagram, the machine is configured to reach a stop state even if the difference from the time the power was turned on does not exceed the predetermined value (19,000 in this example). Note that the difference from timing (2) in the diagram to timing (8) in the diagram is approximately 19,000. The reason the difference is approximately 19,000 is because timing (8) in the diagram is the first time the difference based on timing (2) in the diagram exceeds 19,000. For example, if a small win with a payout of 11 coins is won, the difference from timing (2) in the diagram to timing (8) in the diagram will be any value between 19,001 and 19,011.

By configuring it in this way, even if the amusement center manager reduces the difference by allowing games to proceed before the center opens for business, the difference until the limit is reached after business opens will not significantly exceed the specified value (19,000 in this example). This prevents fraudulent management practices such as making it difficult to reach a limit to appeal to players, and also ensures that the limit is reached appropriately.

In addition, when the calculation result related to the counter value of the MY counter becomes less than 0 and the advantageous period ends, this means that the difference in number from the start of the advantageous period (the difference in number based on the start of the advantageous period) exceeds a specific value (2400 in this example), and the difference in number from timing (4) in the diagram to timing (6) in the diagram is approximately 2400. The reason the difference in number is approximately 2400 is because timing (6) in the diagram is the first time that the difference in number based on timing (4) in the diagram exceeds 2400. For example, if a small winning combination with a payout of 11 coins is won, the difference in number from timing (4) in the diagram to timing (6) in the diagram will be any value between 2401 and 2411.

<<Effects when various conditions are met>>
Next, the bottom of the figure is a table summarizing the actions when various conditions related to the MY counter and the difference counter are satisfied. The "end condition" is the condition under which the advantageous period ends or the game transitions to a stop state and ends, the "end condition (counter value)" is the counter value when the above-mentioned end condition is satisfied, the "normal period" is whether or not the counter value is updated in the normal period, the "end of advantageous period" is whether or not the counter value is initialized at the end of the advantageous period, "power-on" is whether or not the counter value is initialized when the power is turned on without clearing the RAM, "setting change" is whether or not the counter value is initialized when the power is turned on to transition to setting change mode (when the setting is changed with clearing the RAM), "when the counter value is less than 0" is whether or not game progress is possible after the calculation result related to the counter value becomes less than 0, and "when the counter value exceeds the upper limit" is whether or not game progress is possible after the counter value exceeds the upper limit.

<MY Counter>
End condition: Ends when the difference from the start of the advantageous period exceeds 2400 End condition (counter value): The calculation result related to the counter value of the MY counter becomes less than 0 Normal period: The counter value of the MY counter is not updated At the end of the advantageous period: The counter value of the MY counter is initialized When the power is turned on: The counter value of the MY counter is not initialized When settings are changed: The counter value of the MY counter is initialized When the counter value is less than 0: Playable When the counter value upper limit is exceeded: Playable

<Difference counter>
End condition: Ends when the maximum difference number based on the timing when the difference number is smallest since power-on exceeds 19,000. End condition (counter value): The calculation result related to the counter value of the difference number counter becomes less than 0. Normal period: The counter value of the difference number counter is updated. At the end of the advantageous period: The counter value of the difference number counter is not initialized. When power is turned on: The counter value of the difference number counter is initialized. When settings are changed: The counter value of the difference number counter is initialized. When the counter value is less than 0: Play is stopped and it is not possible to play. When the counter value upper limit is exceeded: It is possible to play.

In this way, in addition to the MY counter, which can be updated during advantageous periods, a difference counter is provided that can be updated during every game after the power is turned on, and by making it possible to transition to a stop state based on the difference counter, it is possible to reduce the gambling element compared to conventional gaming machines.

When applying the configuration of the second embodiment to a medal-less reel gaming machine, "game medals" can be replaced with "game value."

＜Standing still＞
In the second embodiment, when the calculation result relating to the counter value of the difference counter becomes less than 0, the stop flag is turned on and the game enters a stop state. When the game enters a stop state, the game medals stored as credits and the game medals bet are automatically settled without the need to operate the settlement button (this automatic settlement is sometimes referred to as automatic settlement), and the insertion of new game medals, operation of the bet button, and operation of the start lever are invalid.

In addition, if the device has entered a stopped state, even if it is turned off and then turned on without clearing the RAM (sometimes called a normal power-on), it will still be in a stopped state after power-on (the stop flag will be on), but if it is turned on with a RAM clear after power-off (such as turning on the device with the RAM clear button operated or with the setting key switch on), it will no longer be in a stopped state after power-on (the stop flag will be off). The notification method for the stopped state will be described later.

By configuring it in this way, even if a difference in number (amount of medals awarded to a player) occurs that is greater than what the amusement facility or gaming machine designer intended, the system can be configured to transition to a no-play state, preventing any further difference from occurring. This prevents the amusement facility from suffering unintended losses and also prevents players from being overly motivated to gamble.

Furthermore, when the calculation result for the counter value of the difference counter is less than 0, which satisfies the condition for transitioning to the stop state, this may be referred to as the second condition being met.Furthermore, when the calculation result for the counter value of the MY counter is less than 0, which satisfies the condition for initializing specified information related to the advantageous zone, this may be referred to as the first condition being met.

<Example of changes to the difference counter>
The difference counter in the second embodiment is a decrement counter, and is configured so that the calculation result of the counter value becomes less than 0 when the largest difference based on the timing with the smallest difference since power-on exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example), but is not limited to this and may be configured as follows: Note that the various values shown below are merely examples and may be changed without any problems.

(Configuration 1)
The difference counter is a decrement counter with an initial value of 19,000, an upper limit of 65,535, and a lower limit of 0. When the difference number from when the power was turned on exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example), the calculation result related to the counter value of the difference counter becomes less than 0, and the counter enters a stop state. In other words, the counter is configured to enter a stop state when the difference number from when the power was turned on reaches a predetermined value (19,000 in this example), and even if there has been a period in which the difference number has decreased since the power was turned on, the counter is configured to enter a stop state when the difference number based on the time when the power was turned on exceeds the predetermined value (19,000 in this example).

(Configuration 2)
The difference counter is an increment counter with an initial value of 0, an upper limit of 19,000, and a lower limit of 0. When the largest difference based on the timing at which the difference number was smallest since power-on exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example), the calculation result related to the counter value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000 and a stoppage state is reached. That is, the counter is configured to stop when the largest difference based on the timing at which the difference number was smallest since power-on reaches a predetermined value (19,000 in this example), and when there has been a period in which the difference number has decreased since power-on, the counter is configured to stop when the difference based on the timing at which the difference number was smallest since power-on exceeds the predetermined value (19,000 in this example).

(Configuration 3)
The difference counter is an increment counter with an initial value of 11,000, an upper limit of 30,000, and a lower limit of 0. The difference counter's counter value reaches a limiting state when the difference since power-on exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example), i.e., when the difference since power-on exceeds 30,000. That is, the difference counter is configured to reach a limiting state when the difference since power-on exceeds the predetermined value (19,000 in this example). Even if there is a period in which the difference since power-on has decreased, the difference counter reaches a limiting state when the difference since power-on exceeds the predetermined value (19,000 in this example). In this configuration, if the calculation result related to the difference counter's counter value falls below the lower limit, the counter value will not become less than 0. Therefore, if the calculation result related to the difference counter's counter value subsequently exceeds 30,000 and reaches a limiting state, the difference since power-on will reach a limiting state when the difference since power-on is equal to or less than the predetermined value (19,000 in this example). Furthermore, by adjusting the initial value of the difference counter (for example, to a value greater than 11,000), it is possible to make it difficult for the difference counter to fall below 0.

Note that the largest difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number since power-on may be referred to as the difference number since the specified timing after power-on, and the difference number from power-on in the above configuration 1 may be referred to as the difference number since the specified timing after power-on.

<Example of changes to MY counter>
In the second embodiment, the MY counter is a decrement counter, and is configured so that when the difference from the start of the advantageous period exceeds a specific value (2400 in this example), the calculation result for the counter value becomes less than 0, but this is not limited to this and it may be configured as follows: Note that the various numerical values shown below are merely examples and may be changed without any problems.

(Configuration 1)
The MY counter is a decrement counter with an initial value of 2400, an upper limit of 2400, and a lower limit of 0. When the largest difference number based on the timing when the difference number is the smallest since the start of the advantageous zone exceeds a specific value (2400 in this example), the calculation result related to the counter value of the MY counter becomes less than 0, and the advantageous zone ends and becomes a normal zone. In other words, the advantageous zone ends and becomes a normal zone when the largest difference number based on the timing when the difference number is the smallest since the start of the advantageous zone exceeds a specific value (2400 in this example), and if there has been a period in which the difference number has decreased since the start of the advantageous zone, the advantageous zone ends and becomes a normal zone when the largest difference number based on the timing when the difference number is the smallest since the start of the advantageous zone exceeds a specific value (2400 in this example).

(Configuration 2)
The MY counter is an increment counter with an initial value of 0, an upper limit of 2400, and a lower limit of 0. When the difference number from the start of the advantageous zone exceeds a specific value (2400 in this example), the calculation result related to the counter value of the MY counter exceeds 2400, and the advantageous zone ends and becomes a normal zone. In other words, the advantageous zone ends and becomes a normal zone when the difference number from the start of the advantageous zone exceeds a specific value (2400 in this example), and even if there is a period in which the difference number has decreased since the start of the advantageous zone, the advantageous zone ends and becomes a normal zone when the difference number based on the start of the advantageous zone exceeds a specific value (2400 in this example).

(Configuration 3)
The MY counter is an increment counter with an initial value of 5600, an upper limit of 8000, and a lower limit of 0. When the largest difference number based on the timing when the difference number is the smallest since the start of the advantageous zone exceeds a specific value (2400 in this example), the calculation result related to the counter value of the MY counter exceeds 8000, and the advantageous zone ends and becomes a normal zone. In other words, the advantageous zone ends and becomes a normal zone when the largest difference number based on the timing when the difference number is the smallest since the start of the advantageous zone exceeds a specific value (2400 in this example), and if there has been a period in which the difference number has decreased since the start of the advantageous zone, the advantageous zone ends and becomes a normal zone when the largest difference number based on the timing when the difference number is the smallest since the start of the advantageous zone exceeds a specific value (2400 in this example). In this configuration, if the calculation result for the counter value of the MY counter falls below the lower limit, the counter value will not become less than 0, and therefore, if the calculation result for the counter value of the MY counter subsequently exceeds 8000 and the advantageous period ends, the advantageous period will end in a situation where the difference from the start of the advantageous period is less than a specific value (2400 in this example). Also, by adjusting the initial value of the counter value of the MY counter, it is possible to make it less likely for the counter value of the MY counter to fall below 0.

In this specification, exceeding a predetermined value (in this example, 19,000) may be referred to as being equal to or greater than the predetermined value (e.g., 19,001), and being equal to or less than a predetermined value (in this example, 19,000) may be referred to as being less than the predetermined value (e.g., 19,001). Furthermore, exceeding a specific value (in this example, 2,400) may be referred to as being equal to or greater than the specific value (e.g., 2,401), and being equal to or less than a specific value (in this example, 2,400) may be referred to as being less than the specific value (e.g., 2,401).

<<Diagram of pre-notification of limit>>
Next, Figure 60 is a diagram showing the state of advance notification of the game being stopped. As described above, in the second embodiment, when the maximum difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number since power-on exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example), the game is stopped and play is disabled.

If a player is suddenly put on hold while playing, they may suddenly find themselves unable to continue playing. Although they would have stopped playing if they had been aware of this, they may continue playing because they were not aware of it, potentially missing out on the profits they had hoped to earn. Therefore, in the second embodiment, the system is designed to prevent situations in which the player incurs an unexpected disadvantage by informing the player that the limit is approaching before the limit is reached, in other words, at a difference smaller than the limit.

In Figure 60, the counter value of the difference counter is configured to be updated each time a game is played.

First, at timing (1) in the diagram, the gaming machine is powered on and the initial processing at power-on is executed. After that, for example, play progresses in the normal zone, and the difference number decreases, until at timing (2) in the diagram, the difference number reaches its smallest since power-on. After that, the difference number increases as the machine transitions between the advantageous zone and the normal zone, and at timing (3) in the diagram, the largest difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number since power-on becomes equal to or greater than the first value (16,950 in this example). Note that at timing (3) in the diagram, the display device S40 does not display the indication of a game-ending state, which will be described later.

After that, for example, as play progresses in the advantageous zone, the difference number increases, and at timing (4) in the diagram, the maximum difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number since power was turned on becomes equal to or greater than the second value (17,000 in this example), and the machine enters a pre-stop warning state.

In this way, in the second embodiment, when the maximum difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number since power-on becomes equal to or greater than the second value (17,000 in this example), the sub-control board S is configured to transition to a limit-warning state. The limit-warning state is a state intended to notify the player that a limit-warning state is approaching, and does not result in any change to the game situation. In other words, game play can continue even when the limit-warning state is reached. Furthermore, when the limit-warning state is reached, a limit-warning indication display is displayed on the sub-control board S. When the limit-warning state is reached, the speaker S20 may be configured to output a sound such as "The limit-warning state will soon be reached." The decorative lamp unit D150 or the like may also be configured to notify the player that a limit-warning state has been reached.

In addition, the sub-control board S may be configured to transition to the stop advance notification state as follows.
(1) Information regarding the counter value of the difference counter is sent from the main control board M to the sub-control board S, and the sub-control board S determines whether to transition to a stop advance notification state based on the information regarding the counter value.
(2) The number of bets and the number of payouts are transmitted from the main control board M to the sub-control board S for each game, and the sub-control board S calculates the difference and determines whether to transition to a pre-notification state for the game ending based on the difference.

The second value (17,000 in this example) is smaller than the predetermined value (19,000 in this example) that is the difference number at which the limit is reached. Although not shown, if the maximum difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number since power-on becomes equal to or greater than the second value (17,000 in this example), a predetermined flag on the main control board M may be turned on.

At timing (4) in the diagram, the game enters a pre-limit notification state, and then, for example, as play progresses in a favorable zone and the difference number increases for a while, the game then progresses in a normal zone and the difference number decreases, and at timing (5) in the diagram, the maximum difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number since power-on becomes less than the second value (17,000 in this example), but the pre-limit notification state is not terminated.

After that, for example, as the game progresses in the normal section, the difference number decreases, and at timing (6) in the diagram, the maximum difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number since power was turned on becomes less than the first value (16,950 in this example), the pre-limit notification state ends, and the limit state indication display on the sub-control board S also disappears.

In the same figure, the advance notification state is complete from time (4) to time (6).

After that, for example, as play progresses in the normal zone and the difference number decreases for a while, play progresses in the advantageous zone and the difference number increases, and at timing (7) in the figure, the maximum difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number since power was turned on becomes equal to or greater than the first value (16,950 in this example), but the system is configured not to transition to the pre-notification state for game limit.

After that, for example, as play progresses in the advantageous zone, the difference number increases, and at timing (8) in the diagram, the maximum difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number since power was turned on becomes equal to or greater than the second value (17,000 in this example), and the game again transitions to a pre-stop warning state, and a stop state indication display is displayed on the sub-control board S.

In this way, in the second embodiment, when the maximum difference number, based on the timing when the difference number is smallest since power-on, reaches or exceeds a second value (17,000 in this example), which is smaller than the predetermined value at which the game reaches a stoppage state (19,000 in this example), the game transitions to a stoppage advance notification state, and a stoppage state indication display is executed on the sub-control board S side. By configuring it in this way, the player can recognize that the stoppage state is approaching before it actually occurs, and can decide whether or not to continue playing.

Furthermore, after transitioning to the limit pre-alert state, the limit pre-alert state is not terminated even if the largest difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number since power-on falls below a second value (17,000 in this example). Instead, the limit pre-alert state is terminated when the largest difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number since power-on falls below a first value (16,950 in this example), which is smaller than the second value (17,000 in this example). By configuring it in this way, even if the largest difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number since power-on is close to the second value (17,000 in this example), and a small win such as a common bell occurs, causing the largest difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number since power-on to frequently exceed and fall below the second value (17,000 in this example), the limit pre-alert state will not be terminated. Therefore, the limit pre-alert state indication will not be repeatedly displayed and hidden on the sub-control board S, preventing the player from feeling annoyed.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, as described above at timing (6) in the figure, after the limit pre-alert state is terminated when the maximum difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number since power-on falls below a first value (16,950 in this example), the system does not transition to the limit pre-alert state even if the maximum difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number since power-on subsequently exceeds the first value (16,950 in this example). Instead, the system transitions back to the limit pre-alert state when the maximum difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number since power-on exceeds a second value (17,000 in this example). This configuration unifies the condition for transitioning to the limit pre-alert state to the maximum difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number since power-on exceeding the second value (17,000 in this example), thereby simplifying processing related to the limit pre-alert state. Furthermore, the limit state indication does not repeatedly appear and disappear on the sub-control board S side, which is a configuration that does not annoy the player.

In addition, the difference between the second value (17,000 in this example) and the first value (16,950 in this example), shown as "A" in Figure 60, is 50 in the second embodiment, and the maximum number of coins that can be paid out in response to a single small win (winning role) in the second embodiment is 11 (for example, "Winning 01" shown in Figure 8), so the difference between the second value (17,000 in this example) and the first value (16,950 in this example) is greater than the maximum number of coins that can be paid out in response to a single small win (winning role).

In addition, when the configuration related to "A" in Figure 60 is applied to a gaming machine that can execute push order navigation in a three-coin bet game within a bonus won in a two-coin bet game, and that can execute an AT lottery in a three-coin bet game, "A" in Figure 60 may be configured to be greater than the maximum payout number of coins that can be won for a minor role (winning role) that can be won in a three-coin bet game, which is the specified number for executing an AT lottery. In other words, in this gaming machine, a minor role (winning role) that will result in a payout number greater than "A" in Figure 60 may be won in a game other than a three-coin bet, which is the specified number for executing an AT lottery.

Furthermore, in gaming machines (sometimes referred to as Type A) that do not execute AT and instead acquire gaming medals (gaming value) by executing bonuses, the number of coins to be paid out for small winning combinations (winning combinations) that can be won with at least one specified number (for example, a bet of three coins that is mainly applied when playing), may be configured so that "A" in Figure 60 is greater than the maximum payout number. In other words, in such gaming machines, when playing with a specified number other than the one specified number, a small winning combination (winning combination) that will pay out a number of coins greater than "A" in Figure 60 may be won.

In the second embodiment, the counter value of the difference counter can be updated each time a game is played after the power is turned on, regardless of the specified number or the game state. This configuration allows the counter value of the difference counter to be updated appropriately even when the specified number is changed during gameplay or when the game state changes multiple times, thereby reducing gambling.

The difference counter is configured so that the counter value can be updated each time a game is played, regardless of the specified number. Therefore, in the case of a gaming machine that allows games to be played with multiple specified numbers, "A" in Figure 60 may be configured to be greater than the maximum payout number of coins that can be awarded for minor winning combinations (winning combinations) that can be won with each of the multiple specified numbers.

By configuring it in this way, even when a game is played using multiple types of specified numbers, the display indicating a game-stop state will not repeatedly appear and disappear on the sub-control board S side, preventing the player from feeling annoyed.

By configuring it in this way, when the pre-notification state for limiting play ends (for example, at timing (6) in Figure 600), the next game will not transition to the pre-notification state for limiting play again, regardless of the lottery result of that next game, and the sub-control board S will not repeatedly display and hide the display indicating the limiting play state.

The maximum number of coins paid out as a result of a single minor win (winning combination) is sometimes referred to as the maximum number of gaming values awarded to a player in one game. This number of coins paid out includes not only the number of gaming medals paid out from the gaming machine, but also gaming medals stored as credits, and in medal-less slot gaming machines, it may also be the number of gaming medals added to the total score display device.

In the second embodiment, "greater than or equal to the first value (in this example, 16,950)" may be replaced with "greater than the first value (in this example, 16,950)," and "less than the first value (in this example, 16,950)" may be replaced with "less than or equal to the first value (in this example, 16,950)." Also, "greater than or equal to the second value (in this example, 17,000)" may be replaced with "greater than the second value (in this example, 17,000)," and "less than the second value (in this example, 17,000)" may be replaced with "less than or equal to the second value (in this example, 17,000)."

<Configuration related to pre-notification of end of life>
As a configuration related to the pre-notification of the end of operation, one or more of the following configurations may be applied.
(1) After the device transitions to the pre-warning state, the pre-warning state ends when the maximum difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number since power-on becomes less than a second value (17,000 in this example). By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the capacity used for the pre-warning state.
(2) Even when a waiting demo is being displayed on the performance display device S40, the indication of the stoppage state is displayed in a visible manner.
(3) When a display indicating a limit state is displayed on the performance display device S40, if a specified operation is performed on the sub-input button SB, etc., a menu screen can be displayed on the performance display device S40, and while the menu screen is displayed, the display indicating a limit state is not displayed (it may be invisible or its visibility may be reduced).
(4) In the limit advance notification state, the speaker S20 can output a voice message regarding the remaining difference in the number of coins remaining until the limit state, such as "XX coins remaining until the limit state."
(5) In the limit advance warning state, the timing for outputting the sound regarding the remaining difference number until the limit state is reached is only once, when the limit advance warning state is reached.
(6) In the pre-notification state for stopping, the timing for outputting a sound regarding the remaining difference until the stopping state is the timing when the remaining difference until the stopping state reaches a predetermined value, and this timing occurs one or more times.
(7) When the display indicating a limit state is displayed on the performance display device S40, the display is a flashing display that switches every predetermined time (for example, every 0.5 seconds), and the image (or the image displayed on the rear) whose display area overlaps with the display indicating a limit state is visible.
(8) The display indicating the end of the game state has a higher display priority than the display of the number of coins acquired in the AT (see Figure 66).
(9) The display indicating the limit state has a higher display priority than the push order navigation display.
(10) The display indicating the end of the game state has a lower display priority than the display of the number of coins acquired in the AT (see Figure 66).
(11) The display indicating the limit state has a lower display priority than the push order navigation display.

<<Diagram 1 regarding the case where the difference condition is exceeded during the bonus>>
Next, Figure 61 is a diagram showing a case where, during a bonus (e.g., while RB is operating), the maximum difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number since power-on exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example). In the figure, "executing" under "bonus" indicates that a bonus is being executed, and "not executing" under "bonus" indicates that a bonus is not being executed. Also, "in a stopped state" under "stop state" indicates that the stop flag is on and the game is in a stopped state, and "not in a stopped state" indicates that the stop flag is off and the game is not in a stopped state.

First, at timing (1) in the diagram, a new bonus begins. The largest difference in number of chips since power-on does not exceed a predetermined value (19,000 in this example), so the bonus has not yet reached a capped state. Then, at timing (2) in the diagram, the largest difference in number of chips since power-on, based on the timing with the smallest difference since power-on, exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example), but because the bonus is still being executed, the bonus does not reach a capped state. Note that from timing (2) in the diagram onwards, the cap reservation flag is on, and the cap flag is off (see Figure 57).

The state in which the cap reservation flag is on and the cap flag is off is sometimes referred to as the cap reservation state. Also, although not shown, when the cap reservation state is reached, a command indicating that the cap reservation state is reached is sent from the main control board M to the sub-control board S, and the effect display device S40 on the sub-control board S is configured to display a cap reservation display stating "The cap reservation state will be reached after the bonus ends." Note that the notification on the sub-control board S side is merely an example, and notification means may be added or changed, or the notification method may be changed.

From time (2) in the diagram, gameplay during the bonus progresses, and at time (3) in the diagram, the maximum difference in the number of differences, based on the time with the smallest difference since power was turned on, exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example), satisfying the bonus end condition, the bonus ends, and the game transitions to a halt state.

In addition, in the figure, the case where RB is activated as a bonus is illustrated as an example, but the same configuration can be applied to Type 1 BB and Type 2 BB. Also, when applied to Type 1 BB, in the case where there is a Type 1 BB general area where Type 1 BB is activated and RB is not activated, the following configuration can be used.
(1) When Type 1 BB is operating and RB is operating, if the maximum difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number since power-on exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example), the system will transition to a stop state at the time when the difference number exceeds a predetermined value.
(2) When Type 1 BB and RB are operating, if the maximum difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number since power-on exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example), the game will not transition to a stop state at the time when the difference number exceeds a predetermined value, but will transition to a stop state when the currently running RB ends and the next game is played during Type 1 BB general mode.
(3) When Type 1 BB is operating and RB is operating, if the maximum difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number since power-on exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example), the system will not transition to a stopped state at the time when the difference number exceeds a predetermined value, but will transition to a stopped state at the time when the Type 1 BB currently in operation ends.

Note that this configuration can also be applied to the configurations illustrated in Figures 62 and 63, which will be described later.

<<Diagram 2 regarding the case where the difference condition is exceeded during the bonus>>
Next, Figure 62 is a diagram showing a case where, during a bonus (e.g., while RB is operating), the maximum difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number since power-on exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example). In the figure, "Bonus""Running" indicates that a bonus is being executed, and "Bonus""NotRunning" indicates that a bonus is not being executed. Also, "In a Stop State" indicates that the stop flag is on and the game is in a stop state, and "Not in a Stop State" indicates that the stop flag is off and the game is not in a stop state.

First, at timing (1) in the diagram, a new bonus begins. The largest difference in number of chips since power-on does not exceed a predetermined value (19,000 in this example), so the bonus has not yet reached a capped state. Then, at timing (2) in the diagram, the largest difference in number of chips since power-on, based on the timing with the smallest difference since power-on, exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example), but because the bonus is still being executed, the bonus does not reach a capped state. Note that from timing (2) in the diagram onwards, the cap reservation flag is on, and the cap flag is off (see Figure 57).

From time (2) in the diagram, gameplay during the bonus progresses, and at time (3) in the diagram, the largest difference in the number of times the difference was smallest since the power was turned on falls below a predetermined value (19,000 in this example). Then, at time (4) in the diagram, the largest difference in the number of times the difference was smallest since the power was turned on falls below a predetermined value (19,000 in this example), satisfying the bonus end condition and ending the bonus. At time (4) in the diagram, the largest difference in the number of times the difference was smallest since the power was turned on falls below a predetermined value (19,000 in this example), but the game will transition to a stop state. Note that at time (4) in the diagram, the game is configured to transition to a stop state based on the fact that the stop reservation flag is on when the bonus execution ends.

By configuring it in this way, if at any point during the bonus run the maximum difference based on the timing with the smallest difference since power-on exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example), the machine can transition to a stop state after the bonus run ends, resulting in a gaming machine with reduced gambling potential.

In addition, in Figure 62 (2), once the largest difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number since power-on exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example), the counter value of the difference number counter may be configured not to be updated until the bonus ends, or the counter value of the difference number counter may be configured to be updated even until the bonus ends.

Furthermore, even if during a bonus the maximum difference based on the timing with the smallest difference since power-on exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example), if the maximum difference based on the timing with the smallest difference since power-on is equal to or less than the predetermined value (19,000 in this example) at the end of the bonus, the game may not transition to a stop state.

Furthermore, even during a bonus, if the maximum difference in number based on the timing with the smallest difference since power-on exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example), the game may be configured to transition to a stop state at that timing. If configured in this way, there will be no need for the stop reservation flag shown in Figure 57, or for processing such as step 3724 in Figure 57 to determine whether or not the game is being played during a bonus.

<<Figure 3 when the difference condition is exceeded during the bonus>>
Next, Figure 63 is a diagram showing a case where, during a bonus (e.g., while RB is operating), the maximum difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number since power-on exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example). In this figure, "executing" under "bonus" indicates that a bonus is being executed, and "not executing" under "bonus" indicates that a bonus is not being executed. Also, "in a stopped state" under "stop state" indicates that the stop flag is on and the game is in a stopped state, and "not in a stopped state" indicates that the stop flag is off and the game is not in a stopped state.

First, at timing (1) in the diagram, a new bonus begins. The largest difference in number of chips since power-on does not exceed a predetermined value (19,000 in this example), so the bonus has not yet reached a capped state. Then, at timing (2) in the diagram, the largest difference in number of chips since power-on, based on the timing with the smallest difference since power-on, exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example), but because the bonus is still being executed, the bonus does not reach a capped state. Note that from timing (2) in the diagram onwards, the cap reservation flag is on, and the cap flag is off (see Figure 57).

From timing (2) in the diagram, game play during the bonus progresses, and at timing (3) in the diagram, the largest difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number since power was turned on becomes equal to or less than a predetermined value (19,000 in this example). Then, at timing (4) in the diagram, when the largest difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number since power was turned on becomes equal to or less than a predetermined value (19,000 in this example), the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, the gaming machine detects the power outage, and power-off processing is executed. Note that the cutting off of the power supply to the gaming machine, the gaming machine detecting the power outage, and the execution of power-off processing are sometimes referred to as a power outage occurring.

Then, the power is turned on without clearing the RAM, and at the timing (5) in the diagram, when the initial processing at power on is performed, the bonus that was running before the power was turned off resumes from where it left off. Also, because a power outage occurs and the power is turned on without clearing the RAM, the counter value of the difference counter is initialized (the counter value of the difference counter is set to its initial value of 19000), and the maximum difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number since power on becomes 0, so the game is not in a stopped state. Note that at the timing (5) in the diagram, the stop reservation flag is on.

Then, as the bonus game progresses, at the timing (6) in the diagram, the bonus end condition is met when the maximum difference in the number of times since the power was turned on, based on the timing of the smallest difference, is less than or equal to a predetermined value (19,000 in this example), and the bonus ends. At the timing (6) in the diagram, the maximum difference in the number of times since the power was turned on, based on the timing of the smallest difference, is less than or equal to the predetermined value (19,000 in this example), and the game enters a stop state. Note that at the timing (6) in the diagram, the game enters a stop state based on the fact that the stop reservation flag is on when the bonus execution ends. In other words, even if a power outage occurs, the information about the stop reservation flag being on is restored after the power is restored.

By configuring it in this way, if at any point during the bonus run the maximum difference based on the timing with the smallest difference since the power was turned on exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example), even if a power outage occurs during the bonus run, the power can be restored and the game can transition to a stop state when the bonus ends, resulting in a gaming machine with reduced gambling potential.

The difference counter may be configured not to update its counter value from the time when the maximum difference based on the timing with the smallest difference since power-on (2) exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example) until power-off processing is executed (4) in Figure 63, and/or from the time when power is restored (5) in Figure 63 until the bonus ends (6) in Figure 63, or the difference counter may be configured to update its counter value. If the difference counter is configured not to update its counter value, it may be configured to make a determination based on whether the limit reservation flag is on.

<<If you win a replay during the final bonus play>>
When the configurations of FIGS. 60 to 62 are applied during the execution of RB, the configuration may be configured to operate as follows.

<Configuration 1>
(1) RB is being executed.
(2) During execution of RB, the maximum difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number since power-on exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example).
(3) When the maximum difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number since power-on exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example), the final game of RB is executed, a replay role is won, and the pattern combination corresponding to the replay role is displayed stopped.
(4) The game is stopped and automatic settlement is performed. An automatic bet corresponding to the re-play role is not performed.

<Configuration 2>
(1) RB is being executed.
(2) During execution of RB, the maximum difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number since power-on exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example).
(3) During execution of RB, the maximum difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number since power-on becomes equal to or less than a predetermined value (19,000 in this example).
(4) When the maximum difference number based on the timing when the difference number is the smallest since the power was turned on is less than a predetermined value (19,000 in this example), the final game of RB is executed, the replay role is won, and the pattern combination corresponding to the replay role is displayed stopped.
(5) The game is stopped and automatic settlement is performed. An automatic bet corresponding to the re-play role is not performed.

<Configuration 3>
(1) RB is being executed.
(2) During execution of RB, the maximum difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number since power-on exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example).
(3) During execution of RB, the maximum difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number since power-on becomes equal to or less than a predetermined value (19,000 in this example).
(4) A power outage occurs.
(5) When the power is restored and the maximum difference number based on the timing when the difference number is the smallest since the power was turned on is less than a predetermined value (19,000 in this example), the final game of RB is executed, the replay role is won, and the pattern combination corresponding to the replay role is displayed stopped.
(6) The game is stopped and automatic settlement is performed. An automatic bet corresponding to the re-play role is not performed.

<Configuration 4>
(1) RB is being executed.
(2) During execution of RB, the maximum difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number since power-on exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example).
(3) When the maximum difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number since power-on exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example), the final game of RB is executed, a replay role is won, and the pattern combination corresponding to the replay role is displayed stopped.
(4) An automatic bet corresponding to the replay role is executed, but since the game is stopped, operation of the start lever is invalid and automatic settlement is executed. Note that the game medals (game value) that have been automatically bet may be configured not to be automatically settled.

<Configuration 5>
(1) RB is being executed.
(2) During execution of RB, the maximum difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number since power-on exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example).
(3) During execution of RB, the maximum difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number since power-on becomes equal to or less than a predetermined value (19,000 in this example).
(4) When the maximum difference number based on the timing when the difference number is the smallest since the power was turned on is less than a predetermined value (19,000 in this example), the final game of RB is executed, the replay role is won, and the pattern combination corresponding to the replay role is displayed stopped.
(5) An automatic bet corresponding to the replay role is executed, but since the game is stopped, operation of the start lever is invalid and automatic settlement is executed. Note that the game medals (game value) that have been automatically bet may be configured not to be automatically settled.

<Configuration 6>
(1) RB is being executed.
(2) During execution of RB, the maximum difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number since power-on exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example).
(3) During execution of RB, the maximum difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number since power-on becomes equal to or less than a predetermined value (19,000 in this example).
(4) A power outage occurs.
(5) When the power is restored and the maximum difference number based on the timing when the difference number is the smallest since the power was turned on is less than a predetermined value (19,000 in this example), the final game of RB is executed, the replay role is won, and the pattern combination corresponding to the replay role is displayed stopped.
(6) An automatic bet corresponding to the replay role is executed, but since the game is stopped, operation of the start lever is invalid and automatic settlement is executed. Note that the game medals (game value) that have been automatically bet may be configured not to be automatically settled.

As described above in Figures 60 to 62, in the second embodiment, even if the largest difference in the number of games based on the timing when the difference in the number of games was smallest since the power was turned on exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example) during bonus execution, automatic settlement will not be executed at that timing. On the other hand, if the largest difference in the number of games based on the timing when the difference in the number of games was smallest since the power was turned on exceeds the predetermined value (19,000 in this example) even once during bonus execution, when the final game that ends the bonus is executed, automatic settlement will be executed after the payout of the game medals corresponding to that final game has been completed (this is the configuration shown in Figures 60 to 62).

If the maximum difference based on the timing when the difference is smallest since power-on during the bonus exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example) and the bonus then ends, the following configuration may be used: When the bonus ends, regardless of whether the bonus transitions to a stop state or not, an end screen is displayed, and a bonus end wait period is entered during which bets cannot be made and operation of the start lever is invalid for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the start of the display of the end screen.
(1) The game that will be the final game of the bonus ends → The bonus end wait period begins, and the effect display device S40 displays a message indicating that the game is currently stopped along with an end screen → The bonus end wait period ends, and automatic settlement is performed. (2) The game that will be the final game of the bonus ends → The bonus end wait period begins, and the effect display device S40 displays a message indicating that the game is currently stopped → The bonus end wait period ends, and automatic settlement is performed → After automatic settlement is completed, the effect display device S40 displays a message indicating that the game is currently stopped.

<<Action diagram for games in which a small win has been won>>
Next, a case where a game in which a small win is won is executed, and a payout of game medals based on the small win is executed, and the maximum difference number based on the timing when the difference number is the smallest since the power was turned on exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example), will be described in detail using Figures 64 and 65. Note that Figures 64 and 65 illustrate a situation in which the maximum difference number based on the timing when the difference number is the smallest since the power was turned on is 18,995, a game in which a bell with 10 coins is won is executed, two reels are stopped, and one reel, which is the last reel, is spinning.

In addition, the "spinning" of the "last reel" shown in the figure indicates that two reels are stopped and that the last reel is spinning, while the "stopped" of the "last reel" indicates that all reels are stopped. The "pressed" of the "stop button" indicates that the stop button corresponding to the last reel is physically pressed, regardless of whether the stop button operation is valid or not, while the "not pressed" of the "stop button" indicates that the stop button is not physically pressed. The "executing" of the "payout process" indicates that the process of adding to credits or the process of paying out game medals to the gaming machine is being executed. Examples of the payout process include steps 1232 through 1248 in FIG. 17 and steps 1275 through 1290 in FIG. 56. The "not executing" of the "payout process" indicates that the process of adding to credits or the process of paying out game medals to the gaming machine is not being executed. The payout process is sometimes referred to as the "awarding process." Furthermore, when applied to a medal-less slot machine, the "in progress" status of the "payout process" indicates that the process of adding points to the total score display device is in progress. The "stop flag" indicates the on/off status of the stop flag controlled by the main control board M (or whether the power-on process is in progress), and the "state on the sub-control board" indicates the state of the sub-control board S.

In addition, the timings in Figures 64 and 65 are the same or approximately the same for those with the same numbers. Furthermore, the gaming machines illustrated in Figures 64 and 65 are configured so that when a symbol combination corresponding to a minor win is displayed, and the final stop button (the stop button corresponding to the final reel) changes from being pressed to not being pressed (the final stop button is released), a payout process is executed.

<A: When the payout process is completed before the power-off process>
First, the last reel is spinning, the stop button corresponding to the last reel has not been pressed, no payout process has been performed, the stop flag is off, and the stop warning state is active. Then, at the timing indicated by (1) in the figure, the last stop button is pressed, causing the last reel to stop. Note that although it takes a short time for the last reel to stop after the last stop button is pressed, for the sake of simplicity, these are shown as occurring at the same timing in the figure.

Then, at timing (2) in the diagram, the final stop button is released, and the symbol combination corresponding to the 10-coin bell is displayed, causing the payout process to be executed. Then, at timing (4) in the diagram, the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off. Then, at timing (6) in the diagram, the gaming machine detects the power outage. Then, at timing (7) in the diagram, which is the timing before the gaming machine executes the power-off process, the payout process ends, and because the maximum difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number since power was turned on exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example) (19,005), the play-stop flag is turned on, and the gaming machine enters a play-stop state. Then, at timing (8) in the diagram, the gaming machine executes the power-off process.

Then, at timing (10) in the diagram, power is turned on without clearing the RAM, and the initial processing at power on (sometimes referred to as power-on processing) begins. Then, at timing (12) in the diagram, the initial processing at power on ends, the stop flag is turned on, and the system transitions to the stop state again.

<B: When the payout process is not completed before the power-off process 1>
First, the last reel is spinning, the stop button corresponding to the last reel has not been pressed, no payout process has been performed, the stop flag is off, and the stop warning state is active. Then, at the timing indicated by (1) in the figure, the last stop button is pressed, causing the last reel to stop. Note that although it takes a short time for the last reel to stop after the last stop button is pressed, for the sake of simplicity, these are shown as occurring at the same timing in the figure.

Then, at timing (3) in the diagram, the final stop button is released, and the symbol combination corresponding to the 10-coin bell is displayed, causing the payout process to be executed. Then, at timing (4) in the diagram, the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off. Then, at timing (6) in the diagram, the gaming machine detects the power outage. Then, at timing (8) in the diagram, the gaming machine executes the power-off process while the payout process has not yet been completed.

Then, at timing (10) in the diagram, the power is turned on without clearing the RAM, and the initial processing at power on begins. Then, at timing (12) in the diagram, the initial processing at power on ends, the payout process resumes from where it left off, the stop flag is turned off, and the machine enters a stop pre-notification state. Note that the power is turned off and the power is turned on without clearing the RAM, so the difference counter is initialized (the difference counter's counter value is set to its initial value of 19,000), and at timing (12) in the diagram, the largest difference based on the timing with the smallest difference since power on is 0. However, because the difference counter update process (for example, the process of step 3712 in Figure 57) has not been executed since power was turned on, the stop pre-notification state before power off is restored.

Then, at timing (13) in the figure, the payout process ends. Because the largest difference, based on the timing with the smallest difference since power-on, does not exceed the predetermined value (19,000 in this example), the system does not transition to the stop state but to the normal state. In the figure, the normal state refers to a state in which play can continue, neither in the stop state nor in the stop pre-warning state. Also, in (B), the system is configured to subtract the number of bets on the game played from the medals paid out in response to the 10-coin bell from the counter value of the difference counter. In Figures 64 and 65, subtracting the number of bets on the game played from the medals paid out after power-on is sometimes referred to as "executing a difference update process." Even if a power outage occurs, the information about the number of bets stored before the power outage is restored when power is restored, so the counter value of the difference counter can be updated after power is restored.

In the second embodiment, the difference between the initial value of the difference counter (19,000 in this example) and the counter value of the difference counter at which the game transitions to the pre-warning state (2,000 in this example) is configured to be greater than the maximum number of coins that can be paid out in response to a single minor win (winning role) (11 in this example), so the game will not transition to the pre-warning state at the timing of (13) in the diagram (B).

Furthermore, if the difference between the initial counter value of the difference counter and the counter value of the difference counter that will transition to the pre-notification state for a game ending is configured to be smaller than the maximum number of coins that can be paid out for a single minor win (winning combination), the pre-notification state for a game ending may be maintained at timing (13) in the diagram (B).

<C: When the payout process is not completed before the power-off process 2>
First, the last reel is spinning, the stop button corresponding to the last reel has not been pressed, no payout process has been performed, the stop flag is off, and the stop warning state is active. Then, at the timing indicated by (1) in the figure, the last stop button is pressed, causing the last reel to stop. Note that although it takes a short time for the last reel to stop after the last stop button is pressed, for the sake of simplicity, these are shown as occurring at the same timing in the figure.

Then, at timing (4) in the diagram, the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off. Then, at timing (5) in the diagram, the final stop button is released and the symbol combination corresponding to the 10-coin bell is displayed, causing the payout process to be executed. Then, at timing (6) in the diagram, the gaming machine detects a power outage. Then, at timing (8) in the diagram, the gaming machine executes the power-off process while the payout process has not yet been completed.

Then, at timing (10) in the diagram, the power is turned on without clearing the RAM, and the initial processing at power on begins. Then, at timing (12) in the diagram, the initial processing at power on ends, the payout process resumes from where it left off, the stop flag is turned off, and the machine enters a stop pre-notification state. Note that the power is turned off and the power is turned on without clearing the RAM, so the difference counter is initialized (the difference counter's counter value is set to its initial value of 19,000), and at timing (12) in the diagram, the largest difference based on the timing with the smallest difference since power on is 0. However, because the difference counter update process (for example, the process of step 3712 in Figure 57) has not been executed since power was turned on, the stop pre-notification state before power off is restored.

Then, at timing (14) in the diagram, the payout process ends, and because the largest difference based on the timing with the smallest difference since power was turned on does not exceed the predetermined value (19,000 in this example), the game does not enter a stop state, but enters a normal state. Also, at (C), the value obtained by subtracting the number of bets related to the game executed from the number of game medals paid out in response to the 10-coin bell is subtracted from the counter value of the difference counter.

In the second embodiment, the difference between the initial value of the difference counter (19,000 in this example) and the counter value of the difference counter at which the game will transition to the pre-warning state (2,000 in this example) is configured to be greater than the maximum number of coins that can be paid out in response to a single minor win (winning role) (11 in this example), so the game will not transition to the pre-warning state at the timing of (14) in the diagram at (C).

Furthermore, if the difference between the initial counter value of the difference counter and the counter value of the difference counter that will transition to the pre-notification state for the end of the game is configured to be smaller than the maximum number of coins that can be paid out for a single minor win (winning role), the pre-notification state for the end of the game may be maintained at timing (14) in the diagram (C).

<D: When the payout process is not completed before the power-off process 3>
First, the last reel is spinning, the stop button corresponding to the last reel has not been pressed, no payout process has been performed, the stop flag is off, and the stop warning state is active. Then, at the timing indicated by (1) in the figure, the last stop button is pressed, causing the last reel to stop. Note that although it takes a short time for the last reel to stop after the last stop button is pressed, for the sake of simplicity, these are shown as occurring at the same timing in the figure.

Then, at timing (4) in the diagram, the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off. Then, at timing (6) in the diagram, the gaming machine detects the power outage. Then, at timing (7) in the diagram, the final stop button is not pressed, and the symbol combination corresponding to the 10-coin bell is displayed as stopped, so the payout process is executed. Then, at timing (8) in the diagram, the gaming machine executes the power-off process while the payout process is not yet complete.

Then, at timing (10) in the diagram, the power is turned on without clearing the RAM, and the initial processing at power on begins. Then, at timing (12) in the diagram, the initial processing at power on ends, the payout process resumes from where it left off, the stop flag is turned off, and the machine enters a stop pre-notification state. Note that the power is turned off and the power is turned on without clearing the RAM, so the difference counter is initialized (the difference counter's counter value is set to its initial value of 19,000), and at timing (12) in the diagram, the largest difference based on the timing with the smallest difference since power on is 0. However, because the difference counter update process (for example, the process of step 3712 in Figure 57) has not been executed since power was turned on, the stop pre-notification state before power off is restored.

Then, at timing (15) in the diagram, the payout process ends, and because the largest difference based on the timing with the smallest difference since power was turned on does not exceed the predetermined value (19,000 in this example), the game does not enter a stop state, but enters a normal state. Also, at (D), the value obtained by subtracting the number of bets related to the game executed from the number of game medals paid out in response to the 10-coin bell is subtracted from the counter value of the difference counter.

In the second embodiment, the difference between the initial value of the difference counter (19,000 in this example) and the counter value of the difference counter at which the game transitions to the pre-warning state (2,000 in this example) is configured to be greater than the maximum number of coins that can be paid out in response to a single minor win (winning role) (11 in this example), so the game will not transition to the pre-warning state at the timing of (15) in the diagram at (D).

Furthermore, if the difference between the initial counter value of the difference counter and the counter value of the difference counter that will transition to the pre-notification state for a game ending is configured to be smaller than the maximum number of coins that can be paid out for a single minor win (winning combination), the pre-notification state for a game ending may be maintained at timing (15) in the diagram (D).

<E: If the stop button is released while the power is off>
First, the last reel is spinning, the stop button corresponding to the last reel has not been pressed, no payout process has been performed, the stop flag is off, and the stop warning state is active. Then, at the timing indicated by (1) in the figure, the last stop button is pressed, causing the last reel to stop. Note that although it takes a short time for the last reel to stop after the last stop button is pressed, for the sake of simplicity, these are shown as occurring at the same timing in the figure.

Then, at timing (4) in the diagram, the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off. Then, at timing (6) in the diagram, the gaming machine detects the power outage. Then, at timing (8) in the diagram, the gaming machine executes power-off processing while the payout process is not being executed. Then, at timing (9) in the diagram, when the gaming machine is not powered on (sometimes referred to as being in a power-off state), the final stop button is not pressed, but because the gaming machine is not powered on, the payout process is not executed at that timing.

Then, at timing (10) in the diagram, the power is turned on without clearing the RAM, and the initial processing at power on begins. Then, at timing (12) in the diagram, the initial processing at power on ends, the payout processing begins, the stop flag is turned off, and the machine enters a stop pre-warning state. Note that the power is turned off and the power is turned on without clearing the RAM, so the difference counter is initialized (the difference counter's counter value is set to its initial value of 19,000), and at timing (12) in the diagram, the largest difference based on the timing with the smallest difference since power on is 0. However, because the difference counter update process (for example, the process of step 3712 in Figure 57) has not been executed since power was turned on, the stop pre-warning state before power off is restored.

Then, at timing (16) in the diagram, the payout process ends, and because the largest difference based on the timing with the smallest difference since power was turned on does not exceed the predetermined value (19,000 in this example), the game does not enter a stop state, but enters normal mode. Also, at (E), the value obtained by subtracting the number of bets related to the game executed from the number of game medals paid out in response to the 10-coin bell is subtracted from the counter value of the difference counter.

In the second embodiment, the difference between the initial value of the difference counter (19,000 in this example) and the counter value of the difference counter at which the game will transition to the pre-notification state (2,000 in this example) is configured to be greater than the maximum number of coins that can be paid out in response to a single minor win (winning role) (11 in this example), so the game will not transition to the pre-notification state at the timing of (16) in the diagram at (E).

Furthermore, if the difference between the initial counter value of the difference counter and the counter value of the difference counter that will transition to the pre-notification state for a game ending is configured to be smaller than the maximum number of coins that can be paid out for a single minor win (winning combination), the pre-notification state for a game ending may be maintained at timing (16) in the diagram at (E).

<F: When the stop button is released after power is turned on>
First, the last reel is spinning, the stop button corresponding to the last reel has not been pressed, no payout process has been performed, the stop flag is off, and the stop advance notification state is active. Then, at timing (1) in the figure, the last stop button is pressed and the last reel stops. Note that although it takes a short time from the pressing of the last stop button until the last reel stops, for the sake of simplicity, these are shown as being at the same timing in the figure.

Then, at timing (4) in the diagram, the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off. Then, at timing (6) in the diagram, the gaming machine detects the power outage. Then, at timing (8) in the diagram, the gaming machine executes power-off processing while the payout process is not being executed.

Then, at timing (10) in the diagram, the power is turned on without clearing the RAM, and the initial power-on processing begins. Then, at timing (11) in the diagram, the final stop button is released, but because the initial power-on processing is still being executed, the payout processing is not executed. Then, at timing (12) in the diagram, the initial power-on processing ends, the payout processing begins, the stop flag is turned off, and the machine enters a stop pre-warning state. Note that, due to the power outage and the power being turned on without clearing the RAM, the difference counter is initialized (the difference counter's counter value is set to its initial value of 19,000), and at timing (12) in the diagram, the maximum difference based on the timing with the smallest difference since power-on is 0. However, because the difference counter update processing (e.g., the processing of step 3712 in FIG. 57) has not been executed since power-on, the stop pre-warning state before power-off is restored.

Then, at timing (16) in the diagram, the payout process ends, and because the largest difference based on the timing with the smallest difference since power was turned on does not exceed the predetermined value (19,000 in this example), the game does not enter a stop state, but enters a normal state. Also, at (F), the value obtained by subtracting the number of bets related to the game executed from the number of game medals paid out in response to the 10-coin bell is subtracted from the counter value of the difference counter.

In the second embodiment, the difference between the initial value of the difference counter (19,000 in this example) and the counter value of the difference counter at which the game will transition to the pre-warning state (2,000 in this example) is configured to be greater than the maximum number of coins that can be paid out in response to a single minor win (winning role) (11 in this example), so the game will not transition to the pre-warning state at timing (16) in the diagram at (F).

Furthermore, if the difference between the initial counter value of the difference counter and the counter value of the difference counter that will transition to the pre-notification state for the end of the game is configured to be smaller than the maximum number of coins that can be paid out for a single minor win (winning role), the pre-notification state for the end of the game may be maintained at timing (16) in the diagram at (F).

As shown in (B) to (F) of Figures 64 and 65, when a predetermined game in which a predetermined number of game medals (which may also be referred to as game value) is awarded is executed, and the predetermined number of game medals is awarded, and the largest difference number based on the timing when the difference number is smallest since power-on exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example), if power-off processing is executed before the predetermined game medals are awarded in the predetermined game, and then power is turned on without clearing the RAM, and the predetermined number of game medals are awarded, the game will not enter a stop state, and the value obtained by subtracting the number of bets for the predetermined game from the predetermined number will be subtracted from the initial value of the difference number counter.

By configuring it in this way, even if a power outage occurs during play, the counter value of the difference counter can be subtracted by subtracting the number of game medals awarded after the power is turned back on from the number of bets made before the power outage. This means that the counter value of the difference counter can be accurately updated regardless of whether a power outage occurs or not.

Note that Figures 64 and 65 illustrate the case where the payout process is executed by releasing the final stop button after it has been continuously pressed, but there is no problem with changing the timing at which the final stop button is pressed as long as the timing at which the payout process begins is the same. Furthermore, even if the payout process is configured to begin when the final stop button is pressed again, the same configuration can be applied as long as the timing of the payout process is the same.

In addition, after power-on at (10) in Figures 64 and 65, a specified memory area containing information regarding the limit advance notification state on the sub-control board S side may be configured to be initialized (for example, information regarding the counter value of the difference counter is sent from the main control board M to the sub-control board S after the payout process is completed). If configured in this way, the period in which the "limit advance notification state" occurs after power-on at (10) in Figures 64 and 65 becomes a state that is not the "limit advance notification state" (for example, it may be a "normal state"). By configuring in this way, the limit advance notification state is not entered after power-on, preventing the player from mistakenly believing that the counter value of the difference counter has not been initialized even though a power outage has occurred.

<<Illustration of what happens when a power outage occurs during play in AT mode>>
Next, Figure 66 is an image diagram of what happens when a power outage occurs during a game in the AT state. First, in (a) in the figure, the counter value of the difference counter is 2500, the state related to the AT is in the AT state and the game is being played, the push order navigation is executed, and the effect display device S40 displays the push order navigation display (the display of "123" in the figure) and the number of AT winnings display, etc.

Here, the AT winning number display, etc., is a collective term for the AT winning number display ("GET883" in the figure), which is a display corresponding to the number of game medals won by the player in the current AT state (or advantageous zone), the AT game number display, which is a display corresponding to the number of games played in the current AT state (or advantageous zone), the payout number display, which displays the number of game medals paid out in the current game, and the credit number display, which displays the current number of credits (sometimes referred to as the number of game medals displayed on the credit number display device D200).

After (a) in the figure, the game is played in the AT state, and at (b) in the figure, the counter value of the difference counter is 1998, the game is being played in the AT state, the push order navigation is executed, and the effect display device S40 displays the push order navigation display and the number of AT winning coins, etc. Furthermore, when the counter value of the difference counter falls below a predetermined value (e.g., 2000), in other words, when the maximum difference based on the timing with the smallest difference since power-on exceeds a second value (17,000 in this example), the effect display device S40 displays the message "1998 coins remaining until the end of the game" as a limit indication. In this way, the limit indication display is configured to notify the player of the remaining difference until the limit is reached. However, this is not limited to this, and the effect display device S40 may also be configured to display a message such as "The limit will soon be reached" as a limit indication.

Then, in the figure (c), while a game is being played with the push order navigation being executed and a display suggesting a play-stop state is being displayed on the effect display device S40, a power outage occurs and the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off.

Then, at (d) in the figure, the power is turned on without clearing the RAM, and the effect display device S40 again displays the push order navigation display and the number of coins won in the AT. Also, because the power was turned on without clearing the RAM after a power outage occurred, the counter value of the difference counter is initialized to 19,000, and the effect display device S40 does not display the indication that the game is over. The timing at (d) in the figure is sometimes referred to as the specific timing after the power is turned on.

In this way, in the second embodiment, when the AT is in progress and the display indicating a limit state and the number of coins won in the AT are displayed on the effect display device S40, if a power outage occurs and the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, and then the power is turned on again without clearing the RAM, the effect display device S40 will not display the display indicating a limit state, but will still display the number of coins won in the AT, etc.

By configuring it in this way, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off due to a power outage and the power is turned back on, the display indicating a limit state will be displayed again on the effect display device S40, which can prevent the player from mistakenly believing that the limit state is approaching and ceasing play.

Note that Figure 66 illustrates an example in which a power outage occurs while the reels are spinning, but a configuration similar to that of Figure 66 can also be applied if a power outage occurs while the reels are stopped. The difference in this case from the configuration of Figure 66 is that the push order navigation display is not displayed, but the configuration of the number of coins won and the display suggesting a play limit are the same.

Also, in Figure 66(d) (if a power outage occurs while the reels are stopped as described above, the reels will be stopped after the power is turned on), a display suggesting a game-stop state may be displayed. Furthermore, in this configuration, if an operating member such as the bet button, stop button, start lever, or sub-input button is operated after the power is turned on (this may apply to only some or all of the operating members), the display suggesting a game-stop state may be hidden.

Note that, as shown in (d) of Figure 66, if a power outage occurs during a favorable zone and the power is then turned on without clearing the RAM, the play zone after power is turned on will become a favorable zone.

Also, as shown in (c) of Figure 66, if a power outage occurs and then the power is turned on to transition to setting change mode (for example, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch on), the RAM is cleared when the power is turned on, so the play area after power is turned on becomes the normal area, the AT will not be executed in the next play, and the effect display device S40 will not display the push order navigation display or the number of coins won display (the display suggesting a limit state will also not be displayed).

In addition, even if power is turned on with RAM clearing, the counter value of the difference counter is configured to be initialized after power is turned on. Also, if a power outage occurs while the device is in a stopped state and power is then turned on with RAM clearing, the device is configured to no longer be in a stopped state after power is turned on.

<Display indicating the end of the bonus period>
In addition, when a display indicating a dead-end state is displayed on the effect display device S40 during a bonus (for example, while RB is operating), the following configuration may be used.
(1) During the bonus, the effect display device S40 displays the message "4 more coins until the end" as a display indicating a limit state → The game is played during the bonus, and the maximum difference number based on the timing when the difference number is the smallest since the power was turned on exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example) → The effect display device S40 hides the display indicating a limit state and displays the message "The game will reach a limit state after the bonus ends" as a limit reservation display.
(2) During the bonus, the effect display device S40 displays the message "4 coins remaining until the end" as a display indicating a limit state → The game is played during the bonus, and the maximum difference number based on the timing when the difference number is the smallest since the power was turned on exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example) → The effect display device S40 displays the message "0 coins remaining until the end" as a display indicating a limit state, and displays the message "The end state will occur after the bonus ends" as a display indicating a limit state.
(3) During the bonus, the effect display device S40 displays a display indicating a limit state, saying "Four more coins until the limit state" → The game is played during the bonus, and the maximum difference number based on the timing when the difference number is the smallest since the power was turned on exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example) → The effect display device S40 displays a display indicating a limit state and a display indicating a limit reservation, but since the display priority of the display indicating a limit state is higher than that of the display indicating a limit state, only the display indicating a limit reservation, saying "The limit state will be reached after the bonus ends," is visible.

In this way, if the maximum difference in the number of times the difference in the number of times since the power was turned on exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example) during bonus play, the effect display device S40 is configured to display a stop reservation display. This prevents a situation in which the gaming machine does not transition to a stop state even though the maximum difference in the number of times the difference in the number of times the difference in the number of times since the power was turned on exceeds the predetermined value (19,000 in this example), leading to the mistaken belief that the gaming machine has malfunctioned.

The configuration for the cap-off state indication display is not limited to this. For example, if a predetermined bonus (which may be any bonus or a predetermined type of bonus) is started when the largest difference based on the timing with the smallest difference since power-on exceeds a third value (e.g., 18,800), which is a value close to the predetermined value (19,000 in this example), the effect display device S40 may be configured to display a start-time cap-off indication display stating "The cap-off state will occur after the bonus ends" when the bonus starts (in this case, the display on the effect display device S40 will switch from the cap-off state indication display to the start-time cap-off indication display). Note that when the start-time cap-off indication display is displayed, the speaker S20 may be configured to output a sound stating "The cap-off state will occur after the bonus ends." Alternatively, the start-time cap-off indication may not be displayed and the speaker S20 may be configured to output a sound stating "The cap-off state will occur after the bonus ends" when the bonus starts.

Also, when the maximum difference based on the timing with the smallest difference since power-on exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example), the display indicating the limit state may be configured to display a negative value such as "-3 more coins until limit state" rather than "0 more coins until limit state."

<<Illustration 1 of an empty medal error>>
Next, Figure 67 is an illustration of an empty medal error. First, in Figure (a), the counter value of the difference counter is 4, the AT status is in the AT state, the game is being played, the push order navigation is being executed, and the effect display device S40 displays the push order navigation display (displaying "123" in the figure) and the number of AT coins won, etc. Furthermore, since the counter value of the difference counter is below a predetermined value (e.g., 2000)—in other words, the maximum difference based on the timing with the smallest difference since power-on exceeds a second value (17,000 in this example)—the effect display device S40 displays a message indicating a limit state, saying "4 coins remaining until limit state." Furthermore, the credit number display device D200 displays 47 as the number of credits, and the payout number display device D270 displays 00. Note that the 00 on the payout number display device D270 in Figures 67 and 68 may be hidden.

After (a) in the figure, the player presses the stop button to stop, the symbol combination corresponding to the push order bell, which is an 11-coin role, stops and is displayed, and the display of the number of AT coins won, etc. is updated on the effect display device S40 (for example, the display of the number of AT coins won is displayed as "GET 1536"), and the display indicating a limit state is updated to "0 coins left until limit state". In addition, the display of the effect display device S40 displays "GET 11!!". In addition, the display of the credit number display device D200 becomes 50, and the payout number display device D270 shows 11.

In addition, if the maximum difference based on the timing when the difference was smallest since the power was turned on exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example), the display indicating a limit state, "0 coins remaining until limit state" will not be displayed (it will be hidden when the payout process is executed), or it may be configured to be displayed and then immediately hidden.

After (b) in the figure, the largest difference, based on the timing when the difference was smallest since the power was turned on, exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example), causing the machine to enter a stop state. At (c) in the figure, the difference counter value is 0, and the effect display device S40 displays a stop state display indicating that the machine is in a stop state, saying "Play is stopped. Please call an attendant." After the stop state display is displayed on the effect display device S40, automatic settlement is performed, and the display on the credit number display device D200 is decremented. However, because the gaming medals in the gaming machine (the gaming medals stored in the hopper) have run out, the display on the credit number display device D200 remains at 14. Furthermore, the payout number display device D270 displays Ed, indicating the stop state.

In addition, in Figure 67(c), the payout number display device D270 may be configured to display 00.

In this way, in the second embodiment, when a limit state is reached (when the largest difference based on the timing when the difference was smallest since the power was turned on exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example)), the effect display device S40 displays a limit state message and then executes automatic settlement. Note that the timing at which automatic settlement begins may be approximately the same as the timing at which the limit state message is displayed on the effect display device S40.

Furthermore, when the display indicating that play is stopped is displayed on the effect display device S40 (or at approximately the same time), the speaker S20 may be configured to output a predetermined sound regarding the stopped state (for example, a sound saying "Please end play and call an attendant"); the output of this sound may be configured to end after a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds), or may be configured to be output continuously while play is stopped.

Furthermore, the timing at which the acquisition display such as "GET 11!!" described above starts may be any of the following. Note that the following timings do not mean exactly the same timing, but may be approximately the same timing. For example, by sending a command from the main control board M to the sub-control board S, even if there is a short time difference between the following timings and the acquisition display start timing, they can be made to be approximately the same timing.
(1) The timing when the stop button corresponding to the final stop operation is released (the stop button is released). (2) The timing when the payout process starts. (3) The timing when the payout process ends. Note that when the configuration of (3) above is applied, the winning display for a game in which the maximum difference number based on the timing when the difference number is the smallest since the power was turned on exceeds a predetermined value may be configured not to be displayed (to transition to a stop state).

After (c) in the figure, the subtraction on the display of the credit number display device D200 stops, and after a predetermined time has elapsed at (d) in the figure, an empty medal error occurs (an empty medal error occurs), and the effect display device S40 and payout number display device D270 display a message corresponding to the empty medal error. Specifically, the effect display device S40 displays "Empty medal error, please call an attendant," and the payout number display device D270 displays "HE." Additionally, the credit number display device D200 displays 14.

The state in which an empty medal error occurs, as shown in (d) in the figure, is sometimes referred to as the empty medal error state. Furthermore, the display corresponding to an empty medal error is sometimes referred to as empty medal error information.

Also, as shown in the figure, if a display corresponding to an empty medal error is displayed on the effect display device S40, the display indicating the game has stopped will no longer be visible.

By configuring it this way, even if an empty medal error occurs during automatic settlement when the game transitions to a stopped state (sometimes referred to as automatic settlement related to the stopped state), the display corresponding to the empty medal error will be displayed in priority over the display indicating the stopped state. This prevents a situation in which a player ends play while still having game medals stored as credits, and allows the amusement facility manager to immediately recognize that there is an error.

The stop status flag may be configured to turn on at the timing of (c) in Figure 67, or the stop status flag may be configured to turn on after the medal empty error is cleared and automatic settlement is completed after (d) in the figure.

In addition, as shown in Figure 67, when the performance display device S40 displays a display indicating a stalled state, the following configuration may be applied when the performance display device S40 displays a display corresponding to an empty medal error.
(1) When a display corresponding to an empty medal error is displayed on the performance display device S40, the display indicating the game is stopped will be hidden on the performance display device S40.
(2) When a display corresponding to an empty medal error is displayed on the performance display device S40, the display indicating a state in which play is stopped is displayed on the performance display device S40. However, since the display corresponding to an empty medal error has a higher display priority than the display indicating a state in which play is stopped, the display indicating a state in which play is stopped becomes invisible, and only the display indicating an empty medal error becomes visible (the display area of the display corresponding to the empty medal error is larger than the display area of the display indicating a state in which play is stopped).
(3) When a display corresponding to an empty medal error is displayed on the performance display device S40, a display indicating that the game is in a stalled state is also displayed on the performance display device S40. However, since the display corresponding to the empty medal error has a higher display priority than the display indicating that the game is in a stalled state, all of the displays corresponding to the empty medal error are visible, but with regard to the display indicating that the game is in a stalled state, only a portion of the displays whose display area does not overlap with the display corresponding to the empty medal error are visible.
(4) Even when a display corresponding to an empty medal error is displayed on the performance display device S40, the display areas of the display during the game-stop state and the display corresponding to the empty medal error on the performance display device S40 do not overlap, so both the display during the game-stop state and the display corresponding to the empty medal error can be seen.
In addition, in the above configuration, the display indicating that the game is in a stalled state can be replaced with a display suggesting that the game is in a stalled state, and the display indicating that the game is in a stalled state can be replaced with a display of the number of coins won in the AT, etc.

<<Illustration 2 of the medal empty error>>
Next, FIG. 68 is an illustration 2 of an empty medal error. This figure details a configuration for a dead-game state applicable to the second embodiment as a modification of the second embodiment. The configuration shown in FIG. 68 is configured so that when a dead-game state is reached (when the maximum difference between the smallest difference since power-on exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example)), automatic settlement is performed, and when automatic settlement is completed, a display indicating that a dead-game state is in progress is displayed on the performance display device S40. Note that even in the configuration of FIG. 68 , a predetermined sound indicating that a dead-game state is in progress (e.g., a sound such as "Please stop playing and call an attendant") may be output from the speaker S20 at the timing (or approximately the same timing) when the display indicating that a dead-game state is in progress is displayed on the performance display device S40.

First, in (a) of the figure, the counter value of the difference counter is 4, the AT status is in AT mode, the game is being played, the push order navigation is being executed, and the effect display device S40 displays the push order navigation display (displaying "123" in the figure) and the number of coins won in the AT, etc. Furthermore, the counter value of the difference counter is less than a predetermined value (e.g., 2000). In other words, the maximum difference based on the timing with the smallest difference since power-on exceeds a second value (17000 in this example), so the effect display device S40 displays a stop state indication saying "4 coins left until the stop state." Furthermore, the credit number display device D200 displays 47 as the number of credits, and the payout number display device D270 displays 00.

After (a) in the figure, the player presses the stop button to stop, the symbol combination corresponding to the push order bell, which is an 11-coin role, stops and is displayed, and the display of the number of AT coins won, etc. is updated on the effect display device S40 (for example, the display of the number of AT coins won is displayed as "GET 1536"), and the display indicating a limit state is updated to "0 coins left until limit state". In addition, the display device S40 displays "GET 11!!" as an acquisition display. In addition, the display on the credit number display device D200 becomes 50, and the payout number display device D270 shows 11.

After (b) in the figure, the largest difference based on the timing when the difference was smallest since the power was turned on exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example), so the machine enters a stop state and automatic settlement is performed. When automatic settlement is complete (when all game medals stored as credits have been settled), as shown in (c) in the figure, the counter value of the difference counter becomes 0, and the effect display device S40 displays "Stopped state, gameplay will be stopped, please call an attendant" as a stop state indication indicating that the machine is in a stop state. In addition, the display on the credit number display device D200 becomes 00, and the payout number display device D270 displays Ed as a display corresponding to the stop state.

In addition, as shown in (c) in the figure, when automatic settlement has ended and the number of credits is 0, Ed may be displayed on the credit number display device D200 as a display corresponding to the stopped state. When configured in this way, the payout number display device D270 may be configured to display Ed as a display corresponding to the stopped state, or may not be configured to display it.

On the other hand, after (b) in the figure, the maximum difference based on the timing when the difference was smallest since the power was turned on exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example), so the machine transitions to a stop state, automatic settlement is performed, and the display on the credit number display device D200 is decremented. However, as shown in (d) in the figure, when the gaming medals in the gaming machine (the gaming medals stored in the hopper) run out, the display on the credit number display device D200 stops at 14. In addition, the performance display device S40 displays a stop state suggestion, the number of AT winnings, etc. In addition, the payout number display device D270 displays 00.

After (d) in the figure, the display on the credit count display device D200 stops decrementing, and after a predetermined time has passed at (e) in the figure, an empty medal error occurs (an empty medal error occurs), and the effect display device S40 and payout number display device D270 display a message corresponding to the empty medal error. Specifically, the effect display device S40 displays "Empty medal error, please call an attendant," and the payout number display device D270 displays "HE." Additionally, the credit count display device D200 displays 14.

Also, as shown in the figure, when a display corresponding to an empty medal error is displayed on the effect display device S40, the display suggesting a play-stop state and the number of AT medals won display, etc., become invisible.

Then, the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, the power-off process is executed, and then the power is turned on without clearing the RAM. If the empty medal error is resolved, the automatic settlement that was stopped halfway will resume as shown in (f) in the figure, and after the display on the credit number display device D200 becomes 0, the effect display device S40 will display "Play is stopped. Play will be stopped. Please call an attendant" as a display indicating that play is stopped. The display on the credit number display device D200 will also become 00, and the payout number display device D270 will display Ed as a display corresponding to the play being stopped.

In addition, as shown in (f) in the figure, when automatic settlement has ended and the number of credits is 0, Ed may be displayed on the credit number display device D200 as a display corresponding to the stopped state. When configured in this way, the payout number display device D270 may be configured to display Ed as a display corresponding to the stopped state, or may not be configured to display it.

In the figure (f), the counter value of the difference counter is initialized to 19,000.

In this way, in Figure 68, if an empty medal error occurs during automatic settlement when transitioning to a stop-play state, the effect display device S40 is configured not to display the stop-play state display while the empty medal error is occurring.

By configuring it in this way, when the automatic settlement related to the stopped state has not been completed, no notification that the state has been stopped, such as displaying a message indicating that the state has been stopped, is made, thereby preventing players from quitting play while game medals remain stored as credits, and allowing the manager of the amusement facility to immediately recognize that there is an error.

In addition, in Figure 68, an empty medal error occurs during automatic settlement when the game transitions to a stopped state, and before the empty medal error is cleared, the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, power-off processing is executed, and then the power is turned on without clearing the RAM. If the empty medal error is cleared, the automatic settlement that was stopped halfway through is resumed, the display on the credit number display device D200 becomes 0, and the counter value of the difference counter is set to the initial value (19,000 in this example), but the effect display device S40 is configured to display a message indicating that the game is in a stopped state.

By configuring it in this way, even if an error occurs during automatic settlement related to the limit and a power outage occurs, the error will be cleared after power is restored, and once automatic settlement is complete, a limit state message will be displayed on the effect display device S40, thereby reducing the risk of gambling compared to conventional gaming machines.

In the configuration shown in Figure 68, the system transitions to the stop state when the largest difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number since power-on exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example). In other words, the system transitions to the stop state (or the stop flag is turned on) before automatic settlement related to the stop state is executed. However, this is not limited to this, and the system may also be configured to transition to the stop state (or the stop flag is turned on) after automatic settlement related to the stop state is executed.

<<Applicable Configurations Regarding Deadlock State>>
Here, in a slot machine that uses gaming medals, one or more of the following configurations may be applied as a configuration related to the stop state.
(1) When the game reaches a halt, the game medals stored as credits and the game medals bet are automatically settled without the need to operate the settlement button.
(2) When the game reaches a halt, the game medals stored as credits or the game medals bet will not be automatically settled unless the settlement button is operated.
(3) When the game reaches a dead end, the player can operate the settlement button to settle the game medals stored as credits and the game medals bet.
(4) When the game reaches a stop state, the insertion of new gaming medals, the operation of the bet button, and the operation of the start lever are invalid.
(5) When the game reaches a stop state, the effect display device S40 displays the message "Operate the sub-input button to display the menu screen." By operating the sub-input button SB, the menu screen is displayed, and by performing a predetermined operation (for example, a predetermined operation of the sub-input button SB) while the menu screen is displayed, a two-dimensional code is displayed to provide information to the player, which is used to communicate with the player's mobile information terminal (such as a smartphone) via communication with an Internet server.
(6) Even if a predetermined time has passed since the game was stopped (even if the predetermined time has passed since the game was not played), the standby demo is not displayed on the performance display device S40 (the game does not transition to the standby demo).
(7) When a predetermined time has elapsed since the game was stopped (when the time during which no game has been played reaches a predetermined time), a standby demo is displayed on the performance display device S40 (this is sometimes referred to as transitioning to a standby demo).
(8) During the pause state, it is possible to transition to the setting confirmation mode (for example, by turning on the setting key switch).
(9) In the stopped state, it is not possible to switch to the setting change mode.
(10) When the state shifts to the stop state, a predetermined external signal is output (an ON signal is output) for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds).
(11) When the state shifts to the stop state, a predetermined external signal is always output (an ON signal is output) during the stop state.

When the above (2) is applied, it is preferable to configure the system to notify the player to settle the number of credits, etc., by, for example, issuing a voice message from the speaker S20 saying "Please press the settlement button" or displaying "Please press the settlement button!" on the performance display device S40. Furthermore, the system may be configured to terminate the notification when the number of credits, etc., reaches 0 and settlement is complete.

In addition, in medal-less slot machines, when play is stopped, the counting button, which is operated to transfer the points (sometimes called game medals or game value) on the total score display device to the rental machine (sometimes called the rental unit), may be enabled. By configuring it in this way, the points on the total score display device can be returned to the player even when play is stopped. In such a configuration, it is preferable to configure the machine to issue a notification urging the player to continue counting, for example, by issuing a voice message from the speaker S20 saying "Please operate the counting button" or by displaying "Please operate the counting button!" on the performance display device S40. In addition, the notification may be terminated when the points on the total score display device reach 0.

Furthermore, in medal-less slot machines, the operation of the loan button, which is operated to transfer points from the loan machine to the total point display device when play is stopped, may be enabled. This configuration prevents players from mistakenly believing that the loan machine has malfunctioned.

Furthermore, in medal-less slot machines, the operation of the lending button, which is operated to transfer points from the lending machine to the total point display device, may be disabled when play is stopped. This configuration can prevent points from being transferred to the gaming machine even when play is stopped.

In addition, the system may be configured to continue monitoring some errors in the stopped state. As an example, the system may be configured to monitor one or more errors including a door open error, but not monitor one or more errors including an empty medal error, in the stopped state. In other words, in the stopped state, the system will not enter an empty medal error state (no notification corresponding to an empty medal error (for example, displaying a display corresponding to an empty medal error on the performance display device S40) will be executed), but if the front door is opened, the system will enter a door open error state and a notification corresponding to the door open error will be executed.

Examples of errors to monitor when the machine is in a stalled state include the aforementioned errors, such as door opening errors, abnormal payout errors, medal retention errors, and abnormal insertion errors.

<<Applicable configurations related to display during stalled state>>
Furthermore, one or more of the following configurations may be applied as a configuration for displaying during a stalled state.
(1) When a game is played in which the maximum difference number based on the timing when the difference number is smallest since the power was turned on exceeds a predetermined value (in this example, 19,000), a display indicating that the game is in a stopped state is displayed on the performance display device S40 at the timing when the stop button corresponding to the final stop operation of the game is finished being pressed (released).
(2) When a game is played in which the maximum difference number based on the timing when the difference number is smallest since the power was turned on exceeds a predetermined value (in this example, 19,000), a display indicating that the game is in a stopped state is displayed on the performance display device S40 at the timing when the stop button corresponding to the final stop operation of the game is pressed.
(3) When a game is played in which the maximum difference number based on the timing when the difference number is smallest since the power was turned on exceeds a predetermined value (in this example, 19,000), a final stop operation for the game is performed, and then automatic settlement is executed.When the automatic settlement is completed, a display indicating that the game is in a stopped state is displayed on the performance display device S40.
(4) During the setting confirmation mode, the performance display device S40 displays a message indicating that the game is in a stopped state.
(5) During the setting confirmation mode, the display device S40 does not display the indication that the game is in a stopped state.
(6) While the menu screen is displayed, the performance display device S40 displays a message indicating that the game is in a stopped state.
(7) While the menu screen is displayed, the display device S40 does not display the indication that the game is in a stopped state.
(8) The display during the stop state has a higher display priority than the effect images displayed during play.
(9) The display of the stalled state has a lower display priority than the display corresponding to a predetermined error.

<<Time required to reach a stoppage state>>
A gaming machine having a dead end state may be designed so that the following equation holds true:
(Predetermined value, which is the maximum difference based on the timing when the difference after power-on is the smallest, which will cause the game to transition to a stop state, / Expected increase per game in the most advantageous state for the player) × Minimum gaming time (s) / 3600 < Opening hours of an amusement facility as defined by the Entertainment and Amusement Act (h)

Note that the 3600 in the above formula is a constant used to convert seconds to hours, with 1 hour = 60 minutes x 60 seconds = 3600 seconds. The Entertainment and Amusement Business Act is also sometimes referred to as the Act on the Regulation and Proper Conduct of Entertainment and Amusement Businesses, etc.

The "expected increase" is the average number of medals paid out per game in a certain state minus the (average) number of bets in that state. For example, if a miss is determined at 1/2, a 10-coin common bell is also determined at 1/2, and you are playing with 3 medals bet, the "expected increase" is 0 x 1/2 + 10 x 1/2 - 3 = 2.

In addition, in games where a winning conditional device where the payout number differs depending on the operation mode of the stop buttons, such as the push order bell, is selected, if the game state is one in which push order navigation is performed, the "expected increase" will be calculated if the stop operation is performed according to the push order navigation.If the game state is one in which push order navigation is not performed, the "expected increase" will be calculated if the stop operation is performed randomly or at any predetermined stop timing.

Furthermore, the "most advantageous state for the player" corresponds to the most advantageous bonus among bonuses, the most advantageous AT (push order navigation) among states in which the AT is executed, etc. Furthermore, in gaming machines capable of executing bonuses and ATs (sometimes referred to as A+AT machines), any of the following may be considered the "most advantageous state for the player."
(1) The most advantageous bonus for the player among all bonuses. (2) The state in which the most advantageous AT for the player can be executed among all states in which ATs can be executed. (3) The most advantageous state for the player among all states in which all bonuses and all ATs can be executed. (4) The state including bonuses from the time when the most advantageous AT for the player can be executed among all states in which ATs can be executed becomes possible until the end of that state.

Furthermore, the Entertainment and Amusement Business Act stipulates that amusement establishments may operate for 18 hours. Furthermore, Article 13 of the Entertainment and Amusement Business Act states, "Entertainment and Amusement Business Operators must not operate their business late at night (meaning the hours from midnight to 6:00 AM; the same applies below)."

The above formula can also be expressed as follows:
(Predetermined value that is the maximum difference based on the timing when the difference after power-on is the smallest, which will cause the game to transition to a stop state / Expected increase per game in the most advantageous state for the player) × Minimum gaming time (s) < Opening hours of an amusement facility as stipulated by the Entertainment and Amusement Act (h) × 3600

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the minimum play time, which is the shortest time from the start of reel rotation in one game to the start of reel rotation in the next game, is 4.1 seconds, the maximum number of coins paid out per game is 11, and the maximum difference (predetermined value) based on the timing with the smallest difference since power-on, which will cause the game to transition to a stop state, is 19,000, and the expected increase per game in the most advantageous state for the player is 3. Therefore, when the numerical values of the second embodiment are applied to the above formula,
(19000/3)×4.1÷3600<18(h)
7.21<18(h)
This means that the above formula is established.

In the above equation, "predetermined value, which is the maximum difference based on the timing when the difference since power-on will result in the transition to the limit state, / expected increase per game in the most advantageous state for the player" is the designed value for the shortest number of games required from power-on until the limit state is reached, and the left-hand side of the above equation, "(predetermined value, which is the maximum difference based on the timing when the difference since power-on will result in the transition to the limit state, / expected increase per game in the most advantageous state for the player) x minimum play time (s) / 3600", is the designed value for the shortest time (h) required from power-on until the limit state is reached.

For this reason, if the above formula is true, it is possible for the largest difference in the number of jackpots based on the timing with the smallest difference since the power was turned on during the hours an amusement facility is allowed to operate as stipulated by the Entertainment and Amusement Act to exceed a predetermined value (19,000 in this example). In other words, it is possible for the largest difference in the number of jackpots based on the timing with the smallest difference since the power was turned on during a day's business hours to exceed a predetermined value (19,000 in this example) and reach a stoppage.

By configuring the machine so that the above formula holds true, as in the second embodiment, the most advantageous state for players is reached immediately after the opening of the gaming facility, and even if this most advantageous state continues, the machine can be closed for the day, thereby reducing the gambling nature of the gaming machine.

As mentioned above, the Entertainment and Amusement Act stipulates that amusement parlors may operate for 18 hours, but the shortest operating hours stipulated by each prefecture are 13 hours. Therefore, it is more preferable to replace 18 (h) on the right-hand side of the above equation with 13 (h) so that the above equation holds.

Furthermore, in the case of a gaming machine where the "expected increase per game in the most advantageous state for the player" is low (for example, 1 coin), the above formula will not hold true. In such cases, the gaming machine can be made to have reduced gambling potential without transitioning to a limiting state.

<<Configuration of a reel-type gaming machine that does not have an effect display device S40>>
The configuration relating to the stop state described in the second embodiment can also be applied to a slot machine that does not have a performance display device S40 (sometimes referred to as a liquid crystal display) (or a slot machine that only has a performance display device S40 with a small display area). Note that a slot machine that does not have a performance display device S40 is sometimes referred to as a non-liquid crystal display machine.

The configuration for non-LCD machines will be described in detail below, but a similar configuration can also be applied to slot machines that only have a small display area, such as the effect display device S40, and can also be applied to slot machines that have the effect display device S40 described in the second embodiment.

The configuration described below uses the same difference counter configuration as in the second embodiment. That is, the difference counter is a decrement counter with an upper limit of 19,000 and a lower limit of 0. All of the above-mentioned configurations can be applied to the difference counter. In the following, "when the counter value of the difference counter falls below 500" can be replaced with "when the remaining difference until the largest difference based on the timing with the smallest difference since power-on exceeds a predetermined value falls below 500." The same replacement can be applied to other counter values.

In non-LCD machines, when the pre-limit notification state is reached, the speaker S20 may be configured to output a sound such as "Play will soon be limited to a certain amount of time." However, if configured in this way, constantly outputting sound from the speaker S20 after the pre-limit notification state is reached may discourage the player from playing.

<Configuration 1 for issuing audio notification regarding a stalled state multiple times>
Therefore, in a non-liquid crystal device, the following configuration may be used.
(1) When the counter value of the difference counter becomes 500 or less, a voice message saying "500 coins remaining, so the game will stop" is output from the speaker S20.
(2) When the counter value of the difference counter becomes 250 or less, a voice message saying "250 coins remaining, so the game will stop" is output from the speaker S20.
(3) When the counter value of the difference counter becomes 100 or less, a voice message saying "100 coins remaining, so the counting will stop" is output from the speaker S20.
(4) When the counter value of the difference counter becomes 50 or less, a voice message saying "50 coins remaining, so the game will stop" is output from the speaker S20.
(5) When the counter value of the difference counter becomes 15 or less, a voice message saying "15 cards remaining, so the game will stop" is output from the speaker S20.

In this way, the intervals (intervals between differences) at which the speaker S20 makes the announcements may be configured to become shorter as the limit approaches, such as "500 → 250 → 100 → 50 → 15." This configuration can prevent the game arcade from transitioning to the limit state without realizing that the limit is approaching, which could cause trouble. The maximum difference, based on the timing with the smallest difference since power-on when the limit advance announcement state is reached, may be 17,000, the same as in the second embodiment, or it may be changed to any value, such as 18,500.

The difference between the maximum difference based on the timing when the difference in the number of times since power-on is the smallest, which will result in the pre-limit notification state, and the maximum difference based on the timing when the difference in the number of times since power-on is the smallest, which will result in the limit state, may be configured to be greater than the maximum number of coins paid out for a single minor winning combination (winning combination). By configuring it in this way, the next game after the pre-limit notification state will not result in the limit state, and the player can be properly informed that the limit state is approaching, preventing any problems from occurring between the player and the amusement facility manager.

<Configuration 2 for issuing audio notification regarding a stalled state multiple times>
Furthermore, with regard to the threshold value of the difference counter shown in (1) to (5) above, when the counter value of the difference counter becomes equal to or less than the threshold value for the first time, the speaker S20 may be configured to output a sound indicating that the game is over, and when the counter value of the difference counter becomes equal to or less than the threshold value for the second or subsequent time, the speaker S20 may not output a sound indicating that the game is over (similar to the configuration described above in FIG. 60). As described above, the system is configured to subtract "payout amount - bet amount" from the counter value of the difference counter after the game is over.

As a specific example, the following configuration may be adopted.
(1) When the counter value of the difference counter is 255, a game with three bets is executed, a common bell, which is a ten-coin role, is won, and a symbol combination corresponding to the common bell is stopped and displayed.
(2) The counter value of the difference counter reaches 248, and the counter value falls below 250, so a voice message saying "250 coins remaining, so the game will stop" is output from the speaker S20.
(3) A game with three bets is executed, and the result of the internal lottery for that game is a loss, so no game medals are paid out and the counter value of the difference counter becomes 251.
(4) A game with three bets is played, a common bell, which is a ten-coin role, is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the common bell is displayed in a stopped state, and the counter value of the difference counter becomes 244. However, since this is the second time that the counter value has become 250 or less, the speaker S20 does not output a voice message saying, "The game will end with 250 coins remaining."

<Configuration 3 for issuing audio notification regarding a stalled state multiple times>
In addition, even if the counter value of the difference counter falls below the threshold value from the second time onwards, the speaker S20 may be configured to output a sound related to the end of the game.As an example, when the player settles the game medals, or when a predetermined time has passed since the sound related to the end of the game was output from the speaker S20, and the counter value of the difference counter falls below the threshold value from the second time onwards, the speaker S20 may be configured to output a sound related to the end of the game (sometimes referred to as a sound related to the threshold).

(Configuration 1)
As a specific example, the following operation may be performed.
(1) When the counter value of the difference counter is 255, a game with three bets is executed, a common bell, which is a ten-coin role, is won, and the symbol combination corresponding to the common bell is stopped and displayed. (2) The counter value of the difference counter becomes 248, and the counter value becomes 250 or less, so a voice message saying "250 coins remaining, game will stop" is output from the speaker S20.
(3) A game with three bets is executed, and the result of the internal lottery for that game is a loss, so no game medals are paid out and the counter value of the difference counter becomes 251.
(4) The player's gaming medals are settled.
(5) After that, the next player starts playing, and a game with a bet of 3 coins is played. The player wins the common bell, which is a 10-coin combination. The symbol combination corresponding to the common bell is displayed in a stopped state, and the counter value of the difference counter becomes 244. Since the counter value becomes 250 or less, a voice message is output from the speaker S20 saying, "The game will end with 250 coins remaining."

(Configuration 2)
As another example, the following configuration may be adopted.
(1) When the counter value of the difference counter is 255, a game with three bets is executed, a common bell, which is a ten-coin role, is won, and the symbol combination corresponding to the common bell is stopped and displayed. (2) The counter value of the difference counter becomes 248, and the counter value becomes 250 or less, so a voice message saying "250 coins remaining, game will stop" is output from the speaker S20.
(3) A game with three bets is executed, and the result of the internal lottery for that game is a loss, so no game medals are paid out and the counter value of the difference counter becomes 251.
(4) A predetermined time has elapsed since the timing of (3).
(5) After that, the next player starts playing, and a game with a bet of 3 coins is played. The player wins the common bell, which is a 10-coin combination. The symbol combination corresponding to the common bell is displayed in a stopped state, and the counter value of the difference counter becomes 244. Since the counter value becomes 250 or less, a voice message is output from the speaker S20 saying, "The game will end with 250 coins remaining."

By configuring it in this way, even if a player changes, the new player who starts playing can be sure to recognize that the limit is approaching, preventing problems at the gaming facility from occurring when a player transitions to the limit without realizing that the limit is approaching.

Note that it is possible to apply either configuration 1 or configuration 2 above, or both.

<Configuration 4 for issuing audio notification regarding the stalled state multiple times>
In addition, even if the counter value of the difference counter falls below the threshold value from the second time onwards, a configuration that can output a sound regarding the game's end state from the speaker S20 is such that when the player settles the game medals, or when the first game is played after a predetermined time has passed since the sound regarding the game's end state was output from the speaker S20 (this can also be when the game has ended, or when the final stop operation has been completed), the speaker S20 outputs a sound regarding the game's end state that corresponds to the threshold value that is closest to the counter value of the difference counter, among the threshold values for which the counter value of the difference counter is below the threshold value (among the threshold values which the counter value of the difference counter has already fallen below).

As a specific example, the following configuration may be adopted.
(1) When the counter value of the difference counter is 255, a game with three bets is executed, a common bell, which is a ten-coin role, is won, and a symbol combination corresponding to the common bell is stopped and displayed.
(2) The counter value of the difference counter reaches 248, and the counter value falls below 250, so the speaker S20 outputs a voice message saying, "250 coins remaining, so the game will stop."
(3-1) In a situation where a predetermined time or more has passed since (2), when the next player plays a game with a bet of 3 coins as his first game and wins the common bell, which is a 10-coin role, after the game is over, the counter value of the difference counter will be 241. Since the threshold values that the counter value of the difference counter falls below are 250 and 500, the speaker S20 will output a voice message indicating the end of the game corresponding to 250, which is the threshold value closest to the current counter value of the difference counter, saying, "The game will end with 250 coins remaining."
(3-2) If a predetermined time or more has passed since (2), and the next player plays a three-coin bet game as his first game, and the result of the internal lottery is a loss, after the game is over, the counter value of the difference counter will be 251, and the only threshold below which the counter value of the difference counter is 500 will be 251. Therefore, the speaker S20 will output a voice message indicating the end of the game corresponding to 500, which is the threshold closest to the current counter value of the difference counter, saying, "The game will end with 500 coins remaining."

In the above (3-1) and (3-2), the timing for outputting the sound regarding the end of the game state is when the player settles their game medals, or when the execution of the first game ends after a predetermined time has passed since the sound regarding the end of the game was output from the speaker S20. However, this is not limited to this, and the sound regarding the end of the game may be configured to be output when the start lever for the first game is operated, or when the reels for the first game start to spin.

By configuring it in this way, even if a player changes, the new player who starts playing can be sure to recognize that the limit is approaching, preventing problems at the gaming facility from occurring when a player transitions to the limit without realizing that the limit is approaching.

<<Configuration regarding stop state in non-LCD devices>>
In non-LCD machines, the following configurations may be applied as configurations related to the stop state. Note that the configurations detailed below can be applied alone or in combination. The configurations detailed below can also be applied to slot machines that only have a performance display device S40 with a small display area.

<When the difference counter value becomes 0 during a bonus>
During the execution of a bonus (for example, Type 1 BB, Type 2 BB, RB, etc.), if the maximum difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number since power-on exceeds a predetermined value (in this example, 19,000) (when the counter value of the difference number counter becomes 0), after the execution of the game that exceeded the maximum number has ended (the final stop operation has been completed), a sound will be output from the speaker S20 saying, "The game will be stopped after the bonus ends" (this sound may be referred to as a standby notification).

After a standby notification is issued once during the execution of a bonus, the system is generally configured not to issue another standby notification until the bonus ends. However, if the player settles their game medals, if a situation in which no new games are being executed (or a situation in which no game progresses) continues for a predetermined period of time, or if the power is turned back on after a power outage, the system may be configured to issue another standby notification after the first game has finished being executed.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to avoid annoying players by repeatedly issuing standby notifications while a bonus is being played, and even if players change, new players can be aware that play will come to a halt once the bonus has ended.

The conditions for re-executing the standby notification during the bonus mentioned above - when the player settles their game medals, when a situation in which no new games are being played (which may also be a situation in which no game progresses) continues for a predetermined period of time, or when the power is turned back on after a power outage - may be applied in one or more of the following cases.

<Volume configuration for non-LCD devices>
In a non-LCD machine, when the machine transitions to the stop state, a voice message (sometimes called a stop notification) saying "Play will be stopped. Please call an attendant" may be output from the speaker S20. In such a configuration, the following voices (or sounds) may be configured to have the following magnitude relationships:
A: The volume of sounds (sometimes called background music, sound effects, etc.) other than the standby notification when the standby notification is being output in a predetermined game state. B: The volume of sounds other than the standby notification when the standby notification is not being output in a predetermined game state. C: The volume of the standby notification when the standby notification is being output in a predetermined game state.
Formula 1: A<C
Formula 2: B<C
Formula 3: A<B
The configuration may be such that one or more of the above formulas 1 to 3 are established. Note that the above A to C illustrate cases in which the same effect is being executed (other than the standby notification).

By configuring it in this way, even if a specified effect other than the waiting notification is being executed while the waiting notification is being executed, the volume of the waiting notification is relatively loud, making the waiting notification easier to hear.For example, even if the effect of the game before the waiting notification is executed is executed across the game in which the waiting notification is executed, the waiting notification will be easier to hear.Furthermore, by making the volume of the effect sound for the game in which the waiting notification is executed different from the volume of the effect sound for the game in which the waiting notification is executed, even if the effect of the game before the waiting notification is executed is executed across the game in which the waiting notification is executed, the player will feel uncomfortable because the volume of the effect sound has been reduced, and will be able to notice that the waiting notification is being executed.

Furthermore, when audio related to a standby notification or threshold is being output, the volume of sounds other than audio related to the standby notification or threshold may be reduced. Even in this configuration, the volume of one or more sounds related to the standby demo or specific errors may not be reduced even when audio related to a standby notification or threshold is being output. Furthermore, the volume of sounds related to some errors may be reduced, but the volume of sounds related to other errors may not be reduced.

All of the configurations in this specification can also be applied to medal-less slot machines (sometimes referred to as medal-less gaming machines, gaming machines, managed gaming machines, or enclosed gaming machines), which generally do not use gaming medals (including physical medals or metal pieces for detection by sensors) but instead use points.

Medalless slot machines generally differ from slot machines that use tokens in that they do not have components related to tokens, such as a token slot D170, token tray D230, token selector DS, hopper H40, token payout device H, or token auxiliary tank HS, and are capable of communicating with a lending machine. In this case, since there is no need to insert or payout physical tokens, the machine can be configured to improve security against fraudulent activities (so-called cheating), such as by improving prevention of unauthorized access to the machine (for example, by eliminating token insertion and payout openings and integrating the front door and rear box, thereby sealing off gaps through which foreign objects could be inserted), and by reducing the risk of using fraudulent tokens. Furthermore, instead of having the credit and credit number display device D200, the payout control board H (sometimes referred to as a game value control board, game value control means, medal number control board, or medal number control means) may perform the total point increase/decrease process, and the total point display device (sometimes referred to as a medal number display device) may perform the display process.

The counting process is performed by operating the counting button on the medal-less reel gaming machine. When the counting process is performed, the total points on the medal-less reel gaming machine are transferred to the lending machine. Furthermore, the lending process is performed by operating the lending button on the medal-less reel gaming machine. When the lending process is performed, the points are transferred from the lending machine to the total points on the medal-less reel gaming machine (to the total point display device).

In addition, medal-less reel gaming machines can be configured to have "scores" as pseudo-game media used to play games on the machine, which correspond to the physical game medals used in general reel gaming machines P. "Scores" are also sometimes referred to as "score information," "points," "points information," "game value," "game value information," or "game medals." Physically real game medals can be handled directly by players. In contrast, medal-less reel gaming machines allow players to play games without directly handling physical game medals. Points are not physical game medals, but pseudo-game media that have been digitized so that they can be processed by a CPU on a main control board or the like. "Total points" refers to all points that can be inserted into a medal-less reel gaming machine, and may be data managed by the main control board or payout control board. "Total points" corresponds to the number of gaming medals placed in the medal tray of a typical slot machine P that uses physical gaming medals. When applying the configuration of the slot machine P described above to this embodiment, what is referred to as "gaming medals" in this specification can be treated as "scores," "score information," "possessive points," "possessive point information," "gaming value," "gaming value information," etc., and there is no problem in referring to them as "scores," "score information," "possessive points," "possessive point information," "gaming value," or "gaming value information" as appropriate. It is also acceptable to use a credit number display device instead of "credits" as the total points display device.

<<<<Effects applicable to slot machine gaming machines in this specification>>>
Next, examples of effects that can be applied to the slot machine of this specification will be described. Note that the examples of effects described below can be appropriately combined with the configurations of the first and second embodiments.

<<Terminology>>
First, the meaning of each term will be explained in detail below, but the configurations related to the terms can be applied to other embodiments and can be combined with other configurations.

<Normal section>
The normal section is a gaming section in which AT-related processing is not executed, and is not a favorable section.

<Advantageous Zone>
The advantageous zone is a play zone in which AT-related processing can be executed, and includes an advantageous zone (AT) and an advantageous zone (normal). The advantageous zone (AT) is an advantageous zone, and is a play zone during the AT state (sometimes referred to as the AT in-state) described in the previous embodiment. The advantageous zone (normal) is an advantageous zone, and is a play zone during the non-AT state described in the previous embodiment.

<Production Stage>
The presentation stage, also referred to as the stay stage or presentation mode, is a presentation mode shown on the presentation display device S40 using a background image. The presentation stage is displayed over multiple games, but may end in one game. In the presentation examples described below, each game section has at least one presentation stage. The presentation stage is controlled by the sub-control board S, and can be changed to a different presentation stage using stage change presentation.

<<Examples of production>>
Next, examples of effects will be explained. Below, examples 1 to 5 of effects will be illustrated, but each of the effects can be combined as appropriate, and can also be combined as appropriate with the effects described in the previous embodiment.

In the following presentation examples 1 to 5, the terms advantageous zone (AT), advantageous zone (normal), and normal zone will be used for explanation, but it should be noted that they can also be interpreted as follows. The advantageous zone (AT) can be interpreted as the first state. The first state corresponds to the AT state, added-on specialization state, specialized precursor state, and BB state (a so-called pseudo-bonus that is actually an AT state but is presented to appear as a big bonus) described in the previous embodiment. The advantageous zone (normal) can be interpreted as the second state. The second state corresponds to the normal state (normal state of the advantageous zone), high probability state, and AT precursor state described in the previous embodiment. The normal zone can be interpreted as the third state. The third state corresponds to the low probability state described in the previous embodiment. Furthermore, the game zone can be interpreted as the state or game state.

<Example of production 1>
69 is a diagram showing an example 1 of a command effect (mission effect) that is completed in one game (the game in question) in the advantageous zone (normal). The command effect (mission effect) shown here is one command effect (mission effect) selected from multiple command effects (mission effects) based on the player's operation of the start lever D50.

First, in (a), when the player operates the start lever D50, a lever effect display to notify the lottery results is initiated. The lever effect display is an effect that is displayed continuously for a first time period after the player operates the start lever D50. If a first stop operation is performed while the lever effect display is being executed, the lever effect display is interrupted midway, and a first effect display corresponding to the first stop operation is executed. Here, lever effect display A is executed, in which the words "Repel the shark!" are displayed on the effect display device S40, and a command effect is initiated. Although only one type of lever effect display corresponding to the operation of the start lever D50 is shown, it is also possible to provide multiple types of lever effect displays and execute one of the multiple types of lever effect displays in response to the operation of the start lever D50.

If the first stop operation is performed before the first time has elapsed, the first effect display is executed, but if the first stop operation is not performed before the first time has elapsed, the lever effect display is configured to continue to be executed. Furthermore, the lever effect display is configured so that the last screen constituting the lever effect display continues to be displayed after the first time has elapsed, but the lever effect display may also be configured to be displayed in a loop.

Next, in (b1), when a first stop operation is performed, a first display effect corresponding to the first stop operation is displayed. The first display effect is displayed continuously for a second time period (the same or different from the first time period) after the player performs the first stop operation. If a second stop operation is performed while the first display effect is being performed, the first display effect is interrupted midway, and a second display effect corresponding to the second stop operation is executed. Here, the left stop button D41 is operated as the first stop operation, and a display effect of a shark swimming from right to left is displayed as the first display effect A.

Furthermore, as shown in (b2), when the first stop operation is performed after the lever effect display of (a), first effect display B, which corresponds to the first stop operation and is different from first effect display A, may be displayed. In other words, the effect display is configured to branch to either (b1) or (b2) based on the first stop operation. In other words, two effect displays are provided based on the first stop operation, and one effect display is selected and executed based on the first stop operation. Here, the left stop button D41 is operated as the first stop operation, and first effect display B is displayed showing the shark looking surprised.

The number of branches in the first effect display is not limited to two, and may be three or more. The first effect display may also be configured not to branch based on the first stop operation; for example, only first effect display A of (b1) may be executed. Alternatively, the currently executed effect display may be continued without any reaction to the first stop operation. If the second stop operation is performed before the second time has elapsed, the second effect display is executed, but if the second stop operation is not performed before the second time has elapsed, the first effect display is continued. The first effect display is configured so that the final screen constituting the first effect display continues to be displayed after the second time has elapsed, but the first effect display may also be configured to be displayed in a loop.

Next, in (c), when a second stop operation is performed, a second display effect corresponding to the second stop operation is displayed. The second display effect is displayed continuously for a third time period (which may be the same as or different from the first and second times) after the player performs the second stop operation. If a third stop operation is performed while the second display effect is being displayed, the second display effect is interrupted midway, and a third display effect corresponding to the third stop operation is displayed. Here, the middle stop button D42 is operated as the second stop operation, and the second display effect A shows a person throwing a spear to kill a shark.

In the second effect display (c), a second effect display is shown in which the effect display does not branch, but it may also be configured to have multiple types of effect displays (second effect displays) so that the effect display branches. Even with this configuration, it is sufficient that the second effect display is configured with fewer types of executable effect displays (fewer branching effect displays) than the first effect display, third effect display, and lever effect display. By configuring the second effect display with the fewest types (fewest branching effect displays) in this way, it is possible to make the effects of the first effect display and third effect display more interesting to the player.

If the third stop operation is performed before the third time has elapsed, the third effect display is executed, but if the third stop operation is not performed before the third time has elapsed, the second effect display is continued. Furthermore, the second effect display is configured so that the final screen constituting the second effect display continues to be displayed after the third time has elapsed, but the second effect display may also be configured to be displayed in a loop. Furthermore, the currently executed effect display may also be continued without any reaction to the second stop operation.

Next, in (d1), when a third stop operation is performed, a third display effect corresponding to the third stop operation is displayed. The third display effect is displayed continuously for a fourth time period (the same or different from the first, second, and third times) after the player performs the third stop operation. If the start lever D50 is operated to start the next game while the third display effect is being displayed, the third display effect is interrupted midway, and a lever display effect corresponding to the operation of the start lever D50 is displayed. Here, the right stop button D43 is operated as the third stop operation, and a display effect indicating that the command effect of the shark continuing to swim has failed is displayed as third display effect A. Note that the third display effect may be interrupted midway by operating the bet button D220 while the third display effect is being displayed. Furthermore, if the third display effect is interrupted midway by operating the bet button D220 while the third display effect is being displayed, a display effect that would be displayed when no game is being played may be displayed. In other words, the subsequent display effect may be configured to be different between when the third display effect is interrupted midway due to the operation of the bet button D220 while the third display effect is being executed and when the third display effect is interrupted midway due to the operation of the start lever D50 while the third display effect is being executed.

Furthermore, as shown in (d2), when a third stop operation is performed after the second display effect of (c), a third display effect B corresponding to the third stop operation, which is different from third display effect A, may be displayed. In this case, third display effect B is a display effect indicating that the thrown spear did not hit the shark, and that the command display failed.

Furthermore, as shown in (d3), when a third stop operation is performed after the second display of (c), a third display C, which corresponds to the third stop operation and is different from third display A and third display B, may be displayed. In other words, the display is configured to branch to either (d1), (d2), or (d3) based on the third stop operation. In other words, three display effects are provided based on the third stop operation, and one display effect is selected and executed based on the third stop operation. Here, the word "Repel!" is displayed as third display C, indicating that the shark has been repelled, and a display effect is displayed indicating that a win has been achieved.

The number of branches in the third display effect is not limited to three and may be four or more. The third display effect may not branch based on the third stop operation. For example, only the third display effect A (d1) may be executed. Alternatively, the currently executed display effect may continue without any reaction to the third stop operation. Note that if the bet button D220 or the start lever D50 to start the next game is operated before the fourth time has elapsed, the third display effect is interrupted. However, if the bet button D220 or the start lever D50 to start the next game is not operated before the fourth time has elapsed, the third display effect continues. The third display effect is configured so that the final screen constituting the third display effect continues to be displayed after the fourth time has elapsed, but the third display effect may also be configured to be displayed in a loop. While it was mentioned above that the third display effect may be interrupted midway by operating the bet button D220 while the third display effect is being executed, it is preferable that the third display effect not be interrupted midway depending on the automatic bet on replays.

In this type of effect example 1, the number of branches in the effect display based on the first stop operation is configured to be greater than the number of branches in the effect display based on the second stop operation. The number of branches in the effect display based on the third stop operation is also configured to be greater than the number of branches in the effect display based on the second stop operation. Furthermore, the number of branches in the effect display based on the third stop operation is configured to be greater than the number of branches in the effect display based on the first stop operation. In other words, the number of branches in the effect display based on the second stop operation < the number of branches in the effect display based on the first stop operation < the number of branches in the effect display based on the third stop operation, and the number of branches in the effect display based on the third stop operation is configured to be greater than the number of branches in the effect display based on the second stop operation and the number of branches in the effect display based on the first stop operation. Because the third stop operation is the final operation required by the player for one game, this configuration allows the player to focus on the effects after the entire game has ended.

Furthermore, when the lever effect display branches based on the operation of the start lever D50, the relationship is as follows: number of branches of effect display based on the second stop operation < number of branches of effect display based on the first stop operation < number of branches of effect display based on the operation of the start lever D50 < number of branches of effect display based on the third stop operation. By configuring it in this way, the player can be shown multiple patterns of effect display at the start and end of a game, resulting in a wide range of gameplay variations with regard to the start and end of the game.

The relationship may also be: number of branches of effect displays based on the second stop operation < number of branches of effect displays based on the first stop operation < number of branches of effect displays based on the third stop operation < number of branches of effect displays based on the operation of the start lever D50. Even with this configuration, multiple patterns of effect displays can be shown to the player at the start and end of a game, resulting in a rich gameplay experience with a wide variety of effects at the start and end.

In addition, a sub-input button effect display based on the operation of the sub-input button SB may be provided, and the number of branches of this effect display may be configured to have the following relationship.
(1) The number of branches of the effect display based on the second stop operation < the number of branches of the effect display based on the operation of the sub-input button SB < the number of branches of the effect display based on the first stop operation < the number of branches of the effect display based on the operation of the start lever D50 < the number of branches of the effect display based on the third stop operation (2) The number of branches of the effect display based on the second stop operation < the number of branches of the effect display based on the first stop operation < the number of branches of the effect display based on the operation of the sub-input button SB < the number of branches of the effect display based on the operation of the start lever D50 < the number of branches of the effect display based on the third stop operation (3) The number of branches of the effect display based on the second stop operation < the number of branches of the effect display based on the first stop operation Number of branches of performance displays based on operation of start lever D50 < number of branches of performance displays based on operation of sub-input button SB < number of branches of performance displays based on third stop operation (4) Number of branches of performance displays based on second stop operation < number of branches of performance displays based on first stop operation < number of branches of performance displays based on operation of start lever D50 < number of branches of performance displays based on third stop operation < number of branches of performance displays based on operation of sub-input button SB By configuring the sub-input button performance displays to branch in this way, the sub-input button performance displays can be made more interesting.

Note that while Presentation Example 1 shows an example of the presentation of the advantageous zone (normal), it is not limited to the advantageous zone (normal) and may be other game zones (for example, the normal zone or advantageous zone (AT)), or the first state, second state, third state, etc.

Furthermore, while a command effect was shown as effect example 1, other effects may be used, as long as the relationship between the number of branches is similar. Also, while an effect that is completed in one game has been shown, it may also be a continuous effect that is completed in multiple games, as shown in Figure 71.

<Example of production 2>
FIG. 70 shows a second example of the effect, a command effect (mission effect) that executes a premium display that is completed in one game in the advantageous zone (normal). FIG. 70 illustrates the execution of the lever effect display A (a) in FIG. 69, the first effect display A (b1), the second effect display A (c), and the third effect display D corresponding to the third stop operation. The command effect (mission effect), including the second example of the effect, is configured so that the display branches into four (executing one of d1 to d4) based on the third stop operation. The second example of the effect is explained using a confirmation effect (premium effect) that indicates to the player that a transition to the advantageous zone (AT) is confirmed by the premium display shown in the third cut of (d4), but is not limited to this. There are multiple types of confirmation effects, and one confirmation effect is selected from among the multiple confirmation effects based on the player's operation of the start lever D50. Furthermore, the confirmation effect is not limited to an effect that confirms a transition to an advantageous zone (AT), but may also be an effect that confirms a transition to an added-on specialized state in an advantageous zone (AT), or any effect that notifies the player that it has been confirmed (will be confirmed) that something will be advantageous for the player.

First, although not shown in Figure 70(a), when the player operates the start lever D50 as shown in Figure 69(a), lever effect display A begins to notify the lottery results.

Next, in (b1), when the first stop operation is performed, the first effect display corresponding to the first stop operation is performed. Here, the left stop button D41 is operated as the first stop operation, and the first effect display A is displayed as an effect display of a shark swimming from right to left. The effect display in (b1) is a three-cut effect display, and the leftmost (b1) is the first effect display A of the first cut. After the first effect display A of the first cut is performed, the first effect display A of the second cut is performed, provided that the second stop operation is not performed. The second (b1) is the first effect display A of the second cut, and an underwater effect display without a shark is performed. After the first effect display A of the second cut is performed, the first effect display A of the third cut is performed, provided that the second stop operation is not performed. The third (b1) is the first effect display A of the third cut, and a shark swimming from left to right is performed. In other words, first performance display A is configured as a performance display with three cuts (three cuts in total). Note that the third cut is an image from the same viewpoint as the first cut, but it may also be an image from a different viewpoint than the first cut.

Note that the first performance display A is not limited to three cuts, and may consist of multiple cuts. Furthermore, the first performance display A is configured so that after the third cut of the first performance display A is executed, the third cut of the first performance display A continues to be displayed (for example, as a still image or a display of a swaying shark, etc.), but it may also be configured so that the first cuts through the third cut of the first performance display A are displayed in a loop.

Here, a cut refers to each individual fragment of a video created by connecting footage shot by multiple cameras. A cut also refers to a section of a video created by cutting or deleting footage to extract a necessary section from the raw footage, and a video in which the camera angle does not change is cut 1. For example, in the first cut (b1) of Figure 70, the video of a shark swimming from the right edge to the left edge of the performance display device S40 is cut 1, and the underwater video in the next, second cut (b2) is also cut 1. The number of cuts refers to the number of cuts. For example, if one performance is made up of two cuts, the number of cuts for that performance is two.

Next, in (c), when a second stop operation is performed, a second effect display corresponding to the second stop operation is performed. Here, the middle stop button D42 is operated as the second stop operation, and second effect display A is performed, showing a person throwing a spear to kill a shark. The effect display in (c) is a effect display consisting of two cuts, and (c) shown on the far left is second effect display A for the first cut. After second effect display A for the first cut is executed, second effect display A for the second cut is performed, provided that the second stop operation is not performed. (c) shown second from the left is second effect display A for the second cut, and an effect display in which the screen of the effect display device S40 explodes is performed. In other words, second effect display A is configured as a effect display with two cuts (two cuts).

Note that second performance display A is not limited to two cuts, and may consist of multiple cuts. Second performance display A is configured so that after second performance display A for the second cut is executed, second performance display A for the second cut continues to be displayed (for example, if a still image or character is displayed, the character is displayed shaking), but second performance display A for the first and second cuts may also be configured to be displayed in a loop.

Next, (d4) shows that when a third stop operation is performed, a third effect display corresponding to the third stop operation is displayed. Here, the right stop button D43 is operated as the third stop operation, and the third effect display D shows the result of the command effect. The effect display (d4) is a four-cut effect display, with (d4) shown on the far left being the third effect display D of the first cut. After the third effect display D of the first cut is executed, the third effect display D of the second cut is displayed, provided that the start lever D50, which triggers the execution of the next game, is not operated. (d4) shown second from the left is the third effect display D of the second cut, and a display in which the screen of the effect display device S40 explodes is displayed. After the third effect display D of the second cut is executed, the third effect display D of the third cut is displayed, provided that the bet button D220 or the start lever D50, which triggers the execution of the next game, is not operated. The third display (d4) from the left is the third effect display D for the third cut, and a premium display (confirmation display) is displayed in which the premium character fox smiles. After the third effect display D for the third cut is executed, the third effect display D for the fourth cut is executed, provided that the bet button D220 or the start lever D50, which triggers the next game, is not operated. The fourth display (d4) from the left is the third effect display D for the fourth cut, and displays the word "Repel!" indicating that the shark has been repelled, and an effect is displayed indicating that the command effect was successful. In other words, the third effect display D is configured as a four-cut effect display (four cuts total).

Note that third effect display D is not limited to four cuts, and may consist of multiple cuts. Furthermore, third effect display D is configured so that after the fourth cut of third effect display D is executed, the fourth cut of third effect display D continues to be displayed (for example, as a still image or a character swaying), but it may also be configured so that the first through fourth cuts of third effect display D are displayed in a loop.

In this example of effect 2, the number of cuts in the third effect display D corresponding to the third stop operation (4 cuts) is greater than the number of cuts in the first effect display A corresponding to the first stop operation (3 cuts). The number of cuts in the third effect display D corresponding to the third stop operation (4 cuts) is also greater than the number of cuts in the second effect display A corresponding to the second stop operation (2 cuts). Furthermore, the number of cuts in the first effect display A corresponding to the first stop operation (3 cuts) is greater than the number of cuts in the second effect display A corresponding to the second stop operation (2 cuts). In other words, the number of cuts in the second effect display < the number of cuts in the first effect display < the number of cuts in the third effect display, and the number of cuts in the third effect display is relatively greater than the number of cuts in the first effect display and the number of cuts in the second effect display. This configuration allows the player to focus on the effect display after the third stop operation, since the third stop operation marks the end of the player's operations required for one game. It also improves (does not worsen) the tempo of the game, and because it is displayed after the third stop operation, there is no risk of accidentally skipping the desired display during the sequence of stop operations, allowing the player to focus on the display.

The relationship may be such that the number of cuts in the first effect display < the number of cuts in the second effect display < the number of cuts in the third effect display. Ultimately, it is sufficient to configure the number of cuts in the third effect display to be relatively greater than the number of cuts in the first effect display and the number of cuts in the second effect display. By configuring it in this way, the third stop operation occurs when the player's operations required for one game have ended, so the player can focus on viewing the effect display after the third stop operation, which improves (but does not impair) the tempo of the game and prevents the player from accidentally skipping over the effect display they want to see due to the flow of stop operations, allowing the player to focus on viewing the effect display.

In the above presentation example 2, we have shown an example of the presentation of the advantageous zone (normal), but this is not limited to the advantageous zone (normal), and may be other game zones (for example, the normal zone or advantageous zone (AT)), or the first state, second state, third state, etc.

Furthermore, the lever effect display based on the operation of the start lever D50 may be configured as an effect display consisting of multiple cuts. In this configuration, the relationship should be such that the number of cuts in the second effect display < the number of cuts in the first effect display < the number of cuts in the lever effect display < the number of cuts in the third effect display. By achieving this relationship, it is possible to improve the tempo of play at the start and end of a game.

The relationship may be such that the number of cuts in the second effect display < the number of cuts in the first effect display < the number of cuts in the third effect display < the number of cuts in the lever effect display. Even with this relationship, it is possible to improve the tempo of play at the beginning and end of a game.

Also, in a display effect where the number of cuts in the lever effect display (e.g., 7 cuts) is greater than the number of cuts in the third effect display (e.g., 4 cuts), the number of cuts in the lever effect display displayed from the start of the lever effect display until the first stop operation becomes possible (the number of cuts in the lever effect display displayed from the start of the lever effect display until the shortest time at which the first stop operation becomes possible is, for example, 5 cuts) may be configured to be greater than the number of cuts in the third effect display (e.g., 4 cuts). By configuring the game in this way, the tempo at the start of the game can be improved, making the player look forward to future developments in the effects.

In addition, a sub-input button effect display based on the operation of the sub-input button SB may be provided, and the number of cuts in this effect display may be configured to have the following relationship.
(1) Number of cuts in the second effect display < Number of cuts in the sub input button effect display < Number of cuts in the first effect display < Number of cuts in the lever effect display < Number of cuts in the third effect display (2) Number of cuts in the second effect display < Number of cuts in the first effect display < Number of cuts in the sub input button effect display < Number of cuts in the lever effect display < Number of cuts in the third effect display (3) Number of cuts in the second effect display < Number of cuts in the first effect display < Number of cuts in the lever effect display < Number of cuts in the sub input button effect display < Number of cuts in the third effect display (4) Number of cuts in the second effect display < Number of cuts in the first effect display < Number of cuts in the lever effect display < Number of cuts in the third effect display < Number of cuts in the sub input button effect display (5) Number of cuts in the second effect display < Number of cuts in the sub input button effect display < Number of cuts in the first effect display < number of cuts in the third effect display < number of cuts in the lever effect display (6) Number of cuts in the second effect display < number of cuts in the first effect display < number of cuts in the sub input button effect display < number of cuts in the third effect display < number of cuts in the lever effect display (7) Number of cuts in the second effect display < number of cuts in the first effect display < number of cuts in the third effect display < number of cuts in the sub input button effect display < number of cuts in the lever effect display (8) Number of cuts in the second effect display < number of cuts in the first effect display < number of cuts in the third effect display < number of cuts in the lever effect display < number of cuts in the sub input button effect display By configuring the number of cuts in the sub input button effect display in this way, the sub input button effect display can be made into an effect display with a good tempo.

Although a confirmation effect is shown as effect example 2, other effects different from the confirmation effect may also be used, as long as the relationship between the number of cuts is similar. For example, in the case of other effects (such as a 1-game story effect), the number of cuts in the lever effect display is configured as 9, the number of cuts in the first effect display is configured as 3, the number of cuts in the second effect display is configured as 2, and the number of cuts in the third effect display is configured as 5, for a total of 19 cuts. On the other hand, in the case of the confirmation effect described above, the number of cuts in the lever effect display is configured as 7, the number of cuts in the first effect display is configured as 3, the number of cuts in the second effect display is configured as 2, and the number of cuts in the third effect display is configured as 4, for a total of 16 cuts. In other words, the number of cuts in the other effects is configured to be relatively greater than the number of cuts in the confirmation effect. Here, in a slot machine in which the number of presentation stages in the advantageous zone (normal) is greater than the number of presentation stages in the advantageous zone (AT), the number of cuts of other presentations in a predetermined play zone (for example, normal zone, advantageous zone (normal), advantageous zone (AT)) is configured to be relatively greater than the number of cuts of final presentations in the predetermined play zone. In this way, by increasing the number of cuts of other presentations in the predetermined play zone and increasing the amount of information, the predetermined play zone can be made into a play zone with presentations with a good tempo. Furthermore, by increasing the variety of presentations in the predetermined play zone in this way, players will not get bored, while intentionally reducing the number of cuts of final presentations can draw the player's attention to the final presentations.

In addition, in a slot machine in which the number of presentation stages in the advantageous zone (normal) is greater than the number of presentation stages in the advantageous zone (AT), it is preferable to configure the number of cuts of other presentations in the advantageous zone (normal) to be relatively greater than the number of cuts of final presentations. In this way, by increasing the number of cuts of other presentations in the advantageous zone (normal) and increasing the amount of information, the advantageous zone (normal) can be made into a gaming zone with presentations with a good tempo. Furthermore, by increasing the variety of presentations in the advantageous zone (normal) in this way, players will not get bored, while deliberately reducing the number of cuts of final presentations will draw the player's attention to the final presentations.

Although it has been explained that the relationship is number of presentation stages in the normal section < number of presentation stages in the advantageous section (AT) < number of presentation stages in the advantageous section (normal), this is not limited to this and the following relationship may also be used.
(1) Number of production stages in advantageous zone (AT) < number of production stages in normal zone < number of production stages in advantageous zone (normal) (2) Number of production stages in normal zone < number of production stages in advantageous zone (normal) < number of production stages in advantageous zone (AT) (3) Number of production stages in advantageous zone (normal) < number of production stages in normal zone < number of production stages in advantageous zone (AT) (4) Number of production stages in advantageous zone (normal) < number of production stages in advantageous zone (AT) < number of production stages in normal zone (5) Number of production stages in advantageous zone (AT) < number of production stages in advantageous zone (normal) < number of production stages in normal zone

If the advantageous zone (AT) is configured to have the largest number of presentation stages, then by increasing the number of cuts of other presentations in the advantageous zone (AT) and increasing the amount of information, the advantageous zone (AT) can be made into a game zone with presentations that have a good tempo. Also, by increasing the variety of presentations in the advantageous zone (AT), players will not get bored, while by intentionally reducing the number of cuts of the final presentation, players can be drawn to the final presentation.

If the normal section is configured to have the largest number of effect stages, increasing the number of other effect cuts in the normal section and increasing the amount of information can make the normal section a game section with well-paced effects. Also, by increasing the variety of effects in the normal section, players will not get bored, while intentionally reducing the number of cuts in the final effect can draw the player's attention to the final effect.

When providing a special effect stage for the normal section, it is preferable to configure it so that the number of effect stages in the normal section is the smallest. Also, when providing an effect stage that is shared between the normal section and the advantageous section (normal), it is preferable to configure it so that the number of effect stages in the normal section is the smallest. By reducing the number of effect stages in the normal section in this way, the data volume in the normal section can be reduced, allowing for more variation in the effects in other game sections and preventing players from getting bored.

When the game zone (normal) is configured so that the number of cuts for other effects is relatively greater than the number of cuts for final effects, it is preferable that the period during which the player stays in the AT precursor state in the normal advantageous zone and the period during which the player stays in a chance zone (such as a chance zone that is likely to transition to the AT) in the normal advantageous zone are not included in the normal advantageous zone. Also, if the normal advantageous zone has consecutive effects that can be executed, it is preferable that the period during which the consecutive effects are being executed in the normal advantageous zone are not included in the normal advantageous zone. By configuring the game zone in this way, it is possible to provide a slot machine with a good balance between the number of cuts for final effects and the number of cuts for other effects in the normal advantageous zone.

Furthermore, when the gaming zone is an advantageous zone (AT) configured so that the number of cuts for other effects is relatively greater than the number of cuts for final effects, it is preferable that the period during which a pseudo-bonus is being executed during the advantageous zone (AT) and the period during which the player is in an added-on specialized state during the advantageous zone (AT) are not included in the advantageous zone (AT). Furthermore, when consecutive effects, chance zones (for example, chance zones that make it easier to win in an added-on specialized state), or specialized precursor states are set in the advantageous zone (AT), it is preferable that the period during which consecutive effects are being executed during the advantageous zone (AT), the period during which the player is in a chance zone during the advantageous zone (AT), and the period during which the player is in a specialized precursor state during the advantageous zone (AT) are not included in the advantageous zone (AT). By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide a slot machine with a good balance between the number of cuts for final effects and the number of cuts for other effects in the advantageous zone (AT).

Furthermore, when a gaming interval is configured so that the number of cuts for other effects is relatively greater than the number of cuts for final effects, it is preferable that the period during which continuous effects are being executed in the normal interval and the period during which the player is in the chance zone in the normal interval are not included in the normal interval. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide a slot machine with a good balance between the number of cuts for final effects and the number of cuts for other effects in the normal interval.

In addition, the maximum volume of the sound for the confirmation effect is set to be louder than the maximum volume of the background music for the effect stage you are currently on. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to loudly announce that a confirmation effect is being executed, preventing players from missing the confirmation effect.

The maximum volume of the sound for the final effect may also be set to be louder than the maximum volume of the sound during the empty medal error notification. By configuring it in this way, even if an empty medal error occurs during the execution of a final effect, the background music played during the final effect will be output at a louder volume than the sound played during the empty medal error notification after the empty medal error is cleared. Even if an empty medal error occurs, the player can continue playing after the empty medal error is cleared without losing the sense of superiority they felt during the final effect. Note that the display for notifying an empty medal error consists of one cut, and displays for notifying other errors also consist of one cut.

Furthermore, in the case of a slot machine with a normal zone, an advantageous zone (normal), and an advantageous zone (AT) as game zones, the data capacity of the image data for the normal zone is configured to be smaller than the data capacity of the image data for the advantageous zone (normal) and the data capacity of the image data for the advantageous zone (AT). In other words, the data capacity of the image data for the normal zone is configured to be the smallest compared to the data capacity of the image data for the other game zones. By reducing the data capacity for the normal zone in this way and increasing the variety of presentations in the other game zones, it is possible to increase the variety of presentations in the advantageous zone (normal) and advantageous zone (AT), which players spend longer in than in the normal zone, and therefore prevent players from getting bored.

Furthermore, the data capacity of image data for the normal zone < data capacity of image data for the advantageous zone (normal) < data capacity of image data for the advantageous zone (AT). By configuring the data capacity in this way, in the case of a slot machine where it is desired to set a longer stay period in the advantageous zone (AT), it is possible to increase the variety of presentations in the advantageous zone (AT), and to prevent players from getting bored.

In addition, the data capacity of image data for the normal zone may be configured to be < data capacity of image data for the advantageous zone (AT) < data capacity of image data for the advantageous zone (normal). By configuring the data capacity in this way, it is possible to provide multiple presentation stages in the advantageous zone (normal) before the advantageous zone (AT), ranging from presentation stages with low expectations of transitioning to the advantageous zone (AT) to presentation stages with high expectations, thereby increasing the variety of presentations and preventing players from getting bored.

Note that while Figure 70 shows an effect that is completed in one game, it may also be a continuous effect that is completed in multiple games, as shown in Figure 71, which will be described later.

<Example of production 3>
71 and 72 are diagrams showing a third example of a mission effect that is completed over multiple games in the advantageous zone (normal). The third example of the mission effect is a continuous effect, and the continuous effect shown here is one continuous effect selected from multiple continuous effects based on the player's operation of the start lever D50.

First, in (a), when the player operates the start lever D50, a lever effect display for a continuous effect to notify the lottery results is initiated, and the first game of the continuous effect begins. The lever effect display is an effect that is displayed continuously for a 1-1 time period (the same or different from the first time period) after the player operates the start lever D50. If a first stop operation is performed while the lever effect display is being executed, the lever effect display is interrupted midway, and a first effect display corresponding to the first stop operation is executed. Here, lever effect display A is executed, in which the words "Repel the shark!" are displayed on the effect display device S40, and a command effect is initiated. Although only one type of lever effect display corresponding to the operation of the start lever D50 is shown, it is also possible to provide multiple types of lever effect displays and execute one of the multiple types of lever effect displays in response to the operation of the start lever D50.

Note that if the first stop operation is performed before the 1-1 time has elapsed, the first effect display is executed, but if the first stop operation is not performed before the 1-1 time has elapsed, the lever effect display is configured to continue to be executed. Furthermore, the lever effect display is configured so that the final screen constituting the lever effect display continues to be displayed after the 1-1 time has elapsed, but the lever effect display may also be configured to be displayed in a loop.

Next, in (b), when a first stop operation is performed, a first display effect corresponding to the first stop operation is displayed. The first display effect is displayed continuously for a 2-1 time period (the same or different from the second time period) after the player performs the first stop operation. If a second stop operation is performed while the first display effect is being displayed, the first display effect is interrupted and a second display effect corresponding to the second stop operation is displayed. Here, the left stop button D41 is operated as the first stop operation, and a display effect of a shark swimming from right to left is displayed as first display effect A. Note that in (b), the first display effect corresponding to the first stop operation only shows first display effect A, but it is configured to include multiple types of display effects so that the effects branch out. Furthermore, in (b), as shown in (f) of Figure 72, a chance-up pattern for the first display effect corresponding to the first stop operation may be configured. If a chance-up pattern is provided, it is preferable to include multiple chance-up patterns.

Note that if the second stop operation is performed before the 2-1 time has elapsed, the second effect display is executed, but if the second stop operation is not performed before the 2-1 time has elapsed, the first effect display is continued. Furthermore, the first effect display is configured so that the final screen constituting the first effect display continues to be displayed after the 2-1 time has elapsed, but the first effect display may also be configured to be displayed in a loop.

Next, in (c), when a second stop operation is performed, a second display effect corresponding to the second stop operation is displayed. The second display effect is displayed continuously for a time period 3-1 (the same or different from the third time period) after the player performs the second stop operation. If a third stop operation is performed while the second display effect is being performed, the second display effect is interrupted midway, and a third display effect corresponding to the third stop operation is executed. Here, the middle stop button D42 is operated as the second stop operation, and a display effect of a shark swimming from left to right is displayed as the second display effect B. Note that in (c), the second display effect corresponding to the second stop operation only shows the second display effect B, but is configured to include multiple types of display effects so that the effects branch out. The second display effect corresponding to the second stop operation is configured with fewer types (fewer branching display effects) than the first display effect corresponding to the first stop operation and the third and lever display effect corresponding to the third stop operation. Additionally, (c) may be configured to have a chance-up pattern for the second effect display corresponding to the second stop operation, in which case the number of chance-up patterns may be fewer than the number of chance-up patterns for the first effect display corresponding to the first stop operation in (b) and the number of chance-up patterns for the third effect display corresponding to the third stop operation in (d).

If the third stop operation is performed before the 3-1 time has elapsed, the third effect display is executed, but if the third stop operation is not performed before the 3-1 time has elapsed, the second effect display is continued. The second effect display is configured so that the last screen constituting the second effect display continues to be displayed after the 3-1 time has elapsed, but the second effect display may also be configured to be displayed in a loop.

Next, in (d), when the third stop operation is performed, a third display effect corresponding to the third stop operation is displayed. The third display effect is displayed continuously for a time period 4-1 (the same or different from the fourth time period) after the player performs the third stop operation. If the bet button D220 or the start lever D50 to start the next game is operated while the third display effect is being displayed, the third display effect is interrupted. Here, the right stop button D43 is operated as the third stop operation, and a display effect of a shark continuing to swim is displayed as the third display effect A. Here, the first game ends in (d), but the continuous display effect continues in the next game, so the word "NEXT" is displayed in the lower right corner of the display effect display device S40, indicating that the continuous display effect will continue into the next game. Note that in (d), the third display effect corresponding to the third stop operation only shows the third display effect A, but is configured to include multiple types of display effects so that the display effect can branch. Also, in (d), as shown in (h) of Figure 72, the third effect display corresponding to the third stop operation may be configured to be an effect display of a chance-up pattern. When an effect display of a chance-up pattern is provided, it is preferable to provide effect displays of multiple chance-up patterns.

Note that if the bet button D220 is operated or the start lever D50 to start the next game is operated before the 4-1 time has elapsed, the third effect display is interrupted, but if the bet button D220 is not operated or the start lever D50 to start the next game is not operated before the 4-1 time has elapsed, the third effect display is configured to continue. Also, the third effect display is configured so that the final screen constituting the third effect display continues to be displayed after the 4-1 time has elapsed, but the third effect display may also be configured to be displayed in a loop.

Next, in (e), when the player operates the start lever D50, the next game begins, and the second game of the consecutive effects begins. The lever effect display is an effect that is displayed continuously for a 1-2 time period (the same or different from the first time period) after the player operates the start lever D50. If a first stop operation is performed while the lever effect display is being executed, the lever effect display is interrupted midway, and a first effect display corresponding to the first stop operation is executed. Here, lever effect display B shows an effect display of a person in a boat chasing a shark. Note that in (e), the lever effect display only shows lever effect display B, but it may also be configured to include multiple types of effect displays so that the effect display branches out.

If the first stop operation is performed before the 1-2 time has elapsed, the first effect display is executed, but if the first stop operation is not performed before the 1-2 time has elapsed, the lever effect display is configured to continue to be executed. Furthermore, the lever effect display is configured so that the final screen constituting the lever effect display continues to be displayed after the 1-2 time has elapsed, but the lever effect display may also be configured to be displayed in a loop.

Next, in (f), when the first stop operation is performed, the first display effect corresponding to the first stop operation is displayed. The first display effect is displayed continuously for a 2-2 time period (the same or different from the second time period) after the player performs the first stop operation. If the second stop operation is performed while the first display effect is being performed, the first display effect is interrupted and the second display effect corresponding to the second stop operation is executed. Here, the left stop button D41 is operated as the first stop operation, and the first display effect B shows a shark looking surprised. Note that in (f), the first display effect corresponding to the first stop operation only shows the first display effect B, but is configured to include four types of display effects so that the display effect branches out. Furthermore, as shown in (f) of Figure 72, a caption is displayed in the first display effect corresponding to the first stop operation. The effect display including the caption display is a chance-up pattern effect display that suggests a high probability of winning (having won) an AT, BB role, or bonus-specialized state, and is an effect display that suggests the expectation (possibility) of a successful consecutive effect, and is configured to have three types as the first effect display (chance-up pattern effect display) corresponding to the first stop operation. The first effect display corresponding to the first stop operation is configured to select and display one chance-up pattern effect display from multiple chance-up pattern effect displays. Note that the chance-up pattern effect display is not limited to an effect display including a caption display, and may be an effect display that includes an image or the like that can suggest a chance.

If the second stop operation is performed before the 2-2 time has elapsed, the second effect display is executed, but if the second stop operation is not performed before the 2-2 time has elapsed, the first effect display is continued. The first effect display is configured so that the last screen constituting the first effect display continues to be displayed after the 2-2 time has elapsed, but the first effect display may also be configured to be displayed in a loop.

Next, in (g), when a second stop operation is performed, a second display effect corresponding to the second stop operation is displayed. The second display effect is displayed continuously for a period of 3-2 hours (the same or different from the third period) after the player performs the second stop operation. If a third stop operation is performed while the second display effect is being displayed, the second display effect is interrupted and a third display effect corresponding to the third stop operation is executed. Here, the middle stop button D42 is operated as the second stop operation, and second display effect A shows a person throwing a spear to kill a shark. Note that in (g), the second display effect corresponding to the second stop operation only shows second display effect B, but is configured to include two types of display effects so that the display effect branches. The second display effect corresponding to the second stop operation is configured to have fewer types (fewer branching display effects) than the first display effect corresponding to the first stop operation and the third and lever display effect corresponding to the third stop operation. In addition, in (g), the second effect display corresponding to the second stop operation may be configured to be a chance-up pattern effect display, in which case it is sufficient that the number of types is fewer than the number of first effect displays corresponding to the first stop operation (the number of chance-up pattern effect displays) and the number of third effect displays corresponding to the third stop operation (the number of chance-up pattern effect displays).

If the third stop operation is performed before the 3-2 time has elapsed, the third effect display is executed, but if the third stop operation is not performed before the 3-2 time has elapsed, the second effect display is continued. Furthermore, the second effect display is configured so that the final screen constituting the second effect display continues to be displayed after the 3-2 time has elapsed, but the second effect display may also be configured to be displayed in a loop.

Next, in (h), when the third stop operation is performed, a third display effect corresponding to the third stop operation is displayed. The third display effect is displayed continuously for a time period 4-2 (the same or different from the fourth time period) after the player performs the third stop operation. If the bet button D220 or the start lever D50 to start the next game is operated while the third display effect is being displayed, the third display effect is interrupted. Here, the right stop button D43 is operated as the third stop operation, and a third display effect B is displayed, showing that the thrown spear misses the shark. Here, the second game ends in (h), but the consecutive display effect continues in the next game, so the word "NEXT" is displayed in the lower right corner of the display effect display device S40, indicating that the consecutive display effect will continue into the next game. Note that in (h), the third display effect corresponding to the third stop operation only shows the third display effect B, but the display effect is configured to include three types of display effect, allowing the display effect to branch off. Additionally, as shown in (h) of Figure 72, a caption is displayed in the third effect display corresponding to the third stop operation. There are two types of third effect displays (chance-up pattern effect displays) corresponding to the third stop operation.

If the bet button D220 is operated or the start lever D50 to start the next game is operated before the 4-2 time has elapsed, the third effect display is interrupted, but if the bet button D220 is not operated or the start lever D50 to start the next game is not operated before the 4-2 time has elapsed, the third effect display is configured to continue. Furthermore, the third effect display is configured so that the final screen constituting the third effect display continues to be displayed after the 4-2 time has elapsed, but the third effect display may also be configured to be displayed in a loop.

Next, in (i), when the player operates the start lever D50, the next game begins, and the third game in the series of consecutive effects begins. The lever effect display is an effect that is continuously displayed for 1-3 times (the same or different from the first time) after the player operates the start lever D50. If the first stop operation is performed while the lever effect display is being executed, the lever effect display is interrupted midway, and the first effect display corresponding to the first stop operation is executed. Here, the lever effect display B shows an effect display of a person in a boat chasing a shark. Note that in (i), the lever effect display only shows lever effect display B, but it may also be configured to include multiple types of effect displays so that the effect displays branch out.

Note that if the first stop operation is performed before the first-third time has elapsed, the first effect display is executed, but if the first stop operation is not performed before the first-third time has elapsed, the lever effect display is configured to continue to be executed. Furthermore, the lever effect display is configured so that the final screen constituting the lever effect display continues to be displayed after the first-third time has elapsed, but the lever effect display may also be configured to be displayed in a loop.

Next, in (j), when a first stop operation is performed, a first display effect corresponding to the first stop operation is displayed. The first display effect is displayed continuously for 2-3 hours (the same or different from the second time) after the player performs the first stop operation. If a second stop operation is performed while the first display effect is being displayed, the first display effect is interrupted and a second display effect corresponding to the second stop operation is displayed. Here, the left stop button D41 is operated as the first stop operation, and a display effect showing a startled shark is displayed as first display effect B. Note that in (j), the first display effect corresponding to the first stop operation only shows first display effect B, but the display effect is configured to include multiple types of display effects so that it branches out. Furthermore, as shown in (f) of Figure 72, the first display effect corresponding to multiple types of first stop operations may be configured to include a chance-up pattern display. If a chance-up pattern display is provided, it is preferable to include multiple chance-up pattern display effects.

If the second stop operation is performed before the 2-3rd time has elapsed, the second effect display is executed, but if the second stop operation is not performed before the 2-3rd time has elapsed, the first effect display is continued. The first effect display is configured so that the final screen constituting the first effect display continues to be displayed after the 2-3rd time has elapsed, but the first effect display may also be configured to be displayed in a loop.

Next, in (k), when a second stop operation is performed, a second display effect corresponding to the second stop operation is displayed. The second display effect is displayed continuously for a 3-3 time period (the same or different from the third time period) after the player performs the second stop operation. If a third stop operation is performed while the second display effect is being displayed, the second display effect is interrupted midway, and a third display effect corresponding to the third stop operation is executed. Here, the middle stop button D42 is operated as the second stop operation, and second display effect A shows a person throwing a spear to kill a shark. Note that in (k), the second display effect corresponding to the second stop operation only shows second display effect B, but is configured to include multiple types of display effects so that the display effect branches. The second display effect corresponding to the second stop operation is configured with fewer types (fewer branching display effects) than the first display effect corresponding to the first stop operation and the third and lever display effect corresponding to the third stop operation. In addition, in (k), the second effect display corresponding to the second stop operation may be configured to be a chance-up pattern effect display, in which case it is sufficient that the number of types is fewer than the number of first effect displays corresponding to the first stop operation (the number of chance-up pattern effect displays) and the number of third effect displays corresponding to the third stop operation (the number of chance-up pattern effect displays).

If the third stop operation is performed before the 3-3 time has elapsed, the third effect display is executed, but if the third stop operation is not performed before the 3-3 time has elapsed, the second effect display is continued. Furthermore, the second effect display is configured so that the final screen constituting the second effect display continues to be displayed after the 3-3 time has elapsed, but the second effect display may also be configured to be displayed in a loop.

Next, (l) shows the result display of the continuous effects. When the third stop operation is performed, the third effect display corresponding to the third stop operation is displayed. The third effect display is displayed continuously for a period of 4-3 minutes (the same or different from the fourth period) after the player performs the third stop operation. If the bet button D220 or the start lever D50 to start the next game is operated while the third effect display is being displayed, the third effect display is interrupted midway, but it may also be configured not to be interrupted. Here, the right stop button D43 is operated as the third stop operation, and the word "Repel!" is displayed as the third effect display C, indicating that the shark has been repelled, and an effect display indicating a win is displayed. Note that in (l), the third effect display corresponding to the third stop operation only shows the third effect display C, but it may also be configured to include multiple types of effect displays so that the effect display branches.

Note that if the display effect is not interrupted before the 4-3rd time has elapsed, the third display effect is configured to continue. Furthermore, the third display effect is configured so that the final screen constituting the third display effect continues to be displayed after the 4-3rd time has elapsed, but the third display effect may also be configured to be displayed in a loop.

In this type of presentation example 3, in games other than the first game, which is the first game in the continuous presentation, and the third game, which is the last game in the continuous presentation, i.e., the second game, which is a game in the middle of the continuous presentation, the number of branches in the presentation display based on the first stop operation (four) is greater than the number of branches in the presentation display based on the third stop operation (three). Also, the number of first presentation displays in the chance-up pattern corresponding to the first stop operation (three) is greater than the number of third presentation displays in the chance-up pattern corresponding to the third stop operation (two). By configuring it in this way, in the continuous presentation, by increasing the number of branches in the presentation display based on the first stop operation, it is possible to surprise the player early in one game and create a sense of anticipation for the presentation to be successful.

Note that while Presentation Example 3 shows an example of the presentation of the advantageous zone (normal), it is not limited to the advantageous zone (normal) and may be other game zones (for example, the normal zone or advantageous zone (AT)), or the first state, second state, third state, etc.

Furthermore, while a command effect was shown as the continuous effect in effect example 3, other continuous effects other than a command effect may also be used. Other continuous effects may have a similar configuration (i.e., a configuration in which the number of branches in the continuous effect display based on the first stop operation is greater than the number of branches in the continuous effect display based on the third stop operation in games other than the first game of the continuous effect and the last game of the continuous effect, i.e., in games during the continuous effect). Furthermore, while a continuous effect consisting of three games was shown, it may be comprised of multiple games, with three or more games being preferable. Furthermore, in the first game of the continuous effect, the number of branches in the continuous effect display based on the first stop operation may be greater than the number of branches in the continuous effect display based on the third stop operation. In this configuration, increasing the number of branches in the continuous effect display based on the first stop operation can surprise the player early in one game and create a sense of anticipation for the success of the effect early in the continuous effect. Also, (a) to (l) in Figures 71 and 72 each show effects (videos) with different cuts.

The display of the chance-up pattern is configured to have more cuts than the display of the normal pattern (a display without captions). By configuring it in this way, it is possible to suggest to the player that there is a high chance of winning by improving the tempo of the game.

In addition, in Presentation Example 3, an example of a presentation that continues until the third game was described, but it does not necessarily have to continue until the third game. The presentation display corresponding to the third stop operation in the second game may show the shark being repelled and the lottery result (win/no win), or the presentation display corresponding to the third stop operation in the second game may show a presentation display in which the thrown spear does not hit the shark, and operating the start lever D50 to start the next game may return to the background screen of the presentation stage in the advantageous zone (normal), indicating that the lottery result was no win. Furthermore, continuous presentations may end in one game.

Furthermore, to indicate the possibility of the continuous effect continuing into the next game, multiple patterns of continuation images may be provided. For example, to tease in the second game whether or not the continuous effect will continue into the third game, the continuation image displayed in the effect corresponding to the third stop operation in the second game may not simply say "NEXT," but something like "NEXT?" or "NEXT!?" In this configuration, the likelihood of continuation into the third game may be expressed as NEXT? < NEXT! ? < NEXT.

Note that while the third game has been shown to have the same progression as the second game, this is not limiting and the second and third games may have different presentations. For example, if there is a higher expectation of defeating the shark in the third game than in the second game, the presentation for the third game may be a presentation with a higher expectation, such as being closer to the shark when the start lever D50 is operated, a smaller shark displayed during the first stop operation, and a larger spear displayed during the second stop operation.

In this way, when the continuation image is displayed on the effect display device S40, it is displayed in the same direction (left to right) as the player's main actions to progress the game (start lever D50 → left stop button D41 → center stop button D42 → right stop button D43), allowing the player to recognize the continuation image without feeling uncomfortable.

After the third stop operation is performed in the first or second game, the effect displayed by the third stop operation will continue to be displayed until the start lever D50 is operated to start the next game. In other words, even if the bet button D220 is operated, the effect displayed by the third stop operation will not be erased, but will be erased if the start lever D50 is operated appropriately (bet operation → start lever operation). Therefore, the continuation image will also be erased if the start lever D50 is operated appropriately.

On the other hand, the display such as "Repel!" indicating the lottery result may be configured to disappear when the bet button D220 is operated after the third stop operation, or, like the continuation image, may be configured to disappear when the start lever D50 is operated appropriately.

The timing of displaying the continuation image may be configured so that, a predetermined time after the stop button, which marks the third stop, is switched from on to off, the display begins with the letters "NEXT" moving from the bottom left to the bottom right of the performance display device S40 in a manner that is difficult to see, or a predetermined time after the stop button, which marks the third stop, is switched from off to on, the display begins with the letters "NEXT" moving from the bottom left to the bottom right of the performance display device S40 in a manner that is difficult to see. The display timing (display trigger) of the continuation image may also be varied depending on the type of continuous performance.

It is also possible to change the background music while a continuous effect is being executed. Specifically, the system is configured to change the background music at the timing of any of the lever effect display, first effect display, second effect display, third effect display, and sub-input button effect display, thereby notifying the player that the continuous effect will be successful. The frequency (probability) of the timing at which the background music changes is configured to be: frequency of background music change at the timing of the lever effect display (hereinafter, the frequency of the lever effect display) ≥ frequency of background music change at the timing of the third effect display (hereinafter, the frequency of the third effect display) ≥ frequency of background music change at the timing of the first effect display (hereinafter, the frequency of the first effect display) ≥ frequency of background music change at the timing of the second effect display (hereinafter, the frequency of the second effect display). This configuration allows the background music change to notify the player that a confirmed effect is being executed, preventing the player from missing the confirmed effect.

In addition, the BGM may be changed at the timing of the sub-input button effect display to notify the player that the consecutive effects will be successful. The relationship between the frequency (probability) of the timing at which the BGM changes is configured as follows:
(1) The frequency of the background music changing at the timing of the sub input button effect display (hereinafter referred to as the frequency of the sub input button effect display) ≥ the frequency of the lever effect display ≥ the frequency of the third effect display ≥ the frequency of the first effect display ≥ the frequency of the second effect display. (2) The frequency of the lever effect display ≥ the frequency of the sub input button effect display ≥ the frequency of the third effect display ≥ the frequency of the first effect display ≥ the frequency of the second effect display. (3) The frequency of the lever effect display ≥ the frequency of the third effect display ≥ the frequency of the sub input button effect display ≥ the frequency of the first effect display ≥ the frequency of the second effect display. (4) The frequency of the lever effect display ≥ the frequency of the third effect display ≥ the frequency of the first effect display ≥ the frequency of the sub input button effect display ≥ the frequency of the second effect display. (5) The frequency of the lever effect display ≥ the frequency of the third effect display ≥ the frequency of the first effect display ≥ the frequency of the second effect display ≥ the frequency of the sub input button effect display. By configuring it in this way, the change in the background music can be used to notify the player that a confirmation effect is being executed, thereby preventing the player from missing the confirmation effect.

The continuous effects may be any effects that are composed of a combination of effect displays that occur in response to a specified gaming operation (operation of the bet button D220, operation of the start lever D50, first to third stop operations, operation of the sub-input button SB, etc.).

Note that the first, second, and third stop operations are merely examples, and are not limited to the order shown. In this example, the display of the continuous effects progresses through the first, second, and third stop operations. For example, the first stop operation has the same effect whether it is the left stop button or the right stop button.

<Example of production 4>
FIG. 73 shows a fourth example of the presentation, showing the start and end display of a predetermined presentation in the AT state, i.e., the advantageous zone (AT). (a)-(c), which are the start display of the predetermined presentation in the advantageous zone (AT), are presentation displays displaying an image such as "AT Start" to notify the player that the advantageous zone (AT) is about to begin, and are the lever display described above. The start display in the fourth example of the presentation is executed in the first game (first game) after the advantageous zone (AT) is reached. However, in a slot machine where the initial number of games and initial number of coins in the advantageous zone (AT) are determined before the start display, the start display may be executed in a game several games after the advantageous zone (AT) is reached, in which the start display is executed. (d) and (e), which are the end display of the predetermined presentation in the advantageous zone (AT), are presentation displays displaying an image such as "AT End" to notify the player that the advantageous zone (AT) is about to end, and are the third display described above. The end effect display in effect example 4 shows an example of being executed in the final game of the advantageous zone (AT) (a game in which the number of remaining games in the AT becomes 0 or a game in which the number of winning coins in the advantageous zone (AT) becomes a predetermined number).

First, in (a) showing the start effect display, when the player operates the start lever D50, lever effect display C begins as the lever effect display. Here, the first cut of lever effect display C displays an image that reads "AT Start," announcing that the AT is about to begin.

(b) shows the lever effect display C in the second cut. After the lever effect display C in the first cut is executed, the lever effect display C in the second cut is executed on the condition that the first stop operation is not performed. The lever effect display C in the second cut is an effect display of a person holding a spear.

(c) shows the lever effect display C in the third cut. After the lever effect display C in the second cut is executed, the lever effect display C in the third cut is executed, provided that the first stop operation is not performed. The lever effect display C in the third cut is an effect display in which a shark appears above the sea. In this way, the start effect display of a specified effect in the advantageous zone (AT) shown in effect example 4 is an effect display with three cuts.

Next, in (d), which shows the end effect display, when the player performs the third stop operation, the third effect display E begins as the third effect display. Here, the first cut of the third effect display E displays an image of "Final Game" to notify players that the AT is ending.

(e) shows the third effect display E of the second cut. After the third effect display E of the first cut is executed, the third effect display E of the second cut is executed on the condition that the start lever D50 is not operated to start the next game. The third effect display E of the second cut is an effect display that displays an image indicating the end of the AT, an image showing the number of medals won in the advantageous zone (AT), and an image showing the number of games played in the advantageous zone (AT). In this way, the effect display for the end of a specified effect in the advantageous zone (AT) shown in effect example 4 is an effect display with two cuts.

In this type of presentation example 4, the number of cuts (3 cuts) in the start presentation display of a specified presentation in the advantageous zone (AT) is greater than the number of cuts (2 cuts) in the end presentation display of a specified presentation in the advantageous zone (AT). By making the start presentation display in this way more dynamic (with a large number of cuts), it is possible to add excitement to the start of the advantageous zone (AT) and create a sense of anticipation for future game developments, and by making the end presentation display more relaxed, it is possible to properly notify the player of the results of the game.

Note that while Presentation Example 4 shows an example of the presentation of the advantageous zone (AT), it is not limited to the advantageous zone (AT) and may be other game zones (for example, the normal zone, the advantageous zone (normal), the first state, the second state, the third state, etc.).

It may also be applicable to the start effect display displayed in the game at the start of a continuous effect and the end effect display displayed in the game at the end, or the start effect display displayed in the game at the start of a chance zone and the end effect display displayed in the game at the end.

In addition, the average tempo of the background music during the start performance display is set to be faster than the average tempo of the background music during the end performance display. This configuration creates a stronger sense of anticipation for the upcoming game developments.

Alternatively, the following configuration may be adopted.
(1) The average tempo of the background music during the execution of the start performance display for a specified performance stage is faster than the average tempo of the background music for a specified performance stage in the advantageous zone (normal).
(2) The average tempo of the background music during the execution of the start performance display for a specified performance stage is faster than the average tempo of the background music for a specified performance stage in the advantageous zone (AT).
(3) The average tempo of the background music during the execution of the start performance display is faster than the average tempo of the background music for all performance stages that can be set in the advantageous zone (normal).
(4) The average tempo of the background music during the execution of the start performance display is faster than the average tempo of the background music for all performance stages that can be set in the advantageous zone (AT).
(5) The average tempo of the background music during the execution of the start performance display for a specified performance stage is faster than the average tempo of the specified stage change performance (the performance that becomes the specified performance stage after the stage change).
(6) The average tempo of the background music during the start effect display is faster than the average tempo of all stage change effects.
This configuration can create a stronger sense of anticipation for the development of the game that is about to begin.

In addition, the maximum volume of the background music for the start effect display is set to be louder than the maximum volume of the background music for the end effect display. This loud announcement that the start effect display is being executed can create even greater anticipation in the player for future game developments.

<Example of production 5>
FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a fifth example of presentation, illustrating the result presentation display in a continuous presentation. The (l1)1 to (l1)2 cuts of the result presentation display in the continuous presentation are failure presentation displays announcing the failure of the continuous presentation. The (l2)1 to (l2)3 cuts of the result presentation display in the continuous presentation are success presentation displays announcing the success of the continuous presentation. The presentation displays from the start presentation display of the continuous presentation to the result presentation display before the result presentation display are the same as those in FIGS. 71 and 72 (a) to (k). The failure presentation display and success presentation display in the fifth example of presentation are examples applied to a continuous presentation, but it should be noted that they may also be applied to a chance zone, for example, or to presentations showing other results of success or failure.

First, in (l1), which shows a failed display, when the player performs the third stop operation, the third display B corresponding to the third stop operation begins. Here, the third display B in the first cut shows a display in which the thrown spear does not hit the shark, indicating that the command display has failed. The second cut in the next (l2) shows the third display B in the second cut.

The second cut in (l1) shows the third effect display B of the second cut. After the third effect display B of the first cut is executed, the third effect display B of the second cut is executed on the condition that the start lever D50 to start the next game is not operated. The third effect display B of the second cut is an effect display that displays an image of the word "unfortunate." In this way, the failure effect display shown in effect example 5 is an effect with two cuts.

Next, in (l2), which shows the success effect display, when the player performs the third stop operation, the third effect display C corresponding to the third stop operation begins. Here, the first cut of the third effect display C displays an image of the words "Repel!" indicating that the shark has been repelled, and an effect display is performed indicating that it was a success (win).

The second cut in (l2) shows the third effect display C of the second cut. After the third effect display C of the first cut is executed, the third effect display C of the second cut is executed on the condition that the start lever D50 is not operated to start the next game. The third effect display C of the second cut is an effect display of a human face.

The third cut in (l2) shows the third effect display C of the third cut. After the third effect display C of the second cut is executed, the third effect display C of the third cut is executed on the condition that the start lever D50 to start the next game is not operated. The third effect display C of the third cut is an effect display that displays an image of the words "Congratulations." In this way, the success effect display shown in effect example 5 is an effect with three cuts.

In this type of presentation example 5, the number of cuts (3 cuts) of the success presentation display announcing success as a result of presentations consisting of multiple games such as consecutive presentations indicating success or failure and chance zones is configured to be greater than the number of cuts (2 cuts) of the failure presentation display announcing failure. By making the presentation display for success in this way more dynamic (more cuts), it is possible to create a sense of anticipation for the benefits that will be awarded in the future, as well as a sense of anticipation for future developments in the game.

Furthermore, in presentation example 5, the total number of cuts from the lever presentation display (i in Figure 71) of the final game of the consecutive presentation to the success presentation display announcing success is configured to be greater than the total number of cuts from the lever presentation display (i in Figure 71) of the final game of the consecutive presentation to the failure presentation display announcing failure. By making the presentation display for successes in this way a presentation display with a lot of movement (a large number of cuts) can be created, which creates a sense of anticipation for the bonus to be awarded in the future, as well as a sense of anticipation for future developments in the game. Note that, although an example has been shown in which the number of cuts from (i) to (k) in Figure 71 is the same regardless of whether the consecutive presentation is successful or unsuccessful, the number of cuts for successes may be greater than for failures.

Furthermore, in presentation example 5, the total number of cuts from the start presentation display of the consecutive presentation (a in Figure 71) to the success presentation display announcing success is configured to be greater than the total number of cuts from the start presentation display of the consecutive presentation (a in Figure 71) to the failure presentation display announcing failure. By making the presentation display for successes in this way a presentation display with a lot of movement (a large number of cuts), it is possible to create a sense of anticipation for the bonus that will be awarded in the future, as well as a sense of anticipation for future developments in the game. Note that, although an example has been shown in which the number of cuts from (a) to (k) in Figure 71 is the same regardless of whether the consecutive presentation is successful or unsuccessful, it is also possible to configure the number of cuts to be greater for successes than for failures.

Note that while Presentation Example 5 shows an example of the presentation of the advantageous zone (normal), it is not limited to the advantageous zone (normal) and may be other game zones (for example, the normal zone or advantageous zone (AT)), or the first state, second state, third state, etc.

Furthermore, in presentation example 5, a successful revival presentation display may be provided. The successful revival presentation display is a presentation display consisting of five cuts, which sequentially execute the first and second cuts of (l1) in Figure 74, and the second, third, and fourth cuts of (d4) in Figure 70. The number of cuts in this successful revival presentation display (5 cuts) is configured to be greater than the number of cuts in the successful presentation display (3 cuts) and the number of cuts in the failed presentation display (2 cuts). In this way, by making the presentation display for successful revival a presentation display with a lot of movement (a large number of cuts), it is possible to create a sense of anticipation for the bonus that will be awarded in the future, as well as a sense of anticipation for future developments in the game.

In addition, when a successful revival display is provided, the total number of cuts from (i) in Figure 71, which is the lever display for the final game of the consecutive performance, to the successful revival display announcing success is configured to be greater than the total number of cuts from (i) in Figure 71, which is the lever display for the final game of the consecutive performance, to the success display announcing success, and the total number of cuts from (i) in Figure 71, which is the lever display for the final game of the consecutive performance, to the failure display announcing failure. By making the display for a successful revival in this way a display with a lot of movement (a large number of cuts), it is possible to create a sense of anticipation for a bonus to be awarded in the future, as well as a sense of anticipation for future game developments. Note that, although an example has been shown in which the number of cuts from (i) to (k) in Figure 71 is the same regardless of whether the consecutive performance is successful or unsuccessful, it is also possible to configure the number of cuts for a successful revival to be greater than either a success or failure.

Furthermore, when a successful revival display is provided, the total number of cuts from the start display of the consecutive performance in Figure 71 (a) to the success display announcing success is configured to be greater than the total number of cuts from the start display of the consecutive performance in Figure 71 (a) to the success display announcing success, and the total number of cuts from the start display of the consecutive performance in Figure 71 (a) to the failure display announcing failure. By making the display for a successful revival in this way a display with a lot of movement (a large number of cuts) can be created, which creates a sense of anticipation for the bonus to be awarded in the future, as well as a sense of anticipation for future developments in the game. Note that, although an example has been shown in which the number of cuts from Figure 71 (a) to (k) is the same regardless of whether the consecutive performance is successful or unsuccessful, the number of cuts for a successful revival may be greater than either a success or failure.

In addition, the average tempo of the background music while a success effect is being displayed is faster than the average tempo of the background music while a failure effect is being displayed. This configuration creates a stronger sense of anticipation for the development of the game that begins after the success effect is displayed.

Alternatively, the following configuration may be adopted.
(1) The average tempo of the background music during the execution of a successful presentation display in a specified presentation stage is faster than the average tempo of the background music for the specified presentation stage in the advantageous zone (normal).
(2) The average tempo of the background music during the execution of a successful presentation display in a specified presentation stage is faster than the average tempo of the background music for a specified presentation stage in the advantageous zone (AT).
(3) The average tempo of the background music during the execution of the successful presentation display is faster than the average tempo of the background music for all presentation stages that can be set in the advantageous zone (normal).
(4) The average tempo of the background music during the execution of the successful presentation display is faster than the average tempo of the background music for all presentation stages that can be set in the advantageous zone (AT).
(5) The average tempo of the background music during the execution of the successful presentation display in a specified presentation stage is faster than the average tempo of the specified stage change presentation (the presentation that becomes the specified presentation stage after the stage change).
(6) The average tempo of the background music during the execution of the success effect display is faster than the average tempo of all stage change effects.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to create a stronger sense of anticipation for the development of the game that will begin after the success effect display.

In addition, the maximum volume of the background music for the success effect display is set to be louder than the maximum volume of the background music for the failure effect display. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to loudly announce that the success effect display is being executed, which can create even greater anticipation for the development of the game after the success effect display is displayed.

The brightness of the success effect display is also set to be higher than the brightness of the failure effect display. By making the success effect brighter in this way, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation for the bonus that will be awarded in the future. Furthermore, since brightness represents the brightness of the psychological sense of color, it is possible to brighten the player's psychological sense.

In addition, the saturation of the success effect display is configured to be higher than that of the failure effect display. By making the success effect display have a higher saturation in this way, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation for the bonus that will be awarded in the future. Furthermore, since saturation represents vitality, increasing the saturation of the success effect display can energize the player.

In addition, the advantageous zone (normal) is divided into a high probability state in the advantageous zone (normal) and a normal state in the advantageous zone (normal), and the brightness of the effects in the high probability state in the advantageous zone (normal) is configured to be lower than the brightness of the effects in the normal state in the advantageous zone (normal). In other words, the brightness of the effects in the normal state in the advantageous zone (normal) is configured to be higher than the brightness of the effects in the high probability state in the advantageous zone (normal). Because brightness represents brightness in the psychological sense of color, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation for future developments even in the normal state of the advantageous zone (normal), thereby brightening the player's psychological sense.

Note that the normal state is, for example, a state in which the AT has not been won and the probability of winning the AT is low. The high probability state is, for example, a state in which the AT has not been won and the probability of winning the AT is higher than in the normal state. The normal state and high probability state are not limited to these.

In addition, the saturation of the effects in the high probability state of the advantageous (normal) zone is lower than the saturation of the effects in the normal state of the advantageous (normal) zone. In other words, the saturation of the effects in the normal state of the advantageous (normal) zone is higher than the saturation of the effects in the high probability state of the advantageous (normal) zone. By increasing the saturation of the effects in the normal state of the advantageous (normal) zone in this way, it is possible to make it less likely that players will lose interest in playing, even in the normal state of the advantageous (normal) zone.

In addition, the system is configured so that continuous performances with lower brightness are easier to execute (develop) when continuous performances develop in a high-probability state in the advantageous (normal) zone than when continuous performances develop in the normal state of the advantageous (normal) zone. In other words, the brightness of continuous performances in the normal state of the advantageous (normal) zone is higher than the brightness of continuous performances in the high-probability state of the advantageous (normal) zone. Because brightness represents brightness in the psychological sense of color, by giving the player the possibility of success, such as the possibility of a continuous performance being successful even in the normal state of the advantageous (normal) zone, the player's psychological sense can be brightened.

In addition, the system is configured so that continuous effects with low saturation are easier to execute (develop) when continuous effects develop in a high-probability state in the advantageous (normal) zone than when continuous effects develop in the normal state of the advantageous (normal) zone. In other words, the system is configured so that the saturation of continuous effects in the normal state of the advantageous (normal) zone is higher than the saturation of continuous effects in the high-probability state of the advantageous (normal) zone. By increasing the saturation of continuous effects in the normal state of the advantageous (normal) zone in this way, it is possible to make it less likely that players will lose interest in playing, even in the normal state of the advantageous (normal) zone.

The brightness and saturation of UI images such as the presentation stage, mini-characters, and credit count remain constant regardless of the game state. UI images are images that can be displayed on the presentation display device S40 in the same (or similar) display format and in the same display area across multiple presentation stages.

Note that, as advantageous zones (normal), a high probability state of the advantageous zone (normal) and a normal state of the advantageous zone (normal) are provided, and an example of comparing brightness and saturation in one effect is shown, but the same is configured to be true when comparing the average brightness or average saturation in all effects that the gaming machine can execute and that are the subject of this example. The gaming zone is not limited to the advantageous zone (normal), and may be other gaming zones (for example, normal zones or advantageous zones (AT)). Furthermore, it is not limited to high probability states and normal states, and other states are also possible, as long as one state is more advantageous than another state.

In the above-mentioned effect examples 1 to 3, we have explained what branches and what does not branch within a single effect, but we would like to add that the same holds true when comparing the average (total) of all effects. In other words, the following relationship applies when comparing a single effect, but when comparing the average (total) of all effects, the relationship number of branches in effect displays based on the second stop operation < number of branches in effect displays based on the first stop operation < number of branches in effect displays based on the third stop operation also holds true.

Note that while examples 1 to 5 of the effects described above are examples of comparisons within a single effect, this is not limited to this, and any comparisons (for example, comparisons of averages or totals) within all effects that can be executed by the gaming machine and are the subject of each effect example are acceptable.

In Presentation Example 1, when comparing all presentations that can be executed by the gaming machine and are the subject of Presentation Example 1, the average (total) number of branches in the presentation display based on the third stop operation is configured to be relatively greater than the average (total) number of branches in the presentation display based on the second stop operation and the average (total) number of branches in the presentation display based on the first stop operation. Presentation Example 1 may also be equipped with presentations in which the number of branches in the presentation display based on the second stop operation and the number of branches in the presentation display based on the first stop operation are greater than the number of branches in the presentation display based on the third stop operation, but even in such cases, it is sufficient that the presentation is configured so that the average (total) number of branches in the presentation display based on the third stop operation is relatively greater than the average (total) number of branches in the presentation display based on the second stop operation and the average (total) number of branches in the presentation display based on the first stop operation when compared across all presentations.

In Presentation Example 2, when comparing all presentations that the gaming machine can execute and that are the subject of Presentation Example 2, the average (total) number of cuts in the third presentation display is configured to be relatively greater than the average (total) number of cuts in the first presentation display and the average (total) number of cuts in the second presentation display. Furthermore, the average (total) number of cuts in the other presentations that are the subject of Presentation Example 2 is configured to be relatively greater than the average (total) number of cuts in the final presentation that is the subject of Presentation Example 2. Presentation Example 2 may include presentations in which the number of cuts in the first presentation display and the number of cuts in the second presentation display are greater than the number of cuts in the third presentation display, but even when such presentations are included, it is sufficient that the average (total) number of cuts in the third presentation display is configured to be relatively greater than the average (total) number of cuts in the first presentation display and the average (total) number of cuts in the second presentation display when comparing the overall presentation. Additionally, in Presentation Example 2, there may be cases where the number of cuts in one confirmed presentation is greater than the number of cuts in one other presentation, but even in such cases, it is sufficient that the configuration is such that, when compared across the entire presentation, the average (total) number of cuts in the other presentations that are the subject of Presentation Example 2 is relatively greater than the average (total) number of cuts in the confirmed presentation that are the subject of Presentation Example 2.

In Presentation Example 3, when compared across all presentations that the gaming machine can execute and that are the subject of Presentation Example 3, and when compared across all consecutive presentations that the gaming machine can execute and that are the subject of Presentation Example 3, the average (total) number of branching presentation displays based on the first stop operation is configured to be relatively greater than the average (total) number of branching presentation displays based on the third stop operation during play of a game in the middle of a consecutive presentation that is the subject of Presentation Example 3, and the average (total) number of first presentation displays in the chance-up pattern corresponding to the first stop operation is configured to be relatively greater than the average (total) number of third presentation displays in the chance-up pattern corresponding to the third stop operation. Note that presentation example 3 may include a continuous presentation in which the number of branching presentation displays based on the third stop operation is greater than the number of branching presentation displays based on the first stop operation during play of a game in the middle of the continuous presentation. However, even when such a presentation is included, it is sufficient that, when compared across the entire presentation, the average (total) number of branching presentation displays based on the first stop operation during play of a game in the middle of the continuous presentation is relatively greater than the average (total) number of branching presentation displays based on the third stop operation. Also, presentation example 3 may include a presentation in which the number of third presentation displays in the chance-up pattern corresponding to the third stop operation is greater than the number of first presentation displays in the chance-up pattern corresponding to the first stop operation. However, even when such a presentation is included, it is sufficient that, when compared across the entire presentation, the average (total) number of first presentation displays in the chance-up pattern corresponding to the first stop operation is relatively greater than the average (total) number of third presentation displays in the chance-up pattern corresponding to the third stop operation.

In Presentation Example 4, when comparing all presentations that can be executed by the gaming machine and that are the subject of Presentation Example 4, the average (total) number of cuts in the start presentation display is configured to be relatively greater than the average (total) number of cuts in the end presentation display of the presentation that is the subject of Presentation Example 4. Presentation Example 4 may also be configured to have a greater number of cuts in the end presentation display than the number of cuts in the start presentation display, but even in such cases, it is sufficient that the average (total) number of cuts in the start presentation display is configured to be relatively greater than the average (total) number of cuts in the end presentation display of the presentation that is the subject of Presentation Example 4 when compared across all presentations.

In Presentation Example 5, when comparing all presentations that can be executed by the gaming machine and are the subject of Presentation Example 5, the average (total) number of cuts displaying successful presentations is relatively higher than the average (total) number of cuts displaying failed presentations in the presentations that are the subject of Presentation Example 5. Presentation Example 5 may also be configured to have a greater number of cuts displaying failed presentations than the number of cuts displaying successful presentations, but even in such cases, it is sufficient that the average (total) number of cuts displaying successful presentations is relatively higher than the average (total) number of cuts displaying failed presentations in the presentations that are the subject of Presentation Example 5 when comparing the entire presentation.

The effects in the above-mentioned effect examples 1 to 5 may be any effects that are composed of a combination of effect displays that are generated in response to a specified gaming operation (operation of the bet button D220, operation of the start lever D50, first to third stop operations, operation of the sub-input button SB, etc.).

In the above-mentioned performance examples 1 to 5, the left stop button D41 is operated as the first stop operation, the middle stop button D42 is operated as the second stop operation, and the right stop button D43 is operated as the third stop operation. However, this is merely an example, and the order of pressing the buttons is not limited to the example. For example, the first stop may be configured to have the same effect whether it is the left stop button, the middle stop button, or the right stop button.

Note that presentation examples 1 to 5 can also be applied to gaming machines that feature bonus roles.

It should be noted that the lever effect display A in Figure 69 (a), the first effect display A in (b1), the first effect display B in (b2), the second effect display A in (c), the third effect display A in (d1), the third effect display B in (d2), the third effect display C in (d3), and the third effect display D in Figure 70 (d4) each have different cuts (videos).

The above has discussed the relationship between the number of cuts (the relationship between a large number of cuts and a small number of cuts), but the relationship between the number of cuts can also be thought of as the length of time of each video. For example, if one regular performance A (e.g., the other performances mentioned above) is composed of four videos: a 3-second video A1, a 2.5-second video A2, a 2.5-second video A3, and a 2-second video A4, the number of cuts is four. In the case of this regular performance A, the 10-second performance is composed of four cuts, so the length of each video is 2.5 seconds. Also, for example, if one fixed performance B (e.g., the premium performance mentioned above) is composed of three videos: a 4-second video B1, a 3.5-second video B2, and a 2.5-second video B3, the number of cuts is three. In the case of this fixed performance B, the 10-second performance is composed of three cuts, so the length of each video is approximately 3.3 seconds. In this way, the length of video time per cut is shorter in normal effect A than in fixed effect B, and the number of cuts in normal effect A is relatively greater than the number of cuts in fixed effect B, so normal effect A can be made to have a better tempo than fixed effect B. Therefore, by intentionally reducing the number of cuts in fixed effect B, it is possible to draw attention to fixed effect B while preventing the player from getting bored with normal effect A. Note that the number of cuts and length of time for normal effect A and fixed effect B are merely examples and are not intended to be limiting. Also, some effects have the same number of cuts in normal effect A and fixed effect B, but it is sufficient that the length of video time per cut is normal effect A < fixed effect B.

<<Configuration 1>>
Next, with reference to Figures 75 to 79, we will explain Configuration 1, which is applicable to the reel-type gaming machine of this specification and is composed of a medal selector DS, a coin shooter D90, a chute main body DSH, and a hopper H40. The coin shooter D90 described in Configuration 1 will be referred to as a Type 1 coin shooter D90, and the coin shooter D90 described in Configuration 2 will be referred to as a Type 2 coin shooter D90. To give an overview of the Type 1 coin shooter D90 and the Type 2 coin shooter D90, the Type 1 coin shooter D90 is a coin shooter with a left-right entrance that is smaller than the left-right width of the medal selector DS, while the Type 2 coin shooter D90 is a coin shooter with a left-right entrance that is larger than the left-right width of the medal selector DS. Configuration 1 described below can be appropriately combined with the configurations of the first to twelfth embodiments.

Figure 75 is a front view showing the medal selector DS, Type 1 coin shooter D90, chute main body DSH, and hopper H40 inside the slot machine P. Note that Figure 75 shows the front door DU in a closed state. The medal selector DS is located near the door board D on the open end side of the front door DU, with the chute main body DSH located to the right of the medal selector DS and the coin shooter D90 located below the medal selector DS. Additionally, a hopper H40 is located in the rear box (see Figure 2).

The medal selector DS is equipped with an insertion acceptance sensor D10s, a first insertion sensor D20s, and a second insertion sensor D30s, which serve as passageways for gaming medals (hereinafter referred to as medals) inserted through the medal insertion slot D170. The insertion acceptance sensor D10s has the function of sorting medals inserted through the medal insertion slot D170 primarily based on size, and only accepting medals that meet standard dimensions (the function of a blocker D100 that can be operated between an allowed state and a disallowed state); medals (or other foreign objects) determined by this function to be non-compliant will be released toward the coin shooter D90 by the blocker D100 switching to the disallowed state.

The coin shooter D90 has two medal entrances: coin shooter entrance D91 and coin shooter entrance D92. The coin shooter entrance D91 is an entrance (opening) that accepts medals dispensed from the medal payout device H provided in the hopper H40, and medals dispensed from the medal payout device H are configured to be returned to the player from the coin shooter entrance D91 and the discharge port D240. The coin shooter entrance D92 is an entrance (opening) that accepts non-compliant medals that are discharged when the blocker D100 is in an unauthorized state, and is configured to accept medals (or other foreign objects) discharged from the medal selector DS. Medals accepted by the coin shooter entrance D92 are configured to be returned to the player from the discharge port D240 via the coin shooter D90.

The chute main body DSH is configured to allow medals that pass through it to flow in when the blocker D100 of the medal selector DS is in the permitted state. The chute main body DSH is located to the right of the medal selector DS, and is attached to the front door DU via the attachment part DSH10 with a fixing member such as a screw SC so that its left end is positioned a distance A (see Figure 76) from the right end of the medal selector DS so that it does not come into contact with (combine with) the medal selector DS. The chute main body DSH also has a flow path formed by the left and right wall parts and the bottom.

The screw SC is made of a material that is magnetically attachable and conductive. For example, it is made of steel.

As shown by the dashed dotted line, the center of the screw SC is located to the right of the right end of the topmost part of the coin shooter D90 and the right end of the coin shooter entrance D92. This configuration prevents the screw SC from falling into the coin shooter entrance D92 even if it falls vertically (vertically downward) during inspection or replacement of the chute main body DSH.

The hopper H40 is configured to receive and store medals that have flowed down the chute main body DSH. As shown in Figure 2, the hopper H40 has a rectangular opening at the top and is equipped with a medal payout device H at the bottom.

The coin shooter D90 and chute main body DSH are directly attached to the front door DU with fixing members such as screws SC, and the medal selector DS is indirectly attached to the front door DU, but the coin shooter D90 and chute main body DSH may be indirectly attached to the front door DU, or the medal selector DS may be directly attached to the front door DU. If an indirect attachment structure is used, the medal selector DS, coin shooter D90, and chute main body DSH are attached to an indirect member attached to the front door DU. Alternatively, a structure may be used in which parts of the medal selector DS, coin shooter D90, and chute main body DSH are directly attached to the front door DU, with the remaining parts attached indirectly.

Next, we will explain the various dimensions of the medal selector DS, Type 1 coin shooter D90, and chute main body DSH using Figures 76 and 77. Figure 76 is a front view showing the medal selector DS, Type 1 coin shooter D90, and chute main body DSH. Figure 77 is a plan view showing the medal selector DS, Type 1 coin shooter D90, and chute main body DSH.

The left-right length of the medal selector DS (distance from the left end to the right end, width in the left-right direction) is W1. The left-right length of the coin shooter entrance D92 (distance from the left end to the right end of the opening, width in the left-right direction) is W2, which is shorter than W1. This configuration ensures that medals released from the medal selector DS can be reliably received when the blocker D100 is in the unauthorized state, allowing incompatible medals to be returned to the player. The left-right length of the right end D95 of the coin shooter D90 (distance from the left end to the right end, width in the left-right direction) is W3. The right end D95 forms the perimeter of the coin shooter entrance D92.

A gap (gap) SM is provided between the right end of the medal selector DS and the left end of the chute main body DSH, and the distance of this gap SM (the distance from the right end of the medal selector DS to the left end of the chute main body DSH, the left-right length of the gap, and the gap spacing) is A. A is set to a dimension larger than the thickness of one medal (for example, the length of approximately two medals), but it may also be set to a dimension smaller than the thickness of one medal (for example, half the length of one medal). Note that even if A is set to a dimension smaller than the thickness of one medal, the medal selector DS or chute main body DSH may be configured to flex so that one medal is sandwiched in the gap (gap) SM.

The length of the flow path in the chute body DSH in the left-right direction (the distance from the left end to the right end of the flow path, the width of the flow path in the left-right direction) is D. Note that in Figure 76, the left and right walls that make up the flow path are the same height, and D is the length from the inside of the topmost part of the left wall to the inside of the topmost part of the right wall. However, if the left and right walls that make up the flow path are different heights (see Figure 79), D can be the length from the inside of one wall to the inside of the other wall at the position of the topmost part of the lower wall.

Although not shown, the diameter of the medal is M1 (e.g., 25 mm or 30 mm), and the thickness of the medal is M2 (e.g., 1.6 mm when the diameter is 25 mm, and 1.7 mm when the diameter is 30 mm).

Figure 76 shows a state in which a medal (shown by a solid line) is caught in the gap SM. Here, if the gap SM is smaller than the thickness of one medal, one medal will be caught in the gap SM. If the gap SM is larger than the thickness of one medal, two medals will be caught in the gap SM. If the right end D95 has a shape or structure that allows a medal to be placed on it, the state in which a medal is placed on the right end D95 is also referred to as a state in which a medal is caught in the gap SM. Examples of a shape or structure in which a medal can be placed on the right end D95 include a structure in which the top surface of the right end D95 slopes downward from back to front (see the direction in Figure 77), a structure in which the top surface of the right end D95 is flat, or a structure in which the top surface of the right end D95 is concave. While a situation in which a medal becomes caught in the gap SM like this can occur during inspections by hall staff, it can also occur for some reason during gameplay. The state in which a medal is caught (positioned) between member A (for example, medal selector DS) and member B (for example, chute main body DSH) may also be referred to as a "trapped" state, or the state in which a medal is caught (positioned) between member A and member B, and is in contact with member A, and is in contact with member B may also be referred to as a "trapped" state. The state in which a medal is caught (positioned) between member A and member B, and is in contact with member C (right end D95), may also be referred to as a "trapped" state.

As shown in FIG. 76, the gap SM is located between the medal selector DS and the chute main body DSH, and is a gap formed by the right end of the medal selector DS and the left end of the chute main body DSH. If the medal selector DS is indirectly attached to the front door DU using an indirect member such as a mounting bracket, the gap SM is a gap formed by the right end of the medal selector DS unit (a member combining the medal selector DS and an indirect member such as a mounting bracket) and the left end of the chute main body DSH. If the chute main body DSH is indirectly attached to the front door DU using an indirect member such as a mounting bracket, the gap SM is a gap formed by the right end of the medal selector DS (including the medal selector DS unit) and the left end of the chute main body DSH unit (a member combining the chute main body DSH and an indirect member such as a mounting bracket). In either case, the gap SM is a gap located between the medal selector DS and the chute main body DSH, as long as it is large enough for a medal to be caught.

The coin shooter D90's coin shooter entrance D92 is not located below the gap SM, but rather the right end D95 of the coin shooter D90. This structure prevents the hall from suffering any disadvantages caused by medals (medals that should not be returned to players) that become caught during inspections by hall staff not being ejected into the medal tray D230 via the coin shoot D90.

A gap SM is provided between the medal selector DS and the chute main body DSH, and the coin shooter entrance D92 of the coin shooter D90 is not located below the gap SM. In addition, the gap SM is located above the upper end of the entrance to the hopper H40. This structure prevents medals (medals that should not be returned to players) that become caught during inspections or other work by hall staff from being ejected into the medal tray D230 via the coin shooter D90, preventing the hall from suffering any disadvantages. Furthermore, if a medal becomes caught during inspections or other work by hall staff and is forgotten to be removed, the medal will fall into the hopper H40 when the front door DU is closed, preventing medals from scattering inside the cabinet.

In addition, a gap SM is provided between the medal selector DS and the chute body DSH. The coin chute entrance D92 of the coin chute D90 is not located below the gap SM. Furthermore, the dimension A of the gap SM is approximately twice the thickness of a medal. In other words, the dimension A is approximately twice the medal thickness M2. This structure prevents medals (medals that should not be returned to players) trapped during inspections by hall staff from being ejected into the medal tray D230 via the coin chute D90, preventing the hall from suffering any disadvantages. Furthermore, by providing a gap SM that prevents trapped medals from becoming unremovable, they can be easily removed. Furthermore, if a medal is forgotten to be removed during inspections by hall staff, when the front door DU is closed, the medal flows down the top surface of the right end D95, which slopes downward from rear to front, and falls into the cabinet, preventing the flow of inserted medals from being obstructed. Furthermore, if the gap SM is configured to be located above the upper end of the entrance to the hopper H40, the medals will fall into the hopper H40, preventing medals from scattering inside the housing.

In addition, the mechanism is designed so that if a trapped medal falls vertically, it will collide with the right end D95. This prevents a medal from entering the coin shooter entrance D92 even if it falls vertically during an inspection by a hall staff member. If an inspection by a hall staff member is completed with a medal still on the right end D95, the medal will flow down the right end D95 and fall into the hopper H40 when the front door DU is closed (the medal indicated by the two-dot chain line in Figure 77 flows down the right end D95), preventing medals from becoming scattered inside the cabinet.

Furthermore, in addition to the structure that causes a trapped medal to collide with the right end D95 when it falls vertically, the structure is also such that the distance (length) H2 from the bottom end of the medal selector DS to the top end of the right end D95 is shorter than the medal's diameter M1, which further prevents a fallen medal from entering the coin shooter entrance D92. Furthermore, if the structure is such that H2 is shorter than the medal's radius M1/2, it becomes even more possible to prevent a fallen medal from entering the coin shooter entrance D92 directly.

Furthermore, the distance (length) H3 from the bottom end of the chute main body DSH to the top end of the right end D95 is designed to be shorter than the diameter M1 of a medal. Therefore, when the front door DU is closed with a medal still trapped inside, the right end of the medal selector DS and the left end of the chute main body DSH can more easily guide the medal to the hopper H40 on the rear side (see the rear direction in Figure 77). Furthermore, by designing H3 to be shorter than the medal radius M1/2, the right end of the medal selector DS and the left end of the chute main body DSH can more easily guide the medal to the hopper H40 on the rear side.

Furthermore, when the medal in Figure 76 (the medal shown by the solid line) is caught in the gap SM, the medal inserted through the medal insertion port D170 cannot pass through the medal selector DS. In other words, the medal cannot flow into the chute main body DSH. In such a situation, it is not possible to detect the state (situation) in which a medal is caught, but it is possible to detect the error by causing an error in the medal selector DS and to issue an error notification. Note that with regard to the error detection process, appropriate error detection is possible by executing the process of the ninth embodiment. When a medal is caught in the gap SM and the distance from the top of the medal to the connection between the medal selector DS and the chute main body DSH (more specifically, the center of an imaginary line connecting the lowest part of the right end of the flow path of the medal selector DS and the lowest part of the left end of the flow path of the chute main body DSH) is H1, the medal inserted from the medal insertion port D170 is completely prevented from flowing downward, and H1 in this state is longer than the radius of the medal (M1/2). Note that the state in which a medal is caught in this gap SM may also be when the medal is placed on the top end of the right end D95.

On the other hand, there is also a state (situation) in which a medal becomes caught in the gap SM, as shown by the two-dot chain line in Figure 76. In this state, a medal inserted through the medal insertion slot D170 can pass through the medal selector DS. In more detail, if the bottom of the caught medal is located above the top of the wall of the chute main body DSH (the wall closest to the front door), the medal inserted through the medal insertion slot D170 can pass through the medal selector DS. With this structure, even if a medal becomes caught during play, subsequent play can be continued without any problems.

As shown in the plan view of Figure 77, the coin shooter entrance D92 is composed of an opening D92-1 that is covered by the medal selector DS and an opening D92-2 that is not covered. Opening D92-1 is invisible to hall staff in a plan view, while opening D92-2 is visible to hall staff in a plan view. The distance between the front and back of opening D92-2 is W5, which is longer than the medal thickness M2 but shorter than the medal diameter M1. Therefore, when a hall staff member processes a medal (a medal to be returned to a player) that has become caught in the medal selector DS during an inspection or other procedure, the medal can be easily returned to the medal tray D230 via the coin shooter D90 by inserting it into opening D92-2, without having to go around to the medal tray D230 on the front door DU side and return the medal. Note that W5 need only be longer (longer) than the thickness M2 of a single medal, and even with this structure, by inserting a medal into the opening D92-2, it can be easily returned to the medal tray D230 via the coin shooter D90. W5 may also be shorter than half the diameter of the medal, in other words, the radius M1/2, and even with this structure, by inserting a medal into the opening D92-2, it can be easily returned to the medal tray D230 via the coin shooter D90. It is also possible to prevent dropped medals (medals that should not be returned to the player) from being easily accepted by the opening D92-2.

Next, modified examples of the chute body DSH will be explained using Figures 78 and 79. Figure 78 is a diagram showing the chute body DSH of modified example 1. Figure 79 is a diagram showing the chute body DSH of modified example 2.

<Chute body DSH of modified example 1>
In Modification 1, as shown in Figures 78(a) and 78(b), a step DSH20 is formed midway (approximately at the middle) of the flow path of the chute main body DSH. The step DSH20 is formed at approximately the middle of the flow path, at a curved portion where the flow path direction gently bends as shown in (b). The height (dimension) B of the step DSH20 is configured to be less than half the diameter M1 of a medal and smaller than the height of the walls that make up the flow path (height H4 of the right wall, height H5 of the left wall). With this configuration, medals flowing down accelerate at the step DSH20, preventing medals from becoming stuck in the flow path.

The height H4 of the right wall and the height H5 of the left wall are configured to be higher than the diameter M1 of the medal. This structure prevents the medal from falling midway through the chute main body DSH. H4 and H5 may also be configured to be lower than the diameter M1 of the medal and higher than the radius (M1/2) of the medal. This structure also prevents the medal from falling midway through the chute main body DSH. H4 and H5 may be the same height or different heights.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 75 and 77, when the front door DU is closed, the most downstream portion of the chute main body DSH is configured to be located above the entrance to the hopper H40, but it may also be configured so that it is not located above the entrance to the hopper H40. In particular, in Figure 77, the most downstream portion of the chute main body DSH may be configured to be located in front of the hopper H40 (for example, the position indicated by the two-dot chain line). Even with this configuration, medals flowing downward due to the step DSH20 are released toward the hopper H40 at an accelerated state, allowing the medals to be collected by the hopper H40.

<Chute body DSH of modified example 2>
In variant example 2, as shown in (a) of Figure 79, the chute main body DSH is provided with an engagement portion DSH30 that engages with (combines with) the medal selector DS. The engagement portion DSH30 is integrally provided at the left end of the chute main body DSH and has a protruding shape, although the shape is not limited thereto. The engagement portion DSH30 is adapted to fit into a recess (not shown) provided on the back side of the medal selector DS (the forward side in Figure 77). When the engagement portion DSH30 is fitted into the recess (engaged state), the chute main body DSH is configured not to rotate around the screw SC. This prevents misalignment with the medal selector DS even if the screw SC loosens.

In addition, in variant 2, as shown in Figure 79 (a), the heights of the left and right walls that make up the flow path of the chute main body DSH are configured to be different. Specifically, the height of the right wall is H4 and the height of the left wall is H6, with H6 being configured to be lower than H4. H6 is also configured to be lower than the diameter M1 of the medal and higher than the radius (M1/2) of the medal. By configuring the height of the walls to be higher than the center of the medal in this way, the medal can be reliably supported as it flows down, preventing it from falling midway through the chute main body DSH.

Furthermore, when providing the step DSH20, it is preferable to configure B to be less than half the diameter M1 of the medal and smaller than the height of the walls that make up the flow path (height H4 of the right wall, height H6 of the left wall). By configuring it in this way, medals flowing down accelerate at the step DSH20, preventing them from becoming stuck in the flow path.

In addition, in Variation 2, as shown in Figure 79 (a), the attachment portion DSH10 (e.g., a screw hole) of the chute main body DSH is provided inside the flow path of the chute main body DSH. When the attachment portion DSH10 (screw hole) is provided inside the flow path, it is preferable to configure the position of the attachment portion DSH10 (position of the screw hole) to be above the height H6 of the left wall portion. By configuring it in this way, the chute main body DSH can be attached to the front door DU using a tool such as a screwdriver without having to worry about the height of the flow path.

Next, we will use Figure 79 (b) to explain the dimensions of the screw SC and a comparison with other dimensions. The length (longitudinal dimension) of the screw SC is C. The dimension (diameter) of the head (screw head) of the screw SC is E.

The screw SC's longitudinal dimension, C, the dimension from the left wall to the right wall that forms the flow path of the chute main body DSH, D, and the dimension of the screw SC's head, E, are configured so that the relationship D<C and D>E holds. By configuring the screw SC to have this relationship, if it becomes detached from the chute main body DSH, the flow path can accommodate the screw SC, preventing it from being lost.

Alternatively, the relationship D<C and D<E may be established. By configuring the screw SC to have such a relationship, if the screw SC comes off the chute main body DSH, the screw SC cannot be received by the flow path, allowing play to continue without interrupting the flow of medals.

Note that while the example shows a relationship of D<C, the structure may also be such that D>C. By configuring the structure so that the relationships D>C and D>E are both satisfied, if the screw SC becomes dislodged from the chute body DSH, the screw SC can be received in the flow path, preventing it from being lost.

Furthermore, the structure may be such that D is smaller than half the total thickness F of the number of medals that can be placed on the placement section of the medal insertion port D170. With this structure, even if medals placed on the placement section of the medal insertion port D170 are inserted continuously, the medals can flow down toward the hopper H40 in an aligned state without accumulating in the chute main body DSH, and medals can be prevented from overlapping within the flow path.

Furthermore, the position of the attachment portion DSH10 (screw hole) of the chute main body DSH of this example, including the chute main body DSH of Figures 78(a) and 79(a), is preferably located above the medal when the medal is located directly below the attachment portion DSH10. For example, as shown in Figure 79(a), the distance H7 from the bottom surface of the flow path of the chute main body DSH to the screw hole (the area below the hole in the figure) is configured to be greater than the diameter M1 of the medal. By configuring it in this way, even if the screw SC that secures the chute main body DSH is loose, the flow of medals is not impeded, and games can be played without errors (such as inserted medal retention errors) occurring.

<<Configuration 2>>
Next, with reference to Figures 80 to 82, we will explain Configuration 2, which consists of the medal selector DS, Type 2 coin shooter D90, chute main body DSH, and hopper H40. In explaining Configuration 2, components similar to those in Configuration 1 above will be given the same names and/or the same reference numerals, and their explanations will be omitted or simplified. Note that Configuration 2 described below can be appropriately combined with the configurations of the first to twelfth embodiments.

Figure 80 is a front view showing the medal selector DS, Type 2 coin shooter D90, chute main body DSH, and hopper H40 inside the slot machine P. Note that Figure 80 shows the front door DU in a closed state. The medal selector DS is located near the door board D on the open end side of the front door DU, with the chute main body DSH located to the right of the medal selector DS and the coin shooter D90 located below the medal selector DS. Additionally, a hopper H40 is located in the rear box (see Figure 2).

The medal selector DS is equipped with an insertion acceptance sensor D10s, a first insertion sensor D20s, and a second insertion sensor D30s, which serve as passageways for medals inserted through the medal insertion slot D170. The insertion acceptance sensor D10s has the function of sorting medals inserted through the medal insertion slot D170 primarily based on size, and only accepting medals that meet standard dimensions. Medals determined by this function to not meet the standard dimensions are released toward the coin shooter D90 when the blocker D100 enters a disallowed state.

The coin shooter D90 has two medal entrances: coin shooter entrance D91 and coin shooter entrance D92. The coin shooter entrance D91 is an entrance (opening) that accepts medals dispensed from the medal payout device H provided in the hopper H40, and medals dispensed from the medal payout device H are configured to be returned to the player from the discharge port D240 via the coin shooter entrance D91. The coin shooter entrance D92 is an entrance (opening) that accepts non-compliant medals that are discharged when the blocker D100 enters an unauthorized state, and is configured to accept medals discharged from the medal selector DS. Medals accepted by the coin shooter entrance D92 are configured to be returned to the player from the discharge port D240 via the coin shooter D90.

The chute main body DSH is configured to allow medals that pass through it to flow in when the blocker D100 of the medal selector DS is in the permitted state. The chute main body DSH is located to the right of the medal selector DS, and is attached to the front door DU via the attachment part DSH10 with a fixing member such as a screw SC so that the left end of the chute main body DSH is positioned a distance A (see Figure 81) from the right end of the medal selector DS so that it does not come into contact with (combine with) the medal selector DS.

As shown by the dashed dotted line, the center of the screw SC is located to the right of the right end of the topmost part of the coin shooter D90 and the right end of the coin shooter entrance D92. This configuration prevents the screw SC from falling into the coin shooter entrance D92 even if it falls vertically (vertically downward) during inspection or replacement of the chute main body DSH.

The hopper H40 is configured to receive medals that have flowed down the chute main body DSH. As shown in Figure 2, the hopper H40 has a rectangular opening at the top and is equipped with a medal payout device H at the bottom.

The medal selector DS, coin shooter D90, and chute body DSH are directly attached to the front door DU with fixing members such as screws SC, but they may also be indirectly attached to the front door DU.

Next, we will explain the various dimensions of the medal selector DS, Type 2 coin shooter D90, and chute main body DSH using Figures 81 and 82. Figure 81 is a front view showing the medal selector DS, Type 2 coin shooter D90, and chute main body DSH. Figure 82 is a plan view showing the medal selector DS, Type 2 coin shooter D90, and chute main body DSH.

The left-right length of the medal selector DS (distance from the left end to the right end, width in the left-right direction) is W1. Furthermore, the left-right length of the coin shooter entrance D92 (distance from the left end to the right end of the opening, width in the left-right direction) is W21, which is longer than W1. This configuration allows medals released from the medal selector DS when the blocker D100 is in the unauthorized state and medals caught in the gap SM described below to be accepted, ensuring that medals that should be returned to the player are reliably returned. Furthermore, the left-right length of the right end D95 of the coin shooter D90 (distance from the left end to the right end, width in the left-right direction) is W31.

The distance of the gap (gap) SM between the right end of the medal selector DS and the left end of the chute main body DSH is A, and A is set to a dimension larger than the thickness of one medal (for example, the length of approximately the thickness of two medals), but it may also be set to a dimension smaller than the thickness of one medal (for example, the length of half the thickness of one medal).

The length of the flow path in the chute body DSH in the left-right direction (the distance from the left end to the right end of the flow path, the width of the flow path in the left-right direction) is D. Note that in Figure 81, the left and right walls that make up the flow path are the same height, and D is the length from the inside of the topmost part of the left wall to the inside of the topmost part of the right wall. However, if the left and right walls that make up the flow path are different heights (see Figure 79), D can be the length from the inside of one wall to the inside of the other wall at the position of the topmost part of the lower wall.

Figure 81 shows a state in which a medal (shown by a solid line) is caught in the gap SM. If the gap SM is smaller than the thickness of one medal, one medal will be caught in the gap SM, and if the gap SM is larger than the thickness of one medal, two medals will be caught in the gap SM. This situation in which a medal becomes caught in the gap SM can occur during inspection work by hall staff, but it can also occur for some reason during gameplay.

As shown in FIG. 81, the gap SM is located between the medal selector DS and the chute main body DSH, and is a gap formed by the right end of the medal selector DS and the left end of the chute main body DSH. If the medal selector DS is indirectly attached to the front door DU using an indirect member such as a mounting bracket, the gap SM is a gap formed by the right end of the medal selector DS unit (a member combining the medal selector DS and an indirect member such as a mounting bracket) and the left end of the chute main body DSH. If the chute main body DSH is indirectly attached to the front door DU using an indirect member such as a mounting bracket, the gap SM is a gap formed by the right end of the medal selector DS (including the medal selector DS unit) and the left end of the chute main body DSH unit (a member combining the chute main body DSH and an indirect member such as a mounting bracket). In either case, the gap SM is a gap located between the medal selector DS and the chute main body DSH, as long as it is large enough for a medal to be caught.

The coin shooter entrance D92 of the coin shooter D90 is located below the gap SM. This structure allows medals that become caught during inspections by hall staff to be ejected via the coin shooter D90 into the medal tray D230, preventing the passage of inserted medals. Furthermore, this structure allows for medals (medals to be returned to players) caught in the medal selector DS during inspections by hall staff to be easily returned to the medal tray D230 via the coin shooter D90 by inserting them into the coin shooter entrance D92, without having to go around to the medal tray D230 on the front door DU side and return the medal. As shown in Figure 82, the distance from front to back of the coin shooter entrance D92 is W51, which is longer than the diameter M1 of a medal, and the length in the left-right direction of the coin shooter entrance D92 below the gap SM (the distance from the right end of the medal selector DS to the right end of the coin shooter entrance D92) is W22, which is longer than the thickness M2 of a medal, so that medals can be received in the part of the coin shooter entrance D92 below the gap SM.

Furthermore, a gap SM is provided between the medal selector DS and the chute main body DSH, and the coin shooter entrance D92 of the coin shooter D90 is located below the gap SM. In addition, the gap SM is located above the upper end of the entrance to the hopper H40. This structure allows for easy removal of medals (medals to be returned to players) caught in the medal selector DS during inspections or other work by hall staff. Instead of having to go around to the medal tray D230 on the front door DU side and return the medals, the medals can be easily returned to the medal tray D230 via the coin shooter D90 by inserting them into the coin shooter entrance D92. Furthermore, if a hall staff member forgets to remove a medal caught during inspections or other work, the medal will fall into the coin shooter entrance D92 or the hopper H40 when the front door DU is closed, preventing medals from scattering inside the cabinet.

In addition, a gap SM is provided between the medal selector DS and the chute main body DSH, and the coin shooter entrance D92 of the coin shooter D90 is located below the gap SM. In other words, the dimension A of the gap SM is approximately twice the thickness of a medal. In other words, the dimension A is approximately twice the medal thickness M2. By configuring the gap SM so that trapped medals are not lost, they can be easily removed. Furthermore, if a hall staff member forgets to remove a trapped medal during an inspection or other operation, the medal will fall when the front door DU is closed, preventing the flow of inserted medals. Furthermore, if the gap SM is configured to be higher than the top of the entrance to the hopper H40, medals that cannot be received at the coin shooter entrance D92 will fall into the hopper H40, preventing medals from being scattered inside the cabinet.

As shown in Figure 81, there is also a state (situation) in which a medal becomes caught in the gap SM. In this state, a medal inserted through the medal insertion slot D170 can pass through the medal selector DS. Specifically, if the bottom of the caught medal is located above the top of the wall of the chute main body DSH (the wall closer to the front door and higher than the diameter M1 of the medal), the medal inserted through the medal insertion slot D170 can pass through the medal selector DS. This structure prevents subsequent gameplay from being hindered even if a medal becomes caught during play. Note that if the height of the wall of the chute main body DSH is lower than the diameter M1 of the medal, the medal inserted through the medal insertion slot D170 can pass through the medal selector DS if the bottom of the caught medal is located higher than the diameter M1 of the medal passing through (the medal indicated by the two-dot chain line).

As shown in the plan view of Figure 82, the coin shooter entrance D92 is composed of an opening D92-1 that is covered by the medal selector DS and an opening D92-2 that is not covered. Opening D92-1 is invisible to hall staff in a plan view, while opening D92-2 is visible to hall staff in a plan view. The distance between the front and back of opening D92-2 is W52, which is longer than the medal thickness M2 but shorter than the medal diameter M1. Therefore, when a hall staff member processes a medal (a medal to be returned to a player) that has become caught in the medal selector DS during an inspection or other procedure, the medal can be easily returned to the medal tray D230 via the coin shooter D90 by inserting it into opening D92-2, without having to go around to the medal tray D230 on the front door DU side and return the medal. Note that W52 may be longer (longer) than the thickness M2 of a single medal, and even with this structure, by inserting a medal into the opening D92-2, the medal can be easily returned to the medal tray D230 via the coin shooter D90. W52 may also be shorter than half the diameter of the medal, in other words, the radius M1/2, and even with this structure, by inserting a medal into the opening D92-2, the medal can be easily returned to the medal tray D230 via the coin shooter D90.

The modified chute body DSH shown in Figures 78 and 79 can also be applied to the second embodiment.

<<<Third Embodiment>>>
Next, a third embodiment will be described, and in the description, the same symbols and wording will be used for the same parts as in the above-mentioned embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified. Note that all the configurations of the third embodiment can be applied to the other embodiments, and all the configurations of the other embodiments can be applied to the third embodiment.

Furthermore, while the third embodiment is a slot machine that uses gaming medals, it should be noted that the configurations detailed in the third embodiment that do not use gaming medals can also be applied to medal-less slot machines.

In the third embodiment, only the differences from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, Figure 83 is a flowchart of the game progress control process related to the subroutine of step 1200 in Figure 14. The difference from the second embodiment is step 1219-1, in which the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes error-related processing and proceeds to step 1220. Also, if the answer is No at step 1251, the process proceeds to step 1219-1.

Here, the error-related processing of step 1219-1 is configured to execute processing related to the play-stop state, including processing related to transitioning to the play-stop state. More specifically, processing to transition to the play-stop state when the play-stop flag is on, issuing a play-stop advance notification or play-stop notification on the payout number display device D270 (described below), and outputting a signal related to the play-stop state to the lending machine (sometimes referred to as the lending unit) are executed. Note that the error-related processing of step 1219-1 is configured to execute predetermined error monitoring processing and predetermined error stop processing (processing to stop the progress of the game) in addition to processing related to the play-stop state.

The main control board M may be configured to have a first RAM area, which is a storage area related to game progress, and a second RAM area, which is a storage area related to processing that differs from the normal game progress, such as error-related processing. In this configuration, the stop flag, the counter value of the difference counter, etc. may be stored in the second RAM area.

Furthermore, if the error-related processing in step 1219-1 results in a halted state, the system may be configured to execute an automatic settlement process (a process in which all game medals stored in the credits are paid out without the need to operate any operating members), or it may be configured not to execute the automatic settlement process.

Even if the system is configured to execute automatic settlement processing in the error-related processing of step 1219-1 when a game is stopped, if the game progress is stopped due to a specified error, the system will be configured not to execute automatic settlement processing in the error-related processing of step 1219-1.

Next, Figure 83 is a flowchart of the game progress control process related to the subroutine of step 1200 in Figure 14. The differences from the second embodiment are steps 3700 and 3800. That is, if the payout corresponding to the winning has been completed in step 1290 (Yes), or if there has been no winning to pay out game medals in step 1275 (No), then in step 3700, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes the end-of-game monitoring process described above. Next, in step 3800, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes the MY counter monitoring process described above, and proceeds to step 3400.

In this way, in the third embodiment, the processing of steps 3700 and 3800 is executed at a timing prior to the processing related to updating the game status from step 3400 to step 1293. In other words, the processing related to updating (and/or calculating) the counter value of the difference counter and updating (and/or calculating) the counter value of the MY counter is executed prior to the processing related to updating the game status.

Furthermore, as described in detail in Figures 83 and 84, in the third embodiment, the game progress control process (sometimes referred to as the main loop process) is configured to execute the error-related process of step 1219-1, which includes processing related to the game stop state, and then execute the game stop monitoring process of step 3700, which includes processing related to updating the difference counter. In other words, if the game stop monitoring process is executed in a certain game progress control process and the calculation result related to the counter value of the difference counter becomes less than 0, turning the game stop flag on, the game is configured to transition to the game stop state in the error-related process in the next game progress control process of that certain game progress control process.

Furthermore, if the error-related processing transitions to a game-stop state, the error-related processing may be configured so that the specified error monitoring processing or specified error stop processing is not subsequently executed, just as with other errors that result in game play being stopped.

<<Diagram of the payout number display device>>
Next, Figure 85 is a diagram showing the display of the payout number display device D270 in the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, the payout number display device D270 is configured to be able to execute (display) payout number display, push order navigation, error notification, as well as pre-stop notification, reservation status notification, and stop notification. Below, the specific display mode of the payout number display device D270 will be described in detail.

In addition, the payout number display device D270 in the third embodiment is composed of a two-digit seven-segment display.

<Pre-booking notification, reservation status notification, and booked-out notification>
Figures (a1) to (a5) show the display mode of the pre-limit notification, which is configured so that the pre-limit notification can be displayed on the payout number display device D270 when the maximum difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number since the power was turned on becomes equal to or greater than a specific number (in this example, 18,500).

Here, the pre-limit notification informs the player that there is a small difference in the number of payouts remaining until the limit state is reached; in other words, it is a notification that suggests the remaining difference in the number of payouts until the limit state is reached. In the third embodiment, this is configured to be displayed on the payout number display device D270 controlled by the main control board M, but it is not limited to this. As will be described later, the notification may be configured to be displayed on another display device (which may be a lamp, etc.) controlled by the main control board M, or on a display device controlled by the sub-control board S, or on multiple display devices, including a display device controlled by the main control board M and a display device controlled by the sub-control board S.

Note that, unlike the second embodiment, the third embodiment is configured to transition to a pre-notification state when the maximum difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number since power-on reaches 18,500 or more. In other words, the third embodiment is configured to transition to a pre-notification state when the counter value of the difference number counter falls to 500 or less.

Specific display modes for the pre-limit notification on the payout number display device D270 are as follows: if the maximum difference in the number of payouts based on the timing of the smallest difference since power-on is 18,500 or more and less than 18,600, "L5" lights up as shown in (a1); if the maximum difference in the number of payouts based on the timing of the smallest difference since power-on is 18,600 or more and less than 18,700, "L4" lights up as shown in (a2); When the largest difference number measured is greater than or equal to 18,700 and less than 18,800, the light is illuminated as "L3" as shown in (a3); when the largest difference number measured based on the timing with the smallest difference number since power-on is greater than or equal to 18,800 and less than 18,900, the light is illuminated as "L2" as shown in (a4); and when the largest difference number measured based on the timing with the smallest difference number since power-on is greater than or equal to 18,900 and less than 19,000, the light is illuminated as "L1" as shown in (a5). In other words, when the largest difference number measured based on the timing with the smallest difference number since power-on is greater than or equal to a specific number (18,500 in this example), the display mode is switched in the following order for each increase of 100 in the largest difference number measured based on the timing with the smallest difference number since power-on.

This configuration simplifies the control of when the pre-notification of the end of play, which is information corresponding to the difference number, switches before the end of play state is reached. Furthermore, by setting the range of counter values of the difference number counter corresponding to one pre-notification of the end of play to a fixed value (100 in this example), it is possible to prevent confusion among players.

Note that the above-mentioned fixed value (100 in this example) may be referred to as the difference number of the specified number, and the ranges of the difference number of the specified number may be referred to as the maximum difference number based on the timing when the difference number is smallest since power-on: 18,500 or more and less than 18,600, 18,600 or more and less than 18,700, 18,700 or more and less than 18,800, 18,800 or more and less than 18,900, and 18,900 or more and less than 19,000.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the fixed value was set to 100, but it is not limited to this and can be changed without any problems. By setting the fixed value to a small value, more detailed pre-limitation notifications can be provided to the player, and by setting the fixed value to a large value, the data volume used for pre-limitation notifications can be reduced. The range of difference numbers that switches the display mode of the pre-limitation notification can also be set to a non-fixed value. For example, if the maximum difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number since power-on is greater than or equal to 18,500 and less than 18,700, "L5" is lit; if the maximum difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number since power-on is greater than or equal to 18,700 and less than 18,850, "L4" is lit; and if the maximum difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number since power-on is greater than or equal to 18,850 and less than 18,920, "L3" is lit. The indicator may be configured so that the range of difference numbers corresponding to the advance warning of limit narrows as the maximum difference number based on the timing of the smallest difference number since power-on approaches a predetermined number (19,000 in this example) at which limit is reached, and if the maximum difference number based on the timing of the smallest difference number since power-on is greater than or equal to 18,920 and less than 18,970, the indicator lights up at "L2", and if the maximum difference number based on the timing of the smallest difference number since power-on is greater than or equal to 18,970 and less than 19,000, the indicator lights up at "L1".

In addition, when the payout number display device D270 displays "L1" as a pre-limit notification, if the maximum difference based on the timing when the difference was smallest since the power was turned on reaches a predetermined number (19,000 in this example), if a bonus is being played at the time of reaching this point, the game will enter a limit reservation state, as in the second embodiment, and the display mode of the payout number display device D270 will switch to "L0" as a reservation state notification corresponding to the limit reservation state, as shown in (a6).If a bonus is not being played at this time, the game will enter a limit state, and the payout number display device D270 will display "CP" as a limit notification corresponding to the limit state, as shown in (a7).

In addition, even if the maximum difference based on the timing when the difference was smallest since power was turned on during bonus play reaches a predetermined number (19,000 in this example), the game may be configured to transition to a stop state after the game ends when the predetermined number is reached.In this case, the game may be configured not to have a stop reservation state.

Note that the specified number (in this example, 19,000) may be referred to as the first value.

The stoppage state may also be referred to as a complete state or the complete function being activated. The reservation status notification may also be referred to as a stoppage advance notification.

Furthermore, when the stop state is reached, the speaker S20 may be configured to output a sound indicating that the stop state has been reached, and the lamp unit may be configured to light up in a lighting mode corresponding to the stop state.Furthermore, when the stop reservation state is reached, the speaker S20 may be configured to output a sound indicating that the stop reservation state has been reached, and the lamp unit may be configured to light up in a lighting mode corresponding to the stop reservation state.

<Dispense quantity display>
Furthermore, when a symbol combination that generates a payout is displayed, the payout number corresponding to the symbol combination is displayed on the payout number display device D270. As a specific example, as shown in (b1), if 10 coins are paid out, "10" is displayed.

Here, if 10 coins are paid out, the display mode of the payout number display device D270 may be configured to display "non-display → 10", or may be configured to count up by one, such as "non-display → 1 → 2 → ... → 8 → 9 → 10". Note that the non-display above may also be replaced with 0.

<Error notification>
Furthermore, if an error occurs, an error notification corresponding to the error will be displayed on the payout number display device D270. As a specific example, as shown in (c1), if an inserted medal backflow error occurs, "EE" will be displayed. Note that the occurrence of an error means that the gaming machine detects that an error has occurred, and in a situation where an error has occurred, the gaming machine will execute an error notification regarding the error that is occurring. Specific examples of error notifications include notification by various lamps on the main control board M, or notification by the speaker S20 or performance display device S40 on the sub-control board S. Furthermore, the detection by the gaming machine of the occurrence of an error is sometimes referred to as an error state.

Although not shown, the third embodiment has multiple types of errors (multiple recoverable errors and multiple unrecoverable errors), and is configured so that an error notification corresponding to each error can be displayed on the payout number display device D270. As an example, if an inserted medal retention error occurs, "E1" is displayed on the payout number display device D270, and there is no problem with changing the display format of the error notification as long as it differs depending on the type of error.

As mentioned above, the third embodiment has multiple errors, and is configured to display an error notification corresponding to the error that has occurred in the left digit (sometimes referred to as the first digit) and the right digit (sometimes referred to as the second digit) of the payout number display device D270. Regardless of the type of error that has occurred, the display format of the left digit of the payout number display device D270 in the error notification is different from that of the left digit of the payout number display device D270 in the pre-limit notification, reservation status notification, or limit notification (the three notifications are sometimes collectively referred to as notifications related to limit). (In FIG. 85, the left digit of the payout number display device D270 in the error notification is "E," while the left digit of the payout number display device D270 in the pre-limit notification, reservation status notification, or limit notification is "L" or "C").

This configuration prevents players and arcade managers from confusing the payout number display device D270 for error notifications and notifications regarding the end of play.

Note that notifications regarding cutoff may be referred to as "information corresponding to the difference number after a predetermined time after power-on" or "information corresponding to the difference number," and advance cutoff notifications may be referred to as "information corresponding to the difference number after a predetermined time after power-on" or "information corresponding to the difference number."

In this way, the payout number display device D270 is configured to display a variety of information, and by varying the display format and timing, the player can understand what information is currently being displayed (details will be provided later).

In the third embodiment, a 7-segment display such as the payout number display device D270 may be configured to have DPs (circular lit areas, sometimes referred to as dot points), which may be located, for example, in the lower right area (so that there are eight lit areas). In this configuration, an error notification corresponding to an inserted medal backflow error may be displayed as "CE" on the payout number display device D270, and a play-end notification may be displayed as "C.P." on the payout number display device D270. In other words, by displaying the left digit of the payout number display device D270 as "C" and "C.", the display pattern of the left digit of the payout number display device D270 for an error notification and the left digit of the payout number display device D270 for a play-end notification may be different. In other words, even if the left digit of the payout number display device D270 is lit in a lighting pattern indicating the same alphabet, it can be distinguished by whether or not the DP is lit, so different lighting patterns may be used.

Furthermore, when a player or an amusement facility manager visually checks the payout number display device D270, it is sufficient to be able to distinguish whether the notification is an error notification or a notification regarding a game being stopped, and the display format of the left digit of the payout number display device D270 for an error notification may be the same as that of the left digit of the payout number display device D270 for a notification regarding a game being stopped.

<Diagram of payout number display device when replay is stopped>
Next, FIG. 86 is a diagram relating to the display of the payout number display device D270 when a symbol combination corresponding to replay is stopped and displayed according to the third embodiment.

First, in (a) of the figure, a game with a three-coin bet is being played in a specified gaming state (which may be an AT state in which push order navigation is executed, or a gaming state other than an AT state). The counter value of the difference counter is 480, and the effect display device S40 displays the message "480 coins remaining until the game is stopped" as a display indicating the game is about to stop.

Then, a stop operation is performed on the reels, the symbol combination corresponding to a miss is displayed as stopped, the difference counter value becomes 483, and the effect display device S40 displays "483 medals remaining until the game is stopped" as a stoppage indication. Furthermore, at the timing shown in (b) in the figure after all the reels have stopped, game medals can be inserted, and the payout number display device D270 displays "L5" corresponding to the difference counter value of 483 as a stoppage advance notification.

In this way, in the third embodiment, when the payout number display device D270 displays a pre-limit notification, it is displayed at the timing when it becomes possible to insert gaming medals.

The timing at which it becomes possible to insert gaming medals and the advance notification of the end of the game is displayed is sometimes referred to as the specific timing at which betting becomes possible.

In the third embodiment, the timing at which the payout number display device D270 starts to display notifications related to the end of the game, such as advance notifications regarding the end of the game, is the timing at which it becomes possible to insert gaming medals, but this is not limited to this, and the timing may also be the timing when a predetermined time has passed since all reels have stopped, the timing at which all reels have stopped, or the timing at which the payout process has ended.

After that, when three game medals are bet and the start lever D50 is operated (when the operation of the start lever D50 is accepted), the advance notice of the end of the game on the payout number display device D270 disappears, and then, at the timing shown in (c), the reels for the next game (a game with a three-coin bet) of the game shown in (a) begin to spin.

In addition, when the payout number display device D270 in the same figure is hidden, it may be configured to display "00" or "0" (similarly, in other configurations, the hidden display can be changed to "00" or "0").

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, as in the second embodiment, the counter value of the difference counter is updated after the medal payout process is completed, but the timing at which the difference counter is updated may be changed, or the timing at which the difference counter is updated when medals are inserted may be different from the timing at which the difference counter is updated when medals are paid out. As a specific example, the counter value of the difference counter may be incremented (by 3 if 3 is bet) when a bet is made as shown in (c) in the figure.

Then, a stop operation is performed on the reels, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is displayed as stopped, and an automatic bet corresponding to the replay symbol is executed. Furthermore, the counter value of the difference counter remains at 483 (step 3704 in FIG. 57 returns No), and the effect display device S40 continues to display "483 more coins until the game is stopped" as a stop state indication. Furthermore, after all the reels have stopped and displayed as shown in (d) in the figure, game medals can be inserted, but the payout number display device D270 does not display any advance notice of the stop state.

In this way, in the third embodiment, when a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed, the process of updating the counter value of the difference counter is not executed, and the payout number display device D270 is configured not to display a pre-end notification.

Also, as shown in FIG. 86, in the third embodiment, when the counter value of the difference counter is at a value that displays a pre-limit notification, the payout number display device D270 is configured to display the pre-limit notification during the period from when it becomes possible to insert gaming medals until the operation of the start lever D50 is accepted. However, if a symbol combination corresponding to a replay (sometimes referred to as a replay symbol) is still displayed during this period, the pre-limit notification will not be displayed. In other words, when the counter value of the difference counter is at a value that displays a pre-limit notification and a replay symbol is still displayed, the pre-limit notification will not be displayed during the period until the operation of the start lever D50 is accepted (which may be the period from when an automatic bet is made until the operation of the start lever D50 is accepted).

In addition, when the replay symbol is displayed in a stopped state, the speaker S20 may output a sound indicating that the replay symbol has been displayed in a stopped state, or the lamp unit may be configured to light up in a lighting mode corresponding to the replay.

When the replay symbol is displayed, there is little chance that the player will change, and even if the player does change, there is little chance that the next player will be at a disadvantage. Therefore, as described above, when the replay symbol is displayed, power consumption can be reduced by configuring the payout number display device D270 not to display a pre-notification of the end of the game.

However, this is not limited to this, and even when the replay symbol is displayed as stopped, the payout number display device D270 may be configured to display a pre-end notification (for example, from the time an automatic bet is placed until the start lever D50 is operated (specifically, in the situation shown in (d) in Figure 86)), and by configuring it in this way, the processing related to the pre-end notification can be simplified.

L0, which is the reservation status notification corresponding to the full play reservation state, is configured to be displayed in the same way as "L5" and others during the period from when it becomes possible to insert a gaming medal until the operation of the start lever D50 is accepted. Also, like "L5" and others, "L0" may be configured not to be displayed when a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed in a stopped state, or "L0" may be configured to be displayed even when a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed in a stopped state.

<Diagram of the payout number display device when the payout is stopped>
Next, FIG. 87 is a diagram relating to the display of the payout number display device D270 when the payout is stopped according to the third embodiment.

First, in (a) of the figure, a game with a bet of three coins is being played in an AT state, which is a game state (state related to AT) in which push order navigation is executed in a game in which a push order role (for example, a role in which the number of game medals paid out can vary depending on the order in which the reels stop, such as a push order bell) has been won. In this game, push order navigation is not being executed because the push order role has not been won, the counter value of the difference counter is 4, and the effect display device S40 displays the message "4 coins left to reach the limit" as a display indicating the limit.

Then, a stop operation is performed on the reels, the symbol combination corresponding to a miss is displayed as stopped, the difference counter value becomes 7, and the effect display device S40 displays "7 more medals until the game is stopped" as a display indicating a game is about to end. Furthermore, at the timing shown in (b) in the figure after all the reels have stopped, game medals can be inserted, and the payout number display device D270 displays "L1" corresponding to the difference counter value of 7 as a pre-game stop notification.

After that, when three game medals are bet and the start lever D50 is operated (when the operation of the start lever D50 is accepted), the pre-limit notification on the payout number display device D270 disappears. Then, at the timing shown in (c), the reels for the next game (a) in the game shown in (a) in the figure (a game with a three-coin bet) begin to spin, and the payout number display device D270 displays "=1", which is the push order navigation corresponding to "left → center → right". Furthermore, the effect display device S40 displays "7 medals remaining until the limit is reached" as a limit indication, and displays "123" as the push order navigation image. Note that in the third embodiment, the limit indication indication has a higher display priority than the push order navigation image, but this is not limited to this, and the push order navigation image may be configured to have a higher display priority than the limit indication indication.

Furthermore, the push order navigation image on the effect display device S40 may be displayed when the operation of the start lever D50 is accepted, or when the reels start to spin.Furthermore, the push order navigation image on the payout number display device D270 may be displayed when the operation of the start lever D50 is accepted, or when the reels start to spin.

Furthermore, when a game in which push order navigation is performed is being played, if the start lever D50 is operated before the minimum play time has elapsed, the push order navigation on the payout number display device D270 may be configured to be displayed before or after the push order navigation image on the performance display device S40.

Furthermore, when a game in which push order navigation is performed is being played, if the start lever D50 is operated after the minimum play time has elapsed, the push order navigation on the payout number display device D270 may be configured to be displayed before or after the push order navigation image on the performance display device S40.

Then, the reels are stopped (in the order left → center → right), the symbol combination corresponding to the bell is displayed as stopped symbols, and 10 coins are paid out. At the timing (d) in the figure when the payout process is completed (for example, the timing when the processing of step 3700 in Figure 84 is executed), the calculation result related to the counter value of the difference counter is less than 0, so the play limit flag is on, and the payout number display device D270 displays "10" corresponding to the number of bells paid out, and the performance display device S40 displays "7 coins remaining until the play limit state" as a display indicating the play limit state.

At timing (d) in the figure, the display indicating the limit state may display "0 coins remaining until limit state", or the display indicating the limit state may be hidden.

After that, at the timing of (e) in the figure (for example, the timing when the processing of step 1219-1 in Figure 83 is executed), the game will be stopped, and the payout number display device D270 will display "CP" as a game-stop notification, and the effect display device S40 will display "Game is stopped. Please call an attendant" as a game-stop state indication.

The payout number display "10" in (d) of the figure may be configured to disappear after a predetermined time has passed, or to disappear when a predetermined operating member is operated, or to continue to be displayed until another display is displayed on the payout number display device D270.

In this way, in the payout number display device D270, the left digit (sometimes referred to as the first digit) of the pre-limit notification is "L," while the left digit of the limit notification is "C," resulting in different notification modes. This configuration allows the player to easily recognize whether or not the limit has been reached and the game can no longer proceed.

The left digit of the payout number display device D270 is sometimes referred to as the specified display area of the specified display unit.

As mentioned above, in the third embodiment, the payout number display device D270 is configured to be hidden when the start lever D50 is operated. Therefore, for example, when "L5" is displayed as the payout number display device D270's pre-limit notification, the start lever D50 is operated, a game is played, and then the counter value of the difference counter falls below 400, causing "L4" to be displayed as the payout number display device D270's pre-limit notification. In this way, when the display mode of the pre-limit notification switches, the payout number display device D270 is configured to have a period of time during which it is hidden.

This configuration makes it easier for players to recognize that the pre-end notification display has changed.

Even if the start lever D50 is operated and "=1" is displayed as the push order navigation on the payout number display device D270 while "L5" is displayed as the advance notification of the end of the game on the payout number display device D270, a non-display period may be configured to exist between "L5" and "=1". Furthermore, even if the counter value of the difference counter falls below 400 after a game is played and "L4" is displayed as the advance notification of the end of the game on the payout number display device D270, a non-display period may be configured to exist between the payout number display "10" (the payout number is merely an example and will differ depending on the combination of symbols stopped and displayed) and "L4".

Furthermore, when the payout number display device D270 switches from "L5" to "=1", any of the following configurations can be applied as a configuration in which there is a non-display period between "L5" and "=1". Note that "L5" and "=1" are merely examples, and can be applied to all cases in which the display of the payout number display device D270 switches.
(1) The display period of "L5" has a non-display period at the end of a predetermined time (for example, 100 ms).
(2) The display period of "=1" has a non-display period at the beginning of a predetermined time (for example, 100 ms).
(3) After the display period of "L5" has ended, a predetermined wait (predetermined freeze) is executed in which the display is not displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 100 ms).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 87, the period during which the payout number display device D270 displays the advance notification of the end of play and the period during which the payout number display device D270 displays the payout number display are configured so that they do not overlap, thereby preventing the player from mistaking the advance notification of the end of play for the payout number display.

In addition, when it becomes possible to insert gaming medals and a notification regarding the end of the game is displayed on the payout number display device D270, the timing at which the advance notification of the end of the game is displayed on the payout number display device D270, the timing at which the reservation status notification is displayed on the payout number display device D270, and the timing at which the end of the game notification is displayed on the payout number display device D270 (the timing at which the display starts) are the same (for example, 100 ms after it becomes possible to insert gaming medals).

In addition, when a notification regarding a payout limit is displayed on the payout number display device D270, the timing at which the payout number display device D270 displays the advance notice of a payout limit, the timing at which the payout number display device D270 displays the reservation status notice, and the timing at which the payout number display device D270 displays the payout limit notification may be configured to be different. Specific examples may be configured as follows:

<Timing when advance notice of cancellation will be displayed>
The advance notification of the end of the game is displayed when it becomes possible to insert game medals after all reels have stopped and when the maximum difference in the number of games, based on the timing when the difference in the number of games is the smallest since the power was turned on, is greater than or equal to a specific number (18,500 in this example) and less than a predetermined number (19,000 in this example).

<Timing when reservation status notification is displayed>
The reservation status notification is displayed when it becomes possible to insert a gaming medal after all reels have stopped during the bonus and the maximum difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number since the power was turned on is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (19,000 in this example).

<Timing when the end notice is displayed>
The end-of-game notification occurs when all reels stop in a situation where a bonus is not being executed, and a payout corresponding to the displayed symbol combination occurs. If the maximum difference based on the timing when the difference is smallest since power-on is equal to or exceeds a predetermined number (19,000 in this example), a predetermined freeze occurs for a first time, and the notification is displayed after the predetermined freeze ends. Also, when a bonus is being executed and a limit is reserved, after all reels related to the final game of the bonus stop, a predetermined freeze occurs for a second time on the bonus end screen (a predetermined freeze occurs when the bonus end screen is displayed on the effect display device S40), and the notification is displayed after the predetermined freeze ends. Note that the first time and the second time may be the same time value, or may be different time values.

In this way, the time from when all reels come to a halt until the payout notification is displayed on the payout number display device D270 (the timing at which the payout notification is displayed) may be configured to differ between the advance payout notification, the reservation status notification, and the payout notification.

Furthermore, as described above, when the payout number display device D270 displays a notification of the end of the game, it is configured to be displayed after a specified freeze occurs, whereas when the payout number display device D270 displays a pre-notification of the end of the game, it may be configured to be displayed without the specified freeze occurring.

<Diagram of the payout number display device in the event of an inserted medal backflow error>
Next, Figure 88 is a diagram relating to the display of the payout number display device D270 when an inserted medal backflow error occurs in the third embodiment.

First, in (a) of the figure, a game with a three-coin bet is being played in a specified gaming state (which may be an AT state in which push order navigation is executed, or a gaming state other than an AT state). The counter value of the difference counter is 480, and the effect display device S40 displays the message "480 coins remaining until the game is stopped" as a display indicating the game is about to stop.

Then, a stop operation is performed on the reels, the symbol combination corresponding to a miss is displayed as stopped, the difference counter value becomes 483, and the effect display device S40 displays "483 medals remaining until the game is stopped" as a stoppage indication. Furthermore, at the timing shown in (b) in the figure after all the reels have stopped, game medals can be inserted, and the payout number display device D270 displays "L5" corresponding to the difference counter value of 483 as a stoppage advance notification.

After that, when gaming medals can be inserted, an inserted medal backflow error occurs, and in (c) of the figure, the payout number display device D270 displays "EE," an error notification corresponding to the inserted medal backflow error (switching from "L5" to "EE"). In addition, the effect display device S40 displays the error message "Inserted medal backflow error has occurred! Please call an attendant" as an error message corresponding to the inserted medal backflow error.

After that, in (d) in the figure, when the inserted medal backflow error is cleared, the payout number display device D270 again displays "L5" corresponding to the difference counter value of 483 as a pre-limit notification (switching from "EE" to "L5"). In addition, the performance display device S40 displays "483 medals remaining before limit is reached" as a limit indication.

In this way, in the third embodiment, if a specified error (a recoverable error, in FIG. 88 an inserted medal backflow error) occurs while the payout number display device D270 is displaying a pre-limit notification, the payout number display device D270 will display an error notification corresponding to the specified error, and once the specified error is resolved, the payout number display device D270 will be configured to display the pre-limit notification again.

By configuring it in this way, if a specified error occurs, the display on the payout number display device D270 can be switched to an error notification corresponding to the specified error, and only one display can be displayed on the payout number display device D270, allowing for appropriate notifications to be made to players and gaming facility managers.

The payout number display device D270 may be configured to have a period of time during which it is not displayed when the display switches from "EE" to "L5" or from "L5" to "EE".

In the third embodiment, the notification regarding the payout limit and the error notification are configured to be displayed on the payout number display device D270, but this is not limited to this. The notification regarding the payout limit and the error notification may be displayed on different display devices, such as by displaying the notification regarding the payout limit on a first display device and the error notification on a second display device.

As a specific example of the first display device that displays the notification regarding the limit, the following configuration can be applied.
(1) Payout number display device D270
(2) A limit display device in the notification mode A of FIG. 92, which will be described later. (3) An LED dedicated to notifying the limit in the notification mode B of FIG. 92, which will be described later.
(4) Credit number display device D200
(5) Effect display device S40
(6) A 4-digit 7-segment display used for effects during play, controlled by the sub-control board S.

Furthermore, as a specific example of the second display device that displays the error notification, the following configuration can be applied.
(1) Payout number display device D270
(2) Credit number display device D200
(3) Effect display device S40
(4) Display device dedicated to error notification

It is also possible to configure the payout number display device D270 to display either the payout limit notification or the error notification, or to configure the payout limit notification and the error notification to be displayed on a display device other than the payout number display device D270.

By configuring it in this way, while an error notification is being displayed on the second display device, a notification regarding the termination can be displayed on the first display device, allowing two notifications to be displayed simultaneously.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, if an error occurs, in addition to displaying an error notification on the payout number display device D270, the error notification may also be executed on the speaker S20 on the sub-control board S or the performance display device S40.

In addition, if a specified error occurs, an error notification is displayed on the payout number display device D270, an error sound is output from the speaker S20, and an error display is displayed on the effect display device S40. After that, when the specified error is resolved, the error notification on the payout number display device D270 will no longer be displayed, but the error sound from the speaker S20 and/or the error display on the effect display device S40 may be configured to continue for a specified period of time even after the specified error is resolved.

Furthermore, if a specified error occurs while a notification regarding the end of the game is displayed on the payout number display device D270, an error notification will be displayed on the payout number display device D270, an error sound will be output from the speaker S20, and an error display will be displayed on the effect display device S40. After that, when the specified error is resolved, the error notification will no longer be displayed on the payout number display device D270 and a notification regarding the end of the game will be displayed; however, the error sound from the speaker S20 and/or the error display on the effect display device S40 may be configured to continue for a specified period of time even after the specified error is resolved.

Furthermore, if a specified error occurs while a notification regarding a game being halted is displayed on the payout number display device D270, an error notification will be displayed on the payout number display device D270, an error sound will be output from the speaker S20, and an error display will be displayed on the effect display device S40. After that, when the specified error is resolved, the error notification will no longer be displayed on the payout number display device D270, and the error sound will be output from the speaker S20 and/or the error display on the effect display device S40 will continue for a specified time even after the specified error is resolved, and once the specified time has elapsed, a notification regarding a game being halted will be displayed on the payout number display device D270.

Also, if a specified error occurs while one or more reels are spinning, the following configuration may be used.

(Configuration 1)
(1) When a notification regarding the end of the game is displayed on the payout number display device D270, the start lever D50 is operated, the notification regarding the end of the game on the payout number display device D270 disappears, and the reels begin to rotate.
(2) If a predetermined error occurs during reel rotation, the payout number display device D270 will not display any notification regarding the game being stopped or any error notification.
(3) If all the reels subsequently stop without the specified error being cleared, the payout number display device D270 will not display a notice regarding the end of the game, but will instead display an error notice corresponding to the specified error.

(Configuration 2)
(1) When the counter value of the difference counter is 4, a bonus has not been executed, and "L1" is displayed on the payout number display device D270 as a notification that the game is about to end, the start lever D50 is operated, the result of the internal lottery is a common bell that results in the payout of 10 coins (a lottery result that stops and displays a pattern combination that results in the payout of 10 coins regardless of the order of pressing or the timing of the stop operation), the notification that the game is about to end is hidden on the payout number display device D270, and the reels begin to rotate.
(2) If a predetermined error occurs during reel rotation, the payout number display device D270 will not display any notification regarding the game being stopped or any error notification.
(3) If all the reels subsequently stop without the specified error being cleared, a payout of 10 coins corresponding to the common bell occurs, and when the payout is completed, the payout number display device D270 does not display an error notification corresponding to the specified error, but instead displays a play-end notification ("CP").

(Configuration 3)
(1) When the counter value of the difference counter is 4, a bonus has not been executed, and "L1" is displayed on the payout number display device D270 as a notification that the game is about to end, the start lever D50 is operated, the result of the internal lottery is a common bell that results in the payout of 10 coins (a lottery result that stops and displays a pattern combination that results in the payout of 10 coins regardless of the order of pressing or the timing of the stop operation), the notification that the game is about to end is hidden on the payout number display device D270, and the reels begin to rotate.
(2) If a predetermined error occurs during reel rotation, the payout number display device D270 will not display any notification regarding the game being stopped or any error notification.
(3) If all the reels subsequently stop without the specified error being cleared, the payout of 10 coins corresponding to the common bell will not occur, and the payout number display device D270 will display an error message corresponding to the specified error, but will not display a message indicating that the game has ended.
(4) After that, when the specified error is cleared, a payout of 10 coins corresponding to the common bell occurs, and when the payout is completed, a payout limit notification ("CP") is displayed on the payout number display device D270.

It should be noted that various errors can be applied to the above-mentioned predetermined error, and the following errors may be applied as an example: Note that the display mode of the error notification described below (display mode on the payout number display device D270) is merely an example, and there is no problem if it is changed.
(1) Door open error (error notification display mode is "DO")
(2) Inserted medal backflow error (error notification display mode is "EE")
(3) Inserted medal retention error (error notification display mode is “E1”)
(4) Empty medal error (error notification display mode is "E2")
(5) Setting value error (error notification display mode is "E3")
(6) Medal full error (error notification display mode is "E4")
(7) Display judgment error (the display mode of the error notification is "E5")
(8) Insertion number error (error notification display mode is "E6")
(9) Abnormal input error (error notification display mode is "E7")
(10) Abnormal payout error (error notification display mode is “E8”)
(11) Payout medal retention error (error notification display mode is “E9”)

<Diagram of the payout number display device in the event of a power outage>
Next, FIG. 89 is a diagram relating to the display of the payout number display device D270 in the event of a power outage according to the third embodiment.

First, in (a) of the figure, a game with a three-coin bet is being played in a specified gaming state (which may be an AT state in which push order navigation is executed, or a gaming state other than an AT state). The counter value of the difference counter is 480, and the effect display device S40 displays the message "480 coins remaining until the game is stopped" as a display indicating the game is about to stop.

Then, a stop operation is performed on the reels, the symbol combination corresponding to a miss is displayed as stopped, the difference counter value becomes 483, and the effect display device S40 displays "483 medals remaining until the game is stopped" as a stoppage indication. Furthermore, at the timing shown in (b) in the figure after all the reels have stopped, game medals can be inserted, and the payout number display device D270 displays "L5" corresponding to the difference counter value of 483 as a stoppage advance notification.

Then, at (c) in the figure, while gaming medals can be inserted, the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off (a power outage occurs), and the payout number display device D270 goes dark.

If the power is then turned on while the setting key switch is off (if the power is turned on without entering setting change mode), the difference counter value is initialized to 19,000 as shown in (d) in the figure, the payout number display device D270 no longer displays "L5" which was displayed before the power was turned off, and the performance display device S40 does not display the indication that the game is over.

In this way, in the third embodiment, if a power outage occurs while the payout number display device D270 is displaying a pre-notification of the end of the game, and then the power is restored without transitioning to setting change mode, the payout number display device D270 is configured to not display the pre-notification of the end of the game again, but to remain hidden.

By configuring it in this way, even if a power outage occurs while the gaming center is open, the current status regarding the difference in payout numbers can be properly reported on the payout number display device D270.

Furthermore, after (c) in the figure, when the power is turned on while the setting key switch is on (when the power is turned on to switch to setting change mode), the counter value of the difference counter is initialized to 19,000, the payout number display device D270 does not display "L5" which was displayed before the power was turned off, and the performance display device S40 is configured so that no indication of a game-ending state is displayed.

When the first number (e.g., 10) is displayed on the credit number display device D200 and the 3 bet lamp D213 is lit, if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off and then the power is turned on without changing the settings (the power is turned on with the setting key switch off), the first number (e.g., 10) will be displayed on the credit number display device D200 and the 3 bet lamp D213 will be lit.

Furthermore, when a first number (e.g., 10) is displayed on the credit number display device D200 and the 3 bet lamp D213 is lit, if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off and then the power is turned on with a setting change (the power is turned on with the setting key switch on), the credit number display device D200 will display 0 (or may not display any number) and the 3 bet lamp D213 will not light up.

The above 3-bed lamp D213 can be replaced with the 1-bed lamp D211 or 2-bed lamp D212 without any problems.

<Diagram of the payout number display device in the event of a power outage during a bonus>
Next, FIG. 90 is a diagram relating to the display of the payout number display device D270 in the case where a power outage occurs during the execution of a bonus according to the third embodiment.

First, in (a) of the figure, a game with a bet of three coins is being played during a bonus. The counter value of the difference counter is four, and the effect display device S40 displays "Four more coins until the game is over" as a display indicating a limiting state. The effect display device S40 also displays "GET 157" as a display of the number of game medals won in the active bonus (which may also be the number of game medals paid out). The timing at which the number of game medals won in the active bonus is deducted by the number of game medals bet is shown as after all reels have stopped in the figure, but this is not limited to this and may be when a bet is made or when operation of the start lever D50 is accepted.

The bonus in Figure 90 may be applied to any of the bonuses mentioned above, such as BB or RB, and the timing of the power outage described below may be applied when the first-class special feature continuous operation device is in operation and the first-class special feature is not in operation.

After (a) in the figure, a stopping operation is performed on the reels, the symbol combination corresponding to the bell is displayed as stopped, and 10 coins are paid out in (b) in the figure. The payout number display device D270 displays "10" as the payout number. Note that in (b) in the figure, the display on the effect display device S40 has not been updated to correspond to the bell, and the display indicating the limit state still displays "4 coins remaining before limit state", and the display of the number of game medals won in the active bonus still displays "GET 157".

Also, in (b) of the figure, the maximum difference from the timing with the smallest difference since power-on is 19,000 or more, and since the bonus is being played, the stop reservation flag is turned on.

After that, at (c) in the figure, when it becomes possible to insert gaming medals, the limit reservation flag is on, so the limit reservation state is in effect, and the payout number display device D270 displays "L0" as a reservation status notification, and the effect display device S40 displays "The limit will be reached after the bonus ends" as a limit reservation display. Note that in (c) in the figure, the display on the effect display device S40 is updated in response to the bell, and "GET 164" is displayed as the number of gaming medals won in the active bonus.

In the figure (c), the effect display device S40 may be configured to display "Play will be stopped after the bonus ends" as a stop reservation display, and "GET 164" as the number of game medals won in the active bonus.

Then, at (d) in the figure, while gaming medals can be inserted, the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off (a power outage occurs), and the payout number display device D270 goes dark.

If the power is then turned on while the setting key switch is off (if the power is turned on without entering setting change mode, or if the power is turned on without changing the settings), the bonus execution resumes at (e) in the figure, the stop reservation flag is turned on, the payout number display device D270 displays "L0" which was displayed before the power was turned off, and the effect display device S40 displays the stop reservation display.

In this way, in the third embodiment, if a power outage occurs while a bonus is being executed and the reservation status notification is displayed on the payout number display device D270, and then the power is restored without transitioning to setting change mode, the reservation status notification is displayed again on the payout number display device D270.

By configuring it in this way, even if a power outage occurs while the gaming center is open, the current status regarding the difference in numbers and the status regarding the game's limit can be properly reported on the payout number display device D270 and the performance display device S40.

As described in detail in FIG. 90, if a power outage occurs while a bonus is being executed and a reservation status notification is being displayed on the payout number display device D270, and then power is restored without a setting change (power is turned on with the setting key switch off, or power is turned on without entering setting change mode), the bonus will be executed and the reservation status notification will be displayed again on the payout number display device D270. However, if a power outage occurs while a bonus is being executed and a reservation status notification is being displayed on the payout number display device D270, and then power is restored with a setting change (power is turned on with the setting key switch on, or power is turned on with a setting change mode), the bonus will no longer be executed and the reservation status notification will not be displayed on the payout number display device D270.

In addition, if a power outage occurs while the payout number display device D270 is displaying a limit notification and then power is restored without a setting change (power is turned on with the setting key switch off, or power is turned on without entering setting change mode), the payout number display device D270 is configured to display the limit notification again.However, if a power outage occurs while the payout number display device D270 is displaying a limit notification and then power is restored with a setting change (power is turned on with the setting key switch on, or power is turned on with a setting change mode), the payout number display device D270 is configured not to display the limit notification.

In addition, when "L0" is displayed as a reservation status notification on the payout number display device D270, the system is configured to stop when the ongoing bonus ends. However, even if the final play of the bonus was a play that resulted in a replay (for example, if the bonus is configured to end based on the number of plays), the system may be configured to stop when the replay symbol stops and is displayed.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs at the timing shown in (a) of Figure 90 and then power is restored without a setting change (power is turned on with the setting key switch off, power is turned on without transitioning to setting change mode), the bonus will be running, the reels will spin, the payout number display device D270 will be hidden, and the display indicating a play limit on the performance display device S40 will not be displayed (because the counter value of the difference counter has been initialized). Furthermore, if a power outage occurs at the timing shown in (a) of Figure 90 and then power is restored with a setting change (power is turned on with the setting key switch on, power is turned on to transition to setting change mode), the bonus will no longer be running, the reels will not spin, the payout number display device D270 will be hidden, and the display indicating a play limit on the performance display device S40 will not be displayed (because the counter value of the difference counter has been initialized).

In addition, if a power outage occurs while a bonus is being executed, the counter value of the difference counter is 4 (this is just an example and can be changed without any problems), the reels are stopped, and the payout number display device D270 is displaying "L1" as a pre-limit warning, and then the power is restored without changing the settings (the power is turned on with the setting key switch off, or the power is turned on without entering setting change mode), the bonus will be executed, the reels will not spin, the payout number display device D270 will not be displayed, and the limit status indication display on the performance display device S40 will not be displayed (because the counter value of the difference counter has been initialized). Furthermore, if a power outage occurs while a bonus is running, the difference counter has a counter value of 4, the reels are stopped, and the payout number display device D270 is displaying "L1" as a pre-limit warning, and then power is restored with a setting change (power is turned on with the setting key switch on, or power is turned on to switch to setting change mode), the bonus will no longer be running, the reels will not spin, the payout number display device D270 will not be displayed, and the indication of a limit state on the performance display device S40 will not be displayed (because the counter value of the difference counter has been initialized).

Note that the situation in which the payout number display device D270 in the third embodiment is not displayed can be replaced with a situation in which "00" or "0" is displayed on the payout number display device D270.

<<Diagram of the display on the lower panel>>
91 is a diagram showing the display of the lower panel D140 according to the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, a stoppage explanation area D141 located in the upper right corner of the lower panel D140 in a front view is configured to display explanations about the stoppage advance notification, reservation status notification, and stoppage notification (sometimes referred to as explanations about the stoppage state).

A specific example of the explanation of the stalled state can be configured as follows.
<Display on the payout number display device>
L5: 500 or less remaining until the limit is reached L4: 400 or less remaining until the limit is reached L2: 300 or less remaining until the limit is reached L2: 200 or less remaining until the limit is reached L1: 100 or less remaining until the limit is reached L0: Reservation for limit is reached CP: Limit is reached

By configuring it in this way, regardless of the game situation, the player can visually see the explanation regarding the stoppage state and understand the content of the notification regarding the stoppage on the payout number display device D270.

It is preferable that the explanation regarding the play limit state on the lower panel D140 be configured so that it is easily recognizable to the player. As an example, the display area for the explanation regarding the play limit state may be configured to be larger than the display area for the display regarding the gaming machine model name on the lower panel D140, or larger than the display area for the display regarding the gaming machine manufacturer name on the lower panel D140.

The lower panel D140 may also be configured to display a message indicating that the machine is equipped with a stop-play state; for example, it may display "machine equipped with stop-play state." The display area for the message indicating that the machine is equipped with a stop-play state may be larger or smaller than the display area for the explanation of the stop-play state on the lower panel D140. The display area for the message indicating that the machine is equipped with a stop-play state may also be configured to be larger than the display area for the display of the model name of the gaming machine on the lower panel D140, or larger than the display area for the display of the manufacturer name of the gaming machine on the lower panel D140.

In addition, an explanation of the stop state or the fact that the stop state is installed may be configured to be displayed on a device other than the lower panel D140. For example, it may be configured to be displayed on a panel other than the lower panel D140, such as the middle panel or upper panel, or on the operation console, or it may be configured to be displayed on the performance display device S40 while the standby demo is being displayed (which may be for part of or the entire period during which the standby demo is displayed).

This configuration allows players to know whether the machine has a limit before they start playing, preventing any problems between players and the gaming facility.

<<Diagram showing notification mode of notification regarding limit>>
Next, Fig. 92 is a diagram showing a notification mode of the notification regarding the limit applicable to the third embodiment. The notification mode of the notification regarding the limit described above in the third embodiment is merely an example, and various notification modes can be applied as shown in Fig. 92.

<Notification mode A>
First, the notification mode A in the upper part of Fig. 92 will be described in detail. In notification mode A, a limit display device (for example, provided in a position visible from the front of the gaming machine) consisting of a 4-digit 7-segment display dedicated to notifications regarding limiting of play is provided, and notifications regarding limiting of play are configured to be executed by the limit display device instead of the payout number display device D270 of the third embodiment.

The limit display device displays a limit advance warning when the maximum difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number since power was turned on reaches 18,500.As in (A1), when the maximum difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number since power was turned on is 18,500 (the counter value of the difference number counter is 500), "L500" is displayed.

When 10 coins are dispensed from the situation in (A1), the difference counter value becomes 490, and at (A2), the limit display device displays "L490." After that, the maximum difference based on the timing with the smallest difference since power-on increases, and at (A3), the limit display device displays "L003."

When 10 coins are paid out from the situation in (A3), the maximum difference in number based on the timing with the smallest difference since power-on reaches 19,000, and if a bonus is not being played, the game will be stopped, and the stop display device will display "CP" as in (A4). On the other hand, if a bonus is being played, the game will be stopped and the stop display device will display "LL" as in (A5).

In this way, the play-limit indicator device is configured as a four-digit seven-segment display, and when displaying a play-limit advance notification, "L" is displayed in the first digit from the left, and the three digits from the second to fourth digits from the left are configured to display a value corresponding to the counter value of the difference counter; in other words, the remaining difference (or the counter value of the difference counter) until the maximum difference, based on the timing with the smallest difference since power-on, reaches the predetermined number (19,000 in this example) at which the play-limit state is reached. Also, unlike the third embodiment, in notification mode A, the play-limit advance notification is configured to be displayed for each difference, and this configuration allows the player to accurately grasp the difference until the play-limit state is reached.

In notification mode A, the notification regarding limiting is performed using a limiting display device consisting of a 4-digit 7-segment display dedicated to notification regarding limiting, but this is not limited to this. A display device controlled by the main control board M consisting of a 4-digit 7-segment display similar to the limiting display device may also be configured to be used for both notification regarding limiting and other displays.

Furthermore, the four-digit seven-segment display used for effects during play, controlled by the sub-control board S, may be configured to display an effect indicating that a player will be awarded a profit when the four digits are the same, such as "7777," and the four-digit seven-segment display may be configured to display the aforementioned notification regarding the end of the game in notification mode A.

It should be noted that the number of digits can be changed without any problems for any of the four-digit seven-segment displays mentioned above. As an example, when a three-digit seven-segment display is used to notify the user of the limit, if the largest difference based on the timing when the difference was smallest since power-on is 18,500 (the difference counter value is 500), "500" will be displayed. In other words, by configuring the four-digit seven-segment display to display three digits other than the "L" that would be displayed as the first digit from the left, the remaining differences can be displayed one by one until the largest difference based on the timing when the difference was smallest since power-on reaches the predetermined number (19,000 in this example) at which the limit is reached.

<Notification mode B>
Next, the notification mode B in the lower part of Fig. 92 will be described in detail. In the notification mode B, a limit display device consisting of five consecutive LEDs that can be lit is provided, and the notification regarding the limit is performed by the limit display device instead of the payout number display device D270 of the third embodiment.

The limit display device displays a limit advance warning when the maximum difference number, based on the timing with the smallest difference number since power-on, reaches 18,500. The limit advance warnings are (B1) to (B5), and specifically, they light up as follows:
(B1) When the maximum difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number since power-on is 18,500 or more and less than 18,600, only the first digit from the left of the stop display device lights up.
(B2) When the maximum difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number since power-on is 18,600 or more and less than 18,700, the first and second digits from the left of the stop indicator light up.
(B3) When the maximum difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number since power-on is 18,700 or more and less than 18,800, the first to third digits from the left of the stop indicator light up.
(B4) When the maximum difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number since power-on is 18,800 or more and less than 18,900, the first to fourth digits from the left of the stop indicator light up.
(B5) When the maximum difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number since power-on is 18,900 or more and less than 19,000, the first to fifth digits from the left of the stop display device are all lit.

Also, if the maximum difference, based on the timing with the smallest difference since power-on, reaches 19,000 and a bonus is not currently being played, the game will be in a stopped state and a stop notification will be displayed on the stop display device. The stop notification is (B6), and the first through fifth digits from the left on the stop display device will all flash.

Also, if the maximum difference between the smallest difference since power-on reaches 19,000 and a bonus is being played, the game will be placed into a stop reservation state, and the stop display device will display a reservation status notification. The reservation status notification is (B7), and the first and fifth digits from the left on the stop display device will flash.

In this way, the limit indicator is made up of five consecutive LEDs that can be lit, and when a limit notification is issued, the notification is made by lighting up the five LEDs in different ways. Furthermore, in notification mode B, the remaining difference until the maximum difference, based on the timing with the smallest difference since power was turned on, reaches a predetermined number (19,000 in this example) at which the limit is reached, is notified in 100 increments by lighting up the five LEDs.

Note that the number of LEDs and lighting patterns of the end-of-game indicator in notification mode B are merely examples and may be changed without any problems. The lighting and flashing in notification mode B are merely examples and should be recognizable by the player as being different lighting patterns.

<<Applicable configurations related to stoppage>>
Next, the configurations relating to the stoppage that can be applied to the gaming machine according to the present specification will be described in detail below. The following configurations can be applied to all of the above-mentioned embodiments. In addition, only one of the following configurations may be applied, or multiple configurations may be applied in combination.

<Configuration regarding payout number display>
When 10 coins are paid out, the payout number display device D270 will count up by one as follows: "Hidden → 1 → 2 → ... → 8 → 9 → 10", and then when it becomes possible to insert game medals, "L1" will be displayed on the payout number display device D270. In this case, if the time required for the number to change from "1" to "2", etc. is taken as the payout number display update time, and the time during which the last payout number display, "10", is displayed is taken as the payout number display maintenance time, the payout number display update time may be configured to be "payout number display update time < payout number display maintenance time".

In this way, by maintaining the payout number display displayed at the end of the payout number display for a long time, the player can be sure to recognize the number of payouts before the payout number display device D270 displays a notice regarding the end of the game.

In addition, when the display on the payout number display device D270 switches from displaying the payout number to a notification regarding the limit, the payout number display device D270 may be configured to have a period during which it is not displayed (for example, not displayed for 100 ms). As a specific example, the notification mode for the limit notification may include not displaying the payout number, such as "not displayed for 100 ms → display L1", or a predetermined freeze may be performed when the notification regarding the limit begins.

By configuring it in this way, it is easy to understand that the display on the payout number display device D270 has switched to a notification regarding the end of the game.

Furthermore, when a payout number display is displayed on the payout number display device D270, the effect display device S40 may also be configured to display a display corresponding to the payout number display that is displayed at the end of the payout number display.In this configuration, even if the display on the payout number display device D270 switches from the payout number display that is displayed at the end of the payout number display to a notification regarding the end of the game, the effect display device S40 may be configured to display a display corresponding to the payout number display that is displayed at the end of the payout number display until a predetermined time has passed from the time of the switch (or until a predetermined operating member is operated).

<Bed lamp configuration>
When the game starts, all the reels stop, the 3 bet lamp D213 (which may also be the 1 bet lamp D211 or 2 bet lamp D212) lights up, and the maximum difference based on the timing when the difference was smallest since the power was turned on reaches a predetermined number (19,000 in this example), and a play-stop notification ("CP") is displayed on the payout number display device D270, the 3 bet lamp D213 goes out at a predetermined timing thereafter, but the play-stop notification may remain displayed (the play-stop notification may also be configured so as not to disappear over time).

By configuring it in this way, even when the game is at a halt, the 3-bet lamp D213 will turn off over time. By visually noticing that the 3-bet lamp D213 is off, the player can recognize that the game is not progressing, and by visually noticing the payout number display device D270, the player can recognize that the game is at a halt.

<Configuration for door open error>
When the front door DU is opened in a specified game state where the game can proceed, a door opening error occurs (a door opening error occurs), and the display of the payout number display device D270 may be configured to switch to an error notification corresponding to the door opening error (for example, "DO"), and when configured in this way, any of the following configurations may be applied.
(1) When the payout number display device D270 displays a limit notification ("CP") and the front door DU is opened, a door opening error occurs (a door opening error occurs), and the display on the payout number display device D270 switches to an error notification (for example, "DO") corresponding to the door opening error.
(2) When the payout number display device D270 displays a limit notification ("CP"), even if the front door DU is opened, the payout number display device D270 will continue to display the limit notification ("CP"), and will not display an error notification (e.g., "DO") corresponding to a door opening error.

When applied to the configuration (2) above, if the front door DU is opened while the payout number display device D270 is displaying a counter notification ("CP"), the speaker S20 may output a sound indicating that the front door DU has opened, or the lamp unit may be configured to light up in a lighting mode corresponding to the opening of the front door DU.

By configuring as described above in (1), error notification can be properly performed even in a stalled state.

By configuring as described above in (2), notifications of a game-stopping state, which means that play for the day has ended, can be given priority over notifications of various errors.

<Configuration related to setting confirmation mode>
As a configuration when the setting confirmation mode is entered in the stopped state, one or more of the following configurations may be applied.
(1) When the payout number display device D270 displays the "CP" notification, if the front door DU is opened and the setting key switch is turned from off to on, the device will transition to setting confirmation mode, and the display on the payout number display device D270 will switch to the current setting value. After that, if the setting key switch is turned from on to off, the setting confirmation mode will end, and the display on the payout number display device D270 will switch to the "CP" notification.
(2) When the front door DU is opened while the payout number display device D270 is displaying a limit notification ("CP"), the display of the payout number display device D270 switches to an error notification (e.g., "DO") corresponding to a door open error. Then, when the setting key switch is turned from off to on with the front door DU open, the device transitions to setting confirmation mode, and the display of the payout number display device D270 switches to the current setting value. Then, when the setting key switch is turned from on to off, the setting confirmation mode ends, and the display of the payout number display device D270 switches to an error notification (e.g., "DO") corresponding to a door open error. Then, when the front door DU is closed, the display of the payout number display device D270 switches to the limit notification ("CP").
(3) When the front door DU is opened and the setting key switch is turned from off to on while the payout number display device D270 is not displayed, the device transitions to setting confirmation mode, and the current setting value is displayed on the payout number display device D270. After that, a predetermined error (e.g., an inserted medal backflow error) occurs during the setting confirmation mode, but the payout number display device D270 does not display an error message corresponding to the predetermined error. After that, if the setting key switch is turned from on to off without the predetermined error being resolved, the setting confirmation mode ends, and the payout number display device D270 displays an error message corresponding to the predetermined error (e.g., "EE").
(4) When the payout number display device D270 displays a limit notification ("CP"), if the front door DU is opened and the setting key switch is turned from off to on, the device transitions to setting confirmation mode, and the display on the payout number display device D270 switches to the current setting value. Subsequently, a predetermined error (e.g., an inserted medal backflow error) occurs during setting confirmation mode, but the payout number display device D270 does not display an error notification corresponding to the predetermined error. Subsequently, if the setting key switch is turned from on to off without the predetermined error being resolved, the setting confirmation mode ends, and the display on the payout number display device D270 displays an error notification corresponding to the predetermined error (e.g., "EE"). Subsequently, when the predetermined error is resolved, the display on the payout number display device D270 switches to the limit notification ("CP").
(5) When the front door DU is opened while the payout number display device D270 is displaying a "CP" (end of game) notification, the display on the payout number display device D270 switches to an error notification (e.g., "DO") corresponding to a door open error. Then, when the setting key switch is turned from off to on with the front door DU open, the device transitions to setting confirmation mode, and the display on the payout number display device D270 switches to the current setting value. Then, a predetermined error (e.g., an inserted medal backflow error) occurs during setting confirmation mode, but the payout number display device D270 does not display an error notification corresponding to the predetermined error. Then, when the setting key switch is turned from on to off without the predetermined error being resolved, the setting confirmation mode ends, and the display on the payout number display device D270 displays an error notification (e.g., "EE") corresponding to the predetermined error. After that, when the predetermined error is cleared, the display of the payout number display device D270 switches to an error notification (e.g., "DO") corresponding to the door open error. After that, when the front door DU is closed, the display of the payout number display device D270 switches to a stop notice ("CP").
(6) When the payout number display device D270 is displaying a limit notification ("CP"), if the front door DU is opened and the setting key switch is changed from off to on, the payout number display device D270 will continue to display the limit notification ("CP") (it may or may not transition to setting confirmation mode).

In addition, the setting value in the setting confirmation mode does not have to be displayed on the payout number display device D270. As an example, a display device for displaying the setting value may be provided on the inside of the front door DU (in a position that cannot be seen unless the front door DU is open). In this configuration, the setting value is displayed on the display device for displaying the setting value during the setting confirmation mode, so the payout number display device D270 (or another display device that displays a notification regarding the payout limit) can be configured to display a notification regarding the payout limit. Similarly, even if a specified error occurs during the setting confirmation mode (the cause of the specified error occurs), the setting value is displayed on the display device for displaying the setting value during the setting confirmation mode, so the payout number display device D270 can be configured to display an error notification corresponding to the specified error.

In addition, when the payout number display device D270 displays a limit advance notification and the setting key switch is turned from off to on (an additional condition may be that the front door DU is open), the device will transition to setting confirmation mode; when the payout number display device D270 displays a reservation status notification and the setting key switch is turned from off to on (an additional condition may be that the front door DU is open), the device will transition to setting confirmation mode; and even if the setting key switch is turned from off to on when the payout number display device D270 displays a limit notification, the device may not transition to setting confirmation mode.

<Test signal configuration>
Here, when performing a type test, if the maximum difference based on the timing when the difference is smallest since power-on reaches a predetermined number of 19,000 and the machine enters a stopped state or a scheduled stop state, it becomes necessary to turn off the power and then turn it on again with a setting change, which clears information about the game. Therefore, a configuration may be made in which a test signal related to the stopped state is started to be output based on the maximum difference based on the timing when the difference is smallest since power-on reaching a specific number (18,500 in this example) before the maximum difference based on the timing when the difference is smallest since power-on reaches the predetermined number (19,000 in this example). With this configuration, the examiner recognizes that the stopped state is approaching, and by turning off the power to the gaming machine and restoring the power without changing the settings, the counter value of the difference counter is cleared while information about the game is maintained, allowing the type test to continue.

Furthermore, when the output of the test signal is configured as described above, the test signal will not be output outside the gaming machine when it is operating in an amusement facility, but the process for outputting the test signal is still executed. In other words, even when the gaming machine is operating in an amusement facility, the process for outputting the test signal related to the game-stop state can be configured to be executed when the maximum difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number since the power was turned on reaches a specific number (18,500 in this example).

<Signals output to the outside of the gaming machine>
In a slot machine using gaming medals such as that of the third embodiment, an external signal (sometimes referred to as an external output signal) regarding a game-stop state may be configured to start outputting when the maximum difference number based on the timing when the difference number is the smallest since the power was turned on reaches a predetermined number (19,000 in this example), and to end output when a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed.

Furthermore, in a slot machine that does not use gaming medals (a medal-less slot machine), the signal sent to the lending machine (sometimes called a lending unit) may be configured to start outputting a signal indicating a play limit state when the maximum difference in the number of games based on the timing when the difference in the number of games is smallest since the power was turned on reaches a predetermined number (19,000 in this example), and to end output when a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed.

<Difference counter update timing>
The timing for executing the end-of-game monitoring process of step 3700, which is the process for updating the difference counter, is preferably executed for each game during the period from when all reels in the game have stopped until new game medals can be inserted (or until new bets can be made). Also, even if the advance notification of the end of game is performed only on the sub-control board S side (for example, the performance display device S40), the update process of the difference counter may be executed on the main control board M side, and a command related to the counter value of the difference counter may be output from the main control board M side to the sub-control board S side.

<Configuration for Initializing the Counter Value of the Difference Counter>
In the third embodiment, the gaming machine is configured to initialize the counter value of the difference counter when the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off and then restored (power-on without a setting change, power-on with a setting change, or power-on when a RAM abnormality occurs). However, if a predetermined condition is met before the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, the counter value of the difference counter may not be initialized even if any of the following is executed: power-on without a setting change, power-on with a setting change, or power-on when a RAM abnormality occurs. One example of the predetermined condition is a configuration in which an operating member, when operated before the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, cuts off the power supply to the gaming machine, and then prevents the counter value of the difference counter from being initialized even when the power is restored. Note that the predetermined condition may apply to only one of the following: power-on without a setting change, power-on with a setting change, or power-on when a RAM abnormality occurs, or to multiple of these.

Furthermore, if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off in the stop state and/or stop reservation state, and then the power is turned on again without changing the settings, the counter value of the difference counter may be configured not to be initialized.

<Configuration of the counter value of the difference counter>
The RAM area for storing the counter value of the difference counter is preferably 2 bytes or more. Also, it is preferable to configure the difference counter so that the counter value is not used to execute processing related to the AT (sometimes referred to as processing related to the instruction function).

<Display period for advance notice of closing date>
In the third embodiment, the display period for the advance warning of the end of the game on the payout number display device D270 is the period from when it becomes possible to insert a game medal until the operation of the start lever D50 is accepted, but this is not limited to this, and for example, the payout number display device D270 may be configured to display the advance warning of the end of the game even while the reels are rotating.

<Configuration for audio output>
When a new end-of-game advance notification in a predetermined display mode is displayed on the payout number display device D270, no audio corresponding to the end-of-game advance notification is output from the speaker S20. However, when a new end-of-game advance notification is displayed on the payout number display device D270, audio corresponding to the end-of-game advance notification may be output from the speaker S20. Also, when a new reservation status notification is displayed on the payout number display device D270, audio corresponding to the reservation status notification may be output from the speaker S20. Also, when a new end-of-game advance notification in a predetermined display mode is displayed on the payout number display device D270, audio corresponding to the end-of-game advance notification may be output from the speaker S20.

<Deleting and redisplaying advance notices of cancellations>
In the third embodiment, the payout number display device D270 is configured to display a new advance notification of the end of the game when the maximum difference based on the timing when the difference is the smallest since the power was turned on becomes equal to or greater than a specific number (18,500 in this example), but any of the following actions may be applied thereafter.
(1) When the maximum difference number based on the timing when the difference number is smallest since the power was turned on becomes less than a specific number (in this example, 18,500), the advance notice of the end of the payout on the payout number display device D270 will not be displayed.
(2) Even if the maximum difference based on the timing when the difference is smallest since the power was turned on falls below a specific number (in this example, 18,500), the advance notice of the end of the payout number display device D270 continues to be displayed, and thereafter, when the maximum difference based on the timing when the difference is smallest since the power was turned on falls below a first number (for example, 17,000) that is smaller than the specific number, the advance notice of the end of the payout number display device D270 is hidden.

Furthermore, in both (1) and (2) above, after the payout number display device D270's advance notice of the end of the game has disappeared, it may be configured to be displayed again when the maximum difference in the number of payouts based on the timing with the smallest difference since the power was turned on becomes equal to or greater than a specific number (18,500 in this example).

When the configuration of the third embodiment is applied to a medal-less reel gaming machine, the timing at which the aforementioned gaming medals can be inserted may be the timing at which bets can be made, the timing at which points can be loaned, or the timing at which the loan button operation becomes valid.

The capped state detailed in the second and third embodiments differs from previous capped states. Specifically, previous capped states could be set by the gaming facility manager to activate (for example, turning on the power while a specific operating member is operated turns on the capped state, and turning on the power without operating the specific operating member turns off the capped state). While capped states occur when a specific condition is met with the capped state while the function is on, capped states do not occur when a specific condition is met with the function off. In contrast, the capped state in this specification always occurs when a specific condition is met (in this example, when a bonus is not being executed and the maximum difference based on the timing with the smallest difference since power-on reaches 19,000), and players and gaming facility managers cannot change whether or not a capped state can be entered, nor can they set whether or not a capped state can be entered for each gaming machine.

By configuring it in this way, the gaming facility manager can set it so that the machine does not enter a stop state, preventing it from operating in a state that increases the risk of gambling, resulting in a fair gaming machine. It also prevents situations where players become confused when the stop state is entered in some gaming facilities and not in others, even when playing the same machine. This different stop state configuration can be applied to all stop states described in this specification.

<<<Configuration Regarding the Maximum Expected Value of Profit Awarded to a Player at a Single Opportunity>>>
Next, a configuration for suppressing the maximum expected value of the profit awarded to a player upon a single trigger, which is applicable to the slot machine of this specification, will be described in detail below. Here, the single trigger refers to the determination of the number of AT games at the time of the first AT win (when the AT lottery is won) or winning the lottery for adding the number of AT games, and the maximum expected value of the profit awarded to a player upon a single trigger refers to the maximum expected value of the profit awarded to a player upon the occurrence of a single trigger that is advantageous to the player. Although details will be provided later, as an example, if the first trigger is the determination of the number of AT games at the time of the first AT hit (when the AT lottery is won), the maximum expected value of game medals awarded to the player from the first AT hit until play is executed in the AT state for the number of AT games determined by the first AT hit is the maximum expected value of profit awarded to the player at the first trigger, and if the first trigger is winning the AT game number addition lottery, the maximum expected value of game medals awarded to the player from the time the AT game number addition lottery is won until play is executed in the AT state for the number of added games determined in the AT game number addition lottery (or multiple AT game number addition lotteries related to the AT game number addition lottery) is the maximum expected value of profit awarded to the player at the first trigger. Note that these are merely examples, and there is no problem in applying a configuration related to the maximum expected value of profit awarded to a player at a first trigger, as described below.

By ensuring that the maximum expected value of the profit awarded to a player based on a single trigger does not become too large, it is possible to curb gambling and prevent the gaming facility from suffering unintended disadvantages. The maximum expected value of the profit awarded to a player based on a single trigger may also be referred to as the maximum expected value of the profit awarded to a player based on a single trigger, or the maximum expected value of the increase in gaming value awarded to a player based on a single trigger.

In explaining how the maximum expected value of the profit awarded to a player can be reduced by a single trigger, similar parts to those in the above-described embodiment will be described using similar symbols and wording to omit or simplify their explanation. All of the configurations detailed below can be applied to other embodiments, and all of the configurations in other embodiments can be applied to all of the configurations detailed below.

The configuration detailed below may be applied to slot machines that use gaming medals, or to medalless slot machines.

Furthermore, the configuration detailed below is based on the configuration of the first embodiment, with the differences detailed below differing from the first embodiment. However, any specifications can be applied to the configuration related to suppressing the maximum expected value of profit awarded to a player at a single trigger, and as an example, it may be configured to be applied to a slot machine with the following characteristic configuration:

<Features>
(1) In the normal zone, there is a high probability (for example, 1/1.1) of winning the lottery to move to the advantageous zone.
(2) In the internal lottery during the non-bonus internal period, the condition device relating to the bonus is determined with a high probability (for example, 65532/65536).
(3) Only three-coin bets are allowed.
(4) During a bonus, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus will not be displayed stopped regardless of the game method (stop order or stop timing).
(5) When playing in a predetermined stopping order, the expected value of the number of coins to be paid out for a small winning combination is higher than when playing in a specific stopping order.
(6) When playing in a predetermined stop order, all lotteries related to the AT are more disadvantageous to the player than when playing in a specific stop order.

In addition, in (6) above, all lotteries related to the AT include, for example, AT lotteries, AT game number addition lotteries, and AT state transition lotteries. As mentioned above, when playing in a predetermined stopping order, all lotteries related to the AT may be configured to be more disadvantageous to the player than when playing in a specific stopping order, or some lotteries related to the AT may be configured to be more disadvantageous to the player. Furthermore, the term "disadvantageous" may include not conducting any lotteries related to the AT.

Note that only some or all of the above-mentioned characteristic configurations may be applied.

Furthermore, the following describes in detail several configurations related to suppressing the maximum expected value of the profit awarded to a player at a single trigger, but only one of the multiple configurations may be applied, or some or all of the multiple configurations may be applied in combination.

In the detailed configuration below, only the differences from the first embodiment will be described in detail.

First, Figure 93 is a flowchart of the game progress control process related to the subroutine of step 1200 in Figure 16. The differences from the first embodiment are the processes of steps 1400 and 3500. In step 1700, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes RT state transition control processing, and then in step 1400, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes AT state transition control processing. Next, in step 1750, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes AT state start control processing. Next, in step 3500, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes game zone transition control processing and proceeds to step 1293.

Next, Figure 94 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process related to the subroutine of step 1400 in Figure 93. First, in step 1401-1, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the current play zone is a favorable zone. If the answer is Yes in step 1401-1, in step 1401-2, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the current AT state is one in which an AT lottery can be executed.

If the answer is Yes in step 1401-2, then in step 1401-3, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the condition device for the game is an AT lottery role. If the answer is Yes in step 1401-3, then in step 1401-4, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the stop order for the game is one that allows for an AT lottery to be executed.

Here, in this example, when playing with the first left stop (left-center-right or left-center-left), the expected number of coins paid out for the minor winning combination is lower and the probability of winning the AT lottery is higher compared to when playing with other stop orders (in this example, when playing with other stop orders, the AT lottery is not executed). Note that the aforementioned predetermined stop order corresponds to other stop orders, and the aforementioned specific stop order corresponds to the first left stop order.

If the answer is Yes in step 1401-4, then in step 1401-5, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes an AT lottery with a predetermined probability of winning. Next, in step 1401-6, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the AT lottery executed in step 1401-5 was won. If the answer is Yes in step 1401-6, then in step 1401-7, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the AT status for the next game onwards to be an AT precursor state, and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 1750).

Also, if the answer is No in step 1401-1, step 1401-2, step 1401-3, step 1401-4, or step 1401-6, in step 1401-8, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the AT status for the next game based on the current game status and the condition devices related to that game, and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 1750).

Note that the conditions for determining the AT status for the next game in step 1401-1 can be configured in various ways in addition to the current game status and the condition device related to that game. For example, the determination method may differ depending on whether the number of games that can be played in the advantageous zone is equal to or greater than a predetermined number.

Note that the configuration in the diagram is merely an example, and the conditions for executing the AT lottery in step 1401-5 may be changed without any problems. As an example, the AT lottery may be configured to be executed in a game in which a conditional device related to a specified push order bell has been determined, or the AT lottery may be executed regardless of the conditional device. It may also be configured to have an AT-related state (for example, a CZ (chance zone)) that makes it easier to win the AT lottery.

The AT lottery may be executed based on the order in which the reels have stopped after all reels have stopped in one game, or it may be executed before all reels have stopped in one game, and after all reels have stopped, it is determined whether or not to validate the AT lottery based on the order in which the reels have stopped.

Next, Figure 95 is a flowchart of the game zone transition control process related to the subroutine of step 3500 in Figure 93. First, in step 3501-1, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the game zone related to the game (sometimes referred to as a game) is a normal zone. If the answer is Yes in step 3501-1, in step 3501-2, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the game zone for the next game onwards (for example, it executes a favorable zone transition lottery based on the condition device determined for the game, and if the favorable zone transition lottery is won, the game zone for the next game is determined to be an advantageous zone), and proceeds to step 3501-10.

The normal zone may be referred to as the first zone, and the advantageous zone may be referred to as the second zone.

Also, if the answer is No in step 3501-1, in step 3501-3, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the counter value of the advantageous zone remaining game number counter satisfies the termination condition (in this example, the termination condition is satisfied when the counter value becomes 0). Note that in this example, the initial value of the counter value of the advantageous zone remaining game number counter is 4000; in other words, the advantageous zone is configured to be forcibly terminated if it continues for 4000 games.

In the case of the medal-less slot machine described above, it may be configured not to have a counter for the number of games remaining in the advantageous zone. In such a configuration, it may not be configured to forcibly terminate the advantageous zone when the number of games played reaches, for example, 4,000 games.

If step 3501-3 returns Yes, then in step 3501-4, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the counter value of the advantageous zone difference counter satisfies the termination condition. In this example, the advantageous zone is forcibly terminated when the difference (the number of medals acquired by the player, sometimes referred to as the difference in medals) from the start of the advantageous zone reaches a predetermined number (2,400 in this example). In the second embodiment, the MY counter was used, meaning that the advantageous zone was forcibly terminated when the maximum difference in medals in a given advantageous zone reached 2,400. However, in this example, the advantageous zone is forcibly terminated when the difference in medals from the start of the advantageous zone reaches 2,400. Therefore, even if the number of medals decreases after entering the advantageous zone, the advantageous zone can be configured not to be forcibly terminated until the player acquires medals equal to the decrease in medals + 2,400.

As an example, the advantageous zone difference counter is a decrement counter, and is configured to forcibly end the advantageous zone when the calculation result related to the counter value of the advantageous zone difference counter becomes less than 0. Furthermore, when the difference from the start of the advantageous zone reaches a predetermined number (2400 in this example), this is sometimes referred to as the difference in the second zone reaching the predetermined number after transitioning to the second zone.

If the answer is Yes in step 3501-4, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether any advantageous period end conditions (for example, the end conditions for the AT state) have not been met. If the answer is Yes in step 3501-6, in step 3501-7, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines that the play period from the next game onwards will be an advantageous period, and proceeds to step 3501-10.

Also, if the answer is No in step 3501-3, step 3501-4, or step 3501-6, in step 3501-8, the CPU C100 of the main control board M clears all information related to the AT. Next, in step 3501-9, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the play interval for the next game onwards to be the normal interval, and proceeds to step 3501-10.

Next, in step 3501-10, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether it has been decided to move to a new advantageous zone in the next game. If the answer is Yes in step 3501-10, then in step 3501-11, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets the advantageous zone remaining game number counter and advantageous zone difference number counter to their initial values (in this example, the initial value of the advantageous zone remaining game number counter is 4000, and the initial value of the advantageous zone difference number counter is 2400), and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 1293). Also, if the answer is No in step 3501-10, proceeds to the next process (processing of step 1293).

<<Image 1 of AT state>>
Next, Figure 96 is an image diagram 1 of the AT state applicable to the slot machine according to this specification. The configuration of the figure may be applied to a slot machine having the configurations of Figures 93 to 95, or may be applied to a slot machine having other configurations (other specifications). Note that states in which push order navigation can be performed, such as an AT state, are sometimes collectively referred to as the AT state.

<AT state details 1>
First, as described in "AT State Content 1" in the figure, the configuration in the figure has AT State 1 and AT State 2 as AT states, and in AT State 1, the net increase is +3 coins and the stay period is 50G, and in AT State 2, the net increase is -1 coins and the stay period is 10G. Note that a section where the net increase is a negative value, such as in AT State 2, is sometimes referred to as a decrease section. In a decrease section, it may be configured so that push order navigation can be executed, or it may be configured so that push order navigation is not executed.

Here, the net increase is the expected value of the increase or decrease in the number of medals when a game is played once in a state related to one AT. As an example, as described in "Example of Calculation of Net Increase," we will explain in detail the case where the following three types of condition devices can be determined as the result of an internal lottery. Note that the example shows the case where a game is played with three medals bet.
Internal lottery result: Push order bell (high), number of coins paid out: 10 coins, lottery probability (winning probability): 4/8
Internal lottery result: Replay, Number of coins paid out: 3, Lottery probability (winning probability): 1/8
Internal lottery result: Miss, number of coins paid out: 0, lottery probability (winning probability): 3/8

Note that the Push Order Bell (High) indicates that if you win the Push Order Bell during AT, the Push Order Navigation will be executed, and the symbol combination with the highest payout number will be displayed.

When configured as above, the net gain is "number of coins paid out for the push order bell x probability of winning the push order bell + number of coins paid out for replay (3 coins for the automatic bet) x probability of winning for replay + number of coins paid out for losing x probability of winning for losing - number of coins bet," or "10 x 4/8 + 3 x 1/8 + 0 x 3/8 - 3 = 2.375 (coins)." Note that the net gain can also be calculated by setting the number of coins paid out for replay to 0, and setting both the number of bets and number of coins paid out to 0 for games in which replay is determined as the lottery result.

Note that net increase is sometimes referred to as the expected increase in medals per game.

In addition, in the configuration shown in the figure, the AT state is managed by the number of sets, and the number of sets is determined when the AT first hits (when the AT lottery is won, when the AT state starts, etc.). 10 games of AT state 2 are played, followed by 50 games of AT state 1, for a total of 60 games, which make up one set, and are repeatedly played the number of sets determined when the AT first hits.

More specifically, at (1) in the diagram, the AT state begins, and AT state 2 begins as the first set of the AT state. Then, at (2) in the diagram, the first set of AT state 2 ends after 10 games have been played, and the game transitions to AT state 1. Then, at (3) in the diagram, the first set of AT state 1 has been played after 50 games have been played, and the first set of AT state ends, and the game transitions to AT state 2 for the second set. Note that if the number of sets determined at the time of the first AT hit is 1 set, the AT state ends at (3) in the diagram.

Then, at (4) in the diagram, the second set of AT state 2 ends after 10 games have been played, and the game transitions to AT state 1. Then, at (5) in the diagram, the second set of AT state 1 has been played for 50 games, and the second set of AT state ends, and the game transitions to AT state 2 for the third set. After that, the AT state continues, and the 25th set of AT state 1 has been played for 50 games, and the 25th set of AT state ends at (6) in the diagram, and the number of sets determined at the time of the first AT hit was 25 sets, so the AT state ends. Note that 25 sets is the maximum number of sets determined at the time of the first AT hit.

<AT state details 2>
Next, as described in "AT state contents 2" in the figure, the configuration in the figure is designed as follows.
Expected increase in game medals per set: 140 pieces Maximum number of sets at first AT hit: 25 sets Expected increase in game medals in AT state 1 at maximum number of sets: 3750 pieces Expected increase in game medals in AT state 2 at maximum number of sets: -250 pieces Expected increase in game medals at maximum number of sets: 3500 pieces

As mentioned above, in the configuration shown in the figure, one set of AT states is configured to stay in AT state 2, where the net increase is a negative value (-1), and AT state 1, where the net increase is a positive value (+3).

In addition, the maximum number of sets when the AT is first hit is 25 sets, and if the number of sets determined when the AT is first hit is the maximum of 25 sets, the expected increase in game medals is 3,500 medals, which is below the specified number of 3,600 medals.

If we apply the maximum expected value of the profit awarded to a player at the first trigger mentioned above to the configuration in the same diagram, "first trigger" corresponds to the case where the number of sets determined at the time of the first AT hit is the maximum of 25 sets. In other words, in the configuration in the same diagram, the maximum expected value of the profit awarded to a player at the first trigger is 3,500 coins, which is less than a specific number (3,600 in this example).

<Configuration regarding specific numbers>
As mentioned above, the configuration of this example aims to reduce the tendency toward gambling by preventing the maximum expected value of profits awarded to players at a single trigger from becoming excessively large, and also to prevent the amusement facility from suffering unintended disadvantages; this purpose can be achieved by setting the maximum expected value of profits awarded to players at a single trigger to a specific number or less.

In addition, in this example, the specific number is 3600, which is 1.5 times the initial value of 2400 of the advantageous zone difference number counter. By configuring it in this way, even if the number of medals held decreases after moving to an advantageous zone, it is possible to subsequently compensate for the decrease up to 1200 medals, which is half of the initial value of 2400 of the advantageous zone difference number counter, thereby reducing gambling while preventing excessive disadvantages to the player.

In addition, this specific number is set to a value less than 4000, which is the initial value of the counter for the number of games remaining in the advantageous zone. By configuring it in this way, even if the advantageous zone continues for the maximum 4000 games, the number of game medals will not increase at a rate of more than one per game, making it possible to reduce gambling.

Returning to the explanation of the same diagram, if the number of sets determined at the time of the first AT hit is the maximum of 25 sets, the expected increase in game medals is 3,500 medals, which is less than the specific number (3,600 medals in this example).

On the other hand, if the number of sets determined at the time of the first AT hit is the maximum of 25 sets, the expected increase in game medals in AT state 1 alone is 3,750, which is greater than the specific number (3,600 in this example). By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the maximum expected value of profit awarded to a player at a single trigger from becoming excessively large, while still allowing the player to win more game medals than the specific number (3,600 in this example) in the section where game medals increase (AT state 1), allowing the player to feel the exhilaration of winning balls.

In Figure 96, the AT state is configured to remain for a period corresponding to the number of sets determined at the time of the first AT hit, but this is not limited to this, and even when playing in the AT state, the number of sets that can remain in the AT state may be increased (a lottery may be held to add to the number of sets), or a lottery may be held to add to the number of AT games separately from the number of sets.

<<Illustration of the number of coins acquired>>
Next, Figure 97 is an image diagram of the display of the number of coins won that can be applied to the slot machine according to the present specification. The configuration of this figure is the same as that of Figure 96.

First, in (a) in the figure, the first set of the AT state begins, and the state becomes AT state 2. The effect display device S40 displays the message "Animal Rush preparation in progress" corresponding to AT state 2, and the number of coins won, "GET 0."

After that, 59 games are played, and the 60th game, which is the final game of the first set in the AT state, begins at (b) in the figure. The AT state is AT state 1. The effect display device S40 displays a push order navigation image on the center left and right, displays "GET 137" as the number of coins won, and displays "Animal Rush in progress!!" corresponding to AT state 1.

The reels then stop in the order of center, left, and right, and the symbol combination corresponding to the push order bell (high) is displayed, resulting in a payout of 10 coins. The number of coins won displayed on the performance display device S40 increases by 7 coins (10 coins paid out minus 3 coins bet), and displays "GET 144."

In the figure, the display of the number of coins won is configured so that the number of coins to be paid out is added and the number of coins bet is subtracted after all reels have stopped, but this is not limited to this. The display of the number of coins won may be configured so that the number of coins to be paid out is added after all reels have stopped, while the number of coins bet is subtracted after the bet has been placed.

After (c) in the figure, at (d) in the figure, when the next game begins, the second set of the AT state begins, and the state becomes AT state 2. The effect display device S40 displays the message "Animal Rush preparation in progress" corresponding to AT state 2, and the number of coins won, "GET 144."

The reels then stop and the symbol combination corresponding to the miss is displayed. The effect display device S40 displays "Animal Rush Preparation" corresponding to AT State 2, and the number of coins won, "GET 141," with 3 (the number of bets) subtracted.

As such, in the same diagram, during the AT state, the effect display device S40 is configured to be able to display the number of medals acquired in both AT state 1 and AT state 2, and the number of medals acquired display is configured to be updated (increased or decreased) even during AT state 2, where the net increase is a negative value. By configuring it in this way, even if the number of game medals increased during AT state 1 exceeds a specific number (3600 in this example), the number of game medals decreased during AT state 2 is subtracted from the number of medals acquired display, so the number of medals acquired does not exceed the specific number (3600 in this example).

<<Image of AT state 2>>
Next, Figure 98 is an image diagram 2 relating to the AT state applicable to the slot machine according to this specification. The configuration in the figure may be applied to the slot machine having the configurations in Figures 93 to 95, or may be applied to slot machines having other configurations (other specifications).

<AT state details 1>
First, as described in "AT State Content 1" in the figure, the configuration in the figure has AT state 1 and AT state 2 as AT states, and in AT state 1, the net increase is +3 and the stay ratio is 50%, and in AT state 2, the net increase is +1 and the stay ratio is 50%. Also, if you win a 1/50 transition lottery in AT state 2, you will transition to AT state 1, and if you win a 1/50 transition lottery in AT state 1, you will transition to AT state 2.

The stay ratio is the theoretical ratio of the number of games stayed in during the entire AT state. For example, if you stay in the AT state for 100 games, the stay ratio is 50%, so theoretically you will stay in AT state 1 for 50 games and in AT state 2 for 50 games.

As shown in the upper part of the figure, in the configuration of the figure, when a transition to the AT state occurs, AT state 1 begins at (1) in the figure, and then, based on winning the 1/50 transition lottery at (2) in the figure, a transition to AT state 2 occurs, and then, based on winning the 1/50 transition lottery at (3) in the figure, a transition to AT state 1 occurs, and then, based on winning the 1/50 transition lottery at (4) in the figure, a transition to AT state 2 occurs. In this way, the system is configured to alternate between AT state 1 and AT state 2.

<AT state details 2>
The net increase in AT state 1 is +3 coins, the net increase in AT state 2 is +1 coin, and since the stay ratio is 50% for each, the average net increase for all AT states is +2 coins.

<AT state details 3>
The AT game number lottery table at the time of the first win is configured as follows.
Number of games: 50G, Probability: 70%
Number of games: 100G, Probability: 26%
Number of games: 500G, Probability: 3%
Number of games: 1500G, Probability: 1%
The average number of AT games played at the first hit is 91G.

<AT state details 4>
The AT game number addition lottery table is configured as follows: The AT game number addition lottery is configured to be executed for each game by referring to the AT game number addition lottery table.
Number of games: 0G, Probability: 99%
Number of games: 10G, Probability: 0.5%
Number of games: 20G, Probability: 0.3%
Number of games: 30G, Probability: 0.2%
The average number of games when added is 17G.

The AT game number addition lottery does not have to be performed for every game, but may be configured to be performed only in games that result in a win for a specified condition device.

<AT state details 5>
Next, the configuration in the same figure is designed as follows.
Expected number of coins to be won (excluding added coins) when the maximum number of Gs (1500G) is reached at the first hit: 3000 coins Expected number of coins to be won (excluding added coins) when the maximum number of Gs (1500G) is reached at the first hit and the player remains in AT state 1 only: 4500 coins Expected number of coins to be won (excluding added coins) when the maximum number of Gs (1500G) is reached at the first hit and the player remains in AT state 2 only: 1500 coins Expected number of coins to be won (including added coins) when the maximum number of Gs (1500G) is reached at the first hit: 3204 coins Note that "excluding added coins" indicates the expected number of coins to be won for only the number of games determined at the time of the AT's first hit, not including the number of games added in the AT game number addition lottery, and "including added coins" indicates the expected number of coins to be won for the number of games calculated by adding together the number of games added in the AT game number addition lottery and the number of games determined at the time of the AT's first hit.

Here, if we apply the maximum expected value of profit awarded to a player at the aforementioned first trigger to the configuration in the same diagram, the first trigger corresponds to the case where the number of AT games determined at the time of the first AT hit is 1,500 games.

Furthermore, in the case of the configuration in the same figure, as shown in "AT In-Progress State Content 4," the probability of winning the AT game number addition lottery by referencing the AT game number addition lottery table, in other words, the probability of winning the number of added games (sometimes referred to as the AT game number addition), (the probability of not being 0G) is 1%, which is not a relatively high probability, so even if the expected value of profit based on the AT game number addition lottery is not taken into consideration, there will be no significant impact on the profit of the player or the gaming facility. Therefore, it is sufficient to configure the system so that the maximum expected value of profit awarded to a player at a single opportunity does not become too large, without taking into consideration an AT game number addition lottery in which the probability of winning the number of added games is not relatively high. Note that a relatively low probability of winning the number of added games is sometimes referred to as a low probability of winning the instruction right.

Furthermore, as in the configuration shown in the same figure, when transitioning between multiple AT states with different net gains in one AT state, it is preferable to calculate the maximum expected value of profit awarded to a player at one trigger using the average net gain taking into account the dwell ratio. In other words, the maximum expected value of profit awarded to a player at one trigger in the same figure is when 1,500 AT games, the maximum number determined at the time of the AT's first hit, are played with a net gain of two coins. In other words, the maximum expected value of profit awarded to a player at one trigger in the same figure is 3,000 coins, which is the "expected number of coins won (excluding bonuses) in the case of the maximum number of games at the time of the first hit (1,500G)" mentioned above in "Contents of the AT State 5."

In this way, with the configuration shown in the diagram, the "expected number of coins to be won (excluding bonuses) when the maximum number of games (1500G) is used at the time of the first win" is 3000 coins, which is a value below a specific number (3600 in this example). By preventing the maximum expected value of the profit awarded to a player from becoming excessively large at a single opportunity, it is possible to curb the tendency toward gambling and prevent the amusement facility from suffering unintended disadvantages.

Also, as mentioned above, the maximum expected value of profit awarded to a player at a single trigger is calculated using the average net increase taking into account the stay ratio, so it is not a problem if the "expected number of coins to be won (excluding added coins) when the maximum number of games at the time of the first win (1500G) and when only staying in AT state 1" mentioned in "AT State Contents 5" is greater than a specific number (3600 in this example), which is 4500 coins in the same figure.

Also, as mentioned above, the maximum expected value of profit awarded to a player at one trigger in the figure is 3,000 coins, which is the "expected number of coins to be won (excluding added coins) when the maximum number of games at the time of the first hit (1,500G)" mentioned in "AT State Content 5," and it does not matter if the "expected number of coins to be won (including added coins) when the maximum number of games at the time of the first hit (1,500G)" mentioned in "AT State Content 5" is greater than the specified number (3,600 in this example). Furthermore, in the configuration of the figure, the "expected number of coins to be won (including added coins) when the maximum number of games at the time of the first hit (1,500G)" mentioned in "AT State Content 5" is also 3,204 coins, which is less than the specified number (3,600 in this example). As shown in the configuration in the diagram, even the "expected number of coins won (including bonus coins) in the case of the maximum number of games (1500G) at the time of the first win" mentioned in "AT State Content 5" which is different from the maximum expected value of the profit awarded to the player at one trigger, can be configured to be less than a specific number (3600 in this example), making it possible to create a gaming machine with less gambling element.

In addition, in Figure 98, the trigger for the maximum expected value of profit awarded to a player at a single trigger is when the number of initial AT win games is determined to be the maximum value, but this is not limited to this, and the trigger for the maximum expected value of profit awarded to a player at a single trigger may also be when the maximum number of additional games is determined. As a specific example, the trigger may be when an AT game number addition lottery is executed and the maximum number of additional games, 1,000, is determined (an example is shown in which a different AT game number addition lottery table from the configuration of Figure 98 is referenced), and the maximum expected value of profit awarded to a player at a single trigger may be when those 1,000 games are played with a net increase of 2 (the average value of the net increase of the AT-related states that can be transitioned), and may be configured to be less than a specific number (3,600 in this example). Additionally, the trigger may be to determine the maximum number of 1000 games as the number of games to be added to the AT, and the expected value when the number of games to continue in the AT state, calculated by adding up the 1000 games and the results of the lottery to add the number of AT games after the determination of the addition, is consumed with a net increase of 2 (the average value of the net increase in the states related to the AT that can be transitioned to), will be less than a specific number (3600 in this example).

<<Image of AT state 3>>
Next, Figure 99 is an image diagram 3 relating to the AT state applicable to the slot machine according to this specification. The configuration in the figure may be applied to the slot machine having the configurations in Figures 93 to 95, or may be applied to slot machines having other configurations (other specifications).

<AT state details 1>
First, as described in "AT State Content 1" in the figure, the configuration in the figure has AT state 1 and AT state 2 as AT states, and AT state 1 has a net increase of +1 and is the state related to the AT in which you stay when the AT state starts. Also, AT state 2 has a net increase of +4 and is the state related to the AT to which you transition when you win the transition lottery, which has a 1/1000 chance of winning in AT state 1.

Here, the net increase can be made different between AT state 1 and AT state 2 by, for example, configuring AT state 2 so that push order navigation is executed in all games in which a conditional device (sometimes referred to as a push order role) that can stop and display symbol combinations such as push order bells, which can have different payout numbers depending on the reel stop order, is determined, and configuring AT state 1 so that push order navigation is executed in games in which some push order roles are determined, but not in games in which other push order roles are determined, thereby making the net increase different; or configuring AT state 2 so that push order navigation is executed in all games in which a push order role is determined, and configuring AT state 1 so that push order navigation is executed if a lottery with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/2) is won in a game in which a push order role is determined, thereby making the net increase different.

As shown in the upper part of the figure, when the player transitions to the AT state, AT state 1 begins at (1) in the figure, and then, based on winning the 1/1000 transition lottery at (2) in the figure, the player transitions to AT state 2, and then AT state 2 continues.

<AT state details 2>
When the AT is first hit, the game transitions to AT state 1, and the number of AT games is set to 100.

<AT state details 3>
The AT game number addition lottery is won with a 1/300 chance in AT state 1, and when won, the number of added games will be 1,000. In AT state 2, the AT game number addition lottery is not executed. Note that in AT state 1, the AT game number addition lottery may be configured to be executed with a 1/300 chance of being won every game, or the AT game number addition lottery may be executed in a game in which a predetermined condition device is determined, with the total winning probability of the AT game number addition lottery being 1/300. Note that the AT game number addition lottery, the AT lottery (lottery for the first AT win), and the lottery for transitioning to AT state 2 with a 1/1,000 chance of being won in AT state 1 are all different lotteries that are executed independently.

<Expected number of coins won when AT game number is added>
In the configuration of Figure 99, the expected number of coins to be won when an AT game number addition occurs during AT state 1 can be calculated as follows.
Net increase in AT state 1: A Net increase in AT state 2: B Probability of transition to AT state 2: 1/C
The maximum number of AT games to be added when winning: D games.
Expected number of coins when AT game number is added = A x (D - D/C) + B x (D/C)
It can be calculated as follows:

That is, the expected number of coins to be won when the number of AT games is increased in the configuration of FIG. 99 is:
1 x (1000 - 1000/1000) + 4 x (1000/1000) = 1003
and is equal to or less than a specific number (3600 in this example).

If we apply the maximum expected value of the profit awarded to a player at the aforementioned first trigger to the configuration in the same diagram, the first trigger corresponds to when the number of AT games is increased by 1,000 games during AT state 1.

By configuring it in this way, the maximum expected value of the profit awarded to a player at any one time is prevented from becoming too large, which reduces the tendency for gambling and prevents the gaming facility from suffering unintended disadvantages.

In this example, an AT game number addition lottery was executed to add the number of AT games as an additional lottery, but this is not limited to this. An additional lottery may also be executed to add the number of times the push order navigation is executed during the AT state (if there are remaining push order navigation executions, the push order navigation is executed in a game in which a push order role has been determined). As an example of such a configuration, if the probability of the occurrence of the push order navigation (probability of winning the push order role) is 1/X and the maximum number of times the push order navigation can be executed in the push order navigation additional lottery that can be determined in the push order navigation additional lottery is Y, the value obtained by multiplying X, which is the reciprocal of the probability of the occurrence of the push order navigation (probability of winning the push order role), by Y, which is the maximum number of times the push order navigation can be executed in the push order navigation additional lottery, can be applied as the above D.

<Example of changes to conditions for ending advantageous zones>
Next, a modified example of the game zone transition control process described above in Fig. 95 will be described in detail below with reference to Fig. 100. The configuration related to Fig. 100 can be applied to any embodiment of this specification.

Figure 100 is a flowchart of the game zone transition control process related to the subroutine of step 3500 in Figure 93. The differences from Figure 95 are steps 3501-5 and 3501-11.

If, in step 3501-4, the counter value of the favorable zone difference counter does not satisfy the termination condition (Yes), in step 3501-5, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the counter value of the favorable zone MY counter does not satisfy the termination condition.

Here, the advantageous zone MY counter is a counter that can measure the largest difference number based on the timing when the difference number in one advantageous zone is the smallest, and is configured to forcibly end the advantageous zone when the counter value satisfies the termination condition. In this example, the advantageous zone MY counter is a decrement counter with an initial value of 3600, and is configured to forcibly end the advantageous zone when the calculation result related to the counter value of the advantageous zone MY counter becomes less than 0.

If the answer is Yes in step 3501-5, proceed to step 3501-6; if the answer is No, proceed to step 3501-1, where the advantageous period will be forcibly ended.

Furthermore, if step 3501-10 determines that the next game will transition to a new advantageous zone (Yes), then in step 3501-11 the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets the advantageous zone remaining game number counter, advantageous zone difference number counter, and advantageous zone MY counter to their initial values (in this example, the initial value of the advantageous zone remaining game number counter is 4000, the initial value of the advantageous zone difference number counter is 2400, and the initial value of the advantageous zone MY counter is 3600), and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 1293).

As such, in the configuration of Figure 100, the initial counter value of the advantageous zone MY counter is 3600, which is the same value as the specific number mentioned above (3600 in this example). In other words, the advantageous zone is configured to forcibly end when the maximum difference number based on the timing when the difference number in one advantageous zone is the smallest reaches the specific number (3600 in this example), as the condition for ending the advantageous zone.

By configuring it in this way, even if the profit awarded to the player at a single trigger is scheduled to be greater than a specific number (3600 in this example) (the number of added AT games greatly exceeds the expected value), the advantageous period (AT state) will be forcibly ended when the profit awarded to the player at a single trigger reaches the specific number (3600 in this example), so the profit awarded to the player at a single trigger will not be too large, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming too gambling.

In the configuration of FIG. 100, the initial value of the counter value of the advantageous zone MY counter is a specific number (3600 in this example), but this is not limited to this and may be changed. As an example, by setting the initial value of the counter value of the advantageous zone MY counter to 3550, which is smaller than the specific number (3600 in this example), it is possible to configure the profit awarded to a player at a single trigger to not exceed the specific number (3600 in this example). The initial value of the counter value of the advantageous zone MY counter may also be set to "a specific number (3600 in this example) - the maximum number of coins paid out in a single game + the number of bets in that game." In this configuration, regardless of the result of the game (winning minor winning combination) that forcibly ends the advantageous zone, it is possible to configure the profit awarded to a player at a single trigger to not exceed the specific number (3600 in this example) and end the advantageous zone. Note that a value smaller than 3600, such as 3550, may be referred to as the specific number.

<Configuration of the lottery for adding AT games>
Next, the configuration related to the AT game number addition lottery applicable to the slot machine according to the present specification will be described in detail below with reference to Fig. 101. The configuration related to Fig. 101 can be applied to any of the embodiments of the present specification.

Figure 101 is a flowchart of the game number addition execution process related to the subroutine of step 1500 in Figure 93. First, in step 1501-1, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the game in question is a game in which an AT game number addition lottery is executed. If the answer is Yes in step 1501-1, in step 1501-2, the CPU C100 of the main control board M references the AT game number addition lottery table and executes an AT game number addition lottery. The contents of the AT game number addition lottery table may be the contents detailed in this specification, or may be other contents.

Next, in step 1501-3, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the AT game number addition lottery of step 1501-2 was won. If the answer is Yes in step 1501-3, in step 1501-4, the CPU C100 of the main control board M references the number of added games related to the won AT game number addition lottery and calculates the expected value of the profit to be awarded to the player at one opportunity after the addition.

Here, the expected value of the profit awarded to the player at the first trigger after the addition is the current profit awarded to the player at the first trigger plus the expected number of coins won for this addition. For example, if the first trigger is the first AT hit, and the profit awarded to the player at the first trigger is 3,000 coins, and 300 games are added, and the net increase during the AT is +3 coins, then the expected value of the profit awarded to the player at the first trigger after the addition is "3,000 + 300 x 3 = 3,900." Note that the expected value of the profit awarded to the player at the first trigger after the addition may be calculated taking into account the possibility of winning the AT game number addition lottery during play related to the added number of games.

Next, in step 1501-5, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the expected value calculated in step 1501-4 (the expected value of the profit awarded to the player at one trigger after the addition) is less than the regulated value (3,400 in this example). If the answer is Yes in step 1501-5, in step 1501-6, the CPU C100 of the main control board M adds the determined number of added games to the number of remaining AT games and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 1450).

Also, if the answer is No in step 1501-5, in step 1501-7, the CPU C100 of the main control board M adds a predetermined value (10 in this example) as the number of additional games to the number of remaining AT games, and proceeds to the next process (processing in step 1450).

Also, if the answer is No in steps 1501-1 and 1501-3, proceed to the next process (step 1450).

In this example, if a player wins the AT game number addition lottery, and the expected number of coins related to the added number of games is taken into consideration, if the profit awarded to the player at a certain trigger exceeds the regulated value (3,400 in this example), a predetermined value (10 in this example) is added instead of the number of added games determined in the AT game number addition lottery.

By configuring it in this way, if the profit awarded to a player at a single trigger exceeds the regulated value, the number of added games can be set to a number relatively smaller than the number of games determined in the AT game number addition lottery, so that the profit awarded to a player at a single trigger does not exceed a specific number (3,600 in this example).

The number of added games determined in the AT game number addition lottery is sometimes referred to as the specified profit, and the determination of an addition in the AT game number addition lottery is sometimes referred to as fulfilling specified conditions, and a case in which the profit awarded to a player due to a single trigger exceeds the regulated value (3,400 in this example) is sometimes referred to as fulfilling specific conditions.

The above-mentioned limit value may be changed to a value other than 3400, but it is preferable to set it to a value less than a specific number (3600 in this example). Also, it is preferable to set the predetermined value in step 1501-7 to a value other than 10 games, but it is preferable to set it to a value smaller than the average number of added games determined in the AT game number addition lottery, and it may also be set to a value less than the smallest number of added games determined in the AT game number addition lottery.

Furthermore, in this example, if the profit awarded to a player at a single trigger exceeds the regulated value, the number of added games is set to a fixed value so that the profit awarded to a player at a single trigger does not exceed a specific number (3,600 in this example). However, this is not limited to this, and any configuration may be used as long as it can limit the configuration related to the AT game number addition lottery so that the profit awarded to a player at a single trigger does not exceed a specific number (3,600 in this example).

As an example, if the profit to be awarded to a player at a certain trigger is scheduled to exceed a specific number (3,600 in this example) due to winning the AT game number addition lottery, the system may be configured to not execute the addition (set the number of added games to 0), or the AT game number addition lottery table to be referenced (which has different winning probabilities and number of added games) may be changed based on the status of the profit to be awarded to the player at a certain trigger.

<<Image 4 of AT state>>
Next, Fig. 102 is an image diagram 4 relating to the AT state applicable to the slot machine according to this specification. The configuration in Fig. 102 may be applied to the slot machine having the configurations in Figs. 93 to 95, or may be applied to slot machines having other configurations (other specifications).

<AT state details 1>
First, as described in "AT State Content 1" in the figure, in the configuration of the figure, the AT state has a net increase of +3 coins and a duration of 1 set of 100 games. The AT state in FIG. 102 is a so-called loop-type AT, in which a set of 100 games continues with a 90% continuation rate. The AT state in FIG. 102 is configured so that the forced termination condition is met when 1,200 games are continued, and the AT state is forced to terminate. The timing of the continuation lottery, which has a 90% chance of winning, can be configured in any way. For example, it can be the timing when the start lever operation for the first game of a set is accepted, or the timing when the final stop button operation for the last game of a set is accepted.

As shown in the upper part of the same figure, in the configuration of the same figure, if 90% of the continuation lotteries are won continuously, when the AT state is entered, the first set begins at (1) in the figure, then the second set begins at (2) in the figure, then the third set begins at (3) in the figure, and then at (4) in the figure, the AT state continues for 1,200 games, satisfying the forced termination condition and the AT state ends.

<AT state details 2>
When the forced termination conditions are met, the expected number of coins to be won during the AT is a net increase of 3 coins x 1200 games = 3600 coins.

In this way, if the AT state continues in a loop, it becomes uncertain how many sets it will continue for. Therefore, by setting a forced termination condition, as shown in the configuration of Figure 102, it is possible to configure the system so that the profit awarded to the player at a single trigger does not become too large, and it is possible to curb gambling.

Note that satisfying the forced termination condition is sometimes referred to as reaching the limiter.

In addition, in the configuration of Figure 102, the expected number of coins to be won during the AT when the forced termination condition is met is set to a specific number (3600 in this example), but if you want to reduce the possibility that the profit awarded to the player due to a single trigger will exceed the specific number (3600 in this example), you can reduce the number of games that meet the forced termination condition (for example, 1150 games).

The configuration in Figure 102 may also have the decrease section described above in Figure 96, and for example, one set may be composed of AT state 1, which is an increase section, and AT state 2, which is a decrease section. In such a configuration, the number of games (or number of sets) that will be the forced termination condition may be determined based on the expected number of coins won per set, taking into account both AT state 1, which is an increase section, and AT state 2, which is a decrease section.

Also, as shown in Figure 102, it is configured so that "(average net increase in number during AT state x number of games continued when forced termination conditions are met) ≤ specific number (in this example, 3600)."

Furthermore, the configuration for setting a forced termination condition detailed in Figure 102 can be applied to all configurations in this specification.

In addition, the average net increase in the number of games played during the AT state may be referred to as the expected increase in game value per game in the operation notification state, and the number of games that continue when the forced termination condition is met may be referred to as the specified number of games.

<<Illustration of the number of coins acquired>>
Next, Figure 103 is an image diagram of an additional special state applicable to the slot machine according to this specification. The configuration of the figure may be applied to the slot machine having the configurations of Figures 93 to 95, or to slot machine having other configurations (other specifications), and is applicable to all configurations having an AT state.

First, in (a) in the figure, the game is in progress during the AT state. The effect display device S40 displays the message "Animal Rush in progress!!" corresponding to the AT state, the number of coins won displayed as "GET 158", and a push order navigation image corresponding to the push order on the center, left, and right.

Then, the system transitions to an add-on specialized state (a state for an AT where the AT game number add-on lottery is relatively favorable), and the first game in the add-on specialized state begins at (b) in the figure, with the effect display device S40 displaying a push order navigation image corresponding to the push order for the center, left, and right buttons. The effect display device S40 also displays the message "Super Animal Rush in progress!!!!" corresponding to the add-on specialized state, and the number of coins won, "GET 200."

After that, all reels in the first game in the bonus-specialized state stop in the order of center, left, and right, and the symbol combination corresponding to the push order bell (high) is displayed as shown in (c) in the figure, and 10 coins are paid out. The effect display device S40 displays "+500G" as the number of bonus games.

Then, the second game in the bonus-specialized state is executed, and all reels stop in the center, left, and right stopping order corresponding to the push order navigation. At (d) in the figure, the symbol combination corresponding to the push order bell (high) is displayed, and 10 coins are paid out. The effect display device S40 displays "+300G" as the number of bonus games.

Then, the third game in the bonus-specialized state is executed, and all reels stop in the center, left, and right stopping order corresponding to the push order navigation. At (e) in the figure, the symbol combination corresponding to the push order bell (high) is displayed, and 10 coins are paid out. The performance display device S40 displays "+500G" as the number of bonus games.

After that, the third and final game in the add-on specialized state ends, and at (f) in the figure, the effect display device S40 displays an image of a lion, an image of meat, and "GET!" as the add-on result display for the add-on specialized state.

In this way, in the configuration of Figure 103, the number of added games for each game in the added-specialized state is displayed in a display format that includes numbers such as "+500G," while the added result display at the end of the final game in the added-specialized state is configured to be displayed in a display format that does not include numbers.

Here, if a relatively large number of games are decided for each game in the special-addition state, if the total number of games decided for the special-addition state is displayed as the result of the addition in a display format that includes numbers, the displayed number of games decided for the special-addition state may become too large, which may incite the player's gambling spirit. On the other hand, by configuring as shown in Figure 103, it is possible to prevent the player's gambling spirit from being incited.

In Figure 103, the addition result display at the end of the final game in the addition-specialized state is configured to be displayed in a display format that does not include numbers, regardless of the results of each game in the addition-specialized state. However, this is not limited to this. For example, if the value obtained by multiplying the total number of addition games determined in each game in the addition-specialized state by the net increase (or the average value of the net increase) in the AT state and the addition-specialized state is less than a specific number (3600 in this example), the addition result display may be displayed in a display format that includes numbers (for example, "TOTAL + 2000G!!"); and if the value obtained by multiplying the total number of addition games determined in each game in the addition-specialized state by the net increase (or the average value of the net increase) in the AT state and the addition-specialized state is greater than a specific number (3600 in this example), the addition result display may be displayed in a display format that does not include numbers.

In addition, as a display mode that does not include numbers in the added result display, Figure 103 is configured to display an image of a lion, an image of meat, and "GET!", but this is not limited to this. For example, one meat icon could be configured to correspond to 100 added games, and if the total number of added games determined for each game in the added-specialized state is 1,000 games, 10 meat icons could be displayed, or a display such as "meat icon x 10" could be displayed to indicate to the player the total number of added games.

The display of the bonus result at the end of the final game in the bonus-specialized state may be referred to as information corresponding to the total number of games that can be played in the operation notification state granted to the player in the second operation notification state, and the display of the number of bonus games played in each game in the bonus-specialized state may be referred to as information corresponding to the number of games that can be played in the operation notification state granted to the player in that game.

In addition, when transitioning from the AT state to the add-on specialized state, as in (a) to (b) in Figure 103, the transition to the add-on specialized state may be configured to occur from the next game after a predetermined transition lottery is won in the AT state, or the transition to the add-on specialized state may occur after a predetermined number of games are played after a predetermined transition lottery is won in the AT state (a so-called precursor, and the effect display device S40 may execute an effect that encourages a transition to the add-on specialized state).

<<Image of AT end screen>>
Next, Figure 104 is an image diagram of an AT end screen applicable to the slot machine according to this specification. The configuration of the figure may be applied to the slot machine having the configurations of Figures 93 to 95, or may be applied to slot machine having other configurations (other specifications), and is applicable to all configurations having an AT in progress state.

First, in (a) in the figure, the game is in progress during the AT state. The effect display device S40 displays the message "Animal Rush in progress!!" corresponding to the AT state, the number of coins won displayed as "GET 158", and a push order navigation image corresponding to the push order on the center, left, and right.

Then, as the game progresses, in (b) in the figure, a game is played for the remaining three games in the AT state, and the effect display device S40 displays the message "Animal Rush in progress!!" corresponding to the AT state, and the number of coins won, "GET 3800." Furthermore, the effect display device S40 displays "LAST 3," which corresponds to the three games remaining when the reels start to spin, as the number of remaining games. Here, the remaining game number display is a display that indicates to the player the number of games remaining in the AT state, and is configured to be displayed on the effect display device S40 at a predetermined timing after the reels start to spin.

Then, as the game progresses, the final game in the AT state is played at (c) in the figure, and the effect display device S40 displays the message "Animal Rush in progress!!" corresponding to the AT state, the number of coins won as "GET 3807", a push order navigation image corresponding to the push order on the center, left, and right, and the remaining number of games as "Final Game" corresponding to the final game.

After that, all reels related to the final game during the AT state are displayed as stopped, and the symbol combination corresponding to the push order bell (high) is displayed as stopped in (d) in the figure, and 10 coins are paid out.

Then, at (e) in the figure, a predetermined time after (d) in the figure, the final game in the AT state ends, and the AT end screen is displayed on the effect display device S40. Here, the AT end screen is a screen that displays the number of games in which the AT state continued and the final number of medals won, which is the number of game medals won in the AT state. In the figure, 1298 is displayed as the number of games in which the AT state continued, and 3814, which is greater than the specified number of 3600, is displayed as the final number of medals won.

In this way, in the configuration of Figure 104, the final number of coins won displayed on the AT end screen is configured to be a number greater than a specific number (3600 in this example). Here, when the configuration of Figure 104 is combined with the configuration described above in Figure 103, if the total number of added games determined in each game in the added-on specialized state is greater than a specific number (3600 in this example), the added-on result display is displayed in a manner that does not include numbers, while the final number of coins won displayed on the AT end screen can be configured to be a number greater than the specific number (3600 in this example).

By configuring it in this way, displays related to profits to be awarded to the player subsequently, such as the total number of added games determined in each game in the added-on specialized state, are configured to not display numbers larger than a specific number (3600 in this example), thereby preventing the player's gambling instincts from being aroused, while displays related to profits previously awarded to the player, such as the final number of coins won on the AT end screen, are configured to display numbers larger than a specific number (3600 in this example), giving the player a sense of satisfaction.

The final number of coins won displayed on the AT end screen may be referred to as the total gaming value awarded to the player in the operation notification state.

<<Image 1 of the maximum expected value of profit given to a player at a single opportunity>>
Next, Figure 105 is an image diagram 1 relating to the maximum expected value of the profit awarded to a player at one trigger, which is applicable to the slot machine according to this specification. In this figure, the configuration of the AT state, which is applicable to the slot machine according to this specification and takes into account the maximum expected value of the profit awarded to a player at one trigger, is described in detail.

<AT game number addition lottery details>
105 has an additional specialized state, and in the additional specialized state, three AT game number addition lotteries are executed in one play: AT game number addition lottery 1, AT game number addition lottery 2, and AT game number addition lottery 3. As an example, the case where the additional specialized state ends in one play is illustrated.

<AT Game Number Addition Lottery 1>
AT game number addition lottery 1 is configured to be executed by referring to AT game number addition lottery table 1, and AT game number addition lottery table 1 is configured as follows.
Number of games: 30G, Probability: 49.9%
Number of games: 50G, Probability: 50%
Number of games: 500G, Probability: 0.1%
The average number of games when added is 40.5G.

<AT Game Number Addition Lottery 2>
The AT game number addition lottery 2 is configured to be executed by referring to the AT game number addition lottery table 2, and the AT game number addition lottery table 2 is configured as follows.
Number of games: 0G, Probability: 49.9%
Number of games: 50G, Probability: 50%
Number of games: 400G, Probability: 0.1%
The average number of games played when added is 25.4G.

<AT Game Number Addition Lottery 3>
The AT game number addition lottery 3 is configured to be executed by referring to the AT game number addition lottery table 3, and the AT game number addition lottery table 3 is configured as follows.
Number of games: 0G, Probability: 49.9%
Number of games: 50G, Probability: 50%
Number of games: 280G, Probability: 0.1%
The average number of games played when added is 25.3G.

When configured in this way, one trigger for calculating the maximum expected value of the profit awarded to a player at one trigger is preferably when the maximum number of added games is determined in each of AT game number addition lotteries 1 to 3, since three AT game number addition lotteries are always performed in one game.

In other words, as shown at the top of the figure, the maximum expected value of profit awarded to a player at one trigger is the sum of the maximum value of 500 games for AT Game Count Add-on Lottery 1, the maximum value of 400 games for AT Game Count Add-on Lottery 2, and the maximum value of 280 games for AT Game Count Add-on Lottery 3, multiplied by the average value of the net increase in the AT state (and the add-on specialized state).Since the average value of the net increase in the AT state (and the add-on specialized state) in the figure is +3 coins, the result is "(500 + 400 + 280) G x 3 coins = 3540".

By configuring the system so that the maximum expected value of the profit awarded to a player per trigger, calculated as shown in the diagram, does not exceed a specific number (3,600 in this example), it is possible to prevent the game from becoming too gambling-oriented.

<<Image 2 regarding the maximum expected value of profit given to a player at a single opportunity>>
106 is an image diagram 2 showing the maximum expected value of the profit awarded to a player at one trigger, which is applicable to the slot machine according to the present specification. In this figure, the configuration of the AT state, which is applicable to the slot machine according to the present specification and takes into account the maximum expected value of the profit awarded to a player at one trigger, is described in detail.

<AT game number addition lottery details>
106, in a predetermined situation during the AT state (for example, the add-on specialized state), in one play, AT game number add-on lottery 1 (a lottery that references AT game number add-on lottery table 1) is executed, and then AT game number add-on lottery 2 (a lottery that references AT game number add-on lottery table 2) is executed, and AT game number add-on lottery 2 is executed repeatedly until the end of the loop is determined in AT game number add-on lottery 2. Also, the average net increase during the AT state (and the add-on specialized state) is +3 coins.

<AT Game Number Addition Lottery 1>
AT game number addition lottery 1 is configured to be executed by referring to AT game number addition lottery table 1, and AT game number addition lottery table 1 is configured as follows.
Number of games: 30G, Probability: 49.9%
Number of games: 50G, Probability: 50%
Number of games: 500G, Probability: 0.1%
The average number of games when added is 40.5G.

<AT Game Number Addition Lottery 2>
The AT game number addition lottery 2 is configured to be executed by referring to the AT game number addition lottery table 2, and the AT game number addition lottery table 2 is configured as follows.
Loop end, probability: 20%
Number of games: 100G, Probability: 40%
Number of games: 200G, Probability: 40%
The average number of games when added is 150G, and the average number of loops is 4.

<Maximum expected profit given to a player in a single opportunity>
When configured in this manner, one trigger for calculating the maximum expected value of profit to be awarded to a player at one trigger is when the maximum of 500G is determined in AT game number addition lottery 1 (lottery that references AT game number addition lottery table 1).In this case, the average number of added games when the average of four loops is executed in AT game number addition lottery 2 (lottery that references AT game number addition lottery table 2) is "4 times x 150G = 600", so the expected number of added games is 1,100 games and the expected number of winning coins is "3 x 1,100 = 3,300 coins", which is less than the specific number of 3,600 coins.However, since AT game number addition lottery 2 is a loop lottery and the number of loops is indefinite (so the results are likely to vary), it is preferable to set a limiter.

The limiter in the figure is the upper limit on the number of times AT game number addition lottery 2 can be executed; in the figure, it is set to four times, so that, as mentioned above, the expected number of coins won does not exceed the specific number of 3,600 coins.

In addition, without being limited to this, the upper limit for the number of added games may be set to 1,200 games, calculated by dividing a specific number (3,600 in this example) by the net increase of +3, and if there is a possibility that the number of added games will exceed the upper limit, a limiter may be provided to end the AT Game Number Addition Lottery 2 loop.

By setting a limiter as shown in the figure, the maximum expected value of the profit awarded to a player at one trigger (or the profit awarded to a player at one trigger) can be configured to not exceed a specific number (3600 in this example), thereby preventing excessive gambling.

<<Image 3 regarding the maximum expected value of profit given to a player at a single opportunity>>
Next, Figure 107 is an image diagram 3 relating to the maximum expected value of the profit awarded to a player at one trigger, which is applicable to the slot machine according to this specification. In this figure, the configuration of the AT state, which is applicable to the slot machine according to this specification and takes into account the maximum expected value of the profit awarded to a player at one trigger, is described in detail.

<AT game number addition lottery details>
In the configuration of Figure 107, the game before transitioning to the AT state is configured to transition to the CZ (a game state with a relatively high probability of acquiring the right to transition to the AT state, sometimes called the chance zone). There are 11 CZ games, and in the first through tenth games, AT game number lottery 1 is executed at the time of the first hit, and in the eleventh game, AT game number lottery 2 is executed at the time of the first hit. If a win is won, the total number of games determined in the first through tenth games becomes the number of AT games at the time of the first hit, and if a win is not won, the number of AT games at the time of the first hit becomes 0 (the game does not transition to the AT state). In addition, the average net increase in the AT state (and the add-on specialized state) is +3 coins.

<First hit AT game number lottery 1>
The first hit AT game number lottery 1 is configured to be executed by referring to the first hit AT game number lottery table 1, and the first hit AT game number lottery table 1 is configured as follows.
Number of games: 30G, probability: 40%
Number of games: 50G, Probability: 50%
Number of games: 500G, Probability: 10%
The average number of games played is 87G.

<First hit AT game number lottery 2>
The first hit AT game number lottery 2 is configured to be executed by referring to the first hit AT game number lottery table 2, and the first hit AT game number lottery table 2 is configured as follows.
Winning probability: 20%
Not winning, probability: 80%

<Maximum expected profit given to a player in a single opportunity>
When configured in this manner, the average total number of AT games determined in the 1st to 10th plays in the CZ is "87G x 10 = 870G", and if 870G is determined as the number of AT games at the time of the first hit, the expected number of winning coins will be "3 x 870 = 2610 coins".

In other words, even if AT game number addition lottery 2 is won, the expected number of coins won will be less than a specific number (3,600 in this example). However, because the lottery format for the first-hit AT game number lottery (particularly the number of AT games that can be determined in first-hit AT game number lottery 1) is indefinite (leading to variations in results), it is preferable to implement processing to prevent the expected number of coins won from exceeding the specific number (3,600 in this example). As an example, the upper limit for the number of AT games at the first hit can be set to 1,200 games, calculated by dividing the specific number (3,600 in this example) by the net increase of +3. If the number of AT games at the first hit reaches this upper limit, the result of first-hit AT game number lottery 1 can be set to 0G. Alternatively, if the number of AT games at the first hit approaches this upper limit, the table referenced in first-hit AT game number lottery 1 can be switched to a table other than first-hit AT game number lottery table 1.

By configuring it in this way, the maximum expected value of the profit awarded to a player at a single trigger (or the profit awarded to a player at a single trigger) can be configured to not exceed a specific number (3,600 in this example), preventing excessive gambling.

<<Image 4 regarding the maximum expected value of profit given to a player at one opportunity>>
Next, Figure 108 is an image diagram 4 relating to the maximum expected value of the profit awarded to a player at one trigger, which is applicable to the slot machine according to this specification. In this figure, the configuration of the AT state, which is applicable to the slot machine according to this specification and takes into account the maximum expected value of the profit awarded to a player at one trigger, is described in detail.

<AT game number addition lottery details>
108 has an add-on specialized state, and the add-on specialized state remains in place for three games, and in the first game, AT game number add-on lottery 1 (lottery with reference to AT game number add-on lottery table 1) is executed. If the maximum number of add-on games, 500 games (details will be described later), is not determined in AT game number add-on lottery 1, AT game number add-on lottery 1 (lottery with reference to AT game number add-on lottery table 1) is executed in the next game, and if the maximum number of add-on games, 500 games, is determined in AT game number add-on lottery 1, AT game number add-on lottery 2 (lottery with reference to AT game number add-on lottery table 2) is executed from the next game onwards. In addition, the average net increase during the AT state (and add-on specialized state) is +3 coins.

<AT Game Number Addition Lottery 1>
The AT game number addition lottery 1 is configured to be executed by referring to the AT game number addition lottery table 1, and the AT game number addition lottery table 1 is configured as follows.
Number of games: 30G, Probability: 49.9%
Number of games: 50G, Probability: 50%
Number of games: 500G, Probability: 0.1%
The average number of games when added is 40.5G.

<AT Game Number Addition Lottery 2>
The AT game number addition lottery 2 is configured to be executed by referring to the AT game number addition lottery table 2, and the AT game number addition lottery table 2 is configured as follows.
Number of games: 30G, Probability: 0%
Number of games: 50G, Probability: 50%
Number of games: 500G, Probability: 50%
The average number of games when added is 275G.

When configured in this manner, the first trigger when calculating the maximum expected value of profit to be awarded to a player at one trigger is when the maximum number of added games, 500 games, is determined in the AT game number addition lottery 1 in the first game.In this case, the maximum expected value of profit to be awarded to a player at one trigger is the sum of the maximum value of 500 games in the AT game number addition lottery 1 in the first game, the average value of 275 games in the AT game number addition lottery 2 in the second game, and the average value of 275 games in the AT game number addition lottery 2 in the third game, multiplied by the average value of the net increase in the AT state (and the add-on specialized state).As the average value of the net increase in the AT state (and the add-on specialized state) in the same figure is +3 coins, the result is "(500 + 275 + 275) G x 3 coins = 3150". Thus, in the configuration of Figure 108, one trigger when calculating the maximum expected value of the profit awarded to a player at one trigger is when the maximum number of added games, 500, is determined in AT Game Number Addition Lottery 1 in the first game; from the second game onwards, the number of added games has not been determined (is indefinite), so the average value of AT Game Number Addition Lottery 2 is used.

As shown in the figure, by configuring the system so that the maximum expected value of the profit awarded to a player in a single trigger does not exceed a specific number (3,600 in this example), it is possible to prevent the system from becoming too gambling-oriented.

<<Image 5 regarding the maximum expected value of profit awarded to a player at a single opportunity>>
Next, Figure 109 is an image diagram 4 relating to the maximum expected value of the profit awarded to a player at one trigger, which is applicable to the slot machine according to this specification. In this figure, the configuration of the AT state, which is applicable to the slot machine according to this specification and takes into account the maximum expected value of the profit awarded to a player at one trigger, is described in detail.

<AT game number addition lottery details>
109 has an add-on specialized state, and the add-on specialized state lasts for 3 games, with AT game number add-on lottery 1 (lottery with reference to AT game number add-on lottery table 1) being executed in the first game, AT game number add-on lottery 2 (lottery with reference to AT game number add-on lottery table 2) being executed in the second game, and AT game number add-on lottery 3 (lottery with reference to AT game number add-on lottery table 3) being executed in the third game. Also, the average net increase during the AT state (and add-on specialized state) is +3 coins.

<AT Game Number Addition Lottery 1>
The AT game number addition lottery 1 is configured to be executed in the first game in the addition-specialized state by referring to the AT game number addition lottery table 1, and the AT game number addition lottery table 1 is configured as follows.
Number of games: 30G, Probability: 30%
Number of games: 50G, Probability: 50%
Number of games: 500G, Probability: 20%
The average number of games when added is 134G.

<AT Game Number Addition Lottery 2>
The AT game number addition lottery 2 is configured to be executed in the second game in the addition-specialized state by referring to the AT game number addition lottery table 2, and the AT game number addition lottery table 2 is configured as follows.
Number of games: 30G, Probability: 49.9%
Number of games: 50G, Probability: 50%
Number of games: 700G, Probability: 0.1%
The average number of games when added is 40.7G.

<AT Game Number Addition Lottery 3>
The AT game number addition lottery 3 is configured to be executed on the third game in the addition-specialized state by referring to the AT game number addition lottery table 3, and the AT game number addition lottery table 3 is configured as follows.
Number of games: 20G, Probability: 10%
Number of games: 40G, Probability: 20%
Number of games: 200G, Probability: 70%
The average number of games when added is 150G.

<Maximum expected profit given to a player in a single opportunity>
In this configuration, one trigger when calculating the maximum expected value of profit to be awarded to a player at one trigger is when the maximum number of added games, 700 games, is determined in the AT game number addition lottery 2 in the second game.In this case, the maximum expected value of profit to be awarded to a player at one trigger is the sum of the average value of 134 games in the AT game number addition lottery 1 in the first game, the maximum value of 700 games in the AT game number addition lottery 2 in the second game, and the average value of 150 games in the AT game number addition lottery 3 in the third game, multiplied by the average value of the net increase in the AT state (and the add-on specialized state).Since the average value of the net increase in the AT state (and the add-on specialized state) in the same figure is +3 coins, the result is "(134 + 700 + 150) G x 3 coins = 2952". In this way, in the configuration of Figure 109, one trigger when calculating the maximum expected value of profit to be awarded to a player at one trigger is when the maximum number of added games, 700 games, is determined in AT Game Number Addition Lottery 2 in the second game.In this case, since the number of added games is not determined (is indefinite) in the first and third games, the average value is used for AT Game Number Addition Lottery 1 and AT Game Number Addition Lottery 3.

By configuring the system so that the maximum expected value of the profit awarded to a player per trigger, calculated as shown in the diagram, does not exceed a specific number (3,600 in this example), it is possible to prevent the game from becoming too gambling-oriented.

<<Image 6 regarding the maximum expected value of profit awarded to a player at one opportunity>>
Next, Figure 110 is an image diagram 6 relating to the maximum expected value of the profit awarded to a player at one trigger, which is applicable to the slot machine according to this specification. In this figure, the configuration of the AT state, which is applicable to the slot machine according to this specification and takes into account the maximum expected value of the profit awarded to a player at one trigger, is described in detail.

<AT game number addition lottery details>
110 has an add-on specialized state, and the add-on specialized state remains in place for three games, and in the first game, AT game number add-on lottery 1 (lottery with reference to AT game number add-on lottery table 1) is executed. If the maximum number of add-on games, 500 games (details to be described later), is not determined in AT game number add-on lottery 1, AT game number add-on lottery 1 (lottery with reference to AT game number add-on lottery table 1) is executed in the next game, and if the maximum number of add-on games, 500 games, is determined in AT game number add-on lottery 1, AT game number add-on lottery 2 (lottery with reference to AT game number add-on lottery table 2) is executed from the next game onwards.

Furthermore, if the maximum number of added games, 200 games (details will be described later), is not determined in AT Game Number Addition Lottery 2, AT Game Number Addition Lottery 2 will be executed for the next game (lottery with reference to AT Game Number Addition Lottery Table 2), and if the maximum number of added games, 200 games, is determined in AT Game Number Addition Lottery 2, AT Game Number Addition Lottery 3 (lottery with reference to AT Game Number Addition Lottery Table 3) will be executed from the next game onwards. Furthermore, the average net increase during the AT state (and the add-on specialized state) is +3 coins.

<AT Game Number Addition Lottery 1>
The AT game number addition lottery 1 is configured to be executed by referring to the AT game number addition lottery table 1, and the AT game number addition lottery table 1 is configured as follows.
Number of games: 30G, Probability: 49.9%
Number of games: 50G, Probability: 50%
Number of games: 500G, Probability: 0.1%
The average number of games when added is 40.5G.

<AT Game Number Addition Lottery 2>
The AT game number addition lottery 2 is configured to be executed by referring to the AT game number addition lottery table 2, and the AT game number addition lottery table 2 is configured as follows.
Number of games: 30G, Probability: 30%
Number of games: 50G, Probability: 50%
Number of games: 200G, Probability: 20%
The average number of games when added is 74G.

<AT Game Number Addition Lottery 3>
The AT game number addition lottery 3 is configured to be executed by referring to the AT game number addition lottery table 3, and the AT game number addition lottery table 3 is configured as follows.
Number of games: 20G, Probability: 10%
Number of games: 40G, Probability: 20%
Number of games: 400G, Probability: 70%
The average number of games when added is 290G.

In this configuration, if the maximum value of 400G is determined in AT Game Number Add-on Lottery 3, the maximum value of 500G has been determined in AT Game Number Add-on Lottery 1, and the maximum value of 200G has been determined in AT Game Number Add-on Lottery 2. Therefore, a trigger for calculating the maximum expected value of the profit to be awarded to a player at a single trigger is when the maximum value is determined in all of AT Game Number Add-on Lottery 1 to 3. In this case, the profit to be awarded to a player at a single trigger will be The maximum expected value is the sum of the maximum value of 500 games in AT game count addition lottery 1 for the first game, the maximum value of 200 games in AT game count addition lottery 2 for the second game, and the maximum value of 400 games in AT game count addition lottery 2 for the third game, multiplied by the average net increase in the AT state (and the add-on specialized state).Since the average net increase in the AT state (and the add-on specialized state) in the same diagram is +3 coins, the maximum expected value is "(500 + 200 + 400)G x 3 coins = 3300".

As shown in the diagram, by configuring the system so that the maximum expected value of the profit awarded to a player in a single trigger does not exceed a specific number (3,600 in this example), it is possible to prevent the system from becoming too gambling-oriented.

<Configuration regarding ending state>
In addition, as a configuration for the maximum expected value of the profit given to the player at a certain trigger, it may be configured to be able to transition to an ending state. The ending state is a state related to the AT in which push order navigation can be executed, and when a predetermined number of games are played in the ending state, the ending state ends and the normal section is entered.

In the ending state, the player can feel a sense of accomplishment by executing a special effect (for example, a moving image of a scene related to the ending of the story related to the gaming machine) using the effect display device S40 or the like.

The ending state may be configured to exist as a state related to AT, or the main control board M may remain in the AT in progress state and the ending state may exist as a state on the sub-control board S.

The ending state can be entered by satisfying a predetermined condition (for example, the number of coins won in the AT state reaches 3,300). When the ending state is entered, the sum of the number of coins won in the AT state up until the transition to the ending state and the number of coins won in the ending state is configured to be less than a specific number (3,600 in this example). This allows the maximum expected value of profit awarded to a player at a single trigger to be less than a specific number (3,600 in this example), resulting in a gaming machine that is not overly gambling-oriented.

Furthermore, when the difference number from the start of the advantageous period reaches a first value (e.g., 2100) that is less than a predetermined number A (2400 in this example), the period transitions to ending state A, and when ending state A ends, the period transitions to the normal period; when the maximum difference number (sometimes referred to as MY) based on the timing when the difference number in one advantageous period is the smallest reaches a second value (e.g., 3300) that is less than a predetermined number B (3600 in this example), the period transitions to ending state B, and when ending state B ends, the period transitions to the normal period.

When configured in this way, ending state A and ending state B may be the same state (the same state on both the main control board M and the sub-control board S, and the same effect is executed), or they may be different states (different states on the main control board M and/or the sub-control board S, and different effect is executed).

When ending state A is reached, if the maximum difference based on the timing when the difference in one advantageous zone was smallest reaches a second value (e.g., 3300) that is less than a predetermined number B (3600 in this example), ending state B may not be initiated again. Also, when ending state B is reached, if the difference from the start of the advantageous zone reaches a first value (e.g., 2100) that is less than a predetermined number A (2400 in this example), ending state A may not be initiated again. This configuration can prevent the profit awarded to a player from becoming too high due to a single trigger.

When ending state A is reached, if the maximum difference based on the timing when the difference in one favorable zone was smallest reaches a second value (e.g., 3300) that is less than a predetermined number B (3600 in this example), ending state B may be configured to start anew. Also, when ending state B is reached, if the difference from the start of the favorable zone reaches a first value (e.g., 2100) that is less than a predetermined number A (2400 in this example), ending state A may be configured to start anew.

<AT-related configuration>
In addition, the configuration for preventing the maximum expected value of the profit awarded to the player due to the aforementioned single trigger from becoming too large can be a combination of one or more configurations, and any configuration for the AT state in which push order navigation can be executed, such as the AT in-progress state, can be applied.

As an overview of the configuration of the state related to the AT, it is possible to apply a configuration to any of the following configurations to prevent the maximum expected value of the profit given to the player at the aforementioned single trigger from becoming too large. Note that there is no problem in combining multiple of the following configurations.
(1) It has a decreasing section as detailed in FIG.
(2) The AT state, detailed in Figure 96, is executed for the number of sets determined at the time of the first hit.
(3) Allow transitions between multiple AT states as detailed in FIG.
(4) A limiter is provided as detailed in FIG.
(5) Execute the loop lottery as detailed in FIG.
(6) A lottery to add to the number of AT games will be held.
(7) Has an additional specialization state.
(8) As detailed in Figure 105, multiple lotteries are conducted to add to the number of AT games per game.
(9) Execute the loop lottery as detailed in FIG.
(10) It has a CZ, as detailed in FIG.
(11) Multiple AT game number addition lottery tables detailed in Figures 108 to 110 may be referenced.
(12) The AT state is managed by the number of medals acquired, not by the number of games played. In other words, the AT state ends when the player acquires the determined number of medals acquired.
(13) Instead of a lottery to add the number of AT games, a lottery to add the number of AT winning coins is executed, and the AT state continues until the determined number of winning coins is acquired.
(14) In the AT state, a fall lottery is executed, and if the fall lottery is won, the AT state ends.
(15) In the addition-specialized state, the AT game number addition lottery is executed by referring to only one table.

<<<Fourth Embodiment>>>
Next, a fourth embodiment will be described, and in the description, the same symbols and wording will be used for the same parts as in the above-mentioned embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified. Note that all the configurations of the fourth embodiment can be applied to the other embodiments, and all the configurations of the other embodiments can be applied to the fourth embodiment.

Furthermore, while the fourth embodiment is a slot machine that uses gaming medals, it should be noted that the configurations detailed in the fourth embodiment that do not use gaming medals can also be applied to medal-less slot machines.

The fourth embodiment will be described in detail below, focusing mainly on the differences from the third embodiment.

Figure 111 is a list of basic specifications for a slot machine in the fourth embodiment. In the slot machine of the fourth embodiment, the specified number of coins when the bonus device is not activated (i.e., when a bonus is not being played), which is a state other than when the RB is activated (during RB) or when the SB is activated (during SB), is three; the specified number of coins when the RB is activated is one or three (this will be described later); the specified number of coins when the SB is activated is three; the number of frames on the left reel M51, middle reel M52, and right reel M53 is 20, the same as in the first embodiment; and the pay line used to determine whether a win is won is one line: the bottom row of the left reel M51, the middle row of the middle reel M52, and the bottom row of the right reel M53, whether the specified number is one or three. Furthermore, when the specified number is three, the maximum payout number is 13 and the minimum payout number is 1; when the specified number is one, the maximum payout number is 15 and the minimum payout number is also 15 (the correspondence between winning roles and payout numbers will be described later). When the specified number is three, the maximum number of wins is 13, and when the specified number is one, the maximum number of wins is 15. The maximum number of wins varies depending on the specified number, but the maximum number of wins may be the same for all specified numbers. The included features include five Type 1 BBs, two RBs executed during Type 1 BBs, and one SB. The order of priority for winning (priority for winning) is different from the first embodiment, and is "replay role → bonus → small role (bell, watermelon, etc.)" (the first embodiment prioritizes small roles, while the fourth embodiment prioritizes bonus roles). In addition, when a push order minor role (push order role) that provides different benefits to the player depending on the push order is won, the pull control is also performed using number priority control or quantity priority control, just like in the first embodiment.

Figure 112 shows the reel arrangement of a slot machine in the fourth embodiment. As shown in the figure, the left reel M51, center reel M52, and right reel M53 each have 20 frames (numbers 0 to 19), and there are 10 types of symbols: "White Seven," "Red Seven," "Bar," "Character," "Replay," "Bell," "Watermelon A," "Watermelon B," "Cherry," and "Blank." These symbols are included in the symbol combinations that make up winning roles. Note that the configuration shown in the figure is merely an example, and there is no problem with increasing, decreasing, or changing the types of symbols.

Figure 113 is a list of bonuses for a slot machine in the fourth embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, the activation condition is a win (the symbol combination associated with each bonus is displayed stopped on an active line), and there are Type 1 BBs, which have Type 1 BB-A through Type 1 BB-E; RBs, which have RB-A and RB-B, which have activation conditions that require a win, and which have RB-Bs that activate continuously without a win (a new RB activates when the RB ends); and SBs, which have activation conditions that require a win. Of these, Type 1 BBs and RB-A, other than SB, are bonuses that allow the winning state to be carried over to the next game or later, even if the winning game does not result in a win, while SB is a bonus that cannot be carried over and will disappear if the winning game is not won.

Of the five Type 1 BBs, four, Type 1 BB-A to Type 1 BB-D, are "JACIN lottery type" (in the diagram, it is written as "not continuous RB operation") that repeatedly switch between BB general (non-RB-A) and RB-A during Type 1 BB operation, such as BB general (non-RB-A) → RB-A → BB general → RB-A... The remaining Type 1 BB-E, during Type 1 BB operation, switches between RB-B → RB-B → ...and so on, it is always in RB. In other words, the Type 1 BB-E is an "all JACIN type" (in the diagram it says "RB-B operates continuously") that operates RB-B continuously. Also, the Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-B end when more than 274 coins are paid out (gaming medals are acquired), the Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-B end when more than 220 coins are paid out, and the Type 1 BB-E ends when more than 52 coins are paid out. The game ends when the payout exceeds the limit. Furthermore, in the "JACIN lottery type" Type 1 BB, broadly speaking, the state before transitioning to RB-A (waiting for an RB-A win/prize) is repeated with the BB general state, and the RB-A state during BB. Specifically, the BB general state includes "BB general not inside," where the RB-A has not been won, and "BB general inside," where the RB-A has been won but not won. Furthermore, the RB-A during BB includes "BB shift not in operation inside," where the RB-A drawn during RB-A during BB has not been won, and "BB shift in operation inside (sometimes simply referred to as "RB-A inside")," where the RB-A drawn during RB-A during BB has been won (a state in which the RB-A win has been carried over).

The symbol combination for Type 1 BB-A is "White Seven, Red Seven, Watermelon A," and Type 1 BB-A is won when the number 2 "White Seven" stops on the bottom row of the left reel M51, the number 13 "Red Seven" stops on the middle row of the middle reel M52, and the number 7 "Watermelon A" stops on the bottom row of the right reel M53. Here, on the right reel M53, the "White Seven" is positioned at number 9, two frames above the number 7 "Watermelon A." Therefore, visually, the "White Seven" appears on the bottom row of the left reel M51, the "Red Seven" appears on the middle row of the middle reel M52, and the "White Seven" appears on the top row of the right reel M53, resulting in a straight line of seven symbols (7 symbols) diagonally upward to the right: "White Seven, Red Seven, White Seven." Also, the symbol combination that results in a Type 1 BB-B is "Red Seven, White Seven, Watermelon B" ("Red Seven, White Seven, Red Seven" are displayed in a straight line diagonally upwards to the right), the symbol combination that results in a Type 1 BB-C is "White Seven, White Seven, Watermelon A" ("White Seven, White Seven, White Seven" are displayed in a straight line diagonally upwards to the right), the symbol combination that results in a Type 1 BB-C is "Red Seven, Red Seven, Watermelon B" ("Red Seven, Red Seven, Red Seven" are displayed in a straight line diagonally upwards to the right), the symbol combination that results in a Type 1 BB-D is "Red Seven, Red Seven, Watermelon A" ("Red Seven, Red Seven, White Seven" are displayed in a straight line diagonally upwards to the right), and the symbol combination that results in a Type 1 BB-E is "Red Seven, White Seven, Watermelon A" ("Red Seven, White Seven, White Seven" are displayed in a straight line diagonally upwards to the right).

Of the Type 1 BB-A symbol combinations, there is only one "White Seven" on the left reel 51, one "Red Seven" on the middle reel M52, and one "Watermelon A" on the right reel M53, so if you perform the stop operation without using eye-pressing (in other words, this is also called "random pressing (free hitting)" where you operate the stop button D40 using any operating procedure), at least one of the "White Seven," "Red Seven," and "Watermelon A" may not appear on the active line (hereinafter, symbols that may not be displayed on their own may be referred to as "PB≠1 symbols"). Therefore, these Type 1 BB-A symbol combinations may not result in a winning result if you just press the buttons at random, and to ensure a winning result, you need to use eye-pressing to aim and stop the symbol you want to display. For Type 1 BB-B through Type 1 BB-E, the symbols that make up each of these symbol combinations are PB≠1 symbols, so these Type 1 BB-A through Type 1 BB-E symbol combinations may not result in a win if you just press the buttons randomly; to ensure a win, you need to use your eyes to aim and stop the symbol you want to see displayed (symbol combinations that may not result in a win if you just press the buttons randomly are sometimes called "PB≠1 symbol combinations").

RB-A is a bonus drawn during Type 1 BB-A to Type 1 BB-D. This RB-A symbol combination is guaranteed to win, even if pressed randomly, unless there is a factor preventing a win, such as this RB-A and a replay winning combination being won in the same game (such as a duplicate win) (in the case of the bonus-priority stop control of the fourth embodiment, for example, when a miss or a small win occurs) (such a symbol combination that is guaranteed to win is sometimes referred to as a "PB=1 symbol combination"). In the fourth embodiment, in a game in which RB-A wins, the replay winning combination is also guaranteed. For this reason, in a game in which RB-A wins, the winning of the replay role takes priority and the replay role wins, so RB-A does not win. However, in a subsequent game in which the RB-A win is carried over (a game within RB-A), if a winning role that does not prevent a win, such as the "Winning-A1 Condition Device" with winning number 41 (see Figure 120), is won, in other words, in a game in which a minor role within RB-A wins, the RB-A is guaranteed to win because the bonus win takes priority. Note that hereafter, "a winning combination of Type 1 BB-A" may simply be referred to as "a winning combination of Type 1 BB-A," and this also applies to Type 1 BB-B through Type 1 BB-E, RB-A, and SB.

This RB-A symbol combination has four symbols: "White Seven Replay Bell," "Red Seven Replay Bell," "Bar Replay Bell," and "Blank Replay Bell." Of these symbol combinations, the "Replay" symbol corresponding to the center reel M52 is arranged every maximum number of frames (four frames in this example) as shown in FIG. 112, and is a symbol that will always stop and be displayed in the middle row of the center reel M52, even if you press it randomly (hereinafter, a symbol that will always stop and be displayed by itself may also be referred to as a "PB=1 symbol"). Similarly, of the RB-A symbol combinations, the "Bell" symbol corresponding to the right reel M53 is also a PB=1 symbol. On the other hand, among the RB-A symbol combinations, the "white seven," "red seven," "bar," and "blank" corresponding to the left reel M51 are each farther apart than the maximum number of frames, so if you press the "white seven," "red seven," "bar," or "blank" alone, they may not be displayed in the lower row of the left reel M51 (hereinafter, symbols that may not be stopped and displayed alone may be referred to as "PB≠1 symbols"). However, on the left reel M51, a "white seven" is located at number 2, a "bar" is located at number 7 four frames away from there, a "red seven" is located at number 12 four frames away from there, and a "blank" is located at number 17 four frames away from there, so even if you perform a stop operation on the left reel M51 without performing a press operation at your sight, one of the "white seven," "red seven," "bar," or "blank" will always be displayed in the lower row of the left reel M51. In other words, the four symbols on the left reel M51 that make up part of the RB-A symbol combination (the symbols associated with the winning symbol) - "White Seven," "Red Seven," "Bar," and "Blank" - individually have a PB≠1 value. However, by arranging these four symbols every maximum number of frames, one of these four symbols is guaranteed to stop and be displayed, resulting in a PB=1 value for all four symbols (a combined PB=1 value). As mentioned above, the RB-A symbol combination is either "White Seven Replay Bell," "Red Seven Replay Bell," "Bar Replay Bell," or "Blank Replay Bell." When any of these symbol combinations stops and bets on a winning line, unlike in the case of Type 1 BB, where the seven symbols appear to stop and bet in a straight line, a random symbol combination is displayed, making it difficult to tell from the outside that an RB-A has won.

In the RB-A of the fourth embodiment, generally, in a state of "BB general not inside (in FIG. 114, it is written as "when RB is not activated when RB-A to D are activated")" which is BB general among Type 1 BB-A to Type 1 BB-D (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "Type 1 BB") and not inside RB-A, RB-A is won and becomes "BB general inside", then the RB-A symbol combination is displayed and becomes "BB shift activated not inside", and RB-A drawn in this "BB shift activated not inside" is won and becomes "BB shift activated inside (in FIG. 114, it is written as "when RB-A is activated when Type 1 BB is activated")". In other words, the flow of the game in Type 1 BB of the fourth embodiment is as follows (1) to (3).
(1) When a player wins RB-A during a Type 1 BB non-RB-A (non-BB general) game, the player enters a Type 1 BB RB-A (BB general) game. Also, in the "BB general" game, as shown in FIG. 135(3), RB, replay, and winning (small winning combination) are the objects of the lottery, and winning a winning combination can result in a payout of more game medals than the specified number. However, when a player wins a replay, the player is guaranteed to win an RB along with the replay (because when a player wins an RB-A during a Type 1 BB non-general game, the player is guaranteed to win a replay), and the replay wins, but the RB-A does not win (this will be discussed later). In addition, in the "BB General Medium Inside" as shown in FIG. 135 (4), replay and winning are subject to a lottery, and if a winning is won, RB-A will definitely win because the stop control is bonus priority and the pattern combination of RB-A is PB=1.
(2) If an RB-A wins during a Type 1 BB while inside RB-A (inside BB general), the situation becomes one in which RB-A is activated during Type 1 BB but not inside RB-A (not inside BB shift operation). In this "not inside BB shift operation" situation, as shown in Figure 135 (5), RB, win, and loss are the subject of a lottery, and by winning a single win, it is possible to receive more game medals than the specified number. On the other hand, if an RB-A win occurs during a "not inside BB shift operation" situation (in this case, a win is always also won), the situation becomes one in which the RB-A condition device is activated during Type 1 BB while RB-A is activated (inside BB shift operation), and while a small win is won, the RB-A win is carried over. In this "BB shift operation interior," as shown in Figure 135 (6), winning or losing is the subject of a lottery, and if you win a prize, you can receive more game medals than the specified number. Note that, as shown in Figure 114, the specified number is 1 only when "BB shift operation interior" is in progress (in other states, the specified number is 3).
(3) If the state is "not inside during BB shift operation" at the end of RB-A during BB, it becomes "not inside during BB general", while if the state is "inside during BB shift operation" at the end of RB-A during BB, it becomes "inside during BB general", and the above (1) or (2) is repeated.

In this way, because the RB-A symbol combination is not easily apparent, compared to the Type 1 BB-E specifications in which RB-B operates continuously (indicated as "When RB-B operates when Type 1 BB is activated" in Figure 114), the number of games in which RB remains active can be extended without the player noticing that they have won or won an RB. As a result, Type 1 BB-A through Type 1 BB-D can be played with the same feel as Type 1 BB-E, which operates RB-B continuously, and the number of games in which Type 1 BB-A through Type 1 BB-D remain active can be extended.

SB is a bonus drawn when a bonus device is not activated. The symbol combination that results in this SB is "blank, blank, watermelon B." Because these symbols are PB≠1, random pressing of the buttons may not result in a prize for these 1st-class BB-A or 1st-class BB-E symbols. To ensure a prize, players must use their eyes to aim for the symbol they want to appear. Furthermore, among the symbol combinations that result in SB, there is only one "blank" on the left reel M51 (number 17), "blank" on the center reel M52 (number 8), and "watermelon B" on the right reel M53 (number 12). Furthermore, for each symbol, there are no symbols associated with bonuses, such as "red seven," "white seven," or "bar," within the maximum number of frames (4). Therefore, if a player continues to use their eyes to aim for symbols associated with bonuses, such as "red seven," "white seven," or "bar," the symbol combination that results in SB will not appear. Furthermore, when the SB symbol combination "Blank Blank Watermelon B" is displayed on an active line, just like the RB-A mentioned above, a random symbol combination is displayed, making it visually difficult to tell that the SB has won.

In this way, the SB symbol combination is not easily discernible visually, so whether the SB wins or does not win, the results will appear to be inconsistent, making it difficult to tell that the SB did not win, reducing the stress felt by players when they do not win an SB.

Figures 114 to 118 are a list of symbol combinations in the fourth embodiment. The symbol combinations for each specified number of symbols in the slot machine in the fourth embodiment are as shown in Figures 114 to 118. Here, there are five types of Type 1 BB in the fourth embodiment, Type 1 BB-A through Type 1 BB-E, but these are sometimes collectively referred to as "Type 1 BB," as in Figure 114 and elsewhere. In Figures 114 to 118, "Specified Number" refers to the so-called bet number, as described above. In Figures 114 to 118, "3 coins" and "1 coin" in the "Specified Number and Game Status" column refer to a game with a 3-coin bet and a 1-coin bet, respectively. Furthermore, "-" in the same column indicates that the symbol combination will not be displayed for that specified number and game status (the winning combination associated with that symbol combination will not be included in the lottery). Furthermore, numbers such as "1," "4," "8," "13," and "15" in the same column indicate the number of medals that will be paid out when that symbol combination wins; in other words, the winning combination associated with that symbol combination represents a minor winning combination accompanied by the payout of medals. Note that in Figures 114 to 118, symbol combinations associated with omitted winning numbers are indicated by "...." Also, the boxed areas in Figures 114 to 116 are added as markers for comparing symbols (this will be discussed later).

Figures 119 and 120 are a list of condition devices in the fourth embodiment. In these Figures 119 and 120, as in Figure 10, the condition device numbers are referred to as winning numbers. The condition devices of the slot machine in the fourth embodiment are as shown in Figures 119 and 120. In these Figures 119 and 120, "element" refers to the role (condition device) that makes up the condition device. For example, in the "Winning-A1 Condition Device" for winning number 41 of the "Replay/Winning Condition Device," its elements are six: Winning 01, Winning 09-12, and Winning 25, indicating that these roles are winning multiple times. Also, in Figures 119 and 120, "nicknames" are used to make the role of each condition device easier to understand. The nicknames "Loser" and "Replay" for winning numbers 0 and 1 related to the "Replay/Winning Condition Device" are simply their meanings. The so-called "bell replay" for winning number 2 related to the "replay/winning condition device" means that a "bell" stops on the top row of the left reel M51, the middle row of the middle reel M52, and the top or middle row of the right reel M53, and that the "bell" appears to stop in a small V or L shape. The so-called "confirmed cherry" for winning numbers 3 and 4 related to the "replay/winning condition device" means that, for example, a "cherry" can stop in a straight line at the bottom right, and the result indicates that a bonus has been confirmed (as shown in FIG. 123, replay-C1 for winning number 3 always results in a double win of Type 1 BB-A, and replay-C2 for winning number 4 always results in a double win of Type 1 BB-D). Winning number 5, commonly referred to as "diagonal character or middle cherries," refers to a replay in which characters line up diagonally or a cherry can stop in the middle of the left reel M51, indicating to the player that a bonus has been confirmed (as shown in FIG. 123, a replay-D of winning number 5 always results in a double win of type 1 BB-A). Winning numbers 8 through 10, commonly referred to as "left character replay," "middle character replay," and "right character replay" for the "replay/winning condition device," refer to replays in which a character can stop on the left reel M51, middle reel M52, and right reel M53, respectively. Winning numbers 11 through 22, commonly referred to as "bonus double replays," for the "replay/winning condition device" refer to replays that overlap with a bonus, but do not result in impactful results such as a character line up or a cherry stopping in the middle. The so-called "chance numbers" for winning numbers 23 through 29 related to the "replay/winning condition device" mean that they are replays that may display results that suggest a bonus has been won. The so-called "fake" for winning numbers 30 through 35 related to the "replay/winning condition device" mean that they are replays in which the "character symbols" are completed but do not line up, while the so-called "characters" for winning numbers 36 and 37 related to the "replay/winning condition device" mean that they are replays in which the "characters" can line up. The so-called "internal replay" for winning numbers 38 and 39 related to the "replay/winning condition device" means that they are replays that are drawn within the bonus, and the so-called "BB replay" for winning number 40 related to the "replay/winning condition device" means that they are replays that are drawn even during the bonus. Winning numbers 41 through 70 associated with the "replay/winning condition device" are commonly referred to as "push order 4 A" through "push order 4 C," meaning that they are push order minor roles that pay out 4 coins upon winning. Winning numbers 71 and 72 associated with the "replay/winning condition device" are commonly referred to as "common bell A" and "common bell B," meaning that they are minor roles that pay out regardless of the push order. Winning numbers 75 through 78 associated with the "replay/winning condition device" are commonly referred to as "4 coins during SB" and "1 coin during SB," meaning that they are minor roles that pay out 4 coins upon winning during SB and 1 coin upon winning during SB, respectively. Winning number 79 associated with the "replay/winning condition device" is commonly referred to as "bell during RB," meaning that it is a minor role that wins during RB-A.

Figures 121 and 122 are RT state transition diagrams for the fourth embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, there are seven RT states: "non-RT" through "RT5," and "RB activated." The RT state transition occurs when the conditions indicated by the arrows in Figure 122 are met. A specific example of a transition from an RT state to "non-RT" is when RAM initialization is performed. When the RT state is "non-RT," if any of the Type 1 BB-A to Type 1 BB-D condition devices (hereinafter referred to as "bonus condition devices" or simply "bonus-related symbol combinations") is activated (when a bonus-related symbol combination is not displayed in a game that is selected by the bonus condition device), the state transitions to "RT3." If the Type 1 BB-E condition device is activated (when a Type 1 BB-E symbol combination is not displayed in a game that is selected by the Type 1 BB-E condition device), the state transitions to "RT4." Also, when the operation of any of the Type 1 BB-A to Type 1 BB-D condition devices is completed (bonus ends), it transitions to "RT1", and when the RT state is "RT1", if any of the Type 1 BB-A to Type 1 BB-D condition devices is activated, it transitions to "RT3", if the Type 1 BB-E condition device is activated, it transitions to "RT4", and when the result of 150 games is obtained in "RT1" (when 150 games are completed), it transitions to "non-RT".On the other hand, when the operation of Type 1 BB-E is completed (bonus ends), it transitions to "RT2". When the RT state is "RT2," if any of the Type 1 BB-A to Type 1 BB-D condition devices is activated, the state transitions to "RT3," and when the Type 1 BB-E condition device is activated, the state transitions to "RT4," and when 50 game results are obtained in "RT1" (when 50 games are completed), the state transitions to "non-RT." Also, when the RT state is "RT3," if any of the symbol combinations related to the bonus is displayed (when a symbol combination related to the bonus is stopped and displayed in a game that has won the bonus condition device (including a game that has won the bonus condition device)), the state transitions to "RT5," and when the RT state is "RT4," if a Type 1 BB-E symbol combination (written as "Type 1 BB-E activation symbol" in FIG. 121, and hereinafter also referred to as such) is displayed (when a bonus is won), the state transitions to "RB activation." Furthermore, "RT5" occurs when any of the bonus-related symbol combinations (in FIG. 121, these are written as "Type 1 BB-A operating symbol or Type 1 BB-D operating symbol" and will be referred to as such hereinafter) are displayed (when a bonus is won), as well as when RB-A operation ends. When the RT state is "RT5", if the operation of any of Type 1 BB-A or Type 1 BB-D ends, the state transitions to "RT1", and when the RB-A symbol combination (in FIG. 121, these are written as "RB-A operating symbol" and will be referred to as such hereinafter) is displayed, the state transitions to "RB operation". When the RT state is "RB operation", if the operation of Type 1 BB-E ends, the state transitions to "RT2", and if the operation of RB-A ends, the state transitions to "RT5".

Figures 123 to 135 are lists showing the lottery probabilities (internal lottery data) for losses, small wins, replay wins, and bonuses (Type 1 BB, RB, SB) in the fourth embodiment, and Figure 136 is a diagram showing the stop control of push order small wins, etc. Here, Figures 123 to 134 show the winning probability for each winning number, and Figure 135 shows the combined values of losses, small wins (labeled "winning" in the figures), replay wins, and bonuses. 123 to 125 show various lottery probabilities in normal times when the RT state is "non-RT" and the bonus is not activated, Fig. 126 to 128 show various lottery probabilities when the RT state is "non-RT" and the SB is activated, Fig. 129 to 131 show various lottery probabilities when the RT state is "RT5" and the aforementioned BB general state is not inside, and Fig. 132 to 134 show various lottery probabilities when the RT state is "RT5" and the aforementioned "BB general state is inside." Furthermore, Fig. 135 shows various total values in the aforementioned "BB shift not activated inside" and "BB shift activated inside" (both RT states are "RB activated") in addition to the states shown in Fig. 123 to 134. In addition to those shown in Figures 123 to 135, there are various lottery probabilities, such as when the RT state is "RT1" or "RT2" and is normal, when the RT state is "RT1" or "RT2" and SB is in operation, when the RT state is "RT3" and a Type 1 BB-A condition device or a Type 1 BB-D condition device is in operation (in a bonus), when the RT state is "RT4" and a Type 1 BB-E condition device is in operation (in a bonus), and when a Type 1 BB-E is in operation and RB-B is in operation (continuous operation during BB), but illustrations and explanations of these will be omitted.

The various lottery probabilities for the slot machine of the fourth embodiment are as shown in Figures 123 to 135. In Figures 123 to 134, "winning replay" refers to the small winning combination or replay combination that is the subject of the lottery, and "bonus condition device" refers to the bonus that is the subject of the lottery being one of Type 1 BB-A to Type 1 BB-E, SB, or RB-A. Furthermore, "Type 1 BB-A" next to "replay-C1" indicates that "replay-C1" and "Type 1 BB-A" have been determined simultaneously (duplicate draws have been made), and so items listed simultaneously in the "winning replay" column and the "bonus condition device" column indicate that the small winning combination or replay combination listed in the "winning replay" column and the bonus listed in the "bonus condition device" column have been achieved in the same game. In addition, "lottery" indicates whether the small role or replay role listed in the "winning replay" column and the bonus listed in the "bonus condition device" column are subject to lottery, with a "〇" in the "lottery" column indicating that they are subject to lottery and an "×" indicating that they are not subject to lottery. In addition, "advantageous zone transition" indicates whether the small role or replay role listed in the "winning replay" column and the bonus listed in the "bonus condition device" column will trigger a transition to an advantageous zone. In addition, "setting 1" indicates the number of settings related to setting 1 (the random number denominator is "65536"). For example, since the number of SBs is "13582", the probability of winning SB is approximately 1/5 (13582/65536 ≒ 4.8). In FIG. 135, "Type" indicates the type of winning combination, with "Type 1 BB" collectively representing all of Type 1 BB-A to Type 1 BB-E, "RB" being the abbreviation for RB-A, and "Winning" referring to all "minor combinations" as mentioned above.

In the fourth embodiment, the total number of replays placed for non-RT is the same as that for RT1 and RT2 (the total number of replays placed for non-RT is "8978" as shown in Figure 135), but the replays eligible for the lottery and the number of replays placed for any of the replays are different. Specifically, while the replays eligible for the lottery are the same for non-RT and RT1, the number of replays placed for non-RT replay-A is "6078" (see Figure 126), while the number of replays placed for RT1 replay-A is "6077" (not shown), and the number of replays placed for non-RT replay-U is "4", while the number of replays placed for RT1 replay-U is "5" (not shown). In addition, in RT2, Replay-P2 (commonly referred to as "Fake" in FIG. 119), Replay-Q, and Replay-R (commonly referred to as "Character" in FIG. 119), which are not subject to lottery in non-RT and RT1, are added as lottery items. The number of replays placed in Replay-A, Replay-P2, Replay-Q, and Replay-R in RT2 is "2627," "3385," "33," and "33," respectively (not shown). In this RT2, in order to make the number of replays placed in non-RT and RT1 the same as the total number of replays placed, the amount of the number of replays removed from Replay-A is allocated to the number of replays placed in Replay-P2, Replay-Q, and Replay-R. In the fourth embodiment, Replay-Q and Replay-P, which display "Character, Character, Character" (commonly referred to as "Character"), are subject to lottery only in RT2. RT2 is the RT state you enter after Type 1 BB-E ends, and in this RT2, the probability of winning what is commonly known as a "character" is higher than in other RT states (RT2 is a high probability zone where the probability of winning what is commonly known as a "character" is higher than in other RTs).

The total number of replays placed in RT3 and RT4 is "21,000" (not shown), which is higher than non-RT, RT1, and RT2. The number of replays placed in RT3 for Replay-A is "3,100" (not shown). Meanwhile, Replay-B, Replay-S, and Replay-T, which are not eligible for the lottery in non-RT, RT1, and RT2, have been added as eligible for the lottery, with the numbers of these placed being "2,000," "12,000," and "1,000," respectively (not shown). Furthermore, the number of replays placed in RT4 for Replay-A is "3,100" (not shown). Meanwhile, Replay-B and Replay-S, which are not eligible for the lottery in non-RT, RT1, and RT2, have been added as eligible for the lottery, with the numbers of these placed being "2,000" and "13,000," respectively (not shown). RT3 is an RT state entered when either a Type 1 BB-A condition device or a Type 1 BB-D condition device is activated, in other words, an internal medium RT state of either Type 1 BB-A or Type 1 BB-D, and RT4 is an RT state entered when a Type 1 BB-E condition device is activated, in other words, an internal medium RT of Type 1 BB-E. These internal medium RTs are internal medium-high RTs with a higher probability of winning a replay than non-RT, RT1, and RT2.

The total number of replays placed in RT5 is 22568, which is higher than in RT3 and RT4 (see Figures 129 and 130). In RT5, Replay-A to Replay-U are not eligible for the lottery; instead, only Replay-U with a number of 22568 placed is eligible for the lottery, and both Replay-U and RB-A are guaranteed to win. RT5 is the RT state entered when a Type 1 BB-A operating symbol or a Type 1 BB-D operating symbol is displayed, or when RB-A operation ends. In other words, it is the aforementioned BB general medium non-internal RT state, and is an internal medium-high RT with a higher probability of winning a replay than non-RT, RT1, or RT2. In this RT5, if RB-A is won, Replay-U is always won at the same time (see Figure 130), so in a game where RB-A is won, Replay-U is always the winning combination, and RB-A will never win (this will be discussed later). Furthermore, when the RT state is in RB operation, the number of replays placed is "0", as shown in (5) and (6) of Figure 135; in other words, when RB is in operation, replays are not subject to the lottery.

The push order minor wins and stop control of minor wins during SB in the slot machine of the fourth embodiment are as shown in Figure 136. In Figure 136, "Control Related" describes stop control. "Left 1st" in this "Control Related" refers to either the order of left reel M51, center reel M52, and right reel M53 (a so-called sequential push order in which the stop buttons D40 are pressed in left-center-right order) or the order of left reel M51, right reel M53, and center reel M52 (a pinch push order in which the stop buttons D40 are pressed in left-center-right order). In other words, it refers to a hitting order combination in which the stop button D40 corresponding to the left reel M51 is pressed first. Furthermore, "middle 1st" in relation to "control-related" refers to either the order of center reel M52, left reel M51, and right reel M53 (a middle order push order in which the stop buttons D40 are pressed in the order of center, left, and right) or the order of center reel M52, right reel M53, and left reel M51 (a middle sandwich push order in which the stop buttons D40 are pressed in the order of center, right, and left), in other words, a hitting order combination in which the stop button D40 corresponding to the center reel M52 is pressed first. Additionally, "right 1st" in relation to "control-related" refers to either the order of right reel M53, left reel M51, and center reel M52 (a reverse pinch press order in which the stop buttons D40 are pressed in the order right, left, and center) or the order of right reel M53, center reel M52, and left reel M51 (a reverse press order in which the stop buttons D40 are pressed in the order right, center, and left); in other words, a hitting order combination in which the stop button D40 corresponding to the right reel M53 is pressed first.

The "Left 1st: Winning 01 (PB = 1)" entry in the "Control Related" column for the "Winning-A1 Condition Device" for winning number 41 means that if the "Winning-A1 Condition Device" for winning number 41 wins, when the stop button D40 is stopped in the left 1st press sequence, the number priority control will prioritize drawing in (stopping first) the pattern combination for Winning 01 (Winning 01 winning pattern), which has PB = 1 and a payout of 4 coins. That is, as shown in FIG. 115, the winning symbols for Winning 01 are the symbol combinations 153 through 156: "White Seven-Bell-Bell," "Red Seven-Bell-Bell," "Bar-Bell-Bell," and "Blank-Bell-Bell." (Hereinafter, these symbols corresponding to the left reel M51 may be collectively referred to as "White Seven/Red Seven/Bar/Blank.") As mentioned above, the "White Seven/Red Seven/Bar/Blank" symbols on the left reel M51 have a combined PB=1. Since the "Bell" symbols on the center reel M52 and right reel M53 also have a PB=1, any random press (regardless of the timing of pressing the stop button D40) will always result in one of the "White Seven/Red Seven/Bar/Blank-Bell-Bell" symbols stopping. The same is true for "Winning 03," "Winning 05," "Winning 07," etc.

The "Middle 1st: Prize 09-12 (PB ≠ 1)" entry in the "Control Related" section of the "Prize-A1 Condition Device" for winning number 41 means that if the "Prize-A1 Condition Device" for winning number 41 wins, stopping the stop button D40 in the middle 1st press order will prioritize the drawing of any of the symbol combinations for Prize 09-12 (any of the Prize 09 winning symbols through the Prize 12 winning symbols) where PB ≠ 1 and a single payout occurs, due to quantity priority control. In other words, as shown in FIG. 116, the symbol combination for Prize 09 is, for example, number 178, "White Seven, White Seven, White Seven." However, since the "White Seven" on the center reel M52 and right reel M53 is a symbol with PB ≠ 1, it may not stop on an active line depending on the timing of the press of the stop button D40. Specifically, in the case of the center reel M52, if the stop button D40 is pressed when a symbol in the range of 14 to 18 in FIG. 112 is positioned in the middle row of the center reel M52, a "white seven" will stop on the center reel M52; however, if the stop button D40 is pressed at any other time, the "white seven" will not stop on the center reel M52 (a miss will occur). Similarly, the "right 1st: prizes 10-12, 25 (PB≠1)" entry in the "Control Related" column for the "prize-A1 condition device" for winning number 41 means that if the "prize-A1 condition device" for winning number 41 wins, stopping the stop button D40 in the right 1st press order will, through quantity priority control, prioritize the drawing of a symbol combination of prizes 10-12 or 25 (any of the prize 09 winning symbol to prize 12 winning symbol) with PB≠1 and a payout of one coin.

In this way, if you win the "Prize-A1 Condition Device" for winning number 41, stopping the stop button D40 in the correct button press order (correct batting order), pressing the left 1st, will ensure that the PRIZE 01 winning symbol stops on the active line, resulting in the payout of four game medals, more than the required number of three. If you stop the stop button D40 in the incorrect button press order (incorrect batting order), pressing the center 1st or right 1st, depending on the timing of pressing the stop button D40, one of the PRIZE 09 winning symbols through the PRIZE 12 winning symbol or the PRIZE 25 winning symbol may stop, resulting in the payout of one game medal (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "one spilled medal"), less than the required number of three. Alternatively, none of the PRIZE 09 winning symbols through the PRIZE 12 winning symbol or the PRIZE 25 winning symbol may stop, resulting in the payout of one game medal (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "one spilled medal"). Alternatively, none of the PRIZE 09 winning symbols through the PRIZE 12 winning symbol or the PRIZE 25 winning symbol may stop, resulting in the payout of no game medals. Furthermore, for winning numbers 53 through 64, the winning-B1 condition device is the same as the winning-A1 condition device, the winning-B2 condition device is the same as the winning-A2 condition device, ... the winning-B11 condition device is the same as the winning-A11 condition device, and the winning-B12 condition device is the same as the winning-A12 condition device. Also, the "control-related" descriptions for winning numbers 65 through 70 are the same as those explained in the "control-related" section for winning number 41, so further explanation will be omitted.

Next, the relationship between the symbol combinations for the prize winning 01, prize winning 03, prize winning 05, and prize winning 07, which are minor winning combinations that are given priority in the correct hitting order, and the symbol combinations for bonuses will be explained. First, for the sake of convenience, the symbol combinations for the prize winning 01, prize winning 03, prize winning 05, and prize winning 07 (not all symbol combinations, only those necessary for explanation) will be listed below (see also the boxed areas in Figures 113 and 114 and the boxed areas in Figure 116). In addition, in the examples listed below, for example, the symbols that stop on the activated line, such as "white seven, red seven, watermelon A", are listed in the order of the left symbol for the right reel M51, the middle symbol for the center reel M52, and the right symbol for the left reel M53 (the same applies to other descriptions).
<Bonus symbol combinations>
(Type 1 BB-A) "White Seven, Red Seven, Watermelon A"
(Type 1 BB-B) "Red Seven, White Seven, Watermelon B"
(Type 1 BB-C) "White Seven, White Seven, Watermelon A"
(1 type BB-D) "Red Seven Red Seven Watermelon B"
(Type 1 BB-E) "Red Seven Red Seven Watermelon A"
<Pattern combinations related to winning 01 (partial excerpt)>
(1) "White Seven Bell Bell"
(2) "Red Seven Bell Bell"
(3) "Bar Bell Bell"
<Pattern combinations related to winning 03 (excerpt)>
(4) "White Seven Replay Blank"
(5) "Red Seven Replay Blank"
(6) "Bar Replay Blank"
<Pattern combinations related to winning number 05 (excerpt)>
(7) "Bell White Seven Bell"
(8) "Bell Red Seven Bell"
(9) "Bell Bar Bell"
<Pattern combinations related to winning number 07 (excerpt)>
(10) "Replay Bell Watermelon A"
(11) "Replay Bell Watermelon B"
As can be seen from these listed symbol combinations, the symbol combinations for winning 01 and winning 03 include (1) and (4) above, in which the left symbol is a "white seven" that is also the left symbol of Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C; (2) and (5) above, in which the left symbol is a "red seven" that is also the left symbol of Type 1 BB-B, Type 1 BB-D, and Type 1 BB-E; and (3) and (6) above, in which the left symbol is a "bar" that is not included in any of the symbols that make up the bonus and is positioned five frames away from the "white seven" and "red seven" as shown in Figure 112 (if this "bar" is pressed within the pull-in range of the valid line, the "white seven" or "red seven" will not stop on the valid line). The symbol combinations related to the winning 05 include (7) above, in which the center symbol is a "white seven" that is common to the left symbols of the 1st class BB-B and 1st class BB-C, (8) above, in which the center symbol is a "red seven" that is common to the left symbols of the 1st class BB-A, 1st class BB-D, and 1st class BB-E, and (9) above, in which the center symbol is a "bar" that is not included in any of the symbols that make up the bonus and is positioned five frames away from the "white seven" and the "red seven" as shown in Figure 112. The symbol combinations related to the winning 07 include (10) above, in which the right symbol is a "watermelon A" that is common to the right symbols of the 1st class BB-A, 1st class BB-C, and 1st class BB-E, and (11) above, in which the right symbol is a "watermelon B" that is common to the right symbols of the 1st class BB-B and 1st class BB-D.

Figure 137 is a diagram that shows a schematic game flow explaining the flow of play in a slot machine according to the fourth embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, the game states (on the sub-control board S side) for presentation purposes include <Normal>, <Bonus>, <Infinite AT>, in which the AT state continues until the next bonus is won (until the game in which the bonus is won), and <Finite AT>, which ends when a predetermined number of games have elapsed since the start of the AT state. For example, in the case of a <Finite AT>, as shown in Figure 138, the presentation display device S40 displays "Animal Rush in progress!!!!" to inform the player of the game state they are in via the presentation display device S40.

<Normal> is the game state in which the player remains when none of Type 1 BB-A or Type 1 BB-E have been won (not in a bonus), when either Type 1 BB-A or Type 1 BB-E have been won (in a bonus), when SB has been won, or when SB is in progress (SB is operating). This state involves effects such as small wins, replays, and bonus wins, and transitions to <Bonus> when Type 1 BB-A or Type 1 BB-E has been won.

Also, in a game in which SB is won during normal play, if SB wins, the next game will be in SB mode. On the other hand, if SB is not won in a game in which SB is not won, SB will disappear, and the next game will be in a non-bonus mode (normal state). As shown in (2) of FIG. 135, the total number of winning (small winning) wins during SB is "42972," which is greater than the total number of winning (small winning) wins during normal play (42968) shown in (1) of FIG. 135. Therefore, SB can be said to be a more advantageous state with a higher probability of winning a small winning win than normal. Meanwhile, the small winning wins that are subject to lottery during SB are (1) to (5) below (see FIGS. 114 to 118, 120, and 128).
(1) Commonly known as "Common Bell A" with four payouts (bonus overlap, number of places "4")
(2) Commonly known as "Cherry" with four payouts (bonus overlap, number of places "43")
(3) The so-called "watermelon" with 8 payouts (bonus overlap, number of places "19")
(4) 4-piece payout, commonly known as "4 pieces in SB" (no bonus overlap, number of pieces "10301")
(5) One payout, commonly known as "1 in SB" (no bonus overlap, number of places is "32605")
During SB, the minor roles with a payout greater than the specified number are (1) to (4), and the total number of these is "10367", with a winning probability of approximately 2/12. On the other hand, the minor role with a payout less than the specified number is (5), with a payout of "32605", with a winning probability of approximately 6/12. In other words, during SB, approximately 2/12 (approximately 1/2) are minor roles with a payout less than the specified number, and approximately 2/12 (approximately 1/6) and approximately 4/12 (approximately 1/3) are other replays or bonuses with no payout (see also (A) to (C) below, which summarize these). Therefore, if a game is played with a specified number of 3 during SB, the increase or decrease in game medals during SB will be as follows. Since the expected value of game medals acquired during SB is less than the specified number of 3, SB can be said to be a bonus with a negative expected value of game medals acquired.
(A) The number of game medals decreases by about half (one medal is paid out for the specified number of three medals).
(B) There is approximately a 1/6 chance that the number of game medals will increase (4 or 8 medals will be paid out for a specified number of 3).
(C) The number of game medals is reduced to about 1/3 compared to (A) (the payout is 0 for the specified number of 3).

In this way, by providing an SB as a bonus that has the potential to reduce game medals and disappears if a winning game is not won, if a SB is won, the player can choose between a game method in which the SB is won to win in order to bet on the possibility of increasing game medals, or a game method in which the SB is not won in consideration of the possibility of reduction, thereby providing a variety of gameplay features. In the fourth embodiment, an SB is provided as a bonus that results in a negative expected value for game medals. However, instead, a so-called big bonus such as a type 1 BB-A or a so-called regular bonus such as an RB-A may be provided as a bonus that results in a negative expected value for game medals, or a big bonus and SB, or a regular bonus and SB, may be provided as bonuses that result in a negative expected value for game medals. In short, at least one of multiple types of bonuses (big bonus, regular bonus, SB) may be provided as a bonus that results in a negative expected value for game medals.

In the <Bonus>, Type 1 BB-A, where "White Seven, Red Seven, White Seven" stop diagonally above, and Type 1 BB-B, where "Red Seven, White Seven, Red Seven" stop diagonally above, are treated as "Hyper Big Bonuses", and when these bonuses are won, various effects are produced, such as displaying "Bonus Confirmed" on the effect display device S40, and when either of these bonuses is won, various effects are produced, such as displaying "Hyper Big Bonus". Similarly, Type 1 BB-C, where "Red Seven, Red Seven, Red Seven" stop diagonally above, and Type 1 BB-D, where "White Seven, White Seven, White Seven" stop diagonally above, are treated as "Normal Big Bonuses", and Type 1 BB-E, where "Red Seven, Red Seven, White Seven" stop diagonally above, are treated as a "Regular Bonus", and various effects are produced depending on whether these bonuses are won or won.

Furthermore, if RB-A is won in any game after the next game in which the <Bonus> "Hyper Big Bonus" or "Normal Big Bonus" is won (if RB-A is won outside of BB general), as shown in Figure 130, a replay (Replay-U in Figure 130) is also won at the same time, and since the priority order of winning is "replay role → bonus → small role," the replay will always win, and RB-A will never win. From the game after the game in which RB-A is won (within BB general), only small roles (small roles that result in the payout of more game medals than the specified number) and replays are eligible for the lottery, as shown in (4) of Figure 135. If a replay is won in this situation within BB general, the replay will always win, and RB-A will never win. On the other hand, if a small win (a small win resulting in a payout of more medals than the required number) occurs while in the BB general mode (if a small win occurs in any game within the BB general mode), the symbols associated with the combination resulting in RB-A are PB=1 as described above, and the priority order of winning is "replay → bonus → small win" (because the bonus priority stop control is in place), so even if you press the buttons randomly, RB-A will always be won. After that, the game returns to the BB non-shift active mode (see (5) in Figure 135), where only RB-A, small wins (a small win resulting in a payout of more medals than the required number) and losses are eligible for the lottery, and then to the BB non-shift active mode (see (6) in Figure 135), where only small wins (a small win resulting in a payout of more medals than the required number) and losses are eligible for the lottery.

In this way, if a winning combination (for example, a miss, a small combination, etc.) other than a winning combination (replay) that prevents RB-A from winning occurs within the general BB, RB-A will always win, even if the buttons are pressed randomly. Therefore, even players who are not good at pressing buttons by eye can easily and quickly win RB-A.

In the fourth embodiment, after the bonus ends, the game transitions to a <Limited AT>, which ends after a predetermined number of games. Specifically, after the "Hyper Big Bonus" and "Normal Big Bonus" end, an AT of M games (e.g., 150 games) is executed, in other words, an AT with a fixed upper limit of M games. Furthermore, after the "Regular Bonus" ends, an AT of N to M games (e.g., 50 to 150 games) is executed, in other words, an AT with a variable number of games, with M games as the upper limit. While remaining in this <Limited AT>, if a "Regular Bonus" is won when there are N or more games remaining in the AT (e.g., 51 games), the <Limited AT> after the end of the "Regular Bonus" will carry over the remaining number of AT games (e.g., the AT will start with 51 games remaining in the AT). On the other hand, if the remaining number of AT games is less than N games, and a "Regular Bonus" is won, the <Limited AT> after the end of the "Regular Bonus" will not carry over the remaining number of AT games, and a new AT of N to M games will be executed.

Furthermore, if a freeze occurs when the Hyper Big Bonus is won (when "White Seven, Red Seven, White Seven" or "Red Seven, White Seven, Red Seven" stops) by winning the Hyper Big Bonus or winning a prize, or if the "Character" with winning number 6 is won and "Character, Character, Character" stops in a straight line while in the <Limited AT>, the game will transition to the <Infinite AT>, which will continue until the next bonus. If the Regular Bonus is won while in this <Infinite AT>, the M Game AT will be executed after the Regular Bonus ends. Next, we will explain what happens if the push order bell is hit while inside the bonus in these <Limited AT> and <Infinite AT> (hereinafter, these are sometimes collectively referred to as the "AT state").

Figures 138 to 141 are conceptual diagrams showing the behavior of the reels when a push order minor wins during an AT and bonus. Figure 138 shows an example of a situation where the correct hitting order (middle 1st) is performed (no misses are made) when the winning number 45, commonly known as "push order 4 A," is won during an AT and type 1 BB-C, which is one of the "normal big bonuses." As shown in Figure 136, winning number 45, commonly known as "Push Order 4 A", has a push order minor role where the correct hitting order is the middle 1st, and in the middle 1st, stop control is performed to prioritize the symbol combination associated with winning 05, which has a payout of 4 coins and PB = 1; in the left 1st, stop control is performed to prioritize the symbol combination associated with winning 09-12, which has a payout of 1 coin and PB ≠ 1; and in the right 1st, stop control is performed to prioritize the symbol combination associated with winning 10-12 and 29, which has a payout of 1 coin and PB ≠ 1.

When the winning number 45, commonly known as "Push Order 4 A," is selected during AT and within Type 1 BB-C, as shown in Figure 138(a), the effect display device S40 displays a push order navigation image showing the correct push order for all reels, such as an image of {"2," "1," "3"}, which indicates the push order for the center, left, and right reels. In the fourth embodiment, if the first reel to stop is correct, such as left 1st, center 1st, and right 1st, and the stop order (push order) for the other reels is irrelevant, the correct push order for only the first reel to stop may be displayed, such as an image of {"━," "1," "━"}, which indicates that if the center reel is pressed first, the push order for the others does not matter.

After the push order navigation occurs, the player presses the stop button D40 corresponding to the middle reel M52 at the appropriate time (by pressing the center button at the appropriate time) in accordance with the push order navigation. If the timing of pressing the stop button D40 happens to be such that a "white seven" can be drawn into the middle of the middle reel M52, then the "white seven" will stop in the middle of the middle reel M52, as shown in Figure 138 (b). This "white seven" is the middle symbol in the symbol combinations for Type 1 BB-B and Type 1 BB-C, and is also the middle symbol in the symbol combination for Winning 05. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the possible winning combinations are (A) Bell (Winning 05), (B) Hyper Big Bonus or Normal Big Bonus, or (C) one spill or a miss, or any of these (A) to (C).

Next, the player randomly presses the stop button D40 corresponding to the left reel M51 (randomly presses left), but if the timing of pressing this stop button D40 happens not to be such that a "white seven" is drawn onto the bottom row of the left reel M53, then as shown in Figure 138(c), a "bell" will stop on the bottom row of the left reel M51, and the symbol combination "bell, white seven, bell" for winning 05 will be ready on the active line. At this time, visually, "bells" will stop on the bottom row of the left reel M51 and the bottom row of the center reel M52, creating a "bell, bell, bell" ready state. In this state, if the player randomly presses the stop button D40 corresponding to the right reel M53 (randomly presses right), a "bell" will stop on the bottom row of the right reel M53, and "bell, white seven, bell" will stop on the active line (winning 05), and four coins will be paid out.

On the other hand, if the player presses the left button at a random moment in the state shown in Figure 138(b), and the timing of the press of the stop button D40 happens to be such that a "White Seven" is drawn to the bottom row of the left reel M53, the bonus-priority stop control will cause the "White Seven" to stop on the bottom row of the left reel M51, as shown in Figure 138(e), and the "White Seven, White Seven, Watermelon A" symbol combination, which is a Type 1 BB-C symbol combination for the "Normal Big Bonus," will be completed on the active line. Furthermore, at this point, it is determined that the symbol combination for Winning 05, "Bell, White Seven, Bell," will not line up (Winning 05 will be completely eliminated). In this state, if the player presses the right button at a random time, but presses the stop button D40 at a time that is not sufficient to draw the "Watermelon A" into the lower row of the right reel M53, the "White Seven, White Seven, Watermelon A" will not stop on the activated line, resulting in a missed minor win (a complete miss, and no game medals will be paid out). In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 138(f), a "bar" will stop on the upper row of the right reel M53, and "White Seven, White Seven, Bar" will stop on the inactivated line (stopping in a straight line to the upper right). This stopped combination is a combination that would not appear if the reels were stopped during a Type 1 BB-C non-internal reel, and is a so-called "reach combination" that indicates that one of the bonuses has been won. This allows the player to sense that one of the bonuses has been won. Also, if the player presses the right button at the right position in the state shown in Figure 138(e), and the timing of pressing the stop button D40 happens to be such that a "Watermelon A" will be drawn into the bottom row of the right reel M53, then as shown in Figure 139(f), a "Watermelon A" will stop on the bottom row of the right reel M53, and a "White Seven, White Seven, Watermelon A" will stop on the active line (winning a Type 1 BB-C). At this time, a "White Seven, White Seven, White Seven" will appear to be displayed in a straight line diagonally upward to the right.

Figure 139 shows an example of an incorrect stroke order (a mistake in pressing) when the winning number 45, commonly known as "Push Order 4 A," is selected during the AT during Type 1 BB-C, one of the "Normal Big Bonuses." After the push order guidance shown in Figure 139(a) occurs, the player accidentally presses the left button different from the push order guidance (mispressing the left button), but if the timing of pressing the stop button D40 happens to be such that a "White Seven" can be drawn onto the bottom row of the left reel M51, the "White Seven" will stop on the bottom row of the left reel M51, as shown in Figure 139(b). This "White Seven" is the left symbol of the symbol combinations for Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C, but since a mistake in pressing the button means that WINNING 05 cannot be won, from the player's perspective, the only possibilities for winning are (B) Hyper Big Bonus or Normal Big Bonus, or (C) one spill or miss, either of these (B) or (C).

Next, if the player presses the center button at random, but happens to press the stop button D40 at a time that would allow a "Red Seven" to be drawn into the middle of the center reel M52, as shown in Figure 139(c), the "Red Seven" will stop in the middle of the center reel M52, and the winning symbol combination of "White Seven, Red Seven, Red Seven" will be in a ready state on the active line, which is the winning symbol combination of 10. Also, the "White Seven, Red Seven, Watermelon A" combination of type 1 BB-A will appear to be in a ready state. In this state, if the player presses the right button at random, but happens to press the stop button D40 at a time that would allow a "Red Seven" to be drawn into the bottom of the right reel M53, as shown in Figure 139(d), the "Red Seven" will stop in the bottom of the right reel M53, and "White Seven, Red Seven, Red Seven" will stop on the active line (winning 10), and one coin will be paid out.

On the other hand, in the state shown in Figure 139(c), if the player presses the right button at a random time, but the timing of pressing the stop button D40 happens to be such that a "red seven" is drawn to the bottom row of the right reel M53, the player will miss a minor win in which "white seven, red seven, red seven" will not stop on an active line (one losing coin will be missed, and no game medals will be paid out). In this case, by controlling the reels to stop within a Type 1 BB-C reel, for example, as shown in Figure 139(e), a "red seven" may stop on the top row of the right reel M53, and "white seven, red seven, red seven" may stop on an inactive line (stopping in a straight line to the upper right). This stop result is a result that would not appear if the reels were not within a Type 1 BB-C reel, and is a so-called reach result, indicating that one of the bonuses has been won. This allows the player to sense that one of the bonuses has been won.

Also, in the state shown in Figure 139(b), if the player presses the stop button D40 at the timing when they can pull in a "white seven" on each of the left reel M51 and the center reel M52 (if they hit the "white seven" on each of the left reel M51 and the center reel M52), the bonus-priority stop control will cause a "white seven, white seven, watermelon A" to stop, as shown in Figure 139(f) (winning the normal big bonus, type 1 BB-C).

Figure 140 shows an example of a situation where the correct hitting order (right 1st) is performed when the winning number 69, commonly known as "push order 4 C," is won during the AT during a Type 1 BB-C bonus, which is one of the "Normal Big Bonuses." After the push order guidance shown in Figure 140(a) occurs, the player presses the right button appropriately in accordance with the push order guidance. If the timing of pressing the stop button D40 happens to be such that a "Watermelon A" can be drawn into the lower row of the right reel M53, then the "Watermelon A" will stop in the lower row of the left reel 51, as shown in Figure 140(b). In other words, the timing of pressing the stop button D40 here could stop both the "Bell" associated with the prize 01, a minor win with PB=1, and the "Watermelon A" associated with Type 1 BB-C, in the lower row of the right reel M53, but the "Watermelon A" stops due to the bonus-priority stop control. At this time, from the player's perspective, it is confirmed that the winning number 01 will not win, but there is a possibility that the winning number 07, which has the "Watermelon A" design on the right, will win. Furthermore, since the correct batting order means that there will be no missing or missing coins, the winning numbers that can win are (A) Bell (winning number 07), (B) Hyper Big Bonus, or Normal Big Bonus. Note that, in FIG. 140, the example of the combination of "push order 4 C" with the winning number 69 within Type 1 BB-C has been explained, but the same can be said for any combination of "push order 4 C" and "push order 4 A" or "push order 4 B" other than the winning number 69 within any of Type 1 BB-A, Type 1 BB-B, Type 1 BB-D, or Type 1 BB-E. In other words, if you are inside either Type 1 BB-A or Type 1 BB-E and one of the so-called "Push Order 4 Cards A," "Push Order 4 Cards B," or "Push Order 4 Cards C" is a winning combination, and the first reel to stop is the reel that corresponds to the correct hitting order, and the bonus-related symbol stops on an active line due to bonus priority stop control, it will not be possible to tell from the result whether it is a bell or a bonus.

Next, if the player presses the center button at a random moment and happens to press the stop button D40 at a time that allows a "White Seven" to be drawn into the middle of the center reel M52, as shown in Figure 140(c), the "White Seven" will stop in the middle of the center reel M52, and a "White Seven, White Seven, Watermelon A" combination related to Type 1 BB-C will be formed on the active line. In this case, the combination of the "White Seven" as the center symbol and the "Watermelon A" as the right symbol does not exist in the winning symbol combinations for 07, so from the player's perspective, the only possible winning combinations are (B) Hyper Big Bonus or Normal Big Bonus. In other words, this result is a so-called "2-Confirmed Reach" combination, indicating that one of the bonuses is confirmed when the two reels come to a stop. If a player (a knowledgeable player) who notices this reach-eye pattern presses the "white seven" on each of the left reel M51 and the center reel M52, a type 1 BB-C normal big bonus will be awarded, as shown in FIG. 140(d). On the other hand, if a player who does not notice the reach-eye pattern presses the left reel at random but the timing of pressing the stop button D40 happens not to be the timing to draw the "white seven" onto the left reel, as shown in FIG. 139(e), instead of the "white seven, white seven, watermelon A" stopping on the activated line, as shown in FIG. 140(e), for example, the "red seven, white seven, white seven" that constitutes the reach-eye pattern will stop on an inactivated line, as shown in FIG. 140(e). Also, while FIG. 140 gives an example of a "2-sure reach-eye pattern," it goes without saying that it is possible to create a so-called "1-sure reach-eye pattern" indicating that one of the bonuses has been confirmed when the first reel stops, depending on, for example, the winning 01 symbol combination or the bonus symbol combination.

In this way, part of the symbol combination related to the bonus and part of the symbol combination related to the push order minor feature are common symbols (for example, "white seven"), and the stop control prioritizes the bonus. Therefore, if the common symbol stops on an active line by stopping the reels according to the push order navigation, and you think it's a push order minor feature of PB=1, and press the stop button corresponding to the other spinning reels at random, you may win a bonus or get a reach symbol, providing surprising gameplay.

Figure 141 shows an example of the correct batting order when the winning number 41, commonly known as "Push Order 4 A," is won during the AT state and within Type 1 BB-C, one of the "Normal Big Bonuses." In Figure 141, push order navigation is performed, suggesting the operation mode of the stop button D40 that can win the winning symbol combination 01, which is given priority when the correct batting order (first step from the left), including the "White Seven" number 2 shown in Figure 112 and the "Bar Bell Bell" number 7 shown in Figure 112, which is positioned five frames away from the "Red Seven" number 12 shown in Figure 112. That is, as shown in FIG. 141(a), when the effect display device S40 displays an image of {"1," "2," "3"} representing the push order from left to right, the background color of the "1" in {"1," "2," "3"} is black to correspond to the black "bar." This prompts the player to press the black "bar" on the left reel M51, which stops first, rather than the "white seven" or "red seven." When the player presses the "bar" on the left reel M51 according to this push order navigation, the "bar" stops on the bottom row of the left reel 51, as shown in FIG. 141(b). At this point, the bonus win is eliminated, and the only possible win is WIN 05. Then, by pressing the center reel M52 and the right reel M53 appropriately, the "bar, bell, bell" associated with WIN 01 is won, as shown in FIG. 141(c). In the fourth embodiment, the push order navigation is performed by using a background color that corresponds to the color of the symbols (black to correspond to the black "bars"), but instead, for example, the color of the numbers and other display elements related to the push order navigation could correspond to the color of the symbols (such as making the numbers black), or a color effect corresponding to the color of the symbols could be prominently displayed in a location other than the image indicating the push order, such as around the reel frame or "1" (displaying a black effect around the "1" or the entire reel frame, etc.).

In this way, if a push order minor feature is won within a bonus, navigation is performed that suggests a symbol that is not included in the symbol combinations for any of the bonuses, Type 1 BB-A or Type 1 BB-E, as the first symbol to stop among the symbol combinations for the push order minor feature, thereby avoiding the bonus winning and ensuring the push order minor feature is won. In other words, if a push order minor feature is won within a bonus, it is more profitable to win a push order minor feature that pays out more than the specified number of game medals than to win a bonus that does not pay out any game medals, so in such situations, push order navigation that is profitable for the player can be performed.

In the fourth embodiment of the slot machine, if a bonus is won during the AT, the effect display device S40 will perform a special navigation effect (hereinafter, this specified number of games will be referred to as the "special section") in which push order navigation is performed in the game in which the push order role is won, at a specified trigger, for a specified number of games only. Specifically, special navigation is performed in the game in which the push order role is won, for five games from the game in which the bonus is won. Furthermore, in any game after the bonus is won (including the game in which the bonus is won), the effect display device S40 will perform a confirmation effect, such as "Bonus Confirmed!", to notify the user that a bonus has been won. Next, effect modes 1 to 3 that combine these special navigation effects and confirmation effects will be listed.

(Performance mode 1)
The game in which a bonus is won is designated Game 0. During the following games, Games 1 through 5, a special navigation is performed using the push order navigation shown in FIG. 141 , i.e., a push order navigation mode (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "Push Order Navigation A") in which the background color of the numbers indicating the push order suggests a symbol not included in any of the symbol combinations related to the Type 1 BB-A or Type 1 BB-E bonuses (corresponding to a black "bar" in the fourth embodiment, also referred to as a symbol other than the bonus). A confirmation effect is performed in Game 6, the game following the end of the special navigation. In other words, when a bonus is won during the AT, a special navigation effect is performed during the special section counted from the game following the game in which the bonus was won, and a confirmation effect is performed in the game following the game in which this special section ends. In other words, in Presentation Mode 1, a confirmation effect is performed after the special navigation effect is executed. Note that if a bonus is won during a non-AT, the special navigation effect is not executed. Here, the games from when a bonus is won to when it is won can be considered a so-called non-lottery section in which no other bonus lottery is performed. Also, in the special zone, the push-order minor role may not be won, resulting in a loss of game medals. Considering these factors, the game methods during the special zone can be considered as game method 1, in which a bonus is won during the special zone, and game method 2, in which a bonus is won after the special zone has passed in the hope of increasing the number of game medals. Therefore, for a player who does not realize that a bonus has been won, game method 2 is the only game method available. However, for a player who realizes that a bonus has been won by a reach symbol or the like, they can choose either game method 1 or 2 according to their preference, thereby broadening the scope of their game. Furthermore, by limiting the special navigation to the special zone, which is a certain limited number of games, it is possible to prevent the number of games required from winning a bonus to winning from becoming too long. In addition, in the special section, the player must press a black "bar" that is a symbol other than the bonus symbol and is outside the maximum pull-in range of the bonus symbol. By pressing the black "bar" on the reel that stops first according to the push order navigation A (left reel M51 if the push order is to stop the left first, middle reel M52 if the push order is to stop the middle first, or right reel M53 if the push order is to stop the right first), it is possible to prevent accidentally winning a bonus while reliably winning more small symbols (bells) than the specified number.

(Performance mode 2)
The game in which a bonus is won is designated as game 0, and a confirmation effect is performed for game 0, and special navigation using push order navigation A is performed for the following games 1 through 5. In other words, if a bonus is won during an AT, a confirmation effect is performed for the game in which the bonus is won, and special navigation is performed for the special section counted from the next game. In other words, this presentation mode 2 is a presentation mode in which a special navigation effect is performed after a confirmation effect is executed. Note that if a bonus is won during a non-AT, the special navigation effect is not performed. In presentation mode 2, since the confirmation effect allows players to know that a bonus has been won before the start of the special section, even beginners can select either of the above-mentioned playing methods 1 or 2 before the start of the special section, thereby broadening the range of play.

(Performance mode 3)
The game in which a bonus is won is designated as game 0, and during the following games, games 1 through 5, special navigation is performed using push order navigation A, but a confirmation effect is performed during one of games 1 through 5. For example, if a bonus is won during the AT, a special navigation effect is performed during the special section counted from the game following the bonus winning game, while a confirmation effect is performed during one of the games in this special section. In other words, this presentation mode 3 is a presentation mode in which both special navigation and confirmation effects can be executed in any game during the special section. Note that if a bonus is won during a non-AT, the special navigation effect is not performed. In presentation mode 2, since the confirmation effect during the special section allows players to know that a bonus has been won, even beginners can select either of the above-mentioned playing methods 1 or 2 from the middle of the special section, thereby broadening the scope of play.

In presentation modes 1 to 3, the timing for executing the confirmation effect is predetermined, but this is not limited to this. The confirmation effect may be executed only if the confirmation effect lottery, which determines whether or not to execute the confirmation effect, is won. In this case, if the confirmation effect is won and executed in the game following the game in which the special section ends, the above-mentioned presentation mode 1 will be achieved. If the confirmation effect lottery is won in the game in which the bonus is won and the confirmation effect is executed, the above-mentioned presentation mode 2 will be achieved. If the confirmation effect lottery is won during the special section and the confirmation effect is executed, the above-mentioned presentation mode 3 will be achieved. However, even in games following the game in which the special section ends, the confirmation effect lottery may not be won and the confirmation effect may not be executed. In this way, by executing the confirmation effect in the confirmation effect lottery, the range of presentation modes can be expanded and presentation modes 1 to 3 can be randomly realized.

Furthermore, with regard to the special navigation in presentation modes 1 to 3, the push order navigation may be executed whenever a push order minor wins, or only when a push order navigation presentation lottery is won to determine whether or not push order navigation should be executed when a push order minor wins, or only when push order 4 B or push order 4 C (see FIG. 136) is won, or when the push order navigation presentation lottery is won when push order 4 B or push order 4 C is won. Furthermore, the specified trigger for the special navigation to occur may not only be a bonus win, but also, for example, a rare combination such as a cherry or watermelon that does not result in a bonus win. By executing the special navigation even when a bonus has not been won, in other words, by preventing the occurrence of the special navigation from automatically confirming a bonus, the player can use the special navigation during the special section while hoping for a bonus win, thereby enhancing the entertainment value of the game. Furthermore, other predetermined triggers for the special navigation may include winning the lottery for generating the special navigation (the special navigation may occur even if the bonus is not won). Also, in presentation modes 1 to 3, special navigation was performed using push order navigation A, but instead, special navigation may be performed using the push order navigation shown in Figures 138 to 140, that is, a push order navigation mode that simply indicates the push order using numbers (hereinafter, this push order navigation mode may also be referred to as "push order navigation B"). Alternatively, either push order navigation A or push order navigation B may be generated randomly.

In addition, the slot machine in the fourth embodiment has been described using the so-called "A+AT" type equipped with a bonus and an AT as an example, but is not limited to this and may also be an "A+ART" type equipped with a bonus and an ART. Furthermore, instead of being equipped with a bonus such as Type 1 BB-A to Type 1 BB-E or RB-A, it may be an AT-only type equipped with the pseudo bonus described above.

<<<Configuration related to time required for processing execution>>>
Next, a configuration relating to the time required to execute a predetermined process (sometimes referred to as a predetermined command) applicable to the gaming machine according to this specification will be described in detail below. Note that the configuration described in detail below is applicable to all configurations in this specification. The configuration described in detail below is a slot machine that uses gaming medals, but it should be noted that configurations other than those that use gaming medals can also be applied to medalless gaming machines that do not use gaming medals (sometimes referred to as enclosed gaming machines, managed gaming machines, smart slots, etc.).

Furthermore, the configurations detailed below may be applied singly or in combination.

Furthermore, a single instruction shown in the figure may consist of only one instruction, may include multiple instructions, may include instructions not shown between certain instructions, may exclude certain instructions, or may be configured in a different order in which instructions are executed.

In addition, in the following configuration, only the characteristic features are described in detail, and other commands are indicated with "..." and only an overview of the command being executed is explained. The part indicated with "..." may consist of only one command, may include multiple commands, or may include processing executed in the called module.

<<Diagram 1 regarding lighting of bed lamp>>
First, Fig. 142 is Fig. 1 relating to the lighting of bet lamps applicable to the gaming machine according to this specification. The gaming machine according to this figure has three bet lamps, namely, the 1 bet lamp D211, the 2 bet lamp D212, and the 3 bet lamp D213. The processing shown in this figure is the processing in the main loop processing (processing on the main control board M side, which is different from interrupt processing and may be referred to as main processing, etc.) described above in Fig. 16 etc.

<M_MEDAL_START: Start of medal acceptance>
First, a game medal reception start process is executed. The game medal reception start process is executed after the game in which a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is stopped and displayed, or after the game in which a symbol combination that does not result in the payout of game medals is stopped and displayed, and is executed after the payout of game medals in which game medals have been paid out.

First, command 1 sets specific parameters. Next, command 2 executes the process of sending the insertion command. Here, the insertion command is a command related to information about the insertion of game medals, such as information about the start of acceptance of game medal insertion, information about the insertion of game medals from the medal insertion slot, information about the insertion of game medals from credits, and information about the number of credits.

Next, command 3 reads the gaming medals (for example, reads the number of gaming medals inserted). Next, command 4 updates the setting change flag. Here, the setting change flag is a flag that indicates whether the setting can be changed. If the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off while the setting change flag is on, and a predetermined condition (for example, the setting key switch is on) is met when the power is subsequently turned on, the gaming machine will enter setting change mode. However, if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off while the setting change flag is off, the gaming machine will not enter setting change mode even if a predetermined condition is met when the power is subsequently turned on. Note that a gaming machine may also be configured not to have a setting change flag, and to enter setting change mode regardless of the situation if a predetermined condition is met when the power is subsequently turned on after the power supply to the gaming machine has been cut off.

Next, command 5 clears the coin count data stored in a specified RAM area. Next, command 6, CLRWQ, a command for clearing data, clears the coin count display data and LED display data. The coin count display data is made up of data regarding whether or not to light the 1 bet lamp D211, data regarding whether or not to light the 2 bet lamp D212, and data regarding whether or not to light the 3 bet lamp D213, and the LED display data is made up of data regarding whether or not to light the replay lamp D290, data regarding whether or not to light the insert possible lamp D300, and data regarding whether or not to light the start lamp D180.

More specifically, the RAM area of the main control board M has a storage area (sometimes referred to as the inserted coin count display data storage area) corresponding to the inserted coin count display data. In the inserted coin count display data storage area, which is made up of bits D0 to D7, if the D0 bit corresponding to the 1 BET lamp signal is 1, the 1 BET lamp D211 will be turned on, and if the D0 bit is 0, the 1 BET lamp D211 will be turned off. Similarly, if the D1 bit corresponding to the 2 BET lamp signal is 1, the 2 BET lamp D212 will be turned on, and if the D1 bit is 0, the 2 BET lamp D212 will be turned off. Similarly, if the D2 bit corresponding to the 3 BET lamp signal is 1, the 3 BET lamp D213 will be turned on, and if the D2 bit is 0, the 3 BET lamp D213 will be turned off.

Also, clearing the inserted coin count display data means storing 0 in the bit corresponding to the 1 BET lamp signal, the bit corresponding to the 2 BET lamp signal, and the bit corresponding to the 3 BET lamp signal (similar configurations can be applied to other clearing processes).

The RAM area of the main control board M also has a storage area (sometimes referred to as the LED display data storage area) that corresponds to the LED display data. In the LED display data storage area, which is made up of bits D0 to D7, if the D3 bit corresponding to the insert ready lamp signal is 1, the insert ready lamp D300 will be turned on, and if the D3 bit is 0, the insert ready lamp D300 will be turned off. Similarly, if the D4 bit corresponding to the start lamp signal is 1, the start lamp D180 will be turned on, and if the D4 bit is 0, the start lamp D180 will be turned off. Similarly, if the D5 bit corresponding to the replay lamp signal is 1, the replay lamp D290 will be turned on, and if the D5 bit is 0, the replay lamp D290 will be turned off.

Also, clearing the LED display data means storing 0 in the bit corresponding to the insert possible lamp signal, the bit corresponding to the start lamp signal, and the bit corresponding to the replay lamp signal.

Next, command 7 determines whether or not the replay is in progress (this can also be whether or not the replay symbol has stopped and been displayed), and if so, turns on the replay lamp display LED signal (the replay lamp will light up). Next, command 8 sets specified parameters. Next, command 9 executes the input command transmission process, and then proceeds to command 10.

<M_MEDAL_INC: Add one game medal>
First, command 10 clears the data on the number of coins won. Next, command 11 reads the game medals. Next, command 12 adds 1 to the data on the number of coins inserted, and the process moves to command 13. The addition in command 12 is an addition related to the replay operation. Note that if a replay is won in a game with three coins bet and the replay is activated, 3 will be added to the data on the number of coins inserted. In other words, command 12 will be executed three times.

<M_INSERT_DAT: Generate data to display the number of inserted coins>
First, the number of inserted coins data is acquired in command 13. Next, the number of inserted coins display data is generated in command 14. Next, the number of inserted coins display data is saved in a predetermined RAM area in command 15 as an LDQ command, which is a command for reading and storing data, and the process proceeds to command 16.

<C_MDLMAX_CHK: Check medal limit>
First, command 16 sets the limit number of game medals (maximum number of bets) to 3. Next, command 17 reads the game medals. Next, command 18 generates the number of medals requested to be inserted, and the process proceeds to command 19.

Next, command 19, which is the "M_MEDAL_START: Start medal acceptance" command, will RETURN (move to next process) if the medal limit is reached (3 medals have been bet), and will jump to M_MEDAL_INC if the medal limit is not reached (3 medals have not been bet).

The configuration in the same figure is configured in this way, so if you win a replay in a game with three bets and the replay is activated, the processing will be as follows.
(1) Command 6 clears the input number display data.
(2) In command 15, the data indicating the number of inserted coins related to the lighting of the 1-bet lamp D211 is stored.
(3) In command 19, since the number of game medals is not at the limit, jump to M_MEDAL_INC (command 10).
(4) In command 15, the data indicating the number of inserted coins related to the lighting of the 2-bet lamp D212 is stored.
(5) In command 19, since the number of game medals is not at the limit, jump to M_MEDAL_INC (command 10).
(6) In command 15, the data indicating the number of inserted coins related to the lighting of the 3-bet lamp D213 is stored.
(7) Command 19 determines that the number of game medals has reached its limit.

In addition, in the configuration shown in the same figure, the lighting of the 1 BET lamp D211, 2 BET lamp D212, and 3 BET lamp D213 is configured to be performed based on the contents of the inserted coin count display data during a specified process in the timer interrupt process. For example, if the inserted coin count display data is cleared by command 6 and the specified process in the timer interrupt process is performed, the 1 BET lamp D211, 2 BET lamp D212, and 3 BET lamp D213 will all be turned off (or will remain off).

Here, if a replay is won in a three-coin game and the replay is activated, the processing flow is as described above. The time from when the inserted coin count display data is cleared to when the inserted coin count display data related to the lighting of the 3 bet lamp D213 is stored in the specified RAM area is the time it takes for "execute commands 6 to 19 → execute commands 10 to 19 → execute commands 10 to 15." By setting the execution time of this command (processing) to be shorter than the cycle of the timer interrupt processing (e.g., 2.235 ms), it becomes more difficult for the specified processing in the timer interrupt processing to be executed during the period from when the inserted coin count display data is cleared to when the inserted coin count display data related to the lighting of the 3 bet lamp D213 is stored in the specified RAM area. This makes it more difficult for the bet lamp to go out when the replay is activated. If the replay is won, the bet lamp can remain lit from the winning replay game to the next game, making it easier for the player to understand that the replay has been won.

The specified RAM area may be referred to as the specified memory area, and the inserted coin count display data or inserted coin count data may be referred to as information regarding the lighting of the 1 BET lamp, information regarding the lighting of the 2 BET lamp, or information regarding the lighting of the 3 BET lamp.

In addition, when a replay is activated, the time from when the inserted coin count data is cleared to when the inserted coin count display data related to the lighting of the 3 bet lamp D213 is stored in a specified RAM area, i.e., the time from when "execute commands 5 to 19 → execute commands 10 to 19 → execute commands 10 to 15", may be set to a time shorter than the timer interrupt processing period (e.g., 2.235 ms).

The bed lamp may be configured to be illuminated using a dynamic lighting method or a static lighting method. If the bed lamp is configured to be illuminated using a dynamic lighting method, the time from when the inserted coin count display data is cleared until the inserted coin count display data related to the illumination of the 3 bed lamp D213 is stored in a specified RAM area may be configured to be shorter than the digit cycle related to the 3 bed lamp D213. For example, if the specified process related to the illumination of the 3 bed lamp D213 is executed every five timer interrupt processes, the digit cycle related to the 3 bed lamp D213 is five times the timer interrupt process cycle (e.g., 2.235 ms x 5).

In addition, in the configuration shown in the figure, the execution time from when the inserted coin count display data is cleared until the inserted coin count display data related to the lighting of the 3-bet lamp D213 is stored in a specified RAM area is configured to be shorter than the cycle of the timer interrupt process, but this is not limited to this, and the execution time may be configured to be shorter than a time value other than the cycle of the timer interrupt process. As an example, the execution time may be shorter than any of the following time values.
(1) The period of the timer interrupt process. (2) The time value from the start of a timer interrupt process to the execution of the process related to turning on the bed lamp in the timer interrupt process (for example, the execution of the process of step 1626 or step 1628 in FIG. 32). (3) The time value from the start of a timer interrupt process to the execution of the process of storing input port data in the timer interrupt process (for example, the execution of step 1608 in FIG. 32). (4) The time value from the start of a timer interrupt process to the execution of the process related to an error in the timer interrupt process (for example, the execution of step 1616 in FIG. 32). (5) The time value from the start of a timer interrupt process to the execution of the process related to sending a command to the sub-control board S in the timer interrupt process (for example, the execution of step 1622 in FIG. 32).

In addition, even in configurations where the time value is compared with the cycle of the timer interrupt process described below, the cycle of the timer interrupt process can be replaced with any of the above (2) to (5).

<<Diagram 2 regarding lighting of bed lamps>>
Next, Fig. 143 is Fig. 2 relating to the lighting of bet lamps applicable to the gaming machine according to this specification. The gaming machine according to this figure has the three bet lamps, the 1 bet lamp D211, the 2 bet lamp D212, and the 3 bet lamp D213, as described above, a 1 bet button which can be operated to bet one gaming medal, and a max bet button which can be operated to bet three gaming medals. The processing shown in this figure is the processing in the main loop processing (processing on the main control board M side, different from interrupt processing, and sometimes referred to as main processing) described above in Fig. 16 etc.

<M_BET_IN: Storage injection>
First, the reserve input process is executed. The reserve input process is executed after the end of a game in which no game medals have been paid out, and is executed after the end of a game in which game medals have been paid out, and is a process that is executed when a bet is made using the number of credits by operating the 1 bet button or the max bet button.

First, command 1 determines whether the 1 bet button or max bet button signal is rising using the LDQ command, which is a command related to reading and storing data, and the RAND command, which is a command related to judgment, and if the 1 bet button or max bet button signal is rising, command 2 is executed.

Next, command 2 executes the aforementioned medal limit check (C_MDLMAX_CHK). Specifically, commands 16 to 18 in Figure 142 are executed. Next, command 3 obtains the stored medal count data (data related to the number of credits). Next, command 4 determines whether the signal that rose in command 1 is the max bet button signal, and if it is, jumps to M_BET_IN3.

<M_BET_IN3>
First, command 5 determines whether the requested number of coins to be inserted is 0, and if the requested number of coins to be inserted is not 0, command 6 is executed. Next, command 6 determines whether there is a reserved number of coins (number of credits) (whether it is 1 or more), and if there is a reserved number of coins, command 7 is executed. Next, command 7 determines whether the reserved number is equal to or greater than the requested number of coins to be inserted, and if the reserved number is equal to or greater than the requested number of coins to be inserted, the process jumps to M_BET_IN4.

<M_BET_IN4>
First, command 8 sets predetermined parameters.

<M_MEDAL_INC: Add one game medal>
First, command 9 clears the data on the number of coins won. Next, command 10 reads the game medals. Next, command 11 adds 1 to the data on the number of coins inserted. Note that if the max bet button is operated to bet three coins, 3 will be added to the data on the number of coins inserted. In other words, command 11 is executed three times.

<M_INSERT_DAT: Generate data to display the number of inserted coins>
First, the number of inserted coins is acquired by command 12. Then, the number of inserted coins display data is generated by command 13. Then, the number of inserted coins display data is saved by command 14 as an LDQ command, which is a command related to reading and storing data.

The configuration in the same figure is configured in this way, so when the max bet button is operated and a bet of three coins is made, the processing up to saving the number of coins inserted display data related to one bet lamp is as follows:
(1) In command 1, the rising edge of the max bet button signal is detected.
(2) In command 14, the data indicating the number of inserted coins related to the lighting of the 1-bet lamp D211 is stored.

When the MAX BET button is operated to place a bet of three coins, the processing flow is as described above. The time from when the rising edge of the MAX BET button signal is detected (when the MAX BET button operation is accepted) to when the inserted coin count display data for lighting the 1 BET lamp D211 is stored in a specified RAM area is the time until "Execute commands 1 to 14." It is preferable to set the execution time of this command (processing) to be shorter than the cycle of the timer interrupt processing (e.g., 2.235 ms). By configuring it in this way, the time from when the MAX BET button is operated to when the 1 BET lamp D211 lights up can be shortened, so the tempo of play is not disrupted and the player can play without stress.

Note that the process of detecting the rising edge of the max bet button signal in command 1 is sometimes referred to as the process of determining that the max bet button operation has been accepted.

Also, even when the 1 bet button is operated to place a bet of one coin, the time from when the rising edge of the 1 bet button signal is detected (when the 1 bet button operation is accepted) to when the inserted coin count display data related to the lighting of the 1 bet lamp D211 is stored in a specified RAM area may be set to be shorter than the timer interrupt processing cycle (e.g., 2.235 ms). Note that this time is the period until "Instructions 1 to 14" in FIG. 143 are executed, but because the processing executed from instruction 4 onwards differs from that in FIG. 143, the time from when the max bet button is operated until the 1 bet lamp D211 lights up is a different time value from the time from when the 1 bet button is operated until the 1 bet lamp D211 lights up.

In the configuration shown in the same figure, an example is shown of a configuration having a 1 bet button and a MAX bet button as bet buttons that can be operated to bet game medals, but this is not limited to this, and the configuration may not have a 1 bet button, or may have a 2 bet button that can be operated to bet two game medals. Also, command 1 in Figure 143 determines whether the signal related to the bet button that is present is turned on out of the 1 bet button, 2 bet button, and MAX bet button.

<<Diagram 3 regarding lighting of bed lamp>>
Next, Fig. 144 is Fig. 3 relating to the lighting of bet lamps applicable to the gaming machine according to this specification. The gaming machine according to this figure has the three bet lamps, the 1 bet lamp D211, the 2 bet lamp D212, and the 3 bet lamp D213, as described above, a 1 bet button which can be operated to bet one gaming medal, and a max bet button which can be operated to bet three gaming medals. The processing shown in this figure is the processing in the main loop processing (processing on the main control board M side, different from interrupt processing, and sometimes referred to as main processing) described above in Fig. 16 etc.

In addition, instructions 1 to 9 in Figure 144 have the same structure as instructions 9 to 14 in Figure 143 and are not shown. In addition, instructions 9 to 14 in Figure 144 have the same structure as instructions 9 to 14 in Figure 143.

<M_MEDAL_INC: Add one game medal>
First, command 9 clears the data on the number of coins won. Next, command 10 reads the game medals. Next, command 11 adds 1 to the data on the number of coins inserted. Note that if the max bet button is operated to bet three coins, 3 will be added to the data on the number of coins inserted. In other words, command 11 is executed three times.

<M_INSERT_DAT: Generate data to display the number of inserted coins>
First, the number of inserted coins is acquired by command 12. Then, the number of inserted coins display data is generated by command 13. Then, the number of inserted coins display data is saved by command 14 as an LDQ command, which is a command related to reading and storing data.

Next, as the "M_BET_IN: Stored Insert" command, command 15 subtracts 1 from the stored number data. Next, command 16 determines whether the requested number of coins has been inserted, and if not, jumps to M_MEDAL_INC.

The configuration in the same figure is configured in this way, so when the max bet button is operated and a bet of three coins is made, the processing up to the point where the inserted coin count display data related to the 3 bet lamp is saved is as follows:
(1) In command 1 of FIG. 143, the rising edge of the max bet button signal is detected.
(2) In command 14, the data indicating the number of inserted coins related to the lighting of the 1-bet lamp D211 is stored.
(3) In command 16, since the requested number of medals has not been inserted, the process jumps to M_MEDAL_INC (command 9).
(4) In command 14, the data indicating the number of inserted coins related to the lighting of the 2-bet lamp D212 is stored.
(5) In command 16, since the requested number of medals has not been inserted, the process jumps to M_MEDAL_INC (command 9).
(6) In command 14, the data indicating the number of inserted coins related to the lighting of the 3-bet lamp D213 is stored.
(7) In command 16, it is determined that the requested number of sheets has been inserted.

When the max bet button is operated and a bet of three coins is made, the processing flow is as described above. The time from when the inserted coin count display data for lighting the 1 bet lamp D211 is saved in a designated RAM area until the inserted coin count display data for lighting the 2 bet lamp D212 is saved in a designated RAM area is the time it takes for "execute commands 14 to 19 → execute commands 9 to 14". By setting the execution time of this command (processing) longer than the cycle of the timer interrupt processing (e.g., 2.235 ms), the timer interrupt processing can be executed between when the 1 bet lamp D211 lights up and when the 2 bet lamp D212 lights up, and the 1 bet lamp D211 and 2 bet lamp D212 can be turned on one by one rather than simultaneously.

In addition, after the inserted coin count display data is saved by command 14 (after command 14 or command 15), a process may be provided to set a predetermined waiting time.By having this waiting time, the time from when the inserted coin count display data related to the illumination of the 1 bed lamp D211 is saved in a predetermined RAM area to when the inserted coin count display data related to the illumination of the 2 bed lamp D212 is saved in a predetermined RAM area may be longer than the timer interrupt processing period (e.g., 2.235 ms).

As a specific example, after instruction 14 has saved the inserted number display data relating to the illumination of the 1 BET lamp D211 in a specified RAM area, but before instruction 14 has saved the inserted number display data relating to the illumination of the 2 BET lamp D212 in the specified RAM area, a specified timer is set to 50 ms as a specified waiting time and the timer begins measuring, and after the timer has finished measuring 50 ms, instruction 14 saves the inserted number display data relating to the illumination of the 2 BET lamp D212 in the specified RAM area.In this way, the time from when the inserted number display data relating to the illumination of the 1 BET lamp D211 is saved in the specified RAM area to when the inserted number display data relating to the illumination of the 2 BET lamp D212 is saved in the specified RAM area may be longer than the timer interrupt processing cycle (e.g., 2.235 ms).

Furthermore, the time from when the inserted number display data relating to the lighting of the 1 BET lamp D211 is saved in a designated RAM area until when the inserted number display data relating to the lighting of the 2 BET lamp D212 is saved in a designated RAM area has been described above. Similarly, the time from when the inserted number display data relating to the lighting of the 2 BET lamp D212 is saved in a designated RAM area until when the inserted number display data relating to the lighting of the 3 BET lamp D213 is saved in a designated RAM area may be set to be longer than the timer interrupt processing period (e.g., 2.235 ms).

Furthermore, the time value from when instruction 14 stores the inserted number display data relating to the illumination of the 1 BET lamp D211 in a specified RAM area, to when instruction 14 subsequently stores the inserted number display data relating to the illumination of the 2 BET lamp D212 in a specified RAM area, and to when instruction 14 subsequently stores the inserted number display data relating to the illumination of the 3 BET lamp D213 in a specified RAM area, may be set to be shorter than the cycle of the timer interrupt process (e.g., 2.235 ms).

In other words, by configuring the process so that instruction 14 stores the inserted coin count display data for lighting the 1 bed lamp D211 in a specified RAM area, followed by instruction 14 storing the inserted coin count display data for lighting the 2 bed lamp D212 in a specified RAM area, followed by instruction 14 storing the inserted coin count display data for lighting the 3 bed lamp D213 in a specified RAM area, can be executed from the time a certain timer interrupt process is executed until the next timer interrupt process of that timer interrupt process is executed, so that the 1 bed lamp D211, 2 bed lamp D212, and 3 bed lamp D213 can be turned on simultaneously (or approximately simultaneously) in the next timer interrupt process.

<<Diagram of increase in number of credits>>
Next, Figure 145 is a diagram relating to an increase in the number of credits applicable to the gaming machine according to this specification. The process shown in this figure is the main loop process (a process on the main control board M that is different from the interrupt process and is sometimes referred to as main process) described above in Figure 16 etc., and is executed after a game is played and the reels have stopped. Also, this figure illustrates an example in which game medals related to a win are awarded and the number of credits increases by multiple numbers.

<M_WIN_PAY: Payout of medals due to winning>
First, a command 1 determines whether or not game medals have been paid out, and if game medals have been paid out, a command 2 is executed.

<M_WIN_PAY2>
First, command 2 sets the winning payout status (status indicating that a payout related to a winning prize is being made). Next, command 3 determines whether the number of reserved coins is at the limit (for example, the upper limit of the number of credits is 50), and if the number of reserved coins is not at the limit, command 4 is executed.

Next, command 4 adds 1 to the stored medal count data as an INC command related to addition. Next, command 5 executes the process of subtracting one medal. Next, command 6 determines whether payout has finished or not, and if payout has not finished, executes command 7. Next, command 7 sets the wait time for adding stored medals. Next, command 8 executes the process of waiting for 2 bytes. Next, command 9 jumps to M_WIN_PAY2.

In this way, the configuration shown in the figure is configured to repeatedly execute commands 2 through 9 until dispensing is complete.

Since the configuration in the same figure is configured in this way, the processing in the case where a game medal is awarded in connection with a winning prize and the number of credits increases by a number is as follows:
(1) Command 4 adds 1 to the stored number data.
(2) After the waiting time for adding the stored number has elapsed, command 9 jumps to M_WIN_PAY2 (command 2).
(3) Repeat steps (1) and (2) above.
(4) Command 4 adds the final number of coins stored at the time when dispensing ends.

When a winning medal is awarded and the number of credits increases by multiple amounts, the processing flow is as described above. The time from when the stored number data (number of credits) increases by 1 until the stored number data (number of credits) increases by another 1 is the time it takes for "execute commands 4 to 9 → execute commands 2 to 4." By setting the execution time of this command (processing) to be longer than the cycle of the timer interrupt processing (e.g., 2.235 ms), the timer interrupt processing can be executed between when the stored number data (number of credits) increases by 1 and when the stored number data (number of credits) increases by another 1, allowing the number of credits to be increased by 1 at a time, preventing the player from becoming confused when visually checking the number of credits.

Note that the stored number data may be referred to as information relating to the number of credits, and the process of adding 1 to the stored number data in command 4 may be referred to as the process of adding 1 to information relating to the number of credits.

<Applicable Configuration 1 Regarding Processing Time>
The gaming machine according to this specification may be configured so that the time required from the execution of the process related to accepting the operation of the settlement button to the execution of the process to store the number of reserved coins data in a specified RAM area (the execution time of the process) is shorter than the period of the timer interrupt process (for example, 2.235 ms).

By configuring it in this way, the latest accumulated number data can be reflected in the display of the number of credits.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to this specification, the time required from the execution of the process related to accepting the operation of the settlement button to the execution of the process of storing the accumulated coin count data in a specified RAM area (the execution time of the process) may be configured to be longer than the cycle of the timer interrupt process (e.g., 2.235 ms).

By configuring it in this way, timer interrupt processing can be executed between the time the stored number data (number of credits) is reduced by 1 and the time the stored number data (number of credits) is reduced by another 1, allowing the number of credits to be reduced by 1 at a time, preventing players from becoming confused when visually checking the number of credits.

<Applicable Configuration 2 Regarding Processing Time>
In the gaming machine according to this specification, the time required from the execution of the process relating to the detection of the rising edge of the start lever signal (detection of the operation of the start lever) to the execution of the process for determining the internal lottery result of the game relating to the start lever signal (processing execution time) may be configured to be shorter than the time required from the execution of the process relating to the detection of the rising edge of the start lever signal (detection of the operation of the start lever) to the start lamp D180 relating to the start lever signal being turned off.

As mentioned above, the RAM area of the main control board M has a storage area corresponding to the LED display data (sometimes referred to as the LED display data storage area). In the LED display data storage area, which is made up of bits D0 to D7, if the D4 bit corresponding to the start lamp signal is 1, the start lamp D180 will be turned on, and if the D4 bit is 0, the start lamp D180 will be turned off.

In other words, the time required from the execution of the process related to the detection of the rising edge of the start lever signal (detection of the operation of the start lever) to the execution of the process for determining the internal lottery result for the game related to that start lever signal (processing execution time) may be configured to be shorter than the time required from the execution of the process related to the detection of the rising edge of the start lever signal (detection of the operation of the start lever) to the execution of the process for clearing the LED display data.

As mentioned above, when the process to clear the LED display data is executed, a 0 will be stored in the bit corresponding to the insert possible lamp signal, the bit corresponding to the start lamp signal, and the bit corresponding to the replay lamp signal.

This configuration ensures that the internal lottery has been completed by the time the start lamp D180 is visually turned off, making for a fair gaming machine.

In the gaming machine according to this specification, the time required from the execution of the process relating to the detection of the rising edge of the start lever signal (detection of the operation of the start lever) to the execution of the process for determining the internal lottery result of the game relating to that start lever signal (processing execution time) may be configured to be longer than the time from the execution of the process relating to the detection of the rising edge of the start lever signal (detection of the operation of the start lever D50) to the extinguishing of the start lamp D180 relating to that start lever signal.

By configuring it in this way, the extinguishing of the start lamp D180 can indicate that an internal lottery will now be held.

As an example of the lighting period of the start lamp D180, it lights up when a specified number of gaming medals (e.g., three medals) are inserted, and goes out when the start lever D50 is operated.

<<<Configuration related to lamp lighting timing>>>
Next, the configuration relating to the lighting timing of the lamps of the gaming machine applicable to the gaming machine according to this specification will be described in detail below. It should be noted that the configuration described in detail below is applicable to all configurations in this specification. The configuration described in detail below is a slot machine that uses gaming medals, but it should be noted that configurations other than the configuration using gaming medals can also be applied to medalless gaming machines that do not use gaming medals (sometimes called sealed gaming machines, managed gaming machines, smart slots, etc.).

Furthermore, the configurations detailed below may be applied singly or in combination.

<<Diagram 1 regarding the lamp installed on the front door>>
First, Figure 146 illustrates a configuration regarding the lighting order of multiple lamps provided on the front door DU, which is applicable to the gaming machine according to this specification.

The configuration of the slot machine in this figure has the same components as the slot machine described above, and some of the components of the slot machine in this figure are shown. As shown in this figure, the slot machine in this figure has a front door DU, which has a stop button D40, a start lever D50, a max bet button, a lower panel D140, an effect display device S40, an LED lamp unit S10, and a speaker S20, and the reel M50 can be seen from the front of the machine.

The stop button D40 also has three stop buttons: a left stop button D41, a center stop button D42, and a right stop button D43, each of which has a stop button lamp (left stop button lamp, center stop button lamp, right stop button lamp) within it. Note that the stop button lamps are controlled by the sub-control board S, but may also be configured to be controlled by the main control board M. The max bet button also has a max bet lamp (sometimes referred to as the max bet button lamp), and although the max bet lamp is also controlled by the sub-control board S, it may also be configured to be controlled by the main control board M.

Furthermore, the same configuration as in Figure 146 may also be applied to Figures 147 to 149 described below.

<a: When turning on the power for the first time>
First, (a1) to (a3) in the upper right corner of the figure will be described in detail. This configuration applies when the power is turned on to the gaming machine when it is not currently being supplied with power.

First, in (a1) in the figure, the reels are stopped, no game is in progress, and a power outage occurs, meaning the gaming machine is not powered on. A situation in which no game is in progress would be one in which the reels are not spinning, for example.

Next, at (a2) in the figure, which is a predetermined timing after the power is newly turned on from (a1) in the figure, the stop button lamp of the notification unit provided on the front door DU lights up first. Note that in (a2) in the figure, three button lamps - the left stop button lamp, the center stop button lamp, and the right stop button lamp - light up, but these three lamps may light up simultaneously or approximately simultaneously. Also, the power-on in (a2) in the figure exemplifies a case where the mode does not change to setting change mode or setting confirmation mode. Note that with regard to the power-on in this specification, unless otherwise specified, it can be assumed that the mode does not change to setting change mode or setting confirmation mode.

Here, the notification unit provided on the front door DU is a collective term for the lamps and displays provided on the front door DU. In the same figure, the stop button lamp, max bet lamp, lower panel D140, effect display device S40, and LED lamp unit S10 correspond to the notification unit provided on the front door DU. Also, although not shown, the credit number display device D200, payout number display device (push order display device) D270, special game status display device D250, start lamp D180, insert possible lamp D300, replay lamp D290, 1 bet lamp D211, 2 bet lamp D212, and 3 bet lamp D213 may also be included in the notification unit provided on the front door DU. Also, some of these may not be included, or some of these may not be included in the notification unit.

The performance display device S40 may also be referred to as the display means.

The lighting of the lamp is sometimes referred to as the notification mode, and the stop button lamp in (a2) in the figure will be lit in the disabled mode as a notification mode. The lighting modes of the stop button lamp include non-lighting, which is a non-notification mode, an disabled mode as a notification mode (a lighting mode indicating a period during which the stop operation is disabled), and an enabled mode as a notification mode (a lighting mode indicating a period during which the stop operation is enabled).

At (a3) in the figure, a predetermined time has passed since (a2) in the figure, and the alarm units provided on the front door DU other than the stop button lamp are in alarm mode. Note that the order in which the alarm units provided on the front door DU other than the stop button lamp are in alarm mode may be configured in any order.

In this way, when the power is turned on again, the stop button lamp located on the front door DU, which is the closest to the player (or the closest to the player) among the notification units provided on the front door DU, can be configured to be the first to activate the notification mode, allowing the player to quickly realize that the power has been turned on by visually checking the easily recognizable stop button lamp.

The alarm unit provided on the front door DU may be referred to as the multiple alarm means provided on the front door.

Here, in the configuration shown in the figure, when the power is turned on again, the stop button lamp is configured to first be in alarm mode in the alarm unit provided in the front door DU, but this is not limited to this, and it may be configured to be in alarm mode first in one of the following alarm units.
(1) An alarm unit provided on the front door DU. (2) An alarm unit provided on the front door DU that is controlled by the main control board M. (3) An alarm unit provided on the front door DU that is controlled by the sub-control board S.

In addition, in the configuration related to the alarm unit provided in the front door DU described below, the alarm unit provided in the front door DU can also be replaced with (2) or (3) above.

Furthermore, the figure illustrates an example in which a power outage occurs when the reels are stopped and no game is in progress, but this is not limited to this. Even if a power outage occurs in the following situation, when the power is subsequently turned on again, the stop button lamp of the alarm unit provided on the front door DU may be configured to be the first to alarm.
(1) A situation in which all reels are spinning and the stop button lamps are in an active state, which is an alert state; (2) A situation in which some reels are spinning and the stop button lamps corresponding to those reels are in an active state, which is an alert state, and the stop button lamps corresponding to the other reels are in an inactive state, which is an alert state; (3) A situation in which a specified error has occurred and an error notification for that specified error has not been executed; (4) A situation in which all or some of the reels are spinning and the set/reset button M30 is pressed; (5) A situation in which all or some of the reels are spinning and the start lever D50 is operated; (6) A situation in which all or some of the reels are spinning and the settlement button D60 is pressed; (7) A situation in which the setting confirmation mode is in effect; (8) A situation in which the setting change mode is in effect.It is to be noted that only one of the above configurations may be applied, or multiple configurations may be applied in combination.

In addition, in the above (1) to (8), the stop button lamp corresponding to the reel that was stopped when the power was turned off may be configured to be in an inactive state as a notification mode before the power was turned off, and to remain in an inactive state as a notification mode even after the power is turned on.

Furthermore, in (3) above, the stop button lamp corresponding to the reel that was spinning when the power was turned off may be configured to be in an active notification mode before the power was turned off, and to be in an inactive notification mode after the power was turned on (the reel may be spinning or stopped after the power was turned on).

Furthermore, in (4) to (6) above, the stop button lamp corresponding to the reel that was stopped when the power was turned off may be configured to be in an inactive notification mode before the power was turned off and remain in an inactive notification mode after the power was turned on, or may be configured to be in an active notification mode before the power was turned off and remain in an active notification mode after the power was turned on.

Furthermore, in (7) or (8) above, the stop button lamp when the power is turned off may be configured to be in an inactive state as a notification mode before the power is turned off, and to remain in an inactive state as a notification mode even after the power is turned on.

<b: When a power outage occurs>
Next, (b1) to (b3) in the lower right of the figure will be described in detail. These configurations are for when a power outage occurs while the reels are stopped and no game is in progress.

First, in (b1) in the figure, the reels are stopped, game play is not in progress, and the various notification units provided on the front door DU are in notification mode. Then, at (b2) in the figure, which is a predetermined timing after a power outage occurs from the situation in (b1) in the figure (after the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off), all notification units provided on the front door DU other than the stop button lamp go into non-notification mode (turn off). Note that the order in which the notification units provided on the front door DU other than the stop button lamp go into non-notification mode may be configured in any order.

At (b3) in the figure, a predetermined time has passed since (b2), and the stop button lamp goes into the non-alarm state. That is, of the alarm units provided on the front door DU, the stop button lamp is the last to go into the non-alarm state. Note that at (b3) in the figure, the three button lamps - the left stop button lamp, the center stop button lamp, and the right stop button lamp - are turned off (going into the non-alarm state), but these three lamps may go out simultaneously or approximately simultaneously.

Note that (b1) in the diagram shows a situation where the reels are stopped and no game is in progress, but this is not limited to this and the reels may be rotating. In this configuration, in (b1) in the diagram, the stop button lamp will be in an inactive state (when the reel drive state is other than the constant reel speed state) or in an active state (when the reel drive state is the constant reel speed state).

In this way, in the event of a power outage, the stop button lamp located on the front door DU, which is the closest to the player (or may be the closest), can be configured to be the last of the notification units on the front door DU to go into the non-notification mode.Even in the event of a power outage, the player can grasp the status of the game until a later point in time by visually checking the easily recognizable stop button lamp.

Note that it is also possible to apply only either the configurations (a1) to (a3) in the figure or the configurations (b1) to (b3) in the figure.

Furthermore, the figure illustrates an example in which a power outage occurs when the reels are stopped and no game is in progress, but this is not limited to this. Even if a power outage occurs in the following situations, the stop button lamp of the alarm unit provided on the front door DU may be configured to lastly switch to the non-alarm mode.
(1) A situation in which all reels are spinning and the stop button lamps are in an active state, which is an alert state; (2) A situation in which some reels are spinning and the stop button lamps corresponding to those reels are in an active state, which is an alert state, and the stop button lamps corresponding to the other reels are in an inactive state, which is an alert state; (3) A situation in which a specified error has occurred and an error notification for that specified error has not been executed; (4) A situation in which all or some of the reels are spinning and the set/reset button M30 is pressed; (5) A situation in which all or some of the reels are spinning and the start lever D50 is operated; (6) A situation in which all or some of the reels are spinning and the settlement button D60 is pressed; (7) A situation in which the setting confirmation mode is in effect; (8) A situation in which the setting change mode is in effect.It is to be noted that only one of the above configurations may be applied, or multiple configurations may be applied in combination.

Furthermore, in the above (1) to (8), the stop button lamp corresponding to the reel that was spinning when the power was turned off may be configured to be in an active notification mode before the power was turned off.

Furthermore, in (4) to (6) above, the stop button lamp corresponding to the reel that was stopped when the power was turned off may be configured to be in an inactive state or an active state as a notification state before the power was turned off.

Furthermore, in (7) or (8) above, the stop button lamp that lights when the power is turned off may be configured to be in an inactive state as a notification state before the power is turned off.

<<Diagram 2 regarding the lamp installed on the front door>>
Next, Figure 147 illustrates a configuration regarding the lighting order of multiple lamps provided on the front door DU, which is applicable to the gaming machine of this specification.

First, in (a) in the figure, the reels are stopped, no game is in progress, and a power outage occurs, meaning the gaming machine is not powered on. A situation in which no game is in progress would be one in which the reels are not spinning, for example.

Next, at (b) in the figure, which is a predetermined timing after the power is turned on again from (a) in the figure, the stop button lamp of the alarm unit installed on the front door DU lights up first (the alarm mode). Note that the stop button lamp lights up in the disabled mode. Also, the power-on in (b) in the figure illustrates a case where the mode does not transition to setting change mode or setting confirmation mode.

After (b) in the figure, at (c) in the figure, the first image (for example, "Screen preparation in progress") is displayed on the effect display device S40. Here, the first image is an image in a display mode that is not in a notification mode. In other words, after the gaming machine is powered on, the effect display device S40 is configured to display the first image in order to notify that the effect display device S40 is in a period of preparation before entering the notification mode.

In this way, in the effect display device S40, after the gaming machine is powered on, the display mode (for example, the second image described below) that appears after preparations for displaying various effect images on the effect display device S40 are complete is referred to as the notification mode, and the first image that is displayed while preparations for displaying various effect images on the effect display device S40 are being made after the gaming machine is powered on, and the display mode in which it is not displayed are referred to as the non-notification mode.

The first image is an image that is displayed on the effect display device S40 only immediately after power is turned on, and is configured not to be displayed as an effect while the game is in progress. On the other hand, the second image is an image that can be displayed as an effect while the game is in progress.

The second image may also be a demo screen (sometimes called a standby demo screen, standby demo image, demo image, etc.) that is displayed when no gameplay has progressed for a predetermined period of time.

Next, while the first image is being displayed on the performance display device S40, the max bet lamp goes into alarm mode. At (e) in the figure, which is a predetermined timing after (d) in the figure, the alarm units provided on the front door DU other than the performance display device S40 go into alarm mode. Note that the order in which the stop button lamp and the alarm units provided on the front door DU other than the performance display device S40 go into alarm mode may be configured in any order.

Then, in (f) of the figure, a second image (e.g., an image of the main character walking) is displayed as a notification image on the effect display device S40. The second image is, for example, one of various effect displays that is displayed when the game can proceed.

In this way, when the power is turned on again, the first image, which is in the non-alert mode, is displayed on the effect display device S40, and then the max bet lamp changes to the alert mode, and then the second image, which is in the alert mode, is displayed on the effect display device S40. In this way, by making the effect display device S40 the last to change to the alert mode, the player can visually confirm that the effect display device S40, which has a relatively large display area (alert area), has changed to the alert mode, making it easier for the player to understand that the gaming machine has completed startup after powering on.

In addition, by setting the max bet lamp, which is a lamp related to the operating member controlled by the main control board M, to the notification mode before the effect display device S40, the player can be made aware that the game can proceed (the situation is such that operation of the operating member can be accepted) before all of the notification units provided on the front door DU are set to the notification mode.

In addition, in the same diagram, when the power is turned on again, the effect display device S40 is configured to be the last of the notification units installed on the front door DU to enter notification mode. In this way, by setting the effect display device S40 to notification mode last, the player can visually confirm that the effect display device S40, which has a relatively large display area (notification area), has entered notification mode, making it easier for the player to understand that the gaming machine has completed startup after power-on.

When the power is turned on again, either the configuration in which the first image, which is in a non-alarm mode, is displayed on the performance display device S40, followed by the max bet lamp switching to an alarm mode and then the second image, which is in an alarm mode, is displayed on the performance display device S40, or the configuration in which the performance display device S40 is the last of the alarm units provided on the front door DU to switch to an alarm mode, may be applied, or both may be applied.

The image displayed on the performance display device S40 is configured so that the second image is brighter than the first image (this may be due to higher visibility, higher average brightness, a wider variety of colors being used, etc.).

<<Diagram 1 regarding reel stop operation>>
Next, Figure 148 is a diagram applicable to the gaming machine of this specification, which relates to the case where a power outage occurs while the reels are rotating.

First, in (a) of the diagram, the reels are spinning and the reel drive state is in a constant reel speed state. All of the alarm units on the front door DU, except for the max bet lamp, are in the alarm mode, and the stop button lamp is in the active mode, which is the alarm mode, and operation of the stop button is possible (the reels can be stopped by operating the stop button). Note that the max bet lamp is configured to be turned off, which is the non-alarm mode, while the reels are spinning. In other words, regarding (a) of the diagram, all of the alarm units on the front door DU that are in the alarm mode while the reels are spinning are in the alarm mode.

After that, a power outage occurs, the reels stop spinning at (b) in the diagram, and all of the alarm units installed on the front door DU go into a non-alarm mode. Then, at (c) in the diagram, which is a predetermined timing after the power is turned on again, the reels remain stopped, but the stop button lamp lights up in an active mode. Note that in (c) in the diagram, three button lamps - the left stop button lamp, center stop button lamp, and right stop button lamp - will light up, but these three lamps may light up simultaneously or approximately simultaneously.

Note that in (c) in the figure, the reels are not spinning, but the stop button can still be pressed. Also, turning on the power in (c) in the figure is an example of a case where the machine does not transition to setting change mode or setting confirmation mode.

The reels then begin to rotate, and at (d) in the figure, the reel sensor has not detected the indexes on the reels since the power was turned on, but the stop button can still be operated.

In this way, if a power outage occurs while the reels are spinning and the power is then turned on again, the stop button lamp will remain active and the stop button can be operated to stop the game, even if the reel sensor has not detected the index on the reel since the power was turned on.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to execute the stop operation as soon as possible after powering on; in other words, it is possible to start playing the game as soon as possible after powering on.

In this way, in the same figure, if a power outage occurs while the reels are spinning and the power is then turned on, the operation of the stop button is enabled after the power is turned on and before the index on the reel is detected by the reel sensor. Also, if a power outage occurs while the reels are spinning and the power is then turned on, the operation of the stop button may be enabled after the power is turned on and before the reels make one full rotation, or the operation of the stop button may be enabled after the power is turned on and before the reels start spinning.

The system may be configured so that operation of the stop button cannot be accepted (the reels will not stop even if the stop button is operated) at a predetermined timing after (d) in the figure (for example, when the index is detected by the reel sensor), or so that operation of the stop button remains possible from (d) onwards. Also, depending on the position of the reels that stopped due to a power outage in (b) in the figure, the system may be configured so that operation of the stop button cannot be accepted at a predetermined timing after (d) in the figure, or so that operation of the stop button remains possible from (d) onwards.

Furthermore, during a predetermined period after the power is turned on following (b) in the figure and before (c) in the figure (sometimes referred to as the predetermined period immediately after power is turned on), it is not possible to accept operation of the stop button (the reels will not stop even if the stop button is operated), and during this predetermined period the stop button lamp may be configured to be turned off or lit in an inactive mode. Furthermore, after this predetermined period, it may be configured so that operation of the stop button can be accepted at approximately the same time (or simultaneously) as when the stop button lamp lights up in an active mode, as in (c) in the figure.

Furthermore, as shown in (d) in the figure, during the period after power-on when stop button operation is possible before the index on the reel is detected by the reel sensor, it is possible to stop the reels by operating at least one stop button, but the other two stop buttons or another stop button cannot be operated to stop them. In other words, the period during which operation of that stop button is valid can be configured to end before the other two stop buttons or another stop button are operated to stop them. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the game from progressing too quickly and the tendency to gamble too much.

Furthermore, as shown in (a) of the figure, when all reels are spinning and the stop button operation is possible, a stop operation is performed on two reels (e.g., the left reel and the center reel), and only one reel (e.g., the right reel) is spinning, if a power outage occurs and the power is then turned on, even in a specific situation where the index on the reel has not been detected by the reel sensor since the power was turned on, the stop button lamp corresponding to the reel that was spinning immediately before the power outage (e.g., the right reel) will be in an active state, and the stop button corresponding to the reel that was spinning immediately before the power outage (e.g., the right reel) can be operated to stop. When configured in this way, one of the reels (for example, the right reel) that was spinning immediately before the power was cut off will be stopped (stop control will be performed) before it starts to spin or before the index is detected by the reel sensor, and a symbol combination that does not correspond to the result of the internal lottery for that game (the game for which the internal lottery was performed before the power was cut off) will appear to be stopped and displayed. However, internally, a symbol combination that corresponds to the result of the internal lottery is stopped in the correct stop position, and if the symbol combination stopped in the correct stop position is one that results in a payout, a payout process will be executed that corresponds to the symbol combination stopped in the correct stop position.

By configuring it in this way, even if a power outage occurs while some of the reels are spinning, the game result will correspond to the result of the internal lottery, regardless of the timing of the stop operation after power is restored, preventing players from suffering any disadvantages.

In addition, if a power outage occurs when all reels are spinning and capable of accepting stop button operation, and a stop operation is performed on one reel (e.g., the left reel), and only two reels (e.g., the middle and right reels) are spinning, and the power is then turned on, the same behavior as the above configuration will occur. In other words, even in a specific situation where the reel sensors have not detected the indexes on the reels after the power was turned on, the stop button lamps corresponding to the two reels that were spinning immediately before the power outage (e.g., the middle and right reels) will be in an active state, and the stop buttons corresponding to the two reels that were spinning immediately before the power outage (e.g., the middle and right reels) will be able to be operated to stop.

Furthermore, the time from when the gaming machine is powered on until the stop button operation can be accepted before the reel sensor detects the index on the reel may be configured to be longer than the time from when the stop button operation can be accepted before the reel sensor detects the index on the reel until the stop button operation can no longer be accepted. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the period during which the stop button operation can be accepted from becoming too long, preventing the game from progressing too quickly and increasing the tendency for gambling.

If a power outage occurs while the reels are spinning and the power is then turned on, the information used to detect reel out-of-step (for example, the counter value of a specified counter) may or may not be cleared. If the information used to detect reel out-of-step is not cleared, there may be a period of time in which the stop button cannot be operated to stop the reels, as shown in (d) in the figure, depending on the relationship between the timing of the power outage and the position of the index when the reels stopped due to the power outage (because out-of-step is detected and the reel re-acceleration process is executed, as described above in Figure 33).

Furthermore, in the case where the stop button lamp is in the enabled state in FIG. (c), the lighting state of the stop button lamp may be configured to transition from "unlit → enabled state" or "unlit → disabled state → enabled state."

Also, if the power is turned on after (b) in the figure, the system may be configured so that operation of the stop button cannot be accepted during the period from when the power is turned on until the reel sensor detects the index on the reel. As a specific example, the system may be configured so that operation of the stop button cannot be accepted after the power is turned on until the reel re-acceleration process is executed (until the reel re-acceleration process is executed and the reel reaches a constant speed). In this configuration, the illumination state of the stop button lamp will transition from "off" to "invalid state" during the period from when the power is turned on until the reel sensor detects the index on the reel.

<<Diagram 2 regarding reel stop operation>>
Next, FIG. 149 is a diagram applicable to the gaming machine according to this specification, showing a case where a power outage occurs while the reels are rotating. The gaming machine according to this figure has a transparent LCD in front of the reels when viewed from the front. The display area of the transparent LCD is larger than the area where the reels are visible when viewed from the front (the reel window). The transparent LCD is configured so that when the reel back lamps are turned on, it becomes transparent, making the reels behind the transparent LCD visible (or easily visible) to the player when viewed from the front. When the reel back lamps are turned off, it becomes non-transparent, making the reels behind the transparent LCD invisible (or difficult to see) to the player when viewed from the front.

The reel back lamp is located inside the reel (reel unit), allowing the reel to be illuminated from the back.

The entire LCD screen of the gaming machine may be transparent, or some areas of the LCD screen may be transparent and other areas may not be transparent.

First, in (a) of the figure, the reels are spinning and the transparent LCD is in a transparent state. The stop button lamp is in an active state, which is a notification state. The reel drive state is in a constant reel speed state.

After that, a power outage occurs, and the stop button lamp goes into the inactive state (notification state) in (b) of the figure. Note that in (b) of the figure, the transparent LCD remains in the transparent state, and the reels continue to spin.

Then, in (c) in the figure, the reel back lamps turn off and the transparent LCD becomes opaque, but the reels continue to rotate, so the player cannot (or has difficulty seeing) how the reels stop after the power is cut off (how the reels stop when they are forced to stop due to the power supply to the gaming machine being cut off).

Then, at (d) in the figure, the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, causing the reels to be forcibly stopped, but because the transparent LCD is in a non-transparent state, the player cannot (or has difficulty seeing) how the reels have stopped since the power was cut off. Also, at (d) in the figure, the stop button lamp is turned off. Note that the timing at which the stop button lamp is turned off may be before or after the reels are forcibly stopped. Furthermore, the timing of when the stop button lamp is turned off and when the reels are forcibly stopped may differ depending on when the stop button is operated.

Then, when the power is turned on again, at a predetermined timing (e) in the figure after the reels have started to spin, the stop button lamp is in the active mode (or it can be in the inactive mode), which is the notification mode, but the reel back lamp remains off and the transparent LCD is in a non-transparent state. Note that because the transparent LCD is in a non-transparent state when the reels start to spin, the player is unable (or finds it difficult to see) what mode the reels were in after the power was turned off.

Then, at (f) in the figure, the reel back lamps light up, the transparent LCD becomes transparent, and the player can see (or can easily see) the spinning reels.

In this way, in the configuration of Figure 149 that has a transparent LCD, if a power outage occurs, the reel back lamps are lit and the transparent LCD remains in a transparent state, and the stop button lamp changes from an active state to an inactive state. In other words, the stop button lamp is configured to change from an active state to an inactive state before the reel back lamps go out and the reels become invisible (or difficult to see).

By configuring it in this way, the visibility of the reel symbols can be ensured for as long as possible while the stop button is in operation.

Furthermore, in the configuration of Figure 149 which has a transparent LCD, if a power outage occurs, the reel back lamps will go out and the transparent LCD will become non-transparent while the reels are spinning. In other words, before the reels are forced to stop due to the power supply to the gaming machine being cut off, the reel back lamps will go out and the transparent LCD will become non-transparent, so that the player will not be able to see (or will have difficulty seeing) how the reels have stopped after the power outage.

By configuring it in this way, when the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off and the reels are forced to stop, the player cannot see (or finds it difficult to see) the stopping pattern. Therefore, even if the stopping pattern appears to be an advantageous symbol combination for the player, such as a 7-match (bonus symbols stopped on an active line), it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player's motivation to play is reduced by seeing the stopping pattern.

Furthermore, in the configuration of Figure 149, which has a translucent LCD, if a power outage occurs, the reels will begin spinning while the translucent LCD is in a non-transparent state. In other words, the reels are configured to begin spinning before the reel back lamps light up.

By configuring it in this way, when the reel back lamps light up and the transparent LCD becomes transparent, allowing the player to see the reels (making the reels easily visible), the reels are already spinning, so when the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off and the reels are forced to stop, the player cannot see (or has difficulty seeing) the stopping pattern. Therefore, even if the stopping pattern is a symbol combination that appears to be advantageous to the player, such as a seven-match combination, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player's motivation to play is reduced by seeing the stopping pattern.

Furthermore, after (b) in the figure, the power supply to the gaming machine may be cut off, forcing the reels to stop, and then the transparent LCD may change from a transparent state to a non-transparent state (the reel back lamps may be turned off). By configuring it in this way, the player can check the stopped symbols and understand the current status of the reels even if a power outage occurs.

Furthermore, if the power is turned on again after (d) in the figure, the reels may be configured to start spinning after the transmissive LCD changes from a non-transmissive state to a transmissive state (after the reel back lamps turn on). By configuring it in this way, the player can check the symbols that are stopped before the reels start spinning, even when the power is turned on again, and can understand the status of the reels.

<<<<Fraud prevention measures >>>>
Next, the configurations relating to fraud prevention measures applicable to the gaming machines according to this specification will be described in detail below. It should be noted that the configurations described in detail below are applicable to all configurations in this specification. The configurations described in detail below are for slot machines that use gaming medals, but it should be noted that configurations other than those that use gaming medals can also be applied to medal-less gaming machines that do not use gaming medals (sometimes referred to as enclosed gaming machines, managed gaming machines, smart slots, etc.).

Furthermore, the configurations detailed below may be applied singly or in combination.

First, Figure 150 is a perspective view of the gaming machine with the front door DU open. In the configuration shown in this figure, an external terminal board G (sometimes called an external terminal board) is located on the inside of the left side of the cabinet (the right side as seen from the player). Note that the dotted line indicates that it is installed on the inside of the left side of the cabinet. The external terminal board G is a board with terminals for outputting external signals, which are signals used to transmit information from the gaming machine to an external hall computer, etc.

The gaming machine configured as shown in the figure also has a motor drive board K (sometimes referred to as the reel board K) that controls the reel motor K10 for driving the reels and the hopper motor H80 for driving the hopper H40, and a main control board M, located above the reel unit as viewed by the player, and a sub-control board S on the left side as viewed by the reel unit player. Also, an effect display device S40 is located above the front door DU.

In addition, a sub-control board S may be provided in the position of the performance display device S40 in the same diagram.

<<Diagram of the motor drive board>>
Next, Figure 151 is a diagram of a motor drive board K that can be applied to the gaming machine according to this specification. In this figure, the installation position of the motor drive board K shown in Figure 150 is changed by using a holding member, making it easier to prevent fraud. The specific configuration will be described in detail below.

First, the left part of the figure is a front view of the motor drive board K and reel unit, and the right part is a side view of the motor drive board K and reel unit. As shown in the figure, two holding members are interposed between the reel unit and the motor drive board K, and the motor drive board K is supported by these holding members, resulting in a distance d between the reel unit and the motor drive board K. d can be any distance, but as an example, it is 10 cm.

By configuring it in this way, the amusement facility manager can open the front door DU and view the back surface of the motor drive board K (the lower surface when viewed from the front) from the front side of the gaming machine cabinet.Even if fraud has been committed on the back surface of the motor drive board K, the fraud can be discovered by viewing the back surface of the motor drive board K.

In the configuration shown in the figure, the back surface of the motor drive board K only needs to be visible from the front of the gaming machine when the front door DU is open. Furthermore, the side of the motor drive board K on which the specified IC is mounted is the front surface, and the side on which the specified IC is not mounted is the back surface.

Note that the configuration of the gaming machine shown in Figure 151 is the same as that shown in Figure 150, except for the position of the motor drive board K.

Fraudulence against the motor drive board K includes tampering with the payout number by causing the hopper motor H80 to malfunction, and slowing down the rotation of the reels to make it easier to stop a specific symbol combination.

Furthermore, although not shown, in the gaming machine configured as shown in the figure, the main control board M and external terminal board G are connected without any other boards in between, and the main control board M and motor drive board K are connected without any other boards in between. In other words, one connection part of one harness (sometimes called a cable) is connected to the main control board M, and the other connection part of that harness is connected to the external terminal board G. Also, one connection part of one harness is connected to the main control board M, and the other connection part of that harness is connected to the motor drive board K.

By configuring it in this way, the area where unauthorized components can be attached can be reduced compared to when the main control board M and external terminal board G are connected via multiple boards, or when the main control board M and motor drive board K are connected via multiple boards, making it easier to prevent unauthorized access.

Note that either the configuration in which the motor drive board K is installed as shown in Figure 151 or the configuration in which the main control board M and external terminal board G are connected without any other boards, and the main control board M and motor drive board K are connected without any other boards, may be applied, or both may be applied.

Furthermore, the configuration in Figure 151 is merely an example regarding the installation position of the motor drive board K, and it is sufficient if the back surface of the motor drive board K can be seen when the front door DU is open. As a specific example, the motor drive board K may be installed inside the back surface of the housing at the same angle as in Figure 151. The motor drive board K may also be configured to be movable by hand.

<<Harness Diagram>>
Next, Fig. 152 is a diagram relating to a harness applicable to the gaming machine according to the present specification. The configuration in Fig. 152 is applicable to any of the configurations described above in Fig. 150 and Fig. 151.

First, in Figure (a), the reels are spinning and the stop button lamp is in the active alert mode. Then, after the main control board M side of the harness connecting the main control board M and the motor drive board K is disconnected, the harness becomes visible through the reel window (sometimes referred to as the reel display window) when the front door DU is closed, as shown in Figure (b).

The reel window is a window provided in the front door DU, and when the front door DU is closed, the reel can be seen through the reel window.

In the configuration shown in the figure, even if the main control board M side of the harness connecting the main control board M and the motor drive board K becomes disconnected, the harness may not be visible through the reel window depending on the orientation of the harness after it becomes disconnected. In other words, if the main control board M side of the harness connecting the main control board M and the motor drive board K becomes disconnected, it is sufficient that the disconnected harness be visible through the reel window when it hangs down toward the front side of the reel. In other words, the length of the harness should be designed so that the disconnected harness is visible through the reel window when it hangs down toward the front side of the reel.

More specifically, when the length of the harness is X and the distance from the terminal on the motor drive board K to which the harness is connected to the reel window is Y1,
X>Y1
It is sufficient to configure it so that

If the harness is bundled using a specified fastener, if the specified fastener comes off, the detached harness should be visible through the reel window.

By configuring it in this way, even if the harness connecting the main control board M and the motor drive board K is disconnected due to fraud, the fraud can be detected through the reel window.

Furthermore, similar to the configuration in Figure 152, when the reels are rotating and the stop button lamp is in the active state, which is the alert state, the harness connecting the main control board M and the motor drive board K may be disconnected on the motor drive board K side, and the harness may be visible through the reel window when the front door DU is closed.

In this configuration, even if the motor drive board K side of the harness connecting the main control board M and the motor drive board K becomes disconnected, the harness may not be visible through the reel window depending on the orientation of the harness after it becomes disconnected. In other words, if the motor drive board K side of the harness connecting the main control board M and the motor drive board K becomes disconnected, it is sufficient that the disconnected harness be visible through the reel window when it hangs down toward the front of the reel. In other words, the length of the harness should be designed so that the disconnected harness is visible through the reel window when it hangs down toward the front of the reel.

More specifically, when the length of the harness is X and the distance from the terminal on the main control board M to which the harness is connected to the reel window is Y2,
X>Y2
It is sufficient to configure it so that

If the harness is bundled using a specified fastener, if the specified fastener comes off, the detached harness should be visible through the reel window.

By configuring it in this way, even if the harness connecting the main control board M and the motor drive board K is disconnected due to fraud, the fraud can be detected through the reel window.

Furthermore, similar to the configuration in Figure 152, when the reels are rotating and the stop button lamp is in the active state, which is the alert state, the harness connecting the main control board M and the sub-control board S may be disconnected on the main control board M side, and the harness may be visible through the reel window when the front door DU is closed.

In this configuration, even if the main control board M side of the harness connecting the main control board M and the sub-control board S becomes disconnected, the harness may not be visible through the reel window depending on the orientation of the harness after it becomes disconnected. In other words, if the main control board M side of the harness connecting the main control board M and the sub-control board S becomes disconnected, it is sufficient that the disconnected harness be visible through the reel window when it hangs down toward the front of the reel. In other words, the length of the harness should be designed so that the disconnected harness is visible through the reel window when it hangs down toward the front of the reel.

More specifically, when the length of the harness is X and the distance from the terminal to which the harness is connected on the sub-control board S to the reel window is Y3,
X>Y3
It is sufficient to configure it so that

If the harness is bundled using a specified fastener, if the specified fastener comes off, the detached harness should be visible through the reel window.

By configuring it in this way, even if the harness connecting the main control board M and the sub-control board S is tampered with and disconnected, the tampering can be detected through the reel window.

In addition, the harness connecting the main control board M and the sub-control board S may be configured to be longer than the harness connecting the main control board M and the motor drive board K.

In addition, the above-mentioned configuration of the harness connecting the main control board M and motor drive board K, where the harness can be seen through the reel window when the front door DU is closed after the main control board M side is disconnected; the configuration of the harness connecting the main control board M and motor drive board K, where the harness can be seen through the reel window when the front door DU is closed after the motor drive board K side is disconnected; and the configuration of the harness connecting the main control board M and sub-control board S, where the harness can be seen through the reel window when the front door DU is closed after the main control board M side is disconnected, may be one configuration only, or multiple configurations may be applied.

The anti-fraud configuration described above may be configured to output a payout sound from the speaker S20 when a payout occurs, regardless of whether or not fraud has occurred. By configuring in this way, even if fraud has been committed against the motor drive board K, causing the hopper motor H80 to malfunction and resulting in an fraudulent payout, the payout sound output from the speaker S20 can make it easier to detect the occurrence of fraud. Furthermore, if fraud has been committed against the motor drive board K, causing the hopper motor H80 to malfunction and resulting in an fraudulent payout, the time required for the payout will be longer (or more likely to be longer) than when a payout occurs as a result of a win during normal play, so the payout sound will also be output for a longer period of time, and the longer-than-normal payout sound can make it easier to detect the occurrence of fraud.

<<<Configuration of Medal Selector and Chute Body>>>
Next, the configuration of the medal selector DS and the chute main body DSH applicable to the gaming machine according to this specification will be described in detail below. Note that the configuration described in detail below is applicable to all configurations in this specification.

Furthermore, the configurations detailed below may be applied singly or in combination.

First, Figure 153 is a diagram of a medal selector DS and chute main body DSH that can be applied to the gaming machine described in this specification. The gaming machine described in this figure has a chute main body DSH. A gaming medal inserted through the medal insertion port D170 flows down the medal flow path DR within the medal selector DS, is detected by the insertion reception sensor D10s, is detected by the first insertion sensor D20s, is detected by the second insertion sensor D30s, then flows down the chute main body DSH, is detected by the chute sensor D40s, and flows down toward the hopper H40.

In the configuration shown in the figure, the state in which a gaming medal is detected by the sensor is referred to as "on," and the state in which a gaming medal is not detected by the sensor is referred to as "off."

Furthermore, a difference from the configuration having the chute main body DSH described above is the configuration of the insertion acceptance sensor D10s and the chute sensor D40s. Details will be described later, but the insertion acceptance sensor D10s in the configuration shown in the figure is configured so that the insertion acceptance sensor D10s turns on when the selector movable piece is moved by a gaming medal, and the chute sensor D40s in the configuration shown in the figure is configured so that the chute movable piece is moved by a gaming medal, and the chute sensor D40s turns on.

The gaming machine described herein may be configured to include the chute body DSH and chute sensor D40s as shown in the figure, or may be configured without the chute body DSH and chute sensor D40s. Furthermore, if the gaming machine is configured with the chute body DSH and chute sensor D40s, it may be configured without the insertion reception sensor D10s.

<<Diagram of input reception sensor>>
Next, Fig. 154 is a diagram showing a coin acceptance sensor D10s applicable to the gaming machine according to the present specification. The coin acceptance sensor D10s in Fig. 154 has the same configuration as that in Fig. 153. Note that only the coin acceptance sensor D10s shown in Fig. 154 may be referred to as the coin acceptance sensor D10s, or the coin acceptance sensor D10s, the rotating shaft, and the coin acceptance movable piece shown in Fig. 154 may be collectively referred to as the coin acceptance sensor D10s.

<A: The gaming machine is installed properly>
The situation where the gaming machine is properly installed is described in detail in A on the left side of the figure. The situation where the gaming machine is properly installed is the situation where the bottom surface of the gaming machine cabinet is in contact with the floor, such as the situation shown in Figure 1.

<Configuration of input reception sensor>
First, the configuration of the input reception sensor D10s when the gaming machine is properly installed will be described in detail. In (a) and (b) in A on the left side of the figure, the up direction in the figure is the up direction when viewed from the front, the down direction in the figure is the down direction when viewed from the front, the right direction in the figure is the back direction when viewed from the front, and the left direction in the figure is the front direction when viewed from the front.

As shown in (a) in the figure, in the initial state when the gaming machine is installed correctly, the movable insert receiving piece blocks the insert receiving sensor, turning it off.

Next, when a gaming medal inserted through the medal insertion slot D170 flows down the medal flow path DR within the medal selector DS and reaches the position of the insertion acceptance sensor D10s, as shown in (b) in the figure, the gaming medal pushes aside the insertion acceptance movable piece and rotates around the rotation axis as a fulcrum, and the insertion acceptance movable piece no longer blocks the insertion acceptance sensor, turning the insertion acceptance sensor on.

In this way, the deposit reception sensor D10s shown in the figure is configured to switch on and off as the deposit reception movable piece moves.

<B: Left side touching the floor>
Here, B on the right side of the figure illustrates a situation in which the left side of the cabinet of the gaming machine described above in Figure 146 is in contact with the floor.

<Configuration of gaming machine cabinet>
In the configuration of the gaming machine cabinet at B on the right side of the same figure, the upward direction in the same figure is the upward direction when viewed from the front, the downward direction in the same figure is the downward direction when viewed from the front, the right direction in the same figure is the right direction when viewed from the front, and the left direction in the same figure is the left direction when viewed from the front.

As such, if an accident at an amusement facility causes the left side of the gaming machine's cabinet to touch the floor and gameplay is allowed to continue, unforeseen circumstances could arise for both the player and the amusement facility, so it is preferable to configure the facility so that gameplay cannot continue. Furthermore, if an amusement facility manager operates a facility with a gaming machine installed improperly, such as with the left side of the cabinet touching the floor, or if a player purchases a gaming machine on a second-hand market to play at home and plays the machine with the left side of the cabinet touching the floor, there is a possibility that safety cannot be guaranteed. Therefore, it is preferable to configure the facility so that gameplay cannot continue if the gaming machine is installed improperly, such as with the left side of the cabinet touching the floor.

<Configuration of input reception sensor>
Next, the configuration of the insertion receiving sensor D10s when the left side of the gaming machine cabinet is in contact with the floor will be described in detail in B on the right side of the figure. In (c) in B on the right side of the figure, the up direction in the figure is the left direction when viewed from the front, the down direction in the figure is the right direction when viewed from the front, the right direction in the figure is the back direction when viewed from the front, and the left direction in the figure is the front direction when viewed from the front.

As shown in (c) in the figure, when the left side of the gaming machine cabinet is in contact with the floor, even if the gaming medal has not reached the insertion acceptance sensor D10s and the insertion acceptance movable piece is not being pressed by the gaming medal, the insertion acceptance movable piece is rotating around the rotation axis from the position in (a) in the figure, and the insertion acceptance movable piece does not block the insertion acceptance sensor D10s, so the insertion acceptance sensor D10s is turned on.

The gaming machine shown in the figure is configured so that if the input reception sensor D10s remains on for a long period of time, a specified error state will occur, and if the left side of the gaming machine cabinet is in contact with the floor, a specified error state will occur and game play will no longer be possible. This configuration prevents game play from progressing in situations other than when the gaming machine is properly installed, and prevents unexpected situations from occurring for players and gaming facility supervisors.

Specific examples of conditions that would result in a specified error state if the input reception sensor D10s continues to remain on include (1) the input reception sensor D10s remains on for a first period of time, or (2) the first input sensor D20s (or the second input sensor D30s) remains off for a second period of time after the input reception sensor D10s changes from off to on.

In addition, Figure 1(c) illustrates a case in which the deposit acceptance movable piece rotates (moves) toward the back when the left side of the gaming machine cabinet is in contact with the floor. However, even when the left side of the gaming machine cabinet is in contact with the floor and a gaming medal has not yet reached the deposit acceptance sensor D10s and the deposit acceptance movable piece is not being pressed by the gaming medal, the deposit acceptance sensor D10s can be configured to remain on. For example, when the left side of the gaming machine cabinet is in contact with the floor, the deposit acceptance movable piece can be configured to move downward (in the direction of gravity) and turn on the deposit acceptance sensor D10s. Furthermore, the orientation of the deposit acceptance sensor D10s relative to the gaming machine cabinet and the range of movement (movement direction) of the deposit acceptance movable piece can be configured in any way.

In addition, while the diagram illustrates an example of an improperly installed gaming machine where the left side of the gaming machine cabinet is in contact with the floor, this is not limited to this and the configuration in the diagram may also be applied to situations where any side of the gaming machine cabinet is in contact with the floor, such as when the back of the gaming machine cabinet is in contact with the floor. Furthermore, the configuration in the diagram may be applied to only one side that is in contact with the floor, or to multiple sides.

In addition, while the same figure illustrates a configuration related to the input reception sensor D10s, this is not limiting and the input reception sensor D10s in the same figure may be replaced with the chute sensor D40s described above in Figure 153. In this case, the configuration may be such that a specified error state occurs if the chute sensor D40s remains on for a long period of time.

Furthermore, the configuration shown in the figure may be configured so that even if the gaming machine is not installed correctly, if the medal selector DS is removed due to fraud, or if the angle of the medal selector DS is changed for a specified period of time, a specified error will occur. This configuration can prevent fraudulent use of the medal selector DS.

<Cable-related ideas 1 (cable size)>
Figure 155 schematically shows the relationship at the hinge portion between a front door DU, which is provided on a gaming machine cabinet so as to be able to open and close, and a cabinet main body KM, which constitutes the gaming machine cabinet. The front door DU is connected to the cabinet main body KM via a hinge device HJ1 and is supported by the cabinet main body KM. Although only the upper hinge device HJ1 is shown in Figure 155, the front door DU is supported by upper and lower hinge devices HJ1 and HJ2, as shown in Figures 2 and 150. In Figure 155, the thickness (which is not constant) and shape of each part of the front door DU and the thickness (which may be constant) and shape of the cabinet main body KM are shown in a simplified schematic form.

In Figures 2 and 150, hinge devices HJ1 and HJ2 are shown as if they are separated in the middle to show the outline of the front door DU, but like hinge device HJ1 in Figure 155, they are fixed in a state spanning the front door DU and the cabinet main body KM. Figure 155 schematically shows the state in which the front door DU has been opened to a certain extent (for example, about 90 degrees), exposing the interior of the slot machine P. Some of the equipment has been omitted from Figure 155. Furthermore, in Figure 155, hinge device HJ1 is schematically shown using a combination of rectangular parallelepiped shapes.

Figure 156 shows the front door DU in an open state as viewed from above. The displacement trajectory of the front door DU when it is opened or closed is not limited to a simple arcuate motion trajectory. The displacement trajectory of the front door DU when it is opened or closed may, for example, be such that it is displaced not only in the arcuate direction but also in the left-right direction (left-right when viewed from the front of the gaming machine) depending on the mechanism of the hinge devices HJ1 and HJ2. Here, terms indicating orientation or direction, such as "up," "down," "left," "right," "front," and "rear," refer to the orientation or direction when the gaming machine is properly installed, unless otherwise specified. "Up" and "left-right" refer to the up and left-right directions when the gaming machine is properly installed. However, even if either the left or right side of the gaming machine cabinet (here, the cabinet body KM) is in contact with the floor, the dimensional relationships between the front door DU, the cabinet body KM, and the power cord DK, harness HN, and hook tube (also called "hook fastening tube") HT, which will be described later, remain valid.

Figure 156 shows a power cord DK. One end of the power cord DK is electrically connected to the power supply unit E (Figure 2). The other end of the power cord DK has a power plug DP, which is plugged into a power outlet. Power (e.g., 100V AC voltage) is supplied to the slot machine P via this power cord DK. The power is converted to a specified DC voltage and then supplied to each control board and board.

In Figure 156, the symbol WA indicates the width of the cord portion DC of the power cord DK. The cord portion DC is most of the power cord DK, excluding one end that is electrically connected to the power supply unit E (Figure 2) and the other end where the power plug DP is formed. The shape (cross-sectional shape) of the cord portion DC may be, for example, a perfect circle as shown schematically in Figure 157(a), an oval as shown in Figure 157(b), or a flat shape as shown in Figure 157(c). The width indicated by the symbol WA is the width of the widest portion of the various cross-sectional shapes of the power cord DK. In other words, the width indicated by the symbol WA is the maximum length of the power cord DK.

The maximum width WA of the power cord DK is longer than the distance WB of the gap SK between the front door DU and the housing side (housing body KM) when the front door DU is open. In other words, the relationship WA > WB holds. In Figure 156, WB is drawn larger than WA to clearly show the gap SK; in reality, WA > WB. The distance WB of the gap SK changes depending on the angle of the front door DU. The gap SK is the space that occurs between the front door DU and the housing body KM. When the front door DU is closed and aligned with the housing body KM, the gap SK is at its smallest, as shown in Figure 158. The gap SK widens when the front door DU is opened, as shown in Figure 156. Here, "gap" can also be referred to as "gap" or "space." The distance of the gap SK can also be simply referred to as "gap SK." Furthermore, the distance of the gap SK can also be referred to as the "width," "opening width," "size," or "distance between the front door DU and the housing side (housing main body KM)" of the gap SK.

A plate-shaped shielding portion SH is provided at the front edge KM12 of the upper edge KM10 of the housing body KM, protruding forward. When the front door DU is closed, the upper edge of the front door DU closely overlaps the shielding portion SH. When the front door DU is closed, part of the gap SK faces the shielding portion SH and is blocked by the shielding portion SH. Therefore, even if an individual attempting fraud were to insert a foreign object into the gap SK when the front door DU is closed, the foreign object would hit the shielding portion SH, making it difficult for the foreign object to enter beyond the shielding portion SH (beyond the shielding portion SH). Examples of "foreign objects" that can be used fraudulently include rod-shaped, wire-shaped, string-shaped, and plate-shaped objects.

In the examples of Figures 156 and 158, an escape recess KM14 is formed at one end (the end closest to the hinge device HJ1) of the upper edge KM10 of the housing main body KM to prevent interference with the corners of the front door DU when the front door DU rotates. The distance WB of the gap SK can be defined, for example, as the "front-to-rear distance" between the outermost end KM16 (the end closest to the hinge device HJ1) of the escape recess KM14 and the front door DU. Alternatively, the distance WB of the gap SK can also be defined, for example, as the "shortest distance" between the outermost end KM16 of the escape recess KM14 and the front door DU.

In all of the above definitions, the relationship WA > WB holds true over the entire length (the entire length of the curved portion) of the relief recess KM14 shown in Figures 156 and 158. Note that the relationship WA > WB does not necessarily hold true over the entire length of the relief recess KM14; for example, the relationship WA > WB may hold true over at least a portion of the relief recess KM14.

The gap SK also exists on the left and right sides of the gaming machine cabinet, continuing from the escape recess KM14. The gap SK extends from the escape recess KM14 to the other end of the top edge KM10 of the cabinet body KM (the end opposite the hinge device HJ1, the right end when viewed from the front of the gaming machine (the end KM16 on the free end side of the front door DU)). At least when the front door DU is closed or the opening angle of the front door DU is kept small (for example, when the opening angle is approximately 5 degrees or less), the WA > WB relationship also holds at the end KM16 on the free end side of the front door DU. However, this is not limited to this; for example, the WA > WB relationship may hold for at least a portion of the gap SK when the front door DU is closed or the opening angle of the front door DU is kept small.

The gap SK also extends over the entire vertical length of the gaming machine (from the top to the bottom). The gap SK may be constant over the entire vertical length of the gaming machine. In this case, the relationship WA > WB will hold true over the entire vertical length of the gaming machine. Furthermore, the gap SK does not necessarily have to be constant over the entire vertical length of the gaming machine. In this case, it is possible for the relationship WA > WB to hold true only over part of the entire vertical length of the gaming machine.

The relationship between the maximum width WA of the power cord DK and the distance WB of the gap SK (here, WA > WB) can be determined in various ways. For example, the gap SK changes depending on the degree of opening (opening angle) of the front door DU. The gap SK also changes depending on the position (the distance of the gap SK at any position) and the combination of the degree of opening of the front door DU. As an example, assuming that the distance WB of the gap SK can change depending on the degree of opening of the front door DU, the following relationship (relationship 1) is determined:
When the aperture is at its maximum opening (for example, an opening angle of 90 degrees or more), WA>WB holds.
When the aperture is wide open (for example, the opening angle is 60 to 90 degrees (less than 90 degrees)), WA>WB holds.
When the aperture is at a medium open angle (for example, an open angle of 45 to 60 degrees (less than 60 degrees)), WA>WB holds.
When the aperture is slightly open (for example, the opening angle is 30 to 45 degrees (less than 45 degrees)), WA>WB holds.
When the aperture is at a minimum opening (for example, an opening angle of 10 to 30 degrees (less than 30 degrees)), WA>WB holds.
When the aperture is extremely small (for example, the aperture angle is 0 to 10 degrees (less than 10 degrees)), WA>WB holds.

Furthermore, the length of the gap SK for which WA > WB is established can be determined in various ways. For example, the size WB of the gap SK varies between the bottom and top of the gaming machine, and takes on various values ranging from longest to shortest depending on the position. As an example, the relationship (relationship 2) is determined as follows:
When the distance at the point where the gap SK is shortest is WB, WA>WB holds.
When the distance of the part where the length of the gap SK is longest is WB, WA>WB holds.
When the average of the distance between the shortest and longest parts of the gap SK is WB, WA > WB holds. Note that the above-mentioned Relationship 1 and Relationship 2 can be combined as appropriate, provided that no particular problems arise.

As explained above, by determining the width of the gap SK, the power cord DK can be prevented from becoming trapped in the gap SK. Furthermore, when the closed front door DU is opened and then closed again, the power cord DK is less likely to fly out through the gap SK or to become pinched between the front door DU and the housing main body KM. Furthermore, damage to the power cord DK and fires caused by the power cord DK breaking can be effectively prevented.

This pinch prevention effect for the power cord DK is achieved regardless of the cross-sectional shape of the power cord DK (for example, the various shapes shown in Figures 157(a) to 157(c)). Furthermore, it is desirable that the maximum width WA of the power cord DK be the size of the power cord DK in its normal use state, without being compressed or deformed, for example. Furthermore, the pinch prevention effect for the power cord DK is achieved even when the power plug DP of the power cord DK is disconnected from the power outlet. Furthermore, because the power plug DP is wider than the cord portion DC of the power cord DK, the pinch prevention effect is also achieved for the power plug DP.

Note that while the power cord DK has been used as an example of a cable, it can also be applied to the maximum width length of harnesses used for communication between various boards (such as the harness HN described below).

Furthermore, the support of the front door DU by the cabinet main body KM is not limited to the types shown in Figures 2, 150, and 155. For example, it is also possible to use a hinge device HJ10 as shown in Figure 159. The hinge device HJ10 illustrated in Figure 159 includes pipe-shaped tubular members HJ10A that extend in the vertical direction of the gaming machine, and supports the front door DU via the tubular members HJ10A. The tubular members HJ10A are rotatable in the horizontal direction, and rotate and displace integrally with the front door DU.

In the example of Figure 155, as in Figures 2 and 150, the escape recess KM14 is not shown, but it is possible to form the escape recess KM14 even in Figure 155 (and the examples of Figures 2 and 150). Furthermore, even if the escape recess KM14 is not provided (for example, in the examples of Figures 2, 150, and 155), it is possible to determine the relationship between the gaming machine frame and the power cord DK so that the relationship WA > WB holds.

<Cable-related idea 2 (inclined portion KM18 of housing body KM)>
As shown in Fig. 156, an escape recess KM14 is formed in the upper edge KM10 of the housing main body KM. In the example of Fig. 156, the escape recess KM14 is formed in an overall arc shape. The "arc shape" here may be represented by, for example, a single arc whose length can be calculated using the diameter, pi, and central angle values, or may be represented by a combination of multiple arcs. Furthermore, the "arc shape" may be represented by a combination of an arc and a straight line, or may be represented by a combination of multiple straight lines.

Figure 160 shows an enlarged schematic view of the escape recess KM14. The escape recess KM14 has a shape such that at least the portion on the hinge device HJ1 side has been cut off at an angle. The edge of the upper side KM10 of the housing main body KM facing the escape recess KM14 forms an inclined portion KM18. The inclined portion KM18 may be formed in an arc shape as shown by the solid line in Figure 160, or may be inclined linearly as shown by the two-dot chain line. For example, an arc-shaped inclined portion may be one in which the tangent to the curve (arc) is represented by an oblique straight line.

By providing the inclined portion KM18 in this manner, even if the power cord DK becomes pinched between the front door DU and the upper edge KM10 of the housing body KM when the front door DU is closed, a force is more easily applied to the power cord DK in a direction along the inclined portion KM18 (diagonally relative to the left-right and front-to-back directions of the housing body KM). The power cord DK then moves, guided by the inclined portion 18. As a result, the power cord DK is pushed (ejected) toward the outermost end KM16 of the escape recess KM14 (the end closest to the hinge device HJ1) and released from between the front door DU and the housing body KM. This prevents the power cord DK from becoming trapped between the corner DU10 of the front door DU and the housing body KM, effectively preventing the power cord DK from becoming pinched.

To better prevent the power cord DK from getting pinched or damaged, it is desirable to form at least the area around the escape recess KM14 on the upper edge KM10 of the housing main body KM using, for example, a synthetic resin material. Alternatively, at least the area around the escape recess KM14 may be formed from an elastic material such as rubber. Furthermore, even if the area around the escape recess KM14 is made of metal (e.g., sheet metal), sufficient chamfering or R (radius, curved surface) processing can be applied to better prevent the power cord DK from getting pinched or damaged.

<Cable-related ideas 3 (length of Hook Tube HT, etc.)>
155 shows a harness HN. Connectors HN10 and HN12 are provided on both ends of the harness HN, and the connectors HN10 and HN12 are connected to a connector (not shown) on the main control board M and a connector on the sub-control board S. The main control board M and the sub-control board S are housed in transparent board cases M110 and S110, respectively, with the connectors (not shown) exposed from the board cases M110 and S110. The harness HN may be a so-called flat ribbon cable type in which multiple (numerous) conductors (conductor portions) are integrated into a strip shape, or it may be a type in which the conductors are not integrated and are connected to the connectors HN10 and HN12.

155, the main control board M is located on the side of the cabinet body KM, as in the examples of FIG. 150 and others. However, unlike the examples of FIG. 150 and others, the sub-control board S is located on the side of the front door DU. For this reason, the harness HN is stretched between the cabinet body KM and the front door DU. Here, the harness HN is shown merely as an example, and any harness that is located between the cabinet body KM and the front door DU may be a harness connected to another board. Similarly, the main control board M and the sub-control board S may be replaced with other board combinations. Examples of other board combinations include the combination of the main control board M and a medal count control board (in the case of a medalless slot machine), or the combination of the sub-control board S and an image control board (not shown, a board that controls the image display in the performance display device S40).

The length of the harness HN is set to be longer than the linear distance between the connection point to the main control board M and the connection point to the sub-control board S. The distance between the main control board M and the sub-control board S changes depending on the opening angle of the front door DU. The length of the harness HN is set so that slack occurs even when the front door DU is opened to its maximum angle. In the example in Figure 155, the opening angle of the front door DU is approximately 90 degrees, and the harness HN slackens in the shape of the letter "W."

A midpoint of the harness HN is supported by a first clamp CP10 and a second clamp CP12. The first clamp CP10 and the second clamp CP12 are fixed to the front door DU and the housing main body KM, respectively. As the front door DU opens and closes, the harness HN is supported by and in contact with the first clamp CP10 and the second clamp CP12, and displaces relative to them. Various types of first clamp CP10 and second clamp CP12 can be used as long as they can partially support the harness HN. In the example shown in Figure 155, the first clamp CP10 and the second clamp CP12 are U-shaped members that open upward and are made of synthetic resin. Furthermore, the first clamp CP10 and the second clamp CP12 have a rigidity and shape that allow for elastic deformation.

However, this is not limited to this, and the first clamp CP10 and/or the second clamp CP12 can be, for example, band-shaped with both ends fastened with screws, or with a hook-shaped tip (top end). The first clamp CP10 and/or the second clamp CP12 can also be made of metal. It is also possible to fix and restrain the harness HN so that it cannot be displaced relative to one of the clamps (for example, the first clamp CP102 on the front door DU side).

A hook tube (also referred to as a "hook-fastening tube") HT is provided between the portion of the harness HN supported by the first clamp CP10 and the portion supported by the second clamp CP12. The hook tube HT is formed by rolling a flexible sheet-like material into a tubular shape and joining the edges with hooks (e.g., button-shaped hooks). In the example of Figure 155, the circle (oval) on the hook tube HT represents the button-shaped hook. The hook tube HT is wrapped around the conductor (conductor portion) of the harness HN so as to enclose a predetermined area of the harness HN. The hook tube HT deforms to follow the slack shape of the harness HN. The hook tube HT can be unfolded by undoing the button, and can be separated from the harness HN by undoing the button. Various types of materials and shapes that exhibit the required flexibility can be used for the hook tube HT.

In the example shown in Figure 155, the hook tube HT is formed from a transparent synthetic resin sheet. This allows the harness HN to be seen from the outside of the hook tube HT. Even if a foreign object (such as a circuit board in this case) that could be used for fraudulent activities is placed inside the hook tube HT, the foreign object can be easily detected.

The length of the hook tube HT is set so that, when it deforms to follow the harness HN, it fits between the first clamp CP10 and the second clamp CP12, and is shorter than the distance between the first clamp CP10 and the second clamp CP12. The distance between the first clamp CP10 and the second clamp CP12 here is not a straight-line distance (shortest distance), but a distance that follows the shape of the slackened harness HN (also referred to as the "actual length" or "actual measured length"). The shape (slack state) of the harness HN changes as the front door DU opens and closes. This change in the shape (slack state) of the harness HN also occurs between the first clamp CP10 and the second clamp CP12.

The length of the hook tube HT may be, for example, at least half the length of the harness HN. The length of the hook tube HT may also be determined based on the distance between the first clamp CP10 and the second clamp CP12. For example, as shown in FIG. 161 , the length of the portion of the harness HN located between the first clamp CP10 and the second clamp CP12 (also referred to as the "actual length" or "measured length") is represented by the symbol L _HN . In FIG. 161 , the harness HN and the hook tube HT are depicted linearly, omitting slack. The length L _HT (including slack) of the hook tube HT is set to at least half the length L _HN (including slack) of the harness HN. That is, the length L _HT of the hook tube HT is determined so that the relationship L _HT ≧ L _HN /2 holds. It is to be noted that the distance between the first clamp CP10 and the second clamp CP12 changes when the front door DU is closed (when the opening angle is 0 degrees) and when the front door DU is opened at a predetermined angle (for example, from over 0 degrees to the maximum angle), and it is also possible that the length _LHN of the harness HN changes. In either of these cases, it is possible to determine the length _LHT of the hook tube HT so that the relationship _LHT ≧ _LHN /2 is established.

As described above, the harness HN displaces relative to the first clamp CP10 and the second clamp CP12 while coming into contact with them as the front door DU opens and closes. The hook tube HT can slide relative to the harness HN and displace between the first clamp CP10 and the second clamp CP12, following the shape of the harness HN. The hook tube HT can be manually moved, for example, while still wrapped around the harness HN, so that it comes into contact with the first clamp CP10 or the second clamp CP12. In the example shown in Figure 155, the hook tube HT is moved toward the second clamp CP12.

The hook tube HT faces the gap SK between the front door DU and the housing main body KM, whether it is moved to a position where it contacts (reaches) the first clamp CP10 or the second clamp CP12. In other words, the length of the hook tube HT faces the gap SK, whether it is moved toward the first clamp CP10 or the second clamp CP12. This is true whether the front door DU is closed or at any angle the front door DU is open. Therefore, the hook tube HT can always protect the harness HN when it is positioned facing the gap SK. This prevents the harness HN from entering the gap SK or being pinched between the front door DU and the housing main body KM and being damaged.

In addition, since the harness HN is always protected by the hook tube HT at the position facing the gap SK, even if a third party were to attempt some kind of tampering with the harness HN from the gap SK, the third party would be prevented by the hook tube HT from directly accessing (approaching or touching) the harness HN.

The means for protecting the harness HN (harness protection member) is not limited to the hook tube HT. For example, a spiral tube can be used, in which a strip-shaped member made of synthetic resin is wrapped spirally around the electrical cord to protect the desired area of the electrical cord. Furthermore, shrinkable tubing or bellows tubes can also be used, as long as they can adequately conform to the shape of the slack in the harness HN.

Furthermore, the harness HN is not limited to a harness connecting the main control board M and the sub-control board S. For example, it may be a harness connecting the main control board M and the relay board IN (Figure 12), or a harness between other boards. Furthermore, the boards may be a board installed on the front door DU side (door-side board) and a board installed on the housing main body KM side (main body-side board).

<Cable-related idea 4 (freedom of displacement of clamping members)>
The degree of freedom of displacement of clamp members such as the first clamp CP10 and the second clamp CP12 can be set in various ways. For example, the first clamp CP10 can be fixed so that it cannot be rotated, and the second clamp CP12 can be fixed so that it can be rotated.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 162(a), the first clamp CP10 may be a fixed clamp (one that prevents the harness support portion CP10B from moving relative to the support shaft CP10A fixed to the housing main body KM). The term "fixed clamp" here includes clamps that are integrally formed, as well as clamps that are fixed with a solvent such as an adhesive, or clamps that are fitted together. In FIG. 162(a), the inability to rotate is indicated by a combination of an oval arrow and an "x" mark. In contrast, as shown in FIG. 162(b), the second clamp CP12 may be a freely rotatable clamp (one that allows the harness support portion CP12B to rotate freely forward and backward relative to the support shaft CP12A fixed to the front door DU. In FIG. 162(b), the ability to rotate is indicated by a combination of an oval arrow and an "o" mark.

In this way, by fixing one of the clamps (here, the first clamp CP10) (making it a fixed type), it is possible to restrict the displacement of the harness HN when the front door DU is opened or closed (restrict its behavior) compared to when both clamps are freely rotating, and it is possible to prevent the harness HN from becoming pinched in the gap SK between the front door DU and the housing main body KM.

Note that both the first clamp CP10 and the second clamp CP12 may be freely rotatable, provided that the behavior of the harness HN can be sufficiently restricted. If necessary, both the first clamp CP10 and the second clamp CP12 may be fixed. If they are freely rotatable, rotational resistance may be provided, for example, through friction, so that a certain amount of force is required for rotation. In this case, the frictional resistance may be, for example, a level that requires a clamp (e.g., first clamp CP10) to be operated and turned by a human hand (fingers), or a level that requires the harness HN to be turned by being pulled by a human hand (fingers) while supported.

<Cable-related idea 5 (length of harness HN assuming it may fall off from clamping member)>
When the harness HN is supported by a clamp (here, the first clamp CP10 and/or the second clamp CP12), the range of movement of the harness HN is limited by the clamp. In the example of FIG. 155, the harness HN is easy to move upward but difficult to move in other directions. If the harness HN falls off the clamp, the restraint on the harness HN will loosen, expanding the range of movement of the harness HN. Even in such a case, the length of the harness HN is set so that the harness HN will not be pinched between the front door DU and the housing main body KM.

The length of the harness HN can be set so that it will not reach the gap SK between the front door DU and the housing main body KM even if the harness HN is pulled to its maximum by, for example, a finger while it has fallen off both the first clamp CP10 and the second clamp CP12. Here, "maximum pulling" can refer to, for example, the state in which the harness HN is pulled to its maximum tension when connected to the main control board M and the sub-control board S, or the state in which the harness HN is pulled to its closest approach to the gap SK. This more reliably prevents the harness HN from entering the gap SK or from being pinched between the front door DU and the housing main body KM and being damaged.

The length of the harness HN can also be set to a length such that, when viewed from the front of the gaming machine with the front door DU closed, a portion of the harness HN that has fallen off the clamp (here, the first clamp CP10 and/or the second clamp CP12) reaches the gap SK from the upper part of the left side (left edge) when the gaming machine is viewed from the front with the front door DU closed, but the remaining portion of the harness HN does not reach the gap SK when "pulled to the maximum" as described above. The length of the harness HN can also be set to a length such that, when viewed from the right side of the gaming machine with the front door DU closed, a portion of the harness HN that has fallen off the clamp (here, the first clamp CP10 and/or the second clamp CP12) does not reach the gap SK when "pulled to the maximum" as described above. Furthermore, the length of the harness HN can be set so that if it falls off from the clamps (here, the first clamp CP10 and/or the second clamp CP12), it will not reach the gap SK even when the front door DU is open and it is "pulled to the maximum extent" as described above. Also, the length of the harness HN can be set so that if it falls off from the clamps (here, the first clamp CP10 and/or the second clamp CP12), it will not reach the bottom edge of the housing main body KM even when it is "pulled to the maximum extent" as described above.

<Process 1 related to sub power cutoff (not displaying demo screen)>
Typically, a demo screen (sometimes referred to as a standby demo screen, standby demo image, or demo image) may be displayed when a game has not progressed for a predetermined time. Specifically, the timing for displaying the demo screen may include when a predetermined time has elapsed since all reels M50 stopped and a game end process was executed. Examples of demo screens include a screen (display screen) displaying the model name or the name of the gaming machine manufacturer (including the sales company). FIG. 163(b) shows an example of a demo screen, with the model name indicated by obscured characters "XXXXX." Demo screens may also include screens that loop multiple displays, such as the model name and the gaming machine manufacturer name. If a game begins to progress while a demo screen is being displayed, the demo screen ends and the screen display transitions to a game in progress display. Here, the "game not progressing" situation includes a situation in which the reels M50 are not spinning, as described above. In addition, a situation in which "game is not progressing" includes, for example, a situation after one game has ended without any winnings and no new betting operations have been performed (a situation in which the number of bets is 0 and bets are waiting), a situation in which game is not progressing and game is waiting, etc.

It is anticipated that a power outage (power failure) will occur in the sub-control board S during the game standby state where no game is in progress as described above (including the state before the demo screen is displayed). A situation in which a power outage will occur in the sub-control board S is anticipated, such as when power is being supplied to the entire gaming machine but the power supply to the sub-control board S is cut off. Specifically, examples of situations in which power is being supplied to other parts of the gaming machine (such as the main control board M), but the sub-control board S experiences a momentary power outage due to, for example, a disconnected harness, a broken harness, a lightning strike, or noise, etc.

Of these power interruptions, we consider a situation in which the power supply to the sub-control board S is cut off. Specifically, for example, when power is being supplied to other parts of the gaming machine (such as the main control board M), at least one end of the harness (sub-control board power harness) between the sub-control board S and another board (such as power board E) supplying power to the sub-control board S is unplugged (the connector is separated). Hereinafter, such power interruptions will be referred to as "sub power interruptions," "predetermined power interruptions," or "predetermined power interruptions." If the sub-control board S experiences a predetermined power interruption while in game standby and then recovers (power interruption recovery, power recovery), the screen will not transition to the demo screen (Figure 163 (b)) even after the time (predetermined time) that would normally be required to transition to the demo screen has elapsed when no game is in progress.

Figure 163(a) shows an example of the power interruption information screen (also called the "power-on screen," "power-on display," or "recovery screen") that is displayed after power is restored and before transitioning to the demo screen (Figure 163(b)). In the example of Figure 163(a), an entirely black screen is displayed, with the text "Power has been turned on" displayed on the black screen. In addition to this, text such as "Powering on" or "Power-on processing in progress" can also be displayed. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 163(a), meter displays and indicator displays can be displayed alone or together with text displays, so that as the meter or indicator reading increases from 0 to 100%, players and others can be led to believe that the power interruption recovery process (here, power interruption recovery of the sub-control board S) is nearing completion.

If a power outage other than a scheduled power outage occurs (a non-scheduled power outage), when power restoration is attempted, once the processing for power restoration is complete and a predetermined time has elapsed without gameplay in progress, the screen display transitions from the power outage information screen shown in FIG. 163(a) to the demo screen shown in FIG. 163(b). A non-scheduled power outage specifically refers to a situation in which the power button (power switch E10) is turned OFF and then ON, or a situation in which the main power supply (the power supply for the entire gaming machine) is turned OFF and then ON. Before transitioning to the demo screen, a screen display different from the power outage information screen is displayed. An example of a "screen display different from the power outage information screen" is the display of characters or scenes related to the motif adopted in the gaming machine model (the so-called normal screen or normal presentation stage display). Hereinafter, the normal screen or normal presentation stage display, which is a "screen display different from the power outage information screen," will be referred to as the "normal screen." In contrast, in the case of a scheduled power outage, even if the specified time that would normally be used to display the demo screen has elapsed in the case of a non-scheduled power outage, the normal screen continues to be displayed without transitioning to the demo screen (Fig. 163(b)). The power outage information screen (or "normal screen") shown in Fig. 163(a) may also be configured to continue to be displayed. For example, it is possible to display a screen in which the meter display and indicator display remain at 100%, as in the example of Fig. 163(a). Furthermore, to prevent transitioning to the demo screen, it is also possible not to update the timer value for transitioning to the demo screen after recovery from a sub-power outage.

By configuring it as described above, if a specified power outage occurs, the power outage information screen (Figure 163(a)) or the normal screen for the sub-control board S can be maintained even if a specified time has passed without gameplay progressing after power is restored. In other words, this control mode differs between when the main control board M and the sub-control board S start up simultaneously and when only the sub-control board S starts up while the main control board M remains up.

The sub-control board S can detect a power interruption (predetermined power interruption), for example, by having the sub-control board S detect that the power harness has been unplugged. Detecting that the power harness has been unplugged can be done, for example, by detecting the edge of the power waveform (the transition that occurs when power is interrupted) or the rising edge of the power waveform, storing information to that effect (sub-control board power interruption information), and backing up the information. The state of the backed-up information (whether it is "1" or "0") is then checked, and if information indicating a predetermined power interruption has occurred is stored, control is exercised to continue displaying the power interruption information screen (Figure 163(a)) without transitioning to the demo screen (Figure 163(b)), as described above.

The sub-control board S can also detect the restoration of power by, for example, detecting that the power harness has been connected. In this case, just as with the detection of a specified power interruption, this can be done by detecting, for example, an edge in the power waveform or the rising edge of the power waveform. It is also possible to detect that the power harness has been connected by, for example, detecting whether a specified signal level has been obtained.

<Process 2 related to sub-power shutdown (non-display of predetermined screen)>
Normally, when the power supply to the gaming machine is turned on, the display device (here, the performance display device S40) is capable of displaying a predetermined screen after executing the power interruption information screen as described above. As the power interruption information screen, for example, text display, meter display, etc. are displayed on a black screen, as in the example of Fig. 163(a). Furthermore, as described above, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the power interruption information screen is switched to the demo screen (Fig. 163(b)), or before the transition to the demo screen (Fig. 163(b)), the normal screen (not shown) as described above is displayed.

However, if the aforementioned predetermined power interruption occurs and then power is restored to the sub-control board S, the power interruption information screen is displayed on the performance display device S40, and the subsequent predetermined screen is not displayed. The "predetermined screen" referred to here includes the normal screen and the demo screen. As mentioned above, the normal screen is the screen that is displayed after the power interruption information screen and before transitioning to the demo screen. In addition, if there is an input related to the progress of the game, such as operating the bet button, the screen may switch to a different display content. However, in this way, the screen displayed after there is an input related to the progress of the game, may not be included in the "normal screen" referred to here.

By doing this, if a specified power outage occurs, the power outage information screen (Figure 163(a)) for the sub-control board S can remain on even if a specified amount of time has passed since power was restored and no game was in progress. In other words, this control mode differs depending on whether the main control board M and the sub-control board S start up simultaneously when the power is turned on, or whether only the sub-control board S starts up while the main control board M remains on.

Note that while the normal screen and the subsequent demo screen have been given as examples of predetermined screens, for example, only the demo screen may be the predetermined screen. In this case, the screen display will be such that after the power outage information screen (Fig. 163(a)), the normal screen (not shown) will be displayed, but the display will not transition to the demo screen (Fig. 163(b)). In this case, if a predetermined power outage occurs, the normal screen can be left after power is restored. Alternatively, the normal screen may be displayed after the demo screen. In this case (when power is not restored from a predetermined power outage), the screen display will transition as follows: normal screen → demo screen → normal screen → in-game screen, etc.

<Process 3 related to sub power cutoff (stopping door opening sound)>
If the front door DU is opened in a predetermined gaming state where game progress is possible, a door-open error occurs (a door-open error occurs). The "predetermined gaming state" here refers to, for example, a bet waiting state or a state in which the reels are spinning. In this case, a sound indicating that the front door DU has opened (a door-opening sound) is output from the speaker S20. The door-opening sound may be, for example, a sound effect such as "beep beep" or a sound such as "The door is open." Furthermore, if a predetermined power interruption occurs while the door-opening sound is being output, the door-opening sound is stopped and no longer output. If the power interruption is subsequently restored while the door is open (the front door DU is open), the door-opening sound is output again. When the door-opening sound is output again, for example, it may be restarted from the beginning of the audio message or the beginning of the musical melody. It is also possible to resume the sound from the middle of the message or melody at the time of the stoppage with continuity.

In this way, a door open (door open error) can be reported even after power is restored from a specified power outage. Door open detection can be performed on the main control board M or the sub-control board S. Alternatively, it may be possible for this to be performed on both the main control board M and the sub-control board S. The sub-control board S can use the detection results of whether or not a door open error has occurred to detect door open when power is restored after a power outage.

Furthermore, when power is restored after a specified power outage, it is possible to resume output of the door-opening sound, but not resume displaying the effect display device S40. For example, before a specified power outage occurs, a text message indicating that the door has been opened, such as "Door is open," is displayed, but when power is restored, this message can be suppressed. In this case, it is possible to adopt control modes such as displaying only black on the screen and not displaying text indicating that the door has been opened, not transitioning to a demo screen after displaying the power outage information screen, or transitioning to the demo screen but not transitioning to any subsequent screens (e.g., the normal screen). Furthermore, it is also possible to superimpose text or symbols indicating that a door-opening error has occurred on the power outage information screen, the normal screen, or the demo screen.

<Process 4 related to sub-power shutdown (selective error notification)>
When an error occurs, an error notification corresponding to the error is issued. Error notifications include those issued using the payout number display device D270 shown in FIG. 1 , those issued using the speaker S20 (audio notification), and those issued using the effect display device S40 (LCD notification). Error notifications issued by the payout number display device D270 are primarily errors related to the control of the main control board M. Error notifications issued by the payout number display device D270 are issued by displaying characters such as "DO" (indicating a door open error) or "E1" (indicating an inserted medal retention error) on a two-digit seven-segment display. Here, audio notifications and LCD notifications are referred to as "sub-notifications." Furthermore, error notifications issued by the payout number display device D270 are referred to as "main notification." Errors reported by the payout number display device D270 include recoverable errors. In addition, in the case of medal-less reel-type gaming machines, recoverable errors include medal count control communication errors that occur when the main control means (main control board, etc.) detects that it is unable to communicate with the medal count control means (payout control board H), and main control communication errors that occur when the medal count control means detects that it is unable to communicate with the main control means.

If a specified power outage occurs during an error notification, the sub-notification will not be made. Alternatively, if a main notification and a sub-notification are being made, the sub-notification will be stopped, but the main notification will continue. After that, when power is restored from the power outage, the sub-notification will not be restored (will not resume), but the notification regarding the specified power outage (notification regarding the sub-power outage) and the main notification will be executed. In other words, in a situation where power is restored from a specified power outage, some error notifications (such as the main notification) will be made for errors that occurred before the specified power outage occurred, while other error notifications (such as the sub-notification) will no longer be made, and then some error notifications will be made, while another error notification (such as a notification regarding the specified power outage (notification regarding the sub-power outage)) that is different from both some and other error notifications will be made. The "notification regarding a predetermined power outage" referred to here is controlled by the sub-control board S, and includes notification by displaying a power outage information screen on the performance display device S40 when power is restored from the aforementioned predetermined power outage, notification by outputting sound using the speaker S20, and/or notification by lighting or flashing various lamps. Furthermore, by operating the reset switch, it is possible to clear the main error (here, the error that is the main notification) and end the main notification, but the error related to the predetermined power outage (sub-power outage error) will not be cleared and will continue. Furthermore, it is possible to clear the main error even while a sub-power outage error is being notified. In this case, it is assumed that after the "notification regarding a predetermined power outage" has been performed for a predetermined time, control will be performed to sub-notify the sub-power outage error.

Here, examples of main errors include input request errors, payout request errors, settlement (returning the number of bets to the original) request errors, and VL errors (communication errors with the lending unit) related to game progress and counting. These errors are detected in the medal-less slot machine described above (sometimes called medal-less gaming machines, gaming machines, managed gaming machines, or sealed gaming machines). A main error can be considered an error that can be cleared by operating a reset switch. The reset switch can also be considered a switch for clearing main errors.

<Process 5 related to sub power outage (game sound output immediately after power recovery)>
During play, various game sounds are output from the speaker S20. These game sounds include a bet sound, an operation lever sound when the start lever D50 is operated, and a stop sound when the stop button D40 is operated. When a predetermined power interruption occurs, game sounds are not output during the predetermined power interruption. Furthermore, game sounds are output immediately after power is restored after the predetermined power interruption. However, after a predetermined time has passed since power was restored and the power restoration process is completed, game sounds are not output. This allows players to enjoy a game in which game sounds are output immediately after power is restored from the predetermined power interruption. In other words, even if a predetermined power interruption occurs, the main control board M can be controlled as usual. Therefore, by enabling game sounds to be output immediately after power is restored from the predetermined power interruption, the player can enjoy the game for as long as possible. Then, after the specified processing (power-on processing and subsequent initial setting processing, etc.) related to power recovery from the sub (sub-control board S) is completed, the game sound is not output, and it becomes possible to notify of an error related to the specified power outage (sub-power outage error).

In addition, when the above-mentioned game sounds are not output (output is prohibited), the display content of the effect display device S40 may be a power interruption information screen or a normal screen (including the screen displayed when an input related to game progress is made). It may also be a display screen that notifies the user that an error has occurred.

<Process 6 related to sub power cutoff (disabling main operation)>
Regarding the main operation when a predetermined power outage occurs, the following control mode can be adopted: The main operation is enabled during the sub power outage (predetermined power outage). Furthermore, the main operation is disabled for a predetermined period after the sub power outage is restored (predetermined power outage restoration), but the main operation is enabled after the predetermined period after the sub power outage restoration. The "main operation" referred to here means an operation related to the progress of the game, such as operating the bet button, operating the start lever, or operating to stop the reels, and can also be said to be an operation related to the progress of the game.

By doing this, it is possible to prevent gameplay from progressing even if main operations are performed while the sub-control board S is restored after a power outage. Furthermore, if a sub-control board S is restored while the reels are spinning, it is also possible to continue the rotation of reel M50 and stop the rotation of reel M50 before a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the sub-control board S was restored after a power outage. To prevent gameplay from progressing, the main control board M can detect the restoration of power to the sub-control board S after a power outage and perform control to disable main operations, or prevent normal power supply to the main control board M while the sub-control board S is restored after a power outage (causing a power shortage). Furthermore, in order for the main control board M to detect the restoration of power to the sub-control board S, it is possible for the sub-control board S to send a signal (command) to the main control board M, or for the power supply to the main control board M to return to normal (restore) when power is restored to the sub-control board S.

<Countermeasures against foreign matter in reel-related equipment 1 (size of gaps)>
As described above, the reel unit includes the reel M50, a drive source for the reel M50 (such as a stepping motor used as the reel motor K10 (FIG. 12)), and a reel back lamp. The reel back lamp is provided inside the reel (reel unit) and can illuminate the reel M50 (left reel M51, center reel M52, right reel M53) from the back side of the reel M50. A plurality of (e.g., 20) symbols (FIG. 6) are drawn on the outer periphery (on the reel band MO) of each reel (left reel M51, center reel M52, right reel M53) of the reel M50.

Figure 164 schematically shows a reel unit (designated "RU") as seen from an angle. Figure 165 schematically shows a side view of the reel M50. A reel back lamp (designated "RB") is disposed inside the reel M50. The reel back lamp RB has a back lamp housing (casing) BH. As shown in Figure 165, the back lamp housing BH has multiple rib portions BH10, and gaps BH20, BH30, and BH40 are formed between the rib portions BH10. Figure 164 does not illustrate the rib portions BH10 and the gaps BH20, BH30, and BH40. As shown in Figure 164, the back lamp housing BH faces the reel M50 from one end to the other in the axial direction of the rotation shaft of the reel M50. The left and right ends of the back lamp housing BH (left and right when viewed from the front of the gaming machine) face the left and right ends of the reel M50, which is made up of a left reel M51, a center reel M52, and a right reel M53 lined up in the axial direction of the rotation shaft.

As shown in Figures 164 and 165, a guard portion GD is provided in an annular shape on the side of the reel M50 (left reel M51, center reel M52, right reel M53). The guard portion GD is formed in an annular shape on both side surfaces (ends) in the width direction (axial direction of the rotation axis) of each reel (left reel M51, center reel M52, right reel M53) over the entire circumferential direction (rotation direction). The guard portion GD forms a wall extending in the radial direction (direction toward the axis) of the reel M50. The height GD10 of the wall formed by the guard portion GD is constant over the entire circumference of each reel (left reel M51, center reel M52, right reel M53). Furthermore, the height GD10 of the wall formed by the guard portion GD is, for example, the equivalent of several medals (e.g., 1 to 6 medals) of the thickness M2 of the medal (game medal) (e.g., 1.6 mm if the diameter is 25 mm, or 1.7 mm if the diameter is 30 mm). Specifically, the height GD10 of the wall formed by the guard portion GD can be set within the range of 1.6 mm (1.6 mm x 1 medal) to 10.2 mm (1.7 mm x 6 medals). Furthermore, instead of using the medal thickness M2 as the standard, it is also possible to use the diameter of a game ball (pachinko ball) (11 mm) as the standard and set the height GD10 of the wall formed by the guard portion GD to 11 mm or more.

As shown in Figure 165, the guard portion GD faces the gaps BH20, BH30, and BH40 in the back lamp housing BH. The gaps BH20, BH30, and BH40 are exposed through the side of the reel M50. As shown in Figure 165, when the reel M50 is viewed from the side, portions of the gaps BH20, BH30, and BH40 in the back lamp housing BH are hidden by the guard portion GD, but other portions of the gaps BH20, BH30, and BH40 are exposed and not hidden by the guard portion GD. In Figure 165, the width (exposed width) of the exposed portions of the gaps BH20, BH30, and BH40 is indicated by the symbol BW10. This exposed width BW10 is the width of the gaps BH20, BH30, and BH40 in the back lamp housing BH in the direction corresponding to the radial direction of the reel M50. Additionally, the symbols BW20, BW30, and BW40 in FIG. 165 indicate the lengths (exposed lengths) of the individual gaps BH20, BH30, and BH40. As shown in FIG. 165, when the reel M50 is viewed from the side, the gaps BH20, BH30, and BH40 appear as approximately rectangular (or trapezoidal, arc-shaped, etc.) holes having exposed width BW10 and exposed lengths BW20, BW30, and BW40. If the gaps BH20, BH30, and BH40 are trapezoidal, for example, the exposed lengths BW20, BW30, and BW40 may vary depending on the measurement position. In such cases, the exposed lengths BW20, BW30, and BW40 can be determined, for example, as the length of the upper base or the lower base of the trapezoid, or the length of a position between the upper and lower bases (such as an arbitrary position or an intermediate position).

In the example of Figure 165, the exposed width BW10 is common to multiple (here, three) gaps BH20, BH30, and BH40, but the exposed lengths (lengths corresponding to the circumferential direction of the reel M50, symbols omitted) are different. In Figure 165, the symbol for the exposed width BW10 is shown for only one gap (gap BH20). However, this is not limited to this, and for example, the exposed width BW10 may be different among the gaps BH20, BH30, and BH40. In this case, the largest exposed width can be set as the exposed width BW10. Furthermore, the exposed lengths (lengths corresponding to the circumferential direction of the reel M50, symbols omitted) for the gaps BH20, BH30, and BH40 may be common to each other.

In gaming machines, many screws (hereinafter referred to as "screws SC") such as those shown in Figure 79(b) are used to attach various parts. The screws SC used in the reel unit RU can be called, for example, "reel screws" or "reel screws." The exposed width BW is configured so that the following relationship holds between it and the dimensions of each part of the screw SC. For example, the longitudinal dimension C (length C) of the screw SC, the exposed width BW10, and the dimension E (width E) of the head of the screw SC are configured so that the relationships BW<C and BW>E hold. An example of the screw width E is 4 mm, and an example of the length C is 10 mm.

By configuring it in this way, the exposed width BW10 is narrower than the screw SC. Therefore, if the screw SC becomes loose for some reason, the loose screw SC (foreign object) can be prevented from passing through the gaps BH20, BH30, and BH40 and entering the inside of the back lamp housing BH. As a result, the screw SC can be prevented from blocking the light from the reel back lamp and casting a shadow of the screw SC on the reel M50. Here, the imaginary area RB10 shown with diagonal lines in Figure 164 is the area illuminated by the light from the reel back lamp. Furthermore, by configuring it as described above, if the gaps BH20, BH30, and BH40 in the back lamp housing BH are spatially connected to the inside of the reel M50, the screw SC can be prevented from falling into the gaps BH20, BH30, and BH40.

The size of the exposed width BW10 can be determined taking into account not only screws SC but also other potential foreign objects. Potential foreign objects include, in addition to screws SC, gaming medals and setting keys that are inserted into the setting key switch M20 (not shown). It is possible to make the size of the exposed width BW10 smaller than the thickness or width (maximum thickness or width) of these objects. Alternatively, the size of the exposed width BW10 may be larger than the thickness or width (maximum thickness or width) of gaming medals and the setting key switch M20, allowing these objects to enter.

<Countermeasures against foreign matter related to reel-related equipment 2 (friction resistance)>
Assume that a screw SC has entered the reel unit RU. The reel M50 is provided with a guard portion GD. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 166, if a screw SC or the like falls inside the reel M50 (left reel M51, center reel M52, right reel M53), the guard portion GD may prevent the screw SC from being ejected to the outside of the reel M50 even when the reel M50 rotates, making it difficult for the screw SC to be ejected to the outside of the reel M50. FIG. 166 shows the state of reel tape attachment on the reel M50 (here, any of the left reel M51, center reel M52, and right reel M53). The reel M50 is formed by attaching a strip-shaped reel tape LG30 to a framework formed by connecting two ring portions LG10 with multiple ribs LG20. The guard portion GD is formed on the ring portion LG10 so as to protrude toward the center in the radial direction (the axial direction of the rotation axis).

If a screw SC falls inside the reel M50, the screw SC will rest on the inner surface (back surface) LG40 of the reel tape LG30, which forms the bottom of the reel M50. When the reel M50 rotates, the force of the rotating reel M50 (such as centrifugal force or a force tending to move it circumferentially) is transmitted to the screw SC. If the frictional resistance (which may be a coefficient of friction, surface roughness, etc.) on the inner surface LG40 of the reel tape LG30 is high, frictional force is likely to occur between the inner surface LG40 of the reel tape LG30 and the screw SC. Therefore, as the reel M50 rotates, the screw SC also moves upward from the lowest point (the point located at the bottom) of the reel M50 along the inner surface LG40 of the reel tape LG30. To prevent the screw SC from moving, the inner surface LG40 of the reel tape LG30 is smoothly processed, keeping frictional resistance sufficiently low (small).

With the configuration described above, even if the screw SC gets inside the reel unit RU, the guard portion GD will prevent it from escaping. Furthermore, because the frictional resistance of the inner surface L40 of the reel tape LG30 is sufficiently small, even when the reel M50 rotates, slippage occurs between the inner surface LG40 of the reel tape LG30 and the screw SC, and the screw SC remains at the bottom of the reel M50. As a result, even if the screw SC falls inside the reel M50, it can be prevented from rising up to the position of the reel window D160 (Figures 1 and 2), preventing the player from noticing.

It is also effective to define the relationship of frictional resistance between the inner surface LG40 and the outer surface LG50 of the reel tape LG30. For example, the frictional resistance of the inner surface LG40 is set greater than the frictional resistance of the outer surface LG50. Furthermore, the frictional resistance of the inner surface LG40 is set so that a certain level of noise (abnormal noise, friction noise) is generated between the screw SC and the reel M50 when it rotates. The level of this noise can be defined as follows. For example, the situation related to the front door DU is defined as "Situation 1," and the situation related to whether or not a specified sound effect is output is defined as "Situation 2." Then, the result of whether or not the friction noise can be heard (recognized) by a manager or other person inspecting the inside of the gaming machine is defined as the "result." Examples of "predetermined effect sounds" include predetermined background music (BGM) in a predetermined game state (such as AT (assist time), CZ (chance zone), or normal game state), and predetermined operation sounds output when a predetermined operation means (such as the start lever D50, stop button D40, bet button D220, or settlement button D60) is operated. If situation 1 is when the front door DU is closed and situation 2 is when the predetermined effect sound is output, the result is that the frictional sound is drowned out by the effect sound, making it difficult (unrecognizable) for the administrator or the like to recognize the frictional sound. However, if situation 1 is when the front door DU is open and situation 2 is when the predetermined effect sound is output, the result is that the administrator or the like can recognize the frictional sound by listening carefully. In any of these combinations, the frictional sound is drowned out by the effect sound, making it inaudible (unrecognizable) to the player. By doing this, when the sound effect is output when the front door DU is closed (when the door is closed), the friction sound is difficult for the player to hear, so the progress of the game is not interrupted; when the sound effect is output when the door is opened, the friction sound can be heard by the administrator, making it possible to find loose screws SC and improving maintenance.

In addition, in a situation where the door is closing in "Situation 1" and a special sound effect is output in "Situation 2," the manager or the like may hear a friction sound as a "result." The following are examples of combinations of "Situation 1,""Situation2," and "Result."
(1) When the door is closing and the sound effects are being output, a friction noise can be heard.
(2) A friction noise can be heard when the door is closing without any special sound effects.
(3) When the door is opening and the sound effects are being output, a friction sound can be heard.
(4) A friction sound can be heard while the door is opening, without any special sound effects.
(5) When the door is closing and the special sound is being output, no friction noise can be heard.
(6) When the door is closing and there is no special sound, no friction noise is heard.
(7) When the door is open and the sound effects are on, no friction noise is heard.
(8) When the door is opening and there is no special sound, no friction noise is heard.
Here, "door open" means that the front door DU is open, and "door closed" means that the front door DU is closed. Also, "effect sound output" means a state in which effect sounds are output, and "no effect sound" means a state in which effect sounds are not output. Furthermore, it is possible to set either of these modes depending on the relationship between the volume of the effect sounds (at least some of the effect sounds) and the frictional resistance of the reel M50.

In addition to screws SC, items that may fall into the reel unit RU include game medals and setting keys. The inner surface LG40 of the reel tape LG30 is processed to provide sufficient frictional resistance to allow these items (foreign objects) to slide smoothly, preventing them from reaching the height of the reel window D160 (Figures 1 and 2).

<Countermeasures against foreign matter related to reel-related equipment 3 (travel distance of foreign matter)>
The frictional resistance on the inner surface LG40 of the reel tape LG30 can be determined based on the movement distance of foreign objects such as screws SC. For example, it is possible to prevent screws SC from moving into the illumination range of the backup lamp even when the reel rotates with the screws SC stuck in the reel unit RU. In this case, it is possible to set the frictional resistance on the inner surface LG40 to a level that generates sufficient slippage between the screws SC and the reel M50 so that the screws SC do not reach the height of the reel window D160 (FIGS. 1 and 2) regardless of whether the rotation speed of the reel M50 is at the start of rotation, acceleration, or constant speed. More specifically, the reel tape LG30 is processed so that the frictional resistance on the inner surface LG40 of the reel tape LG30 is such that the movement amount of the screws SC during rotation of the reel M50 (average movement amount over multiple experiments) is, for example, equal to or less than the amount of two designs (two designs, two designs) based on the design drawn on the reel tape LG30. This amount of movement is sufficient to prevent the screw SC from reaching the reel window D160. Note that "two symbols" or "two symbols" may refer to the length (arc length) of the circumference of the reel M50 divided by the number of symbols (e.g., 20). It may also refer to the length (arc length) from one end to the other end of two adjacent (consecutive) symbols in the circumferential direction. Furthermore, when the center of a certain symbol is directly below the center (spindle) of the reel M50 and the screw SC moves two symbols forward, it can be considered that a movement of "two symbols" has occurred. Furthermore, even when the center of a certain symbol is directly below the center (spindle) of the reel M50 and the screw SC moves two symbols forward, the screw SC will not reach the lower end of the illumination range of the backup lamp.

By doing this, even if the screw SC is pulled up to the height of the reel window D160 (Figures 1 and 2) as the reel M50 rotates, the screw SC will not reach the bottom end of the illumination range of the back lamp. This prevents the screw SC itself from being seen by the player, and prevents the shadow of the screw SC, etc., illuminated by the light of the reel back lamp, from being cast on the reel M50. This also prevents the player from noticing that a foreign object such as the screw SC is present in the reel unit RU.

<Countermeasures against foreign matter related to reel-related equipment 4 (volume of abnormal noise)>
It is conceivable to establish standards for the volume of the sound generated by friction between the inner surface LG40 of the reel tape LG30 and the screws SC, etc. For example, the volume of the sound generated by friction between the screws SC, etc. is set to be lower than the volume of the motor drive sound (here, the drive sound of the reel motor K10). For example, if the motor drive sound is approximately 80 dB, the volume of the sound generated by friction is set to approximately 70 dB. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from noticing that a foreign object such as the screws SC is present in the reel unit RU.

(summary)
Based on the configurations shown in the above embodiments, the following concepts can be extracted (listed): However, the concepts listed below are merely examples, and these listed concepts may of course be combined or separated (superordinated), and concepts based on further configurations shown in the above embodiments may also be added to these concepts.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (F1) is
A housing body (such as housing body KM),
a front door (such as a front door DU) provided on the housing body in an openable and closable manner;
a power cord (such as a power cord DK) used to supply power;
This is a gaming machine characterized in that the maximum length of the width of the power cord is larger than at least a portion of the gap (such as gap SK) formed between the cabinet body and the front door.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (F2) is
A housing body (such as housing body KM),
a front door (such as a front door DU) provided on the housing body in an openable and closable manner;
a power cord (such as a power cord DK) used to supply power;
This gaming machine is characterized in that at least one of the cabinet body and the front door is provided with an inclined portion (escape recess KM14, inclined portion KM18, etc.) that prevents the position and/or posture of the power cord from becoming stable when the power cord comes into contact with it.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (F3) is
A housing body (such as housing body KM),
a front door (such as a front door DU) provided on the housing body in an openable and closable manner;
a main body side board (such as a main control board M) that is a board provided on the main body side;
a front door side board (such as a sub-control board S) that is a board provided on the front door side;
a board connection wiring (such as a harness HN) connected to the housing body board and the front door board;
a protective member (such as a hook tube HT) that is wound around at least a conductor portion (such as a conductor portion of a harness HN) of the board connection wiring to protect the conductor portion,
The length of the protective member is
This gaming machine is characterized in that the protective member is long enough to face the gap (such as gap SK) between the cabinet body and the front door regardless of the position to which it is moved along the board connection wiring.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (F4) is
A housing body (such as housing body KM),
a front door (such as a front door DU) provided on the housing body in an openable and closable manner;
a main body side board (such as a main control board M) that is a board provided on the main body side;
a front door side board (such as a sub-control board S) that is a board provided on the front door side;
a board connection wiring (such as a harness HN) connected to the housing body board and the front door board;
holding members (such as a first clamp CP10 and a second clamp CP12) that hold conductor portions of the board connection wiring (such as conductor portions of the harness HN);
The gaming machine is characterized in that the holding member regulates displacement of the conductor portion.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (F5) is
A housing body (such as housing body KM),
a front door (such as a front door DU) provided on the housing body in an openable and closable manner;
a main body side board (such as a main control board M) that is a board provided on the main body side;
A front door side board (such as a sub-control board S) that is a board provided on the front door side;
a board connection wiring (such as a harness HN) connected to the housing body board and the front door board;
holding members (such as a first clamp CP10 and a second clamp CP12) that hold conductor portions of the board connection wiring (such as conductor portions of the harness HN);
The length of the substrate connection wiring is
This gaming machine is characterized in that the board connection wiring is of a length that will not enter into the gap (such as gap SK) between the cabinet body and the front door even when pulled toward the gap when released from the holding member.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (G1) is
A main control board (such as a main control board M),
a sub-control board (such as a sub-control board S) to which a signal from the main control board is input,
When both the main control board and the sub-control board are powered off and then restored, the power off information screen is switched to the demo screen,
This gaming machine is characterized in that when a predetermined power outage occurs in which only the sub-control board, out of the main control board and the sub-control board, is powered off and then power is restored, the power outage information screen does not transition to the demo screen.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (G2) is
A main control board (such as a main control board M),
a sub-control board (such as a sub-control board S) to which a signal from the main control board is input,
In a situation where both the main control board and the sub-control board are powered off and then restored, the power off information screen is switched to the normal screen and the demo screen in that order,
This gaming machine is characterized in that, in a situation where a predetermined power outage occurs in which only the sub-control board out of the main control board and the sub-control board is powered down and power is restored, the power outage information screen does not transition to at least a demo screen.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (G3) is
A housing body (such as housing body KM),
a front door (such as a front door DU) provided on the housing body in an openable and closable manner;
A main control board (such as a main control board M),
a sub-control board (such as a sub-control board S) to which a signal from the main control board is input;
a speaker capable of outputting a door opening sound to notify a door opening error when the opening of the front door is detected,
When the door-opening sound is being output, if a predetermined power interruption occurs in which only the sub-control board among the main control board and the sub-control board is powered off, the door-opening sound is stopped;
This gaming machine is characterized in that when the front door is open and power is restored from the specified power outage, the door opening sound is output again.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (G4) is
A main control board (such as a main control board M),
a sub-control board (such as a sub-control board S) to which a signal from the main control board is input;
an error notification means capable of making an error notification (main notification, sub notification, etc.),
There are multiple types of error notifications,
This gaming machine is characterized in that, during the error notification, a predetermined power outage occurs in which only the sub-control board of the main control board and the sub-control board is cut off, and then power is restored, some error notifications (such as main notifications) are made while other error notifications (such as sub-notifications) are no longer made, and then some error notifications are made while another error notification (such as a notification regarding sub-power outage) different from both the some error notifications and the other error notifications is made.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (G5) is
Multiple reels (such as reel M50) and
A plurality of stop switches (such as the stop button D40),
A start switch (start lever D50, etc.)
A main control board (such as a main control board M),
a sub-control board (such as a sub-control board S) to which a signal from the main control board is input;
A speaker (such as a speaker S20) capable of outputting game sounds during a game;
This gaming machine is characterized in that, in a situation where a predetermined power outage occurs in which only the sub-control board out of the main control board and the sub-control board is powered off and power is restored, game sounds can be output until a predetermined time has elapsed after power is restored, and game sounds are not output after the predetermined time has elapsed after power is restored.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (G6) is
Multiple reels (such as reel M50) and
A plurality of stop switches (such as the stop button D40),
A start switch (start lever D50, etc.)
A main control board (such as a main control board M),
a sub-control board (such as a sub-control board S) to which a signal from the main control board is input,
In a situation where a predetermined power interruption occurs in which only the sub-control board is powered off among the main control board and the sub-control board, operation of the start switch and the stop switch is valid,
In a situation where power is restored from the predetermined power interruption, operation of the start switch and the stop switch is invalid for a predetermined period of time,
This gaming machine is characterized in that after the predetermined period, operation of the start switch and the stop switch is valid.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (H1) is
Multiple reels (such as reel M50) and
A plurality of stop switches (such as the stop button D40),
A start switch (start lever D50, etc.)
a reel back illumination means (such as a reel back lamp RB) disposed inside the reel to illuminate the reel,
The reel back illumination means has a gap (gap BH20, BH30, BH40, etc.) exposed through the side of the reel,
This gaming machine is characterized in that the width of the gap (exposed width BW10, etc.) is smaller than the reel screws.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (H2) is
Multiple reels (such as reel M50) and
A plurality of stop switches (such as the stop button D40),
A start switch (such as a start lever D50),
A reel tape (such as reel tape LG30) with a design is attached to the reel,
The reel tape is formed so that reel screws that have fallen onto the inner surface (such as inner surface LG40) of the reel tape slide down when the reel rotates,
This gaming machine is characterized in that a blocking portion (such as a guard portion GD) protrudes from the side of the reel to block reel screws that have fallen onto the inner surface of the reel tape.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (H3) is
Multiple reels (such as reel M50) and
A plurality of stop switches (such as the stop button D40),
A start switch (such as a start lever D50),
A reel tape (such as reel tape LG30) having a predetermined number of patterns drawn in the circumferential direction is attached to the reel,
The reel tape is a gaming machine characterized in that the amount of movement of the reel screw that falls onto the inner surface (such as inner surface LG40) of the reel tape when the reel rotates is within the amount of two symbols.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (H4) is
Multiple reels (such as reel M50) and
A motor (such as a reel motor K10) that drives the reel;
A plurality of stop switches (such as the stop button D40),
A start switch (such as a start lever D50),
A reel tape (such as reel tape LG30) with a design is attached to the reel,
This gaming machine is characterized in that the reel tape is formed so that the volume of the sound generated by friction with foreign objects (screws SC, game medals, setting keys, etc.) that fall on the inner surface (such as inner surface LG40) of the reel when the reel rotates is smaller than the driving sound of the motor.

P Slot machine, DU Front door
D Door board, D10s Insertion acceptance sensor D20s First insertion sensor, D30s Second insertion sensor D40 Stop button, D41 Left stop button D42 Center stop button, D43 Right stop button D50 Start lever, D60 Payment button D70 Display panel, D80 Door switch (open/close detection device)
D90 Coin shooter, D100 Blocker, D130 Upper panel, D140 Lower panel, D150 Decorative lamp unit, D160 Reel window, D170 Medal insertion slot, D180 Start lamp, D290 Replay lamp, D300 Insertion possible lamp, D200 Credit number display device, D210 Insert number indicator, D220 Bet button, D230 Medal tray, D240 Discharge port, D250 Special game status display device, D260 Keyhole, D270 Payout number display device (push order display device)
D280 AT counter value display device D310 Reel window frame lamp D340 Medal return member (predetermined connecting passage)
D341 medal receiving port D342 medal dropping surface D343 medal non-dropping surface M main control board M20 setting key switch, M30 setting/reset button C main control chip, M50 reel M51 left reel, M52 center reel M53 right reel, M60 AT counter M70 game interval minimum timer S sub-control board, S10 LED lamp S20 speaker, S30 reel backlight S40 performance display device, SC sub-control chip E power supply board, E10 power switch H medal payout device (game medium payout device), H10s first payout sensor H20s second payout sensor, H40 hopper H50 disk, H50a disk rotation axis H60 game medal outlet, H70 release energizing means H80 hopper motor S50 bet button lamp, S60 stop button lamp K reel board, K10 Slot machine motor K20 Slot machine sensor IN Relay board, SB Sub input button KHc High security obstacle counter, YKc-1 Advantageous zone remaining game number counter HS Medal auxiliary tank MW Reel frame, MO Reel band M Main control board CPUMC Microprocessor, SH Performance display device SH10 Identification segment, SH20 Ratio segment M90 Setting display LED
SR1: First predetermined area, SR2: Second predetermined area, SR3: Third predetermined area, CT: Character display (performance display), SF: Dialogue display (performance display)

Claims (1)

A housing body,
a front door provided on the housing body in an openable and closable manner;
a predetermined substrate provided on the housing main body side;
A specific substrate that is a substrate provided on the front door side;
a predetermined harness connected to the predetermined board and the specific board;
a protective member wrapped around a portion of the predetermined harness;
a predetermined holding member that holds the predetermined harness and a specific holding member;
the predetermined holding member is attached to the housing main body side,
the specific holding member is attached to the front door side,
the predetermined holding member is capable of rotational displacement by a predetermined angle based on the attached position,
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific holding member is configured so that it cannot be rotated or displaced by the specified angle based on the attached position.